JP7457443B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Slot machines have been known as one type of gaming machine (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-214434

The problem this invention aims to solve is to improve the performance of the gaming machine.

The present invention solves the above problems by the following solution.
an internal lottery means;
As a game section, there is a normal section and an advantageous section,
a first storage means capable of storing a value related to the number of games played in the advantageous section;
a second storage means capable of storing a value regarding the total number of differences in the advantageous section;
In the normal section, there is no case where it becomes a predetermined gaming state,
In the advantageous section, there may be a predetermined gaming state,
In a game in an advantageous section, it is possible to execute a process of updating a value related to the number of games stored in the first storage means based on the execution of the game,
As a result of updating the value related to the number of games played, the zero flag may become 1,
In the game in the advantageous section, the value related to the number of differences in the game (the "value related to the number of differences" is the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets on game media from the number of game media awarded in one game. The same applies hereinafter) and the second value. and a value related to the total number of differences stored in the second storage means based on the value related to the total number of differences stored in the storage means.
It is possible to perform a comparison process between a value related to the total number of differences and a predetermined value,
As a result of comparing the value related to the total number of differences with the predetermined value, the carry flag may be 0,
If the zero flag becomes 1 as a result of updating the value related to the number of games, it is possible to execute the process of ending the advantageous section,
If the carry flag becomes 0 as a result of comparing the value related to the total number of differences with the predetermined value, it is possible to execute the process of ending the advantageous section,
If the zero flag becomes 1 as a result of updating the value related to the number of games stored in the first storage means, the process of updating the value related to the total number of differences stored in the second storage means and the total difference Comparison processing between numerical values and predetermined values is not performed,
In a game in an advantageous section, if a specific symbol combination for which a replay is given is stopped and displayed and the value related to the number of games stored in the first storage means is updated, the zero flag is not 1. , the process of updating the value related to the total number of differences stored in the second storage means is not executed, but the process of comparing the value related to the total number of differences and a predetermined value can be executed.
It is characterized by
Further, according to a modification of the present invention, the above-mentioned problem is solved by the following solving means (the structure of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses). Note that the invention according to the original claim of the present application corresponds to original invention 63 among original inventions 1 to 63 described later.
A modified example (40th embodiment) of the present invention includes: a production control means (sub-control board 80) that controls production output; and a production button (push button) connected to the production control means,
The performance control means is
A first production control means (sub-main),
It has a second effect control means (sub-sub) that controls image display,
The second effect control means is capable of displaying a predetermined image indicating that the effect button can be operated at a predetermined timing during the effect based on the effect determined by the first effect control means,
The second effect control means is capable of transmitting a specific command to the first effect control means in conjunction with the start of display of the predetermined image,
The first effect control means is characterized in that it enables the effect button based on receiving the specific command.

This invention can improve the performance of the gaming machine.

FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing control of a slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front view illustrating how medals inserted from the medal slot pass through the insertion sensor in the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a voltage drop when a power outage occurs in the first embodiment (A) using a time chart. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the insertion sensor and the passage of medals in the first embodiment (B). FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating on/off of the input sensor using a time chart in the first embodiment (B). FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram when medals are ejected from the medal payout device in the first embodiment (C). 13 is a schematic diagram showing the on (detection)/off (non-detection) state of the payout sensor when a medal is paid out from the medal payout device in the first embodiment (C). FIG. In the first embodiment (C), it is a diagram showing on/off of the payout sensor in a time chart. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view schematically showing a main control board and a board case in a second embodiment. In the second embodiment, (a) is a plan view showing a board case housing a main control board. (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA, showing example 1 of the gate trace. (c) is a sectional view taken along the line AA, showing example 2 of the gate trace. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the flow of processing when a disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub-control board in the third embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, it is a sectional view (schematic diagram) explaining the movement of the stop button of the stop switch, (a) shows a no-load state, and (b) shows when the detection sensor is turned on from off. (c) shows the state in which the stop button is pressed to the deepest position, and (d) shows the state when the stop button is released from being pressed and the detection sensor changes from on to off. FIG. 7 is a time chart showing the relationship between the movement of a stop button and the excitation state of a motor in the fourth embodiment, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. In the fifth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the relationship between power on/off and voltage level, (a) shows power off after main program startup, and (b) shows power off before main program startup. Indicates power off. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device showing the state before the last ejected medal contacts the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device before the last ejected medal contacts the fixed shaft and the movable shaft. FIG. 6 is a plan view of the medal dispensing device showing a state in which the hopper disk has rotated more advanced than in (a) before coming into contact with the movable shaft; In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device showing a state in which the last ejected medal is in contact with the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device that is moved by being pushed by the last ejected medal. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state in which the shaft has moved. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing the state at the moment the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section, and (b) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device after ejecting the last ejected medal. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk is stopped. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the drive signal of a hopper motor, the drive state of a hopper motor, and the discharge situation of medals from a discharge part in 6th Embodiment. A diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the main control board, the driving state of the hopper motor, the detection state of the payout sensor, and the medal discharge timing in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of payout processing in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the flow of payout processing in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 7 is a side sectional view of the slot machine with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the main control board and the sub-control board. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitor on the sub-control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment; ) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitor on the sub-control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment, where (c) shows Example 3 and (d) shows Example 4. 22 )的图26是带框底部前部(部A的部)的图，说明图26是8实施例中，用来说明图中，显著的图。 FIG. 26 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the bottom front portion (part A of FIG. 22) of the slot machine housing with the front door closed in the eighth embodiment, and is a figure explaining the gap between the cabinet In the ninth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the types of special combinations (accessories) and end conditions, and (b) is a diagram showing the types of gaming states and the prescribed number of each gaming state, (c) is a diagram showing a number table for internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1. It is a figure which shows the effect determination table used commonly by non-RT and RT (non-AT) in 9th Embodiment. A figure showing a performance determination table used commonly inside RB and inside BB in the ninth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of the test pattern display of management information display LED in 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of the test pattern display of management information display LED in 10th Embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display board, (B) is a diagram showing management information display LED, and (C) is a diagram showing setting value display LED. It is. 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b and segments A to G and P in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an output port in the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between an interrupt, an LED display counter value, a digit signal, and a segment signal. Further, (B) is a diagram showing an LED display request flag. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, names, etc. of data stored in RWM. 2A and 2B are diagrams illustrating the concept of a difference counter value, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between a difference counter value and an advantageous section, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. It is a flowchart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board. This is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 in FIG. 38. This is a flowchart showing the power return processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG. 38. It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in an 11th embodiment. 42 is a flowchart showing the game start setting process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG. 41. This is a flowchart showing the AT game number counter updating process in step S281 in FIG. 41. 42 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section transfer lottery process in step S283 in FIG. 41. 45 is a flowchart showing advantageous section transition processing in step S347 of FIG. 44. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing in step S355 of FIG. 45. FIG. This is a flowchart showing the AT initial number of games determination process in step S363 in FIG. 46. 42 is a flowchart showing the push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG. 41. This is a flowchart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) due to winning in step S294 in FIG. 41. 42 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG. 41. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example 1 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 50; 51 is a flowchart showing example 2 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 50; 13 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR). 54 is a flowchart showing power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG. 53. FIG. This is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S453 in FIG. 53. 11 is a flowchart showing sub-difference sheet number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment. 57 is a flowchart showing sub-difference sheet number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 56. In the twelfth embodiment, (A) shows the reel condition device and the operation end condition, (B) shows the prescribed number for each RT, and (C) shows the winning number for each winning number. It is a front view, a top view, and a right side view showing an outline of a composition including a reel and a stop switch in a 13th embodiment. In the fourteenth embodiment (A), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (A), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and display end of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing (M_MAIN) in 14th Embodiment (B). In the fourteenth embodiment (B), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (B), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and display end of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing (M_MAIN) in 14th Embodiment (C). It is a flowchart which shows the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) by winning a prize in 14th Embodiment (C). A time chart showing the timing of the start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the 14th embodiment (C). In the fourteenth embodiment (C), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and display end of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing (M_MAIN) in 14th Embodiment (D). In the fourteenth embodiment (D), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and display end of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. A time chart showing the timing of the start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time has elapsed in the 14th embodiment (D). It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 14th Embodiment (E). In the fourteenth embodiment (E), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (E), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It is a front view showing an outline of a configuration including a reel, an operation instruction lamp, and a stop switch in the fourteenth embodiment (F). In the fourteenth embodiment (F), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and display end of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum game time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (F), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and display end of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (G), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum game time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (G), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and display end of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the medal addition process in 15th Embodiment (A). It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the medal addition process in 15th Embodiment (B). A diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the 15th embodiment (C). It is a schematic diagram seen from the front of a medal selector, a chute passage 48, and a chute sensor 49 in a 16th embodiment. FIG. 23 is a front view of a passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment. It is a rear view of the passage forming member in a 17th embodiment. FIG. 23 is a left side view of the passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 85 of the passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing main storage areas of RWM explained in the eighteenth embodiment. 12 is a time chart (Example 1) showing the output timing of external signal 4 and external signal 5 in the 18th embodiment. 12 is a time chart (Example 2) showing the output timing of external signal 4 and external signal 5 in the 18th embodiment. 12 is a flowchart (Example 1) showing external signal output processing in the 18th embodiment. 344 is a flowchart (example 1) showing external signal output processing in the eighteenth embodiment, and is a flowchart following FIG. 344. 23 is a flowchart (example 2) showing an external signal output process in the eighteenth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart (Example 3) showing external signal output processing in the 18th embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine in a 19th embodiment (A). This is a time chart showing the relationship between the setting change state, the setting change completion sound and lamp effect, and one game time described later in the 19th embodiment. It is an external perspective view of the Pachinko gaming machine seen from the front side (player side). It is an external perspective view of the Pachinko gaming machine seen from the back side. It is a block diagram of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining the flow of startup after turning on the power of the Pachinko game machine. 101 is a flowchart showing the setting change process in step S702 of FIG. 100. FIG. It is a flowchart showing the flow of one game in the Pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the board cases (upper case and lower case) and the main control board as seen from the front side. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the board cases (upper case and lower case) and the main control board as seen from the rear side. FIG. 3 is an external perspective view showing a state in which the main control board is housed in the board case. FIG. 3 is a front view of the main control board housed in the board case, viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is a front view of the main control board housed in the board case, viewed from the rear (back) side. 5A and 5B are side cross-sectional views showing the mated state between the upper case and the lower case, in which FIG. 5A shows the provisionally mated state (before sliding movement) and FIG. 5B shows the complete mated state (after sliding movement). 13 is a plan view showing the vicinity of the side wall as viewed from the lower case side in a provisionally fitted state. FIG. FIG. 3 is a plan view showing a state in which the harness is connected to the connector of the main control board. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the harness and its connector terminals in detail. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing an example of hiding lead wires related to starting. FIG. 3 is a side cross-sectional view showing the positional relationship among the upper case of the board case, the cover, the setting key insertion slot, and the setting change (reset) switch. It is a figure showing the pattern arrangement of the reel in a 23rd embodiment. A diagram showing a display window, valid lines, etc. in the 23rd embodiment. It is a diagram (1) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payouts, etc. in the 23rd embodiment. It is a diagram (2) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 3 shows the winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the 23rd embodiment. It is a diagram (4) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payouts, etc. in the 23rd embodiment. It is a diagram (5) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payouts, etc. in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure (6) showing the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure (1) showing a condition device and a winning combination in a 23rd embodiment. It is a diagram (2) showing a condition device, winning combination, etc. in a 23rd embodiment. It is a diagram (3) showing a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in a 23rd embodiment. FIG. 4 shows the condition devices and winning roles in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure showing the number table (non-RT) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number table (RT1) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the position number table (while 1BB is operating and RB is not inside) in 23rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the position number table (1BB in operation and inside RB) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the position number table (during 1BB operation and RB operation) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a figure showing RT transition in a 23rd embodiment. It is a diagram showing the transition of the main game state in the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram (1) showing the contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram (2) showing the contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 3 shows the contents of the RWM in the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram (4) showing the contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram (5) showing the contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 6 shows the contents of the RWM in the 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a pattern stop signal set (S_IF_SET) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a figure showing suspension acceptance specification table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1) and suspension acceptance specification table 2 ((TBL_ORD_INF1)) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the start of standby performance (M_TARPIC_EXE) in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure showing a reel production data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT) in a 23rd embodiment. A figure showing reel effect execution timer tables 1 to 8 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1 to TM8) in the 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) in a 23rd embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game completion check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S753 of FIG. 139. It is a flowchart showing the process at the end of the main game state game in step S941 of FIG. 148. 150 is a flowchart showing advantageous section end preparation (M_ADVEND_STBY) in step S957 of FIG. 149. It is a flowchart which shows interrupt processing (I_INTR) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows reel drive management (I_REEL_ADM) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) in a 23rd embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) in the twenty-third embodiment. 155 is a flowchart following FIG. 154. It is a figure showing an acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) in a 23rd embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing reel driving pulse update (I_PULSE_INC) in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a figure showing a reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows deceleration start inspection (I_REDUCE_CHK) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the addictive prevention output in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows confrontation production output control in a 23rd embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating volume settings in the twenty-third embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing volume setting in administrator mode in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the hardware structure of a main CPU. 165 is a diagram showing the structure of the ROM and RWM in FIG. 164 in more detail; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the A to F, H, L, and Q registers, and (B) is a diagram showing the structure of the F register. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an instruction, and (B) is a diagram illustrating execution of the instruction. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the type (1) of instructions in the twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the type (2) of instructions in the twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a type (3) of instructions in the twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the type (4) of instructions in the twenty-fourth embodiment. A figure showing the contents of the RWM that stores data regarding advantageous zones (AT) in the 24th embodiment. It is a figure showing the content (1) of RWM in a 25th embodiment. It is a figure showing the content (2) of RWM in a 25th embodiment. It is a figure showing the content (3) of RWM in a 25th embodiment. It is a figure showing definition data (1) in a 25th embodiment. It is a figure showing definition data (2) in a 25th embodiment. It is a figure showing definition data (3) in a 25th embodiment. It is a figure showing definition data (4) in a 25th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an overview of various tables used in the twenty-fifth embodiment. A diagram showing a first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1). It is a diagram showing the first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) (1). It is a diagram showing the first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) (2). It is a diagram showing the first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) (3). It is a diagram showing a second reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2). It is a diagram showing the second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) (1). It is a diagram showing the second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) (2). A diagram showing the second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) (3). It is a diagram showing the third reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3). It is a diagram showing the third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) (1). A diagram showing the third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) (2). It is a diagram showing the third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) (3). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL). It is a flowchart showing reel stop reception check (M_STOP_PIC). It is a flowchart showing the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194. It is a flowchart showing the reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) in step S1033 of FIG. 195. 197 is a flowchart showing table selection (R_TBL_SEL) in step S1043 of FIG. 196. 197 is a flowchart showing 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) in step S1045 of FIG. 196. 197 is a flowchart showing bit count (M_BIT_COUNT) in step S1052 of FIG. 196. It is a flowchart which shows 1 line display judgment (M_LINE_JUDGE). 200 is a flowchart showing designated data acquisition (M_SELDAT_SET) in step S1103 in FIG. 200. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing RB operation management in the twenty-fifth embodiment. It is a figure showing the composition of RWM53 in a 26th embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the symbol control data table (TBL_PIC_DAT), and (B) is a diagram showing the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH). It is a diagram showing the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (1). A diagram showing the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (2). It is a diagram showing the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (3). It is a diagram showing the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (4). It is a diagram showing the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (5). It is a diagram showing the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (1). It is a diagram showing the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (2). It is a diagram showing the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (3). It is a diagram showing the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (4). A diagram showing the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (5). It is a diagram showing the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (1). It is a diagram showing the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (2). A diagram showing the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (3). It is a diagram showing the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (4). A diagram showing the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (5). It is a figure showing the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) (1) in the 26th embodiment. It is a figure showing the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) (2) in the 26th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows main processing in a 26th embodiment. 223 is a flowchart showing the start switch reception process in step S1133 of FIG. 222. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the reel rotation start preparation process in step S1142 of FIG. 223. 223 is a flowchart showing reel stop control in step S1135 in FIG. 222. FIG. A flowchart showing the setting of the pattern array address buffer in step S1165 of Figure 225. 223 is a flowchart showing display determination processing in step S1137 of FIG. 222. In the 27th embodiment, it is a diagram showing example 1 of a symbol arrangement table. It is a figure showing example 2 of a symbol arrangement table in a 27th embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a display window, effective lines, and RWM area in the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a figure showing the pattern arrangement in a 28th embodiment. It is a diagram showing a first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) in the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a diagram showing a second reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) in the 28th embodiment. It is a diagram showing a third reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3) in the twenty-eighth embodiment. A figure showing role definitions in the 28th embodiment. 29 is a flowchart showing a main process (M_MAIN) in the twenty-ninth embodiment. It is a figure showing the contents of RWM in a 30th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 30th embodiment. 239 is a flowchart showing a reel stop acceptance check in step S1312 of FIG. 238. 238. A flowchart showing input inspection in step S1313 of FIG. A flowchart showing the all reel stop check in step S1316 of FIG. 238. It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 31st embodiment. A figure showing the contents of RWM in the 32nd embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a main process (M_MAIN) in the thirty-second embodiment. 245 is a flowchart showing a reel stop reception check in step S1361 of FIG. 244. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing preparation for a step-out test in step S1374 of FIG. 245. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the step-out test in step S1382 of FIG. 246. 247 is a flowchart showing the process of waiting for stop acceptance in step S1387 of FIG. 246. It is a figure showing the contents of RWM in a 33rd embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing each signal input to input port 0 in the 33rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 33rd embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a modification of main processing (M_MAIN) in the 33rd embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing contents (1) of RWM in the 34th embodiment. It is a figure showing the content (2) of RWM in a 34th embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing a stop switch determination table (TBL_STPBTN_CHK), and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a stop acceptance determination table. It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 34th embodiment. 257 is a flowchart showing a reel stop reception check in step S1421 of FIG. 256. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the suspension acceptance check in step S1432 of FIG. 257. It is a diagram showing a stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN). It is a flowchart which shows reel stop reception check in a 35th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch 42, the stop order of the reels 31, the stop display of symbols, and the output of the tenpai sound in the 36th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch 42, the stop order of the reels 31, the stop display of symbols, and the output of the tenpai sound in the 36th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch 42, the stop order of the reels 31, the stop display of symbols, and the output of the tenpai sound in the 36th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 36th embodiment. It is a figure showing the symbol arrangement of reel 31 in a 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (1) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payouts, etc. in the 37th embodiment. FIG. 2 shows the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, payout amounts, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (3) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payouts, etc. in the 37th embodiment. FIG. 4 shows the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, payout amounts, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (5) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payouts, etc. in the 37th embodiment. FIG. 6 shows the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, payout amounts, etc. in the 37th embodiment. FIG. 7 shows the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, payout amounts, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (8) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payouts, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the pattern design combination in 37th Embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (1) showing the condition device numbers, condition devices, winning roles, etc. in the 37th embodiment. FIG. 22 shows the condition device numbers, condition devices, winning roles, etc. in the 37th embodiment. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the condition device numbers, condition devices, winning roles, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (4) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (5) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 37th embodiment. FIG. 6 shows the condition device numbers, condition devices, winning roles, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (7) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (8) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 37th embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram (9) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (10) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (11) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 37th embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing non-RT and non-internal. This is a figure showing the number setting table (the winning probability for each winning number) in the 37th embodiment, and is a figure (2) showing non-RT and non-inner inside. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 37th Embodiment, and is a figure (1) which shows RT1 and non-interior. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 37th Embodiment, and is a figure (2) which shows RT1 and non-interior. This is a figure showing the number setting table (the winning probability for each winning number) in the 37th embodiment, and is a figure (1) showing non-RT and inside 1BB. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 37th Embodiment, and is a figure (2) which shows non-RT and inside 1BB. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 37th Embodiment, and is a figure (1) which shows RT1 and 1BB inside. This is a figure showing the number setting table (the winning probability for each winning number) in the 37th embodiment, and is a figure (2) showing RT1 and inside 1BB. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 37th Embodiment, and is a figure (1) which shows 1BB operation and RB not inside. This is a figure showing the number setting table (the winning probability for each winning number) in the 37th embodiment, and is a figure (2) showing that 1BB is in operation and RB is not inside. It is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 37th embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing RT2 (1BB in operation and inside RB). This is a diagram showing the number setting table (the winning probability for each winning number) in the 37th embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing RT2 (1BB in operation and inside RB). It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 37th Embodiment, and is a figure (1) which shows 1BB operation and RB operation. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 37th Embodiment, and is a figure (2) which shows 1BB operation and RB operation. It is a figure showing RT transition in a 37th embodiment. It is a figure showing the instruction function in a 37th embodiment. In the 37th embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of an image display when it is decided to execute AT in a non-RT and 1BB internal game and an attempt is made to win 1BB. It is an RT transition diagram in a 38th embodiment. In the 38th embodiment, it is a time chart showing the relationship between RT transition, the start and end of an advantageous section, and the presence or absence of AT winning. It is a diagram (1) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the 39th embodiment. It is a figure (2) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the 39th embodiment. FIG. 3 shows the winning symbol combinations and payout numbers in the 39th embodiment. It is a figure (4) showing the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the 39th embodiment. It is a diagram (5) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the 39th embodiment. It is a figure (6) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the 39th embodiment. It is a figure (7) showing the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the 39th embodiment. It is a diagram (1) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the 39th embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the condition device numbers, the condition devices, and winning roles in the thirty-ninth embodiment. It is a diagram (3) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 39th embodiment. FIG. 4 shows the condition device numbers, condition devices, winning roles, etc. in the thirty-ninth embodiment. It is a diagram (5) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 39th embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram (6) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 39th embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (7) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 39th embodiment. It is a figure showing the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (1) showing the specified number "2" during non-RT and non-internal. It is a figure showing the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (2) showing the specified number "2" during non-RT and non-internal. It is a figure showing the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (1) showing the specified number "3" during non-RT and non-internal. It is a figure showing the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (2) showing the specified number "3" during non-RT and non-internal. This is a figure showing a number setting table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (1) showing the specified number "3" within RT1 and 1BBB. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 39th Embodiment, and is a figure (2) which shows the specified number "3" in RT1 and 1BBB. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 39th Embodiment, and is a figure (1) which shows the regulation number "3" in non-RT and 1 BBA. It is a figure showing the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (2) showing the specified number "3" in non-RT and 1BBA. It is a figure showing the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (1) showing the specified number "2" in non-RT and 1BBA. It is a figure showing the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (2) showing the specified number "2" in non-RT and 1BBA. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 39th Embodiment, and is a figure (1) which shows the specified number "2" in RT1 and 1BBB. This is a figure showing the number setting table (the winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (2) showing the specified number "2" within RT1 and 1BBB. It is a figure showing the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (1) showing the specified number "3" during RBA operation. This is a figure showing a number setting table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (2) showing the specified number "3" when the RBA is in operation. It is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing the specified number "3" during RBB operation. It is a figure showing the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (2) showing the specified number "3" during RBB operation. It is a figure showing RT transition in a 39th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start time process by main game state in 39th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows all stop processing by main game state in 39th embodiment. 338 is a flowchart showing advantageous section clear counter management processing in step S2615 of FIG. 337. 12 is a time chart showing an example of a slot machine in which push buttons are effectively managed using a timer in the 40th embodiment. 12 is a time chart showing an example of a slot machine in which push buttons are effectively managed using feedback commands in the 40th embodiment. It is a time chart (Example 1) showing push button effective management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. It is a time chart (Example 2) showing push button effective management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. It is a time chart (Example 3) showing push button effective management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. It is a time chart (Example 4) showing push button effective management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

In this specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
“Bet” refers to betting medals (gaming media) in order to play a game. To bet on medals, the player either inserts actual medals into the medal slot 47 or operates the bet switch 40 to bet on credited (accumulated) medals.
On the other hand, "credit (also referred to as "storage")" refers to the storage of medals inside the slot machine 10, unlike the above-mentioned "bet". In this specification, "credit" is used in a meaning that does not include "bet."
Furthermore, "insertion" refers to betting or crediting medals.
Further, the "regular number" refers to the number of bets that can be started (executed) in the game. For example, in a game where the specified number is "2" or "3", the game can be started with either the bet number "2" or "3", and the game cannot be played with the bet number "1".
Note that for convenience of explanation, the "prescribed number" may be referred to as the "bet number".
On the other hand, the term "number of bets" may refer to something other than the "specified number." For example, in a game with a specified number of "2" or "3", when one medal is inserted (before the game starts), the bet number is "1" (the number bet at that time).

"Care" means that the player inserts medals from the medal slot 47 (described later).
"Care bet" means that the player bets the medals by taking care of them from the medal slot 47.
"Care credit" means that the player credits the medals (adds credits) by taking care of the medals from the medal slot 47.
“Bet medal” refers to a medal that has been bet on.
"Reserved medals" refer to medals that have been credited (reserved).

A "storage bet" is a bet by which a player operates the bet switch 40 (described later) to place a part or all of the credited medals within the bettable range for the game in order to play the game. It means to do something.
"Automatic bet" refers to automatically betting the number of medals bet in the previous game by the control processing of the slot machine 10 when a replay wins.
Here, the fact that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed (meaning that it has stopped on the active line; the same applies hereinafter) is referred to as "winning a small winning combination". On the other hand, the "Regulations Concerning Certification and Type Testing of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as the "Rules")" stipulates that when a symbol combination corresponding to replay is displayed in a stopped state, a conditional device related to replay is activated. This is interpreted as not "winning". However, in the present application (this specification, etc.), replays are also treated as one of the winning combinations (replay winning combinations), and the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying may be referred to as "replay winning."
“Settlement” refers to paying out bet medals and/or stored medals to the player. In this embodiment, the payment process is executed when the payment switch 43 (described later) is operated.

"Payout" refers to paying out medals to the player based on the winning combination, or paying out medals based on the above-mentioned settlement. When paying out medals to a player based on a winning combination, the medals are stored as credits (adding the stored medals, in other words, updating the electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described later)), and paying out. This includes both dispensing actual medals from a mouth (not shown). The payout of medals is controlled so that, for example, "50" medals are credited as a limit number, and medals in excess of "50" are actually paid out to the player.
Note that "payout" may also be referred to as "granting." Therefore, the "number of payouts" may be referred to as the "number of grants."

In this embodiment, the "game medium" is a medal, but in the case of an enclosed (ECO) game machine, for example, electronic information (electronic medals, electronic data) is used as the game medium. Note that, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, the "electronic information" is converted into electronic information corresponding to the amount of money, and part or all of the electronic information can be credited to the game machine as game media for playing games on the game machine.
In addition, "gaming media" may also be referred to as "gaming value."

Furthermore, when the game medium is electronic information, "paying out medals" means crediting (adding) to a game medium credit device provided in the game machine. Therefore, "paying out medals" does not only mean actually paying out medals from the hopper 35 (described later), but also crediting electronic information for the payout corresponding to the winning combination to the game media credit device ( It also includes processing for adding (addition).

When the game progresses from "N-1" game, "N" game, "N+1" game, etc. ("N" is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is "N" game. When the number is ``N'', the game with the ``N'' game is called the ``current game''. In addition, the "N-1" game is referred to as the "previous game." Furthermore, the "N+1" game is referred to as the "next game."

In this specification, a numerical value with "(B)" appended to the end of the number (especially 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, numbers with "(H)" appended to the end of the numbers mean hexadecimal numbers. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating "16" in decimal notation is written as "00010000 (B)" in binary notation, and "10 (H)" in hexadecimal notation. Further, a numerical value meaning a decimal number is written as "16 (D)" as necessary.
However, if it is clear whether it is a binary number, decimal number, or hexadecimal number, the final symbols of "(B)", "(D)", and "(H)" may be omitted, respectively. .

The "operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed and/or the operation timing (the timing at which the stop switch is pressed to stop the target symbol on the active line).
In addition, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 refers to a game that has a payout or a large number of payouts in a game where the game result (symbol combination that stops on an active line) is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. Refers to an operation mode in which symbol combinations are stopped, symbol combinations that move (promote) to an advantageous RT are stopped, or symbol combinations that do not shift (fall) to a disadvantageous RT are stopped. The "advantageous operation mode" is also referred to as a correct operation mode or a correct pressing order.

"Games in which the game results are advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42" are, for example, games in which one of the winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. This corresponds to the winning game). Although not shown in FIG. 58, for example, in a game in which multiple types of replays are won (double replay wins; games in which the so-called "push order replay" is won), the RT changes depending on the type of winning replay. This also applies to cases where

The "instruction function" refers to a function that instructs the player how to operate the stop switch 42. The instruction function is, in principle, a function for instructing the player on an advantageous operating mode of the stop switch 42.
In other words, the "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning.
Note that "display" means to visually show the contents of the "instruction", and "notification" means to notify the player of the contents of the instruction. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function."

Further, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be limited to the notification of the most advantageous operation mode. The notification of the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be set as "activation of the instruction function," but the notification of any operation mode including the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be set as "instruction function activation." It may also be referred to as "operation".
For example, if the pressing order bells shown in winning numbers "3" to "8" in FIG. However, instead of this, it is assumed that depending on the order of pressing, there will be either 1, 3, 4, 10, or a missed prize (non-winning).
Here, notifying the pressing order for winning a 10-card combination is notifying an advantageous operating mode of the stop switch 42, and of course corresponds to "operation of an instruction function."
On the other hand, notifying the pressing order for winning a 1-card, 3-card, or 4-card winning combination may be referred to as "notification of an advantageous operation mode (activation of an instruction function)" or "advantageous operation mode It does not have to be "notice of".

The pressing order for winning a 4-card combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pressing order that does not allow a 10-card combination to win. However, since the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "4", and the difference in the number of coins for the game is "+1", this is an operation mode that increases the difference in number of coins, and is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.
Similarly, the pressing order for winning a 3-card combination is not the most advantageous operation mode since it is the pressing order that does not allow a 10-card combination to win. However, since the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "3", and the difference number is maintained as it is (does not decrease the difference number), this is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation state.

Furthermore, similarly, the pressing order for winning a 1-card combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pressing order that does not allow a 10-card combination to win. Furthermore, this is an operation mode in which the number of payouts is "1" for the number of bets "3", reducing the difference in the number of coins. However, since it can be said to be an operating mode that does not leave out any winnings, it may not be said to be a disadvantageous operating mode.

In this embodiment, when the push order bell is won, the instruction function is activated to notify the player of the operation mode (correct push order) that will result in the winning combination with the highest payout amount.
However, for example, when the difference counter value (described later) during the advantageous zone approaches the upper limit value ("2400 (D)") but there is still room for the number of remaining plays in the advantageous zone (advantageous zone clear counter value described later), when the push order bell is won, it is possible to announce the push order that will result in, for example, a three-coin or four-coin role, as described above, and to control the difference counter value so that it remains at its current state.

Further, in this embodiment, the operation of the instruction function is limited to one prescribed number. For example, assume that the specified number of instruction functions to be activated is set to "3". In this case, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3" during AT, when the game is started with a bet number of "3" and the push order bell is won, the instruction function can be activated. On the other hand, when the game is started with the bet number "2", the instruction function cannot be activated even if the push order bell is won.

The "gaming section" includes a "normal section (non-advantageous section)" and an "advantageous section." In addition, the No. 5.9 machines had a "waiting section" (a gaming section that won the advantageous section lottery but has not yet transitioned to the advantageous section), but under the current No. 6 machine rules, the "waiting section" etc. is not provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and game sections other than the normal section and the advantageous section may be provided.
"Normal section" refers to signals related to the instruction function, specifically the press order instruction number and winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct press order), which will be described later, to the peripheral board (for example, the sub control board 80). ), which is a game period that does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (no processing related to the instruction function is executed). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to the lottery of winning combinations, it is also possible to determine whether or not to move to an advantageous section (by lottery, etc.).

In the normal section, the instruction function must not be activated, so the push order instruction information cannot be displayed on a predetermined display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and the instruction function Since the signal related to this is not transmitted to the peripheral board, the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 cannot display (notify) an advantageous operation mode.

On the other hand, the "advantageous section" is a game section that has performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be activated). It refers to a game section in which a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that the content (operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section where the instruction function can be activated (the instruction function may be activated), that is, a game section where the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (or may be displayed).
However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output an effect that is contrary to the contents of the instruction given by the main control board 60 or the signal related to the received instruction function.

Moreover, even if the advantageous section is a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, there is no need to activate the instruction function.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, in a game where the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the instruction function may be always operated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
AT (notification gaming state) is a gaming state in which the operating mode of the stop switch 42 is notified in a game where the gaming result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operating mode of the stop switch 42. Therefore, AT is always during the advantageous section and is never performed during the non-advantageous section.

Further, in a game where the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantage/disadvantage in the game result, the AT may always notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (at 100%), but the AT may notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 at all times (at 100%), In order to keep the game within the range defined by the rules, it is conceivable not to notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 even if the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
For example, if the difference counter approaches the upper limit value during AT, but the number of AT games still remains, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 will not be notified temporarily in order to prolong the life of AT. (not activating the instruction function) is also conceivable.

Furthermore, various settings can be made regarding the relationship between the advantageous section and the AT. For example, the first option is to set "advantageous section=AT". In this case, winning in the advantageous section and winning in AT are equivalent. Then, AT starts from the first game in the advantageous section. Further, AT ends at the end of the advantageous section.

A second method is to set "AT≠advantageous section".
In this case, simply moving to an advantageous section will not satisfy the AT start (execution) conditions, and on the condition that it is in an advantageous section, whether or not to execute AT is determined by lottery etc. When it is decided to execute the AT, the AT may be executed until a predetermined termination condition for the AT is satisfied. In addition, if it is non-AT when moving to the advantageous section, for example, the main game state may be set to the normal section, omen, CZ (chance zone (period where it is easy to win AT)), etc.

When transitioning to a premonition after transitioning to an advantageous zone, the game may always transition to a real premonition, and transition to the AT after a predetermined number of plays of the real premonition is completed. Alternatively, at the time of transition to an advantageous zone or after transitioning to an advantageous zone, whether the premonition is a real premonition or a false premonition may be determined by lottery or the like, and when the real premonition is determined, transition to the AT may be made after the end of the real premonition. Also, when the false premonition is determined, the advantageous zone may be maintained or transition to the normal zone may be made after the end of the false premonition.
Furthermore, when the AT termination condition is met, both the AT and the advantageous zone may be terminated. Alternatively, the AT may be terminated, but when the advantageous zone termination condition is not met, the advantageous zone may be continued (non-AT and advantageous zone). The same applies when the AT is started at the same time as the advantageous zone.

In addition, the number of plays in the advantageous zone is determined when the advantageous zone starts, and lotteries or the like related to the advantageous zone are not conducted during the advantageous zone.
Furthermore, when the advantageous zone starts, the initial number of plays in the advantageous zone is determined, and during the advantageous zone, a decision is made (by lottery, etc.) as to whether or not to add (add) to the (remaining) number of plays in the advantageous zone.
Furthermore, a specified end condition can be set for the advantageous zone, and when the specified end condition for the advantageous zone is met, the advantageous zone can be ended at that point, even if there are remaining number of plays in the advantageous zone (or remaining number of plays in the AT).

Here, the "predetermined end condition" of the advantageous zone is when the difference counter value described below exceeds "2400 (D)" or when the advantageous zone clear counter described below (number of plays during the advantageous zone) reaches "1500 (D)". When either of these conditions is met, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous zone is met, and the next play will transition to the normal zone (non-advantageous zone). In this case, even if the final play is an AT, the AT will also end at the same time as the advantageous zone ends.

In the advantageous section, an advantageous section display LED (also referred to as a "section indicator") 77, which will be described later, is turned on. The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at all times during the advantageous section, or may be turned on when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied after the transition to the advantageous section.
Here, the "predetermined lighting condition" includes, for example, when the instruction function is activated in a gaming state in which the game is in an advantageous section and the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1". Note that once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, it remains lit during the advantageous section.

In addition, "section Sim (simulation) ball payout rate" means that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed (even when winning the "PB ≠ 1" combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed). If the combination is stopped and displayed) and there are multiple types of symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player (when the push order bell is won, the high bell that gives the maximum payout) is selected. This is the ball payout rate when it is assumed that the display is stopped. In calculating the section Sim ball payout rate, the balls (number of payouts) due to accessory actions (1BB action, etc.) are not included. In addition, in a game that wins a replay, if the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts will be counted as "0", and in a replay based on a winning replay (the next game of the game that won a replay), the number of bets will be counted as "0". It is calculated as "0" and the number of payouts as "x"("x" is the number of payouts in the game). Alternatively, the number of payouts for games that win replays and the number of bets for the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the "gaming state in which the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds 1" includes RT and main game states in which the section Sim ball payout rate is set to exceed "1."
Here, examples of RTs in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1" include RTs with a high replay winning probability.
Furthermore, assuming that CZ (chance zone), AT, pullback sections, etc. are usually provided as the main game state, the main game state in which the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1" is AT.

When the advantageous zone ends, more specifically, in the final play of the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off, for example, during the play end check process described below, or during the play start set process for the next play of the final play of the advantageous zone. When the advantageous zone end condition is met, the advantageous zone display LED flag initialization process described below is executed, and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt process.

Examples of "processing related to favorable zones" include the following processing.
1) Drawing lots for (transition to) advantageous zones 2) Updating (subtracting, clearing) the advantageous zone clear counter
3) Update the difference counter (calculate, clear)
4) Updating the advantageous zone type flag 5) Controlling the advantageous zone display LED 77 (updating the advantageous zone display LED flag)

Further, the "processing related to the instruction function" includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Display of push order instruction information (operation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of game number management type AT (specification that ends AT when the number of remaining games reaches "0"), update the AT game number counter (subtraction, addition, clearing)
4) For differential number management type AT (specification that ends AT when the remaining differential number becomes "0"), update the AT differential number counter (subtraction, addition, clear)

According to the current rules, it is stipulated that both the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed in one gaming state (RT) in one prescribed number, except for the following. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the specified number is "3", the process related to the advantageous section and the process related to the instruction function can be executed, and when the specified number is "2", the process related to the advantageous section and the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed. And so.
However, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to update the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter, regardless of the specified number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result is non-winning (for example, when the winning number is "0" in FIG. 26 or FIG. 58, which will be described later), in other words, in the game when the conditional device is not activated, It is determined that processing related to advantageous sections (advantageous section transition lottery) is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process related to the advantageous section may be executed even if the lottery result is non-winning.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if the lottery result is non-winning, if the probability of non-winning is more than a predetermined value (when the probability is not extremely low; for example, "1/17500" or more), the instruction function is applied. The process (AT lottery process) is made executable.

Furthermore, as a result of executing the advantageous section transfer lottery (processing related to advantageous sections), if the advantageous section transfer lottery is won, the next game will be an advantageous section. Therefore, in a game in which an advantageous section transition lottery (processing related to an advantageous section) is executed and an advantageous section is won, notification of the correct answer pressing order (processing related to the instruction function) cannot be executed.
However, there is no problem in performing the advantageous section transfer lottery (processing related to the advantageous section) and the AT lottery (processing related to the instruction function) in one game. Furthermore, for example, when a specific winning lottery result is obtained, it may be determined to be an advantageous section and AT (without executing the lottery).

The management information display LED (also referred to as "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display device") 74 consists of four LEDs, for example, as shown in FIG. It consists of an LED that displays which of the items it is with a predetermined symbol, etc., and a two-digit ratio segment (LED that displays the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratios of the following five items 1) to 5) at predetermined time intervals.
1) Either the advantageous zone ratio (cumulative) (7U.) or the instruction-included role ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous role ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Ratio of special features (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Ratio of consecutive features (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Role Ratio (Cumulative) (7A.)

For example, when displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative total), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the accessory ratio (cumulative total) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed. Display in the ratio segment.
Here, the "cumulative total" refers to the total sum of numerical values that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, counting is continued until the number of games has reached at least "175,000". When the cumulative total is less than "175,000" the number of games played, the ratio is displayed, for example, by a flashing display, and when it is greater than "175,000" the number of games, the ratio is displayed, for example, by a lighting display. Even after the total number of games exceeds "175,000", the total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
Furthermore, "6000 games" is the total number of games played for 15 sets, where one set is "400" times.

The "advantageous section ratio" refers to the ratio (ratio) of staying in the advantageous section to all gaming sections (non-advantageous section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all the game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section between them is "700", the advantageous section ratio is "70%".
Further, the "instruction-inclusive accessory ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts. In addition, in a slot machine that is not equipped with an accessory, the "instruction included accessory ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
The sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated is counted by the instruction-included accessory counter.

Furthermore, "the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function was activated" is determined based on the operation of the stop switch 42 according to the pressing order displayed by the activation of the instruction function, for example, the winning number " When 10 bells from ``3'' to ``8'' are won, ``10'' is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.
On the other hand, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if one bell is won in the example of FIG. "1" is added to.
Similarly, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) because the stop switch 42 was pressed in a different order from the displayed pressing order, the instruction-inclusive accessory counter is not added to. In other words, the count value from the previous game remains the same.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 26, which will be described later, when the common bell (winning number "3") is won during AT, the instruction function is activated in the same way as when the pressing order bell is won, and the number of acquisitions display LED 78 is pressed. There are cases where forward instruction information (dummy) is displayed and cases where the instruction function is not activated. When the instruction function is activated when the common bell is won, the number of payouts in the game is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.

On the other hand, when the common bell is won and the instruction function is not activated, the number of payouts for the game is not added to the instruction-included accessory counter. However, the total number of payouts will be added to the counter. In this case, the sub-control board 80 may notify the correct pressing order by image or sound.

The "continuous bonus ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the first type special bonus (RB) is activated to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in this embodiment, it refers to "the number of payouts during 1BB operation relative to the total number of payouts."
For example, if the total number of payouts in the number of games played is ``6000'' is ``2000 pieces'', and the number of payouts when the ``Class 1 special bonus (RB)'' is activated is ``500 pieces'', then The ratio (6000 games) is 25 (%).

Moreover, the "accessory object ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated to the total number of payouts. Here, "accessories" refers to the above-mentioned first-class special accessories, as well as second-class special accessories (CB), also referred to as MB (2BB). Second-class accessories continuous operation device. CB ), SB (single bonus) is included.
In addition, in the above five items, if a gaming machine is not equipped with a function corresponding to that item, the ratio segment is displayed as "--" by lighting up.
For example, if "RB (Class 1 special accessory)" is not provided, there is no continuous accessory ratio, so when displaying ratio display numbers "2" and "4", the ratio segment is set to "--" ” is displayed on the display.
As described above, five types of ratios are displayed on the management information display LED 74, but as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 described later, a test pattern is displayed at a predetermined timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. do.

Further, the rules stipulate that the advantageous section ratio and the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio should be 70% or less. Furthermore, it is stated that the ratio of accessories should be 70% or less, and it is stipulated that the ratio of consecutive accessories should be 60% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information is within the legal range.

Note that a gaming machine with a specification in which the advantageous section ratio is 70% or less is referred to as a "7U" type, and a gaming machine with a specification in which the instruction-included accessory ratio is 70% or less is referred to as a "7P" type. A gaming machine with an advantageous section is either of the "7U" type or the "7P" type. In the case of the "7U" type, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the "7P" type, the instruction-included accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed.
In the "7U" type, the ratio of advantageous sections to all game sections must be 70% or less, but in the "7P" type, the total number of payouts due to the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the accessory is It is sufficient to make it 70% or less of the number of payouts, and for example, the entire period or most of the game period may be an advantageous period.

For example, when moving to a non-favorable zone, it is possible to set it so that there is a 100% probability of winning the favorable zone lottery, or to set it so that there is an almost 100% (e.g., about 98%) probability of winning the favorable zone lottery, or to set it so that there is a high probability (e.g., 70%) of winning the favorable zone lottery.
The "7U" type cannot perform processing related to instruction functions (such as AT lottery) by referring to the set value itself, but the "7P" type can perform processing related to instruction functions by referring to the set value itself.
In the twelfth embodiment described later, most of the area within BB2 is within the advantageous zone, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the AT within this advantageous zone.

In addition, the management information display LED 74 can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines as a performance display monitor.
In this case, the management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) is composed of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment, similar to the case of a slot machine (a reel-type gaming machine). It then displays the real-time (during measurement) base value (the "base value" indicates the number of safe balls per 100 out balls) for each "60,000" out balls, and the base values one time before, two times before, and three times before for each "60,000" balls in sequence. For example, the identification segment of the real-time base value is displayed as "bL.", the identification segment of the base value one time before is displayed as "b1.", the identification segment of the base value two times before is displayed as "b2.", and the identification segment of the base value three times before is displayed as "b3.".
In this way, the management information display LED 74 is not limited to slot machines, but is also applicable to pachinko machines.

Hereinafter, one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram schematically showing the control of a slot machine 10, which is an example of a gaming machine in this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a block diagram common to the first to fifth embodiments.
Typical control boards provided in the slot machine 10 include a main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (this does not mean that it includes only those shown in FIG. 1). The appearance of the main control board 50 and the fact that the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 will be described in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10).

1 , a main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress, including operation switches such as the bet switch 40, are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection part to which signals from the operation switches and the like are input, and the output port 52 is a connection part to which signals are transmitted to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, input peripheral devices are represented by arrows pointing from the signals from the peripheral devices to the main control board 50, and output peripheral devices are represented by arrows pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral devices (the same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium that can store (update) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game and the like.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for playing the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (IC with a calculation function) provided on the main control board 50, and executes programs and calculations necessary for the progress of the game. The controller controls the drive and pays out when a prize is won.

Furthermore, an MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and registers is mounted on the main control board 50. Note that the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided outside the MPU in addition to being installed inside the MPU.
Note that an MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is also mounted on the sub control board 80, which will be described later. Note that the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided outside the MPU in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted through the medal slot 47 are sent into the medal selector.
Note that the movement of the medals inserted from the medal slot 47 within the medal selector will be explained later with reference to FIG. 2 and the like.
As shown in FIG. 1, inside the medal selector, a passage sensor 46, a blocker 45, and an input sensor 44 (a pair of input sensors 44a and 44b) are provided (but not limited to these). These are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The medals inserted through the medal slot 47 are first detected by the passage sensor 46.

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the path sensor 46. The blocker 45 is used to permit/prohibit the insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, it forms a medal path that returns medals inserted through the medal insertion port 47 from the payout port. In contrast, when the insertion of medals is permitted, it forms a medal path that guides medals inserted through the medal insertion port 47 to the hopper 35. The blocker 45 is composed of, for example, a switching member that blocks an opening (the opening that leads to the medal return port) formed in part of the medal path in the medal selector to form a medal path for guiding medals to the hopper 35 side, and an actuator for driving the switching member, etc.

Here, the blocker 45 disables the insertion of medals during the game (from when the reels 31 start rotating until all the reels 31 stop and when a winning combination ends the payout corresponding to the winning combination). do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when no game is being played.

In the medal selector, an input sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. In this embodiment, the input sensor 44 is composed of a pair of input sensors 44a and 44b placed apart from each other by a predetermined distance, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since a medal is detected by one input sensor 44a, the input sensor 44 is activated by the other input sensor 44b. It is configured to be detected by Then, it is determined whether or not the correct medal has been inserted based on the timing at which the pair of input sensors 44 are turned on and off, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 also includes a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, (left, middle, right) stop switches 42, and operation switches operated by the player. A settlement switch 43 is electrically connected.
Here, the "operation switch (or simply, "switch")" is used to turn on/off an electric signal based on the operation of the operating body by the player (operator) (receiving external force). It refers to a device (including an electric circuit and/or electric parts), and does not limit the shape of the operating body operated by the player.

When the operating switch is in the OFF state, for example, light from the light emitting element continues to enter the light receiving element (when the light receiving element continues to detect light, the operating switch is in the OFF state). Then, when a player or the like operates the operation switch (the operation body thereof), the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electrical signal indicating that the operation switch has been turned on is transmitted to the main control board 50. Note that, contrary to the above, when the operation switch is in the off state, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and when the light from the light emitting element enters the light receiving element, the operation switch is in the on state. You may.

In this embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 is shaped like a lever (rod) (hence, it is also referred to as the "start lever (switch) 41"), and the operating bodies of the bet switch 40, the stop switch 42, and the settlement switch 43 are shaped like push buttons (hence, they are also referred to as the "bet button (switch) 40", the "stop button (switch) 42", and the "settlement button (switch) 43"). Note that in the fourth embodiment described below, the operating body of the stop switch 42 (the part pressed by the player) is referred to as the "stop button 42a".

Although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operating body of the operating switch and/or around or near the operating body. When the operation acceptance of the operation switch is permitted, for example, the LED corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light, and when the operation reception of the operation switch is not permitted, for example, the LED corresponding to the operation switch is emitted in blue. By emitting red light from an LED or the like, the permission/disapproval state of the operation switch is indicated to the player.

Specifically, for example, when all the reels 31 are rotating and the stop switches 42 can be operated, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit blue light to notify the player that they can be operated. Shown below. When one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to stop. Thereafter, the remaining stop switches 42 become operable only when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the reel 31 that has been controlled to stop has finished, and when the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 (the fourth embodiment) is turned off. Therefore, during that time, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit red light. When the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 ends and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to the stop switch 42 is turned off, the LED of the already operated stop switch 42 is turned off. Although the LEDs of the stop switches 42 that have not been operated yet are still emitting red light, they are caused to emit blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by a player when betting the stored medals for the current game. In this embodiment, the bet switch 40 includes a 1 bet switch 40a for inserting one medal, and a 3 bet switch 40b for inserting three medals (the maximum number, the specified number).
However, this is not limiting, and a bet switch for betting two coins may be provided.

Note that the prescribed number is predetermined, for example, depending on when the accessory is not activated/when it is activated. Specifically, the number is set to 3 when the accessory is not activated, when the SB is activated, when 1BB is activated, and 2 when 2BB is activated, etc. By operating the 1-bet switch 40a twice, it is possible to insert two medals, and by operating it three times, it is possible to insert three medals. Also, when the specified number is 3, you can insert 3 medals at once by operating the 3-bet switch 40b, and when the specified number is 2, you can insert 3 medals at once by operating the 3-bet switch 40b. Two medals can be inserted at once. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated in a state where less than the prescribed number has already been bet, the bet processing is performed so that the number of bets becomes three.

Further, the start switch 41 is an operation switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, right) reels 31, and are operation switches operated by the player to stop the corresponding reels 31.
Further, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) medals bet and/or stored (credit) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Note that in reality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. In this way, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other with a harness or the like, but may be connected via another separate board (relay board, etc.). For example, one or more other boards (such as a relay board) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.

The display board 75 is equipped with a credit number display LED 76 and an acquisition number display LED 78 .
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.

The winning number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the payout number (the number of winnings won by the player) when a winning combination is achieved, and, like the credit number display LED 76, is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be turned off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digits may be turned off and only the lower digits may display "0".

The acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but when an error occurs, it functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error.
Furthermore, the obtained number display LED 78 functions as an LED for displaying push order instruction information (notifying an advantageous push order) in a game that notifies the push order during AT. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquisition number, error details, and push order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that a dedicated LED or the like for displaying the push order instruction information may be provided.
Note that during AT, notification of an advantageous pressing order is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to a motor (stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 and the like of the symbol display device.
The symbol display device includes reels 31 (three in this embodiment) that display symbols, a motor 32 that drives each reel 31, and a reel sensor 33 that detects the position of the reel 31.

The motor 32 serves as a driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control means 65, which will be described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 that is operated when stopping the left reel 31 is a left stop switch 42. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated to stop the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (symbols forming symbol combinations corresponding to winning combinations) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel 31.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one index (two or more indexes may be used). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the circumferential side of the reel 31, and is used to detect whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has rotated once. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment the index is detected can be detected. Furthermore, from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, how many pulses should the (stepping) motor 32 be driven to stop the symbol at the number of symbols ahead, counting from the symbol on the reference position, on the effective line? It becomes possible to identify whether the

The main control board 50 is also electrically connected to a medal payout device. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when medals in the hopper 35 are paid out from a payout port, and a payout sensor 37 for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36.

The medals that are received through the medal insertion port 47 and accepted (determined to be normal) are configured to be stored in the hopper 35 .
In this embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 is made up of a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance apart. When a medal is paid out, a predetermined moving member (a movable piece 39a in FIG. 7 described later) is moved by the medal. The payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off by the movement of the predetermined moving member. Whether or not the payout sensors 37a and 37b have been turned on/off within a predetermined time range is used to determine whether or not the medal has been paid out correctly.

For example, if it is not detected that the pair of payout sensors 37 are turned on even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output an on signal, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.
Note that the details of these operations will be explained later with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8.

When a player starts a game, he or she inserts medals that have been credited in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (accumulated bet) or inserts medals manually through the medal insertion slot 47 (maintenance bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with the specified number of medals for that game bet, a signal is generated at that time and input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described below) receives this signal, it performs a lottery using the role selection means 61 and controls the drive of all motors 32 to rotate all reels 31. In this way, the reels 31 are rotated by the motors 32, and the symbols on the reels 31 are displayed moving up and down within the display window at a predetermined speed.

Then, by pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) receives this signal, it drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 to display the lottery result (internal lottery) of the winning combination lottery means 61. The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed in accordance with the result determined by the means.

Then, the game result of the current game is displayed based on the symbol combination when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on the active line (when the winning combination is achieved), medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out.

Next, the specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following combination lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in this embodiment are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The winning combination lottery means 61 performs lottery (determination, selection) of winning numbers. Here, the "drawing of winning numbers by the prize drawing means 61" is the same as the "internal drawing" in the Entertainment Business Law Regulations (regulations regarding certification of gaming machines and type examination, etc., hereinafter simply referred to as "Rules"). The lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61 is the same as the "result determined by internal lottery" in the rules. Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as "internal lottery means 61" in accordance with the rules.
When the winning number is determined by the prize lottery means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the prize condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition device becomes operable in the game. In addition, the accessory condition device will be determined. Therefore, the winning combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, or the like.

The winning lottery means 61 includes, for example, a random number generating means for lottery (hardware random numbers, etc.), a random number extracting means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generating means, and a random number extracting means based on the random number extracted by the random number extracting means. and winning number determining means for determining the winning number.

The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal notation). The random number is a random number that continues counting in the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle by a counter that counts once every 200n (nano) seconds, for example, and while the slot machine 10 is powered on, the random number is Continue counting.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs by comparing the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with a lottery table to be described later.

The winning flag control means 62 controls on/off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61. In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. When one of the winning combinations is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag for that winning combination is turned on (the winning flag is set). Note that there are two cases of winning a winning combination: a case where there is only one winning combination (single winning) and a case where there are multiple winning combinations (multiple winning).

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects a push order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct push order) based on the lottery result of the winning number by the winning combination lottery means 61 (when a push order bell or a push order replay is won). decision).
The “push order” of the press order instruction numbers selected here means a press order (correct press order) that is advantageous for the player. For example, when a push order bell is won, it refers to the push order (correct answer push order) that makes the higher bell win the prize. In addition, when a replay duplicate win occurs, it refers to the push order that promotes to an advantageous RT or the push order that does not allow the RT to fall to a disadvantageous RT.

In this embodiment, each winning number is provided with a unique push order instruction number.
Then, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during AT, the main control board 50 displays the above-mentioned obtained number display LED 78 with push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically "=*"("*"=1, 2, . . .) information is displayed. In this manner, the function of displaying push order instruction information when a conditional device having an advantageous push order is activated is also referred to as an instruction function.
In addition, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during AT, the main control board 50 controls the sub control board at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined). 80, a command corresponding to the push order instruction number is transmitted.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it displays an image of the correct pressing order on the image display device 23.

Note that the push order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous interval (AT). Therefore, even if a push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the push order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. Note that in the normal section, it is not necessary to select the push order instruction number.

The performance group number selection means 64 selects a performance group number corresponding to the winning number and is to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
Here, the effect group number corresponding to the winning number is determined in advance. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated to determine the winning number, the effect group number selection means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning number of the game, and the main control board 50 transmits the selected effect group number to the sub-control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs an effect related to the winning role based on the received effect group number. Unlike the push order instruction number, the effect group number is selected for each game and transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80.

In addition, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number for that game to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number for that game. However, since the sub-control board 80 receives an effect group number for each game, it is possible to output an effect based on the received effect group number. However, even when the push order bell or push order replay is won, the correct push order cannot be determined from the effect group number, so the sub-control board 80 does not notify the correct push order based on the effect group number. In contrast, during the AT, when the push order bell or push order replay is won, the main control board 50 transmits a push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80. This allows the sub-control board 80 to notify the correct push order based on the received push order instruction number.

The reel control means 65 controls all (three) reels 31 to start rotating when receiving a command to start rotating the reels 31, particularly when detecting the operation of the start switch 41 in this embodiment. .
Furthermore, after the winning numbers are determined by the winning combination lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on/off of the winning flag in the current game, and generates a stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off of the winning flag. is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and the motor 32 is The drive is controlled so that the reel 31 is stopped at the determined position.

For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 controls the reel 31 to stop within the range of the reel 31 stop control so that a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role (a role for which the winning flag is on) can be stopped on an active line, and controls the reel 31 to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to a role other than the winning role (a role for which the winning flag is off) is not stopped on an active line.

Here, "within the range of the stopping control of the reel 31" means within the range of the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the moment the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving symbols (frames)).
In this embodiment, the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed of approximately 80 rotations per minute.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the moment the reel 31 is stopped is set to within 190 ms, except for a specific reel 31 during MB operation (for example, the center reel 31). As a result, in this embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the moment the reel 31 is stopped is set to four symbols, except for a specific reel 31 during MB operation.

On the other hand, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. As a result, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to one symbol.

At the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of stop control of the reels 31 is a symbol that should be stopped on a predetermined active line, when the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the symbol is controlled to stop at a predetermined active line.
That is, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol of the combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on a predetermined active line, the reels 31 will be stopped until the reels 31 are stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, the symbols of the combination corresponding to the winning number are controlled to be stopped on a predetermined valid line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number will stop on the active line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, control is performed so that symbol combinations of winning combinations that do not correspond to the winning numbers are not stopped on the active line (kick-off stop control).
Furthermore, in a game where multiple winning combinations are won (for example, when the push order bell is won), the priority order of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed and the timing at which the stop switches 42 are operated. According to a predetermined priority order, control is performed to stop the drawing of symbols related to the most prioritized winning combination.

The winning determination means 66 determines, when the reels 31 are stopped, whether or not the symbol combination of the reels 31 that has stopped on the active line is a symbol combination that corresponds to any winning combination.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the active line. Specifically, from the condition device activated in the game, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and/or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, a symbol combination that will stop on the active line before the reel 31 actually stops is determined in advance. Or, after the reels 31 have stopped, the symbol combinations that have stopped on the active line are determined in advance.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information (control commands) required for the performance to be output by the sub-control board 80 .
Control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, push order instruction number (only during AT and when a winning number with the correct push order is won), performance group number, RT (game status) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on the winning role, etc.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during the game and while waiting for the game.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) unidirectionally communicates with the sub-control board 80 through parallel communication. Sends information (control commands) necessary for output.
Note that the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used together.

Similar to the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub-CPU 85.
The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the following performance peripheral devices such as the performance lamps 21 as shown in Fig. 1 via an input port 81 or an output port 82. However, the performance peripheral devices are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data etc. that is acquired when the sub-CPU 85 controls the performance.
The ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data, such as those used when conducting lotteries related to performance, as performance data.

The performance lamps 21 are, for example, LEDs, and light up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is met. The performance lamps 21 include back lamps that are arranged on the inner circumference of each reel 31 and illuminate the symbols displayed on the reels 31 (three consecutive symbols visible from above and below through the display window) from behind, fluorescent lamps that illuminate the symbols on the reels 31 from above the reels 31, and frame lamps that are arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and flash when a winning combination is achieved, etc.

Further, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when predetermined conditions are met in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various effect images during the game (correct answer pressing order, effects corresponding to the conditional devices activated in the game, etc.). It displays game information (the number of games played and the number of coins won when the accessory is activated or during the advantageous period (AT), etc.).

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing how the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 pass through the input sensors 44a and 44b, and is a schematic diagram seen from the front. In FIG. 2, the inside of the medal selector is shown so as to be visible. Furthermore, the medals M indicate M1 to M4 depending on their positions. The position M1 indicates a state in which the medal M is placed in the medal placing portion 47b of the medal slot 47 (a state before being released). That is, at the position M1, when viewed from the front, the lowest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M is in contact with the upper surface of the medal placing portion 47b.
In FIG. 2 (and FIG. 4, which will be described later), it is assumed that the entire substantially square portions indicated as input sensors 44a and 44b are the light receiving and emitting ranges (sensor eyes) of input sensors 44a and 44b, respectively. (This is not the housing of the input sensors 44a and 44b.)

Further, the position M2 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M is no longer visible when viewed from the front. That is, the position M2 is a position where the highest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M overlaps with the upper surface of the medal placing portion 47b. For example, if it is assumed that the player releases the medal M when it is at the position M1, the medal M will fall from the position M1. Therefore, at position M2, it is in a state where it has been released from the player's hand and is falling (moving) downstream.
Note that the "upstream side" refers to the medal input port 47 side, and the "downstream side" refers to the input sensor 44b side (hopper 35 side). In terms of the positions of the medals M, from the upstream side to the downstream side, the order is M1→M2→M3→M4.

In the example of FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M when it is located at M2.
Furthermore, the position of M3 indicates the position at the moment (on) when the medal M is detected by the input sensor 44a. Moreover, the position M4 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M is no longer detected by the input sensor 44b (off).

The medal insertion slot 47 is a portion where the player inserts the medal M into the slot machine 10 (medal selector) when betting or crediting the medal M as a game medium. The medal slot 47 includes a medal guard part 47a and a medal placement part 47b. The medal holder 47b has a substantially curved surface (a curvature slightly larger than the periphery of the medal M) extending perpendicularly to the plane of the drawing so that a plurality of stacked medals M (up to about 10 medals) can be placed at the same time. curved surface).

The substantially curved surface of the medal placing portion 47b and the surface of the medal guard portion 47a with which the medals M come into contact (the surface visible in FIG. 2) are formed to intersect substantially perpendicularly.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 2, the intersection of the medal placing portion 47b and the medal guard portion 47a has an opening through which one medal M can flow down. In a state where two medals M are piled up, the medal M does not fall from the opening, but when the thickness is the same as one medal M, the medal M is formed so as to flow down from the opening. For this reason, the player may, for example, place a plurality of stacked medals M on the medal placing section 47b, press the plurality of medals M toward the medal guard section 47a, and increase the pressing force. By weakening it, it is possible to drop the medals M placed on the medal placing portion 47b one by one into the medal selector from the opening.

When a medal M is inserted (released downward) through the medal insertion port 47, the medal M flows down a passage in the medal selector. Inside the medal selector, from the upstream side, a passage sensor 46, insertion sensor 44a, and insertion sensor 44b are provided. Furthermore, the above-mentioned blocker 45 is provided between the passage sensor 46 and insertion sensor 44a (below insertion sensor 44a in FIG. 2).

When a medal M enters the medal selector, it is first detected by the passage sensor 46. The passage sensor 46 is a sensor provided to determine whether there is a medal jam or cheating, and if the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M for a (predetermined) specified time from the time it detects it, and if it no longer detects the medal M after the specified time has passed, it is determined to be normal. In contrast, if the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M even after the specified time has passed after detecting it, it is determined to have a medal retention error. Also, if the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M and then stops detecting it before the specified time has passed, it is determined to have been an illegal passage of the medal M.

When the medal M flows down within the medal passage, it reaches the position of the blocker 45. The blocker 45 is arranged on the lower surface side in the medal passage. When the blocker 45 is in the on state (the output port related to the blocker 45 among the output ports 52 is on), the blocker 45 forms a medal flow path such that the medal M can be detected by the input sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, it has the role of sending the medals M that have been moved from the upstream side to the input sensors 44a and 44b without sending them out of the medal path.

In contrast, when the blocker 45 is in the off state (the output port associated with the blocker 45 among the output ports 52 is off), the blocker 45 moves so as to shift vertically relative to the plane of the drawing in FIG. 2, forming an opening (a pitfall) in the medal passage. As a result, when the blocker 45 is in the off state, the medal M falls from this opening just before reaching M3, and is sent out of the medal passage (M5 in FIG. 2). The medal M that falls from this opening is returned to the medal return port (not shown) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a.

For example, if the specified number of bets for the game have already been placed and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, no more bets or credits can be made for medals, so the blocker 45 is controlled to be in an OFF state. As a result, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal slot 47 in this state, it falls from the opening and is returned to the medal return slot.
On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the opening is blocked by the blocker 45, so the medals M flowing down in the medal passage pass over the blocker 45 and the input sensors 44a and 44b Can be moved to the side.

In this embodiment, the blockers 45 are arranged as shown in FIG. 2, but the arrangement is not limited to this. Regardless of the on/off state of the blocker 45, the passage sensor 46 can detect the medal M, and when the blocker 45 is in the on state, the medal M can be guided to the input sensors 44a and 44b, and , when the blocker 45 is in the off state, it is only necessary that the medal M can be sent to the medal return slot without being detected by the input sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, the blocker 45 may be located between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a.

Further, the passage sensor 46 only needs to be located upstream of the blocker 45, and even if the blocker 45 is in the off state, the passage sensor 46 may be located at a position where it can detect the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47. That's fine. In addition, in FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that it can detect the medal M when it is located at M2, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to arrange the passage sensor 46 so as to detect the medal M when the medal M is moved.

The input sensors 44a and 44b are sensors for detecting the medals M that have passed through the blocker 45, and these two sensors are installed at a predetermined distance apart. First, when the medal M reaches the position M3, the upstream insertion sensor 44a can detect the medal M (turns from OFF to ON). When the medal M further flows down, the input sensor 44b detects the medal M (turns on from off). By determining the on/off timing of these two input sensors 44a and 44b, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal M is normal. When the medal M reaches the position M4, it is no longer detected by the input sensors 44a and 44b. The medals M that have passed through the input sensors 44a and 44b are sent to the hopper 35.

In FIG. 2, the medal selector is designed as follows.
First, time T2 is set as the time from the moment when medal M reaches position M2, i.e., when the medal selector is viewed from the front, when medal M becomes invisible, to the moment when medal M reaches position M4, i.e., the position at which medal M is no longer detected by insertion sensor 44b (the movement trajectory is shown by a dotted line in Figure 2). Note that this is the value when medal M is released from hand (at an initial speed of "0") when medal M is located at M1 and thrown downward. Therefore, the speed when medal M is located at M2 exceeds "0".

Further, the acceleration of the medal M increases as it moves further downward from the position M2. On the other hand, in FIG. 2, an impact member (not shown in FIG. 2) is provided at a portion where the medal path curves from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. When the medal M comes into contact with this impact member, the speed of the medal M is reduced and the medal M moves toward the input sensors 44a and 44b.
Then, the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M3 (the moment when it is detected by the input sensor 44a) to the moment when the medal M is positioned at M4 (the moment when it is no longer detected by the input sensor 44b) is set as time T3. .

<First embodiment (A)>
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a time chart for explaining the first embodiment (A) of this embodiment.
FIG. 3 shows the voltage level when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned off (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off or a power outage occurs).
In FIG. 3, the voltage when the power supply is normally turned on is defined as the supply level V0. At the supply level V0, the slot machine 10 operates normally.

FIG. 3 shows an example in which a power outage occurs (an event in which power supply is cut off) occurs at time S11. In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs, the voltage drops to the power outage detection level V1 at time T0.
The time T0 from when a power outage occurs (time S11; supply level V0) to when a power outage is detected (time S12; power outage detection level V1) is at least 20 interrupts (1 interrupt time 2.235 ms x 20 Interrupt = 44.7 ms) or more.
On the main control board 50, a voltage monitoring device (not shown) (power-off detection circuit) is provided. Then, when the power supply voltage becomes lower than a predetermined value, power cutoff detection level V1, a power cutoff detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51, and by detecting whether or not the signal is input, the power supply is turned off. Detect disconnection.

When the voltage further decreases from the power-off detection level V1 and becomes less than the driving voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 cannot be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
The example in FIG. 3 shows an example in which the voltage level reaches the driving voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55 at time S13, and then decreases to Low. Since the main control board 50 cannot execute the power-off process when the voltage becomes less than the drive voltage limit V2, when the power-off occurs at time S11, the main control board 50 is configured so that the power-off process can be completed at least by time S13. It is set to .

Furthermore, the detection of a power outage is executed in an interrupt process that is executed every 2.235 ms, but when a power outage is detected in two consecutive interrupts, the power outage process is executed in the next interrupt process. Therefore, in FIG. 3, time S12 is the timing at which it is determined that the voltage is below the power-off detection level V1 in two consecutive interrupt processes, and it is detected that a power-off has occurred. Then, in the next interrupt processing, power-off processing is executed.
Note that in the interrupt processing, the following processing is executed. First, it is determined whether or not a power outage is detected, and when a power outage is detected, the process proceeds to power outage processing (without proceeding to normal interrupt processing). In the power-off process, first, the output port 52 is turned off. The blocker 45 is turned off by the process of turning off the output port 52. Furthermore, processing for saving the stack pointer, setting the power-off processing completed flag (a flag for determining whether or not the power was turned off normally), processing for executing the checksum of the RWM53, processing for inhibiting writing of the RWM53, etc. After being executed sequentially, it enters a reset wait state (loop processing state). By design, this reset wait state is a state in which no processing is performed.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3, the power-off process is executed in the next interrupt process after the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected (time S12), and the blocker 45 is turned off.
Note that the power-off process is not limited to being executed in the interrupt process following the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected, and the power-off process may be executed within the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected. In this case, "T1=S12-S11".

On the other hand, FIG. 3 also shows the medal positions (M2, M4) after the medals are inserted. In FIG. 2, it is assumed that the player releases his/her hand from the medal M while the medal M is at the position M1. Note that in this case, the medal M falls at an initial speed of "0". Thereby, the medal M is released into the medal selector. In FIG. 3, the time S11 when the power is cut off is made to coincide with the time when the medal M reaches the position M2.

As shown in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when it is positioned at M4 is defined as T2, but similarly in FIG. 3, time T2 has elapsed from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 It is assumed that later, the medal M is located at M4.
In this case, the present embodiment is designed to satisfy the relationship "T2>T1".

Therefore, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process is executed before the medal M reaches M4, and the insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M. Therefore, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the medal M is sent to the medal return slot (lower tray) without being detected by the input sensor 44b. Therefore, the medal M does not normally pass through the input sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the medal M will be swallowed, but after the power is cut off (after time S11), the process of adding "1" to the medal M (adding "1" to the bet or credit) is executed. Not done. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that a bet or credit process will be executed after a power outage occurs.

For example, in the case where a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when the time T1 has elapsed (during power cutoff processing), when the medal M is located just before M4 in FIG. (after the medal has passed the position of M3), the medal M is detected by the input sensor 44a, but is not detected by the input sensor 44b, and the power is turned off.
Further, in the case where a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when time T1 has elapsed (during power cutoff processing), the medal M is located upstream from the position M3 in FIG. At that time, the medal M is not detected by either the input sensor 44a or the input sensor 44b, and the power is turned off.

Further, in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when the medal M is positioned at M3 is defined as time T2'.
In this case, it is preferable to design to satisfy the relationship "T2'>T1".
In the case where the above relationship is designed, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the blocker 45 is turned off by the time when the medal M reaches M3 as the power cut-off process is executed. ing. Therefore, the medal M is sent out of the medal passage without being detected by the input sensor 44a, and is sent to the medal return slot.

Here, differences between the prior art and the first embodiment (A) will be explained.
Conventionally, if a power cutoff occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the medal M has already passed the position of the insertion sensor 44b by the time the power cutoff is detected and the blocker 45 is turned off. Therefore, after the power is cut off, the process of adding "1" to the medal (bet process or credit process) is executed. However, it is not preferable to execute the medal addition process after a power outage occurs. This is because after a power outage occurs, all processing related to the progress of the game should be stopped immediately.
Therefore, if configured as in the first embodiment (A), even if the power is cut off at the moment when the player inserts the medal M from the medal slot 47 and the medal M is positioned at M2 (immediately after inserting the medal), Since the process of adding "1" to medals is not executed, the functionality of the slot machine 10 can be improved.

<First embodiment (B)>
The first embodiment (B) defines the relationship between the input sensors 44a and 44b and power-off.
FIG. 4 is a front view showing the process from when the medal M is detected by the input sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by the input sensor 44b. In FIG. 4, the arrow direction indicates the advancing (downward) direction of the medal M.
FIG. 4(a) shows a diagram at the moment when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. At this time, the input sensor 44a is turned on from off, and the input sensor 44b remains off. Note that this position corresponds to M3 in FIG.

Next, when the medal M advances to the left side in FIG. 4 and reaches the state shown in FIG. It becomes like this. Therefore, in FIG. 4(b), the input sensor 44a is on, and the input sensor 44b is turned on from off.
In addition, in FIG. 4, even if the input sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M overlap, both the input sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M are shown by solid lines, but the medal M and the input sensor 44a and It does not represent the positional relationship of 44b. The input sensors 44a and 44b may be placed on the front side of the medal M in the direction perpendicular to the page of FIG. 4, or may be placed on the back side.

When the medal M advances further and reaches the state shown in FIG. 4(c), the medal M is detected by both the input sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, in this case, the input sensor 44a is on, and the input sensor 44b is also on.
Here, the diameter of the medal M is, for example, 25 mm (so-called 25 pi (φ)) in the general specification, and 30 mm (so-called 30 pi (φ)) in the special specification. Therefore, it is necessary to set the distance between the input sensors 44a and 44b so that the state shown in FIG. 4(c) can be achieved. Here, as will be described later, whether or not the state shown in FIG. 4(c), that is, the time during which both the input sensors 44a and 44b are on (detecting the medal M) is within a predetermined range. This determines whether or not a medal insertion error is determined. Therefore, the distance between the input sensors 44a and 44b also differs depending on how the time during which both input sensors 44a and 44b are on is set.

When the medal M further advances from the state shown in FIG. 4(c), the input sensor 44a stops detecting the medal M, as shown in FIG. 4(d). In this case, the input sensor 44a is turned off from on at the moment, and the input sensor 44b remains on. As the medal M advances further, the insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M, as shown in FIG. 4(e). Therefore, in this case, the input sensor 44a remains off, and the input sensor 44b changes from on to off at the moment. Note that the position of the medal M in FIG. 4(e) corresponds to M4 in FIG.

FIG. 5 is a time chart showing on/off of the input sensors 44a and 44b. In FIG. 5, time S21 is the moment when the input sensor 44a is turned on from off (the input sensor 44b remains off), and corresponds to the timing in FIG. 4(a).
Next, the time at which the input sensor 44b detects the medal M (turns on from off) (FIG. 4(b)) is S22. Furthermore, the time at which the input sensor 44a no longer detects the medal M (changes from on to off) (FIG. 4(d)) is S23. Furthermore, the time at which the insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M (changes from on to off) (FIG. 4(e)) is S24.

Here, if the time Ta (from time S21 to S23) during which the input sensor 44a detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 1) The main control board 50 determines that the passage of the medal M is normal, and when it is out of this range, it determines that there is a medal passage error.

Also, the time Tb (from time S22 to S23) during which both the input sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M is within the range of 4.47 ms (2 interrupts) or more and less than 118.455 ms (53 interrupts). If so (condition 2), the main control board 50 determines that the passage of the medal M is normal, and if it is out of this range, it determines that there is a medal passage error.

Furthermore, if the time Tc (between times S22 and S24) during which the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts) (condition 3), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and if it is outside this range, it determines that a medal passing error has occurred.
When all of the above conditions 1 to 3 are met, the passage of the medal M is determined to be normal, and when at least one of the conditions is not met, a medal passage error is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, when both the input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off (time S24), "1" is subtracted from the input monitoring counter.
Here, the input monitoring counter becomes "+1" when the passage sensor 46 described above detects the medal M, and when the medal passes normally through the input sensors 44a and 44b (both input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off). This is a counter that is incremented by "-1" when the switch turns from "on" to "off" (therefore, at time S24). That is, during normal operation, "1" and "0" are repeated.
On the other hand, when the passage sensor 46 does not detect the medal M and only the input sensors 44a and 44b detect passage of the medal, the input monitoring counter becomes "-1" and the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passage error. do.

In addition, when the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M (insertion monitoring counter = "+1") and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect passage of the medal M, the passage sensor 46 further detects the medal M. However, when the input monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "2" or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal jamming error has occurred. For example, if the normal value of the input monitoring counter is set to ``0'' to ``2'', when the input monitoring counter becomes ``3'' or higher, the main control board 50 may determine that a medal jam error has occurred. It will be done.
Note that the input monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 changes from the off state to the on state.

In FIG. 5, at time S24, the insertion sensor 44b is turned off from on, the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by "1", and when it is determined that the medal M has passed normally, the main control board 50 controls the insertion of the medal. Execute processing (bet processing or credit processing). For example, if the number of bets is less than the specified number at that time, a process of adding "1" to the number of bets is executed. Specifically, if the specified number for the game is "3" and the number of bets at that time is "0", the number of bets is increased from "0" by adding "1" to the number of bets. Update to "1".

Furthermore, at that point, if the number of bets has already reached the specified number and the number of credits has not reached the maximum number of "50", the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed. For example, if the number of credits at that time is "10", the number of credits is updated to "11".
Note that when the number of bets reaches the specified number and the number of credits reaches the maximum number of "50", the main control board 50 turns off the blocker 45. Thereby, even if a medal M is inserted from the medal slot 47, the medal M is returned. In other words, in that case, even if the medal M is inserted, it will not be detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

5 shows the timing when a power interruption occurs and when a power interruption is detected, in addition to the on/off of the input sensors 44a and 44b. In FIG. 5, examples 1 and 2 are shown, and both examples show a case where a power interruption occurs when the input sensor 44a changes from off to on (time S21).
In Example 1, the power outage is detected after a time T1 has elapsed from the time S21 when the power outage occurred. Here, in Example 1, "T1>T3" is set. Therefore, in the case where the insertion sensor 44a detects a medal M at the moment when the power outage occurs, the process of adding "1" to the medal M has already been performed when the power outage process is started.

Here, the time T3 from time S21 to S24 can be expressed as "Ta+Tc-Tb". Therefore, the minimum time of time T3 corresponds to 4 interrupts and is "8.94 ms".
Further, the maximum time of time T3 corresponds to 113 interrupts and is "252.555 ms".
In example 1, the power-off process is always set to be executed after time S24 has elapsed. Therefore, for example, the time T1 from the occurrence of power-off (time S21) until the power-off processing is executed is set to be equal to or longer than 114 interrupts.

With the above settings, even if a power outage occurs at the moment when the input sensor 44a detects the medal M (time S21), the power outage process will be executed after the process of adding "1" to the medal M is executed. , the medal M is normally bet or credited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the medal M from being swallowed.

Further, in Example 2, contrary to Example 1, the power-off process is executed before the process of adding "1" to the medal M is executed. That is, in Example 2, the relationship is set to be "T1<T3".
As described above, the time T3 from time S21 to S24 is the minimum time and corresponds to four interrupts. Therefore, in order to satisfy the relationship "T1<T3", it is necessary to execute the power-off process within three interrupts from the occurrence of the power-off. However, since it is difficult to set the power-off process to be executed within three interrupts from the occurrence of a power-off, the minimum time Tc is set to be longer than four interrupts. For example, the minimum time of time Tc may be set to 15 interrupts. If the time T1 from the occurrence of power outage (time S21) to the power outage process is set to about 10 interrupts, when the power outage occurs at time S21, the power outage process will be executed before time S24. becomes possible.

When the power-off process is executed, the process of adding "1" to the medal M (bet or credit) is not executed thereafter. Therefore, in Example 2, even if the input sensor 44a detects the medal M at time S21 (when the power is cut off), the process of adding "1" to the medal M1 is not executed. As a result, there is a disadvantage that the medal M is swallowed, but as explained in the first embodiment (A), after the power is cut off, the process of adding "1" to the medal M etc. is not executed. , the power-off process can be executed as quickly as possible.

<First embodiment (C)>
The first embodiment (C) defines the relationship between the payout sensors 37a and 37b and power cutoff.
When adding medals to be paid out to credits, the hopper motor 36 is not driven, and the storage area for the number of credits provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is updated. Further, the value indicated by the credit number display LED 76 is updated so that the number corresponds to the number of credits stored in the storage area.

When the medals are to be paid out after the number of credits reaches the upper limit value "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out the medals from the hopper 35 (ejected from the payout port). In this case, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are configured to detect on/off status each time one medal is paid out. When the on/off detection result by the payout sensors 37a and 37b is within the normal range, it is determined that one medal M has been correctly paid out, and when the detection result is not within the normal range, the medal M The main control board 50 determines that the medal has not been paid out correctly, and the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

FIG. 6 is a plan view illustrating the operation when medals M are paid out from the medal payout device. Although not shown in FIG. 6, a hopper disk (a substantially disc-shaped rotating disk) is attached to the bottom of the hopper 35, and this hopper disk is rotated by the hopper motor 36. A plurality of openings capable of holding medals M are formed along the outer periphery of the hopper disk. The medal M in the hopper 35 is configured to enter into the opening of the hopper disk. When the hopper motor 36 is driven in this state, the hopper disk is rotated and the medals M held in the opening of the hopper disk are ejected one by one. A new medal M in the hopper 35 enters the empty opening after the medal M is ejected.

In FIG. 6, the medal M located at M1 is shown immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disk. The fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b are both components of a medal payout device. The fixed shaft 38a is a shaft that does not move when the medals M are paid out. On the other hand, the movable shaft 38b is a shaft that moves back and forth every time one medal M is paid out. In the unloaded state, the movable shaft 38b is located at the position shown by the solid line in the figure, and is fixed by a spring (not shown in FIG. 6, which corresponds to the spring 39b in FIG. 7, which will be described later). It is biased towards the 38a side. The medal M (M1) immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disk comes into contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.
Note that when the medal M is placed at the position (M1) shown by the solid line in FIG. narrower than the diameter. Therefore, at this point, the medal M cannot pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.

The medal M discharged from the opening of the hopper disk is subjected to a pushing force in the direction F1 in FIG. 6. When the pushing force in the direction F1 acts on the medal M, the medal M becomes movable in the direction F1, and the pushing force pushes the movable shaft 38b in the direction F2 in the figure. The fixed shaft 38a does not move. As a result, the movable shaft 38b moves in the direction F2 in the figure while maintaining contact with the medal M. The movable shaft 38b further moves to a position where the medal M can pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. In other words, the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal M. The position of the movable shaft 38b at this time is shown by a two-dot chain line in the figure.

As a result, the medal M passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and is discharged in the direction F1 (towards the medal payout port) in the figure. The medal M at this time is shown by a two-dot chain line in Figure 6 (M2). When the medal M is discharged, the force pushing the movable shaft 38b in the direction F2 is released. As a result, the force of the spring returns the movable shaft 38b to the position shown by the solid line in Figure 6 again.

FIG. 7 is a plan view illustrating the on (detection)/off (non-detection) states of the payout sensors 37a and 37b when the medals M are paid out as described above in the medal payout device. FIG. 7 shows how the movable piece 39a moves in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (a) every time one medal M is paid out.

FIG. 7A shows the state of the movable piece 39a when the movable shaft 38b is located at the position shown by the solid line (initial position) in FIG. In the figure, the movable piece 39a is attached to be rotatably movable around the central axis, and is biased clockwise by a spring 39b.
When the movable piece 39a is biased clockwise in the figure, the movable shaft 38b in FIG. 6 is biased toward the fixed shaft 38a in the diagram.
When the movable piece 39a is urged clockwise in FIG. 7), it is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 7(a).

As shown in FIG. 7A, dispensing sensors 37a (upper side in the figure) and 37b (lower side in the figure) are arranged on the left side of the movable piece 39a in the figure. The movable piece 39a is formed to extend toward the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b, and when it is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 7(a), its tip is being detected by the dispensing sensor 37a. ing.
In addition, in FIG. 7, the housings of the sensors 37a and 37b are both shown, and the light receiving and emitting parts (eyes of the sensors) are not shown. In this point, it is different from the input sensors 44a and 44b of FIGS. 2 and 4, which show only the light receiving and emitting parts (eyes of the sensor).

Here, the dispensing sensor 37a is in an on state (for example, FIG. 7(a)) when it detects the movable piece 39a, and is in an off state (for example, in FIG. 7(b)) when it no longer detects the movable piece 39a. It is set to be.
Similarly, the dispensing sensor 37b is in an off state (for example, FIG. 7(a)) when it does not detect the movable piece 39a, and is in an on state (for example, in FIG. 7(c)) when it detects the movable piece 39a. is set to .
In the state shown in FIG. 7A, the dispensing sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a and is in an on state, and the dispensing sensor 37b does not detect the movable piece 39a and is in an off state.

As explained in FIG. 6, when the pushing force in the F1 direction in FIG. 6 acts on the medal M, the movable shaft 38b starts to move in the F2 direction in FIG. When the movable piece 39a moves, the movable piece 39a starts rotating counterclockwise in FIG. 7(a) against the biasing force of the spring 39b. When the movable piece 39a moves to the position shown in FIG. 7(b), the tip of the movable piece 39a comes out from inside the payout sensor 37a. As a result, the dispensing sensor 37a no longer detects the movable piece 39a, and is therefore turned off. Moreover, even if the movable piece 39a rotates to the position shown in FIG. 7(b), the tip of the movable piece 39a does not reach the payout sensor 37b. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7(b), the payout sensor 37a is in the off state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state.

In FIG. 6, when the movable shaft 38b further moves in the F2 direction and reaches the position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 7, the movable piece 39a further rotates counterclockwise and reaches the position shown in FIG. 7(c). Thereby, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters into the payout sensor 37b, and the movable piece 39a is detected by the payout sensor 37b. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7(c), the payout sensor 37a is in the off state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state.

In FIG. 6, when the medal M is further discharged from position M2, the force biasing the movable shaft 38b in the direction F2 in FIG. 6 disappears, and the movable shaft 38b returns to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 6. The returning force at this time is due to the force of the spring 39b in FIG. 7. As a result, in FIG. 7, the movable piece 39a rotates clockwise, and the tip of the movable piece 39a goes outside the payout sensor 37b, which no longer detects the movable piece 39b. FIG. 7(d) shows the state at this time. In the state of FIG. 7(d), the payout sensor 37a is in the OFF state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the OFF state.

Then, when the movable piece 39a further rotates clockwise, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters into the payout sensor 37a, and the movable piece 39a is detected by the payout sensor 37a. As a result, the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 7(a) (initial state). In the state of FIG. 7A, as described above, the payout sensor 37a is in the on state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state. Furthermore, when returning to this position, the movable shaft 38b returns to the position indicated by the solid line in FIG.

FIG. 8 is a time chart showing on/off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b.
In FIG. 8, it is assumed that the medal payout process has started and the hopper motor drive signal is in the on state.
In FIG. 8, the state before time S31 is as shown in FIG. 7(a). When time S31 is reached, the state shown in FIG. 7B is reached, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off (the payout sensor 37b is turned off). Next, when time S32 is reached, the payout sensor 37b is turned on. This state is the state shown in FIG. 7(c). In FIG. 8, the time from time S31 to S32 is designated as Td.

The dispensing sensor 37a is in the off state and the dispensing sensor 37b is in the on state until time S33, at which time the dispensing sensor 37b is turned off. This state is the state shown in FIG. 7(d). In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S33 is designated as Te. Then, when time S34 is reached, the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 7A (initial position), and the payout sensor 37a is turned on. In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S34 is designated as Tf.

In the payout process, the main control board 50 monitors the on/off state time of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and determines that there is a medal payout error when the time is not within a predetermined time range.
For example, in FIG. 8, the time Td is set to less than 29.055 ms (13 interrupts). Therefore, if the payout sensor 37b turns on by the 12th interrupt after the payout sensor 37a turns off, it is determined to be normal, but if the payout sensor 37b turns on by the 12th interrupt, then the payout sensor 37b turns on. If there is no medal, it is considered a medal payout error.

The time Te during which the payout sensor 37a is in the OFF state and the payout sensor 37b is in the ON state is set to be equal to or greater than 11.175 ms (5 interrupts) and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, when time S32 is reached (when the payout sensor 37b is in the ON state), the time Te until the payout sensor 37b turns OFF is monitored, and if the time Te is not within the above-mentioned predetermined time range, the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

Furthermore, after the payout sensor 37b is turned on (time S32), the time Tf from when the payout sensor 37b is turned off to when the payout sensor 37a is turned on (time S34) is 11.175 ms (5 interrupts). ) and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, at time S32 (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Tf from when the payout sensor 37b is turned off to when the payout sensor 37a is turned on is monitored, and the time Tf is determined. If the time is not within the predetermined time range, the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

Further, in FIG. 8, similarly to FIGS. 3 and 5, the time from the occurrence of power-off to the power-off processing is also displayed.
First, it is assumed that the power is cut off at time S31, that is, at the timing when the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, in the example of FIG. 3, an example was explained in which power-off is detected at the 20th interrupt, but in the example of FIG. 8 (first embodiment (C)), the When T1 elapses), the power off is detected and the power off process is executed.

Here, the maximum time (normally) of the time "Td+Tf" is "12+27=39" interrupts, so the time T1 from power-off to execution of power-off processing is set to, for example, 40 interrupts (89.4ms). Set. With this setting, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the payout sensor 37a is turned off, the power cutoff process can be started after the payout process for one medal is normally completed. That is, it can be set to "(Td+Tf)<T1".

Conventionally, there have been cases in which a power outage (power outage, etc.) occurs during the medal payout process. In this case, depending on the timing of the occurrence of the medal payout process and the power cutoff, it may be determined that the medals have been paid out even though the medals have not been paid out, which may cause a loss to the player.
In contrast, in the first embodiment (C), even if a power failure occurs during the medal payout process, the medals can be paid out correctly.

In particular, even if a power outage occurs when the medal payout process is started, that is, at time S31 in FIG. 8, the power outage is detected after the medal payout process is finished, and the process shifts to the power outage process. Therefore, the power-off process is not executed, for example, when the payout sensor 37a is in the off state or at the timing when the payout sensor 37b is in the on state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the power-off process from being executed in the middle of the medal payout process and the medal payout process being canceled before the (one) medal payout process is normally completed.

Note that if time T1 is set longer than necessary, there is a risk that the next medal payout process will be executed. Therefore, the power-off process is executed at least before the next medal payout process is executed. In FIG. 8, for example, assuming that the cycle of the payout process for one medal is time T4 and the payout sensor 37a changes from the on state to the off state at the timing of time S35, the time is set so that "T1<T4".

<Second embodiment>
The second embodiment relates to gate marks formed on the board case of the main control board 50.
In the prior art, the shape, size, position, etc. of the gate mark on the substrate case were determined by a mold designer during mold manufacturing solely from the convenience of mold manufacturing.
However, since the gate mark has an uneven surface, for example, even if a hole is drilled aiming at the gate mark, it may not be visually distinguishable (not noticed).

If the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is located directly below the gate trace, the main CPU 55 could be accessed by drilling a hole in the gate trace and passing a wire through the hole (such as by passing a wire through the hole). There was a risk that it would be carried out. In particular, if the gate mark is shaped to be thinner than other parts, it will be easier to drill holes than other parts.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate marks on the board case are used to prevent theft from being carried out.

FIG. 9 is an exploded external perspective view showing the main control board 50 and the board case 56 (upper cover 57 and lower cover 58).
The board case 56 is composed of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58, both of which are (injection) molded from transparent resin. Therefore, when the main control board 50 is housed inside, the state of the main control board 50 can be visually and clearly confirmed from outside the board case 56.

The main control board 50 is equipped with electronic components such as the main CPU 55, the management information display LED 74 (a four-digit LED, also called the "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display"), and the set value display LED 73. The main control board 50 is equipped with many electronic components such as the RWM 53 and ROM 54, but these are not shown in FIG. 9. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 9, the main control board 50 is equipped with fault checking LEDs for the bet switches 40a and 40b, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the passage sensor 46 in the medal selector, and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. The fault checking LEDs are not limited to these.
For example, the fault confirmation LED of the start switch 41 is an LED that is turned off when the start switch 41 is off, and turns on (lit) when the start switch 41 is operated (when the start switch 41 is operated and the sensor detects that it is on).

In addition, the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 and the failure confirmation LEDs of other operation switches and sensors, which will be described later, are turned off when the operation switch is operated (when the sensor detects that it is on), and are turned off when the operation switch is turned off. It may be configured so that it lights up.

Furthermore, two LEDs are provided for confirming failure of the bet switches 40a and 40b, one for the bet switch 40a and one for the bet switch 40b, and are off when the bet switch 40 is not operated, and when the bet switch 40 is operated, The LED lights up when it receives the electrical signal at that time.
Furthermore, the passage sensor 46 and the input sensors 44a and 44b have a total of three failure confirmation LEDs for each sensor, and are off when no medals are detected, and turned on when a medal is detected. It is an LED.
Then, the administrator operates the start switch 41, for example, and checks whether a failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 mounted on the main control board 50 is turned on or off, thereby determining whether or not the start switch 41 is malfunctioning (energized). can be confirmed. The same applies to other switches or sensors.

Note that the above-mentioned failure confirmation LED may be turned on/off by operating the start switch 41, etc. when the front door is opened during normal operation (not changing settings and not checking settings). . Alternatively, failure confirmation may be performed by opening the front door and performing a predetermined operation after a door open error occurs. Further, the light may be turned on/off at all times (even while changing or confirming settings) by operating the start switch 41 or the like.

Further, on the main control board 50, the model number of the board is displayed (printed, etc.). Although not shown in FIG. 9, model numbers and the like are similarly displayed on the upper surfaces of the RWM 53 and ROM 54.
Furthermore, screw holes 50a for passing screws are formed at the four corners of the main control board 50.
On the other hand, bosses 58c for screwing are formed at the four inner corners of the lower surface of the lower cover 58. When the main control board 50 is placed on the lower cover 58, the screw hole 50a and the boss 58c overlap, and the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case 58 by passing a screw through the screw hole 50a and screwing it to the boss 58c. can do.

When the upper cover 57 is stacked on the lower cover 58 in this state, the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed in a shape that fits together (in FIG. 9, the specific shape of the fitting portion is not shown). ) Further, caulking portions 57a are provided on both left and right sides of the upper cover 57 in the figure. Similarly, caulking portions 58a are provided on the left and right sides of the lower cover 58 in the figure. In addition, in FIG. 9, illustration of the specific shape and detailed shape of the caulking portions 57a and 58b is omitted.

When the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together and caulked using the caulking parts 57a and 58a, the upper cover must be destroyed (or plastically deformed) at least in part at the caulking parts 57a and 58a. The cover 57 and lower cover 58 cannot be opened.
Thereby, the security of the main control board 50 can be ensured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, gate marks 57b are provided at two locations on the outer side of the upper surface of the upper cover 57. Note that in the board case 56 (the state in which the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted), the side where the main control board 50 is housed is referred to as the "inside", and the side exposed to the outside is referred to as the "outside". .
In FIG. 9, the gate marks 57b are provided at two locations, but the gate marks 57b are not limited to this, and may be provided at any number of locations.

Here, the "gate" is the sprue used to pour resin (hot water) into the mold during resin molding, and the gate mark is the mark left at the boundary between the gate and the molded product after resin molding. be.
When the board case 56 (upper cover 57, lower cover 58) has a shape as shown in FIG. 9, it is low cost to use a mold that is divided vertically in FIG. Further, in the case of a multi-cavity mold, it is preferable to use a pin gate, and from the viewpoint of fluidity of the resin (hot water), it is preferable to provide the gate near the center of the molded product. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate positions of the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed on the top surface, not the side surface, as shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in consideration of the cutting off of the protrusion at the gate mark during molding, it is preferable to provide the gate mark on the outside.
For the above reasons, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 is provided on the outer side of the upper surface.
For the same reason as above, the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 are also provided on the outer side of the lower surface (the surface opposite to the surface visible in Fig. 9). Note that, in Fig. 9, the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 are provided in two places like the gate marks 57b of the upper cover 57, but they may be provided in one place, or in three or more places.

Furthermore, when resin (hot water) is poured into the mold from the gate, if the resin (hot water) does not spread uniformly within the mold and there is a difference in cooling time, there is a risk that the molded product will warp and deform. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the gate position of the molded product at a position where the resin (hot water) spreads uniformly within the mold. Furthermore, when gates are provided at multiple locations, it is preferable to make the distance from the end of the molded product to the gate and the distance between the gates as equal as possible.

In FIG. 10, (a) is a plan view showing the positional relationship between the gate marks 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 of the board case 56 and the main control board 50. FIG. 10(a) is a plan view showing the main control board 50 housed in the board case 56 (meaning the state in which the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58 and the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together) as seen from above. The main control board 50 is also shown as seen through from the top side of the upper cover 57.

Furthermore, (b) shows example 1 of a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in figure (a), and (c) shows example 2 of a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in figure (a) shows. Note that hatching is omitted in these cross-sectional views for ease of viewing the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 10A, when the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56, from the two gate marks 57b to the upper cover 57 in the vertical direction (main control board 50 side) (just below), It is set so that the model number display, management information display LED 74, setting value display LED 73, and main CPU 55 (socket) are not located. As described above, although the RWM 53, ROM 54, and failure confirmation LED are also mounted on the main control board 50, it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not located directly above these.

The reason for arranging the gate traces 57 as described above is as follows.
Even after the slot machine 10 is installed in the market, it is necessary to visually check whether the main control board 50 has been tampered with or not. In particular, it is necessary to check whether the main CPU 55 and the like (including the RWM 53 and ROM 54; the same applies hereinafter) is compliant and whether it has been altered by fraud. Furthermore, since the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 and the board case 56 is sealed as described above, it is necessary to visually check the main control board 50 from outside the board case 56. be.
The board case 56 housing the main control board 50 therein is attached to the inside of the housing of the slot machine 10, for example, on the inside of the back surface. This is to install it in a position where the numerical values displayed by the setting value display LED 73 and the management information display LED 74 can be easily seen.

Therefore, it is considered that the administrator of the slot machine 10 visually observes the board case 56 (main control board 50) from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the upper cover 57. That is, it is considered that the board case 56 (main control board 50) is visually observed as shown in FIG. 10(a). For this reason, if the main CPU 55 or the like is arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate mark 57b, the visibility of the gate mark 57 may be obstructed. In particular, information displayed (printed, etc.) on the top surface of the main CPU 55, etc., can be visually viewed without being hindered in visibility.

Note that since the entire upper cover 57 is molded from transparent resin, visibility is not completely obstructed even if it is located directly below the gate mark 57b. However, as shown in (b) and (c) in FIG. 10, the cross section of the gate mark 57b becomes an uneven surface, which reduces visibility directly below the gate mark 57b (worse than a flat surface). That is true. Furthermore, in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 10(b), since the upper end surface of the protrusion 57d is a cut surface, it may become white due to stress during cutting of the resin. Therefore, in this case as well, visibility of the area directly below the gate trace 57b is hindered.

Moreover, since the upper surface of the upper cover 57 is a transparent smooth surface with no irregularities except for the gate marks 57b, even if a hole is made by, for example, tribbing, it can be easily noticed with the naked eye.
On the other hand, the gate trace 57b is an uneven surface obtained by cutting the resin. For this reason, if the gate hole 57b is drilled and then sealed with, for example, a resin material, it may not be possible to easily visually determine whether or not the gate trace 57b has been drilled. For this reason, there is a possibility that a crime may be carried out using the gate trace 57b.

On the other hand, if a hole is drilled in the gate mark 57b, cheating becomes easier if the main CPU 55, etc. is located vertically (directly below) the gate mark 57b. Therefore, if the main CPU 55, etc. is not located vertically (directly below) the gate mark 57b, it becomes difficult to access the main CPU 55, etc., making cheating more difficult.

In addition, the model number displayed (printed, etc.) on the surface of the main control board 50 is also important information in checking for fraud, so in order to make it easier to confirm (read) the model number, the model number is displayed. The gate trace 57b is not arranged directly above the area. Furthermore, when there is a gate mark 57b directly above the model number display, in order to prevent the model number display from being tampered with by drilling a hole in the gate mark 57b and accessing the inside of the board case 56, The gate mark 57b is not placed directly above the model number display.

Furthermore, regarding the setting value display LED 73, it is necessary to check the displayed numerical value when changing or confirming settings. Further, regarding the management information display LED 74, it is necessary to check the displayed numerical value in order to confirm whether the advantageous section ratio, accessory ratio, etc. are within appropriate ranges. Therefore, the gate trace 57b was not placed directly above these LEDs. Furthermore, in the same way as above, in order to make it difficult for the LEDs inside the board case 56 to be accessed by making a hole in the gate trace 57b using the gate trace 57b and to make it difficult for the LEDs to be stolen, it is possible to make a hole in the gate trace 57b. Avoid placing the gate trace 57b on top.

Regarding the above-mentioned failure confirmation LED, the administrator of the slot machine 10 operates an operation switch and checks whether the failure confirmation LED corresponding to the operation switch lights up, which improves visibility. For this reason, it is preferable that the gate trace 57b is not located directly above the failure confirmation LED. Similarly to the above, it is also possible to prevent the malfunction confirmation LED from being disposed in the vertical direction (directly below) of the gate trace 57b, thereby making it difficult for the user to commit a trifling act.

In FIG. 10, the cross-sectional views of Example 1 shown in (b) and Example 2 shown in (c) have the same outer shape of the gate trace 57b. In Example 1 of (b), the inner side of the upper surface of the gate trace 57b is left as a flat surface. On the other hand, in Example 2 of (c), the inner side of the upper surface of the gate mark 57b is formed into a protrusion shape (thick).
The outside of the gate mark 57b has a protrusion 57d at its center and a cylindrical depression 57c at its outer periphery. The boundary between the gate and the molded product is connected during molding, and this boundary is cut with a cutter when separating the molded product from the mold. Therefore, the upper end surface of the protrusion 57d is a cut surface made by a cutter. There are two methods for cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product: one is to automatically cut the border using a molding machine during injection, and the other is to cut it in a post-process.

Here, when cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product, processing the cut surface into a completely smooth surface, in other words, creating a smooth surface with the height of the protrusion 57d almost "0" is costly. It is difficult and expensive. Therefore, the recessed portion 57c is formed so that even if some height remains in the projection 57d, it does not protrude above the outer side of the upper surface of the upper cover 57. Thereby, for example, when an assembly worker touches the upper cover 57, it is possible to prevent injury caused by the protrusion 57d.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), when the recessed portion 57c is provided in the gate trace 57, the thickness of the upper cover 57 becomes thinner by that amount. As described above, if there is even a thin part, there is a possibility that it becomes easy to make a hole in the recessed part 57c and access the inside of the board case 56.
Therefore, in Example 2 of FIG. 10(c), a protrusion 57e is provided on the opposite side (inner side) of the outer side of the upper surface where the gate mark 57b is provided to prevent the wall thickness from becoming thinner at the recessed portion 57c. There is. Unless the protruding portion 57e is provided to provide a portion where the wall thickness is reduced, it may be difficult to drill a hole in the recessed portion 57c.

Further, the protrusion 57e not only contributes to countermeasures against fraud by preventing a portion of the thickness of the gate mark 57b from becoming thinner, but also functions as a dimple (reservoir) during molding. In FIG. 10(b), when resin (hot water) is injected from the gate of the mold (position corresponding to the protrusion 57d), if the resin (hot water) collides with the inside of the upper surface, the resin (hot water) The flow may change suddenly and become unable to flow stably. Therefore, by providing a dimple (pool of hot water) at a position facing the tip of the gate, when resin (hot water) is injected from the gate, the flow of resin (hot water) will be less likely to change suddenly. (hot water) will be able to flow stably. The protrusion 57e has various shapes such as a square cross section, a triangular cross section, a trapezoid cross section (in the case of FIG. 10(c)), and a dome cross section. Any shape may be used as long as it can prevent this.

Regarding the visibility of the gate mark 57b in the vertical direction (right below), a smooth lower side of the gate mark 57 is better than an uneven shape. Therefore, the shape shown in FIG. 10(b) is better than the shape shown in FIG. 10(c) in terms of visibility directly below the gate mark 57b. Furthermore, compared to the shape of FIG. 10(c), the shape of FIG. 10(b) simplifies the shape of the mold because it is not necessary to form a portion corresponding to the protrusion 57e in the mold. lower costs).

Also, the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 is provided on the outside (lower side in FIG. 9). Furthermore, the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c shown in FIG. 10(b) are formed on the outside. As described above, providing the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c on the outside of the molded product is more convenient in terms of molding.
When the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58, the pins of the main CPU 55, etc. of the main control board 50 are set so as not to be positioned vertically to the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58. This is to make it impossible to access the pins of the main CPU 55, etc. by drilling a hole in the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58.
Furthermore, if the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is shaped as shown in Figure 10(c), the protrusion 57e in Figure 10(c) will face the pin side of the main control board 50, but it goes without saying that the pin protruding from the underside of the main control board 50 and the protrusion 57e will be formed so as not to interfere with (contact with) each other.

10(a), when the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together, it is preferable to arrange (shift) the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 so as not to overlap in the vertical direction. In particular, when the gate marks 57b and 58b are arranged as shown in FIG. 10(b), the thickness of a part (recess 57c) of the gate marks 57b and 58b becomes thin, but by arranging the thin part at a position where the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 do not overlap, it is possible to prevent the easily targeted parts from overlapping.
Furthermore, if the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction, the position of the gate mark of one cover would be obvious just by looking at the other cover. To prevent this, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 are made not to overlap in the vertical direction.

<Third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is temporarily disabled (disconnection). This is related to processing when communication is restored after the communication has been completed, or when communication has failed due to the influence of noise, etc.).
As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 of the main control board 50 transmits commands such as the push order instruction number and information on the operated stop switch 42 to the sub control board 80. Then, the sub control board 80 outputs a performance based on the command received from the main control board 50, and updates the performance in accordance with the operation of the operation switch during the game.

Here, there is a possibility that a disconnection occurs between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, making communication impossible. Possible causes include poor contact and radio wave glitches. When the sub control board 80 no longer receives commands from the main control board 50, the presentation stops in its current state. Furthermore, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 determines whether there is a disconnection in communication between them. Therefore, even if a disconnection occurs between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, the main control board 50 will not be able to proceed with the game (operations of the bet switch 40, start switch 41, and stop switch 42). etc.), the command transmission process is continued to the sub-control board 80. On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 does not receive a command from the main control board 50, it maintains the current performance state.
Note that even if there is a disconnection between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, for example, if AT is in progress, the main control board 50 will activate the instruction function to display the obtained number display LED 78 in the order of pressing. Display instruction information. Thereby, even if the sub-control board 80 is not functioning normally, the player can view the press order instruction information and operate the stop switches 42 in the correct press order.
Furthermore, the player can compare the push order instruction information displayed on the obtained number display LED 78 and the performance content (correct press order) displayed as an image on the image display device 23, so that the information on both pieces is inconsistent. When this happens, you can know that a problem has occurred in the image display by the sub-control board 80.

For example, in a case where a disconnection occurs during the "N" game and communication is restored during the "N+1" game, the sub control board 80 can now receive commands sent from the main control board 50. Sometimes, it is not possible to suddenly switch the performance to the "N+1" game. Even when the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 does not receive the command related to the operation of the start switch 41 (command notifying the start of the game), and the sub-control board 80 indicates that the "N+1" game has started. This is because it cannot be determined. For this reason, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is disconnected and then restored, there is a risk of giving a misunderstanding to the player depending on the content of the performance.
Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is restored after being disconnected, we do our best to avoid giving the player a misunderstanding, while giving the performance a sense of discomfort. Outputs a performance that appears to be non-existent.

FIG. 11 shows the operation of the main control board 50 (described as "main operation" in FIG. 11) and the display of effects by the sub-control board 80 (described as "sub-display" in FIG. 11) in the third embodiment. ), and shows five examples consisting of Pattern 1 (Example 1) to Pattern 5 (Example 5).
Patterns 1 to 5 all show examples in which communication becomes unavailable (disconnection occurs) during the "N" game, and communication is restored during the "N+1" game.
Furthermore, in the main operation of FIG. 11, "bet" means when the bet switch 40 is operated and a specified number of bets are validly placed. Furthermore, "start" means that the game is started by operating the start switch 41 after a specified number of bets have been placed. Furthermore, for example, "right stop" means that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 has stopped).

Furthermore, in the sub-display, the "push order effect" means an effect that displays an image of the correct press order in a game in which a player wins a press order bell or a press order replay, for example. Specifically, for example, "right-left-middle display" means an effect that notifies that the correct pressing order is "right-left-middle". For example, "left center display" is an effect after the left stop switch 42 is operated, and indicates that the second stop switch to be operated is on the left and the third stop switch 42 to be operated is in the middle. It means a performance that informs people.
Furthermore, for example, the "right stop effect" is an effect that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 has stopped) when a command indicating that the right stop switch 42 has been operated is received. means.

In pattern 1, when the start switch 41 is operated for the "N" game, the main control board 50 performs a lottery of the winning combination, as described above. In this game, this is an example in which the correct push order bell is won, with "right, left, center" being the correct push order. In this case, if the main control board 50 is in AT mode, the main control board 50 transmits a push order instruction number (command) corresponding to the correct push order "right left middle" to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives this command, it outputs a press order effect to the image display device 23 that displays the correct press order of "right, left, middle".
Although not shown, the main control board 50 displays, on the acquisition number display LED 78, push order instruction information corresponding to the correct push order "right, left, center" (operation of instruction function).

Next, it is assumed that the player looks at the correct pressing order and operates the right stop switch 42 as a first stop (right stop). As a result, the right reel 31 stops and a command to that effect is sent to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it outputs the effect (right stop effect) in which the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 has stopped), and displays the right-left center display and the left center display (in addition, other Examples of the display include "-center left", "×center left", etc.).
Pattern 1 shows an example in which a disconnection occurs after the right reel 31 stops, and communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 becomes impossible (sub-disconnection). That is, this is an example in which communication becomes unavailable during the game.

The main control board 50 allows the game to proceed even if communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 becomes impossible (even if the sub-control board 80 is not functioning). The example of pattern 1 shows an example in which the left and middle stop switches 42 were each operated (the left and middle reels 31 stopped) after a wire breakage occurred in the "N" game. ).

Next, it is assumed that a bet operation for the "N+1" game number is performed and the start switch 41 is operated. In the "N+1" game, as in the "N" game, an example is shown in which a push order bell (or push order replay) in which "right, left, center" is the correct push order is won. In addition, in the "N+1" game, as in the "N" game, an example is shown in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of right, left, middle, but if the winning combination is won with the correct pressing order of right, left, middle. It is not limited to , but any winning lottery result may be used.

Note that when a push order bell (or push order replay) having the correct push order is won in the "N+1" game, the main control board 50 displays push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78. Therefore, even if the correct pressing order is not displayed as an image on the image display device 23, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct pressing order based on the pressing order instruction information displayed on the obtained number display LED 78. Become.

In the "N+1" game, the player operates the right stop switch 42 first. After that, it is assumed that communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is restored before the second left stop switch 42 is operated.
As a result, when the player operates the left stop switch 42, which is the second stop switch 42, the command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving this command, the sub control board 80 updates the image display to correspond to the received command. That is, an image indicating that the left stop has been performed is displayed (left stop effect). Here, the sub control board 80 updates the effect as a continuation of the effect already displayed, that is, as a effect of the "N" game.

Therefore, in reality, the second stop switch 42 (left) for the "N+1" game is being operated, but the sub-control board 80 indicates that the second stop switch 42 (left) for the "N" game is being operated. Outputs the effect when operated. Since the second correct pressing order in the "N" game is to the left, in this example, the operations are performed in the correct pressing order. Therefore, the sub control board 80 outputs the left stop effect (pressing order correct effect) and outputs the final medium display effect.

Then, in the "N+1" game, when the last middle stop switch 42 is operated, a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives this command, it outputs a performance corresponding to the third stop of the "N" game, that is, a medium stop performance.
In addition, even if you win a role with a correct pressing order on the "N+1" game, and the correct pressing order is other than right, left, middle, under the situation of pattern 1, the effect will be output as described above. be done. In other words, in the "N+1" game, if the push order operated by the player is right, left, center, even if the push order corresponds to an incorrect push order, the push order will fail like pattern 2 described later. The performance is not output.

Furthermore, in the case of the "N+1" game, if the winning combination does not have a correct pressing order, or even if the winning combination is not won, if the pressing order operated by the player is right, left, center, then the above The same effect will be output. That is, even if the "N+1" game number does not have the correct pressing order, the sub-control board 80 (in the example of pattern 1) will display a message indicating that the left stop switch 42 has been operated after communication is restored. When a command is received, a left stop effect (pressing order correct effect) is output, and a middle display is further output.

Next, when a bet for the “N+2” game is made and the start switch 41 is operated to start the “N+2” game, the main control board 50 causes the sub control board 80 to “ N+2'' command corresponding to the start of the game number is transmitted. As a result, the sub-control board 80 outputs the effect at the start of the "N+2" game. Specifically, when the start switch 41 is operated, commands such as the production group number and the push order instruction number are transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives these commands, it performs a press order effect and a display of the correct press order, as at the start of the "N" game.

As described above, in pattern 1, until the third stop of the "N+1" game, the sub control board 80 operates based on the command received from the main control board 50 (for the "N+1" game). The effect continues to be output, and when the ``N+2'' game starts, the effect is updated to the effect for the ``N+2'' game.
In addition, the main control board 50 may transmit a command for the number of coins acquired to the sub-control board 80 at the end of the game, and the sub-control board 80 may also display an image of the number of coins acquired during AT. In such a case, the sub control board 80 cannot receive the command for the number of acquired coins at the end of the "N" game, that is, while the wire is disconnected. ” The number of acquired coins at the end of the game remains displayed. Then, when communication is restored and a command for the number of acquired coins is received at the end of the "N+1" game, the sub-control board 80 updates the image display to show the number of acquired coins at the end of the "N+1" game. .

In pattern 2, the main operation is the same as in pattern 1. Further, the timing of disconnection is the same as pattern 1, but the timing of communication restoration is different from pattern 2. Pattern 2 is an example in which communication is restored after the left stop, which is the second stop, in the "N+1" game.
In pattern 2, the main action and sub-display in the "N" game are the same as in pattern 1, so their explanation will be omitted.
Next, in the "N+1" game, the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of right, left and middle, but communication is assumed to be restored after the second stop on the left.

Just before communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 is outputting the right stop effect for the "N" game play, and the left center display. When communication is restored in this state and the player operates the center stop switch 42 (third stop) for the "N+1" game play, the command is sent to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives a center stop command while the left center display is displayed, it determines that the push order is incorrect, and outputs a push order failure effect. Note that in the third embodiment, after the push order failure effect is output, no subsequent push order effects, etc. are output.

In addition, assuming that the stop switch 42 is operated in the center, left, and right push order in an "N+1" game, if communication is restored after a center-left stop, and then a right stop is made, causing a right stop command to be sent to the sub-control board 80, the push order failure effect will be output in the same manner as above. Since the sub-control board 80 is in the middle of outputting the right stop effect and the left-center display, if it receives a right stop command at this point, it will have received the same stop command twice in one game. Even in such a case, it will process it as a push order failure without issuing an error notification or the like, and output that effect.
Then, when the "N+2" game play is started in the same manner as in pattern 1, a command for starting the "N+2" game play is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. This causes the sub-control board 80 to start the presentation of the "N+2" game play.

In pattern 3, the main action and sub-display for the "N" game are the same as pattern 1.
Pattern 3 shows an example in which communication is restored after the first stop right and the second stop in the "N+1" game. Therefore, in the "N+1" game, after communication is restored, a command for a left stop, which is the third stop, is sent to the sub control board 80. Since the sub-control board 80 outputs the "left middle display" for the "N" game, if it receives a left stop command in this state, it determines that it is the correct pressing order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs a left stop effect (push order correct effect), and then outputs a middle display.

However, on the main control board 50 side, the "N+1" game ends with the third left stop. Next, when the game moves to the "N+2" game and a command for the start of the "N+2" game is sent to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80, upon receiving the command, switches to the presentation for the start of the "N+2" game. Therefore, the left stop presentation and center display that had been output up until that point are canceled. Also, even if a command for the start of the "N+2" game is received while the center display is being output, no error notification or the like is issued, and the presentation for the start of the "N+2" game is output in accordance with the received command.

Pattern 4 is an example in which the remaining number of games during AT is displayed in the sub-display. Furthermore, in pattern 4, the main operation, disconnection timing, and communication recovery timing are the same as pattern 3.
The main control board 50 transmits a command for the number of remaining AT games to the sub control board 80 at the start of each game. When the sub control board 80 receives a command indicating the remaining number of games for AT from the main control board 50, it updates the display of the number of remaining games for AT. Note that during AT, the display of the remaining number of games is not displayed alone, but is output together with the press order effect of pattern 3.

In pattern 4, the main control board 50 transmits a command for the remaining number of games during AT to the sub control board 80 when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of the game). Here, in the "N" game, it is assumed that the number of remaining AT games is 10 games.
At the start of the "N" game, the sub control board 80 displays the number of remaining games during AT (10 remaining games) based on the command received from the main control board 50.
Then, if the wire is disconnected in the middle of the "N" game and the disconnection state continues at the start of the "N+1" game, the main control board 50 will cause the sub Although the sub-control board 80 executes a process for transmitting a command for the remaining number of games (9 games) during AT to the control board 80, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (due to a disconnection). Therefore, for the "N+1" game, "10 remaining games" for the "N" game remain displayed.

Then, during the "N+1" game (after the middle left stop), the communication is restored, and when the game moves on to the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 connects to the sub control board 80 at the start of the "N+2" game. In contrast, a command indicating the remaining number of games (8 games) during AT is sent. When the sub control board 80 receives this command, it updates the display from the remaining 10 games to the remaining 8 games.

Pattern 5 is an example in which the main operation, disconnection timing, and communication recovery timing are the same as pattern 4, but the "N" game number is one game remaining in the AT.
At the start of the "N" game (when the start switch 41 is operated), the main control board 50 transmits a command of the remaining number of games (one game remaining) during the AT to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it updates the display to one game remaining (from the previous display of two games remaining).
In the case where a disconnection occurs after the right stop of the "N" game, the main control board 50 transmits a command to the sub-control board 80 at the start of the "N+1" game (when the start switch 41 is operated) indicating that the number of games remaining in the AT is 0, but the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (same as pattern 4). Therefore, at the start of the "N+1" game, the display indicating that there is one game remaining in the AT continues.

Further, when the sub control board 80 ends AT, it outputs an AT end effect. The AT end effect is executed at the end of the game based on the reception (at the start of the game) of a command indicating that the remaining number of games during AT is 0 games.
However, in the example of pattern 5, the sub control board 80 has not received the command indicating that the remaining number of games during AT is 0 games, so the AT end effect is not output. Therefore, even at the end of the "N+1" game, the effect indicating that there is only one AT game left is output.

Then, when the "N+1" game ends and the transition to the "N+2" game begins, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating a normal game (non-AT) to the sub control board 80 at the start of the "N+2" game. Send. Based on the reception of this command, the sub control board 80 erases the display of "1 game remaining" and outputs a normal (non-AT) effect.
When the AT ends, an image such as "Pachinko and Pachislot are gaming machines that can be enjoyed in moderation" is displayed to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game. However, in the case of pattern 5, since the sub-display has not returned to normal at the end of the "N+1" game, the image cannot be displayed. Therefore, as a countermeasure against this, the game history is managed on the sub-control board 80 side, and when the next game (in the example of FIG. An example of this is to display the image at the start of the process.

In the above patterns 1 to 5, when a disconnection occurs on the "N"th game, the sub-control board 80 continues to output the presentation that was being shown immediately before the disconnection occurred on the "N"th game until communication is restored, and when communication is restored during the "N+1"th game, it outputs the continuation of the presentation that was being shown on the "N"th game based on the command received on the "N+1"th game. Therefore, for example, in pattern 1, when a command to stop left is received after communication is restored on the "N+1"th game, the correct push order presentation will be output regardless of whether the stop switch 42 was actually operated in the correct push order.

On the other hand, for example, in pattern 1, if a medium stop command is received after communication is restored in the "N+1" game, the pressing order of the effects currently being output, that is, the "N" game. Since the incorrect press order is used for the middle left display, the press order failure effect is output regardless of whether or not the stop switches 42 are actually operated in the correct press order. However, even if the push order failure effect is output in the "N+1" game, if the player operates the stop switch 42 according to the correct press order in the "N+1" game, the symbols will be advantageous to the player. Since the combinations are stopped and displayed, there is no disadvantage to the player.

As described above, when communication is restored in the "N+1" game, the "N+1" game outputs a presentation that continues the presentation before the disconnection (the "N" game), and at the start of the "N+2" game, the presentation is reset (returned to the correct presentation). This makes it possible to minimize the output of unnatural presentation in both the game in which the disconnection occurred and the game in which communication is restored, and to avoid misunderstandings by the player as much as possible.

In addition, the example in Figure 11 shows an example in which communication is restored in the "N+1"th game after a disconnection occurs in the "N"th game, but even if communication is restored two or more games after the disconnection occurs, the same as Figure 11 is true.
For example, if a disconnection occurs on the "N"th game and communication is restored on the "N+a"th game (a = 2 or more), the presentation that was present just before the disconnection on the "N"th game will continue to be output until the "N+a-1"th game. Then, on the "N+a"th game where communication is restored, the presentation that was continuing to be output for the "N"th game will be continued based on the command received after communication is restored. Next, at the start of the "N+a+1"th game, the presentation is updated to the presentation at the start of the "N+a+1"th game (the correct presentation).

<Fourth embodiment>
When rotating and stopping the reel 31, the motor 32 performs acceleration, constant speed, deceleration, and stop processing, all of which are in an excited state. Then, when the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, a state in which four phases are simultaneously excited (hereinafter referred to as a "four-phase excitation state") is set for a predetermined time (time T11 described later).
The fourth embodiment relates to the time relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 and the four-phase excitation state when the motor 32 is stopped.
FIG. 12 is a sectional view showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the detection sensor 42e in the fourth embodiment. Note that hatching is omitted in FIG. 12 from the viewpoint of ease of viewing the drawing. Moreover, FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining the fourth embodiment, and does not mean that the actual product has a structure like that shown in FIG. 12. In FIG. 12, the process from when the stop button 42a is pressed until it returns to its original state is illustrated in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d). In the figure, the upper side is the player's side, and the lower side is the inside of the slot machine 10. In the figure, the side above the front door 12 is the side visible to the player.
Furthermore, the line where the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d is indicated by a dotted line. The moment when the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line is the moment when the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d.

In FIG. 12(a), the stop button 42a is an operating body for the stop switch 42, and is operated by the player (pushed into the inside of the slot machine 10) when turning on the stop switch 42. The player side of the stop button 42a is arranged so as to protrude from the front door 12 provided at the front of the housing of the slot machine 10 by about several millimeters. When this part is viewed from the front on the player's side, it has a substantially cylindrical shape. In the no-load state, the stop button 42a is biased in the F3 direction (outward direction, toward the player) in FIG. The player side end of 42a protrudes from the front door 12. In this state, the lower surface portion of the stop button 42a (hereinafter referred to as the "flange-shaped portion") in the figure is in contact with the front door 12.
On the other hand, the stopper 42b is provided inside the front door 12 (inside the casing), and is a portion that comes into contact with the stop button 42a when the stop button 42a is pushed in, and prohibits further movement of the stop button 42a. It is.

A movable piece 42d that is movable integrally with the stop button 42a is provided on the lower surface side of the stop button 42a in the figure. Furthermore, a detection sensor 42e for detecting the movement of the moving piece 42d is arranged directly below the moving piece 42d. In the no-load state shown in (a) in the figure, when the stop button 42a is biased toward the front door 12 by the biasing force of the coil spring 42c, the tip of the moving piece 42d (lower end in the figure) is It is arranged at a position away from the detection sensor 42e. Therefore, in the state shown in (a) in the figure, the detection sensor 42e is not detecting the moving piece 42d and is in an off state.

Next, as shown in (b) in the figure, when the player wants to stop the rotation of the reels 31, the player pushes the stop button 42a in the F4 direction. As a result, the stop button 42a moves downward in the figure against the biasing force of the coil spring 42c. When the stop button 42a moves downward in the figure, the movable piece 42d, which is integral with the stop button 42a, also moves downward in the figure. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d enters into the detection sensor 42e. Then, when the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state. FIG. 12(b) shows the positions of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state. At the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned on, the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a is not yet in contact with the stopper 42b, and there is a gap between the stop button 42a and the stopper 42b.

When the stop button 42a is pressed further from the state shown in FIG. 12(b), the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a comes into contact with the stopper 42c, as shown in FIG. 12(c). This position is the deepest part when the stop button 42a is pressed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 12(c), the tip of the moving piece 42d remains detected by the detection sensor 42e, so the detection sensor 42e is in the ON state.

When the player releases the push button 42a from the state shown in FIG. 12(c) (removes the force in the direction F4 in FIG. 12(c)), the urging force F3 of the coil spring 42c causes the stop button 42a to be pressed down. A force is applied to return it to its initial position. As a result, the stop button 42a and the moving piece 42d that is integral with the stop button 42a move upward in the figure. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d does not come into contact with the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, and the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state (FIG. 12(d)).

FIG. 12(d) shows the arrangement of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state. In the state shown in FIG. 12(d), the stop button 42a has not returned to the final position. When the stop button 42a is further returned from the state shown in FIG. 12(d), the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a comes into contact with the front door 12, and the stop button 42a stops at this position. This state is the state shown in FIG. 12(a), and is the no-load state of the stop button 42a.
Note that the state in FIG. 12(b) showing the timing at which the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state and the state in FIG. 12(d) showing the timing at which the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state are generally Although they are the same, there is no particular problem even if there is a slight deviation.

13A and 13B are diagrams showing, in a time chart, the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the excited state of the motor 32 in the fourth embodiment, where FIG. 13A shows Example 1 and FIG. 13B shows Example 2. In FIG.
In FIG. 13(a), the stop button 42a is in the initial position (FIG. 12(a)) in the unloaded state, and the time when the stop button 42a starts to be pressed is set to S41. The time when the stop button 42a is pressed and the detection sensor 42e changes from off to on, i.e., when the state of FIG. 12(b) is reached is set to S42. The stop button 42a is further pressed from that position, and the time when the stop button 42a reaches the deepest part (when the state of FIG. 12(c) is reached is set to S43. The above times S41, S42, and S43 depend on the pressing speed of the player and are not constant. If the stop button 42a is pressed slowly, the time from time S41 to S43 will be longer, and if the stop button 42a is pressed quickly, the time from time S41 to S43 will be shorter.

Next, at time S44, the press of the stop button 42a is released. It is assumed that the stop button 42a is located at the deepest position at time S44.
When the stop button 42a is released from being pressed, the spring force of the coil spring 42c applies a force that tends to return the stop button 42a to its initial position, as described above. It is assumed that the operator of the stop button 42a does not touch the stop button 42a from the moment the stop button 42a is released from being pressed.
Then, the time when the detection sensor 42e is turned from on to off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 12(d) is reached, is defined as S45. Here, the time from time S44 to S45 is assumed to be T11.

Time T11 is a variable determined by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke (travel distance) of the stop button 42a from the deepest position to the position where the detection sensor 42e turns off. In example 1 (a), the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a are designed so that time T11 is 100 ms.

On the other hand, when it is detected that the stop switch 42 is turned on (specifically, the detection sensor 42e is turned on) (in the state shown in FIG. 12(b)), the reel control means 65 controls the reel 31 is executed, and the reel 31 is stopped at a position corresponding to the winning lottery result by the winning lottery means (result determined by the internal lottery means). As described above, the time from when the reel 31 stop control is started (from when the detection sensor 42e is turned on) until the reel 31 stops is as follows (except for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB game). It is set within 190ms (when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 21 symbols, the number of frames to be moved is within 5 frames, and when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 20 symbols, the number of frames to be moved is within 4 frames). Therefore, the time from when the reels 31 start decelerating to when the reels 31 stop is not constant because it varies depending on the lottery result and the position of the reels 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.

Furthermore, after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position, the reel control means 65 causes the motor 32 to be in a state in which four phases are simultaneously excited (braked) for a predetermined period of time (the above-mentioned four-phase excitation state).
Here, the motor 32 in this embodiment is a four-phase stepping motor, and while the motor 32 (reel 31) is rotating, for example, one- and two-phase excitation is performed (however, this is not limited to one- and two-phase excitation). Therefore, even while the motor 32 is rotating, it is in one excitation state. Then, when the rotational drive of the motor 32 is stopped, it is switched to a four-phase excitation state.
In addition, when performing a bound stop after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position (when making the reel 31 appear to vibrate at the stopped position), it is possible to use, for example, a three-phase excitation state instead of a four-phase excitation state.

At the moment when the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, there is a risk that the rotation of the motor 32 and the reel 31 will exceed the desired stop position due to the inertia of the rotation of the motor 32 and the reel 31. By setting it in a four-phase excitation state and generating static torque, it is prevented from moving from the stopped position due to inertia. When the motor 32 is in the four-phase excitation state, reception of the next operation of the stop switch 42 is not permitted. At the time of the first or second stop, the operation of the next stop switch 42 is permitted because the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 changes from the on state to the off state (returns to the state shown in FIG. 12(d)). ), and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32, which has stopped its rotational drive, has ended.

The reason for controlling in this way is as follows.
In order to maintain the stop position of the reel 31, the motor 32 is controlled to a four-phase excitation state, but when controlled in this way, a larger load is applied than normal, so the load on the entire slot machine 10 is reduced. It gets bigger. Therefore, in order to reduce this load, after the four-phase excitation state of one motor 32 is finished, it is possible to accept the next operation of the stop button 42a.

In Example 1 of FIG. 13(a), when the result of the role selection by the role selection means (result determined by the internal selection means) is a predetermined result (for example, when the push order bell is won), the excitation time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is set to 90 interrupts (2.235 x 90 = 201.15 ms). Here, when the result of the role selection is a predetermined result, the excitation time T12 of the four-phase excitation state is set to "90 interrupts", meaning that the excitation time T12 is not always constant regardless of the result of the role selection.

Therefore, in Example 1 of the fourth embodiment, it is set so that "T11<T12".
Here, when the stop control of the reel 31 is started from time S42, the reel 31 stops within 190 ms. As mentioned above, when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "21", the number of moving frames during stop control is within 5 frames (minimum 1 frame), or when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "20", Since the number of moving frames during stop control is within 4 frames (minimum 1 frame), the reel 31 stops within approximately "40" to "190" ms from time S42.
On the other hand, the time from when the detection sensor 42e changes from the OFF state to the ON state until the stop button 42e reaches the deepest position and the pressing force of the stop button 42e is released (time from time S42 to S44) is , about "40" to "180" ms. Therefore, the time when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is started and the time S44 when the stop button 42a is released from being pressed are close to each other (almost the same time).

Therefore, in Example 1, it is assumed that the four-phase excitation state is started at the timing when the stop button 42a is released from being pressed (time S44), and after the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state (time S45), It is designed so that the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (time T12 elapses). Therefore, when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends, it can be set so that the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.
In this way, if the detection sensor 42e is designed to turn off before the end of the four-phase excitation state, it is possible to allow the next operation of the stop button 42a to be accepted at the end of the four-phase excitation state. . This allows the game to proceed at high speed.

On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 13(b), from the moment the stop button 42a reaches the deepest point is released (time S44) until the detection sensor 42e turns from on to off (at time S45). This is an example in which the time T11 (until the arrival time) is set to 300 ms. Therefore, the return time of the stop button 42a is three times longer than in Example 1. As described above, the return time of the stop button 42a can be set (adjusted) by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a.

On the other hand, in Example 2, the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is set to 45 interrupts (100.575 ms).
In Example 2, similarly to Example 1, the four-phase excitation state is started from the moment (time S44) when the stop button 42a that has reached the deepest part is released, and the detection sensor 42e is designed to be turned off after the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends. Therefore, when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, it is possible to set it so that the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.

In this way, by designing the four-phase excitation state to end when the detection sensor 42e turns off, it is possible to permit acceptance of the next operation of the stop button 42a at the point when the detection sensor 42e turns off, which allows the game to proceed at high speed.
As described above, both Example 1 and Example 2 have advantages in terms of control.
In addition, in Example 1 and Example 2 of Fig. 13, the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is different. However, for example, if the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, if "T11 <T12", the next stop button 42a can be accepted at the time when the four-phase excitation state ends. Therefore, if the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, Example 1 allows the game to be completed at a higher speed.

<Fifth embodiment>
The fifth embodiment relates to the relationship between power on/off and program startup.
FIG. 14 is a time chart showing an outline of control in the fifth embodiment.
In FIG. 14, (a) is a diagram showing a state when power is cut off after starting the main program (program of the main control board 50). It is assumed that the power is turned on at time S51 and then turned off at time S55.
When the power is turned on at time S51 (when the power switch 11 in FIG. 1 is turned on), power supply starts to both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, and the main control board 50 and The voltage level of the sub-control board 80 gradually increases and reaches the supply level V0 (the level when the power is on). Note that in FIG. 14, the voltage supply level V0, power-off detection level V1, and drive voltage limit V2 are the same as those in FIG. 3 (first embodiment (A)).

After the power is turned on at time S51, the time when the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 reach the supply level V0 is defined as S52. Thereafter, the subprogram by the sub control board 80 is started from time S53, when time T22 has elapsed from time S52. Thereafter, the main program by the main control board 50 is started from time S54 when time T23 (T23>T22) has elapsed from time S52. In this way, the subprogram is started first and then the main program is started when the main control board 50 sends the first command to the sub control board 80 after power is turned on. This is to keep the sub-control board 80 side ready to receive the command.

Next, when a power outage occurs at time S55 (power switch 11 is turned off, a power outage, etc.), the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 gradually decrease. Even if the voltage level decreases, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 can execute the power outage process as long as the voltage is equal to or higher than the drive voltage limit V2.
Furthermore, when a power interruption occurs at time S55, the voltage reaches the power interruption detection level V1 at time T0 (20 interrupts) as in Fig. 3, and the power interruption is detected (time S56). Furthermore, after the power interruption is detected, for example, after one interrupt, power interruption processing is executed as in Fig. 3. The power interruption processing is assumed to end at time S57.
Thereafter, when time S58 is reached, the voltage falls below the drive voltage limit V2 and the program (processing) cannot be executed, so control is performed so that the power-off process ends before time S58 is reached.

When the main program starts at time S54, it sets the main CPU 55, checks the RWM 53, checks whether the previous power off was normal, checks the status of the setting key switch, etc., and then starts interrupt processing. . When the setting key switch is off, the power-off recovery process (initialization of a predetermined range of the RWM 53, etc.) is executed after starting the interrupt process. On the other hand, when the setting key switch is on, the process proceeds to the setting change process after starting the interrupt process.
As shown in FIG. 14(a), if a power-off occurs after starting the main program and the setting key switch is off, the power-off process is executed after the power-off recovery process is completed. do. This allows the program to terminate normally.
On the other hand, if a power-off occurs after starting the main program and the setting key switch is on, the power-off process is executed without starting the setting change process. This is because if the setting change process is executed after a power outage occurs, a problem may occur.

Furthermore, in order to properly execute the main program, the settings of the main CPU 55 and the check of the RWM 53 must be executed even if a power outage is detected at the same time as the main program is started.
Furthermore, after the main program is started, it is always executed until the interrupt is started even if the power is subsequently cut off. This is to detect power outage in interrupt processing. Note that, as in the first embodiment (A), for example, at the "N" interrupt, a voltage drop (power outage detection level V1) that is determined to have occurred is detected, and the next "N+1" game is started. However, when the voltage drop is detected, a power outage is detected at the "N+1" interrupt (it is determined that the power is out). Then, the power-off process is executed from the "N+2" interrupt.

In the example of FIG. 14A, the main program is started at time S54, and the power is turned off at time S55. However, even if a power outage occurs at the same time as time S54 (startup of the main program), the setting is such that the power outage processing can be completed before the voltage reaches the drive voltage limit V2.
In FIG. 14A, the time T21 from power-on (time S51) until the voltage reaches the supply level V0 (time S52) is the period from when the power is turned off (time S55) until the voltage reaches the Low level. It is set to be shorter than the time T24.
Furthermore, the time T23 (the time from when the voltage reaches the supply level V0 until the main program is activated) is set to be shorter than the time T24.

FIG. 14(b) is an example in which power is cut off before the main control board 50 starts the main program. In the example of FIG. 14(b), the power is turned on at time S51, and the power is turned off at time S59. Here, time S59 is before time S54 in FIG. 14(a). That is, after the power necessary for starting the main program (supply level V0) is supplied, a power outage occurs before a predetermined time (time T23) has elapsed (before reaching time S54), and the voltage has decreased. This is an example. In such a case, the main program will not start. Therefore, after that, the voltage gradually decreases, and eventually the power becomes Low level.
Note that in the example of FIG. 14(b), when the power is turned on again, it can be started normally.
Although not shown in FIG. 14, it is possible that the power is cut off immediately after the subprogram starts (after time S53) and before time S54 (before the main program starts). It will be done.
If a power-off occurs at the above-mentioned timing, the subprogram executes the subprogram's power-off processing. Then, it is possible to complete the subprogram power-off process before the voltage supplied to the sub control board 80 reaches the drive voltage limit V2.
Further, since the power is cut off at the above-mentioned timing before the main program is started, the main program is not started as described above.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In this embodiment, the passage sensor 46 is provided. The passage sensor 46 increases the accuracy of coin insertion determination and is also effective as a countermeasure against fraud. However, the passage sensor 46 does not need to be provided, and only the pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be provided.

(2) In FIG. 2, the input sensors 44a and 44b are configured to detect medals M moving in a substantially horizontal direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M when it is falling substantially vertically downward.
(3) In FIG. 2, the blocker 45 is arranged on the lower surface side of the medal passage, but the blocker 45 is not limited thereto. Any device may be used as long as it has a function of sending the medals M out of the medal path before the medals M are detected by the input sensor 44a.
Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the input sensors 44a and 44b are shown to detect slightly above the center position of the medal M when viewed from the front, but the actual product may be configured like this. does not mean. The input sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged in any manner as long as they can reliably detect the passing medals M.

(4) In FIG. 3, the time T2 is the time from the moment the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment the medal M is positioned at M4, but it is not limited to this. For example, the medal M may be at position M1 in FIG. 2, and the time from the moment the medal is released to the time it reaches M4 may be T2, and "T2>T1" may be set. Alternatively, the time taken for the medal M to reach M4 from any predetermined position between M1 and M2 may be set to T2, and "T2>T1" may be set.

(5) In the first embodiment (A), when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process is executed before the medal M reaches M4. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process may be executed before the medal M reaches M3. That is, in this case, the medal M is not detected by the insertion sensor 44a due to the power-off process.
Alternatively, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process may be executed before the medal M reaches the insertion sensor 44b. In this case, the medal M is detected by the input sensor 44a, but is not detected by the input sensor 44b, and the power-off process is executed.

(6) Furthermore, in the first embodiment (A), a power outage occurs at the moment the medal M is positioned at M2, and the time T1 from detecting the power outage to executing power outage processing (blocker off) An example of setting is to be shorter than the time required for the medal M to reach the position where the blocker 45 is installed from the position M2 (this time is referred to as "T2'"). With this setting, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the blocker 45 has already been turned off by the time the medal M reaches the blocker 45 position from the M2 position. Therefore, the medal can be prevented from passing through the input sensors 44a and 44b.
In addition, in the above, the position of the medal M2 may be the moment when the hand is released at the position of M1, or a predetermined position between M1 and M2.

(7) As shown in Fig. 3, in the first embodiment (A), the power-off process (blocker off) is executed in the interrupt process following the interrupt process that detected the power-off. However, this is not limited to the above, and the power-off process (blocker off) may be set to be executed, for example, after interrupt processes "2" to "5" counting from the interrupt process that detected the power-off. Alternatively, the power-off process (blocker off) may be executed in the interrupt process that detected the power-off.
(8) In the first embodiment (A) of FIG. 3, when a power outage occurs, the time T0 until the voltage reaches the sustain level V1 from the supply level V0 is set to 20 interrupts. However, this is not limited to this and can be set to various values depending on the performance of the power supply.

(9) In the first embodiment (C) of FIG. 7, when the medal M is dispensed by the medal dispensing device, the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b detect the movable piece 39a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout sensors 37a and 37b may detect the medals M themselves to be paid out. For example, the payout sensors 37a and 37 may be arranged like the input sensors 44a and 44b shown in FIG. 4 to detect the passage of the medals M (to be paid out).

In addition, when the payout sensors 37a and 37b are arranged in this way, when the medal M passes through the payout sensors 37a and 37b,
Dispensing sensor 37a on, dispensing sensor 37b off (time S31')
Dispensing sensor 37a on, dispensing sensor 37b on (time S32')
Dispensing sensor 37a off, dispensing sensor 37b on (time S33')
Dispensing sensor 37a off, dispensing sensor 37b off (time S34')
Follow the progress.
Then, the time from time S31' to S34' is set to be shorter than time T1 (time from occurrence of power-off to execution of power-off processing).

(10) In the second embodiment, the gate mark 57b is formed so that the protrusion 57d and the recessed part 57c are on the outside, but conversely, it is formed so that the protrusion 57d and the recessed part 57c are on the inside. It is also possible. The same applies to the gate mark 58b on the lower cover 58. In this case, if the gate trace 57b is shaped as shown in FIG. 10(b), the outside of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58 will be a smooth surface. On the other hand, if the shape shown in FIG. 10(c) is adopted, a protrusion 57e is formed on the outside of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58.

(11) In the second embodiment, an example of the board case 56 in which the main control board 50 is housed is given. However, the second embodiment can be applied not only to the main control board 50 but also to other control boards for which it is desired to prevent fraud, such as the board case of the sub-control board 80. As shown in FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 also includes the RWM 83, ROM 54, sub-CPU 85, etc., but on the upper surface of the upper cover of the board case of the sub-control board 80, at least the sub-CPU 85 is not arranged vertically (directly below) the gate mark, and further, the RWM 83 and ROM 54 are not arranged either. Similarly, the model number display area of the sub-control board 80 is not arranged vertically (directly below) the gate mark.

(12) In the third embodiment, the push order effect during AT, the display of the operated stop switch 42 (stopped reel 31), and the number of remaining games during AT are given as examples. The third embodiment can be applied even when displaying the number of acquired coins and the remaining number of acquired coins in a game (BB game, etc.).
For example, the number of coins acquired at the start of game "N" is "200", the number of coins acquired at the start of game "N+1" is "209", and the number of coins acquired at the start of game "N+2" is "218'' sheets. It is also assumed that the main control board 50 transmits a command regarding the number of acquired coins to the sub-control board 80 at the start of each game.
As in the example shown in FIG. 11, it is assumed that a disconnection occurs during the "N" game, and communication is restored during the "N+1" game.

In this case, the sub-control board 80 displays "200" as the number of acquired coins in the "N" game. Further, at the start of the "N+1" game, a command regarding the number of acquired coins is not received (due to a disconnection), so the display of the acquired number of coins "200" is also maintained in the "N+1" game. Next, when the sub control board 80 receives a command regarding the number of acquired coins at the start of the "N+2" game, it updates the display to show the acquired number of coins "218" based on the command.

(13) In the third embodiment, FIG. 11 shows an example in which the image display is restored to normal at the start of the "N+2" game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display may be restored to normal after the "N+1" game has stopped completely or when a bet operation is performed thereafter. Alternatively, the image display may be restored to normal at a predetermined timing based on a command sent to the sub-control board 80 at or after the stop of all the games.

(14) In the third embodiment, for example, in the middle of the disconnected "N+1" game, a lottery for adding (adding) the number of coins that can be won during the AT or the number of games may be won. In this case, since the "N+1" game is disconnected, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive a command based on the winning of the add-on lottery. Therefore, in this case, for example, at the start of the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 may send a command indicating the result after the add-on lottery, and at the start of the "N+2" game, the sub-control board 80 may display the game information after the add-on (number of coins that can be won and the number of games).

(15) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), for example, if the wire is disconnected after the first right stop of the "N" game, and the communication is restored before the first stop switch 42 of the "N+1" game is operated. is possible. Then, in the "N+1" game, it is assumed that the player makes the first stop on the right. In this case, when the sub-control board 80 receives the right first stop command for the "N+1" game, it means that it has received the stop command for the stop switch 42 that has already been operated, so it does not perform the press order failure effect. Output. Then, the image display may be restored to normal at the time of a bet operation after all the "N+1" games are stopped or at the start of the "N+2" games.

(16) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), when the number of acquired coins is displayed as an image during AT, the following method may be cited as an example of the process of updating the image display of the acquired number of coins before and after the disconnection.
When there is a payout process, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the number of acquired coins to the sub control board 80. Here, when a disconnection occurs during the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the number of acquired coins for the "N" game. It is assumed that immediately before the disconnection of the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 was displaying "100" as the number of coins acquired during AT. Furthermore, it is assumed that the "N" game number and the "N+1" game number during AT will each acquire 10 coins.
In this case, the number of coins acquired during AT at the end of the "N" game should originally be "110", but it remains "100" (because of the disconnection). Then, it is assumed that communication is restored during the "N+1" game. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 is able to return the number of coins acquired during AT to a normal value based on the command for the number of acquired coins received during the payout process for the "N+1" game. Here, the value may be returned to the normal value at the time of the payout process for the "N+1" game, or it may be returned to the normal value at the start of the "N+2" game, as in the example of FIG. Furthermore, it may be updated to "110" during the payout process for the "N+1" game, and updated to "120" at the start of the "N+2" game.

(17) In this embodiment, the slot machine 10 is illustrated as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is also applicable to, for example, a pachinko gaming machine. In pachinko gaming machines, there is a starting hole (a winning hole that starts the symbol fluctuations by the symbol fluctuation display device and triggers the acquisition of random numbers for the jackpot lottery), an electric chew prize opening (when a game ball wins, the next winning hole is triggered). In order to make it easier, there are various winning openings such as an accessory that opens for a certain period of time and then closes.The electric chew is not limited to the shape of a tulip. provided. And it is possible to apply 1st Embodiment (B) in these winning a prize openings.

Specifically, for example, the starting hole has a winning sensor (a sensor that first detects the game ball that has entered the starting hole) and an ejection sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball after being detected by the winning sensor). It is provided. In addition, the attacker is provided with a V winning sensor (a sensor that first detects the game ball that has won by the attacker) and a discharge sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball after being detected by the V winning sensor). .
For example, in the case of a starting opening, if the power is cut off at the moment when a game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the setting is made so that the discharge sensor can detect the game ball before the power cutoff process is executed. Thereby, even if the power is cut off at the moment when a game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the winning balls can be counted correctly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from not being paid out even though the game balls have entered the prize opening. The same applies to the attacker's V winning sensor and discharge sensor.

(18) In this embodiment, a slot machine 10 is given as an example of one type of gaming machine, but the slot machine 10 is not limited to a "reel type gaming machine" (so-called "pachislot gaming machine") installed in a Type 4 business establishment that is subject to the Entertainment and Amusement Act, and can also be applied to, for example, casino machines and enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) that do not use medals for gaming as gaming media.

Here, the enclosed game machine (medalless game machine) can eliminate the medal payout device (unit including the hopper 35, hopper motor 36, and payout sensor 37) in FIG. 1, for example. Further, the medal slot 47 and the medal selector can also be made unnecessary. All of the electronic medals (electronic game media) awarded by winning combinations are stored in the credit number display LED 76. In this case, it is conceivable that the credit number display LED 76 is composed of, for example, five digits (a maximum of "99,999" electronic medals can be stored).
Even in such casino machines and enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines), the present invention can be applied to all of the above-mentioned embodiments and the following embodiments, except for the first embodiment.

<Sixth embodiment>
The sixth embodiment relates to control of the medal payout device 15 by the main control board 50.
Here, FIGS. 15 to 17 are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the position of the hopper disk 101, the position of the medal, and the drive control of the hopper motor 36 in the sixth embodiment.
Further, FIG. 15(a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device 15 showing the state before the last ejected medal comes into contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. FIG. 7 is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is more advanced than in FIG.

Furthermore, FIG. 16(a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device 15 showing a state in which the last ejected medal is in contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. 16(b) is a plan view of the last ejected medal. It is a top view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the movable shaft 38b is moved by being pushed.
Further, FIG. 17(a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device 15 showing the state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state where the rotation of the disk is stopped.

In the sixth embodiment, the medal payout device 15 includes a hopper 35 that stores medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 that rotates the hopper disk 101. Further, as in the first embodiment, the medal payout device 15 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The main control board 50 then controls the driving of the hopper motor 36.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15 to 17, the hopper disk 101 is formed into a disk shape, and the hopper disk 101 has a holding portion that is an opening that can hold medals stored in the hopper. Eight pieces 102 are provided along the outer periphery of the hopper disk 101.
Furthermore, each holding portion 102 is formed in the shape of a circular hole that penetrates from the upper surface to the lower surface of the hopper disk 101. The medals stored in the hopper 35 are formed to enter into each holding part 102 from the upper opening of each holding part 102 and to be held by each holding part 102, respectively.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, when the hopper motor 36 is driven during the medal payout process, the hopper disk 101 shown in FIGS. 15 to 17 rotates clockwise. Then, when the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise, the medals held in each holding section 102 move clockwise in an arc together with the hopper disk 101, and are sequentially ejected from the ejection section 103.
When a medal is discharged from the discharge section 103, the holding section 102 that held the medal becomes empty. Then, other medals stored in the hopper 35 newly enter into the empty holding section 102.

Further, as described in the first embodiment (C), the medal payout device 15 includes a fixed shaft 38a and a movable shaft 38b. In the sixth embodiment, the space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b is a discharge section 103 from which medals are discharged.
As shown in FIG. 16(b), when the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves and the distance between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal. and the movable shaft 38b. At this time, the medals will be ejected from the ejecting section 103.
Furthermore, the moment the medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 6), the medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103. It's a moment. When the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that the medals have been ejected from the ejection section 103.

In addition, in one payout process, the last medal to be ejected from the dispensing unit 103 is referred to as the "last ejected medal", and in the next payout process, the medal to be ejected first from the dispensing part 103 is referred to as the "first medal". It is called "Ejection Medal".
In FIGS. 15 to 17, medals are indicated by two-dot chain lines. The medals marked with the letter "A" are the last medals to be ejected in one payout process, and the medals marked with the letter "B" are the first medals to be ejected in the next payout process.

In addition, the position of the holding section 102 where the last ejected medal is held at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103 in one payout process is referred to as the "first position", and The position of the holding unit 102 where the first ejected medal in the next payout process is held at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting unit 103 in the process is referred to as a "second position."
FIG. 17(a) shows the state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103 (the hopper disk 101, each holding section 102, each medal with letters "A" to "D", the fixed shaft 38a). , and the positional relationship of the movable shaft 38b). In FIG. 17(a), the position of the holding part 102 where the medal with the letter "A" was held is the first position, and the medal with the letter "B" is held. The position of the holding part 102 is the second position.

In the sixth embodiment, when the main control board 50 finishes one payout process, the holding part 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process is moved to the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped when the hopper disk 101 is positioned between the
FIG. 17(b) shows a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped after the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103. In FIG. 17(b), the first position and the second position are each indicated by a broken line. Furthermore, in FIG. 17(b), the medals marked with the letter "B" are the first ejected medals in the next payout process. Then, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the hopper disk 101 is held in a state where the holding part 102 holding the medal with the letter "B" is located between the first position and the second position. rotation has stopped.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor 36.
Therefore, at the end of the payout process, the main control board 50 supplies the hopper motor 36 with a current in the opposite direction to that used when discharging medals, so that the drive of the hopper motor 36 is abruptly stopped, and the hopper disk 101 The rotation of can be stopped suddenly.

Furthermore, as described above, when the medals are ejected from the ejecting section 103 and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, the payout sensor 37 detects this fact.
Therefore, when the payout sensor 37 detects that the last ejected medal has been ejected from the ejecting section 103, a current is applied to the hopper motor 36 in the opposite direction to that used when ejecting medals, and the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is controlled. When stopped suddenly, the holding section 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process can be stopped at the second position.

Furthermore, by passing current through the hopper motor 36 in the opposite direction to that used when discharging medals, the hopper motor 36 can be driven in the opposite direction, and the hopper disk 101 can be rotated in the opposite direction (rotated counterclockwise). .
Therefore, even if the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process passes the second position at the end of the payout process, the current is applied to the hopper in the opposite direction to that when discharging the medals. By flowing the motor 36, the hopper disk 101 can be reversely rotated and returned to the second position.
Then, by returning the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal to the second position, the first ejected medal can start moving from the same second position each time. As a result, the same operation can be performed for each payout process, so that the first ejected medals can be stably ejected.

Here, when a constant current is applied to the DC motor as the hopper motor 36, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates from a stopped state, and then reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a time chart showing the relationship among the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the driving state of the hopper motor 36, and the state of medal discharge from the discharge section 103 in the sixth embodiment.
In FIG. 18, the upper line shows the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the middle line shows the driving state of the hopper motor 36, and the lower line shows the medal ejection status from the ejection unit 103.

Further, the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is a digital signal output from a predetermined output port included in the main control board 50, and when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on from off, a constant current is applied to the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 changes from on to off, the current flowing through the hopper motor 36 becomes "0".
Furthermore, in FIG. 18, "stop" in the drive state of the hopper motor 36 indicates a state in which the rotation of the drive shaft is stopped, and "constant speed" in the drive state of the hopper motor 36 indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft is at a constant speed. (constant speed) is reached.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on from off, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually increases from "stop" and then reaches "constant speed."
Further, the portion where the line indicating the drive state of the hopper motor 36 is tilted upward to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually accelerating.

In this way, in the hopper motor 36 using a DC motor, when the drive signal is turned on from off, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates.
Therefore, if the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped at the second position, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 will gradually accelerate until the holding section 102 reaches the first position. Therefore, it takes a longer time than the medal ejection interval at constant speed.
That is, when the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped at the second position, the time required from the start of driving the hopper motor 36 until the first ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103 is longer than the hopper motor 36. This is longer than the medal ejection interval when the drive shaft No. 36 is rotating at a constant speed.
This may give the player a feeling that the first (first) medal is delayed in being ejected.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the main control board 50 is configured such that, at the end of one payout process, the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is located between the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped in the positioned state.
If the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, the distance to reach the first position will be shorter than when it stops at the second position. . As a result, the time it takes to reach the first position is shorter than when stopping at the second position, so even if the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates, the first (first) medal It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the discharge of the game is delayed.

Furthermore, when the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, two adjacent holding sections 102 on the hopper disk 101 are stopped as shown in FIG. 17(b). A portion corresponding to the space between the two is located in front of the discharge section 103.
As a result, a fraudulent act (goto act) in which a fraudulent instrument such as a wire is inserted through the medal dispensing port provided at the lower front of the front door 12 and attempts to access the holding portion 102 of the hopper disk 101 with this fraudulent instrument is carried out. Even if the hopper disk 101 is stolen, the corresponding portion between the two adjacent holding parts 102 on the hopper disk 101 acts as a barrier, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized instruments from accessing the holding parts 102.

Further, when the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is "constant speed", the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise at a constant speed. At this time, the medals held in each holding section 102 are sequentially ejected from the ejecting section 103 at equal intervals.
Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned from on to off, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually decreases from "constant speed" and then reaches "stop."
In FIG. 18, the portion where the line indicating the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is diagonally downward to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually decelerating.

In this way, in the hopper motor 36 using a DC motor, when the drive signal is turned from on to off, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually decelerates.
Then, the last ejected medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (ejecting section 103), and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, whereby the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103. When this is detected by the payout sensor 37, the main control board 50 turns the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 from on to off.
As a result, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually decelerates, and the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is positioned between the first position and the second position. Then, the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 from off, it then transmits a payout start command to the sub control board 80. This payout start command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has started the payout process.
On the other hand, upon receiving the payout start command, the sub control board 80 starts processing related to outputting the payout sound. Thereafter, output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, after the main control board 50 turns the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 from on to off, it then transmits a payout end command to the sub control board 80. This payout end command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has finished the payout process.
On the other hand, upon receiving the payout end command, the sub control board 80 ends the process regarding output of the payout sound. As a result, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 ends.

Here, the "payout sound" means a sound output from the sub-control board 80 side in accordance with the payout of medals. As the payout sound, for example, a sound such as "purururu" can be output from the speaker 22.
In addition, "processing related to outputting sound" refers to a series of processing such as selecting a sound to output, selecting a channel to output the selected sound, and outputting the selected sound from the speaker 22. It means something. By executing this series of processes, the payout sound is actually output from the speaker 22.

Then, when the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36, it transmits a payout start command to the sub-control board 80, and upon receiving the payout start command, the sub-control board 80 performs processing related to the output of the payout sound. By starting this, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be started before the first ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103.

Further, when the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor 36, it transmits a payout end command to the sub-control board 80, and upon receiving the payout end command, the sub-control board 80 performs processing related to the output of the payout sound. By ending the process, when the ejection of medals from the ejection unit 103 is stopped, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be made to end.
This can give the player the impression that the medal payout and the payout sound are synchronized.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the relationship among the operation of the main control board 50, the driving state of the hopper motor 36, the detection state of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and the timing of ejecting medals from the ejecting section 103.
When a payout winning combination is won, the main control board 50 sets payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 and turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36.
For example, when a winning combination of 10 medals is won and 10 medals are to be paid out, "10" is set in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 as data on the number of medals to be paid out.
That is, when paying out "N" medals (N≧1), "N" is set as payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Further, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 "starts" (starts driving) from a "stopped" state, goes through "acceleration", and reaches a "constant speed".
Note that at the end of one payout process, the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is stopped between the first position and the second position. At the start of the process, the hopper motor 36 is made to reach a "constant speed" by the time the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal reaches the first position.
That is, the stop position of the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal is set so that the hopper motor 36 reaches a "constant speed" by the time the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal reaches the first position. are doing.

Then, after the hopper motor 36 goes from "stop" to "acceleration" to "constant speed", the holding part 102 that holds the first ejected medal reaches the first position. The medals are surely ejected from the ejecting section 103.
Furthermore, at the timing (a) in FIG. 19, both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are off.
Note that the timing of (a) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to be low active, unlike the first embodiment (C). That is, the dispensing sensor 37a is set so that it is off when it is detecting the movable piece 39a, and it is on when it is not detecting the movable piece 39a.
On the other hand, the payout sensor 37b is set to be highly active similarly to the first embodiment (C). That is, the dispensing sensor 37b is set so that it is off when it is not detecting the movable piece 39a, and it is on when it is detecting the movable piece 39a.
Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, at the timing (a) in FIG. 19, both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned off.
Note that in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active, and the payout sensor 37b is set to high active. The on/off waveform is reversed.

Further, at the timing (b) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is moved by the medal pushing the movable shaft 38b, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on and the payout sensor 37b is turned off.
Note that the state (b) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (b) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Furthermore, at the timing (c) in FIG. 19, the space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal, and the payout sensor 37a is in the on state, and the payout sensor 37b is also in the on state. Become. At this time, the medals are ejected from between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (ejecting section 103).
Note that the state (c) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (c) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Further, at the timing (d) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is biased by the spring 39b and is returning to its original position, and the dispensing sensor 37a is in the on state and the dispensing sensor 37b is in the off state. becomes.
Note that the state (d) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Further, at the timing (e) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is urged by the spring 39b and returns to its original position, and the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b are both turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 determines that one medal has been ejected, and updates the payout number data.
Note that the state (e) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

When dispensing "N" medals, steps (a) to (e) in FIG. 19 are repeated until it is determined that the "N"th medal has been dispensed.
When determining that the "N"th medal has been ejected, the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor 36.
Furthermore, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 undergoes "deceleration" and then comes to "stop."
This completes the payout process for "N" medals.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the flow of payout processing in the sixth embodiment.
In the payout process by the main control board 50, first, in step S101, payout number data is set. This process is a process of storing payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50. For example, when paying out "N" medals (N≧1), "N" is stored as payout number data. Then, the process advances to the next step S102.

In step S102, the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 starts. Then, the process advances to the next step S103.
In step S103, the main control board 50 determines whether the payout sensor 37a is on. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active, and the state in which the movable piece 39a is not detected (the state in which the movable shaft 38b is moved by the medal) is turned on. It is set to be.

If "Yes" is determined in step S103, the process advances to the next step S104, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. Here, if "Yes" in step S104, the process advances to the next step S105. On the other hand, if "No" is determined in step S104, an error occurs.
Here, when the payout sensor 37a is turned on from off, if the payout sensor 37b is already on, the result in step S104 is "No". In this case, it is possible that medals are jammed in the ejection section 103 (medal jam error). Furthermore, when a medal jamming error occurs, the error continues until the jammed medals are removed (the cause of the error is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, remove the stuck medal and operate the reset switch to clear the error.

Although not shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, if "No" continues for a predetermined time in step S103 (the predetermined time elapses with "No"), an error occurs. In this case, it is possible that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty (hopper empty error). Furthermore, when a hopper empty error occurs, the error continues until the hopper 35 is replenished with medals (the cause of the error is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, when the hopper 35 is replenished with medals and the reset switch is operated, the error is canceled.
In step S105, the main control board 50 again determines whether the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, if "Yes" in step S105, the process advances to the next step S106. On the other hand, if "No" is determined in step S105, an error occurs as in the case where "No" is determined in step S104.

In step S106, the main control board 50 determines whether the payout sensor 37b is on. If "Yes" is determined in step S106, the process advances to the next step S107, and the main control board 50 again determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, if "Yes" in step S107, the process advances to the next step S108. On the other hand, if "No" is determined in step S107, an error occurs as in the case where "No" is determined in step S104 or S105.

Proceeding to step S108, the main control board 50 next determines whether the payout sensor 37b is off. If "Yes" is determined in step S108, the process advances to the next step S109, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is off. Further, if "Yes" is determined in step S109, the process advances to step S110, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off.
If "Yes" in step S110, the process advances to the next step S111. On the other hand, if "No" is determined in step S110, an error occurs as in the case where "No" is determined in steps S104, S105, or S107.

In step S111, the main control board 50 updates the payout number data. This process is a process in which "1" is subtracted from the payout number data stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and the data after the subtraction is stored as new payout number data.
In the next step S112, the main control board 50 determines whether the payout number data is "0" or not. Here, when "Yes" in step S112, the process advances to the next step S113, and the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 stops. Then, the payout process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if "No" in step S112, the process returns to step S103. As a result, the next medal will be paid out. Then, the process of returning from step S112 to S103 is repeated until the payout number data becomes "0".

Here, medals discharged from the discharge unit 103 are normally guided to a medal tray through a passage called a medal chute.
However, on rare occasions, a medal discharged from discharge unit 103 may hit the inner wall of the medal chute, bounce back, and return to discharge unit 103. When this happens, the bouncing medal may hit the next medal that is about to be discharged from discharge unit 103, pushing back the medal that is about to be discharged.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, as in steps S103 to S110 in the flowchart of the payout process in FIG. do.
This makes it possible to detect an error in which a medal that is about to be ejected from the ejecting section 103 is pushed back.

For example, suppose that one medal is about to be dispensed, and this medal pushes movable shaft 38b, causing movable shaft 38b to move, turning payout sensor 37a on and payout sensor 37b off (timing (b) in FIG. 19). At this time, suppose that the medal dispensed before this medal bounces back and hits this medal, pushing it back and turning payout sensor 37a off. In this case, the answer is "No" in step S105 in FIG. 20, resulting in an error.
Also, for example, if the medal is pushed back at the timing (c) in Fig. 19, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off, the result in step S107 in Fig. 20 becomes "No", resulting in an error.

<Modification of the sixth embodiment>
Although the sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with eight holding portions 102, but the number of holding portions is not limited to eight. For example, the number of holding portions may be five, six, ten, etc. It can be set as appropriate depending on the situation.
(2) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is formed into a disk shape, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hopper disk 101 may be formed into a sprocket shape, for example. That is, the holding part 102 is not limited to a circular hole shape as long as it can hold a medal.

(3) In the sixth embodiment, the rotation direction of the hopper disk 101 during the medal payout process is clockwise, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the hopper disk 101 may rotate counterclockwise so that the medals held in the holding section 102 are sequentially discharged from the discharge section 103.
(4) In the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor 36. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a stepping motor may be used as the hopper motor 36.

(5) The flow of the payout process in the sixth embodiment is not limited to the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, but may be, for example, the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21. Even with such a flow of payout processing, it is possible to detect the ejection of medals. However, in such a flow of the payout process, it is impossible to detect an error in which a medal that is about to be ejected next is pushed back by a medal that has bounced off the inner wall of the medal chute.
Note that the same step numbers are assigned to processes having the same content in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21.
(6) The first to sixth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to sixth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Seventh embodiment>
This relates to the arrangement of the main control board 50 attached to the inside of the cabinet 13 and the sub-control board 80 attached to the back surface of the front door 12.
FIG. 22 is a side sectional view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, and is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.

The housing of the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 that is open on the front side, and a front door 12 that is attached so that the opening of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed.
Further, the cabinet 13 is configured into a box shape with an open front side by assembling a bottom plate 13a, a back plate 13b, a right side plate, a left side plate, a top plate, etc.
Furthermore, a medal payout device 15 is disposed at the lower part of the interior of the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). This medal dispensing device 15 is for dispensing medals, and includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disk 101. We are prepared.

Further, inside the cabinet 13, above the medal payout device 15, a plate-shaped reel base 110 supported by the back plate 13b, the right side plate, and the left side plate is provided. A display device 14 is arranged.
Further, the symbol display device 14 includes a rectangular reel frame 14a, and three reels 31 are arranged in parallel inside this reel frame 14a.

Furthermore, a motor 32 is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and each motor 32 is fixed to a reel bracket, and each reel bracket is supported by the reel frame 14a.
Furthermore, a transparent reel board case 121 is disposed on the reel frame 14a, and a reel control board 120 is housed in this reel board case 121. This reel control board 120 controls the driving of the three motors 32.

A transparent main board case 56 is disposed inside the cabinet 13 above the pattern display device 14. More specifically, the main board case 56 is fixed to the front side (the inner surface side of the housing) of the back panel 13b of the cabinet 13 at a position corresponding to the upper side of the pattern display device 14. The main control board 50 is accommodated in the main board case 56.
The main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, a RWM 53, a ROM 54, and a main CPU 55. The main control board 50 is further electrically connected to the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the symbol display device 14, the medal payout device 15, the reel control board 120, the sub-control board 80, and the like via the input port 51 or the output port 52.

Further, the front door 12 is attached to cover the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 so as to be able to open and close the opening of the cabinet 13. More specifically, the left side of the front door 12 is attached to the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 via a hinge. The opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed by rotating the front door 12 about this hinge.

A transparent display window is provided in the center of the front door 12. This display window is disposed in a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. Through the display window, the player can see each of the three symbols on each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14.
Further, on the front side (player side) of the front door 12, below the display window, there are arranged a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal insertion slot 47, etc.

Furthermore, at the lower part of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, there is a medal payout port through which medals paid out from the medal payout device 15 pass, and a medal payout port for receiving medals paid out from the medal payout port. A medal tray is arranged.
Further, at the upper part of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, a production lamp 21, a speaker 22, an image display device 23, etc. are arranged.

Further, a transparent sub-board case 87 is arranged at the upper part of the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the sub-board case 87 is fixed at a position on the back side of the front door 12 (inner surface side of the casing), above the symbol display device 14 and corresponding to the back side of the image display device 23. ing. The sub-control board 80 is housed within the sub-board case 87 .
Further, the sub-control board 80 controls the performance, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub-CPU 85, an electrolytic capacitor 86, and the like. Further, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the production lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, the main control board 50, etc. via the input port 81 or the output port 82. Based on the control command received from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 determines at what timing and what kind of effects to output, and according to the decision, outputs the effect lamps 21, speakers 22, Controls the output of the image display device 23.

As described above, the main board case 56 is disposed inside the cabinet 13 above the symbol display device 14, and the main control board 50 is housed within the main board case 56.
Further, on the back surface of the front door 12, above the symbol display device 14, a sub-board case 87 is arranged, and the sub-control board 80 is housed within this sub-board case 87.
As shown in FIG. 22, when the front door 12 is closed, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are arranged to face each other.
Further, when the front door 12 is closed, the distance between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is set to be wider than the width of the reel control board 120 in the depth direction.

Here, an electrolytic capacitor 86 for storing electricity is arranged on the sub-control board 80. The electrolytic capacitor 86 is filled with an electrolyte. If the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 bursts due to a malfunction, the electrolyte may scatter. If the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged in a position opposite the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts due to a malfunction, the scattered electrolyte may adhere to the main CPU 55, causing the main CPU 55 to malfunction. There is also a possibility that the main CPU 55 may be damaged by the impact caused by the bursting of the electrolytic capacitor 86.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, an electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the sub-control board 80.
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolyte is scattered, the scattered electrolyte can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, and the main CPU 55 can be prevented from malfunctioning. be able to. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the main CPU 55 from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.
Furthermore, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is placed in a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, there is a possibility that the main CPU 55 will malfunction due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86. To prevent the main CPU 55 from malfunctioning due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86 by arranging the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the control board 80 at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. Can be done.

Figure 23 (a) is a diagram showing example 1 of the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed.
In FIG. 23A , the circle indicated by the dashed line is a projection of the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 onto the main control board 50 .

In example 1 shown in FIG. 23(a), the number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is one, which is arranged above the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the vertical direction, and in the horizontal direction It is arranged on the left side of the main CPU 55 on the control board 50.
In this way, by arranging the electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 at different positions both vertically and horizontally with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, The electrolytic capacitor 86 can be located at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

<Modification of seventh embodiment>
Although the seventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is not limited to one, and may be two, for example, as shown in FIG. 23(b).
FIG. 23(b) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing Example 2.

Similarly to FIG. 23(a), in FIG. 23(b), the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 projected onto the main control board 50 is shown by a broken line.
In FIG. 23(b), the upper left electrolytic capacitor 86 and the lower right electrolytic capacitor 86 are both arranged at different positions in the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.
Accordingly, also in Example 2 of FIG. 23(b), each of the two electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(2) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be four, for example, as shown in FIG. 24(c).
FIG. 24(c) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing Example 3.
The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is projected onto the main control board 50 and shown as a broken circle, as in FIGS. 23(a) and 23(b).

In FIG. 24(c), the sub-control board 80 includes four electrolytic capacitors 86, three of which are located at different positions both vertically and horizontally with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. It is located. Further, the remaining one electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction, although it is different in the horizontal direction with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.
Even with this arrangement, the four electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 are located at positions other than the positions facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(3) The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be disposed, for example, in a location away from the main control board 50 .
Figure 24 (d) is a diagram showing example 4 of the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed.
The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is projected and indicated by a dashed circle, similar to Figures 23(a), (b) and 24(c).

In FIG. 24(d), similarly to FIG. 23(a), the number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is one, but unlike FIG. 23(a), the electrolytic capacitors on the sub-control board 80 86 is arranged at a position separate from the main control board 50.
In this way, even when the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position away from the main control board 50, it can be arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. There will be.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 23(a), (b), 24(c) and (d), the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is placed in a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. By arranging the electrolytic capacitor 86 in the position shown in FIG. You can prevent it from happening.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 of the second embodiment, a management information display LED 74 (also referred to as a "role ratio monitor") is arranged on the main control board 50. This management information display LED 74 is for displaying management information such as advantageous section ratio, consecutive accessory ratio, accessory ratio, etc.
In addition, the "advantageous section ratio" means the ratio of the advantageous section to the total gaming section (normal section + standby section + advantageous section), and the "continuous role item ratio" means the ratio of the first section to the total number of medals acquired. It means the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the special accessory (RB) is activated, and the "accessory ratio" means the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the accessory is activated to the total number of medals acquired.

Even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and also at a position other than the position facing the management information display LED 74, good.
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolyte is scattered, the scattered electrolyte can be prevented from adhering to the management information display LED 74, and the management information displayed on the management information display LED 74 can be prevented. Information can be prevented from becoming unverifiable.
Furthermore, the management information display LED 74 can be prevented from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.
(5) The first to seventh embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to seventh embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Eighth embodiment>
The eighth embodiment relates to the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 at the lower part of the housing of the slot machine 10.
FIG. 25 is an enlarged side sectional view of the lower front part of the housing of the slot machine 10 (section A in FIG. 22) with the front door 12 closed, and explains the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 25, a first closing portion 13c is provided at the lower part of the cabinet 13, and projects toward the front door 12 when the front door 12 is closed.
That is, the first closing portion 13c is a plate-shaped protrusion that protrudes forward from the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c extends in the protruding direction. is the direction toward the front door 12.
Further, the first closing portion 13c is formed in a horizontally long shape extending from the right end to the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Furthermore, the first closing portion 13c is formed of a sheet metal, and is fixed to the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 with screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at a position below the first closing portion 13c in the lower part of the front door 12, there is a second closing portion 12a that protrudes toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. is provided.
That is, the second closing portion 12a is a plate-shaped protrusion that projects rearward from the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the second closing portion 12a projects in the following direction. This is the cabinet 13 direction.

The second blocking portion 12a is disposed at a lower position than the first blocking portion 13c.
Furthermore, the second blocking portion 12 a is formed horizontally extending from the right end to the left end of the lower rear surface of the front door 12 .
Furthermore, like the first blocking portion 13c, the second blocking portion 12a is also formed from sheet metal and is fixed to the lower part of the rear surface of the front door 12 with screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at a position above the first closing part 13c at the lower part of the front door 12, there is a third closing part 12b that protrudes toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. is provided.
That is, like the second closing part 12a, the third closing part 12b is a plate-shaped protrusion that projects rearward from the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the third closing part 12b The protruding direction of the third closing portion 12b is the direction toward the cabinet 13.

Further, like the second closing portion 12a, the third closing portion 12b is formed in a horizontally long shape extending from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12.
Furthermore, unlike the second closure part 12a, the third closure part 12b is arranged at a position above the first closure part 13c.
Furthermore, like the first closing part 13c and the second closing part 12a, the third closing part 12b is also formed of a sheet metal, and is fixed to the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 with screws.

When the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c is arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b.
Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 at the bottom of the housing is bent like the left and right sides of a U-shape are reversed, as shown in FIG. It will have a shape. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized acts (rogue acts) such as passing a wire through the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 into the inside of the casing to access the medal payout device 15 and the like.

Further, a door sensor for detecting opening of the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13. This door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light receiving and emitting section, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
Furthermore, a detection piece is provided on the front side of the left side panel of the cabinet 13 and is movable in the front and rear directions when the front door 12 is opened and closed. This detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 when the front door 12 is closed, and is pushed forward by the spring when the front door 12 is opened.

Further, when the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed rearward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in a state where it is detecting the detection piece and is in an off state. That is, the door sensor is set to low active.
On the other hand, when the front door 12 is open, the detection piece is biased by the spring and pops out forward from inside the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in a state where it is not detecting the detection piece and is in an on state.

The main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is off, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is on.
In this way, the opening and closing of the front door 12 is detected by moving the detection piece in the front-back direction as the front door 12 is opened and closed, and the door sensor is turned on and off.

Further, when the front door 12 is opened from a closed state, the detection piece moves forward from the pushed state, enters the door sensor and comes out, and the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state.
The position of the front door 12 when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12 is referred to as a "detection start position."
Further, the time when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12 means the moment when the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state.

In the eighth embodiment, the first blocking portion 13c is arranged between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b not only when the front door 12 is closed, but also when the front door 12 is in the detection start position.
In other words, the first blocking portion 13c is arranged between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b even at the moment when the front door 12 is opened from a closed state and the door sensor changes from an off state to an on state.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is opened from a closed state, the door sensor first changes from an off state to an on state, and then the first blocking portion 13c comes out from between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b.
When the door sensor is turned on, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is open and transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the door open command, the sub-control board 80 notifies the user that the front door 12 is open via the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. This allows the hall staff to be notified that the front door 12 is open.

Therefore, before the notification that the front door 12 is open starts, the first closing part 13c does not come out from between the second closing part 12a and the third closing part 12b, and the front door 12 opens. Even at the position where the notification starts, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 is in a bent shape. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts (rogue acts) in which the medal dispensing device 15 or the like is accessed by passing the card through.

In the sixth embodiment, by stopping the holding part 102 that holds the first ejected medal between the first position and the second position, there is a space between two adjacent holding parts 102 on the hopper disk 101. The corresponding part can be positioned in front of the ejecting part 103, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as inserting a wire or the like from the medal dispensing port to access the holding part 102 of the hopper disk 101. As described above, by providing the configurations of both the sixth and eighth embodiments, it is possible to more firmly prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a wire or the like to access the medal payout device 15.

Here, the distance between the first blocking part 13c and the second blocking part 12a is "h1", the distance between the first blocking part 13c and the third blocking part 12b is "h2", and the distance between the second blocking part 12a and the second blocking part 12a is "h2". The distance to the third closing portion 12b is “h3”, and the protrusion width (depth) of the second closing portion 12a is “w”.
Further, the diameter of the medal is "d", and the thickness of the medal is "t".
Note that the size of a typical medal is 24.5 to 25.5 mm in diameter and 1.5 to 2.0 mm in thickness.
In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance "h2" between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b and the thickness "t" of the medal is set to satisfy "h2>t". ing.

When a hall attendant opens the front door 12 and replenishes the hopper 35 with medals, there is a possibility that the medals may be dropped onto the bottom plate 13 a of the cabinet 13 .
In particular, when medals are replenished into the hopper 35 from the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13, medals may fall near the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, i.e., near the first closing portion 13c.

At this time, if the setting is made so that "h2>t" is satisfied, even if the front door 12 is closed with the medals falling near the first blocking section 13c, the medals falling near the first blocking section 13c will still remain. , enters between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. Moreover, there is no possibility that the front door 12 will not close due to medals being caught between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protrusion width (depth) "w" of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter "d" is set to satisfy "w<(d/2)". has been done.
By setting so that "w<(d/2)" is satisfied, it is possible to prevent medals from being placed on the second closing portion 12a.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the front door 12 from being closed with medals placed on the second closing portion 12a, and furthermore, it is possible to prevent the front door 12 from being closed with medals placed on the second closing portion 12a. 12 and the cabinet 13 can be prevented from being damaged.

<Modified example of the eighth embodiment>
Although the eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light receiving and emitting section, but the door sensor is not limited thereto, and may be configured using a proximity sensor, for example.
Even when a door sensor is configured using a proximity sensor, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are detected not only when the front door 12 is closed but also when the front door 12 is at the detection start position. The structure is such that the first closing portion 13c is disposed between them.

(2) In the eighth embodiment, a detection piece is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 and is movable in the front and rear directions as the front door 12 is opened and closed. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, it pops out forward by being biased by the spring. So, I made it go out from inside the door sensor. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, a door sensor for detecting opening of the front door 12 may be provided on the front side of the left side panel of the cabinet 13, and a detection piece may be provided at a position corresponding to the door sensor on the front door 12. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 comes out from inside the door sensor. You can also do this.

(3) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is provided on the cabinet 13 side, but the door sensor is not limited thereto, and may be provided on the front door 12 side, for example.
(4) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is in an OFF state when it is detecting a detection piece, and is in an ON state when it is not detecting a detection piece. That is, the door sensor was set to low active. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the door sensor may be in an on state when it is detecting a detection piece, and may be in an off state when it is not detecting a detection piece. That is, the door sensor may be set to high active.
In this case, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is on, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is off. Configure it as follows.

(5) In the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c is formed in a horizontally long shape extending from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. Further, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are formed in a horizontally long shape extending from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the first closing portion 13c may be composed of two parts: a first member extending from the right end to the center of the bottom plate 13a, and a second member extending from the center to the left end of the bottom plate 13a, or may be divided into three parts. It may be constructed from three members.
The second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may also be configured from two members or three members, similarly to the first closing portion 13c.
In this way, the first closing part 13c, the second closing part 12a, and the third closing part 12b are not limited to being composed of one member, but may be composed of a plurality of members.

In addition, the first blocking portion 13c may not extend from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and may have a portion where the first blocking portion 13c is not provided, for example, near the right end or near the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Similarly, the lower rear surface of the front door 12 may have a portion where the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b are not provided.
In this way, even if there are some areas where the first blocking section 13c, the second blocking section 12a, and the third blocking section 12b are not provided, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as accessing the medal payout device 15, etc., by passing a wire into the inside of the housing through the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12.
In addition, the first closing portion 13 c may be a part of the bottom plate 13 a of the cabinet 13 , or may be a separate member from the bottom plate 13 a of the cabinet 13 .
Similarly, the second blocking portion 12 a and the third blocking portion 12 b may be part of the front door 12 or may be separate members from the front door 12 .

(6) In the eighth embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed, the first blocking portion 13c is disposed between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b.
At this time, a gap may be formed between the first blocking portion 13c and the second blocking portion 12a, or the first blocking portion 13c and the second blocking portion 12a may be in contact with each other.
Similarly, a gap may be provided between the first blocking portion 13c and the third blocking portion 12b, or the first blocking portion 13c and the third blocking portion 12b may be in contact with each other.
In addition, the entire first blocking portion 13c may be disposed between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b, or only a portion of the first blocking portion 13c may be disposed between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b.

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed, the first blocking portion 13c may be in contact with a position on the rear surface of the front door 12 that corresponds to a position between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b.
Furthermore, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c may be provided on the front door 12 side, and the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be provided on the cabinet 13 side.
That is, a first blocking portion 13c may be provided protruding from the lower back surface of the front door 12 toward the cabinet 13, a second blocking portion 12a may be provided protruding toward the front door 12 from a position lower than the first blocking portion 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and a third blocking portion 12b may be provided protruding toward the front door 12 from a position higher than the first blocking portion 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.

(7) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance “h2” between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b and the thickness “t” of the medal is set to satisfy “h2>t”. .
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to satisfy "h2<t", for example.
If "h2>t" is set, when the front door 12 is closed with a medal falling near the first blocking part 13c, the medal falling near the first blocking part 13c will be removed from the third blocking part 13c. It hits the rear end of 12b and is pushed into the cabinet 13. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. Moreover, there is no possibility that the front door 12 will not close due to medals being caught between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b.

(8) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protrusion width (depth) “w” of the second blocking portion 12a and the medal diameter “d” is set to satisfy “w<(d/2)”. did.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to satisfy "(d/2)<w<d", for example.
By satisfying "(d/2)<w", medals can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Moreover, by satisfying "w<d", even if you try to close the front door 12 with a medal placed on the second blocking part 12a, the medal will be placed on the second blocking part 12a before the front door 12 closes. Since the placed medals hit the front end of the cabinet 13, the front door 12 does not close.
This allows the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing part 12a, and in turn allows the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing part 12a. It can be removed to close the front door 12.

(9) The relationship between the protrusion width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter “d”, and the relationship between the distance “h1” between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter. The relationship with the thickness "t" may be set to satisfy "(d/2)<w" and "h1<t".
As described above, by satisfying "(d/2)<w", medals can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Furthermore, by satisfying "h1<t", even if you try to close the front door 12 with medals placed on the second blocking part 12a, the medals will be placed on the second blocking part 12a before the front door 12 closes. The front door 12 does not close because the placed medal hits the front end of the first closing portion 13c.
This allows the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing part 12a, and in turn allows the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing part 12a. It can be removed to close the front door 12.

(10) The relationship between the protruding width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter “d”, and the relationship between the distance “h1” between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter. The relationship with the thickness "t" may be set to satisfy "d<w" and "h1>t".
By satisfying "d<w", the entire medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. That is, the medal can be placed on the second closing part 12a without a part of the medal protruding from the second closing part 12a. Moreover, by satisfying "h1>t", a medal can be inserted between the first closing part 13c and the second closing part 12a.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed with a medal placed on the second blocking part 12a, the front door 12 closes with the medal being placed between the first blocking part 13c and the second blocking part 12a. It turns out. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. Moreover, there is no possibility that the medals placed on the second closing part 12a will hit the first closing part 13c or the front end of the cabinet 13, and the front door 12 will not be closed.
(11) The first to eighth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to eighth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Ninth embodiment>
The ninth embodiment relates to stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side and control of output of effects on the sub control board 80 side.
FIG. 26(a) is a diagram showing the types of special prizes (accessories) and end conditions, and FIG. 26(b) is a diagram showing the types of gaming states and the prescribed number of each gaming state. (c) is a diagram showing a number table for internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), in the ninth embodiment, as special prizes (accessory objects), BB (first-class accessory continuous operating device; first-class big bonus), RB (first-class special accessory), ;Regular Bonus), and MB (Second Class Continuous Actuation Device; Second Class Big Bonus).
Here, BB is a device that can operate RB continuously. That is, during the BB game, the RB game is executed continuously. Furthermore, during the RB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases. Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game ends. Further, when the number of medals paid out during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game ends.

The MB is a device that can continuously operate the CB (second type special role). In other words, the CB game is executed continuously during the MB game. Furthermore, during the CB game, regardless of the lottery result by the role selection means 61, all minor roles are won in duplicate, and for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31), the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the time the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (the maximum number of moving frames is 1 frame). Furthermore, the CB game ends after one game, and when the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26(b), in the ninth embodiment, there are seven gaming states: non-RT, RT, RB inside, BB inside, RB game, BB game, and MB game. There is. The main control board 50 then controls the transition of these gaming states.
Here, the "specified number" means the number of medals inserted at which the start switch 41 can be operated (game can be started). In the ninth embodiment, the prescribed number during MB is set to "1", and the prescribed number in gaming states other than during MB is set to "3".

Further, "RT" means that the type (number) of conditional devices (accessories, replays, small winnings) to be selected as lottery targets and the winning probability thereof are a unique lottery state.
Furthermore, "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but it means that the type of conditional device to be selected for lottery and its winning probability are different from RT.
In any game state, when the RT start condition is satisfied, the next game is shifted to RT, and when the RT end condition is satisfied in RT, the next game is shifted to non-RT.

Furthermore, when a special prize is won, the winning information of the special prize is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the won special prize stops on the active line.
A game in which a special role has not been won is called a "non-internal" game, and a game in which a special role has been won but the symbol combination corresponding to the won special role has not stopped on the active line, that is, a special role has been won. A game in which information is carried over is called "internal play."

In addition, the probability that a desired symbol to be displayed on a pay line can be stopped on the pay line during the period from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the moment the reel 31 stops (maximum number of moving frames) is called the "pull-in rate (PB)."
Furthermore, unless the stop switch 42 is operated at an appropriate position on the reel 31 (at a timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on a winning line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol cannot be stopped on a winning line (pulled in to the winning line), which is referred to as "PB≠1."
In contrast, the ability to always stop (pull in) the target symbol on a valid line regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the timing of operation of the stop switch 42) is called "PB=1."

Furthermore, when BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the active line (BB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the BB game starts from the next game. During the BB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases as the RB game is executed continuously. Then, when the number of medals paid out during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game is ended and the next game returns to the gaming state before shifting to the BB game.
Furthermore, if the BB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the BB does not stop on the active line, the winning information on the BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the BB stops on the active line. A gaming state in which BB winning information is carried over is called "BB internal".
Note that the timing of transition to the inside of the BB can be set as appropriate. For example, in the game in which the BB was won, after all the reels 31 have stopped, the reels 31 may be moved to the inside of the BB, or in the game in which the BB was won, the reels were not moved to the inside of the BB, and in the next game, the reels 31 were moved to the inside of the BB. You may move it inside.

Further, when RB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to RB stops on the active line (RB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the RB game starts from the next game. During the RB game, the probability of winning a small prize increases. When the number of medals paid out during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game is ended and the next game returns to the gaming state before the transition to the RB game.
Furthermore, when an RB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the RB does not stop on the active line, the winning information of the RB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops on the active line. A gaming state in which RB winning information is carried over is called "RB internal".
Note that the timing of transition to the inside of the RB can be set as appropriate, similar to the timing of transition to the inside of the BB. For example, in the game in which the RB is won, after all the reels 31 have stopped, the reels 31 may be moved to the inside of the RB, or in the game in which the RB is won, the reels are not moved to the inside of the RB, and in the next game, the reels 31 are moved to the inside of the RB. You may move it inside.

Furthermore, if the MB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the active line (MB wins), no medals will be paid out in the current game, but the MB game will start from the next game. During the MB game, the CB game is executed continuously. When the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game is ended and the next game returns to the gaming state before the transition to the MB game.

Furthermore, if the MB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the MB does not stop on the active line, the winning information of the MB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the active line. A gaming state in which MB winning information is carried over is called "MB internal".
In addition, in the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to MB is set to "PB=1", so if MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to MB in the current game will always stop on the active line. , will never be inside the MB.

Moreover, the conditional device (win) of the ninth embodiment can be broadly classified into a special winning combination (accessory object), a replay (replay winning combination), and a small winning combination.
Furthermore, there are three types of special roles: BB, RB, and MB, two types of replays: Replay 1 and Replay 2, and minor roles: common bell, left correct answer bell, and middle correct answer bell. , right correct answer has seven types: bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2.
Note that the left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, and right correct answer bell are collectively referred to as "push order bells."
Furthermore, the "condition device" is a device that operates in accordance with the winning number determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. When one winning number is determined, one or more conditional devices corresponding to that winning number are activated, and the winning flag corresponding to the activated conditional device is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 26(c), in the ninth embodiment, any one winning number from "0" to "16" is determined by a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the winning number corresponds to the determined winning number. Any conditional device from non-winning to MB is activated.
In each of the two types of replays, you can win independently, and you cannot win multiple times with other conditional devices (combinations).
Furthermore, there are four types of bells: a common bell, a left correct bell, a middle correct bell, and a right correct bell, all of which can be won individually and cannot be won in combination with other winning combinations.

Furthermore, there are cases in which watermelon is won alone and cases in which watermelon is won in combination with BB.
Furthermore, Cherry 1 has cases in which it wins alone and cases in which it wins multiple times with BB, and Cherry 2 has cases in which it wins alone, cases in which it wins multiple times with RB, and cases in which it wins multiple times with BB. .
Also, BB has cases where it wins alone and cases where it wins multiple times with Watermelon, Cherry 1, or Cherry 2, but RB never wins alone and only wins multiple times with Cherry 2, and MB can only be won individually, and cannot be won in combination with other roles.

Further, "payout" means the number of medals to be paid out when the symbol combination corresponding to each conditional device is stopped (a winning combination is won).
In the ninth embodiment, for the left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, and right correct answer bell, the payout is different depending on the specified number 3 (playing state other than during MB) and the specified number 1 (playing state during MB), but otherwise, The payout is the same for the specified number 3 and the specified number 1.

In addition, the left correct answer bell is a push order bell in which the first stop on the left is the correct answer press order, and the first stop on the left is the incorrect answer press order, and with the specified number of 3, 8 medals will be paid out in the correct answer press order. , one medal will be paid out in the order of incorrect presses, and if the specified number is 1, 14 medals will be paid out in the order of correct presses, and 15 medals will be paid out in the order of incorrect presses.
Similarly, the middle correct answer bell is a push order bell in which the first stop in the middle is the correct answer press order, and the first stop in the middle is the incorrect answer press order, and the right correct answer bell is a press order bell in which the first stop in the middle is the correct answer press order. , is a push order bell in which any other than the first stop on the right is an incorrect push order.
Note that the common bell is a bell that pays out eight medals regardless of the order in which it is pressed.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a winning combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61). This winning combination lottery means 61 performs a lottery of winning numbers. Then, when a winning number is determined by lottery by the combination lottery means 61, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
Further, the lottery of winning numbers by the winning combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61) may be referred to as "internal lottery".
As shown in FIG. 26(c), in the ninth embodiment, one of the winning numbers "0" to "15" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. Furthermore, winning numbers "0" to "15" correspond to condition devices "non-winning" to "MB", respectively. Then, when the winning number is determined, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.

For example, when the winning number "1" is determined, the "Replay 1" condition device corresponding to the winning number "1" is activated. Furthermore, when the winning number "8" is determined, the "Watermelon+BB" condition device corresponding to the winning number "8" is activated.
As described in the first embodiment, the winning combination lottery means 61 includes a random number generation means, a random number extraction means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generation means, and a random number extraction means based on the random number extracted by the random number extraction means. and a winning number determining means for determining a winning number, and when the winning number is determined, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
For example, in non-internal and internal cases, the random number extracted by the random number extraction means may be the same and the operating condition device may be the same, or even if the random number extracted by the random number extraction means is the same, the operating condition may be the same. The conditions and equipment used may differ.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the winning flag control means 62. This winning flag control means 62 controls on/off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the result of lottery of winning numbers by the winning combination lottery means 61.
In the ninth embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. Then, when the winning number is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 turns on the winning flag of the winning combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number (sets the winning flag). .

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "1" is determined by the drawing by the winning combination drawing means 61, the winning flag of "Replay 1" included in the condition device of "Replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" is The winning flag will be turned on, and the other winning flags will be turned off.
Similarly, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, "Cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device "Cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10"" are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off.

In addition, since winning information of roles other than the special roles (BB, RB, MB) is not carried over, even if a role that does not carry over winning information is won in the current game and the winning flag of that role is turned on, the winning flag is turned off at the end of the current game regardless of whether the role wins or not.
On the other hand, since winning information of special roles (BB, RB, MB) is carried over, when a special role is won in the current game and the winning flag of the special role is once turned on, the winning flag is maintained in the on state until the special role wins, and when the special role wins, the winning flag is turned off.

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61, the two winning flags for "Cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device for "Cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10" are turned on, but if "BB" does not win in the current game, the winning flag for "Cherry 1" is turned off at the end of the current game, and the winning flag for "BB" remains on, regardless of whether "Cherry 1" wins in the current game. In this case, the game will transition to inside BB from the next game.

Also, for example, when the winning number "9" is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 within BB, in addition to the winning flag of "BB" carried over, "Cherry" corresponding to the winning number "9" is added. The winning flag of "Cherry 1" included in the condition device of "1" is turned on. That is, the two winning flags "Cherry 1" and "BB" are turned on.
Therefore, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 (double winning of "Cherry 1 + BB"), and when the winning number "9" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 inside BB, ” (“Cherry 1” wins alone), the on/off state of the winning flag is the same.

Also, during the MB game, the winning flag control means 62 controls the winning flags of all the small winning combinations (common bell, left correct bell, middle correct bell, right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2). turn on. For this reason, even though the winning combination was not won by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, it is in the same state as winning all the small winning combinations.
For example, during a MB game, when the winning number "0" is determined by the drawing by the winning number drawing means 61, the "non-winning" corresponding to the winning number "0" does not include any winning numbers, but all winning numbers are The winning flag for the small winning combination (the above seven small winning combinations) is turned on.
Also, for example, during a MB game, when the winning number "1" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, "Replay 1" included in the "Replay 1" condition device corresponding to the winning number "1" In addition to the winning flag, the winning flags of all the small winnings (the seven small winnings mentioned above) are turned on.

As described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a reel control means 65, which includes a plurality of stop position determination tables corresponding to the on/off states of the win flags. Each stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 relative to the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated.
A winning number is determined by lottery using a role selection means 61, and the winning flag of the role included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is controlled to be on/off by a winning flag control means 62. Then, a reel control means 65 selects a stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off state of the winning flag.

When the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the selected stop position determination table and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.
In addition, the stop position determination table selected when the winning flag of Replay 1 is on and the winning flags other than Replay 1 are off is such that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 1 stops on the active line, and The stopping position of each reel 31 is determined so that the symbol combinations corresponding to combinations other than Replay 1 do not stop on the active line.

Furthermore, the stop position determination table that is selected when the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is on and the winning flags other than the left correct answer bell are off is the stop position determination table that is selected when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first left stop. , when the symbol combination that results in the payout of 8 medals stops on the active line, and the stop switch 42 is operated other than the first stop on the left, the symbol combination that results in the payout of 1 medal stops on the active line. The stopping position of each reel 31 is determined as follows.

Further, the "internal lottery number" column in FIG. 26(c) shows the number of winning numbers in each gaming state. Divide the internal lottery number by "65536" to get the probability of winning.
For example, since the winning number "4" in non-RT is set to "3000", the winning number "4" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, and the number "4" corresponding to the winning number "4" is The probability that the conditional device of "correct answer bell" will operate is "3000/65536".

Further, in the column of "internal lottery number" in FIG. 26(c), the mark "*" indicates that advantageous section lottery is executable.
Here, the "advantageous section" means a game section that has performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be activated).
Further, the "instruction function" refers to a function of displaying (notifying) an "advantageous operation mode" to the player.
Furthermore, "activation of the instruction function" includes displaying the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is selected.

Furthermore, "advantageous section lottery" means a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section.
Then, when winning in the advantageous section lottery and moving to the advantageous section, it becomes possible to activate the instruction function, and when the push order bell is won, it becomes possible to notify the correct push order.
For example, the number "8000" of the winning number "3"("commonbell") in non-RT is marked with "*", but this is because in non-RT the winning number "3"("commonbell") is marked "*". When the winning number "3"("commonbell") is determined in the lottery, it means that the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 26(c), in non-RT, when the winning number "0" (non-winning) is determined, and when the winning number "4" to "6"("left correct answer bell", " When it is determined that the answer is "Middle Correct Answer Bell" or "Right Correct Answer Bell", the advantageous section lottery is not executed, but otherwise the advantageous section lottery can be executed.
Furthermore, within RT, RB, and BB, when the winning number is determined to be "4" to "6"("left correct bell", "middle correct bell", or "right correct bell"), Except for this, when the winning number is determined to be the same as the non-RT, advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, since the winning information of BB is carried over inside BB, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is decided while inside BB, and when it is determined to be a winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") during BB, and during non-RT (non-internal). The on/off state of the winning flag is the same as when the winning number "10" (double winning of "Cherry 1+BB") is determined.
Furthermore, the number of winning numbers "10" (double winning of "Cherry 1 + BB") in non-RT (non-internal) and the number of winning numbers "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") in BB internal are set to the same "200".
Therefore, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined within the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

Also, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined within RB, the winning flag of "Cherry 1" and the carried over winning flag of "RB" are turned on. .
Furthermore, "BB" and "RB" are both special prizes (official objects). The number set and the number set for the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") in the RB are set to the same number "200".
Therefore, even when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined within the RB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, when winning number "12" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + RB") or winning number "13" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + BB") is determined in non-RT, and when winning while inside RB or inside BB. This is the same as when the number "11"("Cherry2" wins alone) is determined in that the winning flag of "Cherry 2" and the winning flag of the special prize (official object) are turned on.
Furthermore, if you add up the numbers of winning numbers "12" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + RB") and winning numbers "13" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + BB") in non-RT, it will be "300", and RB internal middle and BB It matches the number ``300'' of the winning number ``11'' (single winning of ``Cherry 2'') in the inside.
Therefore, even when the winning number "11" (single winning of "Cherry 2") is determined in the RB or the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, the column of “advantageous section lottery number” in FIG. 26(c) shows the number of winning numbers for each winning number. Divide the number of advantageous section drawings by "16384" to get the probability of winning.
For example, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, RB inside, or BB inside, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery is as follows. It becomes "20/16384".
For example, in non-RT or RT, when the winning number "8" (double winning of "Watermelon + BB") is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery is "10000/16384". ”.

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to MB is set to "PB=1".
In addition, as shown in FIG. 26(c), MB lottery is held in non-RT and RT, but if MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to MB in the current game always stops on the active line, so MB To shift to an MB game from the next game without becoming internal.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 26(c), during the MB game, the lottery of Replay 1 or Replay 2 is held, and regardless of the lottery result by the prize lottery means 61, all the minor prizes are won twice. Become.

Therefore, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during MB gaming, the winning flag of "Replay 1" and all small roles (common bell, left correct bell, center bell) The seven winning flags (correct bell, right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2) are turned on.
Similarly, when the winning number "2" (single winning of "Replay 2") is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of "Replay 2" and the winning flags of all the small winning combinations are turned on.

When the winning number is determined to be "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") during MB play, that is, when the winning flag of "Replay 1" and the winning flags of all the minor roles are turned on, the same stop position determination table as when only the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is turned on is selected. However, during MB play, the specified number is 1 (one coin is inserted), and the payout is different from non-RT etc., and 14 or 15 coins are paid out.
As a result, when the winning number "1" (single winning "Replay 1") is determined during MB play, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the first left stop (when the button press sequence is correct), the symbol combination for the payout of 14 medals will stop on an active line, and if the stop switch 42 is operated at any stop other than the first left stop (when the button press sequence is incorrect), the symbol combination for the payout of 15 medals will stop on an active line.

Similarly, when the winning number is determined to be "2" (a single win for "Replay 2") during MB play, the same stop position determination table is selected as when only the winning flag for the right correct bell is on, and 14 coins are paid out when it stops on the first bell on the right (when the button press sequence is correct), and 15 coins are paid out when it stops on anything other than the first bell on the right (when the button press sequence is incorrect).
During the first play during MB play, the push order for the payout of 14 coins is announced, and during the second play during MB play, the push order for the payout of 15 coins is announced.
As described above, the end condition of the MB game is set when the number of medals paid out exceeds 14, so by making such a notification, 29 medals can be paid out during the MB game. Also, since the specified number is set to "1" during the MB game, the player can obtain 27 medals, which is the number of medals paid out ("29") minus the number of medals inserted ("2").

Furthermore, in order to notify the player of a pressing order that is advantageous to the player during the MB game, it is necessary to shift to an advantageous section.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26(c), in non-RT or RT, when the winning number "15" (single winning of "MB") is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning of the advantageous section lottery The probability is set to "16384/16384", that is, "100%".

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the effect group number selection means 64. This effect group number selection means 64 is for selecting the effect group number corresponding to the winning number and the number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
As shown in FIG. 26(c), the performance group number corresponding to the winning number is determined in advance. Specifically, production group numbers "0" to "3" are determined in correspondence with winning numbers "0" to "3", and production group numbers "4" and "4" are determined in correspondence to winning numbers "4" to "6". '' are determined, and production group numbers ``5'' to ``13'' are determined corresponding to winning numbers ``7'' to ``15''.
Then, when the winning number is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, the performance group number selection means 64 selects the performance group number corresponding to the determined winning number.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a push order instruction number selection means 63. This pressing order instruction number selection means 63 selects the determined winning numbers when the winning numbers corresponding to the pressing order bells (left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, right correct answer bell) are determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. This is for selecting the pressing order instruction number (corresponding to the correct pressing order) corresponding to the pressing order.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a control command transmitting means 71. The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the production output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80.
In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 sends, as control commands, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, a push order instruction number (when AT is in progress and when the correct answer is pressed). In addition to information such as the winning number (only when the winning number corresponding to the condition device with the , inside RB, inside BB, inside RB, inside BB, inside MB), the presentation group number, etc. are transmitted to the sub control board 80.

As a result, the sub-control board 80 side judges the gaming state on the main control board 50 side and the condition devices (excluding the left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, and right correct answer bell) operating in the winning combination lottery means 61. be able to.
In addition, on the sub-control board 80 side, it can be determined that the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, or the right correct answer bell has been won based on the performance group number, but the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, or the right correct answer bell It is not possible to determine which one of them won (in which order the correct answer was pressed).
Also, during AT, the correct pressing order can be notified by the pressing order instruction number.

Further, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects during the game and while waiting for the game.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) sends information ( control command).
Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
Further, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the production lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. via the input port 81 or the output port 82.

Furthermore, the sub-CPU 85 of the sub-control board 80 is equipped with a performance output control means 91 and the like, and the ROM 84 of the sub-control board 80 is equipped with a performance determination table and the like.
Furthermore, the performance decision table determines the performance to be output, and a plurality of performance decision tables are provided, and the performance output control means 91 determines the performance to be output using one of the performance decision tables and controls to output the determined performance.
In other words, the performance output control means 91 determines what kind of performance to output and at what timing based on the control command received from the main control board 50 and one of the performance decision tables, and controls the output of the performance lamp 21, speaker 22, and image display device 23 in accordance with that decision.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a production determination table used in both non-RT (non-interior) and RT (non-AT and non-interior), and FIG. 28 is a production determination table commonly used in RB interior and BB interior. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 27, the ninth embodiment includes 18 types of presentation patterns ranging from "no presentation" to "continuous presentation." Furthermore, each production pattern from "Character Production (Enthusiasm)" to "Continuous Production" defines production with different contents.
For example, the "confirmation performance" is a performance that lets the player know that he or she has won the special prize, and the "post-first-stop notification performance" is a performance after the first stop (after the first operation of the stop switch 42). It is a performance that is output at a timing, and the "left first stop performance" is a performance that instructs that the left stop switch 42 should be operated first, and the "continuous performance" is a performance that is output continuously over multiple games. This is the effect that is output.

Further, the column "Number of performance patterns distributed" in FIG. 27 shows the number of distribution patterns of each performance pattern when each performance group number is received. Dividing the number of performance patterns distributed by "256" gives the selection probability of each performance pattern. In addition, in FIG. 27, the name of the corresponding conditional device is written below each performance group number.
For example, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined in a lottery by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT, and the production group number "1" is transmitted, the probability of selecting "no production" is "128/256", the selection probability of "Character production (liveliness)" is "20/256", the selection probability of "Conversation production (liveliness)" is also "20/256", and the selection probability of "Cut-in production" is "20/256". The selection probability of ``(strong effect)'' is ``0/256''.

As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 sends information indicating the gaming state (non-RT, RT, inside RB, inside BB, inside RB, inside BB, inside MB) to the sub-control board 80; Send the production group number.
Then, the performance output control means 91 of the sub-control board 80 selects a performance determination table according to the gaming state based on the information indicating the gaming state received from the main control board 50, and combines the selected performance determination table with the main Based on the performance group number received from the control board 50, it is determined which performance pattern to output the performance, and the outputs of the performance lamp 21, speaker 22, and image display device 23 are controlled according to the determination.

Here, in non-RT (non-internal), if the winning number "14" (single winning of "BB") is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 and the production group number "12" is transmitted, the production output is The control means 91 selects the performance determination table shown in FIG. 27 that is commonly used for non-RT and RT (non-AT), and changes the position in the column of performance group number "12" (single winning of "BB") in this performance determination table. The number is used to determine which performance pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 27, when "BB" is won alone in non-RT, "continuous performance" is selected with a probability of "40/256", for example.

On the other hand, if the winning number "0"("non-winning") is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 within the BB and the production group number "0" is transmitted, the production output control means 91 will: Select the performance determination table shown in FIG. 28 that is used for both RB internal and BB internal, and use the number placed in the performance group number "0"("non-winning") column in this performance determination table to select which production. Decide whether to output the pattern performance. As shown in FIG. 28, when there is a "non-winning" within the BB, the "confirmed performance" is selected with a probability of "80/256", for example.
In this way, the performance output control means 91 controls the game in which "BB" is won alone by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT (non-inside) and the game in which "BB" is won by the role lottery means 61 during inside BB. A performance to be output is determined using a different performance determination table for each game. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.

In addition, in non-RT, when the winning number "14" (single winning of "BB") is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side The winning flag of "BB" included in the condition device of "BB" corresponding to " is turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of "BB" is on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as a "BB-only stop position determination table."

"Stop position determination table for single BB" is a stop position of each reel 31 so that the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the active line, and so that the symbol combination corresponding to a combination other than BB does not stop on the active line. determining the position.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 controls the stop switch 42 based on the "BB single stop position determination table" and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In addition, when the winning number is "0"("non-winning") in the drawing by the winning combination drawing means 61 inside the BB, on the main control board 50 side, the winning flag control means 62 selects the carried-over "BB". Keep the winning flag on and turn off the other winning flags. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of "BB" is on and the other winning flags are off. That is, the same "BB single stop position determination table" is selected as when "BB" is won alone by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT.
For this reason, when it becomes "non-winning" in the winning combination lottery means 61 in BB, the same stop control of the reel 31 is performed as when "BB" is won alone in the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT. Furthermore, "stop control of the same reels 31 is performed" means that if each stop switch 42 is operated in the same manner (pressing order and operation timing), each reel 31 will stop at the same position, and the same reel 31 will stop at the same position. This means that the stopping number will be displayed.

In this way, on the main control board 50 side, when "BB" is won alone by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, and when "BB" is "not won" by the winning combination lottery means 61 inside BB, the same The stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the stop position determination table, but on the sub-control board 80 side, a different performance determination table is used to determine the performance to be output. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.
Thereby, even if the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control board 80 side, and the effects can be diversified.
In addition, even if the same reel 31 is controlled to stop on the main control board 50 side and the same stop result is displayed, different effects are output on the sub control board 80 side, so it is possible to win a special prize. It is possible to enable the player to guess that the player is in the middle of the game.

Furthermore, by selecting different effect determination tables on the sub-control board 80 for when non-RT "BB" wins alone and when "non-winning" inside BB, "BB" during non-RT When winning, a performance determination table with a low probability of selecting a confirmed performance (a performance that lets the player know that he has won the BB) is selected, and when there is a "non-winning" within the BB, a performance with a high probability of selecting a confirmed performance is selected. A decision table can be selected.
As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that he or she has won "BB" in the game in which "BB" has been won. By making it easy for players to understand, it is possible to make the player aim to win the "BB" and to prevent the player from staying in the BB forever, thereby preventing the player from being at a disadvantage.

In addition, in non-RT, when the winning number "8" (double winning of "Watermelon + BB") is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 and the production group number "6" is transmitted, the production output control means 91: Select the effect determination table shown in FIG. 27 that is commonly used for non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal), and win the duplicate effect group number "6" ("watermelon + BB") in this effect determination table. ) is used to determine which performance pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 27, when "Watermelon + BB" double wins in non-RT, for example, there is a probability of "50/256" that "Character production (Enjoyment)", "Conversation production (Enjoyment)", or "Cut-in production ( ``Strong effect)'' and select ``Continuous effect'' with a probability of ``30/256''.

In contrast, when the winning number "7" (single winning of "watermelon") is determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61 in the BB and the performance group number "5" is transmitted, the performance output control means 91 selects the performance determination table used commonly in the RB and the BB shown in Fig. 28, and uses the number entered in the column of the performance group number "5" (single winning of "watermelon") in this performance determination table to determine which performance pattern to output. As shown in Fig. 28, when a single "watermelon" is won in the BB, for example, a "character performance (entertainment)" or a "conversation performance (entertainment)" is selected with a probability of "73/256", and a continuous performance is selected with a probability of "20/256".
In this way, the effect output control means 91 determines the effect to be output using different effect determination tables for a game in which "watermelon + BB" is won by the role selection means 61 during a non-RT (non-internal) period and a game in which "watermelon" is won alone by the role selection means 61 during a BB period. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

In addition, during non-internal play, in order to maintain the player's expectations for winning "BB" for a long time by showing the player a continuous performance that spans multiple games, the continuous performance can be selected when "Watermelon + BB" is won twice. The probability is set high.
On the other hand, during BB, if the player is shown a continuous performance that spans multiple games, the winning of "BB" will be delayed and the player's medals will decrease, so "Watermelon" can be won individually. The probability of selecting a continuous performance at the time is set low, and the selection probability of the confirmed performance at the time of ``non-winning'' is set high in order to make the player aim for winning the ``BB'' prize early.
Note that the winning probability of each role and the number of coins to be paid out at the time of winning may be set in the BB so that the player's medals do not decrease, and then the selection probability of the continuous performance may be set high.

In addition, in non-RT (non-internal), when the winning number "8" (double winning of "Watermelon + BB") is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side , the two winning flags "Watermelon" and "BB" included in the "Watermelon + BB" condition device corresponding to the winning number "8" are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags "Watermelon" and "BB" are on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as a "watermelon+BB overlapping stop position determination table."

"Watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table" is designed to allow symbol combinations corresponding to watermelon or BB to stop on active lines, and to prevent symbol combinations corresponding to roles other than watermelon and BB from stopping on active lines. The stopping position of the reel 31 is determined.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 controls the stop switch based on the "watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table" and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to 42 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In addition, when the winning number "7" (single winning of "watermelon") is determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61 inside BB, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side keeps the winning flag of "BB" carried over on, and in addition, turns on the winning flag of "watermelon" included in the condition device of "watermelon" corresponding to the winning number "7", and turns off the winning flags other than "watermelon" and "BB". As a result, the two winning flags of "watermelon" and "BB" are turned on. In addition, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags of "watermelon" and "BB" are on and the other winning flags are off. In other words, it selects the same "watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table" as when the role selection means 61 wins "watermelon + BB" overlap in non-RT.

Therefore, when "Watermelon" is won alone by the winning combination lottery means 61 while inside BB, the same stop control of the reel 31 is performed as when "Watermelon + BB" is won twice by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT. .
In this way, on the main control board 50 side, when "Watermelon + BB" is won twice by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, and when "Watermelon" is won independently by the winning combination lottery means 61 during BB, The same stop position determination table is used to determine the stop position of the reel 31, but on the sub-control board 80 side, a different performance determination table is used to determine the performance to be output. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.

In addition, when "Cherry 1 + BB" is won multiple times in a non-RT, or when "Cherry 1" is won alone within a BB, the main control board 50 uses the same stop position determination table to determine the stop position of the reel 31, just as when "Watermelon + BB" is won multiple times in a non-RT, or when "Watermelon" is won alone within a BB, but the sub-control board 80 uses a different effect determination table to determine the effect to be output. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

Furthermore, when you win "Cherry 2 + BB" or "Cherry 2 + RB" multiple times in non-RT, and when you win "Cherry 2" alone in BB or RB, you can win "Watermelon + BB" in non-RT. In the same way as in the case of multiple winnings and in the case of a single winning of "Watermelon" in the BB, the main control board 50 side determines the stopping position of the reel 31 using the same stopping position determination table, but the sub control On the board 80 side, a different effect determination table is used to determine the effect to be output. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.
Thereby, even if the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control board 80 side, so it is possible to diversify the effects.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the number of allocations for each performance pattern is the same when "Watermelon" is won alone in non-RT and when "Watermelon" is won alone in BB. Therefore, the selection probabilities for each performance pattern are the same.
However, when "Watermelon" is won alone in non-RT, the winning flag of "Watermelon" is on and the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the other winning flags are off. When "Watermelon" is won alone while inside BB, the two winning flags "Watermelon" and "BB" are on, and when the other winning flags are off, select the corresponding stop position determination table. do. For this reason, the stop control of the reels 31 is different when a "watermelon" is won alone in a non-RT and when a "watermelon" is won alone in the BB.
In this way, on the sub-control board 80 side, the selection probability of each performance pattern is the same when "Watermelon" is won alone in non-RT and when "Watermelon" is won alone in BB. , the stop control of the reel 31 is different on the main control board 50 side.

As described above, in multiple game states, when the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means of the role selection means 61 is the same, the winning number determined by the winning number determination means of the role selection means 61 is the same, and the same condition device is activated, the stopping control of the reel 31 for each game state (the selected stop position determination table) is the same, but the selection probability of each presentation pattern (the selected presentation determination table) may differ.

Furthermore, in a plurality of gaming states, the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are the same, and the same conditions are met. When the device operates, the stop control of the reels 31 (selected stop position determination table) is the same for each gaming state, but the selection probabilities of each performance pattern (selected performance determination table) may be different. .

Furthermore, in a plurality of gaming states, the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the same condition device When activated, the stop control of the reels 31 (selected stop position determination table) for each game state is the same, but the selection probability of each performance pattern (selected performance determination table) may be different.

<Modified example of the ninth embodiment>
Although the ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) Types of combinations shown in the ninth embodiment, types of conditional devices, types of gaming states, prescribed numbers in each gaming state, payout when each winning combination, allocation of internal lottery numbers, advantageous section lottery settings The allocation of the number, the type of performance pattern, the allocation of the allocated number of each performance pattern, etc. are merely examples, and can be set as appropriate depending on the game content.

(2) In the ninth embodiment, only the number table for internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1 was shown, but six stages from setting 1 to setting 6 are provided as setting values, and each setting value has a different internal drawing. A number table for lottery and advantageous section lottery can be provided.
(3) In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating the gaming state and the performance group number to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 side judges the gaming state and condition device on the main control board 50 side, and selects a production pattern with a probability according to the gaming state and condition device. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the control command transmitting means 71 may transmit to the sub-control board 80 a winning number determined by an internal lottery, or transmit information indicating a condition device corresponding to a winning number determined by an internal lottery. Good too. Then, on the sub-control board 80 side, the condition device on the main control board 50 side may be determined based on the received winning number and information indicating the condition device.

Further, for example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information indicating the condition device determined by internal lottery and information on the winning combination. Then, on the sub-control board 80 side, the gaming state on the main control board 50 side may be determined based on the information indicating the condition device and the information on the winning combination.
Furthermore, for example, if the sub control board 80 receives information indicating that "BB" has won, but does not receive information indicating that "BB" has won, the gaming state on the main control board 50 side will change. It can be determined that it is inside the BB.
Then, based on the gaming state on the main control board 50 side determined by the sub control board 80 side and the information indicating the performance group number, winning number, and condition device received from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 side You may also select a performance pattern.

(4) For example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating whether a winning flag corresponding to each role is on/off and information on a winning role to the sub-control board 80. Then, the sub-control board 80 may determine the game state and the condition device on the main control board 50 side based on the information indicating whether a winning flag is on/off and the information on a winning role.
For example, if information is received indicating that the winning flag for "BB" is on, but no information is received indicating that "BB" has won, it can be determined that the game status on the main control board 50 side is within BB.

In addition, since the drawing for "BB" is not performed inside BB, when information indicating that only the winning flag for "BB" is on is received inside BB, it can be determined that the winning number "0"("non-winning") has been determined in the internal drawing on the main control board 50 side.
Then, a presentation pattern may be selected on the sub-control board 80 side based on the game state on the main control board 50 side determined on the sub-control board 80 side and a condition device on the main control board 50 side determined on the sub-control board 80 side.

(5) In the ninth embodiment, "single winning" is used to mean winning only the roles other than the special role, and not winning the special roles at the same time, and "multiple winning" means winning only the roles other than the special role. , is used to mean that the special role and other roles other than the special role are won at the same time.
For example, the winning of "Watermelon + Control Role 1" in the BB is a double win in the sense that multiple types of roles are won at the same time, but it is only won for roles other than the special role, and the special role is Since they are not elected at the same time, in the sense of the ninth embodiment, this is a single election.

In addition, on the main control board 50 side, when "Watermelon + Control role 1 + BB" is won (duplicate winning) in non-inside, and when "Watermelon + Control role 1" is won (single winning) in BB inside, Since the on/off state of the winning flag is the same, the stopping position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stopping position determination table, but since the winning number and presentation group number are different, on the sub control board 80 side, A performance to be output is determined using a different performance determination table.
In addition, the "control combination" is a combination for changing the stop position determination table to be selected by changing the on/off state of the winning flag, thereby changing the stop control of the reels 31, and making it possible to win a prize. It's not a role for you.

(6) In the ninth embodiment, when the winning number "11" (single winning of "Cherry 2") is determined in the RB or BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed. The advantageous section lottery may not be executed when winning a winning combination that overlaps with a special winning combination.
(7) The first to ninth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to ninth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Tenth embodiment>
The tenth embodiment relates to control of the display of the management information display LED 74.
The main CPU 55 is in a setting change state (setting change mode, setting changing), setting confirmation state for 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on (for example, when power is turned on, when starting interrupt processing for the first time, when starting a program, etc.). (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation), in the RWM abnormal error state, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are controlled to be in a lighting state.
As described in the second embodiment, the management information display LED 74 is composed of four-digit LEDs, so when all the LEDs are lit, "8888" is displayed. This makes it possible to check whether there is any problem with the LED of the management information display LED 74.

Furthermore, when the setting key switch is on when the power is turned on, the device shifts to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed. Further, when the setting change state is entered, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
The 5 seconds from the predetermined timing based on power-on is set to be longer than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state if the setting key switch is turned on at power-on. There is.

Here, for example, suppose that the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is set to be shorter than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state. In this case, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are first turned on, then the management information is once displayed on the management information display LED 74, and then all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on again. For this reason, there is a possibility that the manager (the hall clerk) may suspect that there is some sort of malfunction with the gaming machine.

Therefore, the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is set to 5 seconds.
Note that the lighting period of all LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is not limited to 5 seconds, but may be any period of time longer than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state. It may be set to

The test pattern display of the management information display LED 74 will be further explained below.
In the tenth embodiment, the four-digit LEDs included in the management information display LED 74 are referred to as "digit 6,""digit7,""digit8," and "digit 9" in order from the left.
Furthermore, among the four-digit LEDs that the management information display LED 74 has, the two LEDs on the left (digits 6 and 7) are called "identification segments", and the two LEDs on the right (digits 8 and 9) are called "ratio segment". It is called "Seg."

Furthermore,
Digit 6: upper digit of identification segment, Digit 7: lower digit of identification segment, Digit 8: upper digit of ratio segment, Digit 9: lower digit of ratio segment.
Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, each LED (digit) of the management information display LED 74 is an 8-segment LED consisting of segments A to G and a segment DP.

The test pattern display on the management information display LED 74 is performed to confirm whether all segments (segments A to G and DP) are correctly lit and extinguished. Therefore, during the period (time) during which the test pattern is displayed, all segments are set to have a lit state and a non-lit state.
Furthermore, when displaying the test pattern on the management information display LED 74, it is displayed at one of the following timings.
(1) Within 5 seconds from the specified timing based on power-on (2) Within 5 seconds from setting change start processing (3) Settings being changed (mode) (4) Settings being checked (mode) (5) RWM error occurring

As a test pattern, firstly, a predetermined display is switched every second and displayed for 5 seconds. Note that the time for maintaining one display is not limited to 1 second, and the display time of a test pattern is not limited to 5 seconds (any time other than 5 seconds is sufficient).
Then, the test pattern is set so that all the segments of all the LEDs are in a lit state and in a non-lit state during the 5 seconds which is the display time of the test pattern.
A second test pattern is to blink all segments of all LEDs. Even with this setting, all segments of all LEDs can be turned on and off with one blink (on and off).

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example 1 of test pattern display on the management information display LED 74.
In the test pattern displays of FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, which will be described later, lit segments are shown by solid lines, and unlit segments are shown by dotted lines. Furthermore, in the segment DP, the lighting state is indicated by a black circle, and the response to turning off the light is indicated by a white circle.
In the following description, "." indicates that the segment DP is in a lit state, and "." indicates that the segment DP is in a non-lit state.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, two types of display for each LED of the test pattern are provided.
One of them is a pattern that displays "0.". More specifically, this is a pattern in which segments A to F and DP are lit, and segment G is turned off.
The other pattern is to display "-.". More specifically, the pattern is such that segment G is lit and segments A to F and DP are off.
Therefore, "0." and "-." have an inverse relationship between lit and unlit segments, respectively.

In the state shown in FIG. 29(a), the upper digits of the identification segment and the upper digits of the ratio segment are displayed as "0.", and the lower digits of the identification segment and the lower digits of the ratio segment are displayed as "-.".
Furthermore, in Example 1 shown in Fig. 29, the display state shown in Fig. 29(a) is maintained for one second. The one-second count can be measured by the number of interrupt processes. For example, when the display of Fig. 29(a) is started, a counter is set to "447(D)", and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process. When the counter reaches "0", the display of Fig. 29(a) is terminated. This allows the display of Fig. 29(a) to be maintained for "2.235 x 447 = 999.045 ms".

When the display for about 1 second in FIG. 29(a) ends, the display shifts to the display in FIG. 29(b).
Furthermore, the display in FIG. 29(b) is the display in FIG. 29(a) in which the LED displaying "0." and the LED displaying "-." are replaced. That is, in the display of FIG. 29(b), contrary to the display of FIG. 29(a), "-." is displayed in the upper digit of the identification segment and the upper digit of the ratio segment, and the lower digit of the identification segment and the lower digit of the ratio segment are displayed as "-." is displayed as "0.".
Furthermore, as in the case of FIG. 29(a), the display state shown in FIG. 29(b) continues for one second (447 interrupt).

The display contents of FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b) are switched and displayed every second, and this is executed for 5 seconds. Therefore, in FIG. 29, (c) and (e) have the same display content as (a), and (d) has the same display content as (b).
When the display of the test pattern (5 seconds) ends, the display shifts to the normal ratio display.
In FIG. 29, (f) shows an example in which the advantageous section ratio is displayed as "7.U.5.0.". Further, instead of the advantageous section ratio, the accessory ratio may be displayed.

As described above, when "0." and "-." are displayed on the LED, it is possible to create a lighting state and a lighting-off state for all segments (A to G and DP). (or the lights cannot be turned off) can be easily determined visually.
Further, when displaying a ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment displays "0.-." or "-.0.". Therefore, there is no possibility of confusing the test pattern with the original ratio display.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a second example of the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74.
In Example 1 of FIG. 29, the display contents were changed every second and the test pattern was displayed for 5 seconds. As described above, such a test pattern is suitable for displaying within 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on or within 5 seconds from setting change start processing.
On the other hand, example 2 of the test pattern display shown in FIG. 30 is suitable for displaying the test pattern until a predetermined termination condition is met, such as during setting change, setting confirmation, or RWM abnormal error. .
It goes without saying that the test pattern display of FIG. 29 may be used to display the test pattern until a predetermined end condition is met.
Similarly, it goes without saying that the test pattern display of FIG. 30 may be used to display the test pattern display within a predetermined period after the test pattern display start condition is satisfied.

In Example 2 of FIG. 30, "8.8.8.8." is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are lit, and "*" is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are turned off. *.*.*."("*" indicates that segments A to G are off) are repeated alternately. In other words, this is a pattern in which "8.8.8.8." is displayed blinking.
In Example 2 of FIG. 30, the lighting state of all segments shown in FIG. 30(a) is maintained for 0.3 seconds, and then the lighting state of all segments shown in FIG. 30(b) is maintained for 0.3 seconds. Then, by repeating the lighting state shown in FIG. 30(a) and the light-off state shown in FIG. 30(b), a blinking state is obtained.

In the tenth embodiment, the blinking interval is set to 0.3 seconds. For example, if you set "134 (D)" as the initial value of the timer, and subtract "1" from the timer value every 2.235ms of interrupt processing, and when the timer value becomes "0", the lighting time or It is determined that the lights-out time has passed. Thereby, by counting the number of interrupts "134", it is possible to count "299.49" ms.

Also in the second example of the test pattern display in FIG. 30, by using "8." and "*.", it is possible to create a lit state and a non-lit state for all segments. Therefore, segment failure (unable to turn on or turn off) can be easily determined visually.
Further, when displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment displays "8.8.". For example, when the ratio reaches 88%, the display will blink regardless of the ratio, but in that case, "8.8." will be displayed and the segment DP will not light up. On the other hand, when displaying "8.8.", the segment DP is also lit, so there is no confusion between the two.

Note that each ratio displayed on the management information display LED 74 is updated (calculated) at the end of the game (after all the reels 31 have stopped and the payout process has ended). Then, in subsequent interrupt processing, the updated ratio is displayed. If a power outage occurs immediately before the ratio is updated and the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds after the power is restored, the ratio will be updated (calculated) during the 5 seconds that the test pattern is displayed. Execute. Then, when the test pattern display ends and the ratio display starts, the updated ratio is displayed after the power is restored from the power-off.

<Eleventh embodiment>
FIG. 31(A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display board 75 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 31(B) is a diagram showing the management information display LED 74 in the eleventh embodiment. Further, FIG. 10C is a diagram showing the setting value display LED 73 in the eleventh embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 31(A), the credit display LED 76 is composed of digit 1a (upper digit) and digit 2a (lower digit). The acquisition number display LED 78 is composed of digit 3a (upper digit) and digit 4a (lower digit).
Here, "digit" means a display, and in this embodiment in particular, it is composed of seven segment LEDs (so-called 7 segments).
These digits 1a to 4a are all seven segment displays with dot segments (segment P). In particular, the segment P of digit 4a (lower digit of the number-of-achievement display LED 78) functions as the advantageous section display LED 77.

The digit 5a is composed of six dot LEDs, and these six dot LEDs are collectively referred to as a status display LED 79. In FIG. 1, the credit number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 are shown, but the status display LED 79 is not shown. However, in reality, as shown in FIG. 31(A), a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79 are mounted on the display board 75.
In the status display LED 79, the 1-bet display LED 79a to 3-bet display LED 79c are LEDs that each display the number of medals bet at that time. When one medal is bet, only the one bet display LED 79a lights up. When two medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b are lit. When three medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a, 2-bet display LED 79b, and 3-bet display LED 79c are all configured to light up.

Furthermore, the game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights up when medals are inserted and the start switch 41 becomes operable. Therefore, it does not light up when medals are not bet (or replay is not automatically inserted).
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights up when a medal can be inserted. That is, the light is lit before the game ends and medals are inserted to proceed to the next game, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. Note that even after the replay has been activated, it lights up when a bet is possible according to the number of credits. Then, when the number of bets is the maximum (when no more bets can be made), the insertion display LED 79e is turned off.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that lights up when a replay win is made, and when an automatic bet is made based on a replay win, the replay display LED 79f lights up to inform the player that an automatic bet state is in place.
Note that the status display LED 79 not shown in FIG. 31(A) includes, for example, a payment display LED (an LED that lights up during payment processing), but its illustration is omitted in FIG. 31(A).

Further, in FIG. 31(B), the management information display LED 74 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 10, 29, and 30, and is composed of four digits 1b to 4b. These digits 1b-4b, like the above-mentioned digits 1a-4a, are a 7-segment display with dot segments (segment P). Digits 1b to 4b indicate the upper information type, the lower information type, the higher numerical value, and the lower numerical value, respectively.
Furthermore, the segment P of digit 2b (lower information type) functions as a digit separator display LED. The digit separator display LED is used to clearly mark the separator between the information type and the numerical value.

Also, the segments P of digits 1b to 4b can be lit when displaying a test pattern, as shown in FIGS.
Furthermore, in FIG. 31(C), the setting value display LED 73 is the same as that shown in FIG. 10, and is an LED that displays the current setting value while the setting is being changed or confirmed, and is composed of one (single digit) 5b.
As shown in FIG. 10, the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5b) are mounted on the main control board 50.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b and segments A to G and P in this embodiment.
A 7-segment digit is composed of seven bar-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment P. Note that an LED consisting of segments A to G without segment P may be referred to as "7 segments", and an LED consisting of 8 segments including segment P may be referred to as "8 segments"; however, in this specification, In the book, the term ``7-segment'' includes an LED made up of eight segments.

As shown in FIG. 32, for example, of the digit 1a, segments A to G constitute the seven upper digit segments of the credit number display LED 76, and segment P is unused. Similarly, each of segments A to G of digits 2a and 3a constitutes 7 segments of the lower digit of the credit number display LED and the upper digit of the earned number display LED 78, and segment DP is unused.
Furthermore, the segments A to G of the digit 4a constitute the lower 7 segments of the acquisition number display LED 78, and the segment P constitutes the advantageous section display LED 77.

Digit 5a is an LED that constitutes status display LED 79. As shown in FIG. 32, segment A of digit 5a corresponds to the 1 bet display LED 79a, segment B corresponds to the 2 bet display LED 79b, . . . segment F corresponds to the replay display LED 79f. Furthermore, segments G and P of digit 5a are not provided.

Digits 1b to 4b constitute a management information display LED 74, and segments 1b and 2b display information types of management information. Furthermore, segments 3b and 4b display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in segments 1b and 2b among the management information. Segments P of digits 1b, 3b, and 4b are normally off, but are lit when a test pattern is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30. Furthermore, the segment P of the digit 2b functions as a digit separator display LED for making the boundary between the digits 1b and 2b indicating the information type and the digits 3b and 4b indicating the numerical value clear and facilitating confirmation. Note that while the above-described test pattern is being displayed, the digit separator display LED may be repeatedly turned on and off like the segments P of other digits, or it may be kept on all the time.

Furthermore, among the digits 5b, segments A to G constitute seven segments of the set value display LED 73, and segment P is an LED that lights up during a setting change. That is, when the segment P of the set value display LED 73 is off, it indicates that the setting is being confirmed, and when the segment P is lit, it indicates that the setting is being changed. Note that the segment P of the setting value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to this usage. For example, the segment P of the set value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the set value is confirmed during a setting change.

Further, FIG. 32 illustrates the structure of segment data. The segment data is 1-byte data, and the D0 bit corresponds to segment A, the D1 bit corresponds to segment B, . . . , and the D7 bit corresponds to segment P.
For example, when displaying "0" in digit 1a, segments A to F are turned on and segments G and P are turned off, so the segment data becomes "00111111(B)".

Furthermore, when displaying "1" in the digit 4a and lighting up the advantageous section display LED 77, segments B, C, and P are lit, so the segment data becomes "10000110 (B)."
Furthermore, before the game starts, when three medals are bet and the game can be started, the 1 bet display LED 79a, the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, and the game start display LED 79d are lit. The segment data of 5a is "00001111(B)".

Fig. 33 is a diagram showing an output port 52 in the eleventh embodiment. Note that the type of output port is not limited to that shown in Fig. 33.
As the output port 52 in the eleventh embodiment, one output port (output port 2) for transmitting a digit signal and two output ports (output ports 3 and 4) for transmitting a segment signal are provided.
The output port 3 is an output port that transmits segment signals of a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79 (digits 1a to 5a).
The output port 4 is an output port for transmitting segment signals of the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the setting value display LED 73 .

In output port 2, digit 1 to 5 signals are assigned to bits D0 to D4, respectively. Here, the digit 1 signal includes both the digit 1a signal and the digit 1b signal, and the same applies to the digits 2 to 5 signals. Therefore, for example, when a signal of "1" is output from the D0 bit of output port 2, both digit 1a (credit number display LED 76 (upper digit)) and digit 1b (management information display LED 74 (information type upper digit)) are output. A drive signal is provided.

Furthermore, in output port 2, bits D5 to D7 are unused.
Output port 3 is an output port for segment A to P signals of digits 1a to 5a, and segment A to P signals are assigned to bits D0 to D7, respectively.
Similarly, output port 4 is an output port for segment A to P signals of digits 1b to 5b, and segment A to P signals are assigned to bits D0 to D7, respectively.
Furthermore, the output port 5 outputs external signals 1 to 5, a data strobe signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal.

Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (the hall computer 200, a data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external centralized terminal board 100. Specifically, for example, the advantageous section, AT, specific RT, external signals 1 to 3 indicating that the accessory is in operation, and external signal 4 indicating that an error has occurred in the slot machine 10 or a power outage has occurred, etc. , an external signal 5 indicating the opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 is provided.

Further, the data strobe signal is a signal sent to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the data strobe signal, it controls the sub-control data signal to be obtained from the buffer provided in the sub-control board 80 based on the rise of the data strobe signal.
Note that from output ports (not shown) other than output ports 2 to 5 shown in FIG. 33, signals from the motor 32, signals from the blocker 45, drive signals from the hopper motor 36, and conditional device signals (so-called winning numbers) are output. , sub-control data signals, test signals, etc. are output.

FIG. 34A is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupts, LED display counter values, digit signals, and segment signals in the eleventh embodiment. Moreover, the same figure (B) is a figure which shows the LED display request flag.
In this embodiment, the main control board 50 processes a main process (M_MAIN) (described later in FIG. 41) performed for each game, and an interrupt process (M_MAIN) performed once every 2.235 ms in parallel with this main process. I_INTR) (FIG. 53, which will be described later) is executed.

The LED display counter is a 1-byte data counter that is continuously updated every interrupt. The LED display counter is a counter for determining which digit among digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is to be lit. Regarding each bit of the LED display counter, the D0 bit is assigned to a digit 1 signal, the D1 bit is assigned to a digit 2 signal, . . . , the D4 bit is assigned to a digit 5 signal. In the first interrupt processing, dynamic lighting of digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit that is "1" on the LED display counter is lit.

The LED display counter of this embodiment takes a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter is updated by shifting the bit "1" of the LED display counter value by one digit to the right as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" and so on (for each interrupt). In addition, in FIG. 34, at the next interrupt after interrupt "5", the LED display counter is shifted to the right by one digit and becomes "00000000 (B)", but at the time of the interrupt, initialization processing of the LED display counter is performed, Set the LED display counter to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter repeats the value "5"→"4"→...→"1"→"5"→"4"→... for each interrupt process. That is, five interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the LED display counter value is
"N" interrupt number: 00010000 (B)
“N+1” interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
“N+3” interrupt: 00000010 (B)
“N+4” interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
“N+6” interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
becomes.

In the eleventh embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b are lit. Specifically, in FIG. 34(A), for example, when the interrupt is "1", that is, when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)", a digit 5 signal is output. By outputting the digit 5 signal, digits 5a and 5b can be lit. Therefore, the status display LED 79 and the setting value display LED 73 can be turned on. At the time of the next interrupt "2", the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)", a digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digits of the acquired number display LED 78 and the numerical lower digits of the management information display LED 74 can be lit. .

Moreover, FIG. 34(B) is a diagram showing the data structure of the LED display request flag. The LED display request flag is data indicating a digit that is permitted to be lit. As shown in FIG. 34(B), the LED display request flag is 8-bit data in which the D0 bit corresponds to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit corresponds to the digit 2 signal, ..., the D4 bit corresponds to the digit 5 signal. be. Each bit of the LED display request flag is made to match the bit of output port 2.
As shown in Figure 34 (B), digits 1 to 5 can be lit during normal operation, digits 3 to 5 can be lit while changing settings, and digits 1 to 5 can be lit while checking settings. be. In addition. "Normal" refers to waiting for games and during games.

Then, in the interrupt process, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag are ANDed, and the digit corresponding to the bit that becomes "1" becomes the digit that lights up in the current interrupt process.
For example, if the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)" and the LED display request flag is "00011111 (B) (normal medium)", if the two are ANDed, it will be "00010000 (B)" and the digit 5 Only the signal becomes "1". However, during normal operation (while waiting for the game and during the game), the segment signal is output from the output port 3 and the status display LED 79 can be lit, but the segment signal is not output from the output port 4 and the set value display LED 73 is turned on. (digit 5b) is controlled so as not to light up.

On the other hand, during a setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal turns on (LED display counter is "00010000 (B)"), a segment signal is output from output port 4, and the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is output. Enables lighting.
Also, during the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 3 or 4 signal turns on (LED display counter is "00000100 (B)" or "00001000 (B)"), the digit 3 signal (acquisition number display LED 78) (upper digit) and a digit 4 signal (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) are output, and the acquired number display LED 78 displays "88" (contents indicating that the setting is being changed).

Furthermore, when generating the segment signal of output port 3 at the interrupt timing when the LED display counter is "00001000 (B)" (interrupt "2" in FIG. 34), the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is referred to. To do this. Then, when the advantageous section display LED flag is on, the value obtained by ORing the generated segment signal and "10000000 (B)" is outputted from the output port 3 as a segment signal. Thereby, segment P (advantageous section display LED 77) of digit 4a can be lit.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the address, label name, number of bytes, name and content of data stored in the RWM 53.
It should be noted that the data shown in FIG. 35 is used for explaining the eleventh embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to this.

Address "F000(H)" is a storage area for setting value data (_NB_RANK). When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the setting value data. In this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6". Therefore, any value from "0(H)" to "5(H)" is stored as the setting value data.
Then, the set value display LED 73 displays "N" which is the set value data plus "1" as the set value.

Address “F010(H)” is a storage area for credit number data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit number data is data to be displayed on the credit number display LED 76. In this embodiment, any value from "0" to "50(D)" is stored as the credit number data.
Here, in this embodiment, a value obtained by converting the number of credits into a decimal number is stored as the number of credits data. For example, when the number of credits to be displayed is "29", the value "29 (H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001(B)" is stored in address "F010(H)". As a result, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of address "F010(H)" are data for displaying the lower digit of the number of credits ("9" in this example), and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are data for displaying the lower digit of the number of credits ("9" in this example). , is data for displaying the upper digit of the number of credits (“2” in this example). Note that in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of credits is "50 (D)", so the stored data values are in the range of "0" to "50".
In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 that stores the credit number data itself is not provided, but the credit number data is provided as display data of the credit number display LED 76.

Address “F011(H)” is a storage area for acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT). The acquisition number data is data to be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In the acquisition number data, similarly to the credit number data described above, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digits, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are data for displaying the upper digits. It is data.
In this embodiment, when a small winning combination is won, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning small winning combination is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, so the payout number data corresponding to the winning small winning combination is stored as the winning number data. Specifically, when a small winning combination is won and medals are paid out, the acquired number data is added as the medals are paid out, and the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when "1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data, "01" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Here, in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F040(H)" which will be described later, "8(H)" is stored, for example, when an 8-card winning combination is won, and the payout number data is stored in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at the time of medal payout ( (including addition to credits) is decremented by "1" in the order of "8" → "7" → ... → "0" according to the number of payouts.
On the other hand, the acquired number data stored in the address "F011 (H)" is, for example, when an 8-card winning combination is won, "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "8"``1'' is added each time one medal is paid out. Therefore, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 also counts up in the order of "0" → "1" → "2" → . . . → "8".

Further, in this embodiment, "88" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 during the setting change. Therefore, during the setting change, display data for displaying "88" is stored as the acquisition number data. By displaying "88" on the acquisition number display LED 78, it is possible to identify from the front side of the gaming machine that the settings are being changed. Furthermore, by lighting all the segments as "88", it is possible to confirm that there are no segment defects (that there are no segments that cannot be lit). Note that the upper limit for the number of medals to be paid out is 15, so when "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it can be understood that this is not a display of the number of medals to be paid out.

Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment described later, when the condition for instructing the specified number (the number of medals to be bet in this game) is met, the start switch 41 is 2), the specified number is instructed (displayed, notified) on the acquired number display LED 78. In this embodiment, "0A" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 to indicate the specified number "2". Therefore, when specifying the specified number, specified specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as the acquired number data. Although the details will be described later, the instruction prescribed number display data for displaying "0A" is "0B(H)".

Further, when winning a push order bell or the like during AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78. Press order instruction information corresponding to winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. 58, which will be described later, is "=1" to "=6", respectively. Therefore, when displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data. Although details will be described later, the push order instruction numbers corresponding to the push order instruction information "=1" to "=6" are "A1(H)" to "A6(H)", respectively. For example, when displaying the push order instruction information in a game in which the winning number "3" is won, the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Further, when a predetermined error occurs, an error number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Therefore, when a predetermined error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as acquisition number data. For example, when the error number to be displayed is "HP", error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as acquisition number data.

Address “F030(H)” is a storage area for the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION). The operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining whether or not replay and accessories are activated. For example, when 1BB is in operation, the D2 bit of the operating state flag is set to "1".
This operating state flag is updated in the game start setting process described later (step S317 in FIG. 42). For example, in step S313 of FIG. 42, when the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag described later is read and it is determined that the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, and the operating state is Set the D0 bit of the flag to "1".
The replay operation state flag (D0 bit) is cleared in step S413 of FIG. 50 (game end check process), which will be described later.
Furthermore, the operational state flag of the accessory is also cleared in the game end check process (not shown in FIG. 50).

Address "F031 (H)" is a storage area for the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN). The symbol combination flag is a flag for determining the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed, and in this embodiment, replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D2 bit. Therefore, the replay and 1BB bits of the symbol combination display flag are respectively assigned to the same bits as the replay and 1BB bits assigned to the operating state flag.
During the main processing in FIG. 41, in step S291, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Then, the symbol combination display flag is updated according to the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to "1".
The symbol combination display flag is cleared at the start of the next game, specifically during the main process in FIG. 41, in step S279 (start switch acceptance process).

Address “F040(H)” is a storage area for payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). The payout number data becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined (step S293 in FIG. 40). When a small winning combination is won, payout number data corresponding to the winning small winning combination is stored, and a medal payout process is executed. Here, each time one medal is paid out (adding "1" to the number of credits, or actually paying out one medal (from the hopper 35)), the payout number data is subtracted by "1". That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. As a result, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0".

The address "F041 (H)" is the storage area of the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Similar to the payout number data, the payout number data buffer becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined. Here, unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not subtracted every time one medal is paid out, and the initially stored value is maintained. This value is maintained until the next game's medal payout number update process (step S293 in FIG. 41). For example, when a small winning combination of 8 pieces is won in the game, "8 (H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and in the next game, when no winning combination is won, as the payout number data buffer. "0" is overwritten.

Address "F042(H)" is a storage area for automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals to be automatically bet when a replay is won, and in this embodiment, "2" or "3" is stored.
The automatic bet number data is set in step S325 during the game start setting process of FIG.
Address "F043(H)" is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is stored. The bet number data is used in the medal management process in step S276 during the main process of FIG. 41 (inserted medals are detected, and bet processing and credit addition processing are performed).

Address "F051(H)" is the storage area of the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP). The LED display counter is shown in FIG. 34(A), and as described above, is updated every time an interrupt process is performed.
Address "F052(H)" is a storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag is shown in FIG. 34(B), and takes a value corresponding to normal mode, setting change mode, or setting confirmation mode.

Address "F061 (H)" is a storage area for a favorable zone type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The favorable zone type flag is a flag that indicates whether the current game zone is a normal zone or a favorable zone.
The favorable zone type flag stores "00000000 (B)" when in a normal zone, and when transitioning from a normal zone to a favorable zone, the D0 bit becomes "1".
The timing at which the advantageous zone type flag is updated will be described later.

Address "F062(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous section display LED flag is a flag indicating whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, the advantageous section display LED flag becomes "0", and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the advantageous section display LED flag becomes "1".
Note that the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at any time after the transition to the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at the same time as the transition to the advantageous section).

On the other hand, even after shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not need to be turned on.
Specifically, firstly, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on at the time of transition to the advantageous section, but may be turned on afterwards (during the advantageous section).
Second, when transitioning to an advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on, and if the end condition of the advantageous section is met before the conditions for turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 are met, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even once. You may end the advantageous section without turning on the light.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the instruction function is activated (when the correct button press sequence is notified) in a game state in which the zone is favorable and the zone Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1", the favorable zone display LED 77 is lit up.
Furthermore, once the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on, it remains lit during the advantageous zone.
In addition, during the game end check process in the final game of the advantageous zone, a process is executed to turn off the advantageous zone display LED 77. Specifically, when the advantageous zone end condition is met, an initialization process of the advantageous zone display LED flag storage area (clearing the advantageous zone display LED flag) is executed. As a result, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt process.

Furthermore, the lighting timing when lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 in a game that activates the instruction function is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the reels 31 start rotating, until the rotation reaches a constant speed state).
However, it is not limited to this, and other lighting timings include, for example,
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the stop switch 42 can be operated,
3) When at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is rotating,
4) When all reels 31 are stopped,
5) After all the reels 31 have stopped (the game has ended), but before the payment switch 43 can be operated before the start of the next game.

However, in order to light up the advantageous zone display LED 77 in a game that activates the instruction function, the winning role for that game must have been determined, so this does not apply before the start switch 41 is operated (before the role is drawn).
When the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on in a game in which the indication function is activated, this is done after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning combination is selected, so the shortest possible time for turning on the advantageous zone display LED 77 after the reel 31 starts to rotate and before the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state is achieved.

Address "F063 (H)" is the storage area of the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous section clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of games played during the advantageous section. The advantageous section clear counter is "0" during the normal section, and is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value when transitioning to the advantageous section. Further, the advantageous section clear counter is set to be decremented by "1" per game not only during the advantageous section but also during the normal section. However, the minimum value is "0". For this reason, in the normal section, when the advantageous section clear counter (before subtraction) is "0", a counter is used in which even if "1" is subtracted, the value after the subtraction becomes "0". Therefore, during the normal period, "1" is subtracted for each game, but "0" is maintained. In other words, when "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section (non-advantageous section).

Further, when the game moves to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value, so in the next game, the advantageous section clear counter becomes "1499 (D)".
Note that the advantageous section clear counter stores an initial value of "1500 (D)" at most, so it is composed of 2 bytes. In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is an advantageous section.

Address "F065(H)" is the storage area of the difference counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets during the advantageous section, and is also referred to as "MY counter".
The difference counter does not simply store the cumulative value of the difference number itself, but stores "a value corresponding to" the cumulative value of the difference number. For example, when the difference in the number of sheets becomes a value corresponding to a minus value, that value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, "accumulated value of difference number of sheets ≠ difference number counter value".
The difference counter is an increment counter for determining whether the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets in the advantageous section exceeds "2400 (D)". Therefore, the difference counter is composed of a 2-byte storage area.

It is sufficient for the difference number counter to count at least the cumulative value of the number of difference sheets during the advantageous section, and there is no need to count during the non-advantageous section (normal section).
Here, when updating the difference counter value on the condition that the game is in an advantageous section, it is necessary to perform a process of determining whether or not the game is in an advantageous section every game. Therefore, in this embodiment, the difference counter value is updated including during the non-advantageous section (normal section). In this way, the difference counter value can be updated every game without determining whether the game is in an advantageous section or not, thereby simplifying the process.

Furthermore, even when the difference number of coins becomes negative in the current game and the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of coins becomes data of a carry-down, the difference number counter value is updated. However, if the difference counter value is negative data as a result of the calculation, the difference counter value is corrected to "0".

To give a specific example, (the difference counter value at the start of the first game is "0 (H)"),
1st game: When the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD (H)", and the difference counter after correction is "0 (H)"
2nd game: Number of bets “3”, number of payouts “9”, difference counter after calculation “0006 (H)” (no correction)
3rd game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "0003 (H)" (no correction)
4th game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "1", difference counter after calculation "0001 (H)" (no correction)
5th game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "FFFE (H)", difference counter after correction "0 (H)"
will be updated as follows.
In addition, even if the difference counter of the previous game is "0 (H)" and the difference counter of the current game is "0 (H)", the difference counter value that reflects the number of differences of the game concerned will be changed again. Since this is a calculated result, this case also corresponds to "updating" the difference counter.

As described above, when the difference counter value after the calculation is a value with a digit drop, the difference counter value is corrected to "0" (the initial value "0" is set). Note that a method for determining whether a downgrade has occurred will be described later.
By updating the difference counter value in this way, for example, when the number of payouts is larger than the number of bets, that is, when the difference number is increasing, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example in a game during the normal period, the difference counter value will increase by the number of payouts when there is a payout based on winning a small role, but after that, the number of payouts will increase. If it becomes less than the number of bets, it will eventually become "0".

FIG. 36 is a diagram (slump graph) for explaining the concept of the difference counter value, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. In FIG. 36, the horizontal axis is the number of games played, and the vertical axis is the number of differences.
Example 1 shows an example in which the number of differences initially progressed in a negative direction as the game progressed, but halfway through, for example, with the start of AT, the number of differences turned to increase. The difference counter counts the time when the difference number reaches its lowest value in the process of playing the game, so the range indicated by the arrow in the figure is counted by the difference number counter as the amount of increase in the difference number. be done. As described above, in this embodiment, the advantageous section ends when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" (the next game is controlled to be a game in the normal section).

Furthermore, when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, so for example, if the difference counter is exactly "2400 (D)" at the end of the current game, the current game In this case, the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not met.
Then, in the next game, assuming that the maximum number of difference in the number of coins in the gaming machine is obtained, the number of bets is "1" and the number of payouts is "15", so the difference in number of coins in the next game will be "+14", The difference counter value at the end of the next game will be "2414 (D)". When the difference counter is "2414 (D)", it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.
Therefore, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is "2414 (D)".

Note that the determination of whether the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" is not limited to reading the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53, but also by temporarily storing it in a register for updating, etc. This also includes determining the difference counter value (the same applies hereinafter).
In addition, when determining whether or not the value exceeds "2400 (D)" based on the difference counter value temporarily stored in the register, if it is determined that the value does not exceed "2400 (D)", The difference counter value of the register is stored (saved) in the RWM 53. On the other hand, when it is determined that the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the difference counter value is not stored in the RWM 53, and the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53 is controlled to be cleared. It is also possible.

Similarly, in Example 2, as in Example 1, the difference number progresses in the negative direction as the game progresses, but then, halfway through, for example, when an AT is started, the difference number starts to increase. In Example 2, even when the difference number counter exceeds "2400 (D)", the cumulative value of the difference number is not positive, but even in such a case, the advantageous zone ends. In other words, regardless of the cumulative value of the difference number that has accompanied the game up to that point, if the difference number counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", counting from the point when the difference number reached its lowest value, the advantageous zone ends (the next game is controlled to be a game in the normal zone).

Note that when updating the difference counter during the normal section, there is a possibility that the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" even during the normal section. For example, such a situation may occur if the player wins a special prize many times and plays the special game repeatedly. In such a case,
1) A method of updating the difference counter value as it is until the advantageous section starts;
2) When the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the difference counter value is temporarily reset to "0" at that point.
For example, when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during an advantageous section, when the difference counter is cleared based on the end of the advantageous section, the processing As long as the process is executed regardless of the difference, the difference counter will be cleared even if it exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal period.

On the other hand, if the process of clearing the difference counter is a process specific to the advantageous section, the difference counter will not be cleared even if the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal section.
Incidentally, when starting the advantageous section (first game of the advantageous section), the difference counter is cleared (the initial value is set to "0". Step S354 in FIG. 45, which will be described later). Therefore, it does not matter what the difference counter is before the start of the advantageous section.
and,
1) When the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the advantageous section,
2) When the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games,
satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section.
When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the difference counter is cleared (initialized). The reason why the difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous section is to prevent data (values) related to the advantageous section from being carried over to the normal section when the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section. The difference counter is cleared in step S435 in FIG. 51, which will be described later.

FIG. 37 is a diagram (slump flag) showing the relationship between the difference counter value and the advantageous section, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2.
In Example 1, in the normal section, the number of differences decreases as the game progresses, and the number of differences further decreases from the time when the advantageous section starts ("A" in the diagram) until proceeding to "B" in the diagram. An example is shown below. Note that AT is not started at the same time as the start of the advantageous section, and at the beginning of the advantageous section there is a CZ, precursor, or AT preparation (for example, when the RT state is a low probability state, the RT state is changed from a low probability state to a high probability state). In the case of a specification where the starting point is (while waiting for a replay win to win), the number of differences may decrease even after starting the advantageous section. Further, even if AT is started, if the situation continues where it is difficult to win the push order bell, the number of differences may decrease.

Since the difference counter value is initialized at the start of the advantageous section, it is "0" at point "A" in the figure. Further, as described above, under a situation where the number of differences is decreasing, the difference counter value maintains "0". Therefore, the difference counter value remains at "0" from point "A" to point "B" in the figure.
Also, an example is shown in which the number of differences starts to increase from point "B". As a result, the difference counter value also increases. When it is determined that the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" (when reaching point "C" in the figure), it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, and the advantageous section is ended. (Transition to normal section).

In this way, the difference counter starts counting positively from the point when the difference number reaches its lowest value ("B") after the start of the advantageous section, rather than from the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section. Medals will not be awarded to the player beyond the range where the number of balls increases (the range from "B" to "C" in FIG. 37(a)). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's gambling desire from being aroused.

The above points will be explained more specifically using numerical values as examples.
For example, if the specification is such that AT is started by lottery after starting an advantageous section, the number of differences may decrease as the game progresses when it is an advantageous section and non-AT.
For example, suppose that player X wins the advantageous section and starts the advantageous section, but AT does not start and the game is stopped when the difference becomes "-200 coins."

Next, it is assumed that player Y starts playing a game on the gaming machine, and when the difference becomes "-50 coins", he wins AT and starts AT. Then, after starting the advantageous section, if the advantageous section (AT) continues until the difference exceeds "+2400 medals", player Y will be able to obtain "2400 + 250 = 2650 medals". .
Therefore, as mentioned above, after starting the advantageous section, by setting the end condition "from the time when the difference number reaches the minimum value until it exceeds +2400 coins", for example, it is possible to prevent other players from getting hooked. We are trying to prevent people from being able to acquire such things, including those that are available to them, and to not encourage the desire for gambling.

Example 2 shown in Figure 37(b) shows an example in which the difference number decreases in the normal zone, turns positive at point "D" midway, and then the favorable zone starts at point "E". In such a case, as described above, when the difference number counter value is updated to include the normal zone, the difference number counter value is positive at point "E" in the figure. However, the difference number counter value is initialized (cleared, i.e., updated to "0") at the start of the favorable zone (at "E" in the figure).
Therefore, the increase before the advantageous zone (the increase from "D" to "E") is not counted by the difference counter. Therefore, the difference counter continues to count positively from point "E", and the advantageous zone ends when it exceeds "2400 (D)".

The explanation returns to FIG. 35.
Address “F067(H)” is a storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not the AT is in progress, and is set to "0" during non-AT, and set to "1" during AT. The timing at which the AT flag is set to "1" is when the AT lottery is won, and is executed in step S364 in FIG. 46, which will be described later. Further, the AT flag is turned off at the end of the final AT game, and is executed, for example, in a game end check process (step S415 in FIG. 50) to be described later. Furthermore, the data that is cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous section includes an AT flag.

Address "F068 (H)" is the storage area of the AT game number counter (_CT_ART). The AT game number counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of games played during AT (including ART). Unlike the advantageous section clear counter, when the AT game number counter reaches "0", subsequent counting (subtraction) is stopped.
The AT game count counter is updated (subtracted) during the AT after the start switch 41 is operated during the main process (step S281 in FIG. 41, which will be described later).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed "255 (D)", the AT game number counter is composed of a 2-byte counter. When the maximum number of AT games is "255 (D)" or less, the AT game number counter may be configured from a 1-byte counter.
When starting AT (or when transitioning to AT preparation), an initial value is set in the AT game counter. The initial value may be a fixed value, or may be determined by lottery or the like when AT is won. Furthermore, after determining the initial value, the number of AT games may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, the number of AT games may be added when a predetermined condition is met during AT, and the number of AT games may be increased when the player wins an additional lottery. In this case, the increased amount is added to the AT game counter.
This AT game count counter is also included in the data that is cleared at the end of the advantageous section.

In this embodiment, since a game number management type AT is exemplified, an AT play count counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of a difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided instead of an AT play count counter. Then, when the AT starts, an initial value of the difference number of coins that can be obtained is set. Also, when an additional coin is won, the additional difference number is added. Then, each time a payout is made, the difference number of coins for that play is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT ends.

Next, each process during the game will be explained using a flowchart.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50. When the power is turned on, the program starts from the program start process shown in FIG. 38.
In FIG. 38, when the program is started in step S201, the main control board 50 initializes the registers in the next step S202. Specific processing includes, for example, setting the communication speed of the serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 55, setting the type of interrupt (for example, setting it as a maskable interrupt, etc.), and parity bits added to control commands to be sent. setting (for example, setting to even parity). In other words, initial values necessary for normal operation of the slot machine 10 are set in various registers.

Next, the process advances to step S203, and the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value. In this embodiment, when the power is turned off, a power-off processing completed flag is stored (step S484 in FIG. 54, which will be described later). This power-off processing completed flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was performed normally when the power is turned on. When it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S204, and when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S206.

In step S204, calculation of the checksum of the RWM 53 is executed. Specifically, the checksum calculation is executed for the same range (for example, the work area used by the program, the unused area, and the stack area) as the checksum of the RWM 53 executed at the time of power-off processing.
In step S205, it is determined whether the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is designated from the address of the RWM 53 for which the current checksum has been calculated, and it is determined whether the next address is the address for which the checksum is to be calculated. If it is determined that the checksum calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S204 and continues. On the other hand, if it is determined that the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed, the process advances to step S206.

Furthermore, in the subsequent processing, when data stored in multiple ranges (addresses) of the RWM 53 is to be initialized, similar processing is executed in the designated range of the RWM 53 in this embodiment.
Note that when it is determined in step S203 that the power-off processing completion flag is not a normal value, an abnormal value is set as power-off recovery data without executing checksum calculation of the RWM 53.

In step S206, the main control board 50 stores the power interruption recovery data in a specified register (e.g., register B). If the power interruption processing completed flag is a normal value and it is determined that the RWM 53 checksum calculation (full range) has ended normally, the normal value is stored as the power interruption recovery data. On the other hand, if the power interruption processing completed flag is an abnormal value ("No" in step S203), or if it is determined that an abnormality occurred during the RWM 53 checksum calculation (full range) in step S204, the abnormal value is stored as the power interruption recovery data.

In the next step S207, level data of a predetermined input port 51 is stored in a predetermined register (eg, A register). Next, the process advances to step S208, and based on the level data of the predetermined input port 51, it is determined whether the designated switch is on. In this embodiment, the "designated switch" refers to a signal of a door switch (a switch that is turned on when the front door 12 (casing) is opened) among the predetermined input ports 51, and a set door switch. (The door provided on the setting key switch. Note that the setting door is not required.) Signals of the setting key switch (a switch that turns on when the setting key is inserted and rotated in a specified direction) There are three.

Then, the door switch signal is on (the front door 12 is opened), the setting door switch signal is on (the setting door is open), and the setting key switch signal is on. Allow settings to be changed only in certain cases. When all three specified switches are on, it is possible to proceed to the setting change process in step S212, but when at least one specified switch is not on, the process is not allowed to proceed to the setting change process in step S212. .
In other words, even when the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is closed) or the setting door switch signal is off (the setting door is closed), the setting key switch signal is Since it is impossible for this to be turned on and there is a high possibility of fraud, the transition to the settings change process is not allowed.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S208 that all designated switches are on, the process advances to step S209, and when it is determined that they are not on, the process advances to step S211.
In step S209, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off recovery data is abnormal. This power-off recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S206.

If it is determined that the power failure recovery data is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S212 for setting change processing (M_RANK_SET), and if it is determined that the power failure recovery data is not abnormal, the process proceeds to step S210. In step S210, it is determined whether or not a setting change disable flag is on. Here, the setting change disable flag is one of the data stored in the RWM 53, and is a flag that is disabled during the period from the start switch acceptance processing (step S279) to the game end check processing (step S301) in FIG. 41, which will be described later. If the setting change disable flag is on, the process proceeds to step S211, and if it is not on, the process proceeds to step S212 for setting change processing (M_RANK_SET).
In this embodiment, the setting change disable flag is provided, but if the setting is configured to be changeable at all times, the setting change disable flag need not be provided. In that case, the process corresponding to step S210 is not necessary.

In step S211, the main control board 50 determines whether the power interruption recovery data is a normal value. This process is equivalent to step S209. If it is determined that the power interruption recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S213 and performs power recovery processing (M_POWER_ON). In contrast, if it is determined that the power interruption recovery data is not a normal value, an "E1" error occurs, and the process proceeds to step S214 and performs unrecoverable error processing.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 of FIG. 38.
First, in step S221, a "predetermined range" is stored in a register as an initialization range within the used area of the RWM 53. Here, "within the used area" refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data related to the progress of the game. The range shown in FIG. 35 is entirely within the used area. On the other hand, "outside the used area", which will be described later, refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data that is not related to the progress of the game. Specifically, a storage area that stores data related to the display of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) can be mentioned.

In addition, the "predetermined range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally, and includes setting value data (address "F000 (H)"), gaming state (for example, RT state), winning The initialization range in which the flags, etc. of special winning combinations having , etc. are not initialized is defined as a "predetermined range".
Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment described later, if BB2 is in operation before the power is turned off (when the winning flag of BB2 is on), if the power is turned off normally, the setting change process will not be executed. However, the winning flag of BB2 is maintained.
On the other hand, the "predetermined range" does not include data regarding advantageous sections or AT. Therefore, in FIG. 35, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" are the targets of initialization here.

Next, the process proceeds to step S222, where the main control board 50 judges whether the power interruption recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. If it is judged that the power interruption recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S224, where the "predetermined range" stored in step S221 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is judged in step S222 that the power interruption recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S223.
In step S223, the main control board 50 stores the "specific range" in the register as the initialization range within the usage area of the RWM 53. Here, the "specific range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power cut is not normal, and is the entire range within the usage area including the setting value data (address "F000(H)").

Then, the process proceeds to step S224, where initialization of the predetermined range set in step S221 or the specific range set in step S223 (within the area used by RWM53) begins. In the next step S225, it is determined whether the initialization started in step S224 has ended. If it is determined that the initialization has ended, the process proceeds to step S226.

In step S226, the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved. The AF register is saved because, although it would normally be the F (flag) register that is wanted to be saved, the AF register is saved instead due to the nature of the command. Then, the process proceeds to step S227, where a specified range outside the area in use is stored as the initialization range of RWM53. The "specified range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been performed normally.

In the next step S228, similarly to step S222, it is determined whether the power-off recovery data (value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process advances to step S230, and the "predetermined range" stored in step S227 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S228 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process advances to step S229.
In step S229, the main control board 50 stores the "specific range" in the register as the initialization range outside the used area of the RWM 53. Here, the "specific range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power outage is not normal, and is the entire range including the ring buffer etc. that stores the number of games and the number of payouts for displaying the ratio.
Then, the process proceeds to step S230, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S227 or the specific range set in step S229 (outside the area used by the RWM 53) is started.

In the next step S231, it is determined whether the initialization started in step S230 has been completed. When it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process advances to step S232.
In step S232, the AF register saved in step S226 is restored. In the next step S233, interrupt processing startup settings are performed. Here, various registers corresponding to the interrupt processing specified in step S202 are set. Since this embodiment uses timer interrupt processing as the interrupt processing, processing for setting the timer interrupt cycle (in this embodiment, "2.235 ms") is included. Then, after the processing in step S233, interrupt processing is executed. In other words, the configuration is such that no interrupt processing is executed before "interrupt activation".
In the next step S234, an output request is set at the time of starting the setting change. This process is a process in which a control command to be sent to the sub-control board 80 is set (stored) in a register in order to notify the sub-control board 80 side that a setting change process is to be started.

The term "output request set" refers to a process of setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. The control command here does not only refer to a command that is actually transmitted, but also refers to a command that is the source of the command that is actually transmitted.
Next, the process proceeds to step S235, where the main control board 50 executes control command set 1. This process is a process for storing control commands to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 53).

Next, the process advances to step S236, and the main control board 50 executes a 2-byte time wait process (wait process) for starting the setting change. In this embodiment, the process waits until the number of interrupts reaches "224" ("1" is subtracted for each number of interrupts, and until the set number of interrupts reaches "0"). This waiting process is also called delay processing or standby processing because it does not allow the main processing to proceed further. Note that during this waiting time (during the 2-byte time waiting process), the main process is not allowed to proceed, but the interrupt process is executed.

In this way, the reason why the 2-byte time waiting process (wait process) is executed in step S236 is that the initialization process of the RWM 53 on the main control board 50 side is completed in a relatively short time, whereas the sub-control board 80 side Since the initialization process of the RWM 83 takes time, the main control board 50 side executes a 2-byte time waiting process. In particular, this is because the main control board 50 side cannot know whether the initialization process has been completed on the sub control board 80 side.

Therefore, while the sub-control board 80 side is still in the initialization process, the main control board 50 side has already completed the initialization process, and the process progresses further. It is possible to prevent the progress of the control process 80 from becoming out of synchronization.
Furthermore, after executing the output request set and control command set 1 at the start of setting change, the sub-control board 80 starts initializing the RWM 83, but the wait time is set to be sufficient for the initialization of the RWM 83 to be completed. do. As a result, after the initialization processing of the RWM 83 is completed on the sub-control board 80 side, the processing on the main control board 50 side proceeds to step S238 and subsequent steps.

Note that the control command for starting the setting change set in steps S234 and S235 is sent to the sub-control board 80 even during the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236. However, while the 2-byte time waiting process is being executed in step S236, the process does not proceed to steps S237 and subsequent steps (the main process does not proceed).

After the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236 ends, the process advances to step S237, and the setting change display data is stored as acquisition number data. Next, the process advances to step S238, and the value "00011100 (B)" corresponding to the setting change is stored in the LED display request flag.

The processes in steps S237 and S238 enable the lighting of digits 3a, 4a, and 5b (acquired number display LED 78 and set value display LED 73) when an interrupt process is executed after these processes.
Specifically, in the interrupt processing executed after step S238, "8" can be displayed in digits 3a and 4a ("88" can be displayed in the acquisition number display LED 78), and the current setting value can be displayed in digit b5 (setting value display LED 73).
Incidentally, since the acquired number data and the LED display request flag have been initialized by the initialization process in the use area of the RWM 53 in step S224, the values thereof before step S237 are "0".

Next, the process advances to step S239, and interrupt wait processing is executed. This process is a process that waits until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) has elapsed. Then, after one interrupt time has elapsed, the process advances to step S240.
In step S240, it is determined whether or not an operation of a setting change switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been detected. Here, by determining the rising data of the input port 51 including the setting change switch, it is determined whether the setting change switch is turned on. When it is determined that the operation of the setting change switch has been detected, the process proceeds to step S241, and when it is determined that the operation has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S242.
In step S241, the setting value data (address "F000(H)") of the RWM 53 is stored (updated). When interrupt processing is executed after the setting value data is updated, the updated value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73.

In the next step S242, it is determined whether the operation of the start switch 41 has been detected. In this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during a setting change, the setting value at that time is determined.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S243, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S239.

In the above processing, step S239 (interrupt wait) is provided to clear the rising data of the setting change switch.
For example, if the process of step S239 is not provided, if it is determined in step S240 that the start-up data of the setting change switch is on, the setting value data is updated in step S241, and the start switch 41 is turned on in the next step S242. If it is determined that it is not, the process advances to step S240, and it is determined whether or not the start-up data of the setting change switch is on.

If interrupt processing is executed even once after it is determined that the setting change switch is on in step S240, the rising data of the setting change switch will be turned off. However, until the interrupt process is executed, it continues to be determined in step S240 that the rising data of the setting change switch is on. As a result, the set value data continues to increase by "2" or more even if the setting change switch is operated only once. Therefore, in step S239, interrupt wait processing is executed.

In step S243, it is determined whether the setting key switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned off, the process proceeds to step S244, where the acquisition count data is cleared (set to "0"). This is to erase the display of "88", which indicates that the setting is being changed. Next, the process proceeds to step S245, where the value "00011111 (B)", which corresponds to the normal state, is stored in the LED display request flag.

Due to the interrupt process executed after the process in step S244, the display of digits 3a and 4a (obtained number display LED 78) changes from "88" to "00".
Further, due to the interrupt process executed after the process of step S245, "0" is displayed in each of the digits 1a and 2a ("00" is displayed on the credit number display LED 76). Further, since the bit corresponding to digit 5 of the LED display request flag is "1", digit 5a (status display LED 79) can be lit. On the other hand, the digit 5b (set value display LED 73) does not light up because the setting is not being changed or confirmed.

Next, the process advances to step S246, and similarly to step S234, an output request is set at the end of the setting change. This process ends the setting change process and transfers the data corresponding to the determined setting value (specifically, the setting value data stored at address "F000(H)") to the sub-control board 80. This process sets a control command to be notified. Next, the process advances to step S247, and the main control board 50 executes control command set 1 similarly to step S235. Then, the process advances to step S248 and shifts to main processing (M_MAIN).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG.
First, in step S251, the stack pointer (SP register) is restored. Here, the stack pointer is an area (stack area) of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power outage (for example, register values, main processing instruction processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when a power outage occurs. Of these, it indicates the area (address) to be stacked next.
In the next step S252, the setting value data is read and checking whether the range of the setting value data is within the normal range (is it within the range of setting value 1 to setting value 6)? It is determined whether the set value data is within the range of "0 (H)" to "5 (H)". When it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S253, and when it is determined that the set value data is not within the normal range, an "E6" error occurs and the process proceeds to step S264, where the process proceeds to irreversible error processing. .

Proceeding to step S253, an unused area within the used area of the RWM 53 is set in a register as an initialization range. Then, in the next step S254, initialization of the RWM 53 within the range set in step S253 is executed. Here, it is possible that a value may be stored in the RWM 53 even in an unused area due to noise or the like. In the unlikely event that a value is stored in an unused area, it may lead to fraud or other fraudulent activity, so be sure to initialize the unused area when the power is turned on (usually once a day). There is.
In the next step S255, it is determined whether the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area within the used area) has been completed, and if it is determined that it has been completed, the process advances to step S256.

In step S256, the AF register is saved. This process is similar to the process in step S226 described above. In the next step S257, the initialization range of the unused area outside the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S258, initialization of the RWM 53 within the range set in step S257 is executed.
In the next step S259, it is determined whether the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area outside the used area) has been completed, and when it is determined that it has been completed, the process advances to step S260. In step S260, the AF register is restored. This process is similar to the process in step S232 described above.

In the next step S261, a predetermined input port 51 is read. This process is a process for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port 51 before the power is turned off to the latest data.
Next, the process advances to step S262 and an interrupt is activated. This process is, for example, a process of setting a timer interrupt cycle, and is similar to step S233 described above.
Next, the process advances to step S263, where the power-off processing completion flag is cleared, that is, set to "0". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In the above program start processing, setting change processing, and power recovery processing,
1) In the program start process of FIG. 38, if it is determined "No" in step S203 (when the power-off processing completed flag is an abnormal value), or if there is an abnormality during checksum calculation in step S204, step In S206, the abnormal value is stored as recovery data after the power is turned off. In this case, since the determination in step S209 is "Yes", the process advances to setting change processing (FIG. 39) in step S212.
In the setting change process of FIG. 39, since "No" is determined in step S222 and step S228, the entire range inside and outside the used area of the RWM 53 is initialized, that is, after "F000(H)" All data will be initialized.

2) In the program start process, if the power-off processing flag is determined to be a normal value and the checksum calculation is also performed normally, when proceeding to the setting change process, "Yes" is determined in steps S222 and S228 in FIG. 39, so the process proceeds to steps S224 and S230, respectively, and the specified range of RWM53 (within the used area and outside the used area) is initialized.

3) In the program start process, if the power off processing flag is determined to be a normal value, the checksum calculation is also performed normally, and the setting change processing is not performed, the process proceeds to the power recovery processing of step S213 (Figure 40). In this case, in Figure 40, if the setting value is normal in step S252, the initialization of RWM53 (inside and outside the used area) that occurs when the power is normally turned on is performed. As described above, this initialization is a process of initializing the unused area of RWM53.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in this embodiment. The main process is a process for one game. While the game is in progress, the main process is repeated every game.
First, in step S271, a stack pointer is set. As mentioned above, the stack pointer refers to an area of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power outage (for example, register values, main processing instruction processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when a power outage occurs. Setting the stack pointer is a process of setting the register value to the initial value in the area of the RWM 53.

In the next step S272, game start setting processing (M_GAME_SET) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 42, which will be described later, and is a process of generating, updating, and saving an operating state flag.
In the next step S273, the bet medals are read. This process is a process of reading the number of medals that have been bet at the current time, and reads the bet number data or automatic bet number data.
In the next step S274, the presence or absence of bet medals is determined based on the bet number read in step S273.

When it is determined in step S274 that there are bet medals, the process proceeds to step S276, and when it is determined that there are no bet medals, the process proceeds to step S275 to perform a medal insertion waiting process, and then proceeds to step S276. In the medal insertion waiting process of step S275, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on, and when it is on, processing such as shifting to the setting confirmation mode is performed.
In step S276, management processing of the inserted medals is performed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the medals have been taken care of, and determining whether or not the payment switch 43 has been operated.

In the next step S277, soft random number updating processing is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1" at a time) a processing random number for processing (arithmetic processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used by the winning combination lottery means 61. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range of "0" to "65535(D)". Note that as an updating method, processing may be performed in which an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) that is incremented at the time of an interrupt) is added to the value before updating.

In the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S279, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Note that even if the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number for the game, "No" is determined in step S278.

In step S279, processing upon reception of the start switch is executed. This process is a process that sets a flag that settings cannot be changed, sets an output request when the reel 31 starts rotating, and sets the number of outputs for outputting a medal input signal as an external signal to a hall computer, etc. .
In the next step S280, the acquisition number data is cleared. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, even if the designated specified number display data and the payout number data have been previously stored as the acquired number data, they are cleared.
Here, although the details will be described later, in the twelfth embodiment, a specified number may be instructed (displayed) on the obtained number display LED 78 before the start of the game. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the designated specified number display data may be stored as the acquired number data. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquired number data is cleared and a process is executed to display "00" on the acquired number display LED 78 (or turn it off).
Further, at the time of step S280, when the payout number data of the previous game is stored as the winning number data, the payout number data is cleared in step S280.

Next, the process proceeds to step S281, and the main control board 50 executes an update process of the number of AT games. This process is the process shown in FIG. 43 described later, and is a process of subtracting the number of AT games when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the AT. Therefore, this process is not executed during non-AT.
In addition, whether or not to add to the AT game count during the AT is determined based on the result of the role lottery process in step S282. For example, when a rare role is won, the number of additional AT games is determined. Therefore, when the number of AT games is added and the additional amount is added to the AT game count counter, it is executed after the process of step S282 (not shown in FIG. 41).
After the start switch is accepted (step S279), the AT game count counter is updated in step S281. However, this is not limited to the above, and the AT game count counter may be updated after the role selection process in step S282 or after all reels 31 have stopped (after step S290).
In addition, in the specifications of the difference number management type AT, if it has an AT difference number counter, the AT difference number counter is updated after all reels 31 have stopped and the medal payout process due to a winning combination has been completed (after step S300).

In step S282, the winning combination lottery means 61 executes a winning combination lottery (corresponding to the above-mentioned "internal lottery") at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. In addition, the random number value at the time of winning lottery is acquired in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process is performed to determine whether or not the acquired random number corresponds to any winning combination using the winning combination lottery table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes a lottery process for transition to a favorable zone. This process is the process of FIG. 44 described later. In this embodiment, when the lottery for transition to a favorable zone is executed, an AT lottery is also executed. As shown in FIG. 44 described later, when the player is in a favorable zone but not in an AT (for example, when the main game state is a CZ), an AT lottery process is executed in step S348 in FIG. 44.
Next, the process proceeds to step S284, and the push order instruction number is set (M_ORD_INF). This process is the process shown in FIG. 48, and is a process for generating push order instruction numbers and displaying push order instruction information when the instruction function is activated in the game during the AT (displaying the push order instruction number on the acquisition number display LED 78).

In the next step S285, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed. This process executes processing such as determining whether the minimum gaming time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed, and if the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step S286.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum playing time (not shown in FIG. 35), and the initial value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms x 1834 ≒ 4099 ms)". It is. In step S279, if it is determined that the minimum playing time is "0", an initial value "1834 (D)" is set as the minimum playing time (timer value). Then, the minimum gaming time is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt processing. When the process proceeds to step S285 for the next game, it is determined whether the minimum game time is "0" or not, and when it is determined that it is "0", the process proceeds to step S286.

In step S286, the reel control means 65 controls the driving of the motor 32 to start the rotation of the reel 31. Then, when the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state, the operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted to be accepted, and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, the acceptance of stopping the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not an operation signal of the stop switch 42 has been received, and when an operation signal has been received, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the lottery result of the winning combination and the position of the reel 31, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether all the reels 31 have stopped and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether all the reels 31 have stopped, and if it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, it proceeds to step S290, and if it is determined that all the reels 31 have not stopped, it returns to step S287.

In step S290, the acquisition number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, by activating the instruction function during AT, push order instruction information (for example, "=1") may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In this case, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "00" due to the interrupt process executed after the process in step S290.
Note that the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off. Specifically, "00010011 (B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for turning off the light may be provided as segment data and that data may be output.

In step S291, symbol display is determined. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the active line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether a symbol display error has occurred. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304; if it is determined that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S293. move on.
Here, since the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, there is usually no case where the reel 31 stops at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the symbol display determination, if a symbol that should not originally be displayed (a kicking symbol) is displayed on the active line, it is determined that there is an abnormality ("E5" error), and the process proceeds to step S304. Executes unrecoverable error handling.

When it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S293, a payout number update process is executed. This process is a process of storing the number of payouts in the game as the above-mentioned payout number data and payout number data buffer.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals (M_WIN_PAY) corresponding to the winning combination. This process is the process shown in FIG. 49, which will be described later. Next, the process advances to step S295, and interrupt wait processing is performed. In the next step S296, interrupt processing is prohibited. Through the processing in steps S295 and S296, the interrupt is prohibited immediately after the interrupt.

In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. This process is similar to step S256 in FIG. 40. Next, the process advances to step S298, and ratio setting processing is executed. This "ratio setting process" is a process of updating various counter values, calculating ratios, etc. in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (rotation ratio monitor). Then, in step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and in the next step S300, interrupts are permitted (restarted). In this manner, when executing the ratio setting process, the AF register is saved and the interrupt process is prohibited before the process is executed.

Note that interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of ratio set processing because ratio set processing uses a program stored outside the used area, and when a program outside the used area is being executed in the main processing. This is because if interrupt processing is inserted into the program, programs in the used area and programs outside the used area will coexist, making the processing complicated.

Next, the process advances to step S301, and a game end check process (_M_GAME_CHK) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 50, which will be described later, and performs processing such as clearing the condition device (winning combination) flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S302, where an output request set at the end of the game is performed, and a control command set 1 is performed in the next step S303. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has ended.
When the process of step S303 is finished, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the game start setting process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG.
First, in step S311, a game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53). Since the game standby display time of this embodiment is set to "26846" interrupt (≈60000ms, that is, about 60 seconds (1 minute)), "26846" is set in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. When the game standby display time is set in step S301, from this point on, the value is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt process.

When the game standby display time becomes "0", the acquisition number data is cleared in step S275 (waiting for medal insertion) in FIG. 41. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. For example, even if the number of medals paid out in the previous game was "8" and the player made a payment by operating the payment switch 43 and ended the game, "00" will be displayed after about 1 minute. be done. This has the effect that the number of empty tables can be reduced by allowing the hall clerk or another player to recognize them as empty tables.
Note that instead of displaying "00" on the acquisition number display LED 78, the acquisition number display LED 78 (upper digits and lower digits) may be turned off, or the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off and the lower digit ``0'' may be displayed. In any case, it is only necessary to display a table so that a hall clerk or another player can recognize it as an empty table.

Next, the process advances to step S312, and initialization processing of the push order instruction number is executed. This process is a process for clearing the push order instruction number stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
In the next step S313, data of the symbol combination display flag is acquired. In the next step S314, it is determined whether the 1BB operation symbol is displayed. In this process, when the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB in the symbol combination display flag data is "1", it is determined as "Yes", and when it is "0", it is determined as "No". When it is determined that the 1BB activation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S315, and when it is determined that it is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S316.

In step S315, the number of coins that can be obtained during 1BB operation (1BB game) is saved. This process is a process of storing the maximum number of coins obtainable in a 1BB game in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to step S316.
In step S316, an operating state flag is generated. This process is a process that generates the value of the operating state flag based on the symbol combination display flag.
In the next step S317, the operating state flag is updated, and in the next step S318, the operating state flag is stored. This process is a process of storing the generated operating state flag (at this point, for example, stored in the A register) at address "F030(H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, the previous operating state flag information is replaced with the operating state flag information updated in step S317.
For example, when a 1BB symbol combination is displayed (1BB winning), the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag changes from "0" to "1".

In the next step S319, it is determined whether RB operation has started. In this embodiment, in 1BB play, the RB operation flag is turned off ("0") at the end of 2 games (or when two wins are made), but if the end conditions of 1BB play are not met (if the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB in the operation status flag is "1"), it is set to "1" in this game start set process. If it is determined in step S319 that RB operation has started, the process proceeds to step S320, and if it is determined that RB operation has not started, the process proceeds to step S321.

In step S320, the number of games played and the number of prizes won during the RB operation are saved. This process saves (memorizes) "2 (H)" in the game count counter (not shown in FIG. 35) when the RB is activated, which is provided in the RWM 53, and when the RB is activated, which is provided in the RWM 53. This is a process of saving (memorizing) "2 (H)" in the winning number counter (not shown in FIG. 35). Then, the process advances to step S321.

In addition, the number of games played when RB is activated and the number of prizes won when RB is activated are both set to "2 (H)" as the initial value, and each time the number of games played or the number of prizes won increases by "1". This is a counter that is decremented by 1. However, the initial value of these counter values is not limited to this, and the initial value of these counter values is set to "0", and each time the number of games played or the number of prizes won increases by "1", it is incremented by "1", and these counter values are set to "2 ( H)" may be determined.

In the next step S321, it is determined whether or not the condition for specifying a prescribed number is met. In the eleventh embodiment, there is no case where a prescribed number is specified. However, in the twelfth embodiment described later, there is a case where a prescribed number is specified at the start of a game, and therefore this process is included in this flowchart. If it is determined that the condition for specifying a prescribed number is met, the process proceeds to step S322, and if it is determined that the condition for specifying a prescribed number is not met, the process proceeds to step S323.
In step S322, the designated specified number display data is stored as the acquisition number data. In the twelfth embodiment, there is a case where the specified number "2" is designated, and when the specified number "2" is designated, "0A" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. The designated specified number display data for displaying "0A" is set to "0B(H)" (details will be described later), and in this step S322, "0B(H)" is stored as the acquisition number data.
In addition, when displaying the specified number "2", it is displayed as "0A" instead of "02" to avoid confusion with the payout number, error number, and push order instruction information.
The payout number is displayed as any of "01" to "15", and the lower digits will never have "A" displayed. Also, error numbers will never have "A" displayed in the lower digits.

Here, the error numbers (numbers displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 when an error occurs) in this embodiment are as follows:
HP: Medal jam error HE: Medal empty error (no medals in hopper 35)
H0: Abnormality in the payout sensor 37 CE: Medal retention error CP: Illegal medal passage error CH: Abnormality in the passage sensor 46 C0: Abnormality in the insertion sensor 44 C1: Abnormal medal insertion error FE: Subtank (not shown in FIG. 1) full dE: Front door open E1: Abnormal power interruption recovery E5: Display judgment error E6: Abnormal setting value E7: Random number error

The types of errors are not limited to those mentioned above. An error whose highest digit in the error number is "E" indicates an unrecoverable error.
As described above, there is no case where an "A" is displayed in the lowest digit of an error number, so there is no confusion between the error number and the specified number.
In addition, the push order instruction information displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function is "=1" to "=6". Therefore, there is no confusion between the push order instruction information and the instruction specified number.

In addition, in step S322, before storing the designated specified number display data as the number of acquisitions data, the number of payouts in the previous game may be stored as the number of acquisitions data (if a small winning combination was won in the previous game) ). Note that the payout number data is stored in step S399 of the medal payout process (described later in FIG. 49) due to winnings. Therefore, when storing the designated prescribed number display data, the previous payout number data may be overwritten. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and processing for clearing the acquisition number data may be provided before step S322 (for example, immediately before step S311).

In the next step S323, it is determined whether or not the replay symbol combination has been displayed as stopped based on the symbol combination display flag obtained in step S313. If it is determined that the replay symbol combination has been displayed as stopped, the process proceeds to step S324, and if it is determined that the replay symbol combination has not been displayed as stopped, the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S324, the main control board 50 reads the bet medals. This process is a process of reading the number of medals (bet number data) bet on in the previous game. Next, the process advances to step S325, and automatic bet number data is set. This process is a process of storing the bet number read in step S324 in the automatic bet number data.
Next, the process advances to step S326, and an output request for the operating state is set. In the next step S327, control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, information indicating that replay has been activated, that 1BB has been activated, etc. is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Note that "previously" (means before the filing of the present application and does not mean "publicly known"; the same applies hereinafter) refers to the time when the bet number is added, specifically, during the main process in FIG. 41, in step S276. In the medal management process, the acquisition count data was cleared. As a result, even if a small winning combination was won in the previous game and the payout number data at the time of winning the small winning combination was stored as the winning number data, the winning number data was cleared during the bet number adding process.
However, in this embodiment, before the medal management process is executed, when the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied, the specified specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data.
When a specified number is specified, it is necessary to prevent the specified specified number display data from being cleared during bet processing. In this embodiment, when the specified number is specified, the specified number is maintained at least until the start switch 41 is operated.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the acquisition number data is not cleared in the medal management process, but when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquisition number data is cleared in the process of step S280 in FIG.

However, the invention is not limited to this, and when the specified number is specified, the specified specified number display data is cleared after operating the start switch 41, but when the specified number is not specified, the same as before, when the number of bets is added, The acquisition number data may be cleared (in the medal management process). In this case, for example, in the process of adding the number of bets, before executing the process of clearing the acquired number data, it is determined whether or not the specified number has been specified in the current game, and when it is determined that the specified number has been specified. When it is determined that the prescribed number has not been specified, the acquired number data may be cleared.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the AT game count counter update process in step S281 in FIG.
First, in step S331, it is determined whether the AT flag is on ("1"). If it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S332, and if it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. In other words, if the AT is not in progress, the AT game count counter is not updated.

In step S332, it is determined whether the number of bets is "3". In this process, the bet number data or automatic bet number data of the RWM 53 is read and it is determined whether the bet number for the game is "3". When the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S333, and when the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart is ended. In this embodiment, the AT game number counter is updated (processing related to the instruction function is executed) only when a game is played with the number of bets (regular number) "3" during AT. In other words, even during AT, when a game is started with the number of bets (regular number) "2", the AT game number counter is not updated.
On the other hand, as will be described later, the advantageous section clear counter and difference counter are updated regardless of the number of bets.

Proceeding to step S333, the main control board 50 subtracts "1" from the value of the AT game number counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In the case of the difference number management type AT, even when an AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is not subtracted (updated) if the bet number is not "3" even during AT.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the advantageous zone transition lottery processing in step S283 in FIG.
In this embodiment, the AT lottery process (step S348) is provided in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, but this is not limited to this, and the advantageous zone transition lottery process and the AT lottery process may be executed independently. For example, in FIG. 41, step S283 may be only the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and the AT lottery process may be executed after step S283.
First, in step S341, it is determined whether or not the number of bets (prescribed number) for the current game is 3. If it is determined that the number of bets is 3, the process proceeds to step S342, and if it is determined that the number of bets is not 3, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Therefore, when the number of bets (prescribed number) is "3", the advantageous zone transition lottery in step S345 and the advantageous zone transition process (processing related to the advantageous zone) in step S347 described later can be executed, and the AT lottery process (processing related to the instruction function) in step S348 can be executed. However, when the number of bets (prescribed number) is not "3", these processes are not executed.

In step S342, it is determined whether the advantageous section type flag is "0". When it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "0" (it is a non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S343, and when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (it is an advantageous section), step S348 Proceed to. When the advantageous section type flag is "1" (already in the advantageous section), the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed, but the AT lottery is performed.

In step S343, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery result in the current game is a target lottery result, that is, whether or not the winning winning combination is the lottery target in the advantageous section. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted here, for example, if you win a special role alone, if you win both a special role and a small role, or if you win a small role (rare small role), it is a target lottery result. to decide. In addition, the target lottery results do not include non-winners. This is because in a game in which the winning combination is not won (a game in which the conditional device is not activated), processing related to the advantageous section is not executed.
If it is determined in step S343 that the lottery result is a target lottery result, the process proceeds to step S344, and if it is determined that it is not a target lottery result, the process according to this flowchart is terminated (that is, the advantageous section lottery is not performed, or the advantageous zone is not selected). (Winner)

In step S344, it is determined whether or not the target lottery result is a specific lottery result. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted here, for example, among the winning hands to be drawn, the middle cherry (winner alone or winning in combination with a special prize) may be set as a guaranteed winning hand (a hand that will definitely win) in the advantageous section transition lottery. If you win a middle-tier cherry, it may be determined that it is a specific lottery result.
When it is determined in step S344 that the result is a specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S347, and when it is determined that it is not a specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S345. In other words, if the result is not a specific lottery result, an advantageous section transfer lottery is performed, and if the result is a specific lottery result, an advantageous section transfer process (step S347) is executed without performing an advantageous section transfer lottery (always transfer to an advantageous section). do). Note that it is also possible to execute the advantageous section transfer lottery even if the result is a specific lottery result, and to set it so that the probability of winning the advantageous section transfer lottery is 100%.

In step S345, a lottery for moving to an advantageous zone is performed. For example, a lottery for moving to an advantageous zone may be performed in the same manner as the lottery for a role, using a lottery table in which the number of pieces according to the result of the lottery for a role is predetermined. For example, the probability of winning the advantageous zone with the winning number "A" is 35%, the probability of winning the advantageous zone with the winning number "B" is 60%, and so on.
In addition, if the result of the lottery is not eligible for the lottery of the advantageous zone, the result is "No" in step S343. Therefore, if the result of the lottery is "Yes" in step S343, that is, if the result of the lottery is eligible for the lottery of the advantageous zone transition, the lottery is performed using a lottery table having a minimum of "1" or more. However, the winning probability of the lottery of the advantageous zone transition is set to "1/17500" or more.

Next, the process proceeds to step S346, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section has been won in the lottery at step S345. When it is determined that the advantageous section has been won, the process proceeds to step S347, and when it is determined that the advantageous section has not been won, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S347, advantageous section transition processing is executed. This process is shown in FIG. 45, and is a process of setting flags and counters based on winning in the advantageous section.
In the next step S348, an AT lottery is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Note that, without being limited to the example of this embodiment, when moving to an advantageous section, AT may always be started (without performing an AT lottery). Alternatively, when transitioning to an advantageous section, the AT may always be non-AT, and after the transition to the advantageous section (for example, after playing a predetermined number of games), it may be determined whether or not to perform AT.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the favorable zone transition processing in step S347 of FIG.
First, in step S351, the main control board 50 turns on the advantageous zone type flag ("1"). Next, in step S352, the main control board 50 sets the advantageous zone clear counter to the initial value of the number of games played in the advantageous zone, "1500 (D)."

In the next step S353, the difference counter is set to "0". If the difference counter continues to be updated during the normal period (non-advantageous period) and is always set to "0" at the end of the game when the period is not advantageous, the process of step S353 is not necessary. However, the initial value may be set to "0" to prevent noise.
Note that at the end of the advantageous section, initialization processing including the difference counter is executed, so that the difference counter is "0" at the start of the normal section. Therefore, in the case of a specification in which the difference counter is updated only during the advantageous section, the difference counter at the start of the advantageous section is "0", so it is possible to omit the process of step S353. .
On the other hand, in the case where the difference counter continues to be updated during the non-advantageous section as in the present embodiment, the difference counter may be positive even immediately before shifting to the advantageous section. Therefore, in step S353, the difference counter is set to "0". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery process in step S348 of FIG.
First, in step S361, an AT lottery is executed based on the winning combination lottery result. As in step S345, this lottery may involve performing an AT lottery using a lottery table in which winning numbers are determined for each winning combination result.
Note that the AT lottery does not necessarily need to be executed, and for example, a winning lottery result that is not determined to be AT and a winning lottery result that is always determined to be AT may be provided.
In the next step S362, the main control board 50 determines whether or not AT was won in the AT lottery in step S361. When it is determined that AT has been won, the process proceeds to step S363, and when it is determined that AT has not been won, the process proceeds to step S365.

In step S363, the main control board 50 executes an AT initial game count determination process. This process is the process shown in FIG. 47, which will be described later. Next, the process advances to step S364, and the main control board 50 sets the main game state to AT and turns on the AT flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Here, the main game states of this embodiment include normal (non-advantageous section), CZ (advantageous section and non-AT), AT, and 1BB operation. Note that it is also possible to provide a precursor as the main game state after winning AT and before starting AT, but in this embodiment, to simplify the explanation, when AT is won, AT is started immediately. shall be. Further, information on the main game state is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S362 that AT has not been won and the process proceeds to step S365, the main control board 50 sets the main game state to CZ. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the AT initial number of games determination process in step S363 in FIG.
In FIG. 47, in step S371, it is determined whether the winning combination in the current game is a confirmed winning combination. As described above, a rare combination such as middle cherry is set as the confirmed combination. When it is determined that the confirmed role has been won, the process proceeds to step S372, and when it is determined that the confirmed role has not been won, the process proceeds to step S373.
In step S372, the initial number of AT games is set to "100 (D)" and stored in the AT game number counter. On the other hand, in step S373, the initial number of AT games is set to "30 (D)" and stored in the AT game number counter. Then, the processing according to each of the flowcharts ends.

In the example of Fig. 47, the initial number of times of play of the AT is allocated depending on whether or not the fixed role is won, but it is not limited to this, and the number of times of play may be selected using a lottery table based on the result of the lottery. In other words, even if the result of the lottery is one role, any one of the multiple number of times of play may be selected.
Also, during the AT, the AT game count determination process shown in Fig. 47 may be executed as a lottery for adding the number of AT games. When the lottery for adding the number of AT games is won, the determined number of additions is added to the AT game count counter.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG.
First, in step S381, it is determined whether or not the instruction condition (the condition for activating the instruction function) is satisfied. When the game is AT and a combination with an advantageous push order such as the push order bell is won, it is determined that the instruction condition is satisfied.
In addition, if the player wins the advantageous zone in the current game ("Yes" in step S346 in FIG. 44) and wins the AT ("Yes" in step S362 in FIG. 46), the player will move to the advantageous zone from the next game, so the current game is not in the advantageous zone. Therefore, the instruction function cannot be activated in the current game, so the answer is "No" in step S381.
If it is determined in step S381 that the designated condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S382, and if it is determined that the designated condition is not satisfied, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the next step S382, it is determined whether the number of bets in the current game is "3". In this process, it is determined whether the bet number is "3" by reading the bet number data or the automatic bet number data of the RWM 53.
When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S383, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart is ended. As described above, in the present embodiment, the condition for activating the instruction function (executing the process related to the instruction function) is set to be the number of bets "3" (a specified number of one). For this reason, for example, even if a game is started with the bet number "2" during AT and a winning combination with an advantageous push order (for example, push order bell) is won, the instruction function will not operate (the correct push order will be (not notified).

In the next step S383, a winning number (conditional device number) is set. The winning number (conditional device number) determined in the winning combination lottery process is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, in step S383, the value stored in this storage area is stored in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S384, and a press order instruction number table (not shown) is set. Here, the start address of the push order instruction number table is stored in the HL register. Then, the process advances to the next step S385.

In step S385, designated address data is set. This process is a process in which the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as a new HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the data stored in the winning number (condition device number) is used as an offset value, and the offset value is added to the top address of the push order instruction number table to obtain data corresponding to the obtained address. As a result, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is stored in the A register.
Then, in step S386, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (an area for storing the press order instruction number; not shown in FIG. 35).
In the next step S387, the A register value (press order instruction number) is stored as acquisition number data.

In the eleventh embodiment, it is assumed that the winning combinations to be drawn are the same as those in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment), which will be described later. Then, when winning numbers "3" to "8" are won during AT, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is set. The relationship between the winning number and the push order instruction number stored in the winning number data is as follows.
Winning number “3”: Press order instruction number “A1 (H)”
Winning number “4”: Push order instruction number “A2 (H)”
Winning number “5”: Press order instruction number “A3 (H)”
Winning number “6”: Press order instruction number “A4 (H)”
Winning number “7”: Press order instruction number “A5 (H)”
Winning number “8”: Press order instruction number “A6 (H)”

For example, when the winning number "3" is won during AT, the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data by the push order instruction number setting process shown in FIG. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 55, which will be described later.

After step S387, the process proceeds to step S388, where it is determined whether the advantageous section display LED flag is on (lit). When it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is on, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is not on, the process advances to step S389.
In step S389, it is determined whether the game state of the current game (RT or main game state) is a game state in which the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1". Note that whether or not the gaming state is such that the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1" is set in advance, and here it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the preset gaming state. Specifically, the data of the current RT and main game state is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, and by reading this data, the game state of the current game is determined to be a game state in which the zone Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1". Determine whether or not. When it is determined that the gaming state is such that the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", the process proceeds to step S390, and when it is determined that the gaming state is not such that the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", the process according to this flowchart is ended. do. In step S390, the advantageous section display LED flag is turned on. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by the interrupt processing executed after step S390. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is not yet lit and the section Sim ball payout rate is in a gaming state exceeding "1", the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Since the conditions for lighting are met, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when winning in an advantageous section transition lottery, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on before the start of the next game. Alternatively, after moving to an advantageous section, before activating the instruction function, or at any timing (when an arbitrarily set lighting condition is met), even if the section Sim ball payout rate is not over "1", ), the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) for winning in step S294 in FIG.
First, in step S391, the main control board 50 acquires payout number data. This process is a process of storing the value of payout number data in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S392, and it is determined whether or not medals are paid out. Specifically, it is determined whether the payout number data (A register value) is "0" or not. When it is determined that the number is "0", that is, when it is determined that no medals are paid out, the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "0", that is, when it is determined that medals are to be paid out, the process advances to step S393.

In step S393, the value of the number of credits data is acquired.
Next, the process advances to step S394, and it is determined whether the number of credits has reached a limit value. Specifically, when the number of credits data acquired in step S393 is "50 (D)", it is determined that the number of credits has reached the limit value, the process proceeds to step S398, and the number of credits data acquired is "50 (D)". (D)'', it is determined that the number of credits has not reached the limit value, and the process advances to step S395.

In step S395, a waiting time for credit addition is set. In this embodiment, in order to set the waiting time to about 100 ms, the number of interrupt processing times is set to "46" (46×2.235 ms=about 100 ms). Specifically, "00000000 (B)" is set as the B register value, and "00101110 (B)" is set as the C register value.
Next, the process advances to step S396, and a 2-byte time wait process is executed. This process is a process in which the BC register value is subtracted for each interrupt process and waits until it becomes "0".

When the 2-byte time waiting process in step S396 ends, the process advances to step S397, and "1" is added to the value of the number of credits data. As a result, the display on the credit number display LED 76 becomes "+1" due to the interrupt process executed after the process in step S397. For example, the display on the credit number display LED 76 changes from "08" to "09". After the process in step S397, the process advances to step S399.

When the process proceeds from step S394 to step S398, a process for paying out one medal (a process for paying out an actual medal from the hopper 35 to the player) is executed. This process drives the hopper motor 36, and as shown in Figures 7 and 8, when the on/off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b is detected at a predetermined timing, it is determined that one medal has been correctly paid out.
Through the above process, the number of credits is increased until the number of credits reaches the limit value, and when the number of credits reaches the limit, a process of paying out actual medals from the hopper 35 is executed.

In step S399, "1" is added to the acquisition number data. As a result, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "+1." For example, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from "02" to "03."
In the next step S400, the payout number data is subtracted by "1." In this step S400, only the payout number data is updated, and the value of the payout number data buffer is not updated.

Next, the process advances to step S401, and it is determined whether or not the medal payout has been completed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the updated payout number data has become "0". When it is determined that the payout number data is "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that the payout number data is not "0", the process returns to step S393 and continues the process.

In the above payout process, when performing the payout process to add "1" to the number of credits, a waiting time of about 100 ms is set by the processes of steps S395 and S396. Thereby, the display on the credit number display LED 76 can be shown to the player as if it is counting up. For example, the display on the credit number display LED 76 before credit addition is "08", and when 8 medals are added to this, "display "08" → 100ms standby process → display "09" → 100ms Standby processing→...→100ms standby processing→Display “16””. On the other hand, if a waiting time is not provided when adding "1" to the number of credits, the display will appear to change from "08" to "16" instantly.
Then, as in the present embodiment, when adding the number of credits, by executing a 2-byte time waiting process every time "1" is added, the payout sound ("Pururu...") is output from the sub-control board 80 side. ”) and the counting up of the number of credits can be synchronized.

On the other hand, when the number of credits exceeds the maximum number "50 (D)" and medals are actually paid out in the process of step S398, the 2-byte time waiting process of steps S395 and S396 is not provided.
This is because in order to actually pay out one medal, the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out one medal, so it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal. Therefore, when actually dispensing medals, the dispensing sound can be synchronized with the dispensing sound output from the sub-control board 80 side without providing a 2-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG.
First, in step S411, a process is performed to clear the flags of the condition devices (also called winning information, which is stored in a specified area of the RWM 53 (not shown in FIG. 35)). This process is a process to clear all but the condition devices of the special role, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special role has stopped on an active line, a process to clear the condition devices of the special role is also executed. In the next step S412, a process to turn off the replay display LED 79f is performed. This process is a process to set the bit corresponding to the replay of the medal management flag (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53 to "0". Next, the process proceeds to step S413, where the replay operation flag is cleared. This process is a process to set the D0 bit of the operation status flag to "0".

In the next step S414, it is determined whether the AT game number counter has reached "0". Here, the AT game number counter is updated in step S281 (FIG. 43) during the main processing of FIG. 41, as described above. As described above, in the present embodiment, the AT game count counter is updated after the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 41), but this is not limited to this. check processing) or during the processing of step S301 (for example, before step S414 in FIG. 50).
Furthermore, although this embodiment shows an example of a game number management type AT that updates the AT game number counter, in the case of a difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is set to "0" in step S414. Decide whether it has happened or not. Note that the AT difference number counter is updated after the medal payout process (step S294 in FIG. 41) due to winning.
When it is determined that the AT game number counter is "0", the process advances to step S415, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process advances to step S416. In step S415, the AT flag is turned off.
Next, the process advances to step S416, and advantageous section counter management is executed. This process is a process for updating an advantageous section clear counter and a difference counter, and is a process shown in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52, which will be described later. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

51 and 52 are flow charts showing advantageous zone counter management in step S416 of Fig. 50. Fig. 51 shows Example 1, and Fig. 52 shows Example 2.
The advantageous zone counter management executes the following processes.
1) Update the favorable zone clear counter. 2) Update the difference counter. 3) Determine whether the favorable zone end condition is met. 4) If the favorable zone end condition is met, initialize (clear) the data related to the favorable zone.
In addition, advantageous zone counter management is performed regardless of the number of bets (prescribed number).
In this embodiment, the advantageous zone counter management is executed regardless of whether the zone is advantageous or non-advantageous (normal) zone. However, the advantageous zone counter management may be executed only when the zone is advantageous by determining whether the zone is advantageous or not.

In Example 1 of FIG. 51, in step S421, the address value of the advantageous section clear counter is stored in the HL register. Therefore, "F063(H)" is stored in the HL register.
In the next step S422, "1" is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register. For example, the subtraction here is as follows.
"0010(H)" → "1" subtraction → "000F(H)"
"0001 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)" (zero flag = 1)
"0000 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)" (carry flag = 1)

As described above, even if "1" is subtracted from "0000(H)", no downflow occurs and "0000(H)" remains. In this way, no matter what value the value before subtraction is, since it is just one instruction (one step) to subtract "1", it is necessary to judge whether the count value before update is "0" or not. is not necessary, and there is no need to add the value of the carry flag after subtraction. Therefore, the time required to update the count value can be significantly reduced. In addition, by configuring in this way, it is possible to judge whether or not it is in an advantageous section from the value of the advantageous section clear counter, and to determine whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, if the game in the advantageous section is 1500 There is no need to judge whether a game has been executed or not, whether an arbitrary ending condition has been satisfied, etc.).

In the next step S423, the main control board 50 judges whether the favorable zone clear counter value before the subtraction was "0". This process is judged by whether the carry flag became "1" in the subtraction process of step S422.
When the carry flag becomes "1" (when the value before the subtraction is "0"), the process proceeds to step S436, and when the carry flag is not "1" (when the value before the subtraction is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S424. Note that when the carry flag becomes "1" (when the value before the subtraction is "0"), this means that the current game is not being played in an advantageous zone (the current game is being played in a non-advantageous zone (normal zone)).

In step S424, the main control board 50 determines whether the result of the subtraction in step S422 (after the subtraction) is "0". This process is performed based on whether the zero flag has become "1" in the subtraction process in step S422. In other words, it is determined whether the value before the subtraction was "1".
When the zero flag becomes "1", the process proceeds to step S435, and when the zero flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S425. Note that when the zero flag becomes "1" (when the subtraction result is "0"), this means that the current game will end in the advantageous zone (the next game will be a game in the non-advantageous zone (normal zone)).

In step S425, the value of the difference counter is acquired. This process is a process of reading the value of the difference counter and storing it in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S426, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not a replay activation symbol was displayed in the current game (whether or not the replay won a prize). In this process, it is determined whether the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is "1" or not, and when it is "1", it is determined that the replay activation symbol is displayed. When it is determined that the re-game activation symbol is displayed, the process advances to step S434, and when it is determined that the re-game activation symbol is not displayed, the process advances to step S427.

In step S427, the payout number data buffer is obtained. This process reads the payout number data buffer and stores the value in the A register.
In the next step S428, the process of adding the payout number to the difference counter is executed. This process is to add the A register value (payout number data buffer value) to the HL register value (difference counter) and store the added value in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S429, where the value of the bet number data is obtained. This is a process of reading the bet number data and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S430, the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter. This process subtracts the A register value from the HL register value and stores the subtraction result in the HL register. When the HL register value becomes less than "0", the carry flag becomes "1".

In the next step S431, it is determined whether the subtraction result in step S430 is less than "0". In this process, it is determined whether the carry flag becomes "1" by the subtraction in step S430, and when the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the subtraction result is less than "0", and the process proceeds to step S432. move on. On the other hand, when the carry flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not less than "0"), the process advances to step S433.

In step S432, a process of clearing the HL register value (setting it to "0") is executed. Then, in the next step S433, the difference counter value is saved. This process is a process of storing the HL register value in the difference counter. Therefore, when the process moves to step S433 via step S432, the difference counter becomes "0".
In the next step S434, the main control board 50 determines whether the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value. The upper limit value of the difference counter is set to "2400 (D)". In this process, a comparison operation is performed between the HL register value and "2401(D)". In this comparison operation, when the HL register value is larger, the carry flag becomes "0", and when the HL register value is smaller, the carry flag becomes "1". Therefore, when the carry flag is "1" (when the HL register value is smaller), it is determined that the upper limit value has not been exceeded, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit value is exceeded (when the carry flag is "0"), the process advances to step S435. Note that when the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value, the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied.
In step S435, the RWM 53 initializes the storage area regarding the advantageous section (clears the data regarding the advantageous section). Data related to advantageous sections include an advantageous section clear counter, an advantageous section type flag, a difference counter, an advantageous section display LED flag, an AT flag, an AT game count counter, and the like. Furthermore, information on the main game state can be mentioned. Note that the information regarding advantageous sections does not include RT status numbers, LED display counters, and the like. Specifically, in FIG. 35, "F000(H)" to "F052(H)" are not included.

For example, the data cleared in step S435 does not include the LED display counter.
Now assume that the LED display counter is to be cleared. In that case, the LED display counter becomes "0" when the advantageous section ends. Specifically, if the LED display counter is initialized to "00000010 (B)", the LED display counter should be updated to "00000001 (B)" in the next interrupt process, and the LED Even though it is possible to light up the LED corresponding to the display counter (specifically, the upper digit of the credit number display LED 76), the LED display counter ends up being "00010000 (B)". Therefore, the display of the LED whose LED display counter corresponds to "00000001(B)" is delayed, and there is a possibility that the LED appears to be turned off for a moment.

Furthermore, the data cleared in step S435 does not include, for example, the following data.
1) Excitation information of the motor 32 2) Error information when an error occurs 3) Data for displaying the management information display LED 74 (rot ratio monitor) (total number of games counter, total payout counter, etc.)
4) Timer value of minimum playing time (4.1 seconds) (set in step S285 in FIG. 41)
5) Input port 51 information 6) Control command buffer data 7) Stack area data 8) External signal information The above is an example of typical data, and the data that will not be cleared is limited to the above data. It doesn't mean that it will happen.

Next, the process advances to step S436, and the main control board 50 determines whether the advantageous section type flag is "0" (normal section). When the advantageous section type flag is "0", the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when the advantageous section type flag is not "0", particularly in this embodiment, when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (advantageous section), the process advances to step S437. Note that the reason why the advantageous section type flag is set to "1" at this point is because the player won the transfer lottery for an advantageous section in this game, and the advantageous section type flag was set to "1" in step S351 in FIG. In this case, the determination in step S423 is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S436. On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S436 via step S435, the advantageous section type flag is cleared in step S435, so the determination in step S436 will not be "No".

In step S437, an initial value is set in an advantageous section clear counter. This process is a process of setting the advantageous section clear counter to "1500 (D)". Here, "1500 (D)" is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Note that "F063(H)" is set in the HL register in step S421. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In the above advantageous section counter management, when updating the difference counter, the number of payouts is first added (step S428), and then the number of bets is subtracted (step S430). The reason for processing in this way is as follows.
For example, assume that when the difference counter is "2 (D)", the number of bets is "3 (D)" and the number of payouts is "9 (D)".
Here, when the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference counter, it becomes "-1 (D)" (actually, "FFFF (H)"), and the carry flag becomes "1". Then, when the payout number is added, "9 (D)" is added to "-1 (D)", so it becomes "8 (D)" and the carry flag is "1" (the carry is ).

The difference in the number of coins for this game is "+6", so just by adding the difference number of coins "+6" to the difference counter "2 (D)" before updating, the carry flag becomes "1" and the irregular A situation arises. In other words, the process of step S431 (whether or not the subtraction result is less than "0") cannot be determined based on whether the carry flag is "1" or not. If the carry flag is "1" or not, it would be determined "Yes" in step S431 even though no carry down has occurred, and the difference counter would be initialized in step S432. This will set the value. Note that the carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" in any case where a carry or a carry down occurs as a result of subtraction.

On the other hand, when the difference counter is "2 (D)", if you first add the payout number "9 (D)", the difference counter becomes "11 (D)" at that point, and then the bet is made. When the number is subtracted, it becomes "8 (D)". In this case, the carry flag is "0" because no downflow occurs.
For the above reasons, when updating the difference counter, if the number of payouts is first added and then the number of bets is subtracted, the determination process in step S431 can be executed by a simple process using the carry flag.

In addition, in the advantageous section counter management of this embodiment, the subtraction process (step S422) of the advantageous section counter is first executed, and when the value before subtraction is "0" (when "Yes" at step S423, that is, (when it is a non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S436 without executing the difference counter updating process (steps S425 to S430). Therefore, in this embodiment, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of whether the section is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section, but when the section is a non-advantageous section, the difference counter update process is performed. Processing efficiency is improved by not executing . Therefore, the processing order is such that the advantageous section clear counter is first subtracted, and then the difference counter is updated. Of course, if the specification is such that it is determined whether or not it is in an advantageous section, and if it is in an advantageous section, the process of subtracting the advantageous section clear counter and updating the difference counter is performed, then the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted. It is also possible to execute the update process of the difference counter before the process.

Furthermore, even when the determination in step S426 is "Yes" (at the time of replay winning), the process of step S434 is executed. By doing this, even if a situation occurs where an abnormal value (a value exceeding 2400 (D)) is stored in the difference sheet counter due to noise etc. at the end of the game, "Yes" will be returned in step S434. , the advantageous section can be ended. On the other hand, if such confirmation is not necessary, the process of this flowchart may be terminated when "Yes" is obtained in step S426.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 51, it is determined in step S426 whether or not the replay activation symbol is stopped and displayed, and when it is determined that the replay activation symbol is stopped and displayed, the difference counter updating process (steps S427 to S430) is skipped to speed up the processing.
In particular, in a game where the replay activation symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the number of payouts for the game may be regarded as "0" (deemed number of payouts), and the number of bets for the next game may be regarded as "0", and the difference counter may be updated. . However, for example, if an SB (single bonus) is set as a winning combination during an advantageous period, and the SB is won, the next game is to play one SB game with a bet number of "1", but this SB game If you win a replay, the replay activation symbol may stop displaying. In this case, since the next game is not an SB game, the number of bets is "3" (other than the SB game, a game with a bet number of "1" is not possible). However, in this case, the number of deemed payouts in the SB game and the number of bets in the next game do not match, so the problem is how to count the difference counter.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the above problem can be solved by not updating the difference counter in a game in which the replay activation symbol is displayed in a stopped state.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a second example of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. In FIG. 52, the same step numbers are assigned to processes similar to those in FIG. 51.
In example 1 of FIG. 51, the number of payouts is first added to the difference counter, and then the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference counter, and then the number of payouts is added to the difference counter.

In the example of Figure 51, when the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter and then the payout number is added, the carry flag may become "1" even if no final carry occurs, and it is therefore impossible to determine whether the calculation result is "0" or not based on whether the carry flag is "1" or not.
In contrast, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter (step S430) and then the payout amount is added (step S428), and in step S441, it is determined whether the calculation result is less than "0" without referring to the value of the carry flag.
Specifically, in step S441 of FIG. 52, it is determined whether the calculation result of step S441 is less than "0" by checking whether the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register (register that stores the most significant digits) value of the HL register is "1".

for example,
Difference counter value (HL register value) = 0000 (H) (before calculation)
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
Assume that
In this case, the difference counter value after the calculation is
0000(H)-3(H)=FFFD(H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
becomes.
Note that "/" indicates a break every 4 bits in binary notation.

In the above example, the HL register value before the calculation is "0000 (H)", but if the HL register value before the calculation is not "0000 (H)" and "The difference in the number of sheets in this game > HL register For example, if
Different number of sheets for this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0001 (H) (before calculation)
When , the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = FFFE (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FE (H) (1111/1110 (B))
becomes.

Furthermore, if the HL register value is not "0000 (H)" and "difference number of coins in current game <HL register value", for example, firstly,
Different number of sheets for this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0100 (H) (256 (D)) (before calculation)
When , the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FD (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
becomes.

Also, secondly,
Different number of sheets for this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 00FF (H) (255 (D)) (before calculation)
When , the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FC(H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FC (H) (1111/1100 (B))
becomes.

Furthermore, thirdly,
Different number of sheets for this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0960 (H) (2400 (D)) (before calculation)
, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 095D (H) (after calculation)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 09 (H) (0000/1001 (B))
L register value = 5D (H) (0101/1101 (B))
becomes.

On the other hand, the upper limit value of the difference counter is "2400 (D)". Here, if "2400 (D)" is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/0000(B)"
becomes.
The upper limit value of the difference counter is "2400 (D)", so when a value exceeding "2400 (D)" is stored in the difference counter, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the difference number The counter is cleared (step S435 in FIGS. 51 and 52).
Furthermore, at the end of this game, the difference counter value reached "2400 (D)", but since it did not exceed "2400 (D)", it was determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section were not met, and the next game Suppose you have migrated. Then, in the next game, the difference in the number of coins will increase the most when the number of bets is "1" and the number of payouts is "15 (D)", so the difference in the number of coins in the game will be "14 (D)". becomes.
Therefore, the difference counter value in this case is "2414 (D)".
Here, if "2414 (D)" is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/1110(B)"
becomes.

Furthermore, when the difference counter value becomes "2414 (D)", it exceeds "2400 (D)", so the difference counter is cleared for that game and becomes "0 (D)".
From the above, the maximum value that the difference counter can take during play is "2414 (D)", or "0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)".

Therefore, when the HL register value is "2414 (D)",
H register value = 0000/1001 (B)
L register value = 0110/1110 (B)
The D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is "0".
Therefore, when the HL register value, that is, the difference counter value is in the range of "0(D)" to "2414(D)", the D7 bit of the H register value is always "0".

From the above, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is always "0" and never becomes "1" except in the case of a downgrade.
In addition, in order for the D7 bit of the H register value to become "1", the difference counter value must become "32768 (D)", and the difference number must reach such a value, excluding downshifts. The advantageous section will not continue until the end.

On the other hand, as mentioned above,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0000 (H) (before calculation)
When this is the case, the HL register value after the calculation becomes "FFFD(H)".
Here, “FFFD(H)” is
"1111/1111/1111/1101(B)"
It is.

therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1101 (B)
The D7 bit of the H register value is "1".
Similarly, before the operation,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0002 (H)
In this case, when the difference counter is updated, the HL register value becomes "FFFF (H)".

Here, “FFFF(H)” is
"1111/1111/1111/1111 (B)"
It is.
therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1111 (B)
The D7 bit of the H register value is "1".
In this manner, when a downgrade occurs, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value becomes "1".

From the above, as a result of updating the difference counter, when there is no digit down, the D7 bit of the H register value is "0", and when there is a digit down, the D7 bit of the H register value is "0". 1”.
Therefore, in step S441 of FIG. 52, when determining whether the calculation result is less than "0", it is determined whether the D7 bit of the H register value is "1". When the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it is determined that the calculation result is less than "0".
In this way, it is possible to determine whether the calculation result is "0" without determining whether the carry flag is "1" as a result of the calculation.
Since it is determined whether the calculation result is "0" without using the carry flag, there is no problem even if the number of payouts is added to the difference counter value after subtracting the number of bets.

Furthermore, as is clear from the above, even if the difference counter reaches the maximum value "2414 (D)", it is not limited to the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, but also the D6 bit, D5 bit, and The D4 bit is also "0".
On the other hand, when a digit decrease occurs in the difference counter value, not only the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value but also the D6 bit, D5 bit, and D4 bit become "1".

Therefore, in step S441 in FIG. 52, instead of determining whether the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it may be determined whether the D6 bit is "1". , it may be determined whether or not the D5 bit is "1", or it may be determined whether or not the D4 bit is "1". In either case, when the relevant bit is "1", the operation result is less than "0", and when it is not "1", the operation result is not less than "0".
Note that, as is clear from the above, in Example 1 (step S431) in FIG. It is also possible to determine whether or not there is.

Furthermore, as is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the advantageous section clear counter is updated (step S422), the difference counter is updated (steps S428 and S430), and whether the advantageous section clear counter is "0" or not is determined. The judgment (step S424), the judgment as to whether the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value (step S434), and the initialization of information regarding the advantageous section (step S435) are performed regardless of the number of bets (specified number) in the current game. , executed. Therefore, even if the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0" or the difference counter exceeds the upper limit as a result of playing a game with the number of bets (specified number) "2", the advantageous section ends. do.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt process shown in FIG. 53 at a period of 2.235 ms (however, the time period is not limited to this) in parallel with the main process.
When proceeding to the interrupt processing in step S451, in step S452, as initial processing, register value saving and duplicate interrupt prohibition processing are performed. Here, since the registers of the main CPU 55 used in the main processing are used in the interrupt processing, the current register values are saved in the stack area of the RWM 53. Furthermore, an interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that the next interrupt process is not started during the interrupt process. This is done because, for example, a request to execute an interrupt process may be made during execution of a power-off process.

In the next step S453, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 54, which will be described later, and is a process for detecting whether or not a power-off detection signal has been input.
In the next step S454, the interrupt counter value is updated. Note that the interrupt counter value is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.
In the next step S455, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process that subtracts the time set in the main process. Specifically, for example, whether the minimum playing time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed or not is included.

Next, the process advances to step S456 to perform LED display control (I_LED_OUT). This process is a process shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later, and is a process in which the LEDs (digits 1 to 5) are turned on depending on the state of the slot machine 10.
Note that there are two types of errors that occur in the slot machine 10: unrecoverable errors and recoverable errors. For unrecoverable errors, an error display is output by the main process (for example, step S304 in FIG. 41), but for non-recoverable errors Errors are displayed using this LED display control each time an interrupt is processed.

Next, the process advances to step S457, and reading processing for the input port 51 is performed. As a result, whether or not the bet switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, etc. have been operated, switch signals, input signals of various sensors are read, and data based on the input port 51 (level data, rising data, falling data) is generated and stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.

In the next step S458, it is determined whether the set value is within the normal range. Here, the set value data stored in address "F000(H)" is read, and it is determined whether the range of the set value data is within the normal range (whether the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5"). If it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S459, and if it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S470, where it moves to unrecoverable error processing. In this embodiment, the error in this case is called an "E6" error, and the fact that it is "E6" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

In step S459, a built-in random number check process is performed. In this embodiment, a flag is provided that is turned on when an error occurs in the built-in random number, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.
Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of the random number for lottery winnings is detected (such as when the random number update is slow), the error flag is turned on.
Then, the process proceeds to step S460, where it is determined whether an error has occurred in the built-in random number (whether the error flag is on or not), and when it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S461, where the error is detected. If it is determined that this has occurred, the process advances to step S470 to proceed to irreversible error processing. The error display content at this time is "E7".

In step S461, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed for each reel 31 (left, middle, right), and includes stop, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, start of deceleration, and standby depending on the operating state. When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process advances to step S462, and port output processing is performed. In this process, the excitation output of the motor 32 (for reel), the hopper motor 36, and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S463, input error checking processing is executed. This process is a process for determining whether there is any abnormality in the various sensors.
In the next step S464, control command transmission processing is performed. This process is a process of transmitting the set control command (unsent control command stored in the command buffer (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53) to the sub-control board 80.
Specifically, when a control command is set in the command buffer, this step S464 is executed in interrupt processing after that point (if the command buffer is empty, in principle, the next interrupt processing after that point). A control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

In the next step S465, data for the external signal stored in the RWM 53 is stored in a register. Then, in the next step S466, an external signal is output (transmission of the signal to the external centralized terminal board 100) from the output port 52 (output port 5 in FIG. 33).
Next, the process advances to step S467, and ratio display preparation processing is performed. This process is a process that updates a timer related to the ratio display of the management information display LED 74, outputs segment data, and the like.

In the next step S468, random number update processing is performed. Next, the process advances to step S469, where the register value saved in step S452 is restored, and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of interrupt processing is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As shown in the above processing, the number of credits display LED 76, the number of acquisitions display LED 78, the status display LED 79 (79a to 79f), the setting value display LED 73, and the management information display LED 74 are turned on/off by the interrupt processing every 2.235 ms. controlled.
Furthermore, for each interrupt process, if a control command that has not been sent to the sub-control board 80 is stored in the command buffer, the process to send it is performed.

Note that during unrecoverable error processing, interrupt processing is not performed (interrupt processing is suspended until normal recovery occurs).
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur, and processes based on the abnormal data (updating data in the RWM 53 based on data from the input port, sending control commands to the sub-control board 80), etc. are executed. To prevent this, interrupts themselves are prohibited.
When an unrecoverable error occurs and an unsent command is stored in the control command buffer, the command is not sent to the sub-control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the buffer may be incorrect.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG.
In step S481, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off detection signal was on in the previous interrupt process. Here, when the voltage falls below a predetermined value (in the example of FIG. 3, V1 or less), a predetermined input signal is detected by a voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit; not shown) provided on the main control board 50. Since a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit of the port 51, it is detected whether or not the signal is input. Further, when the power-off detection signal is turned on, it is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
If it is determined that the power-off detection signal is on in the previous interrupt process, the process advances to step S482, and if it is determined that the power-off detection signal is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S482, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off detection signal is on in the current interrupt process. When it is determined that it is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is on, the process advances to step S483.
When it is determined "Yes" in both steps S481 and S482 (when the power-off detection signal is input for two consecutive interrupts), it is determined that a power-off has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps.
In step S483, the outputs of all output ports 52 are turned off. Through this process, for example, when the motor 32 is being driven (while the reels 31 are rotating) or when the hopper motor 36 is being driven (while paying out medals), the driving is stopped.
Next, the process advances to step S484, and the power-off processing completion flag is stored in the RWM 53. This process is a process of storing data indicating that normal power-off processing has been executed in the RWM 53.

In the next step S485, checksum data of the RWM 53 is calculated. This process calculates a checksum that includes the work area (RWM 53) used by the program, and examples of target program use areas include the program work area, unused area, and stack area.
Then, in the next step S486, it is determined whether or not calculation of the entire checksum range has been completed. If it is determined that the calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S485 to continue calculation of the checksum. On the other hand, if it is determined that the checksum calculation has been completed, the process advances to step S487.

In step S487, the calculated checksum is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Here, the data stored in the RWM 53 is one-byte data (also called complement data) that becomes "0" when all data in the program use area is added to the value stored in the predetermined address at the time of the checksum of the RWM 53.
When the checksum of the RWM 53 is executed at the start of the program, all data in the program use area of the RWM 53 in the same range as above is added to the checksum data. If the checksum data calculated in this way is "0", it is determined to be a normal value, and if it is not "0", it is determined to be an abnormal value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S488, where a reset wait state is entered. When the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power interruption detection circuit) provided on the main control board 50, and in step S488, the process enters a state of waiting for the output of the reset signal.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S456 in FIG.
First, in step S491, output ports 2 and 3 (see FIG. 33) are turned off. This process is a process for outputting "00000000(B)" from output ports 2 and 3. In the next step S492, output port 4 (see FIG. 33) is turned off. This process is also a process of outputting "00000000(B)" from the output port 4, similar to the above process.

In step S493, the LED display counter is updated. This process updates the bit "1" of the LED display counter by shifting it to the right by one digit.
In the next step S494, it is determined whether the LED display counter is "0" or not, and when it is determined that it is "0", the process proceeds to step S495, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S496. .
In step S495, the LED display counter is initialized. Here, processing is executed to change the LED display counter "00000000(B)" to "00010000(B)". Then, the process advances to step S496.
In step S496, the LED display counter and LED display request flag stored in the RWM 53 are acquired. Here, the value of the LED display counter is stored in the D register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the E register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S497, where error number display data, LED display data, and bet display data are acquired. Here, the memory area of the RWM 53 includes a memory area for storing error number display data when an error occurs, a memory area for storing LED display data indicating the on/off state of the game start display LED 79d to the replay display LED 79f among the status display LEDs 79, and a memory area for storing bet display data indicating the on/off state of the (1-3) bet display LEDs 79a to 79c.
Specifically, the LED display data is configured as follows.
D0: Unused D1: Unused D2: Unused D3: "1" when game can be started, "0" when game cannot be started
D4: "1" when medals can be inserted, "0" when medals cannot be inserted
D5: "1" when replay is won, "0" when replay is not won
D6: Unused D7: Unused The D3 to D5 bits of the LED display data correspond to the segments D to F of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG.

Furthermore, the bet display data is structured as follows.
When 0 pieces are bet: 00000000
When betting 1 card: 00000001
When betting 2 cards: 00000011
When betting 3 cards: 00000111
Note that bits D0 to D2 of the bet display data correspond to segments A to C of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG. 32.
Then, in step S497, the error number display data is read and stored in the B register. Further, the LED display data is read and stored in the A register, and the bet display data is read and stored in the C register.

In the next step S498, the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data) are ORed (combined), and the result of the operation is set as segment data for the output port 3. When the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data) are ORed, data indicating whether the status display LED 79 is turned on or off is obtained. When there is a request to display digit 5 ("Yes" in step S516), this segment data is output from output port 3.
Next, the process advances to step S499, and the register in which segment data for output port 4 is set is cleared.

In the next step S500, the value obtained by ANDing the LED display counter value (D register value) and the LED display request flag value (E register value) is stored in the D register, and whether or not the value is "0" is stored. to judge. If it is determined to be "0", it is determined that there is no display request, and the process advances to step S516. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request and the process proceeds to step S501.

In step S501, LED segment table 2 is set. Here, the LED segment table of this embodiment is provided with LED segment table 1 that defines the segment data when displaying an error number, and LED segment table 2 that defines the segment data when displaying other than the error number (number of credits, number of payouts, setting value, setting change indication, push order instruction information, and specified instruction number), and is stored in the usage area of ROM 54. Then, in step S501, the top address of LED segment table 2 is read, and the value is stored in the HL register.

Here, offset and segment data are defined in the LED segment table 2 set in step S501 as follows.
Offset "0": Segment data that displays "0" Offset "1": Segment data that displays "1" Offset "2": Segment data that displays "2" Offset "3": Displays "3" Segment data Offset "4": Segment data to display "4" Offset "5": Segment data to display "5" Offset "6": Segment data to display "6" Offset "7": Segment data to display "7" Segment data to display Offset "8": Segment data to display "8" Offset "9": Segment data to display "9" Offset "A": Segment data to display "=" Offset "B": "A" Segment data to display

For example, firstly, if payout number data "10 (H)" is stored in the acquisition number data, the offset of the upper digit of the payout number data is "1" and the offset of the lower digit is "0". becomes. As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data that displays "1" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data that displays "0" is obtained.
For example, secondly, if the setting change display data "88 (H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit of the setting change display data is "8", and the lower digit The offset of is "8". As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data for displaying "8" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data for displaying "8" is obtained.

Furthermore, thirdly, for example, if the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit of the push order instruction number will be "A", and the offset of the lower digit will be "A". The offset will be "1". As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data for displaying "=" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data for displaying "1" is obtained.
Furthermore, fourthly, for example, if the instruction regulation number display data "0B(H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit is "0" and the offset of the lower digit is "B". becomes. As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data for displaying "0" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data for displaying "A" is obtained.

Next, the process proceeds to step S502, where the set value data is acquired. Here, the set value data stored at address "F000(H)" is read and stored in the A register. Next, "1" is added to the A register value to generate set value display data, which is then stored in the A register. This set value display data becomes the offset value when displaying the set value.
As described later, the segment data stored at an address (in LED segment table 1 or 2) that is equal to the top address value of LED segment table 1 or 2 plus an offset value is acquired.
Next, the process proceeds to step S503, where it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the set value. If the D register value is "00010000(B)" and the setting is being changed or confirmed, it is determined that there is a request to display the set value. If it is determined that there is a request to display the set value, the process proceeds to step S514, and if it is determined that there is no request, the process proceeds to step S504.

In step S504, credit number data is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S505, an offset for upper digits is obtained. This process executes an operation of dividing the credit number data (A register value) obtained in step S504 by "10 (D)", stores the quotient value in the A register, and stores the remainder value in the E register. It is processing.
In the next step S506, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the number of credits. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit (bit corresponding to digit 1a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined as "Yes". When it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit number, the process advances to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process advances to step S507.

In step S507, it is determined whether there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit number. This process determines whether the D1 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 2a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined to be "Yes" and proceeds to step S513. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the credit number, it proceeds to step S508.

In step S508, the winning number data is read and stored in the A register. Here, when medals are paid out based on the winning of a minor prize, the winning number data stores the payout number data. When the setting is being changed, the setting change display data "88 (H)" is stored. When it is time to specify the specified number, the specified number display data "0B (H)" is stored. When the command function is activated (when the pressing order is being notified), the pressing order command number "=x (x = any of 1 to 6)" is stored. Then, one of these data is obtained and stored in the A register.

In the next step S509, it is determined whether or not an error is being displayed. This process reads the value of the B register (the error number display data stored in step S497), determines whether it is "0", and if it is not "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed and proceeds to step S510, and if it is "0", it is determined that an error is not being displayed and proceeds to step S511.
In step S510, the LED segment table 1 for error display is set. Note that a description of the specific configuration of the LED segment table 1 is omitted. In step S510, a process is executed to store the top address of the LED segment table 1 in the HL register. Therefore, in this case, the top address of the LED segment table 1 is set (stored in the HL register) instead of the top address of the LED segment table 2 set in step S501.

In the next step S511, an offset for the upper digits is acquired. In this process, when an error is displayed (when the B register value is not "0"), an operation is performed to divide the B register value by "10 (D)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is is stored in the E register. On the other hand, when it is not an error display (when the B register value is "0"), the A register value (payout number data, setting change display data, instruction specified number display data, or push order instruction number) is set to "10 ( D)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the E register.

In the next step S512, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (bit corresponding to digit 3a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. When it is determined that there is a display request, the process advances to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process advances to step S513.

Proceeding to step S513, the offset for the lower digits is acquired. This process is a process for storing data stored in the E register in the A register. That is, the upper digit values and lower digit values are exchanged between the A register and the E register. Then, the process advances to step S514.
In step S514, segment data is acquired. This process adds the data stored in the HL register (start address of LED segment table 1 or 2) and the data (offset value) stored in the A register, and This process stores the segment data (of Table 1 or 2) in the C register.

In the next step S515, segment data for output port 4 is set. The data set here is segment data for displaying the set value (digit 5b). Since digits 1b to 4b are lit in the ratio display process (step S522) to be described later, segment data for digits 1b to 4b is not set here.
Therefore, in step S515, when the result in step S503 is "Yes" (setting value display request), and the segment data for displaying the setting value is acquired in step S514 and stored in the C register, the C register value is output. Set as segment data for port 4.

Next, the process advances to step S516, and it is determined whether there is a request to display digit 5 or not. Here, a request to display digit 5 is made when the D register value is "00010000 (B)". If it is determined that there is a request to display digit 5, the process advances to step S520, and if it is determined that there is no request to display digit 5, the process advances to step S517.

In step S517, segment data for output port 3 is set. Here, the C register value stored in step S514 is set as the segment data for output port 3. Note that if step S516 is "Yes" (if there is a request to display digit 5), the data set in step S498 becomes the segment data for output port 3.

In the next step S518, data for the advantageous section display LED 77 is set. Here, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is obtained, and it is determined whether the value is "0" or not. If the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is not "0", it is determined whether the digit lit in the current interrupt process is digit 4a. When the D3 bit of the D register value is "1", it is determined that it is the timing to turn on the digit 4a. In this case, data obtained by ORing the segment data set in step S517 and "10000000" is set as the segment data for output port 3. As a result, data is set that allows segment P (advantageous section display LED 77) of digit 4a to light up.

Next, the process advances to step S519, and the segment data for output port 4 set in step S515 is cleared. This is to prevent digit 5b (set value display LED 73) from being lit when there is no request to display digit 5 ("No" in step S516).
The process then proceeds to step S520, where the digit signal is output from output port 2 and the segment signal is output from output port 3. Here, the D register value is set as digit data of output port 2 and output from output port 2.
Furthermore, the data of the segment signal output from the output port 3 is the data set in step S498 (when digit 5 is lit) or the data set in step S517 (when digits 1 to 4 are lit).

Next, the process advances to step S521, and a segment signal is output from output port 4. The data of the segment signal output from the output port 4 is the segment data set in step S515 (when there is a setting value display request) or the data cleared in step S519 (when there is no setting value display request). In other words, when the segment data for output port 4 is cleared in step S519, "00000000(B)" is output from output port 4.
Next, the process proceeds to step S522, where the process moves to ratio display processing (processing for lighting the management information display LED 74). Note that in this embodiment, a description of the ratio display process will be omitted. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Next, the relationship between the advantageous section display LED 77 and a power outage (when a power outage occurs while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit) will be explained.
In the interrupt processing, when a power outage is detected in FIG. 54, the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps, but in this case, the data stored in the RWM 53 is retained even after the power outage.
After the power is turned on, in the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 38, if the setting key switch is off, it is determined "No" in step S208, so if the power-off recovery is normal, step The process advances to the power-off recovery process (M_POWER_ON; FIG. 40) in S213.

In the power failure recovery process in Figure 40, the initialization range of RWM 53 is set in step S253, but as described above, this range is an unused area of RWM 53. Therefore, in Figure 35, the favorable zone display LED flag at address "F062 (H)" is not subject to initialization. The same is true for the LED display counter at address "F051 (H)".

In the power-off recovery process of FIG. 40, when the initialization of the RWM 53 is completed, an interrupt is activated in step S262. Therefore, from step S262 onwards, the interrupt process shown in FIG. 53 is executed at intervals of 2.235 ms. When the interrupt process is executed, the LED display counter value is read in step S496 during the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. Further, when "No" in step S512, there is a request to display the digit 4a. In this case, if it is not an error display ("No" in step S509) and the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", the D7 bit of the segment data is set to "1" in step S518, and the segment Data is output (step S520). As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
As described above, when the power is cut off while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit again when the interrupt process is executed in the power cut recovery process.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch on after the power is turned off, the following occurs.
In the program start process of FIG. 38, when the setting key switch is on, "Yes" is determined in step S208, and the process moves to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET; FIG. 39) of step S212.
In FIG. 39, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is specified in step S221, and this initialization range also includes the advantageous section display LED flag of address "F062(H)". Note that when it is determined that the power-off recovery is not normal and the process proceeds to step S223, the entire range of the RWM 53 (including address "F062(H)") is initialized.

Therefore, by initializing the advantageous section display LED flag, even if "1" indicating lighting has been stored up to that point, it becomes "0" indicating turning off.
Thereafter, in step S233 of FIG. 39, an interrupt is activated. When the interrupt is activated, in the LED display control (FIG. 55), the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 when the timing for lighting the set value display LED 73 comes. Then, in step S240 in FIG. 39, the setting value becomes changeable (the setting value is changed when the setting change switch is turned on).

Furthermore, in the case where the interrupt processing is started in step S233 in FIG. 39 and the LED display control (FIG. 55) is executed, even when the timing for lighting up digit 4a comes, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag has already been set to "0'', the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.
As described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch on and the setting change process is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up. Furthermore, even if the setting change processing is finished and the main processing is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.

In addition, in the main process of FIG. 41, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and a power outage occurs during the loop from step S286 to step S289, that is, while the reel 31 is rotating, the following will occur. .
When a power outage is detected in the interrupt process, all output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. 54, so the drive signal for the motor 32 for rotating the reel 31 is also turned off. As a result, the rotating reel 31 (motor 32) also stops due to the power cut.

Next, when power is supplied, the state returns to the state before the power was cut off through the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above. As a result, the same drive signal for the motor 32 as before power-off is output from the output port 52. Here, the drive signal for the motor 32 before the power is turned off is a signal that maintains a constant speed state. In this embodiment, it is assumed that when the motor 32 (reel 31) is in a constant speed state, one interrupt (2.235 ms) causes one step drive. However, even if a constant speed drive signal is output from the beginning to the motor 32 after the drive has been stopped, the motor 32 cannot be driven because its rotational torque is weak.

Therefore, since the reel 31 does not rotate, the index sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31 (does not cut the index). When it is determined that the index is not detected for a certain period of time, it is determined that the reel 31 is not rotating, and the motor 32 is re-accelerated (re-operated). The motor 32 is accelerated by, for example, first driving one step at 20 interrupts (20 x 2.235 = 44.7 ms), then driving one step at 16 interrupts, and then driving one step at 12 interrupts, etc. This is a method of driving one step in gradually decreasing time. The acceleration state requires a time of about 100 steps, for example. Thereby, rotation of the reel 31 can be started.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on and an interrupt is activated in step S262 in FIG. 40, digits 1a to 5a are dynamically lit based on the value of the LED display counter. When the value is such that digit 3a lights up ("00000100 (B)" in FIG. 34), the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)" after 4 interrupts from that point, and digit 4a (advantageous section display LED 77) lights up. The timing has come.

On the other hand, the power is turned off before the index of the reel 31 is detected by the reel sensor 33 (for example, when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 with "1" to several steps remaining), and after the power is turned on, Even if it is determined that the index of the reel 31 is not detected by the reel sensor 33 and re-acceleration is performed, as described above, it will take at least several dozen interruptions before the reel 31 (motor 32) reaches a constant speed state. It takes.
Therefore, after the power is turned on, the reel 31 enters a constant speed state after the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up. That is, when the stop switch 42 becomes ready for operation, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.

Furthermore, when the reel 31 stops at a position where the index of the reel 31 is relatively far from the reel sensor 33, several to several tens of interrupts are required after the interrupt is started until the reel sensor 33 determines that it has not detected the index of the reel 31. Therefore, in this case, the advantageous zone display LED 77 lights up before the motor 32 accelerates again.
As described above, after recovery from a power outage, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is set to light up before the reel 31 starts spinning again and returns to a constant speed state.

In addition, in the main process of FIG. 41, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and a power failure occurs while the hopper motor 36 is being driven in the medal payout process for winning in step S294, the following will occur. . Note that, as described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper motor 36 is a DC motor.
In the medal payout process shown in FIG. 49, the hopper motor 36 is driven in step S398, and when each of the payout sensors 37a and 37b normally detects the movable piece 39a as shown in FIG. , S31 to S34), it is determined that one medal has been normally paid out. The hopper motor 36 continues to be driven until it is determined that medals corresponding to the number of payouts have been paid out.
During medal dispensing, if a power outage is detected in the interrupt process before all medals are dispensed, all output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. The drive signal is also turned off. As a result, the medal payout process is interrupted.

Next, when power is supplied, the process returns to step S294 (medal payout process due to winnings) of the main process (FIG. 41) through the power return process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above. As a result, the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is output from the output port 52 in the same way as before the power was cut off. Note that, as shown in FIG. 41, the main process does not proceed until the payout process due to winnings in step S294 is completed.
On the other hand, when the power is restored from the power-off, the lighting timing of the digit 4a (advantageous period display LED 77) arrives within four interrupts, as described above.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8, the time required to pay out one medal is approximately 100 ms, although it cannot be generalized. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up before returning to the medal payout process due to winnings after the power is cut off and before paying out the remaining medals. In other words, when the medal payout process for winning is completed after the power is restored from the power cut, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit at that point.

Further, as a method for preventing the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off momentarily when there is a momentary power interruption, the following method can be mentioned.
As shown in FIG. 54, when a power outage is detected, the outputs of all ports 52 are turned off in step S483, so after this process, the digit signal from output port 2 and the segment signal from output port 3 are is not output. As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77, which is segment P of digit 4a, goes out.

Therefore, the process advances to step S488 in FIG. 54, and after waiting for reset, if the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", an on signal of the D3 bit (digit 4a) is output from the output port 2, and, An example of this is outputting a D7 bit (segment P) on signal from output port 3. Note that in the loop processing after proceeding to step S488 in FIG. 54 and waiting for reset, no interrupt processing occurs, so the advantageous section display LED 77 in this case is always lit (statically lit). Thereby, even if a momentary power outage occurs, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off visually.
Alternatively, in the process of step S483 in FIG. 54, output ports 2 and 3 may not be turned off, but other output ports may be turned off. Even with this control, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off due to a momentary interruption.

In this embodiment, the segment P of digit 4a is set as the advantageous section display LED 77, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by dynamic lighting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section display LED 77 may be composed of separate and independent LEDs. Then, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is statically lit and the output port corresponding to the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned off even when a power outage is detected, the advantageous section display LED 77 will be prevented from turning off in the event of a momentary power outage. can do.

Next, the display of the difference number of sheets on the sub-control board 80 side will be explained. The sub-control board 80 displays an image of the difference number of sheets on the image display device 23 during AT. Therefore, in this embodiment, the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 is provided with the following storage areas.
has the following:
1) AT flag 2) Sub difference number of coins counter 3) Pullback flag 4) Number of pullback games counter

The main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to the on/off of the AT flag for each game to the sub-control board 80. Note that a command may be transmitted only when the AT flag on the main control board 50 side changes from off to on, or from on to off.
The sub-control board 80 receives on/off information about the AT flag from the main control board 50 and turns on/off the AT flag provided on the sub-control board 80. Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 stores when the AT flag on the sub-control board 80 side has changed from off to on (AT flag rising data) and from on to off (AT flag falling data).

Further, as described above, the main control board 50 updates the AT game number counter every game during AT, and when the AT game number counter reaches "0", ends AT. Furthermore, when the difference counter becomes "2400 (D)" or when the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0", the AT (and the advantageous section) ends.
The main control board 50 initializes the difference counter when ending the AT and advantageous sections, so the difference counter becomes "0" when the next game shifts to the normal section.

On the other hand, the sub control board 80 includes a sub difference number counter that counts the difference number of sheets during AT. The sub-difference number counter is "0" at the start of the AT (excluding when the AT is won and the AT is started during the pullback period, which will be described later), and thereafter, the difference number is updated every game. It should be noted that when a digit decrease occurs, unlike the difference counter of the main control board 50, it is not corrected to "0" and the digit remains as it is.

For example, when AT is started,
1st game: No winning combination (difference in number of coins "-3")
Second game: No winning combination (difference in number of coins "-3")
3rd game: Push order bell win (difference in number of coins "+5")
4th game: No winning combination (difference in number of coins "-3")
5th game: Push order bell win (difference in number of coins "+5")
Let us assume that it was.
In this case, the sub-difference counter (2-byte counter) is
1st game: 0(H)-3(H)=FFFD(H)
Second game: FFFD(H)-3(H)=FFFA(H)
3rd game: FFFA(H)+5(H)=FFFF(H)
4th game: FFFF(H)-3(H)=FFFC(H)
5th game: FFFC(H)+5(H)=0001(H)
It will be updated as follows.

When a replay is won, the sub-difference counter is not updated, as is the difference counter. However, this is not limited to this, and in a game when a replay is won, the payout number may be set to "0", and the bet number for the next game (replay) may be set to "0" to calculate the sub-difference.
Furthermore, as described above, the difference number counter of the main control board 50 executes initialization processing when the advantageous period ends, but the sub-difference number counter of the sub-control means 80 may not immediately execute initialization processing and may not stop counting even when the AT (advantageous period) ends. When the sub-control board 80 ends the AT and continues counting the sub-difference number counter, it sets the pull-back flag to ON ("1").

The sub control board 80 determines the sub difference number counter value at the end of AT, and when the sub difference number counter value is less than (or less than) a predetermined value (for example, "2000 (D)"), the sub control board 80 determines the sub difference number counter value. Continue counting. On the other hand, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds a predetermined value (or is greater than or equal to a predetermined value), the sub difference number counter is cleared. When AT ends when the sub-difference number of sheets counter is close to the upper limit value, when AT is pulled back, the sub-difference number of sheets counter value may reach the upper limit value immediately, so in such a case, , so that the difference number of sheets is not carried over to the next AT.

The pullback flag is a flag for determining whether the AT is pulled back (whether or not the player wins again) within a predetermined number of games (“50” games in this embodiment) after the AT ends.
At the end of AT, the pullback flag is turned on and the pullback game counter is set to "50 (D)". The pullback game count counter is for counting the number of games (during the pullback period) after the AT ends. At the end of AT, the pullback game counter is set to ``50 (D)'', and after that, unless the AT is won, ``1'' continues to be subtracted every game. Then, when the pullback game number counter becomes "0", the AT pullback has failed, the pullback flag is turned off, and the sub difference number of coins counter is cleared (initialized).
After the AT ends, the sub control board 80 updates the sub difference number counter when the pullback flag is on.

Also, during the pullback period (when the pullback flag is on), if you win a special role such as BB and execute a special game such as a BB game, the pullback game count counter will be subtracted (updated) during the special game. )do not.
On the other hand, if the AT is won before the pullback game counter reaches "0", the AT pullback is successful, and in subsequent ATs, the number of coins inherited from the previous AT's difference number is displayed as an image.
for example,
The difference in the number of coins at the first AT: +1000 sheets The difference in the number of sheets from the end of the first AT until winning the second AT: -100 sheets, then the difference in the number of sheets at the start of the second AT is "+900 sheets". The image is displayed.

Further, an upper limit value that can be counted by the sub-difference sheet number counter is set. In this embodiment, the settings are as follows.
1) Upper limit during AT: 2414 (D)
2) When the symbol combination corresponding to the special prize stops during AT and the number of coins that can be obtained in the special game related to the special prize (expected difference number of coins) is "250 (D)", the upper limit value: "2414 (D)" )-250(D)=2164(D)”
3) Upper limit during pullback period: 2000 (D)

As shown in 1) above, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2414 (D)" during AT, further counting of the sub difference number of sheets is stopped and the sub difference number counter is cleared.
In this embodiment, the sub-difference number counter value and the difference number of sheets displayed as images on the image display device 23 are linked (coinciding). For example, when the sub difference number counter reaches "1000 (D)" during AT, the image display device 23 displays an image such as "Number of sheets acquired during AT: 1000 sheets".

As described above, when the difference counter of the main control board 50 exceeds "2400 (D)", the AT (and advantageous section) ends. Therefore, as described above, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is "2414 (D)".
Therefore, for the sub-difference number counter on the sub-control board 80 side, the maximum value that can be counted is set to "2414 (D)" in accordance with the difference number counter of the main control board 50.
Since the maximum value of the sub difference number of sheets counter is "2414 (D)", the maximum number of difference sheets displayed as an image on the image display device 23 is "2414 sheets". As a result, it is possible to prevent an image displaying an excessively large difference in the number of sheets, and to prevent an image display that greatly arouses the desire for gambling.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (ninth embodiment), when the number of coins that can be acquired in the BB game is 250, if the BB is won during AT, and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is When it is stopped and displayed, the value of the sub-difference sheet counter at that time is determined. When the sub-difference number counter value exceeds the above-mentioned "2164 (D)", it will exceed "2414 (D)" at the end of the BB game, so when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the sub-difference Clear the number of sheets counter (2) above).

In this case, the image display device 23 displays "Congratulations", "Congratulations", etc. as an image display corresponding to the difference in the number of sheets. In addition, in this way, instead of displaying "Congratulations" etc. from the beginning of the BB game, the sub difference number counter is not cleared at the start of the BB game, and the sub difference number counter is kept until it exceeds "2414 (D)". The counter may continue to count, and when it exceeds "2414 (D)", the sub-difference number counter may be cleared and an image such as "Congratulations" may be displayed.

Furthermore, the difference in number of sheets may increase during the withdrawal period. For example, there is a case where a special winning combination is won during the pullback period and the difference number counter value increases as a result of playing the special game.
In particular, if the specification is such that when a specific BB is won, the AT will be won, after the BB game ends, the game will shift to the AT. On the other hand, when the sub-difference number counter is close to the upper limit value at the end of the BB game, even if the difference number is taken over at AT after the BB game ends, the upper limit value will be reached immediately. Therefore, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" during the pullback period, the sub difference number counter is cleared. For example, if you win a BB with AT during the AT withdrawal period and play the BB game, if the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" at the end of the final BB game, Clear the sub-difference counter. As a result, the display of the difference number of sheets starts from "0" in the AT after the BB ends.

As described above, even if the special game is entered during the withdrawal period, the withdrawal game counter is not decremented during the special game. When a special winning combination is won during the pullback period, updating of the sub-difference number counter may be continued or may be interrupted during the special game. An example of suspending the update is, for example, if you win a BB with AT when the sub-difference number counter value during the withdrawal period is "1000 (D)", the sub-difference number counter value is set to "1000 (D)". Stop at. Even if "250" coins are obtained in the subsequent BB game, these "250" coins are not added to the sub-difference coin counter. Therefore, when the game shifts to AT after the end of the BB game, the difference in number of coins starts from "1000".

On the other hand, as an example of continuing to update the sub difference number counter, for example, when the sub difference number counter value during the withdrawal period is "1000 (D)", you win a BB with AT, and in the subsequent BB game " When the player obtains ``250'' pieces, the sub-difference number counter at the end of the BB game becomes ``1250 (D)''. Then, when the game shifts to AT after the end of the BB game, the difference in number of coins starts from "1250".
In addition, when continuing to update the sub-difference number counter, for example, if the sub-difference number counter value during the withdrawal period is "1800 (D)", you win a BB with AT, and in the subsequent BB game you win "250 (D)". When the number of coins is acquired, the sub-difference number counter at the end of the BB game becomes "2050 (D)", which exceeds "2000 (D)". Therefore, the sub difference number counter is cleared by the end of the BB game, and the display of the difference number starts from "0" at AT after the end of the BB game.

In addition, the sub-difference number counter may update the difference number of the game regardless of the number of bets, but in this embodiment, the difference number of the game is updated only when the game is started with a predetermined number of bets. Update the number.
Here, the difference counter of the main control board 50 is updated regardless of the number of bets in the game.
In contrast, in this embodiment, the condition for updating the sub-difference number counter is defined as when the number of bets (regular number) is "3", and when the game is started with the number of bets (regular number) "2". does not update the difference number of sheets in that game.

Next, the sub-difference number counter management process will be described with reference to a flowchart.
56 and 57 are flowcharts showing the sub-difference number counter management process in the 11th embodiment.
In step S531 in Fig. 56, the sub-control board 80 judges whether the AT flag is on or not (whether AT is currently being performed or not). If it is judged that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and if it is judged that the AT flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S532.

In step S532, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended. That is, during non-AT and when the pullback flag is off, the sub difference number counter is not updated.

In the next step S533, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not a bet command has been received from the main control board 50. When the start switch 41 is operated and the number of bets for the game is determined, the main control board 50 transmits a bet command that can determine the number of bets for the game to the sub-control board 80. When it is determined that this bet command has been received, the process advances to step S534.

In step S534, it is determined whether the number of bets (specified number) is "3" based on the received bet command. When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S535, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart is ended. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub difference number counter is updated only when the number of bets is "3". Therefore, even during the AT or withdrawal period, if the number of bets is other than "3", the sub-difference number counter is not updated in the game. As is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the difference counter on the main control board 50 side is updated regardless of the number of bets (specified number) in the game.

When the process proceeds from step S534 to step S535, the sub control board 80 subtracts the number of bets ("3") from the sub difference number counter. Next, the process advances to step S536, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a payout command has been received. During the main process (M_MAIN) in FIG. 41, after the display determination is made in step S291, the main control board 50 transmits a payout command that allows the number of payouts to be determined to the sub control board 80.
When it is determined in step S536 that a payout command has been received, the process proceeds to step S537, and the sub control board 80 adds the number of payouts to the sub difference number counter.
In the next step S538, the sub control board 80 determines whether the AT flag is on. When it is determined that it is on, the process advances to step S539, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process advances to step S547 in FIG.

In step S539, it is determined whether or not the AT flag has been turned on in the current game (whether or not the AT flag has risen or not). When it is determined that the AT flag has been turned on in the current game, the process proceeds to step S540, and when it is determined that the AT flag has not been turned on in the current game (the rise of the AT flag is off), the process proceeds to step S543. Therefore, the process proceeds from step S539 to step S543 when it has been AT since before the previous game.

In step S540, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process advances to step S541, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended. For example, if the AT flag is turned on in the current game ("Yes" in step S539) and the pullback flag is off ("No" in step S540, that is, when the pullback period is not in progress), at this point the sub-difference number Since the counter is "0", there is no need to update the sub-difference sheet number counter, so the process according to this flowchart ends.

Proceeding from step S540 to step S541, the sub-control board 80 turns off the pullback flag. In the next step S542, the sub control board 80 clears the pullback game counter. Here, when "Yes" in step S539 and "Yes" in step S540, this corresponds to a case where AT is won during the pullback period. Therefore, in this case, the pullback flag is turned off and the pullback game counter is cleared.
Next, the process proceeds to step S543, and the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value "2414 (D)". If it is determined that the sub difference number counter exceeds "2414 (D)", the process advances to step S546. Then, in step S546, the sub difference number counter is cleared. This may occur if the number of difference sheets increases during the pullback period after the end of AT and the sub difference number counter exceeds "2414 (D)".

On the other hand, in step S543, when it is determined that the sub-difference number counter does not exceed "2414 (D)", the process proceeds to step S544, and the sub-control board 80 stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to BB in the current game. Determine whether or not. Note that when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the command is transmitted from the main control board 50.
“Yes” in this step S544 is a case where the BB with AT is won during the pullback period. In this flowchart, it is assumed that in a game where BB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed.
When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S545, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is not stopped and displayed, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S545, the sub control board 80 determines whether the sub difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)". When it is determined that the sub difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)", the process proceeds to step S546, where the sub difference number counter is cleared as described above, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S545 that the sub difference number counter does not exceed "2164 (D)" (while maintaining the sub difference number counter value), the process according to this flowchart is ended.

As mentioned above, if the BB game of this embodiment ends with a payout of more than 250 coins as shown in FIG. 26 (9th embodiment), the sub difference number of coins counter will be "2164 (D)" at the start of the BB game. If it exceeds , it will exceed "2414 (D)" (upper limit) by the final game of the BB game. Therefore, in the example of this flowchart, at the start of the BB game (before the start), it is determined whether the sub difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value during the BB game, and when it is determined that the sub difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value, the BB game This is to clear the sub-difference number counter before starting. Since the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is based on the sub-difference number counter, in the BB game after the sub-difference number counter is cleared, the difference number itself is not displayed or the difference number is not displayed. Instead of displaying the number of sheets, for example, "Congratulations" or "Congratulations" is displayed.

When it is determined in step S538 that the AT flag is not on and the process proceeds to step S547 in FIG. 57, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the AT flag has been turned off in the current game (whether the falling edge of the AT flag is on or not, i.e., whether the AT has ended in the current game). If it is determined that the AT flag has been turned off in the current game, the process proceeds to step S548, and if it is determined that the AT flag has not been turned off in the current game (the falling edge of the AT flag is off), the process proceeds to step S551.

In step S548, the sub control board 80 determines whether the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". If it is determined that the sub-difference sheet number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process advances to step S549. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not less than "2000 (D)", the process advances to step S557.

In step S549, the sub-control board 80 turns on the pullback flag. Next, the process proceeds to step S550, and the sub-control board 80 sets an initial value "50 (D)" to the pullback game counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Through the above steps S548 to S550, when the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" at the end of AT, the pullback flag is turned on and the initial value of the number of pullback games is set to "50 (D)". Set. The reason why "50 (D)" is set as the initial value of the number of pullback games is to make AT pullback within 50 games a continuous AT chance (a condition for carrying over the sub-difference number of coins to the next AT). Therefore, the number of pullback games is not limited to "50 (D)" but can be set to various values such as "30 (D)" or "100 (D)" depending on the specifications.
Also, if the sub-difference number counter is 2000 (D) or more at the end of AT, even if you pull back AT afterwards, there is a possibility that the sub-difference number counter will exceed the upper limit during AT after pulling back. is high, so in such a case, the pullback flag is not set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S548 that the sub difference number counter is not less than "2000 (D)" and the process proceeds to step S557, the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends. In other words, if the sub-difference number counter is equal to or greater than "2000 (D)" at the end of AT, the sub-difference number counter starts from the initial value "0" even if the AT is subsequently performed.

Further, when proceeding from step S547 to step S551, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is in BB operation (BB game in progress). Note that the information on the operating state flag shown in FIG. 35 is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
If it is determined in step S551 that the BB is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S552, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process advances to step S553, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S553, the pull-back play count counter is decremented by "1". In other words, during the pull-back period, when the BB is in operation (BB play), the specification is such that the update (decrement) process of the pull-back play count counter is not executed. However, this is not limited to this, and the pull-back play count counter may be decremented even during the BB play during the pull-back period.
In the next step S554, the sub-control board 80 judges whether the pull-back game counter has become "0". If it is judged that the pull-back game counter is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the pull-back game counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S555.

In step S555, the pullback flag is turned off. In the next step S556, the pullback game counter is cleared. In addition, when "Yes" in step S554, since the pullback game number counter is "0", the clearing process of the pullback game number counter in step S556 may be omitted. However, when the answer is "No" in step S560, which will be described later, the pullback game counter is cleared via step S556.
Next, the process advances to step S557, and the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. In this way, when the pullback flag is off and the pullback game counter is "0" (cleared), the sub-difference number counter is cleared (set to "0"), and thereafter it remains "0" until AT starts. maintain.

In step S551, it is determined that the BB is in operation, and when the process proceeds to step S558, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is the last game in which the BB is in operation (BB game). The determination as to whether or not this is the final game of the BB game may be made by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game on the sub-control board 80 side, or by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game, or by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game. The decision may be made based on the command that is sent.
When it is determined that it is the final game of the BB game, the process advances to step S559, and when it is determined that it is not the final game, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S559, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process advances to step S560, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S560, the sub control board 80 determines whether the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". When it is determined that the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S561, and the pullback game number counter is reset to "50 (D)". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends. As a result, when a BB game is executed when the pullback flag is on, and the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the last game of the BB game, the pullback period (50 games) is restarted from the next game. ) will be newly set. In other words, when the number of pullback games is set to the initial value "50" after the end of AT, a BB game is executed during the pullback period, and the difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the last game of the BB game, , the number of pullback games is reset to "50".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S560 that the sub-difference sheet number counter is not less than "2000 (D)", the process advances to step S555. After step S555, the pullback flag is turned off, the pullback game counter is cleared, and the sub difference number counter is cleared. This ends the pullback period. In this way, in the final game of the BB game, if the withdrawal period is in progress, the sub-difference number of coins at that time is determined, and if the sub-difference number is "2000 (D)" or more, the withdrawal period ends. .

In the sub-difference number counter management described above, the sub-difference number counter is updated at the timing when a bet command is received. That is, the sub difference number of sheets is updated before all the reels 31 are stopped. On the other hand, since the difference counter is executed in the advantageous section counter management of the game completion check process, the subtraction of the bet number is also executed after all the reels 31 are stopped.
Therefore, the sub-difference number counter may also perform subtraction of the bet number and addition of the payout number after all reels 31 are stopped, similarly to the difference number counter.

Moreover, even if the difference number at the end of the game becomes negative (even if a digit decrease occurs), the sub-difference number counter stores the value (the value of the digit decrease). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly to the difference counter, when the sub difference number counter is negative at the end of the game (when a downturn occurs), it may be corrected to "0".
Furthermore, even if the specification is such that the sub difference number counter may be negative, the image display device 23 displays the difference number "0".

In this case, the following processing may be considered.
As described above, the sub difference number counter is a 2-byte counter, and its upper limit is "2414(D)" or "096E(H)". Therefore, the value of the most significant digit is "0 (H)". Therefore, by determining whether the value of the most significant digit is "0 (H)", it is possible to determine whether or not a digit has fallen. When it is determined that a digit drop has occurred (the value of the most significant digit is not "0 (H)"), the difference number of sheets to be displayed on the image display device 23 may be set to "0".

Further, in the examples of FIGS. 56 and 57, BB is taken as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same can be applied to a sub-bonus (AT that looks like a bonus (BB)). A sub-bonus is one in which the number of games played, the number of coins paid out, or the difference number of coins is set as an end condition. In this case, in step S544, it is determined whether the sub-bonus symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in step S551, it is determined whether or not a sub-bonus game is being played. Furthermore, in step S558, it is determined whether or not this is the final game of the sub-bonus game.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, when a predetermined condition is met, a prescribed number (bet number) is instructed before the start of the game.
Note that the display of the push order instruction information is the operation of an instruction function (processing related to the instruction function), and here, the "instruction function" is a device that facilitates winning. Therefore, the specified number of instructions is not an operation of the instruction function (processing related to the instruction function). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified number of instructions may be defined as one of the processes related to the instruction function.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the accessory condition device, the prescribed number for each RT, and the winning number in the twelfth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 58(A), the accessory condition device (special combination) includes BB1 and BB2. When BB1 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 stops, the game shifts to BB1 game. The BB1 game ends when more than 100 coins are paid out. After the BB1 game ends, the game shifts to non-RT.
Further, when BB2 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 stops, the game shifts to BB2 game. The BB2 game ends when more than 30 coins are paid out. After the BB2 game ends, the game shifts to non-RT.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), the RT includes non-RT, inside BB1, inside BB2, BB1 in operation, and BB2 in operation.
Non-RT continues until either BB1 or BB2 wins. If you win BB1 in a non-RT, you will move into BB1, and if you win BB2, you will move into BB2.
The inside of BB1 continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 stops within BB1, the game shifts to BB1 operation, that is, BB1 game. Similarly, the inside of BB2 continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 stops inside BB2, the game shifts to BB2 operation, that is, a BB2 game.
Note that the number of special winnings that can be carried forward is limited to one. Therefore, when BB1 is inside, BB2 will not win. Similarly, if BB2 is inside, BB1 will not be elected.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), the prescribed number is limited to "3" during BB1 operation and BB2 operation (accessory object operation). The game cannot be started with a bet number of "1" or "2".
On the other hand, the specified number in non-RT, inside BB1, and inside BB2 when the accessory is not activated is "2" or "3". As a result, the game can be started if the specified number is either "2" or "3".
In FIG. 58(C), the internal lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is "65536". For example, the winning probability of winning number "1" (normal replay) in non-RT is "9000/65536". Further, the advantageous section lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is "16384". Therefore, when the advantageous section lottery number is "16384", it means that the probability of winning the advantageous section is "16384/16384".
Further, as shown in FIG. 58(C), in non-RT, when the specified number is "2", BB2 is drawn, but BB1 is not drawn. On the other hand, when the specified number is "3", BB1 is drawn, but BB2 is not drawn.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58(C), when the specified number of non-RTs is "3" or the specified number within BB2 is "3", an advantageous section can be drawn by lottery. In the lottery for advantageous sections, it is set so that the winning section is always won, except when the winning combination is not won. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to make the game section almost an advantageous section. In other words, the twelfth embodiment has the above-mentioned "7P" type specifications.

In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that the game is played within BB2 and with a specified number of "3". Then, AT is drawn at random within BB2, and when AT is won, AT is executed. Furthermore, it is assumed that BB2, whose winnings have been carried over, will not be allowed to win.
For example, if you are currently a non-RT, you need to move from a non-RT to inside BB2 (to win BB2 as a non-RT). In order to win BB2 in non-RT, it is necessary to play the game with the specified number of "2".
Therefore, if the current status is non-RT, the game is played with the specified number "2" to win BB2, and the game is moved to BB2 from the next game. Furthermore, since the lottery for the advantageous section is received within BB2 when the prescribed number is "3", the game is progressed with the prescribed number of "3" within BB2.

In addition, BB2, which won with the specified number "2," cannot stop displaying that symbol combination unless the specified number is "2." Similarly, BB1, which won with the specified number "3", cannot display that symbol combination on the active line unless the specified number is "3".
Therefore, if you win BB2 with the specified number "2" in a non-RT, move into BB2, and proceed with the game with the specified number "3", even if the winning combination is not won, BB2 The symbol combination corresponding to will not be stopped and displayed on the active line.
In this way, in the twelfth embodiment, the design combination that corresponds to the winning special combination is stopped and the game moves to a special game, and the number of medals is increased in the special game. In other words, it is for creating the inside of the BB.

As shown in FIG. 58(C), non-RT players can win BB2 with a probability of about "1/5", so they can quickly move from non-RT players to BB2 players.
Furthermore, within BB2, when winning a small winning combination or a replay, there is a 100% probability that you will win an advantageous section. Therefore, within BB2, most of the gaming periods are advantageous periods. Note that it is of course possible to set the probability of winning in the advantageous section to less than 100%.

Further, the instruction function can be activated (processing related to the instruction function can be executed) only when a game is played with a specified number of players, particularly “3” in this embodiment. Therefore, if you win AT during the advantageous section inside BB2 and the AT is executed, if you start the game with the specified number "3" and win the push order bell, by activating the instruction function, , press order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. On the other hand, when the game is started with the specified number (bet number) "2" during AT, the instruction function is not activated even if the push order bell is won.

Further, as in the eleventh embodiment, even when a game is played with a specified number of "2" during AT, the difference counter is updated based on the number of bets and the number of payouts in the game, and Update the advantageous section clear counter. However, the AT game count counter (AT difference number counter in the case of a difference number management type AT) is not updated. On the other hand, when a game is played with the specified number "3" during AT, the difference counter, advantageous section clear counter, and AT game count counter (in the case of a difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter) Update about everything.
Further, regardless of the specified number, RT is always transferred when the transfer condition is satisfied (when the symbol combination that satisfies the transfer condition is stopped and displayed). On the other hand, the main game state (normal, CZ, AT, etc.) may be set so that any specified number can be transferred, or the game may be played with one specified number (for example, "3"). You may also set it so that it can be migrated only when.

When a game is started with the specified number "2" inside BB2 due to a player's operational error and the game does not result in a winning combination, the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 with the winning combination can be displayed as a stop symbol. On the other hand, when a game is started with the specified number "2" due to a player's operational error and any role is won in the game, the winning role in the game takes priority, so the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 with the winning combination will not be displayed as a stop symbol. However, if a replay is won in the game, the next game will also be played with a bet number of "2", so there is a possibility that the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 with the winning combination will be displayed as a stop symbol in the next game as well.

If the game is started with the specified number "2" in BB2 and AT, and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed, the BB2 game is started. Then, when the BB2 game ends, the game shifts to non-RT (AT). Then, in this non-RT, information corresponding to the specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and the player is informed that the game should be played with the specified number "2" (specified number instruction). . This is to make the player play the game with the specified number "2", make BB2 win, and move the player into BB2. Therefore, in AT and non-RT, the prescribed number "2" is specified until BB2 is won.

As described above, when displaying information corresponding to the specified number "2" on the acquired number display LED 78, "0A" is displayed. Note that the instruction for the specified number of "2" is not limited to "0A", and may be any other display if it is not confused with any of the payout number, setting change display "88", error number, and push order instruction information. It may be. For example, since the maximum number of medals displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 is "15", for example, "22" may be displayed as information corresponding to the specified number "2".

Further, in this embodiment, the specified number is specified only during AT, and the specified number is not specified during non-AT. For example, when the game shifts to non-RT after finishing the BB2 game, if it is not AT at that time, the specified number is not specified. Therefore, in this case, it is necessary for the player to play the game with the prescribed number "2" and transfer it to the BB2 at his/her own discretion.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the case of a non-RT and non-advantageous section, if a game is played with the specified number of "3" and the player wins the small winning combination or replay, the player also wins in the advantageous section. Then, when it is a non-RT and advantageous section, the specified number "2" may be specified (even if it is a non-AT).
Furthermore, without being limited to the above, when transitioning to non-RT, the specified number "2" may be specified regardless of AT/non-AT, advantageous section/non-advantageous section.

Also, in non-RT, when the player bets "2", the specified number may not be specified, and when the player bets "3", the specified number may be specified. In the main processing of FIG. 41, the number of bets is determined in the medal management processing of step S276, and here, when it is determined that the current number of bets is "2", the specified number "2" is not specified (a process of clearing the acquired number data is executed), and when the current number of bets is "3", the specified number "2" is specified (instruction specified number display data is stored as acquired number data).

Further, when finishing the BB2 game and moving to non-RT, wait processing may be executed at the end of the last game of the BB2 game. During this wait process, the game cannot proceed (progress of the main process shown in FIG. 41). Therefore, after the wait process is completed, the process moves to the game start set process for the next game (non-RT), and the specified number is specified there.

In non-RT during AT, the instruction of the specified number "2" continues until BB2 is won. Therefore, the game may be completed in one game, or may be played over multiple games.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58(C), when playing a game with the specified number of "2" in non-RT, there is a possibility of winning a replay (normal replay, watermelon replay, cherry replay). When a replay is won as a result of playing a game with the specified number "2," it is optional whether or not to specify the specified number "2" in the next game. In non-RT and AT, the specified number "2" may be specified before the start of the game, regardless of whether the symbol combination corresponding to replay has stopped or not, until BB2 is won. Alternatively, when the symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed, the player cannot arbitrarily select the specified number (number of bets) in the next game (replay), so it is recommended not to specify the specified number in that game. You can also do this.

This also applies, for example, when a symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed as a result of playing a game with the specified number "3" in non-RT and AT. In the next game (re-game), the player cannot arbitrarily select the prescribed number (bet number), so the prescribed number may not be specified in this case as well. Alternatively, even if the number of bets in the game cannot be selected, the specified number "2" may be specified for the purpose of calling attention.
If a game is played with the specified number "2" in non-RT and AT, and you win BB2 and move to BB2 from the next game, you will not be able to specify the specified number unless you change to non-RT again. is not carried out.

Further, the timing for instructing the specified number is after all the reels 31 have stopped, and when there is a payout based on winning a small winning combination, after the payout process is finished, and the start switch 41 for the next game is operated. before (for example, before it becomes possible to bet on medals (before bets are accepted)). Therefore, after a payout is made based on the winning of a small winning combination in the final game of the BB2 game, the specified number "2" is specified before the start of the next game (non-RT). As shown in FIG. 42 (11th embodiment), in step S321 of the game start setting process (MS_GAME_SET), the main control board 50 sets a specified number of instruction conditions when the game is non-RT and AT. It is determined that it satisfies the requirements.

Then, when it is determined in step S321 of FIG. 42 that the specified number of instruction conditions are met, the process proceeds to step S322, and "0B(H)" is stored in the acquisition number data as the instruction specified number display data corresponding to the instruction specified number "2".
As a result, in the subsequent LED display control (FIG. 55), at the timing when digit 3a (the most significant digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) is turned on, the most significant digit offset "0(H)" is obtained from the designated specified number display data "0B(H)" in step S511, and segment data displaying "0" is obtained based on the LED segment table 2 in step S514. This segment data is output from the output port 3 in step S520, so that "0" is displayed in digit 3a (the most significant digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

In addition, at the timing when digit 4a (the lowest digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) is turned on, the lower digit offset "B(H)" is obtained from the designated number display data "0B(H)" in step S513, and segment data displaying "A" is obtained based on LED segment table 2 in step S514. This segment data is output from output port 3 in step S520, causing digit 4a (the lowest digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) to display "A".

In the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, the game start setting process in step S272 is a process before it becomes possible to bet and before the start switch 41 is operated. Before the switch 41 is operated, the specified number of instructions is displayed.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 42, after the instruction prescribed number display data is stored as the acquired number data in step S322, automatic bet number data is set in step S325. Therefore, when specifying the specified number in the next game when a replay prize is won, the specified number is specified before the automatic bet is made. This makes it possible to quickly instruct the player about the prescribed number.
Further, in FIG. 41, when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S278, the acquisition number data (specified number display data) is cleared in step S280. As a result, in the interrupt processing after step S280, "00" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Here, the information "0A" corresponding to the specified specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and when the game is played with the specified number "2", the specified function is not activated even during AT. It doesn't work. That is, even if the player wins the push order bell in the game, the push order instruction information is not displayed on the winning number display LED 78. This is because, in this embodiment, the processing related to the instruction function is limited to the case where the specified number is "3". Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated after the information "0A" corresponding to the designated specified number "2" is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78, the obtained number display LED 78 The display is "00".

On the other hand, in AT and non-RT, the information "0A" corresponding to the designated specified number "2" was displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, but the game was played with the specified number "3" and the push order bell was won. When this happens, press order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. This process is executed in step S284 in FIG. Therefore, in this case, the obtained number display LED 78 displays the information "0A" corresponding to the designated specified number "2" before the start of the game, and when the start switch 41 is operated (with the specified number "3"), " After displaying "00", if the push order bell is won, push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed.

Further, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, it is cleared in step S290 (after all reels are stopped) in FIG. 41. Note that since the acquisition number data is cleared in step S280 after operating the start switch 41, the process of step S290 may be skipped in a game in which push order instruction information is not displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Then, when a small winning combination is won and the medal payout process due to the winning is executed in step S294, the acquired number data is incremented by "1", so the acquired number display LED 78 displays the number of paid out. Ru.

Then, when proceeding to the game start setting process in step S272 of the next game, as described above, when the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied, information corresponding to the specified specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Furthermore, when displaying the information corresponding to the specified specified number, the specified specified number display data is stored as the obtained number data, but at this point, the payout number data of the previous game may be stored as the obtained number data. Therefore, before storing the information corresponding to the designated specified number, clearing processing of the acquired number data may be executed. For example, in FIG. 42, before step S311, clearing processing of acquisition number data may be executed.

In addition, in AT and non-RT, even though the specified number "2" was specified, he ignored it and played the game with the specified number "3", winning BB1, moving into BB1, Furthermore, it is conceivable to execute a BB1 game.
In order to suppress such behavior, for example, processing related to the instruction function may not be executed within BB1. Further, in the BB1 game, the payout rate may be set to be less than "1" so that the number of medals cannot be increased in the BB1 game.
Furthermore, since it is up to the player to decide which specified number to play with, even if the specified number "2" is specified in an AT and non-RT game, even if the game is played with the specified number "3". No penalty will be imposed on the person.

In the above example, when specifying the specified number, the specified specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (on the main control board 50 side), but the invention is not limited to this. In addition to displaying on the number display LED 78, the specified specified number may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like (on the sub-control board 80 side).
Here, the display start timing when displaying the specified number of instructions on the liquid crystal display device 23 etc. may be set to be almost the same as the display start timing of displaying the specified number of instructions on the acquired number display LED 78 (before the start of the game). It will be done.
Furthermore, the timing at which the display ends after the specified specified number is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like may be the same as or may be different from the timing at which the display ends after the specified specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
The display end timing after displaying the prescribed number of instructions on the liquid crystal display device 23 etc. is as follows.
(1) When the start switch 41 is operated (2) When all reels 31 are stopped (3) When the start switch 41 is operated in a game with a specified number of “2” (4) All reels in a game with a specified number of “2” (5) After winning BB2 in a game with the specified number of "2"; (6) When all reels 31 stop in a game with the specified number of "2" and winning BB2.
In addition, when the designated designated number is displayed on a dedicated display, it is possible to continue to display the designated designated number as an image on the image display device 23 or the like over a plurality of games.

Thirteenth embodiment
In each of the above embodiments, the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are three.
In contrast to this, in the thirteenth embodiment, the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are four.
59 are a front view, a plan view, and a right side view showing an outline of the configuration including the reels 31 (31A to 31D) and the stop switches 42 (42A to 42D) in the thirteenth embodiment. In the front view, the reels 31A to 31D are illustrated so that they can be seen without being obstructed by the front surface of the front door 12. In the plan view, the reel 31 located behind the front surface of the front door 12 is illustrated so that it can be seen. In the right side view, the medal insertion slot 47 is omitted from the illustration.

As shown in FIG. 59, a control panel 12c is provided on the front side of the front door 12, and an operation button 24 and a medal slot 47 are arranged on the control panel 12c. The medal slot 47 is the same as that shown in FIG. Further, although not shown in FIG. 1, the operation button 24 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80, and is capable of bidirectional communication with the sub-control board 80. For example, at least a portion of the operation button 24 is formed so that it can be illuminated, and the lighting mode of the operation button 24 can be controlled by controlling the sub-control board 80. Further, when the operation button 24 is operated, the signal thereof is input to the sub-control board 80.
A start switch 41 and four stop switches 42A to 42D are arranged below the control panel 12c of the front door 12.

In the front view of FIG. 59, a vertical line passing through the midpoints of the four reels 31A to 31D is a line L1 (center line). Line L1 is located at an intermediate position between reels 31B and 31C. The distances between the reels 31A and 31B, between the reels 31B and 31C, and between the reels 31C and 31D are all W1 (uniform). Therefore, the reels 31A and 31B and the reels 31C and 31D are arranged at symmetrical positions with respect to the line L1.
Further, among the four stop switches 42A to 42D, the distances between stop switches 42A and 42B, between stop switches 42B and 42C, and between stop switches 42C and 42D are all W2 (uniform). The line L1 is arranged so as to pass through an intermediate position between the stop switches 42B and 42C.

Furthermore, the gap W2 between the stop switches 42 may be the same as the gap W1 (W2=W1), may be larger than the gap W1 (W2>W1), or may be smaller than the gap W1 (W2<W1).
Furthermore, in the front view, a vertical line passing through the left end of the leftmost reel 31A is designated as line L2, and a vertical line passing through the right end of the rightmost reel 31D is designated as line L3. In this case, the leftmost stop switch 42A is located to the right (closer to the center) of line L2, and the rightmost stop switch 42D is located to the left (closer to the center) of line L3.

Furthermore, in the front view, if the interval (distance between centers) of the reels 31 is W3, then the distance between the reels 31A and 31B, between the reels 31B and 31C, and between the reels 31C and 31D is all W3 (constant). It is.
Further, if the distance between the stop switches 42 (distance between centers) is W4, the distance between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D is all W4 (constant distance). ).

Furthermore, as shown in the front view of FIG. 59, a part of the spherical body (operating portion) at the tip of the start switch 41 is arranged to intersect with the line L2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the spherical body (operating part) at the tip of the start switch 41 may be placed on the left side (outside) of the line L2 without intersecting the line L2, or the spherical body (operating part) at the tip of the start switch 41 may be placed on the left side (outside) of the line L2 without intersecting the line L2. It may be placed on the right side (closer to the center).
Further, in the front view, the medal slot 47 is arranged so that the medal slot 47 intersects with the line L4. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the medal slot 47 may be arranged on the right side (outside) of the line L4 so as not to intersect with the line L4, for example. Alternatively, the medal slot 47 may be arranged on the left side (closer to the center) of the line L4.

The operation button 24 is formed to be horizontally long, and a line that touches the left end of the operation button 24 is a line L4, and a line that touches the right end of the operation button 24 is a line L5.
In this case, in the front view, the stop switch 42A is arranged so that a part of the leftmost stop switch 42A intersects the line L4. Further, the stop switch 42D is arranged so that a part of the rightmost stop switch 42D intersects the line L5.

As shown in the plan view, an index 12d is formed on the control panel 12c. The index 12d is formed by engraving, printing, etc., and in the example of FIG. 59, it is in the shape of an arrow pointing toward the stop switch 42. Furthermore, the left index 12d is positioned on the center line of the stop switch 42A (it does not matter if it is slightly offset from the center line). Furthermore, the right index 12d is positioned on the center line of the stop switch 42D (it does not matter if it is slightly offset from the center line).

With the above arrangement, the player can operate the leftmost stop switch 42A by using the left end of the operation button 24 as a guide. Similarly, the player can operate the rightmost stop switch 42D by using the right end of the operation button 24 as a guide.
Alternatively, the player can operate the stop switch 42A using the left index 12d as a guide, and similarly, the player can operate the stop switch 42D using the right index 12d as a guide.

When there are three reels 31 and three stop switches 42, as shown in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment), a maximum of "3!=6" selection pressing orders can be provided. On the other hand, when there are four reels 31 and four stop switches 42, a maximum of "4!=24" selection pressing orders can be provided.
The greater the number of presses of the stop switch 42, the more the base during non-AT (when the accessory is not activated and during non-AT, the number of out cards per 100 in sheets. For example, the number of out sheets per 100 in sheets) If the number of out cards is 50, the base is 50.) can be lowered.

When the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is 4, the number of bells to be pressed in the lottery is 1234 bells (stop switches 42A → 42B → 42C → 42D indicate the correct pressing order), 1243 bells, etc. ., 4312 bells, and 4321 bells. As shown in FIG. 58, if the number of winning positions for each pressing order bell is the same, the winning number for each pressing order bell may be set to "1500". In this way, since the number of winning positions for each push order bell can be set to "1/4", the probability that the push order operated by the player will match the correct push order when the push order bell is won can be reduced accordingly. can do.

Here, when the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is three, images such as "123" or "left center right" can be displayed during AT. Therefore, it is easy to intuitively understand the order in which the correct answers are pressed.
On the other hand, when the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is four, the following method can be cited as to how to notify the correct pressing order during AT.

For example, a first method is to set the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D to "1", "2", "3", and "4", respectively, and notify the order of the stop switches 42 to be operated. It will be done. For example, when the stop switches 42 are pressed in the order of stop switches 42C, 42D, 42A, and 42B, "3412" is notified (at least one of image display, audio display, and lamp color notification). ). Alternatively, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D may be set to "A," "B," "C," and "D," respectively, and in the above example, "CDAB" may be notified.

A second method is to apply a color to the base of the reel 31 and/or the stop switch 42 for identification.
For example, the color of the base of the reel 31A and/or the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the base of the reel 31B and/or the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the base of the reel 31C and/or the stop switch 42C is yellow, The color of the base of the reel 31D and/or the stop switch 42D is red (each is a different color). In the above example, instead of the notification "3412", the notification may be "yellow red white blue" (at least one of image display, audio display, and lamp color notification).

Furthermore, as a third method, the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth (last) among the stop switches 42 to be operated from the first to fourth is displayed darkly (or hidden). can be mentioned. In this case, "brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated first > brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated second ≧ corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third One example of this is to set the brightness of the image ≧ the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth.
When the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is darkened (or hidden), and the image corresponds to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth. An example of this is to make the brightness of the image to be the same as the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third.
For example, when the pressing order of "3412" is to be displayed as an image as in the above example, "3●12" is first displayed as an image. In addition, "●" is an image corresponding to the "4th" press order, and it may be darkened (hidden) so that the character "4" is not visible at all, or the "4" character may be hidden. It may be dimmed to the extent that the characters are distinguishable.

When the image of "3●12" is displayed, it is the same as when there are six options, so the player can intuitively understand the pressing order. When the first stop switch 42C is operated, one of the following actions 1) to 3) can be performed.
1) The "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C is changed to a "●", and the previous "●" is changed to a "4". Specifically, the image displayed is "34●2".
2) The "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C is changed to a display such as "-" or "o", and the previous "●" is changed to a "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34-2" or "34o2".
3) The "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C is changed to a blank (no image), and the previous "●" is changed to a "4." Specifically, the image displayed is "34*2"("*" means blank).

Also, after the second stop, images may be displayed as "34●●", "34--", "34○○", and "34**" in the same way as above.
Furthermore, after the third stop, images may be displayed as "●4●●", "-4--", "○4○○", and "*4**".
Alternatively, after the third stop, the image of the push order itself may be erased.
Note that even if the order of all the presses is displayed as "4312" as an image as in the first method described above, after the stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 will be displayed. It is preferable to erase the stop switch 42 as described in 1) to 3) above, as this makes it easier to understand which stop switch 42 has been operated. Specifically, after displaying the image "4312", "43●2" (after operating the stop switch 42C) → "43●●" (after operating the stop switch 42D) → "4●●●" (after operating the stop switch 42B) After the operation), an image may be displayed ("●" may also be "○", "-", or "*" as described above).

As a fourth method, the pressing order is notified using a four-character idiom. For example, when the pressing order is notified using the four-character idiom "Spring, Summer, Autumn, Winter," the correct pressing order is "Spring → Summer → Autumn → Winter."
When the button press sequence is "3412" as described above, the first method may be used to announce (by image display or audio) "Autumn, Winter, Spring, Summer."
Alternatively, as in the third method described above, an image of "Autumn * Spring * Summer" may be displayed before the first stop, and an image of "Autumn * Winter * Summer" may be displayed after the first stop.
In any of the first to fourth methods, if a mistake is made in the button press sequence during the process, the image of the button press sequence may continue to be displayed as is, or the image may be erased at the point at which the mistake is made.

In the thirteenth embodiment, when a push order bell with 24 options is provided as described above, 24 types of push order instruction numbers and push order instruction information are provided. For example, if the press order instruction information is "A1" to "A9", "AA", "AC", "AF", "F1" to "F9", "FA", "FC", "FF", 24 types can be provided.

Although the eleventh to thirteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
A. Eleventh Embodiment (1) In the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section lottery was performed only when the winning lottery result became the target lottery result. The reason for this setting is that, as mentioned above, when the lottery result is non-winning (when the conditional device does not operate as a result of the internal lottery), the advantageous section transfer lottery, which is the processing related to the advantageous section, is carried out. This is because we thought it would be preferable not to do so. Therefore, it does not necessarily have to be set in this way, and the advantageous section shift lottery may be executed when the winning combination is not won.

(2) In the eleventh embodiment, after the lottery for the transition to the favorable zone, the AT lottery process was executed. Here, a lottery result (winning number) that always determines the favorable zone may be set, and when the lottery result for the favorable zone is reached, the lottery for the transition to the favorable zone may not be executed, and the transition to the favorable zone process (FIG. 45) may be executed. Similarly, a lottery result (winning number) that always determines the AT may be set, and when the lottery result for the favorable zone is reached, the AT set process (steps S363 and S364 in FIG. 46) may be executed, without executing the AT lottery.
Furthermore, a role selection result (winning number) may be set that will always determine an advantageous zone and an AT, and when that role selection result is reached, advantageous zone transition processing and AT set processing may be executed without executing the advantageous zone transition lottery or AT lottery processing.
In addition, in the case where a lottery result (winning number) that does not win the advantageous zone transition lottery is set, the advantageous zone transition lottery may be executed even when the lottery result is the winning number. In this case, the winning number of the advantageous zone may be set to "0".

(3) When the AT is won, the initial number of AT games is determined, the number of games is stored in the AT game number counter, and when the AT game number counter becomes "0", the AT is ended. However, the AT is not limited to such an AT that manages the number of games, but may also be an AT that manages the number of differential cards. In the case of a difference number management type AT, when an AT is won, an initial value of the obtainable difference number is determined and stored in an AT difference number counter (different from the difference number counter). Then, each time there is a payout, the difference number is subtracted from the AT difference number counter, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT ends.
In the case of such a differential number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is subtracted when the number is one specified number (for example, "3"), but when it is another specified number (for example, "2"), the AT difference number counter is subtracted. Do not subtract the difference number counter.

(4) In the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of FIG. 39, the setting is set to a state where the setting can be changed after the initialization process is executed. Therefore, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is on before the power is turned off, when the setting change process is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off before the setting change becomes possible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an advantageous section may be displayed after the state in which settings can be changed (after "Yes" in step S242 in FIG. 39) and before proceeding to main processing (before step S248). Clearing (initialization) processing of the LED flag may also be executed. In this way, it becomes possible to control the advantageous section display LED 77 to turn off after the set value is determined.

(5) One advantageous section clear counter and one difference counter were provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two advantageous section clear counters and two difference counters (important counters) may be provided to confirm consistency.
For example, a first advantageous section clear counter and a second advantageous section clear counter are provided as advantageous section clear counters. During the advantageous section, both the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter are updated every time the game is played. Further, for example, in the determination in step S424 in FIGS. 51 and 52, the first advantageous section clear counter is determined. When it is determined that the first advantageous section clear counter is "0", it is determined whether the value of the second advantageous section clear counter is "0" or the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter. Determine whether or not the counter has the same value. If it is determined that the values are "0" or the same value, the process advances to step S435.

The same applies to the difference counter.
A first difference counter and a second difference counter are provided as difference counters. Then, both the first difference counter and the second difference counter are updated every time a game is played. Also, for example, in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, in the judgment of step S434, a judgment is made regarding the first difference counter. When it is judged that the first difference counter exceeds the upper limit, it is judged whether or not the second difference counter exceeds the upper limit, or whether or not the first difference counter and the second difference counter have the same value. When it is judged that the first difference counter exceeds the upper limit or that they have the same value, the process proceeds to step S435.

If you judge the advantageous section clear counter value and/or the difference counter value as described above, even if the counter value becomes an abnormal value (incorrect value) due to the influence of noise, the advantageous section clear counter value is "0" and/or whether the difference counter value exceeds the upper limit value can be determined more accurately.
Note that if the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter do not match, or if the first difference counter and second difference counter do not match, for example, an error display is displayed and the game does not proceed. (main processing) can be stopped.

(6) In the sub-difference number management process of FIG. 56, it is determined in step S544 that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, and the process proceeds to step S545, where it is determined that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)". When the sub difference number counter is cleared, in that BB game, a special performance different from the normal BB game may be output. A special effect during the BB game can suggest to the player that the sub-difference number counter has been cleared.

In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the sub-difference number counter is not judged, and in the BB game, the sub-difference number counter is set to, for example, "2000 (D)" (this is an example of a threshold value, and this value ) may be determined. When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter has exceeded "2000 (D)", the sub-difference number counter is cleared and a special effect (a performance indicating that the sub-difference number counter has been cleared) is performed from the next game. You can also output it.

Furthermore, in the above case, if a power outage occurs during a game in which the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2000 (D)" during a BB game (the special effect has not been output yet), the power will be restored from the power outage. The special effect may be output from the game played. In this case, at the time of recovery from the power cut, the sub difference number counter value and the fact that a BB game is in progress may be read to determine whether or not to output a special effect.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during the rotation of the reels 31 in a game in which the sub-number difference counter during BB play exceeds "2000 (D)", the special effect may be output from the game that resumes after the power outage. Therefore, in this case, if there is no power outage, the special effect is output from the next game, but if there is a power outage while the reels 31 are rotating, the special effect is output from that game.

(7) Play the game with the specified number "2" during AT (the instruction function does not operate when the specified number is "2"), win the push order bell, and accidentally operate the stop switch 42 in the correct push order. , When a small winning combination is paid out and the difference sheet counter exceeds ``2400 (D)'', at the end of the game, an effect indicating the end of AT, such as an image display such as ``END'', can be output. preferable. This is to prevent AT from ending in a game in which the correct pressing order is not reported and giving the player a sense of discomfort.

(8) On the other hand, as mentioned above, in order to prevent AT from ending in a game where the correct pressing order is not announced, for example, if you play a game with the specified number "2", you will win the pressing order bell. Even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order, the number of payouts for the game is set to ``2'' or less (the difference in the number of coins for the game is ``0'' or less), so that the AT does not end in the game. It's okay.

(9) As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the sub-difference number counter continued counting during the BB game. However, the invention is not limited to this, and when winning a BB during AT and moving to BB gaming, the sub-difference number counter may not be updated (updating of the sub-difference number counter may be interrupted during BB gaming). .
In this case, for example, before step S531 in FIG. 56, it is determined whether the BB is in operation (determined based on the operation state flag). Then, when the BB is in operation, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Further, when the sub-difference number counter is not updated during the BB game, the processes of step S551 and steps S558 to S561 in FIG. 57 are unnecessary. If "No" in step S547, the process advances to step S552.

B. Twelfth Embodiment (1) Similarly to the eleventh embodiment, in FIG. 58, when a winning combination is not won, the transition lottery for an advantageous section (processing related to an advantageous section) is not executed. As mentioned above, this takes into account the rules. Therefore, if the rules are not taken into account, the transition lottery for the advantageous section may be executed when the winning combination is not won.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 58, the advantageous section transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous section) is limited to one specified number (in the example of FIG. 58, the specified number is "3") in one gaming state (RT). I decided to do it. This was done in consideration of the fact that according to the rules, the transition lottery for advantageous sections (processing related to advantageous sections) is limited to only one specified number in one gaming state (RT). Therefore, unless this point is taken into account, advantageous section transition lottery may be executed with a plurality of specified numbers in one gaming state (RT).

(2) In the twelfth embodiment, the specified number "2" is specified for non-RT and AT. However, when the game is the final game of the AT game, it is not necessary to specify the specified number.
(3) In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that the game is played within BB2, and it is irregular for BB2 to win and shift to the BB2 game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specification may be such that after executing AT within BB2, when the AT termination condition is satisfied, BB2 is made to win and the BB2 game is executed. In this case, when the AT end condition is satisfied within BB2, after the game that satisfies the AT end condition (after all reels 31 have stopped and the payout process has been executed when a small prize is won), Before the start of the next game (non-AT) (before bets can be made), the specified number "2" is instructed to encourage winning of BB2. In the twelfth embodiment, BB2 is won with a specified number of “2”, so the specified number for winning BB2 is “2”, but for example, if a BB is provided that wins with a specified number of “1” In order to win that BB, the specified number "1" is specified.
Further, the BB game with such specifications may be a BB game in which medals increase or a BB game in which medals decrease.

(4) When specifying the specified number, it was executed in the game start setting process (step S322 in FIG. 42). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed in the game end check process (FIG. 50). For example, in a BB2 game, it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the BB2 game, and if it is the final game, the specified number of games for the next game is specified during the game end check process. However, in the final game of the BB2 game, when a small winning combination is won and a payout is made, and the number of payouts is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the prescribed number is indicated after the number of payouts is displayed. Note that if the LED for indicating the specified number is a dedicated LED, the specified number for the next game can be instructed to the dedicated LED while the number of payouts is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Furthermore, when executing a freeze in the final game of the BB2 game, when instructing the specified number of games for the next game at the end of the game, the timing is before executing the freeze, during the execution of the freeze, or after the end of the freeze. It may be.

(5) As in the twelfth embodiment, when a game can be executed with any one of a plurality of prescribed numbers, the function of the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b can be changed. For example, in a game during an advantageous period, in a situation where it is advantageous to play with the specified number "3" (for example, in the case of inside BB2 in FIG. 58), the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b is set only for 3 bets. It can also be set to a button. That is, when the number of credits is "3" and it is during the advantageous period and in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game with the specified number "3", when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, the setting is made so that "3" bet is placed. do. On the other hand, when the number of credits is "2", in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game with the specified number "3" during the advantageous period, even if the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, "2" bet will not be placed. Set it as follows.

Alternatively, even if it is possible to play the game with the specified number of "3", if the number of credits is "2" and the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, the setting is made so that "2" is bet. Good too. In particular, in FIG. 58, in non-RT and AT, it is preferable to set the bet so that when the number of credits is "2" and the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, "2" bet is placed.

(6) As in the twelfth embodiment, when most of the game zone is set as the advantageous zone, the instruction function can be activated at any timing. For example, a difference number counter (different from a difference number counter) capable of counting the negative difference number is provided to calculate the ball payout rate for a predetermined period. When the ball payout rate for a predetermined period reaches a predetermined lower limit (the predetermined lower limit is set, for example, higher than the lower limit set by the rules), the instruction function can be activated to increase the ball payout rate. Then, when the ball payout rate increases and recovers to the reference value, the instruction function is terminated.
Such activation of the indication function when the predetermined lower limit is reached may or may not be included in "AT." However, since the indication function is still activated, it is equivalent to processing related to the indication function.

(7) In the twelfth embodiment, the obtained number display LED 78 is used as the LED for displaying information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be set to other existing LEDs, or a dedicated LED may be separately provided to display information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions.
When a separate LED is provided exclusively for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions, even if the start switch 41 is operated after displaying the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions in the game start set process, the specified number of instructions will not be displayed. It is not necessary to delete the information corresponding to the . Further, even if all the reels 31 are stopped, a small winning combination is won, and medals are paid out, there is no need to erase the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions.
In addition, when a dedicated LED is provided to display information corresponding to the specified specified number, the specified specified number will not be confused with the number of payouts, error numbers, etc., so the specified number can be specified in any display format. Can be done. For example, if the designated specified number is "2", it is possible to display "2".

(8) In the twelfth embodiment, an example was given in which the specified number “2” is specified, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the specified number “1” or “3” may be specified. Conceivable. If the specification has the possibility of specifying any of the specified numbers "1" to "3", the display of the acquired number display LED 78 when specifying the specified number "1" is set to "A1", and the specified number is set to "A1". For example, the display indicating "2" may be set as "A2", and the display indicating the specified number "3" may be set as "A3".

C. Thirteenth embodiment (1) In the front view of Fig. 59, the line L1 is set to pass through the center of the four reels 31 and the center of the four stop switches 42. However, this is not limited to the above, and all four stop switches 42 may be positioned to the right of the position in Fig. 58, for example, so that a portion of stop switch 42B intersects with line L1. Conversely, all four stop switches 42 may be positioned to the left of the position in Fig. 58, for example, so that a portion of stop switch 42C intersects with line L1.

(2) As shown in the front view of FIG. 59, Roman numerals from "1" to "4" are written below the four reels 31, but the Roman numerals may be used as lamps. In this case, for example, when the next stop switch to be operated is 42C, a lamp with the Roman numeral "3" may be turned on.
Furthermore, the ranges in which the Roman numerals from "1" to "4" are written are given different colors, and the stop switches 42A to 42D can also be given colors corresponding to the Roman numerals "1" to "4". Can be mentioned. In the example described above, the color of the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the stop switch 42C is yellow, and the color of the stop switch 42D is red. In this case, the range of Roman numeral "1" is white, the range of Roman numeral "2" is blue, the range of Roman numeral "3" is yellow, and the range of Roman numeral "4" is red. It will be done.

(3) Furthermore, a portion including the periphery of the reel 31 may be constituted by the image display device 23. Then, as described above, each stop switch 42 is given a different color. In this case, when notifying the push order, for example, when specifying the stop switch 42B (blue), the area around the reel 31B may be illuminated in blue.

(4) In the front view of FIG. 59, the distance W3 between the reels 31 is set to be longer than the distance W4 between the stop switches 42.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the interval W3 between the reels 31 and the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set to be substantially the same. Alternatively, the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set to be longer than the interval W3 between the reels 31.

(5) In the thirteenth embodiment, a maximum of 24 selections of pressing orders can be provided as the pressing order bell. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide a first stop push order bell. Here, in the prior art, there are three choices for the first stop pressing order bell. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to set four options. When displaying an image of the correct pressing order when the first stop pressing order bell is won, for example, if the stop switch 42 that is the correct answer is the stop switch 42C, an image of "XX1x" may be displayed.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a first stop and second stop push order bell (a push order bell in which the correct push order is set for the first stop and the second stop). For example, the first stop is set as the stop switch 42C, the second stop as the stop switch 42A, and the third stop and fourth stop as arbitrary (any of the stop switches 42B and 42D may be used). In this case, the correct answer pressing order can be set to 12 choices. Furthermore, when displaying the correct answer press order as an image, in the above example, "2x1x" may be displayed as an image. After the stop switch 42C is operated, an image such as "2×-×" may be displayed.

D. Others All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
The fourteenth embodiment relates to the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information.
Hereinafter, fourteenth embodiments (A) to (G) in which the display start or display end timings of the press order instruction information are different will be described.

<Fourteenth embodiment (A)>
60 and 61 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (A).
Figure 60 shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum play time has elapsed, and Figure 61 shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed.

Here, the hardware configuration in the fourteenth embodiment (A) is similar to the hardware configuration shown in FIGS. 31 to 35 of the eleventh embodiment.
In addition, the main processing (M_MAIN), push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), medal payout upon winning (M_WIN_PAY), interrupt processing (I_INTR), and LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the 14th embodiment (A) are similar to the main processing (M_MAIN) in Figure 41, push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) in Figure 48, medal payout upon winning in Figure 49, interrupt processing (I_INTR) in Figure 53, and LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in Figure 55 in the 11th embodiment.
In the 14th embodiment (A), similarly to the 11th embodiment, when the push order bell is won during the AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78.

In step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 53, input port read processing is executed. If the start switch 41 is on at this time, then, in step S278 of the main process (M_MAIN) in FIG. 41, "Yes" is obtained.
Also, as shown in FIG. 41, if the answer is "Yes" in step S278, then a role selection process (step S282), a favorable zone transition selection process (step S283), and a push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) are executed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 48, in the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), if the conditions for activating the instruction function are met, that is, if a combination with an advantageous push order such as push order bell is won during AT. , a pressing order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is generated, and this is stored as acquisition number data. Then, by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process, press order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), similarly to the eleventh embodiment, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed every 2.235 ms. Furthermore, dynamic lighting of digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so that 5 interrupts constitute one cycle.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. Regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) or not, after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reels 31 start rotating, more specifically, the push order instruction number is stored as the obtained number data. Display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 will start within 5 interrupts (2.235×5=11.175 ms) from .

After the push order instruction number is stored as acquisition number data, the push order instruction information may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 at the first interruption, or the push order instruction information may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 at the fifth interruption.
Also, although not shown in FIG. 41, control command set 1 is executed between the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 and the preparation for starting reel spinning in step S285. In control command set 1 between the push order instruction number set and the preparation for starting reel spinning, the performance group number or push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer as a control command. Then, the control command stored in the control command buffer is sent to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmission (step S464) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the control command is composed of a first control command and a second control command. Both the first control command and the second control command are 1-byte data. Further, the first control command is data indicating the type of control command, and the second control command is data indicating parameters (variables). One control command is composed of 2-byte data of the first control command and the second control command.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used, and one parallel communication line transmits the first control command to the sub-control board 80, and the other parallel communication line transmits the first control command to the sub-control board 80. 2 control command to the sub control board 80. This makes it possible to transmit a control command consisting of 2-byte data to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), a 64-byte storage area is secured in the RWM 53 as a control command buffer. As described above, since one control command is composed of 2-byte data of the first control command and the second control command, the control command buffer can store 32 control commands. Then, by transmitting the control command during interrupt processing, the untransmitted control commands stored in the control command buffer are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the order in which they were stored.
Note that if a control command is stored when the control command buffer is empty, the control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 when the control command is transmitted during the next interrupt processing at that time.

As described above, in the 14th embodiment (A), as shown in Figures 60 and 61, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed or after the minimum play time has elapsed, the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts to rotate, more specifically, approximately one interrupt (2.235 ms) after the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the sub-control board 80 includes a first sub-control board (sub-main control board) and a second sub-control board (sub-sub-control board). The first sub-control board and the second sub-control board are control boards subordinate to the main control board 50, and control the selection and output of performances during gaming and during game standby. Further, the second sub-control board is a control board subordinate to the first sub-control board. The main control board 50 sends control commands to the first sub-control board in one direction, and the first sub-control board and the second sub-control board communicate bidirectionally.

Furthermore, the first sub-control board determines what kind of effect to output at what timing based on the control command sent from the main control board 50. Then, the first sub-control board transmits a control command regarding the determined effect to the second sub-control board.
Furthermore, peripheral devices for presentation such as a presentation lamp 21, a speaker 22, and an image display device 23 are electrically connected to the second sub-control board. Then, the second sub-control board selects a performance based on the control command transmitted from the first sub-control board, and controls the peripheral equipment for performance to output various performances.

Specifically, upon receiving the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, the first sub control board stores (saves) the received control command in a predetermined storage area.
In addition, the first sub-control board executes sub-main processing every 16 ms, and analyzes the control command in the loop processing during this sub-main processing, and as a result, when it determines that it is a control command related to an image. stores an image command in the command buffer according to the analysis result.
Further, the first sub-control board transmits the image command stored in the command buffer to the second sub-control board in command transmission processing (executed before loop processing) during the next sub-main processing.

Therefore, after the main control board 50 sends the push order instruction number as a control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board receives the image command, it takes 32 ms (= cycle of sub-main processing It takes about 16ms x 2).
The second sub-control board then executes a drawing process based on the received image command, and displays the image on the image display device 23.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the second sub-control board executes the drawing process at 30 fps (frames per second). Therefore, it takes about 33.33 ms to display one image on the image display device 23.

As a result of the above, it takes approximately 65.33 ms (= 32 ms + 33.33 ms) from the time the main control board 50 sends the push order instruction number as a control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board displays an image indicating the push order (pull order instruction image) on the image display device 23.
Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (A), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 60, after the reel 31 has started to rotate but before the reel 31 can be stopped, that is, before the rotation of the reel 31 has reached a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the display of the push order indication image on the image display device 23 begins.

On the other hand, for example, if the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum gaming time elapses, it will take about one second from the time when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) until the reels 31 start rotating. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before the reels 31 start rotating.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. Regardless of whether it is turned on (operated) or not, the acquisition number display LED 78 starts displaying the push order instruction information, and then the image display device 23 starts displaying the push order instruction image.

Although not shown in FIG. 41, control command set 1 is executed between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288. In control command set 1 between this reel stop acceptance check and the all reel stop check, control commands related to the operation of the stop switch 42 and control commands related to the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in the control command buffer. Then, the control commands stored in the control command buffer are sent to the sub-control board 80 by control command transmission (step S464) during interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing.

Furthermore, the first sub-control board analyzes the received control command, and as a result, determines that it is a control command related to the operation of the first stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped first). When this happens, an image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 is transmitted to the second sub-control board.
Similarly, when it is determined that the control command is related to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops second), the image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is 2 sub-control board, and when it is determined that the command is a control command related to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops last), the control command is sent to the second sub-control board. Send the image command to the second sub-control board.

When the second sub-control board receives an image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42, the second sub-control board displays an image corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 (for example, prompting the operation of the second stop switch 42). (push order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23.
Similarly, when an image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is received, an image corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (for example, a press order instruction image prompting the operation of the third stop switch 42) is displayed. Displayed on the image display device 23.

When an image command corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 is received, for example, the display of the push order instruction image is finished, and the image corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (for example, all reels 31 are stopped) is displayed. (an image corresponding to the state) is displayed on the image display device 23.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 ends after the third stop switch 42 is turned on.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, when all the reels 31 stop ("Yes" in step S289), the acquisition number data is cleared (step S290). For example, assume that when the push order bell is won during AT, push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In this case, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "00" due to the interrupt process executed after the process in step S290.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, when all the reels 31 are stopped, the display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 ends.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is first completed, and then the push order instruction on the acquisition number display LED 78 is completed. The information display ends.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 41, in step S294, medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) is executed based on winnings. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 49, "1" is added to the acquisition number data in step S399 during medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) for winning. As a result, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 is increased by "+1" by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S399. For example, the display on the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from "00" to "01".
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the number of acquired medals is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 when the medals are paid out.

In the fourteenth embodiment (A), when the push order bell is won during AT and the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, all the reels 31 stop. Then, the acquisition number data is cleared and the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00". Thereafter, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 remains at "00" until the medals are paid out. For example, when there is a payout of 10 medals, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 will be "00" → "01" → "02" → ... → "09" → "10" when the medals are paid out. Count up.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the role selection process (step S282) and the advantageous zone transition selection process (step S283) are executed, the push order instruction number setting (step S284) is then executed.
60 and 61, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum play time has elapsed, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 can be started after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reels 31 start to spin. In other words, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 can be started immediately after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated).

<Fourteenth embodiment (B)>
The fourteenth embodiment (B) is different from the fourteenth embodiment (A) in the timing at which the display of push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 starts, and the push order instruction information is displayed at the start of rotation of the reel 31. This is the start of the process.
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (B), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (B) shown in FIG. 62, steps that are different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers. .

In FIG. 41, the process is executed in the order of setting the push order instruction number, preparing to start reel rotation, and starting reel rotation, but in the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIG. Processing is executed in the order of number set and reel rotation start.
That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), the order of steps S284 and S285 is reversed from that in FIG. 41, and the push order instruction number set is executed after preparing to start reel rotation.

Input port reading processing is performed in step S457 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 53, and if the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then "Yes" is selected in step S278 of the main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG. becomes.
Further, as shown in FIG. 62, if "Yes" is determined in step S278, the winning lottery process (step S282), the advantageous section transition lottery process (step S283), the control command set 1 (step S601), and the reel rotation start. Preparation (step S285) and push order instruction number setting (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) are executed.

In step S601, control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, an effect group number or a push order instruction number is stored as a control command in a control command buffer. After step S601, the process advances to step S285.
Further, in step S285, preparations for starting reel rotation are executed. In this preparation for starting the reel rotation, first, it is determined whether the timer value of the minimum game time (the minimum time from when the reel 31 starts rotating to when the reel 31 starts rotating in the next game) is "0".

The RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing a timer value of the minimum playing time. Further, the initial value of the timer value is “1834(D) (2.235ms×1834≈4099ms)”. Furthermore, the timer value is decremented by "1" every time an interrupt is processed (2.235 ms). When it is determined that the timer value is not "0", it is determined again whether the timer value is "0" or not, and when it is determined that the timer value is "0", the initial value of the timer value is Set, and proceed to step S284.
In this way, in preparation for starting the reel rotation in step S285, it is determined whether the minimum gaming time has elapsed or not, and when it is determined that the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S284.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), once the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 is executed, the process proceeds to step S602.
In step S602, control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, control commands related to the operation of the stop switch 42 and control commands related to the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in the control command buffer. After step S602, the process advances to step S288.
Note that the control command set 1 is executed between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288, as described in the fourteenth embodiment (A).
Other than the above, the flowchart of the eleventh embodiment is the same as that of FIG. 41.

FIGS. 63 and 64 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (B).
FIG. 63 shows the timing of display start and end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is operated after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and FIG. 64 shows the timing when the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the push order instruction information is pressed.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the advantageous section transfer lottery process in step S283 is executed, the process proceeds to step S601, and control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, an effect group number or a push order instruction number is stored as a control command in a control command buffer. Then, by interrupt processing executed after this processing, the effect group number or push order instruction number stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, or the start switch 41 is operated after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. Regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reels 31 start rotating, more specifically, after the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer, one interrupt (2. The push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board) in about 235 ms).

In the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the control command set 1 in step S601 is executed, preparation for starting reel rotation in step S285 is executed, and then the push order instruction number set in step S284 is executed.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. Regardless of whether or not is turned on (operated), the display of push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 will start when the reels 31 start rotating.

As explained in the fourteenth embodiment (A), it takes about 65.33 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. For this reason, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum play time has elapsed, as shown in Fig. 63, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 begins after the reels 31 start to rotate and before the reels 31 can be stopped.
In contrast, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum play time has elapsed, it takes about one second from the turning on (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reel 31, so that, as shown in Figure 64, the display of the push order indication image on the image display device 23 begins before the reel 31 starts rotating.

Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. Display of the push order instruction image on the display device 23 is started.
On the other hand, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. Then, display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is started.
That is, depending on whether the start switch 41 is operated before or after the minimum game time has elapsed, the display of push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 and the push order instruction on the image display device 23 are performed. The order of the images from the start of display is reversed.

Here, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed or whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. After the start switch 41 was turned on (operated) and before the reels 31 started rotating, the display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 was started. That is, after the start switch 41 was turned on (operated), the display of push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 was immediately started.

However, if the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the win number display LED 78 is too early, the start switch 41 may be turned on because the winning combination (internal lottery) has won a combination with an advantageous push order such as the push order bell. (Operation) The player will immediately know after performing the operation.
Although this does not have an advantageous pressing order, there is a risk of discouraging players who have been waiting for the winning of the rare combination, which is a condition for determining the additional number of AT games.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum playing time has elapsed, by storing the push order instruction number as the number of acquisition data, when the reels 31 start rotating, the number of presses on the number of acquisition display LEDs 78 is displayed. Start displaying order instruction information.
As a result, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the timing to start displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum gaming time has elapsed. , it is possible to prevent a player who has been waiting for winning a rare combination from being disappointed immediately after operating the start switch 41.

In addition, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, it is determined that the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the push order instruction number is stored as the number of acquisition data, and then the 5th interrupt (2.235 x5=11.175 ms), the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 will start.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), before storing the push order instruction number as acquisition number data, the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer and the sub control board 80 (first sub control board) is stored. However, it takes about 65.33 ms from when the main control board 50 sends the push order instruction number to the first sub control board until the second sub control board displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. It takes time.

In this way, the time required from storing the push order instruction number as acquisition number data to displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is set as "X", and the main control board 50 sets the push order instruction number. When the time required for the second sub-control board to display the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 after sending it to the first sub-control board is "Y", it is necessary to satisfy "X<Y". It is set to .
Furthermore, when the cycle of the interrupt processing is "T" and the number of digits to be dynamically lit by the interrupt processing is "N", the push order instruction number is stored as the number of acquisition data, and then the number of digits that are pressed is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. It takes a maximum of "T×N" time to display the order instruction information. Therefore, it is set to satisfy "T×N<Y".
As a result, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, the display of push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is first started, and then the push order instruction information on the image display device 23 is started. The display of the instruction image is started.

<Fourteenth embodiment (C)>
The fourteenth embodiment (C) is different from the fourteenth embodiments (A) and (B) in the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 ends, and the push order instruction information is displayed when the medals are paid out. The display ends.
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (C), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 65, steps that are different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 41 are assigned the same step numbers. .

In FIG. 41, when it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped in step S289, the process proceeds to step S290 and the obtained number data is cleared, but in the fourteenth embodiment (C), as shown in FIG. When it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291, and the symbol display is determined without clearing the obtained number data.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) (step S603) due to winning is different from FIGS. 41 and 49 of the eleventh embodiment.

An input port read process is performed in step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 53. If the start switch 41 is on at this time, then the result is "Yes" in step S278 of the main process (M_MAIN) in FIG. 65.
Also, as shown in FIG. 65, if the result in step S278 is “Yes”, then the following processes are executed: role selection process (step S282), advantageous zone transition selection process (step S283), push order instruction number setting (M_ORD_INF) (step S284), control command set 1 (step S601), and preparation for starting reel rotation (step S285).
Step S601 is the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (B).

In addition, in FIG. 65, the control command set 1 (step S602) is executed after the reel stop reception check (step S287), and then the all reel stop check (step S288) is executed. This is similar to FIG. 62 in (B).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 65, when it is determined in step S289 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291, where symbol display is determined. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), after all the reels 31 are stopped, the obtained number data is maintained without being cleared.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) due to winning in the fourteenth embodiment (C), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 49 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 66, steps that are different from those in FIG. 49 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 49 are given the same step numbers. .

As shown in FIG. 66, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when the payout number data is acquired in step S391, the process proceeds to step S611, where the payout number data is stored as the acquisition number data, and then the process proceeds to step S392. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), payout number data is stored as acquisition number data between step S391 and step S392.
Further, as shown in FIG. 66, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when one medal payout process is executed in step S398, the process proceeds to step S400, and "1" is subtracted from the payout number data. Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), unlike the eleventh embodiment shown in FIG. 49, "1" is not added to the acquisition number data between step S398 and step S400.

FIGS. 67 and 68 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (C).
FIG. 67 shows the timing of display start and end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the display start and end timings of the push order instruction information are shown.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the obtained number data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, even after all the reels 31 have stopped, the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") continues to be displayed on the obtained number display LED 78.

In the fourteenth embodiment (C), when the payout number data is stored as the acquired number data in step S611 of FIG. 66, the number of medals acquired (for example, "10" when 10 medals are paid out) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process.
For this reason, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), as shown in Figures 67 and 68, until the medals are paid out, the acquired number display LED 78 continues to display push order instruction information (for example, "=1"), and at the time of medal payment, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 switches from the push order instruction information to the number of medals acquired (for example, from "=1" to "10").
The timing of starting to display the number of medals won, the timing of sending the push order instruction number as a control command, and the timing of starting and ending the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 are the same as in the 14th embodiment (A).

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the number of wins data is maintained without being cleared, and the number of payouts is used as the number of wins data in step S611 of medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) by winning in FIG. 66. Store data.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, even after all the reels 31 have stopped, the push order instruction information can continue to be displayed on the obtained number display LED 78.
Furthermore, until it is time to pay out medals, the press order instruction information continues to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and when medals are paid out, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 is switched from the press order instruction information to the acquired number, so that the acquired number is displayed. Although the LED 78 is used as a display for pressing order instruction information and the number of acquired coins, it can be arranged so as not to interfere with the display of the acquired number of coins.

<Fourteenth embodiment (D)>
The fourteenth embodiment (D) is different from the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (D) in the timing at which the acquisition number display LED 78 starts displaying the push order instruction information, and the reels 31 can be stopped. When the button is pressed, the display of press order instruction information is started.
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (D), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (D) shown in FIG. 69, steps that are different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers. .

As shown in FIG. 69, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), when the rotation of the reel 31 is started in step S286, the process proceeds to step S604, and it is determined whether or not the reel 31 can be stopped. That is, it is determined whether the rotation of the reel 31 has reached a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. When it is determined that the reels 31 can be stopped, the process proceeds to step S284, and a push order instruction number set (M_ORG_INF) is executed.
The contents of the process in the push order instruction number set (M_ORG_INF) in step S284 are the same as those in the eleventh embodiment and the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C).
Further, the contents of the processing in the control command set 1 in steps S601 and S602 are the same as those in the fourteenth embodiment (B) and (C).

FIGS. 70 and 71 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (D).
FIG. 70 shows the timing of display start and end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the display start and end timings of the push order instruction information are shown.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), when the reels 31 can be stopped, the push order instruction number set is executed, so as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the game starts before the minimum gaming time elapses. Regardless of whether the switch 41 is turned on (operated) or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, when the reels 31 can be stopped, the push order instruction information will be displayed on the obtained number display LED 78. is started.

Also, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, the After the reels 31 start rotating and before the reels 31 can be stopped, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started, and the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses. ), as shown in FIG. 71, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 starts before the reels 31 start rotating.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C), the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. Regardless of whether this is the case, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 starts before the reels 31 can be stopped.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum playing time has elapsed, when the reels 31 become stoppable; , the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. First, the image display device 23 starts displaying the push order instruction image, and then the acquisition number display LED 78 starts displaying the push order instruction information.

Furthermore, in the 14th embodiment (D), the timing at which the push order instruction information starts to be displayed on the winning number display LED 78 can be delayed until the reel 31 can be stopped, so that, similar to the 14th embodiment (B), a player who has been waiting for a rare win is not disappointed immediately after operating the start switch 41.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), although the timing at which the push order instruction information starts to be displayed on the winning number display LED 78 is delayed, when the reel 31 becomes capable of being stopped, the push order instruction information starts to be displayed on the winning number display LED 78, so that the push order instruction information can be notified to the player before the player operates the stop switch 42.

<Fourteenth embodiment (E)>
The fourteenth embodiment (E), like the fourteenth embodiment (B), starts displaying the push order instruction information when the reels 31 start rotating, and like the fourteenth embodiment (C), medals are paid out. The display of the push order instruction information is then terminated.
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (E), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 62 in the fourteenth embodiment (B) and FIG. 65 in the fourteenth embodiment (C). .
In FIG. 72, steps S271 to S286 are the same as in FIG. 62 of the fourteenth embodiment (B), and steps S287 to S303 are the same as in FIG. 65 of the fourteenth embodiment (C).

FIGS. 73 and 74 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (E).
FIG. 73 shows the timing of display start and end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the display start and end timings of the push order instruction information are shown.
As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), similarly to FIGS. 63 and 64 of the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the reels 31 start rotating, the order of presses on the obtained number display LED 78 is The display of the instruction information is started, and the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is ended when medals are paid out, similarly to FIGS. 67 and 68 of the fourteenth embodiment (C).

Note that the timing to start displaying the number of acquired medals, the timing to send the push order instruction number as a control command, and the timing to start and end the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 are as described in the 14th embodiment (B ).
In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum playing time has elapsed, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data, so that the reel 31 At the start of rotation, display of push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time has elapsed, the timing to start displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum playing time has elapsed. , it is possible to prevent a player who was waiting for winning a rare combination from being disappointed immediately after operating the start switch 41.

Furthermore, in the 14th embodiment (E), as in the 14th embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the data on the number of wins is maintained without being cleared, and the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY ), the payout number data is stored as the acquisition number data in step S611.
Therefore, even after all the reels 31 have stopped, the push order instruction information can continue to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 until the medals are paid out.Furthermore, when the medals are paid out, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 can be continued. Since the pressing order instruction information is switched to the number of acquired coins, although the acquired number display LED 78 is used as a display for both the pressing order instruction information and the acquired number of coins, it is possible to prevent the display of the acquired number of coins from being obstructed.

<Fourteenth embodiment (F)>
FIG. 75 is a front view showing an outline of the configuration including the reel 31, stop switch 42, and operation instruction lamp 25 in the fourteenth embodiment (F).
As shown in FIG. 75, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), a stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below each reel 31. As shown in FIG. This stop instruction lamp 25 instructs the reel 31 to stop, and is constituted by an LED lamp.

A stop instruction lamp 25 that is provided below the left reel 31 and lights up when instructing to stop the left reel 31 is the left stop instruction lamp 25.
Similarly, a stop instruction lamp 25 that is provided below the middle reel 31 and lights up when instructing to stop the middle reel 31 is the middle stop instruction lamp 25.
Further, the stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below the right reel 31 and lights up when instructing the right reel 31 to stop.
Then, the sub-control board 80 controls lighting/extinguishing of each stop instruction lamp 25.

Here, the sub-control board 80 is composed of a first sub-control board and a second sub-control board, and the stop instruction lamp 25 is electrically connected to the second sub-control board.
The second sub-control board controls lighting/extinguishing of each stop instruction lamp 25 and displays an image on the image display device 23 based on the control command sent from the first sub-control board.

Specifically, when the conditions for activating the instruction function are met, that is, when a winning combination with an advantageous pressing order such as pressing order bell is won during AT, the main control board 50 activates the control during main processing (M_MAIN). In command set 1, a push order instruction number as a control command is stored in a control command buffer.
Then, by transmitting a control command (step S464) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) to be executed after this processing, the main control board 50 transfers the push order instruction number as a control command stored in the control command buffer to the first sub Send to control board.

Further, upon receiving the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, the first sub-control board stores (saves) the received control command in a predetermined storage area.
Furthermore, the first sub-control board executes sub-main processing every 16 ms, and analyzes the control command in the loop processing during this sub-main processing, and as a result, if it determines that it is the push order instruction number, , store lamp control commands and image commands according to the analysis results in a command buffer.

Further, the first sub-control board transmits the lamp control command and image command stored in the command buffer to the second sub-control board in the command transmission process during the next sub-main process.
Therefore, similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number as a control command to the first sub-control board, the second sub-control board sends a lamp control command and an image. It takes about 32 ms (=period of sub-main processing 16 ms x 2) until the command is received.

Then, the second sub-control board controls the lighting/extinguishing of the (left, center, right) stop instruction lamps 25 based on the received lamp control command, and performs drawing processing based on the received image command. The image is displayed on the image display device 23.
For example, when receiving a lamp control command and an image command indicating a left first stop, the second sub-control board turns on the left stop instruction lamp 25 and turns off the middle stop instruction lamp 25 and the right stop instruction lamp 25. At the same time, an image prompting the user to operate the left stop switch 42 is displayed on the image display device 23.

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), the second sub-control board executes an interrupt process every 1 ms, and controls the turning on/off of each stop indication lamp 25 during this interrupt process.
For this reason, it takes approximately 1 ms for the second sub-control board to turn on the stop indication lamp 25 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped after receiving the lamp control command sent from the first sub-control board.

Further, as described above, it takes about 32 ms from the time when the main control board 50 sends the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board receives the lamp control command.
Therefore, it takes about 33 ms (=32 ms+1 ms) from when the main control board 50 sends the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board turns on the stop instruction lamp 25.

Also, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (A), the second sub-control board performs drawing processing at 30 fps (frames per second), so one image is displayed as an image. It takes about 33.33 ms to display on the device 23.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board, the second sub-control board It takes about 65.33 ms (=32 ms+33.33 ms) until the push order instruction image is displayed on the display device 23.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), the stop instruction lamp 25 is lit first, and then the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.

FIGS. 76 and 77 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (F).
FIG. 76 shows the timing of display start and end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the display start and end timings of the push order instruction information are shown.

Although not shown, in the fourteenth embodiment (F) as well, similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), after preparing to start reel rotation, the push order instruction number setting is executed.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, in the 14th embodiment (F) as well, as in the 14th embodiment (B), whether the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum playing time has elapsed. Or, regardless of whether it is after the elapse of time, when the reels 31 start rotating, the display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.

Although not shown, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), when turning on the third stop switch 42 is detected, the acquisition number data is cleared. Then, by the interrupt processing executed after this processing, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "00".
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, when the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 ends.
Note that the timing of starting to display the number of acquired medals and the timing of transmitting the push order instruction number as a control command are the same as in the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (E).

Further, as described above, it takes about 33 ms from the time when the main control board 50 sends the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board turns on the stop instruction lamp 25. It takes about 65.33 ms after the main control board 50 sends the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23.

Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. The instruction lamp 25 lights up, and then a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.
On the other hand, for example, if the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum gaming time elapses, it will take about one second from the turn on (operation) of the start switch 41 until the reels 31 start rotating. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77, before the reels 31 start rotating, the stop instruction lamp 25 is first turned on, and then a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.

Also, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 76, first, push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, then the stop instruction lamp 25 lights up, and finally, a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.
In contrast, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 77, first the stop indicator lamp 25 lights up, then a push order indication image is displayed on the image display device 23, and finally the push order indication information is displayed on the number of winnings display LED 78.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (E), when it is determined that the minimum playing time has elapsed, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data. As a result, when the reels 31 start rotating, the display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time has elapsed, the timing to start displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum playing time has elapsed. , it is possible to prevent a player who has been waiting for winning a rare combination from being disappointed immediately after operating the start switch 41.

As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the stop instruction lamp 25 is lit first. After that, a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.
Both the stop instruction lamp 25 and the image display device 23 are controlled by the second sub-control board, but since it is necessary to execute drawing processing in order to display an image on the image display device 23, the stop instruction lamp 25 and the image display device 23 are controlled by the second sub-control board. 25 lights up faster.

<Fourteenth embodiment (G)>
The fourteenth embodiment (G) is different from the fourteenth embodiment (F) in that it includes a dedicated 7-segment display (7 segments) for displaying the push order instruction information, and that the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information ends is different from that of the fourteenth embodiment (F). The rest is the same as the fourteenth embodiment (F).
Note that a dedicated 7-segment display for displaying push order instruction information is referred to as a push order instruction LED.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), a storage area for press order instruction data is secured in the RWM 53. The push order instruction data is data for displaying push order instruction information on the push order instruction LED.

FIGS. 78 and 79 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (G).
FIG. 78 shows the timing of display start and end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the display start and end timings of the push order instruction information are shown.

In the fourteenth embodiment (G) as well, similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (F), after preparing to start reel rotation, the push order instruction number setting is performed.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in the fourteenth embodiment (G) as well, as in the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (F), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated), the minimum game Regardless of whether the time has elapsed or not, the display of the push order instruction information starts when the reels 31 start rotating.
In the fourteenth embodiment (G), a push order instruction number is set in the storage area of push order instruction data of the RWM 53. As a result, in the interrupt process executed after this process, press order instruction information is displayed on the press order instruction LED.

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (F), since the press order instruction information was displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, by clearing the acquisition number data by the time of paying out medals, the acquisition number display LED 78 It was possible to display the number of medals earned.
On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), the push order instruction data is maintained without being cleared even when medals are paid out, so as shown in FIGS. Pressing order instruction information (for example, "=1") continues to be displayed on the order instruction LED.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), when the payout of medals is completed, the push order instruction data is cleared. Then, by the interrupt processing executed after this processing, the display of the push order instruction LED becomes "00".
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the display of the push order instruction information on the push order instruction LED ends after the medals are paid out.

In this manner, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), the push order instruction information is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, but is displayed on the dedicated push order instruction LED, so that the push order instruction information is not displayed when medals are paid out. Even if the process is continued, the display of the number of acquired medals can be prevented.
Furthermore, the timing of starting to display the number of medals acquired, the timing of transmitting the push order instruction number as a control command, the timing of starting and ending the display of the operation instruction lamp 25, and the start of displaying the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. The timing of display termination is the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (F).

<Summary of the 14th embodiment>
Push order instruction information is transmitted from the time when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) until the time when the reel 31 can be stopped (the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted). If displayed, the correct pressing order can be notified to the player before the player turns on (operates) the stop switch 42.
Therefore, the timing to start displaying the push order instruction information is as follows:
1) When the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) 2) After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating 3) When the reel 31 starts rotating 4) After the reel 31 starts rotating , and before the reel 31 can be stopped. 5) When the reel 31 can be stopped.

In addition, when displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, if the display of the push order instruction information is finished from the time when the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) until the time when the medals are paid out, the medals can be displayed. It is possible to prevent the display of the number of acquired coins from being obstructed.
Therefore, the timing at which the display of the press order instruction information ends is as follows:
1) When the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) 2) When the third stop switch 42 is turned off after being turned on (when the player releases his hand from the third stop switch 42)
3) When all reels 31 are stopped 4) When medals are paid out.
In addition, when displaying the push order instruction information on a dedicated push order display LED, the display of the push order instruction information may be continued when medals are paid out, and the display of the push order instruction information may be ended after the medals are paid out. .

Furthermore, before the sub control board 80 (second sub control board) displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, the main control board 50 generates a control command, and the main control board 50 sends the sub control board 80 to the sub control board 80. It takes a certain amount of time to transmit the control command to the sub-control board 80, receive and analyze the control command on the sub-control board 80, and perform drawing processing and display on the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board).
Therefore, even if the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 and transmits the control command to the sub control board 80 at the same time, the push order instruction image is not displayed on the image display device 23. will be delayed.

Also, depending on whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the rotation of the reels 31 and the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 may be started. The order of may be changed.
Therefore, the timing to start displaying the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is as follows:
1) After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating; 2) After the reel 31 starts rotating and before the reel 31 can be stopped.

Furthermore, the period from when the main control board 50 sends the control command to the sub-control board 80 to when the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) finishes displaying the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is also , it takes a certain amount of time.
Therefore, the timing at which the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 ends is after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated).
Then, the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the display end timing of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the display start timing of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, and the push order The display end timing of the instruction image on the image display device 23 is not limited to the combinations shown in the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (G), and can be set in any appropriate combination.

In addition, in a game where the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, even if a press order error occurs during the game, the press order instruction information is displayed until a predetermined time after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated). may continue to be displayed as is, or the display of the press order instruction information may be terminated when a press order error occurs.
Similarly, in a game in which a press order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23, even if a press order error occurs midway through, the press order instruction will continue until a predetermined time after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated). The image may continue to be displayed as is, or the display of the push order instruction image may be terminated when a press order error occurs.

In addition, when three medals are inserted and a replay is won, three medals are automatically bet and the game can be started, so that the 1 bet display LED 79a, the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are lit up.
At this time, when the third stop switch 42 is operated and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, first, the 1 bet display LED 79a is turned on, and the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are turned off.

Thereafter, the 2-bet display LED 79b and the 3-bet display LED 79c are lit in sequence, and finally the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are lit.
When a replay prize is won when 3 coins are inserted, the 1 bet display LED 79a lights up, and when the 2 bet display LED 79b, 3 bet display LED 79c, game start display LED 79d, and replay display LED 79f are turned off, the pressing order The display on the acquisition number display LED 78 of instruction information may be terminated.

In addition, when winning a small prize, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 ends when the third stop switch 42 is turned on, when the third stop switch is turned off, when all reels 31 are stopped, or when medals are paid out. However, when winning a replay prize, when the 1-bet display LED 79a lights up and the 2-bet display LED 79b, 3-bet display LED 79c, game start display LED 79d, and replay display LED 79f are turned off, the pressing order of the winning number display LED 78 The display of the instruction information may be ended.
That is, the display end timing of the push order instruction information may be made different between when a small winning combination is won and when a replay prize is won.
Of course, the display end timing of the push order instruction information may be the same when winning a small winning combination and when winning a replay prize.

Although the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and for example, the following modifications are possible.
(1) In the fourteenth embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used, and one parallel communication line transmits the first control command to the sub-control board 80, and the other parallel communication line transmits the first control command to the sub-control board 80. By sending two control commands to the sub-control board 80, a control command consisting of two bytes of data can be sent to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, only one set of 8-bit parallel communication lines may be used to transmit a control command consisting of 2-byte data to the sub-control board 80.
In this case, the first control command and the second control command may be sequentially transmitted by transmitting the control command during one interrupt process. Thereby, a control command consisting of 2-byte data can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

Alternatively, the first control command may be transmitted when the control command is transmitted during one interrupt process, and the second control command may be transmitted when the control command is transmitted during the next interrupt process. Thereby, a control command consisting of 2 bytes of data may be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in two interrupt processes.
Furthermore, the control commands may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 not only by parallel communication but also by serial communication.
Furthermore, control commands may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 by electrical connection, or control commands may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 by connection using optical communication means. Good too.

(2) In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the main control board 50 transmits a push order instruction number as a control command to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board), and The board) executed a drawing process based on the received push order instruction number and displayed the push order instruction image on the image display device 23.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main control board 50 transmits the condition device number as a control command to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board), and the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) The drawing process may be executed based on the received condition device number, and the press order instruction number may be displayed on the image display device 23.

For example, the main control board 50 transmits the effect group number as a control command to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board), and the sub control board 80 (second sub control board) receives the received effect group number. The pressing order instruction number may be displayed on the image display device 23 by executing the drawing process based on the above.
(3) The first to fourteenth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to fourteenth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
The fifteenth embodiment relates to the timing of the addition process for medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 47.
Below, we will explain fifteenth embodiments (A) to (C) which differ in the timing of the medal addition process.

<Fifteenth embodiment (A)>
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (A) is similar to the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.
That is, when a medal is inserted through the medal slot 47, the medal flows down the medal path in the medal selector. A passage sensor 46, an input sensor 44a, and an input sensor 44b are provided on the medal passage in the medal selector from the upstream side. Further, a blocker 45 is provided between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a.

A medal inserted through the medal insertion port 47 first passes through the passage sensor 46 and then reaches the position of the blocker 45. When the blocker 45 is in the on state, a medal flowing down the medal passage passes through the blocker 45 and then reaches the positions of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
The input sensors 44a and 44b are installed at a predetermined distance from each other.
Before the medal reaches the positions of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are off.
Furthermore, when a medal flows down the medal passage, first, the insertion sensor 44a changes from off to on, and the insertion sensor 44b remains off.

When the medal further flows down the medal path, the input sensor 44a remains on, and the input sensor 44b is turned on from off.
After that, as more medals flow down the medal path, the input sensor 44a changes from on to off, and the input sensor 44b remains on.
After that, as more medals flow down the medal path, the input sensor 44a remains off, and the input sensor 44b changes from on to off.
The medals that have passed through the input sensors 44a and 44b reach the hopper 35.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (A).
At the timing (a) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
At the timing (b) in FIG. 80, the input sensor 44a is on and the input sensor 44b is off.
The state (b) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Furthermore, if the state of (b) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred, and sends an error command to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At the timing (c) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both on.
The state (c) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (b) or (c) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
80(c) continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred, as in the case of FIG. 80(b), and transmits an error command to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the error command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At the timing (d) in FIG. 80, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state (d) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Furthermore, if the state of (d) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined period of time or more, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passage error, and the sub-control Send an error command to the board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At the timing (e) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
The state (e) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (e) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Furthermore, when the state shown in (e) in FIG. 80 is reached, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted, and executes a process of adding "1" to the medal (bet process or credit process).
Here, when the state of (e) in FIG. 80 is reached and the number of bets is less than the specified number, the main control board 50 executes a process of adding "1" to the number of bets. For example, if the specified number for the game is "3" and the number of bets at that time is "1", the number of bets is increased from "1" to "2" by adding "1" to the number of bets. Update to.

In addition, when the state of (e) in Figure 80 is reached, if the number of bets has already reached the specified number and the number of credits has not reached the maximum number of "50", the main control The board 50 executes a process of adding "1" to the number of credits. For example, if the number of credits at that time is "20", the number of credits is updated to "21".
Furthermore, when the state shown in FIG. 80 (e) is reached, the main control board 50 transmits an input command to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the input command, it outputs an input sound from the speaker 22.
If a medal passage error occurs before the state (e) in FIG. 80 is reached, the main control board 50 does not perform the process of adding "1" to the medals and does not send the input command.

When a plurality of medals are inserted through the medal insertion slot 47, steps (a) to (e) in FIG. 80 are repeated.
Then, in the state of (e) in Figure 80, by executing the process of adding "1" to the number of bets, when the number of bets reaches a specified number, the main control board 50 places the start switch 41 in a state in which it can accept operation (game can be started) and lights up the game start indication LED 79d.

<Fifteenth embodiment (B)>
The fifteenth embodiment (B) is different from the fifteenth embodiment (A) in the execution timing of the process of adding "1" to medals.
Note that the configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (B) is also similar to the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (B).
(a) to (c) in FIG. 81 are the same as (a) to (c) in FIG. 80, so the explanation will be omitted, and (d) and (e) in FIG. Since this is different from (d) and (e) in FIG. 80, it will be explained below.

At the timing (d) in FIG. 81, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state (d) in FIG. 81 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
In the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the state shown in FIG. 81 (d) is reached, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted, and performs a process of adding "1" to the medal (bet process or credit process). ). At this time, if the number of bets is less than the specified number, the number of bets will be added by 1, and if the number of bets has already reached the specified number, the number of credits will be increased to the maximum number of 50. When the number of credits has not been reached, the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed, as in the fifteenth embodiment (A).

Furthermore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the state of (d) in Fig. 81 is reached, the main control board 50 transmits a closing command to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the closing command, the sub-control board 80 outputs a closing sound from the speaker 22.
However, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), if the state of (d) in FIG. 81 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred, and transmits an error command to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the error command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), after the process of adding "1" to the medal is executed and the insertion sound is output, there is a case where it is determined that a medal passing error has occurred and an error sound is output.
In this way, when the state of (d) in FIG. 81 is reached, the process of adding "1" to the medal is executed and the input sound is output, and after that, the state of (d) in FIG. 81 is maintained for a predetermined time or longer. If the error sound is output continuously, the error sound will be output after the insertion sound is output, so even if an error occurs, the player can be notified by the insertion sound that medals have been inserted. .
Note that when a medal passing error occurs in the state of (b) or (c) in FIG. 81, the main control board 50 does not perform the process of adding "1" to the medal, and does not send the input command.

At the timing (e) in FIG. 81, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
When a plurality of medals are inserted through the medal insertion slot 47, steps (a) to (e) in FIG. 81 are repeated.
Then, when the number of bets reaches the specified number by executing the process of adding "1" to the number of bets, the main control board 50 places itself in a state in which it can accept operation of the start switch 41, in the state shown in (e) of Figure 81, and lights up the game start indication LED 79d.
For this reason, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), the timing of executing the process of adding "1" to the number of medals and outputting the insertion sound is different from the timing of making the start switch 41 available for operation and lighting up the game start indication LED 79d.

Here, as explained in the fifteenth embodiment (A), the process of adding "1" to the medal is performed at the timing (e) in FIG. 80 (when both the input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off). It is common to carry out
However, if the medal flows down the medal path to the position shown in (d) in FIG. 81, the medal enters the hopper 35 because it has already passed through the blocker 45.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), at the timing of (d) in FIG. 81 (when the input sensor 44b remains on and the input sensor 44a changes from on to off), the medal is "1". Executes addition processing. Thereby, it is possible to prevent medals from entering the hopper 35 even though the medal adding process has not been executed, so-called swallowing of medals.

In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), as described above, if the state of (d) in FIG. 81 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred and sends an error command to the sub-control board 80, which then outputs an error sound from the speaker 22. In this case, the medal addition process has already been executed and the medal insertion sound has already been output when the error sound is output, so the error can be cleared and the medals stuck in the medal selector can be put into the hopper 35. This makes it possible to prevent any disadvantage from being inflicted on the player.

Furthermore, when medals are continuously inserted from the medal slot 47 and the number of credits reaches the maximum number of "50", the 51st medal comes off the medal path at the position of the blocker 45. The medals are returned from the medal payout port 16.
At this time, when the 50th medal is in the state (d) in FIG. 81 (the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on), the credit number is added by 1, and the blocker is Turn off 45. Thereby, the 51st medal can be reliably returned from the medal payout port 16 without being swallowed.

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), in the state of (d) in FIG. 81, by executing the process of adding "1" to the number of bets, when the number of bets reaches a specified number, the start switch 41 is operated. will be ready to accept. At this time, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 transmits a start command to the sub control board 80. Then, upon receiving the start command, the sub control board 80 outputs a sound effect from the speaker 22.

Here, as in the fifteenth embodiment (A), at the timing (e) in FIG. 80, when the start switch 41 is brought into a state in which operation can be accepted and the input command is sent to the sub-control board 80, There is a possibility that the input sound and the sound effect based on the operation of the start switch 41 overlap.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), the input command is sent to the sub-control board 80 at the timing (d) in FIG. 81, and the start switch 41 is operated at the timing (e) in FIG. Make it available for reception. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the input sound and the sound effect based on the operation of the start switch 41 from overlapping.

<Fifteenth embodiment (C)>
The fifteenth embodiment (C) is the same as the fifteenth embodiment (B) in the execution timing of the process of adding "1" to the medal, but the output timing of the input sound is different from the fifteenth embodiment (B). They are different.
Note that the configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (C) is also similar to the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (C).
As (a) to (c) in Figure 82 are similar to (a) to (c) in Figures 80 and 81, their explanation will be omitted. As (d) and (e) in Figure 82 are different from (d) and (e) in Figures 80 and 81, they will be explained below.

At the timing (d) in FIG. 82, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state (d) in FIG. 82 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
In the fifteenth embodiment (C), when the state shown in (d) in FIG. 82 is reached, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted, and processes the addition of "1" to the medal (bet processing or credit processing). ). At this time, if the number of bets is less than the specified number, the number of bets will be added by 1, and if the number of bets has already reached the specified number, the number of credits will be increased to the maximum number of 50. When the number of credits has not been reached, the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed, as in the fifteenth embodiment (A) and (B).

However, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), unlike the fifteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 50 does not send a power-on command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing (d) in Figure 82.
In the fifteenth embodiment (C), at the timing of (e) in Fig. 82, the main control board 50 transmits a closing command to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the closing command, the sub-control board 80 outputs a closing sound from the speaker 22.

Here, it is assumed that the state of (d) in FIG. 82 continues for a predetermined time or more, and the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passage error and sends an error command to the sub control board 80. Assume that the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.
In this case, the process of adding "1" to the medal is executed, but the error sound is output without outputting the input sound. Thereby, priority can be given to error notification.

Then, when the error is cleared, the main control board 50 transmits an input command to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 outputs an input sound from the speaker 22 based on the received input command. This allows the player to be informed that medals have been inserted, thereby making the player feel at ease.
Furthermore, in the state of (e) in FIG. 82, when the number of bets reaches the specified number by executing the process of adding "1" to the number of bets, the operation of the start switch 41 is made ready to be accepted, The lighting of the game start display LED 79d is the same as in the fifteenth embodiment (A) and (B).

<Sixteenth embodiment>
The sixteenth embodiment relates to a chute passage 48 that guides medals that have passed through the insertion sensors 44 a and 44 b of the medal selector to the hopper 35 , and a chute sensor 49 provided midway along the chute passage 48 .
Figure 83 is a diagram showing the medal selector, chute passage 48, and chute sensor 49, and is a schematic diagram showing how a medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 passes through the insertion sensor 44a, the insertion sensor 44b, and the chute sensor 49 to reach the hopper 35.

The chute passage 48 is a passage that guides the medals M that have passed through the medal selector's insertion sensors 44a and 44b to the hopper 35, and is connected to the downstream side of the medal passage of the medal selector. Then, the medals M inserted from the medal insertion port 47 pass through the medal passage of the medal selector and the chute passage 35 to reach the hopper 35.

The chute sensor 49 is a sensor provided to determine the presence or absence of a medal jam or a trifle, and is configured using an optical sensor having a light receiving and emitting section, and is placed at a predetermined position in the middle of the chute path 48. and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
Since the chute passage 48 is a passage that guides the medals M that have passed through the input sensors 44a and 44b to the hopper 35, the chute sensor 49 is arranged downstream from the input sensors 44a and 44b.

In the 16th embodiment, the input monitoring counter adds "1" ( This is a counter that is subtracted by 1 (-1) when the shoot sensor 49 detects passage of the medal M. Therefore, during normal operation, the input monitoring counter repeats "1" and "0".
Note that the timing at which the input monitoring counter is incremented by "1" is the timing at which the input sensor 44b is turned from on to off (timing shown in FIG. 4 and FIGS. 80 to 82 (e)).
Furthermore, the timing of adding "1" to the input monitoring counter is not limited to the timing when the input sensor 44b changes from on to off, but also the timing when the input sensor 44a changes from off to on (as shown in FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82). (b) timing), the timing at which the input sensor 44a changes from on to off (the timing at (c) in FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82), or the timing at which the input sensor 44b changes from off to on. (The timing shown in FIG. 4 and FIGS. 80 to 82 (d)) may be used. This is because if the medal M reaches these timings, it is considered that the medal M will enter the hopper 35.
Furthermore, when the medal M passes through the chute sensor 49, the chute sensor 49 changes from off to on to off, but the timing at which the input monitoring counter is decremented by "1" is the timing at which the chute sensor 49 changes from on to off. be.

Further, when the input sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal M (the input monitoring counter = "+1") and the chute sensor 49 does not detect the passage of the medal M, the input sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal M. When the passing of the medal is further detected, the input monitoring counter becomes "+2", and the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error.
Furthermore, when the input sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M and only the chute sensor 49 detects the passage of the medal M, the input monitoring counter becomes "-1", and the main control board 50 It is determined to be a passing error.

Note that the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error not only when the input monitoring counter becomes "+2" or "-1". For example, the main control board 50 may determine that a medal passing error occurs when the input monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "+2" or more or a predetermined value of "-1" or less.
Further, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has occurred when the shoot sensor 49 continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shoot sensor 49 detected the medal M. When the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal retention error, it stops the progress of the game until the error is cleared.

As shown in FIG. 83, the medals M inserted from the medal input port 47 pass through the medal passage and the chute passage 48 and reach the hopper 35. At this time, it passes through the input sensor 44a, input sensor 44b, and chute sensor 49.
Here, it is assumed that the medal M is jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48. In FIG. 83, the position M1 indicates the position of the medal M placed in the medal slot 47, the position M2 indicates the position of the medal M stuck at the tip of the chute passage 48, and the position M3 indicates the position of the medal M placed in the medal slot 47. The position of the second medal M from the tip of the path 48 is shown, and the position M4 shows the position of the third medal M from the tip of the chute path 48.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the sixteenth embodiment, when a medal M is jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48, the chute is moved to a position where the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute passage 48 can be detected. A sensor 49 is arranged.
Therefore, when a medal M is jammed at the tip of the chute path 48, the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute path 48 is detected by the chute sensor 49, and if this condition continues for a predetermined time or more, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal retention error and stops the progress of the game until the error is cleared.

For example, assume that three medals M are inserted from the medal slot 47 when the specified number is "3" and the number of bets and the number of credits are both "0". In this case, when the input sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the third medal M, the main control board 50 sets the start switch 41 to a state in which operation can be accepted (game can be started), and the game start display LED 79d lights up. At this time, if the first medal M (M2) gets stuck at the tip of the chute passage 48, the third medal M (M4) is detected by the chute sensor 49. If this state continues for a predetermined period of time or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has occurred and stops the progress of the game. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game with the medals M stuck in the chute passage 48.

Note that the position of the chute sensor 49 is not limited to a position where it can detect the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute passage 48 when the medal M is jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48. If the prescribed number is "N", the chute sensor 49 should be placed at a position where it can detect the Nth medal M from the tip of the chute passage 48 when the medal M is jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game with the medals M stuck in the chute passage 48.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
The seventeenth embodiment relates to a payout medal passage 134 that guides medals ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout port 16.
84 is a front view of the passage forming member 130, FIG. 85 is a rear view of the passage forming member 130, FIG. 86 is a left side view of the passage forming member 130, and FIG. 87 is a side view of the passage forming member 130. It is a sectional view taken along the line AA.

The slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an open front, and a front door 12 that closes the opening of the cabinet 13.
Further, a medal payout device 15 is arranged inside the cabinet 13 in the lower part.
Furthermore, a medal slot 47, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, etc. are arranged at the center of the front surface of the front door 12, and a medal selector is located on the back side of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47. is located.
Further, a medal payout port 16 is provided at the bottom of the front door 12, a medal receiving tray is provided at the bottom front of the front door 12 to receive the medals paid out from the medal payout port 16, and A passage forming member 130 is attached to the lower part.

In addition, the passage forming member 130 is formed in a curved shape as shown in Figures 84 and 85, and is a member that forms a return medal passage 132 and a payout medal passage 134 by being attached to a predetermined position on the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the return medal passage 132 is a passage that guides medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the blocker 45 of the medal selector to the medal payout opening 16.
Furthermore, the payout medal passage 134 is a passage that guides the medals ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout opening 16 .
In addition, the return medal passage 132 and the payout medal passage 134 merge midway to form a single passage.

84 and 85, an upper medal receiving opening 131 is provided on the upper part of the passage forming member 130. This upper medal receiving opening 131 is an opening for receiving medals that have been prohibited from being inserted by the blocker 45, and is an opening that serves as the upstream end of the return medal passage 132, and is formed so as to be located below the blocker 45 of the medal selector when the front door 12 is closed.
Then, the medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the blocker 45 pass through the upper medal receiving port 131, are guided by the returned medal passage 132, pass through the medal payout port 16, and are stored in the medal receiving tray.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, a lower medal receiving opening 133 is provided below the center of the passage forming member 130 and at a position to the left when viewed from the front (to the right when viewed from the back). ing. The lower medal receiving opening 133 is an opening for receiving medals ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, and is an opening at the upstream end of the dispensing medal passage 134, and is an opening at the front door. 12 is formed so as to be located in front of the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15 in a closed state.
The medals ejected from the ejection part 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 pass through the lower medal receiving port 133, are guided by the dispensing medal passage 134, pass through the medal dispensing port 16, and are stored in the medal receiving tray. .

86 and 87 , the lower medal receiving opening 133 is formed on the back side of the passage forming member 130, and a plate material that forms the back side of the front door 12 is disposed on the front side of the passage forming member 130. In this way, there is a distance from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back side of the front door 12 that corresponds to the depth of the passage forming member 130.
Here, the medal M ejected from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 passes through the lower medal receiving opening 133, passes through the payout medal passage 134, and bounces off at a position facing the lower medal receiving opening 133 on the back surface of the front door 12. If the distance from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is short at this time, there is a possibility that the medal M that bounces off the back surface of the front door 12 will collide with the medal M that is ejected from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 next after this medal M.

Therefore, in the 17th embodiment, as shown in FIG. ≧2D”.
That is, the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is set to be more than twice the diameter "D" of the medal M.
This makes it difficult for the medal M that bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 to collide with the medal M that is ejected next from the ejection part 103 of the medal payout device 15.

That is, the medals M ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 head toward the back surface of the front door 12 (to the right in FIG. 87) while falling downward due to gravity. Therefore, the medals M ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 hit the back surface of the front door 12 at a position lower than the ejected position. Furthermore, the medals M that have bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 fall downward due to gravity and head toward the lower medal receiving opening 133 (leftward in FIG. 87).
If the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is set to be more than twice the diameter "D" of the medal M, the medals will not be ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15. It is possible to secure a sufficient height difference between the medal M that hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces off and heads toward the lower medal receiving opening 133, so that the medals M do not collide. You can make it less difficult.

In addition, if medals M are ejected one after another at short intervals from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15, even if the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is set to at least twice the diameter "D" of the medal M, there is a possibility that the medal M ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15 will collide with the medal M that bounces off the back surface of the front door 12.

Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, after the medal M ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 hits the back surface of the front door 12 and rebounds, the next medal M is ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15. It is set.
That is, the interval at which medals M are ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, the ejection speed of the medals M from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, and the distance from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12. is set so that the above relationship is satisfied.

In this way, if the medal M ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the rear surface of the front door 12 at a position lower than the ejected position, bounces off, and falls to an even lower position before the next medal M is ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15, the distance and height difference between the two medals can be sufficiently secured, making it less likely that the two medals M will collide with each other.
Here, if a medal M that bounces off the back surface of the front door 12 collides with a medal M that is subsequently ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15, there is a possibility that the medal M will become clogged near the lower medal receiving port 133 or in the medal payout passage 134.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, by setting the medals M so that they are unlikely to collide, the medals M are prevented from becoming clogged in the vicinity of the lower medal receiving opening 133 or in the payout medal passage 134. .
In addition, in this embodiment, the settings are made so that the medal M that bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 and the medal M that is ejected next from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 are unlikely to collide. However, when a large number of medals M are continuously ejected from the ejection section 103, this does not mean that all the medals M before and after will not collide, but at least the first medal M and the second medal M will not collide. It is sufficient as long as there is no collision. When winning a small winning combination, two medals are most often paid out, so if the settings are made so that the first medal M and the second medal M are less likely to collide, the area near the lower medal receiving opening 133 This is because the medals M can be prevented from becoming clogged in the payout medal passage 134.

Further, as described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with a plurality of holding parts 102 along the outer periphery of the hopper disk 101, which can hold the medals M stored in the hopper. There is.
Then, when the following conditions (a) and (b) are met, or when the conditions (a) and (c) are met, two or more medals M are consecutively released from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15. It will be ejected.
(a) Medals M are held in two adjacent holding parts 102 of the hopper disk 101, respectively.
(b) When the number of medals remaining until the upper limit of the number of credits is reached is "N" and the number of medals M paid out by winning is "M", "(MN)≧2" is satisfied.
(c) The payment switch 43 was operated when the number of credits was "2" or more.

For example, in FIG. 17(b) of the sixth embodiment, medals M are held in the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "B" and the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "C", respectively. When there is, the above condition (a) is satisfied even if the medal M is not held in the holding section 102 located at the position of the letter "D".
For example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the medal M is not held in the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "B", but the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "C" 102 and the holding portion 102 located at the position of the letter "D", when the medal M is held respectively, the above condition (a) is satisfied.

Furthermore, in Figure 17 (b) of the sixth embodiment, when a medal M is held in each of the holding portions 102 at the position of the letter "B," the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "C," and the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "D," the above condition (a) is met.
Of course, when medals M are held in all of the holding portions 102 of the hopper disk 101, the above condition (a) is met.

Also, for example, when the upper limit of the number of credits is "50" and the number of credits is "47", the number of coins remaining until the upper limit of the number of credits is reached is "3". In this case, if a small combination with a payout amount of "5" or more is won, the above condition (b) will be satisfied.
Furthermore, for example, when the number of credits has already reached the upper limit of "50", the number of coins remaining until the upper limit of the number of credits is reached is "0". In this case, if a small winning combination with a payout of "2" or more is won, the above condition (b) will be met.

From the above, for example, in FIG. 17(b) of the sixth embodiment, at least the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "B" and the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "C" have medals, respectively. If the condition (b) or (c) above is satisfied in a situation where M is held, two or more medals M will be continuously ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15.
Further, for example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the medal M is not held in the holding portion 102 located at the position of the letter "B", but at least the medal M is held at the position of the letter "C". Even when the conditions (b) or (c) above are satisfied in a situation where medals M are held in the holding part 102 and the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "D", medals are paid out. Two or more medals M are successively ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the device 15.

Further, the medals M ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 may bounce off the back surface of the front door 12 and return to the vicinity of the lower medal receiving opening 133. If the returned medals M pass through the lower medal receiving opening 133, they fall inside the cabinet 13 and cannot be paid out to the player.
Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the height of the peripheral edge of the lower medal receiving port 133 is "L2" and the thickness of the medal M is "T", "L2≧T" ”.

That is, the height "L2" of the peripheral edge of the lower medal receiving opening 133 is set to be equal to or greater than the thickness "T" of the medal M.
As a result, even if the medals M ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 bounce off the back surface of the front door 12 and return to the vicinity of the lower medal receiving port 133, the returned medals M will not be able to reach the lower medal receiving port. 133 and not pass through the lower medal receiving opening 133.

Further, since the hopper disk 101 of the medal payout device 15 is arranged to be inclined with respect to the horizontal plane, the medals M are ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 in an inclined state with respect to the horizontal plane. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the lower medal receiving port 133 and the payout medal passage 134 are also inclined in accordance with the inclination of the medals M to be ejected.

Here, the height direction is a direction perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the medal M that has been ejected in an inclined state. In the 17th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the height of the payout medal passage 134 is "L2" and the diameter of the medal M is "D", "L2<D" is satisfied. It is set. That is, the height "L2" of the payout medal passage 134 is set to be less than the diameter "D" of the medal M.

Thereby, even if the medal M that bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 rotates within the payout medal path 134, the front and back surfaces of the medal M can be prevented from becoming parallel to the vertical plane within the payout medal path 134. Therefore, the medals M can be prevented from blocking the payout medal passage 134.
Note that all the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<18th embodiment>
The eighteenth embodiment relates to external signal transmission processing.
In the 18th embodiment, signals indicating on/off can be output as external signals 4 and 5.
In the 18th embodiment, the external signal 4 is a setting key switch on signal (setting key switch signal), a signal indicating that an error has been detected, a signal indicating that an error is being displayed, or a signal indicating that the power switch 11 is on. This is a signal indicating that the power has been turned on (the power has been turned on).
Further, the external signal 5 is a signal (door switch ON signal) indicating that the front door 12 of the slot machine 10 is opened.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the main storage areas of the RWM 53 described in the 18th embodiment.
The input port 0 level data at address "F00A(H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating whether input port 0 is on/off. Each bit of input port 0 is configured as follows.
D0: Setting switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D1: Reset switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D2: Setting key switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D3: Door switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D4: Unused D5: Unused D6: Power-off detection signal D7: Full detection signal

Here, the "power-off detection signal" of the D6 bit is input when a power-off occurs (for example, when "Yes" is determined in step S482 in FIG. 54 (11th embodiment)). It's a signal.
Although not shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 10 includes a sub-tank for storing medals overflowing from the hopper 35. Furthermore, it is equipped with a full sensor that turns on when a medal comes into contact with the sub-tank when it becomes full. Then, when the full sensor is turned on, a full detection signal is input to the D7 bit of input port 0.
Although not shown in FIG. 88, in addition to the storage area for input port 0 level data, each bit of input port 0 is changed from off (during the previous interrupt processing) to on (during the current interrupt processing). The input port rise data storage area is used to store data indicating that the input port is rising, and the data indicating that each bit of input port 0 has changed from on (during the previous interrupt processing) to off (during the current interrupt processing). It is also possible to provide a storage area for input port falling data for storage.

Furthermore, the input port 51 shown in FIG. 1 is not limited to input port 0, and for example,
(1) Input port 1 into which operation switch signals such as the bet switch 40 (40a and 40b), start switch 41, stop switch 42, and settlement switch 43 are input;
(2) Input port 2 into which signals from the passage sensor 46, input sensor 44, payout sensor 37, reel sensor 33, etc. are input
Equipped with etc.
A storage area for input port level data corresponding to each input port is provided. Furthermore, as described above, it is also possible to provide a storage area for input port rising data and input port falling data for each input port.
Furthermore, if only a storage area for input port level data is provided (in a case where a storage area for input port rising data and input port falling data is not provided), the storage area for input port level data in this interrupt processing is In addition, a storage area for input port level data from the previous interrupt processing may be provided.

The external signal 4 output time at power recovery in address "F013(H)" is a storage area for a timer value that counts the time for outputting the external signal 4 at power recovery. In this embodiment, when the power switch 11 in FIG. 1 is turned on and the main control board 50 detects recovery from power loss, "136(D)" is set as an initial value in address "F013(H)" and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Then, until this value becomes "0", it is determined that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is on can be output).
In the eighteenth embodiment, as in the other embodiments, the interrupt period is 2.235 ms. Therefore, 136 interrupts correspond to 303.96 ms. As a result, when the power is restored from a power outage, the external signal 4 is turned on for about 300 ms (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4).

The external signal 4 management time at address "F014(H)" is a storage area for timer values for managing the output time of the external signal 4. In this embodiment, the initial value "24 (D)" is set when starting the output of the external signal 4 (excluding when returning from the power cut mentioned above), and is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt. . Then, it is determined that the external signal 4 is to be turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) until this value becomes "0".
Further, the "24" interrupt corresponds to "53.64ms". As a result, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least "50" ms or more (a signal indicating "on" can be output as the external signal 4).

The external signal 5 management time at address “F015(H)” is a storage area for a timer value for managing the output time of the external signal 5. In this embodiment, an initial value "24 (D)" is set when outputting the external signal 5 is started, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Then, it is determined that the external signal 5 is to be turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5) until this value becomes "0".
Similarly to the above, the "24" interrupt corresponds to "53.64ms". As a result, the external signal 5 is turned on for at least "50" ms or more (a signal indicating "on" can be output as the external signal 5).

Further, in this embodiment, the external signal 4 output time, external signal 4 management time, and external signal 5 management time at the time of power-off recovery are all 1-byte timers because they measure "255 (D)" or less. These timer values are then subtracted by timer measurement in step S455 during the interrupt processing in FIG.
Here, in the 18th embodiment, the above three timers are arranged at addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)". Therefore, in the timer measurement, in the first step, "F013 (H)" is set as the measurement start timer address. Also, "3" is set as the number of 1-byte timers. As a result, all timers including addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)" are subtracted by "1" by the timer measurement process.
Also, when the subtraction process is executed when the timer value is "0", in other words, when "0" is subtracted from "00(H)", the result is "00(H)". .

The error number at address "F051(H)" is a storage area for storing the number corresponding to the detected error when an error is detected. As shown in FIG. 88, when no error is detected, the value of address "F051(H)" is "0(D)". For example, when an "E5" error is detected, a value "105 (D)" corresponding to the detected error is stored in the address "F051 (H)".
In FIG. 88, "E0" to "E7" are illustrated as error numbers.
Here, in the eleventh embodiment described above, "E1", "E5", "E6", and "E7" errors are illustrated as unrecoverable errors. On the other hand, the errors “E0” to “E7” in the eighteenth embodiment (FIG. 88) all correspond to recoverable errors.

When these recoverable errors occur, the progress of the game is, in principle, stopped. Further, even when at least one reel 31 is rotating, error detection is executed for at least some errors (in the example of the 18th embodiment, "E7", "E6", and "E5" errors). When an error is detected during the rotation of at least one reel 31, the game continues to progress until all reels 31 stop, and when all reels 31 stop, an error state ( (error display), and the progress of the game is stopped. Then, when the error is removed by the hall clerk, the progress of the game is resumed. Of course, if any of the errors "E7", "E6", and "E5" occur while the reels 31 are rotating, the progress of the game will be stopped (stop control is not performed by operating the stop switch 42). ) is also possible.

In FIG. 88, the "E0" error is an error that occurs when the insertion sensor 44 determines that medals have accumulated.
The "E1" error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the medals have not passed through the input sensors 44a and 44b in the correct order.
The "E2" error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the sub tank is full.
The "E3" error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty.
The "E4" error is an error that occurs when the payout sensor 37 determines that medals are stuck (stuck) in a situation where a medal payout signal is being output.
The "E5" error is an error that occurs when the payout sensor 37 is turned on in a situation where no medal payout signal is output.
The "E6" error is an error that occurs when the input sensor 44b detects a medal in a situation where the blocker 45 does not form a medal flow path.
The "E7" error is an error that occurs when it is determined that medals have accumulated in the selector passage.

When any of the above errors are detected, a number corresponding to the detected error is stored in address "F051(H)". When an error number is stored in address "F051(H)", it becomes possible to display an error corresponding to the stored error number. For example, segment data corresponding to the number stored in address "F051(H)" is output to the acquisition number display LED 78 to display the error number. Specifically, when the error number "101(D)" is stored in address "F051(H)", in the LED display control in the interrupt process (for example, FIG. 55 in the eleventh embodiment), at the lighting timing of digit 3, lighting data for digit 3 and segment data for lighting "E" are output. Also, at the lighting timing of digit 4, lighting data for digit 4 and segment data for lighting "1" are output.

Also, when any error number is stored in the address "F051 (H)" (when it is not "0"), external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as external signal 4). ).
After the hall clerk eliminates the error that has occurred, he turns on the reset switch. When it is detected that the reset switch has been turned on, it is determined whether the error that occurred has been removed. When it is determined that the error that has occurred has not been removed, the current status (error display) is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined that the error that occurred has been removed (no error has occurred), the error number stored at address "F051 (H)" is cleared. When the error number of the address "F051(H)" is cleared, the error display (display of the error number using digits 3 and 4) ends.
Although the above is an example of displaying the error number on the earned number display LED 78 based on the other embodiments described above, the error number is not limited to this, and may be displayed on the credit number display LED 76, or the error number may be displayed on the credit number display LED 76. A dedicated LED may be provided and the information may be displayed on the LED.

The error detection flag at address "F294 (H)" is a storage area for remembering that an error has been detected, in case it is not possible to immediately transition to the error state when an error is detected. It is. In the example of FIG. 88, bits D0 to D2 in the storage area of address "F294(H)" are used as detection flags for "E7", "E6", and "E5" errors, respectively. The "E7", "E6", and "E5" errors are all errors that may be detected even when at least one reel 31 is rotating.

Here, even if the reels 31 are rotating, for example, it is determined by interrupt processing whether an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error has occurred. When the occurrence of these errors is detected while the reels 31 are rotating, the bit corresponding to the error in the error detection flag is set to "1". When the error detection flag is "1", external signal 4 is output.
However, even if these errors are detected while the reels 31 are rotating, the error state (error display) does not occur immediately at that point, but only after all reels 31 have stopped. The system enters an error state before the payout process is executed.

When all the reels 31 are stopped and any bit of the error detection flag is "1", the corresponding error number is stored in the address "F051(H)". When an error number is stored at address "F051(H)", the stored error number is displayed. Furthermore, when the error detection flag is stored at address "F294(H)" and then the error number is stored at address "F051(H)", when should the error detection flag at address "F291(H)" be cleared? is optional. For example, first, the error detection flag is not cleared until the error is removed. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored and after all reels 31 have stopped, the external signal 4 is turned on based on either the error detection flag or the error number (external signal 4 indicates on). (enables signal output). When it is determined that the error has been removed, both the error detection flag and error number are cleared. When the error detection flag and error number are cleared, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4). However, even if both the error detection flag and error number are cleared, if the setting key switch is turned on, external signal 4 will not be turned off (external signal 4 will be turned off). (does not output a signal indicating this).

Second, after storing the error detection flag at address "F294(H)", when the error number is stored at address "F051(H)", the error detection flag at address "F291(H)" is cleared. There are many things you can do. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored, the external signal 4 is turned on based on the error detection flag until the error number is stored (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). ). Further, when the error number is stored and the error detection flag is cleared, the external signal 4 is turned on based on the error number (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). Thereafter, when it is determined that the error has been removed, the error number is cleared. As a result, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4). However, even if both the error detection flag and error number are cleared, if the setting key switch is turned on, external signal 4 will not be turned off (external signal 4 will be turned off). (does not output a signal indicating this).

Note that when an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating, etc., it cannot immediately shift to the error state (error display) (it cannot shift to the error state until all reels 31 have stopped). Since it is necessary to turn on the external signal 4 (to make it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), an error detection flag is provided.
Therefore, when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs under a situation where the reel 31 is stopped or can immediately shift to an error state, "1" is stored in the error detection flag. Whether or not to do so is optional. To simplify processing, even when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs in a situation where it is possible to transition to an error state, "1" is stored in the error detection flag. Good too. Alternatively, when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs, if the error state cannot be immediately transitioned to (for example, while at least one reel 31 is rotating), the error detection flag is set to "1". '', and when the situation is such that it is possible to immediately shift to an error state (eg, waiting for a game), the error number may be stored, but "1" may not be stored in the error detection flag.

In the above storage area of RWM53, the storage areas of addresses "F00A(H)", "F013(H)" to "F015(H)", and "F051(H)" are storage areas within the used area. . In contrast, the storage area at address "F294(H)" is a storage area outside the used area. Further, a program for detecting errors is stored in a control area of the ROM 54 outside the used area.

89 and 90 are time charts showing the output timing of external signal 4 and external signal 5. FIG. 89 shows example 1, and FIG. 90 shows example 2.
In Example 1 of FIG. 89, (a) shows the relationship between on/off of the setting key switch and the output of the external signal 4. When it is detected that the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is immediately turned on (a signal indicating that the setting key switch is turned on can be outputted as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from when the setting key switch is detected to be turned on until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be outputted as the external signal 4) is "0" ms. Therefore, when it is detected that the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is immediately turned on (a signal indicating that the setting key switch is turned on can be outputted as the external signal 4).
Further, whether or not the setting key switch is on is detected in the interrupt process. For example, during the interrupt process shown in FIG. 53 (11th embodiment), when the level data of input port 0 is read in the input port read process of step S457 and the level data of the setting key switch is "1", the external Turn on signal 4 (enable to output a signal indicating on as external signal 4).

Further, once the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is turned on for 50 ms or more (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) (t3 in the figure). Therefore, even if the setting key switch is turned on and then turned off immediately (for example, after "10" ms have elapsed), the external signal 4 remains on (external) until at least "50" ms have passed. (It is possible to output a signal indicating ON as signal 4).
When the setting key switch is turned off, the condition is that 50 ms or more have elapsed since the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating ON was enabled to be output as external signal 4). , turns off the external signal 4 (enabling output of a signal indicating off as the external signal 4). If 50 ms or more have elapsed since the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4), the external signal 4 will be turned off as soon as the setting key switch is detected to be off. (It is possible to output a signal indicating OFF as the external signal 4) (t2 in the figure).

Therefore, after detecting that the setting key switch is turned on and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), turn off the setting key switch before 50 ms elapses. When detected, the external signal 4 is turned off after a minimum of "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, after detecting that the setting key switch is turned on and turning on external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON can be output as external signal 4), turn off the setting key switch after 50 ms or more has elapsed. When detected, it is possible to immediately turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4).

(b) shows the relationship between error detection/non-detection and the output of the external signal 4. "Error detection" here corresponds to the fact that any bit in the error detection flag of address "F294 (H)" is "1", and "non-detection of error" means that the error concerned This corresponds to the detection flag being "0".
When "1" is stored in the error detection flag, it is possible to immediately turn on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating that it is on can be output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from when "1" is stored in the error detection flag until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) is "0" ms.
Further, once "1" is stored in the error detection flag, the external signal is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating "on" can be outputted as the external signal 4) (time t3). Further, when the error detection flag is cleared, it is possible to turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2). Note that the error detection flag is cleared when, as described above, the error is removed, and when the error number is stored although the error is not removed.

Therefore, after detecting that the error detection flag has become "1" and turning on external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as external signal 4), before "50" ms has elapsed. When it is detected that the error detection flag has become "0", the external signal 4 is turned off after at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4. ).
On the other hand, after detecting that the error detection flag became "1" and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), more than "50" ms has passed. When it is detected that the error detection flag has become "0", it is possible to immediately turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4).

(c) shows the relationship between the display/non-display of an error and the output of the external signal 4. Here, "display of an error" corresponds to a value other than "0" (in the example of FIG. 88, any of "100(D)" to "107(D)") being stored in the error number at address "F051(H)", and "non-display of an error" corresponds to the value of the error number being "0". Note that a memory area for storing a flag indicating whether an error is displayed or not may be provided, but as in this embodiment, by determining whether an error is displayed or not based on the data stored in a memory area for displaying the error number, it is possible to reduce the amount of memory area used.

When a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, it is possible to immediately turn on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). After a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, the minimum value of the time t1 until the external signal 4 is output is "0" ms.
Once a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) (time t3). Furthermore, after the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) for at least "50" ms or more after a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, when the error number is cleared after that, it is possible to immediately turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2).

Therefore, after the error number is stored and the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4), if the error number is cleared before "50" ms has elapsed, After at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, if the error number is cleared after 50 ms or more has passed after the error number is memorized and the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4), It is possible to immediately turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(d) shows the relationship between power on/off and the output of the external signal 4. Here, various detection methods can be used to determine whether the power is turned on (whether the power switch 11 in FIG. (H)" corresponds to the time when the initial value "136 (D)" of the external signal 4 output time upon power-off recovery is stored.
When the power is turned on (when the initial value is stored in the output time of external signal 4 at power-off recovery), it is possible to immediately turn on external signal 4 (indicates on as external signal 4). (can output signals). The minimum value of the time t1 from when the initial value is stored in the external signal 4 output time at the time of power-off recovery until the external signal 4 is output is "0" ms.
Also, when the initial value is stored in the external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery, the external signal 4 is turned on for "300" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) ( Time t3). "300" ms here corresponds to the number of interrupts "136". In addition, when the output time of external signal 4 becomes "0" at power-off recovery, it is possible to immediately turn off external signal 4 (it is possible to output a signal indicating off as external signal 4). (Time t2).

Therefore, the initial value is stored in the external signal 4 output time at the time of power-off recovery, and after the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4), the power switch 11 is turned off. When this is detected (when the D7 bit of the input port 0 level data becomes "1"), the external signal 4 is turned off after "300" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4 (the external signal 4 is turned off). (It is possible to output a signal indicating OFF as signal 4).
On the other hand, the initial value is stored in the external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery, and after the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4), the output time of the external signal 4 is " When 300" ms has elapsed, even if the power switch 11 remains on, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

17(e) shows the relationship between the opening/closing of the front door 12 and the output of the external signal 5. Here, "the front door 12 is opened" corresponds to the time when the door switch is detected to be on. In particular, in the 18th embodiment, this corresponds to the time when the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data (or the input port 0 rising edge data) becomes "1".
When it is detected that the door switch is on, it is possible to immediately turn on the external signal 5 (to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 5). The minimum value of the time t1 from when it is detected that the door switch is on until the external signal 5 is output is "0" ms.
Furthermore, when it is detected that the door switch is on, the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 5) for at least 50 ms (time t3). As a result, even if the front door 12 is opened and then immediately closed, the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 5) for at least 50 ms.

Therefore, after detecting that the door switch was turned on and turning on the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5), it was detected that the door switch was turned off before "50" ms elapsed. In this case, the external signal 5 is turned off after at least 50 ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 5 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 5).
On the other hand, after detecting that the door switch was turned on and turning on the external signal 5 (a signal indicating ON could be output as the external signal 5), the door switch was turned off after more than 50 ms had passed. In this case, it is possible to immediately turn off the external signal 5 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 5).

The output destination of external signal 4 or external signal 5 is a hall computer, etc., but external signal 4 or 5 is turned on for 50 ms or more (a signal indicating ON can be output as external signal 4 or 5). ), the hall computer (data lamp) etc. can reliably receive the external signals 4 and 5. Therefore, even if a fraudulent act such as turning on the setting key switch momentarily (for example, about 5 to 10 ms) or a fraudulent act including momentarily opening the front door 12, the hall The external signal 4 or 5 can be received by a computer or the like.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 90 is a modified example of Example 1 shown in FIG.
In FIG.
A time t1 from when the setting key switch shown in (a) is detected to be on until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4),
A time t1 from when the error detection flag shown in (b) becomes “1” to when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4);
(c) is a time t1 from when the error number is stored to when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4);
The time t1 from when the door switch is detected to be on to when the external signal 5 is turned on (when a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 5) shown in (e)
are all set to "0" ms.

In FIG. 90, the interval of time t1 is shown as exceeding "0", but in reality, for example during (a), the timing at which the setting key switch changes from off to on and the timing at which the output of external signal 4 changes from off to on are almost the same (the timing at which the setting key switch changes from off to on and the timing at which the output of external signal 4 changes from off to on are within "2" tenths).
Furthermore, the time t3 during which the external signal 4 in (a) to (c) and the external signal 5 shown in (e) are turned on (the external signals 4 and 5 can be output as signals indicating on) is a minimum of 50 ms. This is the same as the example in FIG. 89.
Furthermore, the time t3 at which the external signal 4 in FIG. 89(d) is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) is 300 ms, as in the example of FIG.

Furthermore,
The time t2 from when the setting key switch shown in (a) is turned off to when the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4);
A time t2 from when the error detection flag shown in (b) is cleared to when the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4);
Time t2 from when the error number shown in (c) is cleared until turning off the external signal 4 (enabling output of a signal indicating off as the external signal 4);
The time t2 from when the external signal 4 output time becomes "0" at the time of power-off recovery shown in (d) until the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4);
Time t2 from the time when the off-state of the door switch shown in (e) is detected until the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5)
are all "50" ms.

To do this, for example, a timer is required to manage the output time of the external signal 4 when the setting key switch is turned off, when the error detection flag is cleared, or when the error number is cleared. Set the value "24 (D)", subtract "1" from the timer value for each interrupt processing, and turn off external signal 4 when the timer value reaches "0" (turn off external signal 4). ).
Similarly, when the off-state of the door switch is detected, a timer value "24 (D)" for managing the output time of the external signal 5 is set, and "1" is subtracted from the timer value for each interrupt processing, When the timer value reaches "0", the external signal 5 may be turned off (a signal indicating off may be outputted as the external signal 5).

Next, the output of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 will be explained based on a flowchart. 91 to 94 are flowcharts showing external signal output processing.
91 and 92 are flowcharts showing example 1 of external signal output processing. Further, FIG. 92 is a flowchart following FIG. 91. Furthermore, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing Example 2 of external signal output processing. Furthermore, FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing example 3 of external signal output processing.
The external signal output process (step S3221) is a process that is inserted between step S455 (timer measurement) and step S456 (LED display control) in FIG. 53, for example.

First, example 1 of external signal output processing will be described.
In FIG. 91, in step S3231, it is determined whether the setting key switch is on. In this process, it is determined whether the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data is "1" or not, and when it is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch is on. When it is determined that the setting key switch is on, the process advances to step S3237, and when it is determined that the setting key switch is not on, the process advances to step S3232.

In step S3232, it is determined whether an error has been detected. In this process, it is determined whether any bit of the error detection flag is "1". If it is determined that any bit of the error detection flag is "1", the process advances to step S3237, and if it is determined that any bit is not "1" (no error has been detected), the process advances to step S3233.
In step S3233, it is determined whether an error is being displayed. This process reads the error number and determines whether it is "0" or not. If it is "0", it is determined that no error is being displayed and the process proceeds to step S3234, and if it is a value other than "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed and the process proceeds to step S3237.

In step S3234, it is determined whether "300" ms have elapsed since the power was turned on. As mentioned above, when recovery from power off is detected, the initial value "136 (D)" is set to the external signal 4 output time at power off recovery at address "F013 (H)", and It is subtracted by "1". Then, in step S3234, it is determined whether or not the external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery is "0", and if it is "0", "300" ms has passed since the power was turned on. After determining that, the process advances to step S3235. On the other hand, if the external signal 4 output time upon power-off recovery is not "0", the process advances to step S3241.

In step S3235, it is determined whether or not the output time of the external signal 4 has passed a predetermined time. Here, the external signal 4 management time of address "F014(H)" is set to "24(D)" in step S3240, which will be described later. Then, in step S3235, it is determined whether or not this external signal 4 management time is "0", and when it is determined that it is "0" (when it is determined that the output time of external signal 4 has elapsed), The process advances to step S3236, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process advances to step S3241.
In step S3236, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). The process then proceeds to step S3242 (in FIG. 92).

On the other hand, if it is determined "Yes" in step S3231, S3232, or S3233, and the process proceeds to step S3237, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch has been turned from OFF to ON in the current interrupt processing. In this interrupt processing, whether or not the D2 bit (setting key switch signal) of the input port 0 level data is turned on is determined by, for example, firstly, if the input port 0 rising data is present, the input port 0 rising data is It is determined whether the D2 bit of is "1" or not. Second, save the input port 0 level data from the previous interrupt processing, and make sure that the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data is "0" in the previous interrupt processing, and the input port 0 level data in the current interrupt processing. When the D2 bit is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned on from off in the current interrupt processing. If it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from off to on, the process advances to step S3240, and if it is determined that the setting key switch has not changed from off to on, the process advances to step S3238.

In step S3238, it is determined whether the error detection flag has changed from off to on. Here, for example, by saving the error detection flag from the previous interrupt processing and performing a comparison operation with the error detection flag from the current interrupt processing, the error detection flag can be changed from OFF to ON during the current interrupt processing. Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the error detection flag has changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3240, and if it is determined that the error detection flag has not changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3239.

In step S3239, it is determined whether the error number has changed from being hidden ("0") to being displayed (other than "0"). Here, for example, by saving the error number from the previous interrupt processing and comparing it with the error number from the current interrupt processing, we can determine whether the error number from "0" to "0" is different from "0" during the current interrupt processing. determine whether it has become. If it is determined that the error number has changed from "0" to a value other than "0", the process advances to step S3240; if it is determined that the error number remains "0", the process advances to step S3241.

When the process proceeds from step S3237, S3238, or S3239 to step S3240, the external signal 4 management time of address "F014(H)" is set to "24(D)", which corresponds to an output time of "50" ms, as an initial value. . Then, the process advances to step S3241.
In step S3241, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). The process then proceeds to step S3242 (in FIG. 92).
In step S3242, it is determined whether the door switch is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data is "1", and when it is "1", it is determined that the door switch is on. When it is determined that the door switch is on, the process advances to step S3245, and when it is determined that the door switch is not on, the process advances to step S3243.

In step S3243, it is determined whether the output time of external signal 5 has elapsed. Here, the external signal 5 management time of address "F015(H)" is set to "24(D)" in step S3246, which will be described later. Then, in step S3243, it is determined whether or not this external signal 5 management time is "0". When it is determined that it is "0", the process advances to step S3244, and when it is determined that it is not "0", step Proceed to S3247.
In step S3244, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is on, and the process proceeds to step S3245, it is determined whether the door switch has been turned on from off in the current interrupt processing. In this interrupt processing, whether or not the D3 bit (door switch signal) of the input port 0 level data is turned on is determined by, for example, firstly, if the input port 0 rising data is present, the input port 0 rising data is Determine whether the D3 bit is "1". Second, save the input port 0 level data from the previous interrupt processing, and make sure that the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data is "0" in the previous interrupt processing, and the input port 0 level data in the current interrupt processing. When the D3 bit is "1", it is determined that the door switch has been turned on from off in the current interrupt processing. When it is determined that the door switch has been turned on from off, the process advances to step S3246, and when it is determined that the door switch has not been turned on from off, the process advances to step S3247.

In step S3246, the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015(H)" is set to "24(D)" corresponding to the output time of "50" ms as an initial value. Then, the process advances to step S3247.
In step S3247, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing example 2 of external signal output processing.
In the example of FIG. 92,
(1) As shown in step S3237, when the setting key switch is turned on from off,
(2) As shown in step S3238, when the error detection flag is turned on from off,
(3) As shown in step S3239, when a new error number is stored, the output time of external signal 4 is set.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 93, the current interrupt processing is based on whether the setting key switch is on, whether the error detection flag is on, and whether or not the error number is stored. to control the output of the external signal 4.

In Fig. 93, the same steps as those in Fig. 91 and Fig. 92 are denoted by the same step numbers. The example in Fig. 93 does not include any steps different from those in Fig. 91 and Fig. 92.
In the example of FIG.
(1) When it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is on (when the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data of the address "F00A(H)" is "1"),
(2) In step S3234, if "300" ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on (the power-off recovery external signal 4 output time of address "F013(H)" is not "0"),
(3) In step S3233, when it is determined that an error is being displayed (when the error number stored in address "F051(H)" is other than "0"),
(4) In step S3232, when an error is being detected (when any bit of the error detection flag at address "F294(H)" is "1")
each proceeds to step S3240 and stores the number of interrupts "24(D)" corresponding to the output time of external signal 4 "50" ms in address "F014(H)".

Therefore, in the previous interrupt processing, for example, it was determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch was on, and in step S3240, "24 (D)" was set to the external signal 4 management time of address "F014 (H)". Thereafter, if it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is on in the current interrupt processing, the process proceeds to step S3240 and the external signal 4 management time "24(D)" is reset. When it is determined in step S3234 that "300" ms have not elapsed since the power was turned on, when it is determined that an error is being displayed in step S3233, and when it is determined that an error is being detected in step S3233. The same is true. After step S3240, the process advances to step S3241.

If it is determined in step S3232 that error detection is not in progress, the process advances to step S3235. In step S3235, it is determined whether the output time of external signal 4 "50" ms has elapsed. Here, as described above, when the external signal 4 management time of the address "F014(H)" is "0", it is determined that the output time of the external signal 4 "50" ms has elapsed. If the output time of external signal 4 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3236, where external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as external signal 4), and if the output time of external signal 4 has elapsed. If not, the process advances to step S3241 and turns on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4).

Next, the process advances to step S3242, where it is determined whether the door switch is on. When it is determined that the door switch is on, the process advances to step S3246, and when it is determined that the door switch is not on, the process advances to step S3243.
In step S3246, "24(D)" is set to the external signal 5 management time of address "F015(H)". In this case, similarly to the above, it is determined that the door switch is on in the previous interrupt processing, and "24 (D)" is set as the external signal 5 management time in step S3246. If it is determined in S3242 that the door switch is on, the external signal 5 management time "24 (D)" is reset in step S3246. Then, the process advances to step S3247.

In step S3243, it is determined whether the output time of external signal 5 "50" ms has elapsed. Here, as described above, when the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015(H)" is "0", it is determined that the output time of the external signal 5 "50" ms has elapsed. When it is determined that the output time of the external signal 5 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3244, where the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 5), and the output time of the external signal 5 is If it is determined that the elapsed time has not elapsed, the process advances to step S3247 and the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating that it is on can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the processing according to each of the flowcharts ends.

As described above, in Example 1 of FIG. 91, in each of the determinations of whether the setting key switch has changed from off to on, whether the error detection flag has changed from off to on, and whether the error number has changed from "0" to a value other than "0", the external signal 4 management time is set in the interrupt processing which determines "Yes", and thereafter, the external signal 4 management time is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt processing, and when it becomes "0", the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is off can be output).
93, when the setting key switch is on, when the error detection flag is "1", and when an error number other than "0" is stored, the external signal 4 is kept on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). When the setting key switch is off, the error detection flag is "0", and "0" is stored as the error number, the external signal 4 is turned off when the external signal 4 management time becomes "0" (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

In other words, the external signal 4 is turned on until "50" ms has passed since the setting key switch is off, the error detection flag is "0", and "0" is stored as the error number. (A signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). Therefore, for example, if an error is detected or the setting key switch is turned on for a moment (for example, just the "3" interrupt), the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off is set as the external signal 4). Even if the conditions (enabling output) are met, the external signal 4 can be turned on for at least 50 ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4).

In the external signal output processing (interrupt processing) shown in FIG. 93, after the timer value "24 (D)" is set for external signal 4 in step S3240, when the next interrupt processing is executed, The timer value is subtracted from "24(D)" to "23(D)". After that, in the external signal output process of the next interrupt process, if the conditions for turning on the external signal 4 (enabling output of a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) are met, the process advances to step S3240 and again, A timer value "24(D)" is set.

Thereafter, the timer value is subtracted for each interrupt process, but if the condition for turning on external signal 4 (enabling output of a signal indicating on as external signal 4) is no longer met, processing in step S3240 is performed. Since the timer does not pass through, the timer value eventually becomes "0 (D)". When the timer value becomes "0 (D)", it is determined as "Yes" in step S3235, so the process proceeds to step S3236 and turns off external signal 4 (outputs a signal indicating off as external signal 4). possible).

By doing this, the external signal 4 is turned on (turns on as the external signal 4) from when the conditions for turning on the external signal 4 (enabling the output of a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) are met. output of the signal shown). Then, as long as the conditions for turning on external signal 4 (enabling output of a signal indicating on as external signal 4) are met, turn on external signal 4 (outputting a signal indicating on as external signal 4). possible). Next, when the conditions for turning on external signal 4 (enabling output of a signal indicating that it is on as external signal 4) are no longer met, the timer value is set to "0 (D)" for each interrupt process. It is subtracted by "1 (D)". The external signal 4 is turned on until the timer value reaches "0 (D)" (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). Then, when the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4).

The above also applies to the external signal 5.
In the external signal output process (interrupt process) shown in FIG. 93, after the timer value "24 (D)" related to external signal 5 is set in step S3246, when the next interrupt process is executed, the timer value is "24(D)" is subtracted from "23(D)". After that, in the external signal output process of the next interrupt process, when the door switch is on (when the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (enabling output of a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5)) , the process advances to step S3246, and the timer value "24(D)" is set again.

After that, the timer value is subtracted for each interrupt processing, but the condition that the door switch is turned off (turns on external signal 5 (makes it possible to output a signal indicating on as external signal 5) is no longer met) ), the process of step S3246 is not passed through, so the timer value ultimately becomes "0(D)". When the timer value becomes "0 (D)", it is determined as "Yes" in step S3243, and the process proceeds to step S3244 to turn off external signal 5 (outputs a signal indicating off as external signal 5). possible).

By doing this, from the time when the door switch is turned on (the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (enabling the output of a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5) is satisfied), the external signal 5 is turned on (enabling the output of a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5). Then, while the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (enabling the output of a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5) is satisfied, the external signal 5 is turned on (enabling the output of a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5). Next, when the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (enabling the output of a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5) is no longer satisfied, the timer value is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process until it becomes "0 (D)". Until the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 5 is turned on (enabling the output of a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5). Then, when the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 5 is turned off (enabling the output of a signal indicating OFF as the external signal 5).
In example 2 of Figure 93 above, there is no need to generate rising edge data and there is no need to check level data from the previous interrupt processing, so the external signal output processing can be simplified while the time during which the hall computer can receive a signal indicating that external signal 4 or 5 is on can be guaranteed.

Fig. 94 is a flowchart showing an example 3 of an external signal output process. In Fig. 94, steps performing the same processes as in Fig. 93 are given the same numbers, and steps performing different processes are given underlines to the step numbers.
In Example 3 of FIG. 94, when determining whether to output the external signal 4, first, in step S3251, it is determined whether the external signal 4 management time of the address "F014(H)" is "0". If it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3241 to turn on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). On the other hand, if the external signal 4 management time is "0" and the output condition of the external signal 4 is satisfied in the determinations of steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232, the process proceeds to step S3240 to set the external signal 4 management time of the address "F014(H)" to "24(D)" corresponding to an output time of "50" ms, and the process proceeds to step S3241. On the other hand, if it is determined that the output condition of the external signal 4 is not satisfied in any of the determinations of steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232, the process proceeds to step S3236 to turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4).

Regarding the external signal 5, in the same way as above, when determining whether to output the external signal 5, first in step S3252, the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015 (H)" is set to "0". Determine whether it exists or not. If it is not "0", the process advances to step S3247 and the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5). On the other hand, if the external signal 5 management time is "0" and it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is on, the process advances to step S3246, and the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015(H)" is is set to "24 (D)" corresponding to an output time of "50" ms, and the process advances to step S3247. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S3244 and turns off the external signal 5 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 5).

94, when the set timer value (external signal 4 management time or external signal 5 management time) is "0", the timer value is reset if the output condition of external signal 4 or 5 is satisfied. Even if the set timer value becomes "0", the timer value is set again if the output condition of external signal 4 or 5 is satisfied.
As with example 2 in Figure 93, the method of example 3 in Figure 94 does not require the generation of rising edge data and does not require checking level data from the previous interrupt processing, thereby simplifying the external signal output processing while ensuring the time during which the hall computer can receive a signal indicating that external signal 4 or 5 is on.

Although the 18th embodiment has been described above, the 18th embodiment is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible for the 18th embodiment.
(1) When the setting key switch is on, when an error is detected, or when any of the error indications is satisfied, external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as external signal 4). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may turn on each individual external signal (for example, external signals 4, 6, and 7) (make it possible to output a signal indicating ON as external signals 4, 6, and 7). It's okay. Also, a specific external signal (for example, external signal 5 or 6) may be turned on when either or both of the setting key switch and the door switch are on. It may also be possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5 or 6).

(2) The various timer values of addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)" are decremented by "1" for each interrupt processing, but this is not limited to this, and "N (N≧2)" The value may be subtracted by "N" for every "N" interrupts, or "1" may be subtracted for every "N" interrupts. For example, after setting "12 (D)" as the external signal 4 management time or the external signal 5 management time, "1" may be subtracted every two interrupts.
(3) The various modifications and numerical values described in the 18th embodiment are just examples, and can be designed as appropriate. For example, in FIG. 89, the times t1 and t2 have a minimum of "0" ms, so they can be set variously, such as "5" ms, "10" ms, etc.

In addition, in FIG. 89, time t3 ((a), (b), (c), and (e) in the figure) is a minimum of "50" ms, so for example, "75" ms or "100" ms. etc., various settings can be made.
In particular, at time t3 in FIGS. 89 and 90 ((a), (b), (c), and (e) in FIGS. 89 and 90), the hall computer etc. reliably receives external signals 4 and 5. The time may be as long as possible, and depending on the performance of the hall computer etc., it may be less than 50 ms.
Furthermore, the time t2 in FIG. 90 is not limited to "50" ms, and can be set in various ways according to specifications and the like.

(4) When the setting key switch was turned on from off, or when the setting key switch was on, external signal 4 was turned on (it was possible to output a signal indicating on as external signal 4), but the setting It may be configured such that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) when the change mode or setting confirmation mode is entered.
Here, as in the 18th embodiment, when the setting key switch is turned on from off or when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on is used as the external signal 4). When configured to enable output), even if the setting key switch is turned from off to on while the reel 31 is rotating, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on is output as the external signal 4). possible).
On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is entered, the reel Even if the setting key switch turns from off to on while the setting key switch is rotating, the external signal 4 is turned off based on the status of the setting key switch (it is possible to output a signal indicating off as the external signal 4). do). However, there may be cases where the external signal 4 is turned on based on an error (a signal indicating that it is on can be output as the external signal 4).

(5) In the eighteenth embodiment, when any one of the following conditions is met: when the setting key switch is on, when an error is detected, when an error is being displayed, or when "300" ms has not elapsed since power-on, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). However, it is not necessary to provide all of these conditions, and the external signal 4 may be turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) only when one or some of the conditions are met, for example, when the setting key switch is on. In other words, even when other conditions are met, for example, when "300" ms has not elapsed since power-on, the external signal 4 may not be turned on (a signal indicating on can not be output as the external signal 4).
(6) All of the embodiments and various modified examples described in this specification, including the eighteenth embodiment, are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
The nineteenth embodiment relates to a setting change completion sound.
Below, the setting change completion sound will be explained in both the case where the gaming machine is a slot machine (19th embodiment (A)) and the case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine (19th embodiment (B)).
In the following description, the "setting change state (also referred to as the "setting change mode" or "setting change processing in progress")" refers to a gaming state in which the setting value can be changed and in which the game cannot be started (progressed). In the setting change state, it is also possible to end the game without changing the setting value.
In addition, the "setting confirmation state (also called the "setting confirmation mode" or "setting confirmation processing in progress")" is a state in which the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, like the setting change state, it is not possible to start (progress) the game.
In contrast, the "normal state (also called the "normal mode")" refers to a state other than the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. In the normal state, it is possible to start (progress) a game unless there are special circumstances such as an error occurring.

<19th embodiment (A): When the gaming machine is a slot machine>
FIG. 95 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control of the slot machine 10 in the 19th embodiment (A), and corresponds to FIG. 1 of the first embodiment.
95, as components not shown in Fig. 1, there are provided a door switch 17, a setting key insertion port 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153. Although the above components are not shown in Fig. 1, this does not mean that the above components are not provided in the first embodiment.
The setting key insertion port 151, the setting key switch 152, and the setting change (reset) switch 153 do not necessarily need to be provided on the main control board 50, and may be provided as separate devices.

The door switch 17 is attached to either the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 22, the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 are normally closed, but the front door 12 is opened when changing settings or confirming settings. The door switch 17 is a switch that is turned on when the front door 12 is opened, and detects the opening of the front door 12. When the door switch 17 detects that the front door 12 is opened, a door open error is notified.
Further, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are mounted on the main control board 50.
The setting key switch 152 is a switch that is turned on by inserting the setting key from the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise. This is the switch used.

Furthermore, the setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that serves as both a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch operated when changing a set value in a setting change state. The reset switch is a switch that is operated to restore the state before the error occurred after the error has been removed.
In the following description, it will be referred to as "setting change (reset) switch 153,""setting change switch 153," and "reset switch 153."
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 are provided integrally, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 may be provided separately.

When transitioning to the setting confirmation state, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 with the power turned on and rotated, for example, 90 degrees clockwise. This turns on the setting key switch 152. When the door switch 17 is turned on while the power is turned on and the setting key switch 151 is turned on, the state shifts to a setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value does not change), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise and the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state is ended.

In addition, when the power is off, inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion port 151, rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise, turning the setting key switch 152 on, and then turning on the power switch 11 will allow the device to transition to a setting change state (setting change process in Figure 39).

When the slot machine 10 is powered on as described above, a checksum is executed (step S204) as shown in FIG. Step S209) or when the setting change is possible (Step S210), it becomes possible to move to the setting change process (setting change state).

In the nineteenth embodiment, the "designated switch" in step S208 is two switches: the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152.
Alternatively, in addition to the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152, a setting door switch (a switch that is turned on when a cover provided to cover the setting key insertion slot 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 is opened) is used. If provided, there are three switches including a set door switch.
In the following description, it is assumed that no setting door switch is provided, and the designated switches are the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152.

Then, in step S208 in FIG. 38, only when the door switch 17 is on and the setting key switch 152 is on, a determination of "Yes" is made in step S208, and a transition to the setting change state is enabled. On the other hand, when only one of the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152 is on, or when both switches are off, the determination in step S208 is "No", and the setting is changed. will not migrate.
As a result, when the front door 12 is not opened or the setting key is not inserted, the setting change state will not be entered in a situation where there is a high possibility of tampering.

In addition, in FIG. 38, "starting the setting change state" is defined firstly when "Yes" is determined in step S209 or "No" is determined in step S210. . In this case, the "setting change state" includes the processes in steps S221 to S233 in FIG. 39 as well.
Or, secondly, in FIG. 39, when the output request at the time of starting the setting change is set in step S234 and the control command set 1 is executed in step S235 (a command is sent to the sub-control board 80 to start the setting change) An example of this is to set "the start of the settings change state" to "when the settings change state is started".

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period immediately before step S221 in FIG. 39 may be defined as the "start of the setting change state." Further, the period immediately after step S231 (at the end of initialization) may be defined as the "start of the setting change state." Furthermore, the time when the interrupt is activated in step S233, or immediately after step S233 (immediately before step S234) may be defined as the "start of the setting change state."

Furthermore, in FIG. 39, "the end of the setting change state" may be determined when the setting key switch 152 is turned off in step S243.
Or, secondly, in FIG. 39, when an output request at the end of setting change is set in step S246 and control command set 1 is executed in step S247 (a command is sent to the sub-control board 80 to end the setting change). An example of this is to define "the end of the settings change state" when the
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time when "Yes" is determined in step S242 (when the start switch 41 is operated and the set value is determined) may be defined as "the end of the setting change state".

Further, as will be described later, the setting change state may be terminated on the condition that the front door 12 is closed, in other words, on the condition that the door switch 17 is turned from on to off. In this case, even if the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state does not end while the front door 12 is open (when the door switch 17 is on).
Further, if the front door 12 is closed at the time when the setting key switch 152 is turned off (when the door switch 17 is off), the setting change state may not be ended. This is to prevent cheating.
In the following description, in the nineteenth embodiment (A), the time when "Yes" is determined in step S243 in FIG. ”.

In steps S246 and S247 in FIG. 39, when a command indicating that the setting change has been completed is sent to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 receives the command. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it outputs a setting change end sound and visually indicates the end of the setting change (output by the production lamp 21).
Here, in the present embodiment, the setting change end sound corresponds to outputting a sound from the speaker 22 saying "setting change is finished."

There are various ideas regarding the speed at which words (Japanese) can be spoken, but if you follow the idea that a speed of about 300 characters per minute is appropriate, then the message ``Finish changing settings.'' For example, "T01", which is the time from the start of audio output to the end of audio output, may be set to about "2000" ms.
FIG. 96 is a time chart showing the relationship between a setting change state, a setting change end sound, a lamp effect, and one game time, which will be described later, in the nineteenth embodiment.
When the sub control board 80 receives a command indicating that the setting change has been completed, it immediately outputs a setting change completion sound. Here, in FIG. 39, if it is determined "Yes" in step S243, in the first interrupt processing (FIG. 53) after "Yes" is determined in step S243, the setting change is completed in step S464. command is sent.

Then, in the sub-control board 80, interrupt processing is executed independently on the sub-control board 80 side, and for each interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not a control command (a command indicating that the setting change has been completed) has been received. ing. When it is determined that a command indicating that the setting change has been completed is received, it starts outputting a setting change completion sound.
In order to go through the above process, at least one interrupt (referring to the interrupt by the main control board 50. The time for one interrupt is "2.235" ms.) from the time when "Yes" is determined in step S243 in FIG. Afterwards, the sub-control board 80 starts outputting the setting change end sound or outputting the setting change end sound. In other words, after the determination is "Yes" in step S243 in FIG. 39, the setting change end sound is not output until at least one interrupt has elapsed.

In FIG. 96, the timing at which the setting change state changes from on to off is when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, as described above. However, since the time it takes for a command to be sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, for the sub-control board 80 to receive the command and for the setting change completion sound to start being output after the setting key switch 152 is turned off, is extremely short, in FIG. 96 the timing at which the setting change state ends and the timing at which the setting change completion sound starts being output are made to match.

In addition to the above-mentioned setting change end sound, as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the effect lamp 21 is lit in a predetermined lighting mode ("lighting" is a concept that includes blinking. Also, "lighting mode") is a concept that includes lighting colors.) Executes lighting effects.
Here, when lighting the effect lamp 21, at least the lighting mode is not the same as when lighting the effect lamp 21 at the time of winning a special role (accessory object). For example, if it is determined that lamp A of the production lamps 21 is to be lit in lighting mode a as a production to indicate that the special role has been won, the production lamp 21 is set to be lit in lighting mode a to indicate that the setting change has been completed. In the case of lighting, a lamp other than lamp A may be turned on. In this case, as long as a lamp different from lamp A is lit, it may be lit in the same manner as the one used to indicate winning the special winning combination.

Further, when lighting the effect lamp 21 as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the lamp A may be turned on. However, the lighting mode in this case is different from the lighting mode when indicating winning the special winning combination.
As described above, when lighting the production lamp 21 to indicate that the setting change has been completed, it is necessary to confirm that the special award has been won (the special award has been won in the game, or The lighting mode is made to be different from the lighting mode of the performance lamp 21 in the performance to notify that the winning has been carried over. As a result, when the game is started immediately after finishing the setting change, even if the production lamp 21 is turned on to indicate that the setting change has been finished, the player will not be able to win the special role. This can prevent confusion.

Further, it is preferable that the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is different from the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 21 indicating that the special winning combination has been won, so that the two do not get confused. In other words, the lighting pattern of the production lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is set to a lighting pattern that is not used for other productions, and when the lighting pattern is seen, it is a production that indicates the completion of the setting change. It is preferable to make it easy to understand.
Furthermore, for the production lamp 21, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change has been completed is made the same as the lighting pattern indicating that the special role has been won, and for other lamps other than the production lamp 21, the setting change is made. The lighting pattern indicating that the game has ended and the lighting pattern indicating that the special winning combination has been won may be different.
Specifically, for example, to indicate that the setting change has been completed, the production lamp 21 and the other lamps are all lit up, and to notify that the special prize has been won, the production lamp 21 is turned on. One example is to turn on the lamp, but not to turn on the other lamps. In this way, by checking the lighting pattern of the production lamp 21 and the other lamps (lamps of the gaming machine in general), the administrator can grasp the state.

Furthermore, when lighting the effect lamp 21 as an effect to indicate that the setting change has been completed, as a general rule, it is possible to output the setting change end sound at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started before outputting the setting change end sound. Alternatively, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is started but before the output of the setting change end sound is ended. Furthermore, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is finished.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 96, in the following embodiment, the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is turned on at the same time as the output of the setting change end sound is started.
Also, if the lighting time of the production lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is set to "T02",
T01>T02
T01=T02
T01<T02
However, as shown in FIG. 96, in this embodiment, it is assumed that "T01<T02". For example, when the time T01 is set to approximately "2000" ms as described above, the time T02 may be set to, for example, approximately "2500" ms to approximately "4000" ms.

Next, a case will be considered in which the setting change state is ended and a transition is made to the normal state (a state in which game play can be started) and game play is immediately started.
In the following, as shown in Fig. 96, the time required from the moment the setting change state is ended until the game starts (until the game start conditions are satisfied) (preparation time until the game starts) is "T11". Also, the time from the start of the game (from the game start conditions are satisfied) until the game ends (one game time) is "T12".
In the setting change state, as shown in Fig. 39, the data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared, so that even if there is bet data or credit data before the setting change starts, these are also cleared. Therefore, immediately after the setting change state ends, the number of bets is "0" and the number of credits is also "0". Therefore, after the setting change state ends, as shown in Fig. 2, it is necessary to insert medals M into the medal insertion slot 47 and bet a specified number before starting play.

Here, in the normal game (when the accessory is not activated), the number of bets "3" is the generally used regulation number, but in the 19th embodiment (A), the minimum bet number "1" is the regulation number. , it is assumed that the game can be started with the number of bets "1". Note that when the prescribed number is "1", the game can be started earlier than when the prescribed number is "2" or "3".
In FIG. 2, when the medal M is at position M1 and is released into the medal selector, it passes through the passage in the medal selector and reaches the input sensors 44a and 44b, as described in the first embodiment. Detected. When the input sensors 44a and 44b determine that the medal has passed normally, a bet of "1" is placed.

In FIG. 2, the time from when a medal M is inserted from position M1 until it is detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b and when the prescribed number is bet corresponds to the preparation time "T11" for starting the game. The preparation time "T11" in this case does not take into account the operation time for closing the front door 12 or canceling the door open error.)
Here, when the specified number is "1", it is necessary to insert one medal, when the specified number is "2", it is necessary to insert two medals, and when the specified number is "3", it is necessary to insert one medal. Requires the insertion of 3 medals. In Figure 2, the time from the state of medal M1 until one medal is inserted and a "1" bet is made is "T11a", and the time from the state of medal M1 until a "2" bet is made after two medals are inserted. Let's say "T11b" and the time from when 3 medals are inserted until a "3" bet is made is "T11c".
T11a<T11b<T11c
becomes.
However, since it is possible to insert two or three medals in succession, T11b (when the specified number is "2") is shorter than twice the time of T11a (when the specified number is "1"). It is believed that there is. Similarly, T11c (when the specified number is "3") is considered to be shorter than three times the time T11a (when the specified number is "1").

When a prescribed number of bets is placed, the game can be started by operating the start switch 41, so in this embodiment, it is assumed that the start switch 41 is operated at the moment when "1" is bet. Therefore, the time from when the specified number of bets is placed until the start switch 41 is operated is set to "0".
In FIG. 41, when the start switch 41 is operated ("Yes" in step S278), rotation of the reel 31 is started in step S286.
Here, the motor 32 accelerates the reel 31 to reach a speed of 80 rotations per minute. When a speed of 80 revolutions per minute is reached, a constant speed state is maintained at that speed. Until the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state, operation of the stop switch 42 is prohibited, and after reaching the constant speed state, operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted.
The time from when the start switch 41 is operated (after the reels 31 start rotating) until the stop switch 42 can be operated is defined as "T12a".

Next, it is assumed that the first stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when it becomes possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42. In other words, the time from the moment when it becomes possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 until the first stop switch 42 is operated is set to "0".
When the stop switch 42 is operated, as shown in FIG. Before the process ends, it may be possible to accept the next operation of the stop switch 42 (this example will be described later). Let the total time of these be "T12b".
When the four-phase excitation state ends, the next (second) stop switch 42 can be operated. Here, it is assumed that the second stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 to be stopped first ends and the next stop switch 42 can be operated. In other words, the time from when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops first ends until the second stop switch 42 is operated is set to "0".

When the second stop switch 42 is operated, the operation of the third stop switch 42 can be accepted after the time "T12b" which is the reel stop control time and the four-phase excitation state time has elapsed, as described above. becomes. Here, it is assumed that the third stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the four-phase excitation state of the second motor 32 ends and the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. In other words, the time from when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops second ends until the third stop switch 42 is operated is set to "0".
When the third stop switch 42 is operated, the time "T12b" which is the reel stop control time and the time of the four-phase excitation state is required, similarly to the above.

Note that the moment when the last reel 31 stops may be defined as the end of one game, but in the nineteenth embodiment (A), when the time of the four-phase excitation state for the last reel 31 ends, It is determined that one game has been completed (if there is no payout).
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any combination in the game stops, the game is determined to have ended when the payout process ends, specifically, when the process in FIG. 49 ends.
Note that when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 42, automatic bet processing is executed at the start of the next game. Therefore, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the end of the game is determined not as the end of automatic bet processing but as the end of the four-phase excitation state for the third reel 31.

For example, firstly, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and the process of adding to the credits is executed, the end of the process of adding to the credits is determined as the end of the game.
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination has stopped and the actual medal payout process has been executed, the payout of the last medal (drive of the hopper 36) is finished, and "Yes" in step S401 in FIG. '' (when it is determined that the payout number data is ``0'') is determined as the end of the game. However, immediately after the setting change ends, the number of credits is "0", and even if you start playing immediately after the setting change state ends and you win a small role with a maximum payout number of "15", All medals paid out will be credited. Therefore, medals are never actually paid out in one game immediately after the setting change ends.
The time period from when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and the 4-phase excitation state of the motor 32 for the third reel 31 is finished to when the payout of medals (addition to credits) is finished is "T12c". shall be.
However, when the winning combination is not won (when no medals are paid out), "T12c=0".

In addition, if an effect (such as an effect announcing a winning combination) is output when all reels 31 have stopped, the time for that effect is not included in the time for one game. For example, even if an effect is output for several seconds from the time when all reels 31 have stopped, one game is considered to end when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends when the last reel 31 has stopped (even if the effect that began to be output when all reels 31 had stopped is still continuing at that point). In other words, the end of one game is based on the control of the main control board 50.

As described above, when the player performs the operation to start the game immediately after the end of the setting change state and starts the game, the preparation time "T11" is required until the game starts.
Furthermore, one gaming time "T12" is, as mentioned above,
(1) Time “T12a” from when the start switch 41 is operated (after the reel 31 starts rotating) until the stop switch 42 can be operated
(2) Time from when the first stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops and the time in the four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(3) Time from when the second stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops and the time in the four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(4) Time from when the third stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops and the time in the four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(5) “T12c” is the time required to complete the payout of medals (addition to credits) when winning a small prize.
It takes.
Therefore,
T12=T12a+3×T12b+T12c
becomes.
Note that it is assumed that the three "T12b" times are the same.

Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is operated, a winning combination is drawn (step S282 in FIG. 41), and if a special winning role (accessory item) is won in this drawing, a freeze (also called "freeze effect") is performed. .) may be chosen.
"Freeze" in this case refers to a state in which the progress of the game is stopped for a certain period of time. Therefore, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated, a winning combination is drawn, a special winning combination is won, and it is decided to perform a freeze as an effect corresponding to winning the special winning combination, the reels 31 start rotating. do not. After the freeze ends, the reels 31 start rotating. Note that when the progress of the game is stopped due to freeze, the sub-control means 80 outputs an effect using the image display device 23 or the like.
If the freeze time in this case is "T12d", one game time "T12" when the freeze is executed is "T12a+T12b×3+T12c+T12d".

Next, the shortest time for one game time "T12" will be considered. In order for one game time to become the shortest time, freezing will not be executed and no winning combination will be won.
Therefore, the shortest time for one game time "T12" is "T12a+3×T12b".
First, the specified number is set to "1", and the time from when the medal M is inserted (dropped) into the medal selector from the position M1 in FIG. 2 until the bet is placed (the time required to start the game) It is assumed that "T11" is approximately "800" ms at the shortest.
Further, it is assumed that the time "T12a" from when the start switch 41 is operated until the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and when the operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted is about "1200" ms.

Furthermore, the time "T12b" from when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is controlled to stop and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted) is as follows. As shown in FIG. 13, the shortest time is approximately 140 ms (the reel stop control time is approximately 40 ms at the shortest, and the four-phase excitation state is approximately 100 ms at the shortest). Assume that
In this case, "T11+T12" which is the time required to start one game and one game time (minimum time) is "800 (T11) + 1200 (T12a) + 140 x 3 (T12b x 3)" = "2420" ms It will be about.
When medals are paid out after all reels 31 have stopped, or when a freeze is executed when the start switch 41 is operated, one game time "T12" is longer than the above-mentioned time.

On the other hand, as described above, when the setting change state is finished, the setting change end sound is output for a time of "T01" (approximately 2000 ms), and the effect lamp 21 is activated to notify the end of the setting change. The lighting is output for a time "T02" (for example, about "2500" to "4000" ms).
Therefore, when a game is started immediately after the setting change state ends, the setting change end sound "T01" which is output immediately after the setting change state ends, the preparation time "T11" for starting the game, and one game. The relationship with the time “T12 (minimum time)” is
T01<T11+T12
becomes.
As a result, even if you perform an operation (preparation) to start a game from the moment you finish the setting change state and start a game at the moment when you are ready to start the game, the game will end. This means that the output of the setting change completion sound has already finished.
FIG. 96 shows the relationship between the above times "T01", "T11", and "T12".

Here, in the above example, after the stop switch 42 is operated and the four-phase excitation state ends, the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the stop switch 42 is operated, it may be possible to accept the next operation of the stop switch 42 before ending the four-phase excitation state. By controlling in this way, the game can be completed more quickly. For example, after the stop switch 42 is operated (the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted), the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted during the next interrupt process.
In this case, of the above-mentioned "T12b" time, the time of the four-phase excitation state can be considered to be approximately "0", so "T12b (minimum time) = 40 (ms)".
Therefore, "T11+T12", which is the time required to start one game and one game time (minimum time) in this case, is "800 (T11) + 1200 (T12a) + 40 x 3 (T12b x 3)" = "2120 ” ms.
Therefore, even when controlled in this way, "T01<T11+T12" is satisfied.

In addition, the timing of the presentation of the slot machine 10 includes when the start switch 41 is operated (when the reel 31 starts to rotate), when the first stop switch 42 is operated (when the first reel 31 stops), when the second stop switch 42 is operated (when the second reel 31 stops), and when the third stop switch 42 is operated (when all reels 31 stop), but the timing for outputting the presentation that finally announces the winning role of the game (the most important presentation in the game) is often when all reels 31 stop.
Therefore, when an effect to announce a winning combination for the game is output when all the reels 31 have stopped, the effect is output after the output of the setting change completion sound has finished, so the effect when all the reels 31 have stopped and the setting change completion sound do not overlap (do not overlap). Therefore, even if a game is started immediately after the setting change state is ended, the effect when all the reels 31 have stopped can be accurately understood.

However, if there is an effect to be output when the start switch 41 or the first or second stop switch 42 is operated, the output timing of the effect and the output timing of the setting change end sound may overlap.
Here, the speaker 22 of this embodiment includes a plurality of channels. The channel for outputting the setting change end sound is set to be different from the channel for outputting the winning combination notification effect. As a result, even if the winning combination notification effect is output from the speaker 22 after the output of the setting change end sound has started, the setting change end sound will not be deleted midway. However, it is possible that the setting change completion sound and the winning role announcement sound may overlap.

In addition, the lighting time T02 of the production lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is as follows.
T02<T11+T12
T02=T11+T12
T02>T11+T12
Both cases are possible. However, as described above, if the lighting of the performance lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is not confused with the lighting of the performance lamp 21 as an announcement performance of the winning combination, no problem will arise.

In addition, the preparation time "T11" before starting the game is the time to close the front door 12 after finishing the setting change state and eliminate the door open error (an error indicating that the front door 12 is open). It does not take into account the time required to do so.
When the setting change state is finished, at least the front door 12 should be in the open state. Therefore, even if the setting change state is ended, the slot machine 10 side detects a door open error and issues an error notification. It is not possible to proceed (start) the game when a door open error occurs. When the door open error occurs, the blocker 45 is controlled to be off (a state in which medals are returned), so even if medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, no bet is made. Even if a bet is placed, the game will not start even if the start switch 41 is operated.

To cancel the door open error, close the front door 12 and turn off the door switch 17. Although it is possible to configure the door open error to be resolved the moment the door switch 17 is turned off, generally the key is inserted into a key insertion slot provided in the front door 12 for opening the front door 12. By inserting the key and rotating the key in the opposite direction (for example, counterclockwise) to open the front door 12, the door open error is resolved (the error notification is terminated). Therefore, the preparation time "T11" for starting the game after the end of the setting change state includes the operation time for closing the front door 12, inserting the key, and canceling the door open error. This is because the game cannot be started while the door open error has occurred.

When the setting change state is ended on the condition that the setting key switch 152 is turned off, it is possible to end the setting change state even if the front door 12 is open. Therefore, in this case, the setting change end sound starts to be output with the front door 12 open, and the effect lamp 21 also starts to light up, indicating that the setting change has ended.

On the other hand, it is also possible to adopt a specification in which the setting change state does not end unless the front door 12 is closed. In this case, simply turning off the setting key switch 152 does not end the setting change state, but closing the front door 12 (turning off the door switch 17) is set as one of the conditions for ending the setting change state. Note that the setting change state may be ended simply by closing the front door 12. In this case, when the front door 12 is closed (when the door switch 17 is turned off), output of the setting change completion sound is started. Alternatively, the setting change state may end when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is canceled. In this case, when the door open error is cleared, the output of the setting change completion sound is started.

Even if the setting change state ends when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is canceled, as described above, the time from the end of the setting change to the end of one game is "T11+T12". Since the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is shorter than "T01", the output of the setting change end sound ends before one game ends immediately after the setting change ends.
Further, if the setting key switch 152 is turned off, even if the front door 12 is open, if the setting change state is to be ended, the output of the setting change end sound is started while the front door 12 is open. Therefore, even if you close the front door 12 afterwards, cancel the door open error, and end one game after the time "T11+T12", the output of the setting change end sound will end before the end of the game. .
Furthermore, if the (operation) time from the end of the settings change state to the time when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is canceled is "T10", the time from the end of the settings change state until the start of one game is The preparation time is "T10+T11". Therefore, it goes without saying that "T01<T10+T11+T12".

The above is a case where the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is set to be shorter than the time "T11+T12" from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The relationship between the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound and the time "T11+T12" from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game can be set in various ways as follows.
(1) Set the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound to be shorter than the average time "T11+T12" when the winning combination result is non-winning.
(2) Set the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound to be shorter than the average time "T11+T12" when a special winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery result. In addition, when a special winning combination is won in the winning lottery result, the above-mentioned freeze may or may not be executed, so the average time thereof is "T12". For example, when winning a special prize, if a freeze is executed with a probability of ``p''%, and a freeze is not executed with a probability of ``100-p''%, the average value of 1 gaming time ``T12'' is:
"Average one game time without freeze T12 x (100-p)/100" + "Average one game time with freeze T12 x p/100"
becomes.

<Nineteenth embodiment (B): When the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine>
Next, the relationship between the setting change state, setting change end sound, and one game time in the pachinko game machine will be explained.
First, an overview of Pachinko gaming machines will be explained.
FIG. 97 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 viewed from the front side (player side). Further, FIG. 98 is an external perspective view of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 viewed from the back side. In addition, in FIG. 98, illustration of the unit including the image display device 543 and the game board 504 is omitted, and the glass door 505 is shown so as to be visible from the back side. Furthermore, in FIG. 98, illustrations of board cases other than the main board case 550 are appropriately omitted.
Furthermore, FIG. 99 is a block diagram of the Pachinko gaming machine 500.

In a hall, a pachinko gaming machine 500 is generally installed on an island. First, the pachinko gaming machine 500 includes an outer frame 501 and a front frame 502. The outer frame 501 is a frame formed to surround the outer periphery of the pachinko gaming machine 500. The front frame 502 is attached to the front side (player side) of the outer frame 501 in FIG. 97. The front frame 502 is attached to the outer frame 501 by a hinge mechanism 503 provided at the upper left end of the outer frame 501 in FIG. 97 so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 501. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 500 is installed on an island, the outer frame 501 is fixed to the island, but the front frame 502 is openable and closable relative to the outer frame 501, making it possible to access the back side of the front frame 502.

The front frame 502 is provided with a game board 504. Although not shown, the game board 504 is provided with an image display device 543, nails, accessories, a windmill, various prize openings (including a starting opening 532 to be described later), and the like. Further, the portion of the front frame 502 other than the game board 504 is provided with a presentation lamp 541, a speaker 542, an upper plate 506, a lower plate 507, a firing handle 508, and the like.

A key insertion slot 521 is formed on the right side edge of the front frame 502 in FIG. 97 .
When the front frame 502 is closed to the outer frame 501 (the state shown in FIG. 97), by inserting the key from the key insertion slot 521 and performing an unlocking operation between the outer frame 501 and the front frame 502. , the front frame 502 can be opened forward (towards the player) with respect to the outer frame 501 about the hinge mechanism 503 as a central axis. When the front frame 502 is opened to the outer frame 501, the game board 504, glass door 505, production lamp 541, speaker 542, upper plate 506, lower plate 507, and firing handle attached to the front frame 502 side The entire body including 508 moves forward with respect to the outer frame 501.
When the front frame 502 is opened, a frame opening switch 523, which will be described later, is turned on. When the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, a frame opening error is notified.

The glass door 505 is attached to the front surface of the game board 504 so as to be openable and closable so as to cover the game area. For example, this is to solve the problem when game balls become clogged in the game area. By inserting a key into the key insertion slot 521 and performing an unlocking operation on the glass door 505, the lock between the glass door 505 and the game board 504 is released, and the glass door 505 can be opened. When the glass door 505 is opened, a door opening switch 522, which will be described later, is turned on. When the door opening switch 522 is turned on, it is configured to notify a door opening error.

In the block diagram of FIG. 99, the pachinko gaming machine 500 includes a main control board (main board, main control board) 530, which corresponds to the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, and a sub-control board, which corresponds to the sub-control board 80 of the slot machine 10. A control board (effect control board, effect board) 540 is provided.
The main control board 530, the payout control board 520, and the sub-control board 540 each include a CPU, RWM, ROM, etc., similarly to the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 of the slot machine 10. In FIG. 99, illustration of the CPU, RWM, ROM, etc. is omitted.

Based on the power switch 511 being turned on, the power supply board 510 controls the supply of power.
The power supply board 510 and the payout control board (also called the "prize ball control board") 520 are connected by a harness (consisting of one or more lead wires (also called "signal wires"). Note that all of the boards shown in Figure 99 are connected to each other by a harness. Also, although the illustration of relay boards is omitted in Figure 99, in reality, the boards illustrated in Figure 99 may be connected via relay boards, in addition to being directly connected.
A launch board 512 is connected to the power supply board 510. The launch board 512 is a board for driving and controlling the launch device 513. The launch device 513 is a device that launches game balls into the game board 504 (play area). When the launch handle 508 is operated, the operation is detected and the launch device 513 is driven and controlled to launch the game balls into the play area.

A payout control board 520 is connected to the power supply board 510. A payout device 524 is connected to this payout control board 520. The payout device 524 is a device that lends game balls corresponding to the requested number when there is a request for ball lending from the CR unit, and also pays out prize balls corresponding to the winnings when the game balls win. be. The payout control board 520 and the CR unit are connected via an external terminal board 525.

A door opening switch 522 and a frame opening switch 523 are electrically connected to the payout control board 520. Note that the door opening switch 522 and the frame opening switch 523 may be connected to the main control board 530.
As described above, when the glass door 505 is opened, the door open switch 522 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the door open switch 522 is turned on, the sub control board 540 issues a notification of a door open error, for example.
Furthermore, when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame release switch 523 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the sub control board 540 issues a notification of a frame opening error, for example.

A starting port switch 533 is connected to the main control board 530 for detecting a win to a starting port 532, which is one of the winning ports provided in the gaming area of the game board 504. When a game ball enters the starting hole 532 and the main control board 530 detects that the starting hole switch 533 is turned on, a random value is obtained as described later and a judgment of success or failure is executed (lottery process). Then, based on the result of the validity judgment, the variation time and stop symbols of the special symbols of the special symbol display device 531 are determined, and the variation pattern and the stop symbols of the special symbol display device 531 are controlled to correspond to the determined results.

In addition, on the game board 504, there are general winning holes and big winning holes (winning holes that become jackpots and are opened during special games) as winning holes other than the starting hole 532. The explanation will be omitted in the nineteenth embodiment (B).
Further, the special symbol display device 531 is provided on the game board 504, and is a device that displays the result of the judgment based on the turning on of the starting port switch 533 using a special symbol. In other words, the "special symbol" is a symbol that displays whether the result of the determination is a win or a non-win, depending on the stopped symbol after variation. The special symbol display device 531 is composed of, for example, a 7 segment display.
In addition, the flow from the start of variation of the special symbol to the stop will be described later.

The main control board 530 is provided with a setting key switch 535 having a setting key insertion slot 534 and a setting change (reset) switch 536. Note that the setting key insertion slot 534, the setting key switch 535, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 do not necessarily need to be provided on the main control board 530, and may be provided as separate devices.
The setting key switch 535 is a switch into which a predetermined setting key is inserted through the setting key insertion slot 534, and is turned on by rotating the key 90 degrees clockwise, for example.

The setting change (reset) switch 536 is a switch that serves as both a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch operated when changing a setting value during a setting change state. The reset switch is a switch that is operated to restore the state before the error occurred after the error has been removed. In the following description, it will be referred to as "setting change (reset) switch 536,""setting change switch 536," and "reset switch 536."
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 are provided integrally, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 may be provided separately.
In the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the power is off, insert the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 534, turn the setting key to turn on the setting key switch 535, and turn on the reset switch 536. By turning on the power switch 511, it is possible to shift to a setting change state.

When the setting change state is entered, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 537. The set value display LED 537 is equivalent to the set value display LED 73 in the slot machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, and is configured, for example, from a 7-segment display.
Then, when changing the setting value, the setting change switch 536 is operated. Each time the setting change switch 536 is operated (pressed), the setting value is incremented by 1. For example, when the setting value is in 6 levels, each time the setting change switch 536 is pressed, the setting value increases from 1 to 2.・The set value changes cyclically as follows: → "5" → "6" → "1" →... Then, when the setting key is turned counterclockwise, for example, and the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the set value is determined and the setting change state ends. When the setting change state is completed, the setting value displayed on the setting value display LED 537 also goes out.

Furthermore, when the power is off, inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 534, rotating the setting key, and turning the power switch 511 on with the reset switch 536 off allows the device to transition to a setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 537. When the setting key switch 535 is turned off by rotating the setting key, the setting confirmation state ends. When the setting confirmation state ends, the setting value displayed on the setting value display LED 537 also goes out.
In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, unlike the slot machine 10, even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on after power is turned on, the machine does not enter a setting confirmation state, and the setting value is not displayed.

The management information display LED 538 corresponds to the management information display LED (winning ratio monitor) 74 in the slot machine 10, and in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, it is called a performance display monitor as described above. The management information display LED 538 is composed of four 7-segment segments similarly to the management information display LED 74.

The sub-control board 540 is connected to the main control board 530, and is a board for determining the presentation content based on commands sent from the main control board 530, and for controlling the output of the determined presentation. Although FIG. 99 shows one sub-control board 540, in reality, the sub-control board 540 is divided into a sub-main board (a board for controlling the entire performance) and a sub-sub board (for example, an image display board). (a board for controlling the image display of the device 23);

Similar to the slot machine 10, the performance peripheral equipment includes a performance lamp 541, a speaker 542, and an image (liquid crystal) display device 543, and their outputs are controlled by a sub-control board 540.
As shown in FIG. 97, at least a portion of the presentation lamp 541 is attached to cover the outer peripheral edge of the front frame 502. Further, the speaker 542 is attached to the upper side of the front frame 502. Furthermore, the image display device 543 is installed so that an image is displayed approximately in the center of the game area of the game board 504.

Next, the control process of the pachinko gaming machine 500 will be described.
Figure 100 is a flowchart explaining the startup process of the pachinko gaming machine 500 after it is turned on.
When the power switch 511 is turned on and the power is turned on, in step S701, the main control board (specifically, the main CPU) 530 determines whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the setting change state are met. In this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning to the setting change state are set such that the frame open switch 523 is on, the setting change key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on. If it is determined that all of these conditions are met, the process proceeds to step S702, and if it is determined that all three switches are not on, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S702, the process proceeds to setting change processing (setting change state). Then, when the setting change processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S709.

In step S703, the main control board 530 determines whether the conditions for transition to the setting confirmation state are satisfied. In this embodiment, the conditions for transition to the setting confirmation state are set such that the frame release switch 523 is on, the setting change key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off. When it is determined that these conditions are met, the process advances to step S704, and when it is determined that these conditions are not satisfied, the process advances to step S706.

Proceeding to step S704, a setting confirmation state is entered, and the main control board 530 reads the setting value data stored in the RWM and displays the current setting value on the setting value display LED 537. Next, the process advances to step S705, and it is determined whether the setting key switch 535 is turned off. When it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is turned off, it is determined that the conditions for ending the setting confirmation state are satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S710. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is not off, the process returns to step S704 and the setting confirmation state (display of setting values) is continued.

When the determination in step S703 is "No" and the process proceeds to step S706, the main control board 530 determines whether the reset switch 536 is on. When it is determined that the reset switch 536 is on, the process advances to step S709, and when it is determined that the reset switch 536 is not on, the process advances to step S707.
In step S707, it is determined whether the RWM of the main control board 530 is normal. When the power is turned off, the information at the time of power-off is stored in the RWM of the main control board 530, and the next time the power is turned on, it is determined whether the information at the time of power-on matches the information at the time of power-off. do. When they match, it is determined that the RWM is normal, and when they do not match, it is determined that the RWM is abnormal. When it is determined that the RWM is normal, the process advances to step S708, and when it is determined that the RWM is not normal, the process advances to step S709.
In step S708, state recovery processing is executed. This process is a process for restoring the solenoid state, the state of the special symbol display device 531, etc. to the state when the power was turned off. Then, the process advances to step S710.

When the setting change process (setting change state) in step S702 is completed, when it is determined in step S706 that the reset switch 536 is on, or when it is determined in step S707 that the RWM is not normal, the process proceeds to step S709, where the RWM clear process is executed. This process is a process for clearing data stored in a specified storage area of the RWM (a process for initializing the specified storage area). Note that the data to be cleared does not include setting value data. The process then proceeds to step S710.

In step S710, timer interrupts are enabled. This process is a process for enabling interrupt processing. Therefore, after interrupt processing is permitted in step S710, when the interrupt processing timing arrives, the interrupt processing is executed.
In the next step S711, random number update processing (random number counter increment processing) is executed. This random number is used for various lotteries (selection of stop symbols, selection of effects, etc.).

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the setting change process in step S702 of FIG. In this embodiment, the time when the process of step S721 is started is the start time of the setting change process (setting change state).
In step S721, the main control board (main CPU) 530 reads the set value written in the RWM and determines whether the set value is within a normal range. In this embodiment, the values stored in the RWM corresponding to the setting values "1" to "6" are "0" to "5".

For example, if the value stored in RWM is "0", the set value is "1". Therefore, in step S722, it is determined whether the value stored in the RWM is within the range of "0" to "5", and when it is determined that it is within the range, the process proceeds to step S724. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value stored in the RWM is not within the range of "0" to "5", "0" is stored in the RWM. When the value of RWM is "0", the set value is "1". The setting value "1" becomes a basic setting value as described later. Then, the process advances to step S724.

In step S724, the main control board 530 displays the setting value corresponding to the value stored in the RWM on the setting value display LED 537. For example, when the value of RWM is "0", "1" is displayed on the set value display LED 537.
Next, the process advances to step S725, and the main control board 530 determines whether the setting change switch 536 has been operated. When it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, the process advances to step S726, and when it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has not been operated, the process advances to step S729. In step S726, "1" is added to the set value. For example, if the set value display LED 537 had previously displayed "1", the display is updated from "1" to "2" through the process of step S726, and the set value data stored in the RWM is changed to "0". ” to “1”. In the example of FIG. 101, when the setting value "6" is displayed in step S724, if it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, the process skips step S726 and proceeds to step S727. shall be held.

In step S727, it is determined whether the set value has exceeded the upper limit. For example, if the set value "6" is displayed in step S724, and it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 535 has been operated, it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit has been exceeded. In contrast, if the set values "1" to "5" are displayed in step S724, and it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, it is not determined in step S727 that the set value has exceeded the upper limit.
If it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit of the set value has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step S728, and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step S729.

In step S728, basic setting values are set. That is, "0" is stored as RWM setting value data, and "1" is displayed on the setting value display LED 537. Then, the process advances to step S729.
In step S729, the main control board 530 determines whether the conditions for terminating the setting change process (setting change state) are satisfied. In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, it is determined that the conditions for terminating the setting change processing are satisfied. Therefore, in step S729, the main control board 530 determines whether the setting key switch 535 is on, and when determining that the setting key switch 535 is on, returns to step S724, and determines that the setting key switch 535 is off. If so, the process advances to step S730.

In step S730, the setting value display of the setting value display LED 537 is made non-display.
Next, the process proceeds to step S731, where the main control board 530 transmits a setting change end command to the sub-control board 540. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
When the sub-control board 540 receives a setting change completion command, it outputs a setting change completion sound from the speaker 542 and executes the process of turning on the performance lamp 541 to indicate that the setting change is complete.

In addition, the timing at which the setting change state in the pachinko gaming machine 500 ends is as follows.
(1) When "Yes" is determined in step S729 (when it is detected that the setting key switch 535 is turned off).
(2) When the setting value display by the setting value display LED 537 is hidden in step S730.
(3) When a setting change end command is sent in step S731.
However, in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the end timing of the setting change state is "when it is detected that the setting key switch 535 is turned off" in (1) above. It is determined that
Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the above (2) and (3) may be determined as the end timing of the setting change state.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the flow of one game in the pachinko gaming machine 500.
In the pachinko game 500, the start timing of one game may be one of the following.
(1) When a game ball is fired by the firing device 513 toward the game area of the game board 504. In this case, one game will start even if the game ball has not arrived within the game area.
(2) When the game ball is fired by the firing device 513 toward the game area of the game board 504 and the game ball enters the game area. Although not shown in FIG. 97, a rail is provided in the range from the lower side of the gaming area to the left side to the upper left for guiding the gaming ball fired by the firing device 513 into the gaming area. ing. The moment the game ball comes off the rail (the moment the game ball enters the game area) is defined as the start time of one game.

(3) When the game ball enters the starting hole 532 provided in the game area. Or, when the game ball enters the starting port 532 provided in the gaming area and the starting port switch 533 is turned on.
As described above, there are various possible starting points for starting one game in the pachinko gaming machine 500, but in this embodiment, the above (3) is adopted. The start timing of one game is set as "when the game enters".
Further, the timing at which one game ends is when the fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531 is completed and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

In step S741, the main control board (main CPU) 530 continues to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the starting port 532, that is, whether the starting port switch 533 has been turned on. When it is determined that the starting port switch 533 is turned on, the process advances to step S742.
In step S742, various lottery processes are executed at the timing when the starting port switch 533 is turned on. A random number value is extracted at the timing when the starting port switch 533 is turned on, and based on the extracted random number value, a jackpot lottery (judgment as to whether it is a jackpot or a miss), a special symbol lottery (stop symbols of special symbols) (a lottery to determine which symbol to use) and a variable pattern lottery (a lottery to determine the varying time of the special symbol).

In the next step S743, a prize ball process (a prize ball payout process) is executed based on the winning of the ball into the starting hole 532. Here, the payout control board 520 drives and controls the payout device 524 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls.
Among the various lottery processes executed in step S742, at least a part of the lottery results including the variable time are transmitted to the sub-control board 540. When the sub-control board 540 receives the lottery result of the current game, it controls the performance lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.

Next, the process proceeds to step S744, and the main control board 530 starts changing the special symbol by the special symbol display device 531 based on the lottery result in step S742. In addition, the special symbol display device 531 can change the special symbol on the condition that the previous special symbol has finished changing at that point, and if the special symbol is in the process of changing, the next special symbol will change. The variation is suspended, and after the variation of the currently varying special symbol is completed, the variation of the next special symbol is started.

Further, in step S745, the sub-control board 540 causes the image display device 543 to change the decorative pattern. The variation of the decorative symbols corresponds to a part of the performance in this game.
Here, the device that directly shows the result of the jackpot lottery in step S742 is the special symbol display device 531, and the stopped symbols after the change by the special symbol display device 531 include special symbols corresponding to the jackpot (for example, “7 ”) and a special symbol (for example, “-”) corresponding to the miss.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern is changed by the image display device 543 so as to be linked (synchronized) with the change in the special pattern. When stopping at a special symbol corresponding to a jackpot, the decorative symbol is also stopped at a decorative symbol such as "777" corresponding to a jackpot. On the other hand, when stopping at a special symbol corresponding to a loss (non-winning), the decorative symbol is also stopped at a decorative symbol corresponding to a loss (a symbol other than the decorative symbol corresponding to a jackpot). The special symbol display device 531 is composed of a small 7-segment display, but the image display area of the image display device 543 that displays decorative symbols is larger than the image display area of the special symbol display device 531 (for example, when playing games) It is formed to a size that occupies more than half of the area. Thereby, the player can confirm whether or not the current game is a jackpot by looking at the stopping state of the decorative symbols.

The variation of the decorative pattern in step S745 is controlled to be within the variation time determined by the lottery in step S742. Then, when the variation of the decorative pattern is completed, the process advances to step S746, and the main control board 530 changes the special symbol for the variation time determined by the lottery, and then changes the special symbol so that it becomes the stop symbol determined by the lottery. finish.
Next, the process advances to step S747, and special symbol post-stop processing is executed. The post-stop processing includes, for example, processing for moving to a special game when the current game becomes a jackpot.

In the nineteenth embodiment (B) of the pachinko gaming machine, similarly to the nineteenth embodiment (A) of the slot machine, after the setting change state ends, a setting change end sound is emitted and a lamp indicating the end of the setting change is turned on. Execute. Furthermore, when it is assumed that a game is started at the same time as the setting change state ends, the output of the setting change end sound is configured to end before the game ends.
As mentioned above, if it is assumed that the setting change state is ended when the determination is "Yes" in step S729 in FIG. When the control board 540 receives the command, it starts outputting a setting change completion sound from the speaker 542.

The time from when it is determined "Yes" in step S729 until the output of the setting change end sound (and the predetermined lighting of the production lamp 541) starts is longer than "0" ms, for example, in step S729. The timing is approximately when one interrupt time (for example, "4" ms in the case of the Pachinko gaming machine 500) has elapsed since the "Yes" decision. In other words, after the determination in step S729 is "Yes", the setting change end sound is not output until at least one interrupt has elapsed.
As in the nineteenth embodiment (A), the setting change end sound is a sound that says "The setting change is finished." Further, if the time from the start of output to the end of output of the voice saying "Settings change is finished" is set to "T01" as in the nineteenth embodiment (A), the time "T01" is the same as in the nineteenth embodiment (A). ), it can be set to about "2000" ms.

In addition to the above-mentioned setting change end sound, an effect of lighting the effect lamp 541 in a predetermined lighting manner is executed as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed.
Here, when the effect lamp 541 is to be lit, at least the lighting mode should not be the same as that when the effect lamp 541 is to be lit at the time of a jackpot. For example, if it is determined that lamp A of the production lamps 541 is to be lit in lighting mode a as a production to indicate that a jackpot has been won, the production lamp 541 will be lit as a production to indicate that the setting change has been completed. In this case, a lamp other than lamp A may be turned on. In this case, as long as a lamp different from lamp A is lit, it may be lit in the same manner as the one used to indicate a jackpot.

Further, when lighting the effect lamp 541 as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the lamp A may be turned on. The lighting mode in this case is different from the lighting mode when indicating a jackpot.
As described above, when lighting the effect lamp 541 as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the lighting mode of the effect lamp 541 is made not to be the same as the lighting mode of the effect lamp 541 when a jackpot is achieved. As a result, when a player starts playing immediately after finishing a setting change, even if the effect lamp 541 is turned on to indicate that the setting change has ended, the player will not misunderstand that he has hit the jackpot. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Furthermore, it is preferable to make the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 541 indicating the end of the setting change different from the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 541 when a big win occurs, so that the two are not confused. In other words, it is preferable to set the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 541 indicating the end of the setting change to a lighting pattern that is not used for other performances (or is used very infrequently), so that it can be understood that the lighting pattern is a performance that means the end of the setting change.
Furthermore, for the performance lamp 541, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change has been completed and the lighting pattern when a jackpot has been reached may be the same, but for the lamps other than the performance lamp 541, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change has been completed and the lighting pattern when a jackpot has been reached may be different.
Specifically, for example, when the setting change is completed, the effect lamp 541 and the other lamps are all lit, and when a big win occurs, the effect lamp 541 is lit but the other lamps are not lit. In this way, the manager can know what state the machine is in by checking the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 541 and the other lamps (general lamps of the gaming machine).

Furthermore, when turning on the effect lamp 541 as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, as a general rule, the effect may be output at the same time as the setting change end sound. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started before outputting the setting change end sound. Alternatively, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is started but before the output of the setting change end sound is ended. Furthermore, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is finished.
In the nineteenth embodiment (B), the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change has been completed is turned on at the same time as the output of the setting change end sound is started.

Further, if the lighting time of the production lamp 541 indicating that the setting change is completed is set to "T02" as in the 19th embodiment (A),
T01>T02
T01=T02
T01<T02
However, in this embodiment, it is assumed that "T01<T02". For example, when the time "T01" is set to approximately "2000" ms as described above, the time "T02" may be set to, for example, approximately "2500" ms to approximately "4000" ms.

Next, a case will be described in which the game is started as soon as possible after the setting change state is finished.
In addition, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the configuration is such that the firing device 513 cannot be operated to launch the game ball into the game area during the setting change state. Therefore, at least the game ball cannot be launched into the game area unless the setting key switch 535 is turned off.

However, this is not limited to the above, and the configuration may be such that it is possible to operate the launch device 513 and launch game balls into the game area even during the setting change state. In this case, even if a game ball enters one of the winning holes during the setting change state, control may be performed so that the prize balls are not paid out. Also, even if a game ball enters the starting hole 532, a jackpot lottery is not executed, and the special pattern display device 531 and the decorative pattern displayed by the image display device 543 are not changed.

In the setting change state, as described above, at least the front frame 502 is open. First, a case will be described in which it is assumed that play is possible even with the front frame 502 open.
As described above, the timing for starting the game is when the game ball enters the starting hole 532.
First, if the preparation time until the start of the game is defined as "T21", the total time from guiding the game ball to the launch position within the launching device 513, launching the game ball from the launch position, and having the game ball enter the starting hole 532 is the time "T21".
In this case, the time "T21" is considered to be approximately "2000" ms.
In the above assumption, it is assumed that the first game ball launched from the launching device 513 will land in the starting hole 532.

When the game ball enters the starting hole 532, it is determined as "Yes" in step S741 in FIG. , stops the variation of the special symbol (step S746). Here, in FIG. 102, the time from the time when "Yes" is determined in step S741 to the end of the process in step S746 is one gaming time, and this one gaming time is defined as "T22".
First, when a game ball enters the starting port 532 in a state where there are no reserved balls, one game time "T22" is determined from a range of approximately "10,000" to "30,000" ms, for example. shall be. Therefore, the shortest time for one game time "T22" is "10000" ms.

Note that a shortening function is known that increases time efficiency by shortening the variation time of special symbols when the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, three), but in this embodiment, the setting Since this is the state after the end of the change state, there are no reserved balls. Therefore, in one game time "T22", the special symbol variation time shortening function is not taken into consideration.

From the above, the time required to start the game immediately after ending the setting change state is "T21+T22".
The shortest time of "T21+T22" is approximately "12000" ms.
Therefore,
T01 (Time when setting change end sound is output) < T21 + T22 (Preparation time to start the game + 1 minimum time for the game)
becomes.

Furthermore, when lighting the effect lamp 541 to indicate that the setting change has been completed immediately after the setting change state ends (at the same time as the output of the setting change end sound starts), the lighting time T02 of the effect lamp 541 and "T21+T22 ” The relationship between
T02 (approx. “2500” to “4000” ms) <T21+T22
becomes.
As a result, even if you start playing immediately after ending the setting change state, the output of the setting change end sound will end before you end one game, and the production lamp will indicate the end of the setting change. This means that the lighting of 541 has ended.
FIG. 96 shows the time relationship at this time.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned one game does not take into account the time required to close the front frame 502 after the end of the setting change state, or the operation time required to resolve the frame open error after closing the front frame 502.
Similar to the slot machine 10, when the setting change state is finished, at least the front frame 502 should be in the open state. Therefore, even if the setting change state is ended, the pachinko gaming machine 500 detects a frame opening error and issues an error notification. When a slot opening error is being reported, the game cannot be started. Note that when a frame opening error occurs, the first thing to do is not to operate the firing device 513. Second, although the firing device 513 is in an operable state, even if a game ball enters the starting port 532 (even if a game ball is detected by the starting port switch 533), the game does not start (the lottery process (not executing, not starting the fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531, not paying out the prize ball).

To clear the frame open error, close the front frame 502 and turn off the frame open switch 523. Furthermore, insert a key into the key insertion slot 521 and perform a specific operation to clear the frame open error (end the error notification). Therefore, the preparation time "T21" from the end of the setting change state until the start of play includes the operation time to close the front frame 502, insert the key, and clear the frame open error. If the time from the end of the setting change state until the end of the frame open error by closing the front frame 502 and turning off the frame open switch 523 is "T20", then
T01 (time when the setting change completion sound is output) < T20 + T21 + T22
T02 (lighting time of the performance lamp 541) < T20 + T21 + T22
It becomes.

Note that in the above example, the setting change state is ended when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this, and closing the front frame 502 (turning off the frame opening switch 523) It is also possible to end the setting change state on the condition that the frame opening error has been canceled (operation such as inserting the key into the key insertion slot 521 and rotating it in a predetermined direction). In this case, when the front frame 502 is closed and the frame opening error cancellation operation is completed, the setting change state ends and the output of the setting change end sound is started. Note that the setting change state may be terminated by closing the front frame 502 on the condition that the frame opening switch 523 is turned off (without performing an operation to cancel the frame opening error). In this case, when the frame opening switch 523 is turned off, the setting change state is ended and a setting change end sound is output.

Therefore, even if the setting change state ends when the front frame 502 is closed and the frame open error is canceled, as described above, the time from the end of the setting change until the end of one game is " Since the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is shorter than "T21+T22", the output of the setting change end sound ends before one game is finished immediately after the setting change ends.

The above is the case where one game time "T22" is completed in the shortest time.
On the other hand, the relationship between the output time "T01" of the setting change completion sound and the time "T21+T22" from the end of the setting change to the end of one game can be set in various ways as follows.
(1) The output time "T01" of the setting change completion sound is set shorter than the total time of the average one game time "T22" when the jackpot lottery result is a miss (non-win) and the preparation time "T21."
For example, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device 531 when a miss occurs is in the range of "T22 (min1)" to "T22 (max1)" and the average time is "T22 (avg1)", then
T01<T21+T22(avg1)
Examples of setting the

(2) The output time "T01" of the setting change completion sound is set to be shorter than the total time of the average one game time "T22" when a jackpot is obtained in the jackpot lottery and the preparation time "T21."
For example, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device 531 when a jackpot occurs is in the range of "T22 (min2)" to "T22 (max2)" and the average time is "T22 (avg2)", then:
T01<T21+T22(avg2)
Examples of setting it to

<Twentieth embodiment>
The 20th embodiment relates to a board case of a control board.
As a board case for accommodating a control board, double door type and sliding type are known, and the 20th embodiment is a sliding type board case.
In the sliding method, the exposed area of the control board is smaller than in the double door method, so the number of points that can be accessed by unauthorized persons can be reduced accordingly.
Furthermore, the twentieth embodiment has a structure in which the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 slide while the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560. Therefore, the surface of the main control board 530 that is exposed during sliding movement is a solder surface.
Note that in the control board, the surface on which the CPU, connectors, and other electronic components are mounted is referred to as the "component surface," and the surface to which the legs of the electronic components are soldered is referred to as the "solder surface."

In the 20th embodiment, a board case 550 for accommodating a main control board 530 in a pachinko gaming machine 500 will be taken as an example. However, the board case 550 of the 20th embodiment is not limited to this, and the board case 550 of the 20th embodiment is not limited to the main control board 530 in the pachinko gaming machine 500, but can also be used for the payout control board 520, the sub control board 540, and other control boards equipped with a CPU. It can be applied to cases that house control boards that require security.

Furthermore, the board case 550 of the 20th embodiment is not limited to the control board of the pachinko gaming machine 500, but also the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, the sub-control board 80, and other control boards equipped with the CPU, and have security features. It can be applied to cases that house control boards that require
Specifically, the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 is formed in the same or similar shape to the main control board 530 of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 is formed in the same or similar shape to the main control board 530 of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) of the twentieth embodiment is formed. ) can be accommodated.
Note that the board case 56 shown in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10) can also be applied to the main control board 530 of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 and other control boards. Furthermore, although the second embodiment and the twentieth embodiment may be implemented independently, it is also possible to implement the second embodiment and the twentieth embodiment simultaneously.

FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) and main control board 530, viewed from the front side. Further, FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) and the main control board 530, viewed from the rear side.
Furthermore, FIG. 105 is an external perspective view of the main control board 530 housed in the board case 550, viewed from the front side. Further, FIG. 106 is a front view of the main control board 530 housed in the board case 550, viewed from the front side. Further, FIG. 107 is a front view of the state in which the main control board 530 is housed in the board case 550, viewed from the rear (back) side.

Here, the "front side" refers to the component side of the main control board 530, and the "rear (back) side" refers to the solder side of the main control board 530.
Furthermore, the "upper" in "upper case 560" refers to the component side of the main control board 530, and may also be referred to as "front case (or cover)" or "component side case (or cover)." .
Furthermore, the "lower" in "lower case 570" refers to the solder side of the main control board 530, and refers to the "rear (back) side case (or cover)" and the "solder side case (or cover)". It may also be called.
Furthermore, FIGS. 103 and 106 show a state in which a cover 561 is attached to the upper case 560, and FIG. 105 shows the upper case 560 without the cover 561.

As shown in FIG. 103, the main control board 530 includes the above-described setting change (reset) switch 536 and a setting key insertion slot 534. Furthermore, connectors 539a to 539h are provided for harness connection to other boards, electronic components, or electronic equipment. The various parts shown in the 20th embodiment such as FIG. 103 are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto.
Furthermore, holes 530a are formed at the four corners of the main control board 530 for screwing when the main control board 530 is attached (fixed) to the upper case 560.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 103 and 104, the upper case 560 is formed with openings 563a to 563i through which the connectors 539a to 539h, setting change (reset) switch 536, and setting key insertion port 534 of the main control board 530 can pass (pass through) with appropriate clearances.
A cover 561 is attached to the upper case 560 so as to be freely opened and closed at a portion where the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion port 534 are exposed when the main control board 530 is attached. Note that in this embodiment, the opening and closing of the cover 561 is not detected by a sensor or the like, but it is also possible to detect the opening and closing of the cover 561 by a sensor. Then, it is also possible to make it possible to transition to the setting change state on the condition that the sensor is on (cover 561 is in the open state), or to make it possible to end the setting change state on the condition that the sensor is on (cover 561 is in the open state).

Caulking portions 562 and 572 are provided at one end of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570, specifically, at the left edge when viewed from the front in FIG. 103, respectively. The caulking portions 562 and 572 are used for sealing (caulking) the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 when they are fitted together. After sealing (caulking), the fitting between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 cannot be released unless the caulking portion 562 on the upper case 560 side is destroyed.
Furthermore, in FIG. 103, side walls 565 and 571 are provided at the ends of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 opposite to the one end side (the side where the caulking parts 562 and 572 are provided, respectively). It is being These side walls 565 and 571 come into contact when upper case 560 and lower case 570 are fitted together.

In FIG. 104, bosses 564 (four bosses) are provided on the back side of the upper case 560. In FIG. 104, two bosses 564 are visible. The spacing between the four bosses 564 is the same as the spacing between the four holes 530a of the main control board 530. Furthermore, a screw hole is formed in the boss 564.
In the state shown in FIG. 104, when the main control board 530 is placed against the back side of the upper case 560, the four holes 530a of the main control board 530 and the screw holes of the four bosses 564 of the upper case 560 overlap.

Furthermore, in this state, the connector 539a of the main control board 530 passes through the opening 563a of the upper case 560, and its connector surface is exposed to the front side of the upper case 560.
Similarly, connectors 539b and 539c of main control board 530 pass through opening 563b of upper case 560, and their connector surfaces are exposed to the front side of upper case 550.
Furthermore, connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f of main control board 530 pass through openings 563c, 563d, and 563e of upper case 560, respectively, and their connector surfaces are exposed to the front side of upper case 560.

Furthermore, the connectors 539g and 539h of the main control board 530 pass through the openings 563f and 563g of the upper case 560, respectively, so that their connector surfaces are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560.
In this way, all the connectors provided on the main control board 530 pass through the opening formed in the upper case 560 and are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560. 105 and 106 show the state at this time.
Further, in this case, the gaps between each connector 539a to 539h and each opening 563a to 563g are set to be an appropriate gap, so that each connector 539a to 539h is connected to each opening 563a to 563g. 563g without resistance, and after passing through, so that there is no more gap than necessary between each connector 539a to 539h and each opening 563a to 563g (for example, the gap between the connector and the opening) The design value is approximately 0.5 mm). As a result, it is difficult to use the gap between the connector and the opening to perform a tampering operation.

Furthermore, the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion port 534 of the main control board 530 are disposed so as to be accessible from the front side of the upper case 560 by passing through openings 563h and 563i formed in the upper case 560, respectively (see FIG. 105), but since a cover 561 is attached over the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion port 534 as shown in FIGS. 103 and 106, they are not exposed to the front side. However, the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) including the cover 561 is formed from a transparent resin, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion port 534 can be visually confirmed from the outside of the cover 561.
In the above state, screws are inserted into holes 530 a (four places) from the solder side of main control board 530 and screwed into bosses 564 of upper case 560 , and main control board 530 is fixed to upper case 560 .

Accordingly, even when upper case 560 and lower case 570 are fitted together, main control board 530 moves together with upper case 560.
In this way, the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560 before the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together, so when the upper case and the lower case 570 are fitted together, the upper There is no relative movement between the case 560 and the main control board 530. Therefore, openings 563a to 563g that are slightly larger than the outer dimensions of the connectors 539a to 539h of the main control board 530 are formed on the upper case 560 side, and the connectors 539a to 539h pass through the openings 563a to 563g. By adopting such a structure, it is possible to create a structure in which no unnecessary gaps are created between each of the connectors 539a to 539h and each of the openings 563a to 563g. For example, even if the positional relationship between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 is shifted due to an act of rubbing after the upper case 560 and the lower case 5670 are fitted together, the upper case 560 and the main control board 530 may Since the connectors 539a to 539h do not shift relative to each other, it is not possible to increase the gap between each connector 539a to 539h and each opening 563a to 563g, for example. Thereby, it is possible to suppress misbehavior.

Next, a method of fitting the upper case 560 to which the main control board 530 is attached and the lower case 570 will be described.
FIG. 108 is a side sectional view showing the fitted state of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570, (a) shows the temporarily fitted state (before sliding movement), and (b) shows the fully fitted state ( (after moving the slide).
In FIG. 108, the cross-sectional area is not hatched for ease of viewing the drawing. Further, in the figure, the upper case 560 is shown by a solid line, and the lower case 570 is shown by a two-dot chain line.
As shown in FIGS. 103, 104, and 108, the upper case 560 is provided with a side wall 565, and the lower case 570 is provided with a side wall 571.

Moreover, as shown in FIGS. 103, 104, and 108, the lower edge of the upper case 560 in the longitudinal direction (lower case 570 side) is referred to as a lower edge 560a. Moreover, the edge in the longitudinal direction of the lower case 570 is referred to as an outer edge 570a.
When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped, the shapes of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are formed so that they overlap in the positional relationship shown in FIG. 108(a). When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped, the lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and the outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are formed in contact with each other. This position is referred to as a "temporary fitted state". In the temporarily fitted state, the gap L between the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 is formed to be about several tens of mm (for example, about "10" to "30" mm). ing.
Further, in the temporarily fitted state, upper case 560 and lower case 570 can be separated at any time. In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 108(a), the upper case 560 can be moved in a direction away from the lower case 570 without any interference with parts or the like.

FIG. 109 is a plan view of the side wall 565 and the vicinity of the side wall 571 viewed from the lower case 570 side in the temporarily fitted state.
In the temporarily fitted state, as shown in FIG. 109, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 have a gap L, so one end of the solder surface of the main control board 530 is visible from this gap L. There is. Here, in the connectors of the main control board 530, if the legs of the connector 539g are called connector legs 539g' and the legs of the connector 539h are called connector legs 539h', these connector legs 539g' and 539h' are arranged in the longitudinal direction. There are two rows of legs (see Figure 104).
In the temporarily fitted state, as shown in FIG. 109, only one outer row of connector legs 539g' and 539h' is exposed. In other words, even in the temporarily fitted state, all of the connector legs 539g' and 539h' are not exposed, but only a portion thereof is exposed.

The lower case 570 is configured to be slidable relative to the upper case 560 from the temporarily fitted state shown in FIG. 108(a). Note that the direction of sliding movement is the longitudinal direction of the board case 550, which is the left direction in FIG. 108(a).
When lower case 570 is slid relative to upper case 560, upper case 560, main control board 530, and lower case 570 can be moved without interference until the end of the slide movement. Then, as shown in FIG. 108(b), it can be slid to a position where the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 come into contact. The state shown in FIG. 108(b) is the final fitted state. Note that FIG. 107 shows a state in which the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 are in contact (full fitted state).

When the fully engaged state is reached, engaging members (not shown) formed on the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 engage with each other. This prevents the upper case 560 from being moved in a direction away from the lower case 570 relative to the lower case 570. However, in this state, the lower case 570 can be slid in the opposite direction relative to the upper case 560, and the fully engaged state can be returned to the provisionally engaged state at any time by sliding in the opposite direction.

In the temporarily fitted state shown in FIG. 108(a), the caulking portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the caulking portion 572 of the lower case 570 are misaligned in the vertical direction; In the fitted state, the caulking portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the caulking portion 572 of the lower case 570 overlap, allowing caulking using both. If the caulking part 562 and the caulking part 572 are caulked at this position, unless the caulking part 562 of the upper case 560 is cut (destroyed), the main case 560 and the lower case 570 will not be separated or the upper case 560 will be separated. On the other hand, it is no longer possible to slide the lower case 570 and return it to the temporarily fitted state shown in FIG. 108(a).

However, it is conceivable that a goofy action could be taken in some way to slide lower case 570 relative to upper case 560 to return to the provisionally fitted state, thereby exposing the solder surface of main control board 530.
In contrast, if the connector pins are not all exposed, but only some of them are exposed, as shown in FIG. 109, cheating can be made more difficult.
Furthermore, even in the provisionally mated state, not all of the connector legs are exposed. In the example of the twentieth embodiment, the exposed connector legs are connector legs 539g' and 539h', and the legs of the other connectors 539a, 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e, and 539g are not exposed.

When a sliding method is adopted for the board case 550, the sliding direction is usually the longitudinal direction of the board case. In this case, the amount of sliding movement is related to the number of exposed connector legs.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, the connector is arranged near the outer periphery of the main control board 530. For example, if a connector is provided in the center of the main control board 530, the opening of the upper case 560 corresponding to the connector has to be approximately square-shaped with four sides surrounded by side walls. However, if the connector is arranged inside a substantially square-shaped interior surrounded by side walls on four sides, it becomes difficult to insert and remove the connector. Therefore, in this embodiment, connectors 539a to 539h are arranged near the outer periphery of the main control board 530, as shown in FIG. 103.

Specifically, in FIG. 103, a connector 539a is arranged near the left edge of the main control board 530, connectors 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e, and 539f are arranged near the upper edge, and connectors 539g and 539h are arranged near the right edge. was placed.
Each of the connector openings 563 of the upper case 560 has a structure in which there is no wall at least on the outside. For example, as shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the opening 563a through which the connector 539a passes has a substantially concave shape with no side wall on the left side (outside) in the figure.
Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the opening 563b through which the connectors 539b and 539c pass has a substantially concave shape with no side wall on the upper (outside) side in the figure.

Furthermore, the periphery of the openings 563c, 563d and 563e through which the connectors 539d, 539e and 539f pass, respectively, is substantially L-shaped with no side walls on the upper and right sides (outside) in FIG.
Furthermore, the periphery of the openings 563f and 563g through which the connectors 539g and 539h pass, respectively, has a side wall only on the left side (inner side) in the figure, as shown in Fig. 105. This shape makes it easy to insert and remove the connectors.

Further, when the connectors are arranged as described above with respect to the main control board 530, when the lower case 570 is slid as in this embodiment, the first exposed legs of the connectors are the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h. feet (539g' and 539h').
Furthermore, when the amount of sliding movement is made larger than in this embodiment, the legs of the connector 539f are exposed next.

Therefore, in this embodiment, among the connectors of the main control board 530, the legs of the connectors 530a to 539f are not exposed even if the lower case 570 is slid relative to the upper case 506. For example, in FIG. 105, if the connector group of connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f is arranged further to the left in the figure (closer to connectors 539b and 539c), the amount of sliding movement can be increased more than in this embodiment. Even if provided, it is possible to configure the connector 539f so that its legs are not exposed.

Further, when the lower case 570 is slid relative to the upper case 560 as in this embodiment, the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h arranged near the right edge of the main control board 530 in FIG. 105 are easily exposed. . Therefore, in this embodiment, when the lower case 570 is slid relative to the upper case 560, the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h (connector legs 539g' and 539h') are exposed; Rather than exposing all of the feet, only a portion of the feet are exposed, making it as difficult as possible for the foot to tumble.

It is preferable that the number of connectors in which at least some of the legs are exposed due to sliding movement be as small as possible.
Also, when the number of rows of legs of one connector is "N" (N is an integer greater than or equal to 2), the number of exposed legs should be "N-1" or less (that is, not all of them are exposed). It is preferable. Furthermore, when the number of rows of legs of the connector is "1", it is preferable that the legs of the connector are configured not to be exposed.
Alternatively, when the number of pins of the connector is "N", that is, the number of legs of the connector is "N", the "n"th ("n" ≤ "N-1") of the "N" pins is ''), but the pins after the "n+1"th pin are not exposed (that is, all the pins are configured not to be exposed).
Furthermore, among the pins of the connector, at least one reference pin may be configured so as not to be exposed. By preventing at least one pin from being exposed, it is possible to make tampering more difficult than when all pins are exposed.

Further, when the main control board is the main control board 530 in the pachinko gaming machine 500, as shown in FIG. Since it is electrically connected to the control board 540 and the like, it is connected to these boards, electronic components, and the like. Connections are made using lead wires. Further, a plurality of lead wires are combined into one harness, a connector terminal is attached to the end of the harness, and this connector terminal is connected to a connector on the main control board 530.
Here, among the lead wires connected to the main control board 530, the lead wire that should particularly ensure security is the lead wire into which the signal of the starting port switch 533 (signal related to the lottery) is input. Therefore, the connector to which the signal of the starting port switch 533 is input should be configured so that its connector legs are not exposed even when it is slid (at least one row of legs is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed). is preferred.

Furthermore, with respect to the connector connected to the payout control board 520, from the viewpoint of preventing the payout from occurring, the legs of the connector are not exposed even if the connector is slid (at least one row of legs is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed). It is preferable to configure it so that it is not exposed.
Furthermore, a lead wire that supplies power to the main control board 530 (a lead wire connected to the power supply board 510 if the power supply board 510 and the main control board 530 are directly connected), a lead wire that supplies power to the sub control board 540, For each connector to which the connected lead wires and the lead wires connected to the board for outputting external signals are connected, make sure that at least one foot row is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed. It is preferable that the configuration is as follows.

On the other hand, when the main control board is the main control board 50 in a slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to a medal selector, various operation switches, a power switch 11, a medal count display device, a pattern display device, a medal payout device, etc.
Among the leads connected to the main control board 50, the lead for which security is particularly required is the lead to which the signal (signal related to the lottery) of the start switch 41 is input. Therefore, it is preferable that the connector to which the lead to which the signal of the start switch 41 is input is connected is configured so that the connector legs are not exposed even when slid (at least one row of legs is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed).

Furthermore, the lead wire through which the signal from the input sensor 44 is input also requires security from the viewpoint of preventing credit fraud. Therefore, for the connector to which the lead wire to which the signal of the input sensor 44 is input is connected, even if it is slid, the legs of the connector will not be exposed (at least one row of legs will not be exposed, or at least one pin will be It is preferable to configure it so that it is not exposed.

Furthermore, each connector is connected to a lead wire connected to the medal dispensing device, specifically a lead wire for outputting a drive signal for the hopper motor 36, and a lead wire for inputting a signal from the dispensing sensor 37. Also, from the viewpoint of preventing discharging gore, it is preferable to configure the connector so that its connector legs are not exposed even if it is slid (at least one row of legs is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed). .
In addition, as in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, there is a connector having a lead wire related to the power supply, a connector having a lead wire connected to the sub-control board 80, and a lead connected to the board for transmitting external signals. It is preferable that each connector to which each line is connected is configured so that at least one leg row is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed.

<21st embodiment>
The twenty-first embodiment relates to the thickness (diameter) of a lead wire (also referred to as a "signal wire").
In the 21st embodiment, the lead wire related to starting is made the thinnest, and within one connector terminal having the lead wire related to starting, at least one other lead wire having the same thickness as the lead wire related to starting is provided, In addition, by providing at least one lead wire that is thicker than the lead wire related to starting, it is difficult to identify the lead wire related to starting, and it is possible to suppress misbehavior (starting illegally or starting at an intentional timing). It is something to do.

Here, in the Pachinko gaming machine 500, the lead wire related to starting corresponds to the lead wire connecting the starting port switch 533 and the main control board 530.
Further, in the slot machine 10, a lead wire related to starting corresponds to a lead wire that connects the start switch 41 and the main control board 50.
Note that the "starting lead wire" is actually composed of two wires, one of which serves as a starting signal line and the other one serves as a GND line. In this embodiment, the starting signal line is referred to as a "starting-related lead wire" and does not include the GND line. However, the GND wire may be included in the lead wires other than the lead wires related to starting.

FIG. 110 is a plan view showing a state in which harnesses B to H are connected to connectors 539b to 539h of main control board 530, respectively.
Note that in FIG. 110, illustration of the board case 550 is omitted. Further, although the main control board 530 is illustrated in FIG. 110, the present invention is not limited to the main control board 530, and can be applied to the main control board 50 as well. In other words, the twenty-first embodiment can be applied to both the slot machine 10 and the Pachinko gaming machine 500.
Further, the connector terminals attached to the tips of harnesses B to H are respectively referred to as "harness B connector terminal" to "harness H connector terminal."

The connector 539a is normally a connector to which no cable or the like is connected. The connector 539a is a connector that is connected to a verification device when gaming machine enforcement authorities use the verification device to check data stored in the CPU, ROM, and RWM.
Further, connectors 539b to 539h are concave connectors mounted on the main control board 530, and harness B connector terminals to harness H connector terminals (convex connectors) are connected to these connectors, respectively.
Further, FIG. 111 is a front view showing details of each of the harnesses B to H and the harness B to H connector terminals.
Each of the harnesses B to H is composed of a plurality of lead wires, and in FIG. 111, each lead wire is numbered. For example, harness B consists of nine lead wires 1 to 9 in the first row (top row in the diagram) and nine lead wires 10 to 18 in the second row (bottom row in the diagram). It is a harness that

Each connector terminal of harnesses B, C, D, G, and H consists of two rows. On the other hand, each connector terminal of harnesses E and F consists of one row.
Note that the harnesses and connector terminals shown in FIG. 111 are merely examples, and the connector terminals may be configured, for example, in three or more rows. Further, the number of lead wires in one row is determined depending on the purpose (number of signal wires), and is not limited to that shown in FIG. 111, and may be one or more than 10. .
Note that even if it is composed of one lead wire, it will be referred to as a "harness."
Furthermore, in addition to harnesses with each lead wire separated (regardless of whether they are bundled or not), such as discrete wire cables, there are also harnesses that have separate lead wires, such as flat cables and ribbon cables. This also includes those in which all the lead wires are integrally connected (regardless of whether they are separable or not).

Moreover, in FIG. 111, two types of thickness are illustrated as lead wires. In the figure, lead wires indicated by single circles indicate thin lead wires, and lead wires indicated by double circles indicate thick lead wires. Here, the "thickness of the lead wire" refers to the diameter of the lead wire. Therefore, for example, if the thickness of a lead wire indicated by a single circle is a diameter D1, and the thickness of a lead wire indicated by a double circle is a diameter D2, "D1<D2".
In the example of FIG. 111, two types of lead wire thickness are shown, but the harness is not limited to this, and the harness may be constructed from lead wires of three or more different thicknesses.

In FIG. 111, lead wires related to starting (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, lead wires connecting the starting port switch 533 and the main control board 530; in the case of the slot machine 10, the lead wires connecting the start switch 41 and the main control board 530) ) is the seventh lead wire of harness D. As the lead wire for starting, the thinner one of the two thicknesses is used. This is to make the lead wires related to starting as inconspicuous as possible by using thin lead wires. Furthermore, by using thin lead wires, the wires are more likely to break in the event of fraudulent activity (modification, etc.), making it easier to detect abnormalities. In other words, thicker lead wires are less likely to break than thin lead wires even in the event of fraudulent activity, and if a bundle of thick lead wires is bundled, even if a part breaks, it will be difficult to detect. This is because it is difficult.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lead wire related to starting may be a thick lead wire. Alternatively, when lead wires of three different thicknesses are used, a lead wire of an intermediate thickness may be used as the lead wire for starting.
Note that there are cases where only two lead wires related to starting and its GND wire are connected to one connector terminal.
On the other hand, the harness D shown in FIG. 111 has a lead wire (No. 7) related to starting and a plurality of other lead wires.

Furthermore, in harness D, which includes a lead wire (number 7) related to starting, at least one lead wire of the same thickness as the lead wire (number 7) related to starting is provided. This is to make it difficult to identify which lead wire it is (to make cheating difficult) even if it is known that the lead wire related to starting is included in connector D. In this example, lead wires 2, 4, and 8 are the same thickness as lead wire 7 (lead wire related to starting).

Furthermore, a No. 8 lead wire of the same thickness is arranged adjacent to the No. 7 lead wire of the harness D. This is to make it difficult to identify the lead wire related to starting by arranging the lead wire of the same thickness adjacent to the lead wire related to starting. In the example of FIG. 111, the No. 8 lead wire located on the right side of the No. 7 lead wire in the harness D is made to have the same thickness as the No. 7 lead wire, but this is not limited to this. The thickness of the wire may be the same as the thickness of the No. 7 lead wire. Alternatively, the thickness of the No. 3 lead wire may be set to be the thickness of the No. 7 lead wire. In the harness D, the lead wires "adjacent" to the No. 7 lead wire correspond to the No. 3, No. 6, and No. 8 lead wires in the example of FIG. 111. At least one of these lead wires is set to have the same thickness as the No. 7 lead wire.

Furthermore, harness D is provided with one or more lead wires having a thickness different from the lead wire related to starting (number 7). In the example of FIG. 111, lead wires 1, 3, 5, and 6 have a thickness different from the lead wire related to starting (number 7). By including lead wires of a different thickness from the lead wire related to starting within one connector terminal (harness D connector terminal), it is possible to make the lead wire related to starting more difficult to identify.

In addition to lead wires related to starting, important signal wires, specifically lead wires related to inputting game media, lead wires related to payout, lead wires for transmitting external signals, etc., are also used to prevent tampering. From the viewpoint of It is preferable.
Furthermore, it is preferable that the lead wire for starting and the lead wire for power supply are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other. This is to make the lead wires related to starting less susceptible to noise.
Here, "not adjacent" means that, for example, if lead wire No. 7 of harness D is a lead wire related to starting, wires No. 3, 6, and 8 of harness D are not set as lead wires for power supply. This can be mentioned.

Further, as in this embodiment, for example, when the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are arranged in a straight line on the main control board 530 and the distance between both connector terminals is short, When the lead wire of the harness H is set as the lead wire for starting, it is preferable that the No. 1 lead wire of the harness H is not set as the lead wire for the power supply.
On the other hand, even if the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are lined up in a straight line on the main control board 530, if there is a certain distance between the two connector terminals, the fifth lead of the harness G There is no problem even if the wire is set as a lead wire for starting, and the No. 1 lead wire of harness H is set as a lead wire for power supply.

Furthermore, when a connector terminal of a harness including a lead wire related to starting is adjacent to a connector terminal of another harness, the harness including the lead wire related to starting is placed below the other harness, and It is preferable to wire the lead wires so that they are hidden from the outside as much as possible.
FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing an example of hiding lead wires related to starting. In FIG. 112, in order to simplify the drawing, harness D and harness E both consist of one row of lead wires, harness D consists of three lead wires, and harness E consists of five lead wires. Illustrated. It is assumed that the lead wire of the harness D that is closest to the harness E is set as the lead wire related to starting.
In this case, the direction in which the harness D extends is set to the harness E side, and the harness E is wired so as to pass above the harness D. Thereby, the lead wire for starting the harness D is hidden from the outside as much as possible, and security can be improved.

<Twenty-second embodiment>
The twenty-second embodiment relates to a setting change state. The description of the 22nd embodiment partially overlaps with the 19th embodiment, but will be explained anew.
First, in the case of the slot machine 10, before shifting to the setting change state, check whether the door switch 17 is on, whether the setting key switch 152 is on, and whether the reset switch 153 is on. It is possible to move to the setting change state on the condition that all these switches are on. If only some of the three switches are on, or if all the switches are off, the setting change state does not occur. As a result, even if the setting key switch 152 is accessed by illegally drilling a hole in the front door 12 with a drill or the like, the setting change state will not be entered unless the door switch 17 is turned on.

In addition, even if the door switch 17, setting key switch 152, and reset switch 153 are all turned on after the power is turned on, the state does not transition to the setting change state. When the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, it is possible to transition to the setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the current setting value can be confirmed, but the setting value cannot be changed. Note that the door switch 17 may be turned on as a condition for transitioning to the setting confirmation state. Furthermore, the reset switch 153 may be turned off as a condition for transitioning to the setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the setting change state are set such that the setting key switch 152 is turned from on to off, and that the door switch 17 is on. As a result, it is possible to eliminate a situation in which the setting change state ends before the door switch 17 is turned off, that is, the front door 12 is not opened (a state in which there is a high possibility of misbehavior).
Here, in this embodiment, it is possible to enter the setting change state on the condition that the door switch 17 is on, and it is possible to end the setting change state on the condition that the door switch 17 is on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, it is possible to enter the setting change state on the condition that the door switch 17 is on, and the on/off state of the door switch 17 is not determined at the end of the setting change state. It's okay.

Second, when transitioning to the setting change state, it is not determined whether the door switch 17 is on or off, but at the end of the setting change state, it is determined whether the door switch 17 is on or off, and if the door switch 17 is not on. It may also be possible to prevent the setting change state from ending.
Furthermore, thirdly, when transitioning to the setting change state, it is not determined whether the door switch 17 is on or off, but if the door switch 17 is not on, the set value will not be changed even if the setting change switch 153 is operated. It may be set to
Furthermore, fourthly, when transitioning to the setting change state, it is not determined whether the door switch 17 is on or off, and during the setting change state, the set value can be changed by operating the setting change switch 153. It may be configured so that when the start switch 41 is operated to confirm the value, unless the door switch 17 is turned on, the set value will not be confirmed (the new set value will not be stored in the RWM 53). .

In addition, in order to shift to the setting change state in the slot machine 10, the power is turned on while the reset switch 153 is turned on. After moving to (setting change processing), the current setting value stored in the RWM 53 is cleared before the setting value becomes changeable. In this case, the set value data becomes "0". Therefore, the setting value at the start of the setting change state is "1".

In addition, when the reset switch 153 is turned on and the power switch 11 is turned on in order to shift to the setting change state, the information displayed on the management information display LED 73 (role ratio monitor) in the storage area of the RWM 53 is Such data is not cleared. The data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 73 includes a game count counter, a payout count counter (including a ring buffer), and each ratio data.

In the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the power is turned on, whether or not the frame release switch 523 is on, whether the setting key switch 535 is on, and whether or not the reset switch 536 is on is checked. It is possible to shift to a setting change state on the condition that these three switches are on. If only some of the three switches are on, or if all the switches are off, the setting change state does not occur. As a result, in an illegal state where the front frame 502 is not open, even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on, the setting change state does not occur.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 98, the back side of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 is not configured in a closed state (see FIG. 22) like the slot machine 10, but is in an open state.
Therefore, depending on the situation of the island installed in the hall, it is conceivable that the player could sneak around to the back side of the pachinko game machine 500 and access the main control board 530 without opening the front frame 502. However, if the frame release switch 523 is not on, it is determined that the state is not normal, and the state is not changed to the setting change state (setting values cannot be changed).

Moreover, even if the frame release switch 523 is turned on, the setting key switch 535 is turned on, and the reset switch 536 is turned on after the power is turned on, the setting change state does not occur. Furthermore, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting key switch 535 is turned on after the power is turned on, the setting key switch 535 does not shift to the setting change state and also shifts to the setting confirmation state. do not.
In the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, as described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting key switch 535 turned on (the reset switch 536 is in the off state), , it is possible to move to the setting confirmation state.

Further, in a case where opening of the front frame 502 and opening of the glass door 505 can be detected separately as in this embodiment, when both the front frame 502 and the glass door 505 are open at the same time (i.e., the door A specification may be adopted in which transition to the setting change state or setting confirmation state is permitted when the release switch 522 is on and the frame release switch 523 is on.
By setting in this way, the function of the set values can be inspected without performing any extra steps in the manufacturing process of the pachinko game machine 500. Furthermore, even if the glass door 505 is removed from the pachinko machine 500 during board maintenance work in the hall after the pachinko machine 500 is installed in the hall, the settings can be changed or checked in parallel with the board maintenance. Therefore, convenience can be improved.

Furthermore, when transitioning to the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the door open switch 522 (the switch that is turned on when the glass door 505 is opened) is not detected. Therefore, when transitioning to the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the glass door 505 may be open or closed. However, when transitioning to the settings change state or settings confirmation state, the glass door 505 is to be closed, and when transitioning to the settings change state or settings confirmation state, it is determined whether the door open switch 522 is on or off, and it must be off. It may be possible to shift to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state under the condition that.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 106, the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are covered with a cover 561. In order to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 534, it is necessary to open the cover 561.
Therefore, a sensor (hereinafter referred to as a "cover sensor") that detects the opening and closing of the cover 561 may be provided, and a transition to the setting change state or setting confirmation state may be made possible on the condition that the cover sensor is on.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500, in the setting change state, the setting value can be changed each time the setting change switch 536 is operated, which is common to the slot machine 10.
In addition, in the slot machine 10, the operation of the start switch 41 is the operation for confirming the setting value, whereas in the pachinko game machine 500, turning off the setting key switch 535 is the operation for confirming the setting value and ending the setting change state.
Furthermore, in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, the setting change state can be ended on condition that the setting key switch 535 is turned from on to off and the frame opening switch 523 is on. This makes it possible to eliminate a state where the setting change state ends with the frame opening switch 523 off, i.e., the front frame 502 not being opened (a state where there is a high possibility of cheating).

In this embodiment, the setting change state can be entered on the condition that the frame release switch 523 is on, and the setting change state can be terminated on the condition that the frame release switch 523 is on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on the condition that the frame release switch 523 is on, and when the setting change state ends, the on/off state of the frame release switch 523 is not determined. You can also do this.

Second, when transitioning to the setting change state, it is not determined whether the frame release switch 523 is on or off, but when the setting change state ends, it is determined whether the frame release switch 523 is on or off, and the frame release switch 523 is turned on. Otherwise, the setting change state may not be terminated.
Furthermore, thirdly, when transitioning to the setting change state, it is not determined whether the frame release switch 523 is on or off, but if the frame release switch 523 is not on, even if the setting change switch 536 is operated, the setting value will not change. You can also set it so that it does not occur.

Fourthly, when transitioning to the setting change state, the on/off state of the frame opening switch 523 is not judged, and while in the setting change state, the setting value can be changed by operating the setting change switch 536, but when the setting key switch 535, which is the operation for finalizing the setting value, is turned off, if the frame opening switch 523 is not on, the setting value is not finalized (a new setting value is not stored in the RWM).

Furthermore, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, even if the power is turned on with the reset switch 536 turned on in order to shift to the setting change state, the management information display LED (performance The data related to the information displayed on the display monitor) 538 is not cleared. The data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 538 is a base value.

Furthermore, it is preferable to provide the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 on the back side of the front frame 502, close to the hinge mechanism 503. In this way, it is possible to prevent the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 from being easily accessed by simply opening the front frame 502 slightly.
98, for example, the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are disposed inside the cover 561, but when the main control board 530 is viewed from the front, the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are disposed to the right within the area of the main control board 530. This allows the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 to be disposed closer to the hinge mechanism 503. In FIG. 98, the left side is the open side, so by forming it as in FIG. 98, the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 can be disposed in a position far from the open side (the left side in the figure).

As for the slot machine 10, it is preferable to arrange the setting key insertion port 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 on the main control board 50 so that they are closer to the axis of rotation of the front door 12 when the front door 12 is opened, as in the above. For example, if the main control board 50 is arranged as shown in FIG. 22, and the left side is the axis of rotation of the front door 12 when the front door 12 is viewed from the front (player) side, and the right side is the open side, when the front door 12 is opened and the main control board 50 is viewed, it appears as in FIG. 10(a). Therefore, if the setting key insertion port 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are arranged closer to the left in FIG. 10(a), the setting key insertion port 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 can be arranged farther from the open side of the front door 12.

Furthermore, as a measure to prevent the transition to the setting change state due to trivia, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, after inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 534, rotate the setting key counterclockwise. The configuration may be such that the setting key switch 535 is turned on. In this case, by configuring the settings key so that it can be rotated clockwise, and by configuring it so that it does not shift to the settings change state when the settings key is rotated clockwise, the transition to the settings change state will be made less obvious. be able to.
In particular, when opening the front frame 502 by inserting a key into the key insertion slot 521, if the front frame 502 is opened by rotating the key clockwise, it is possible to open the front frame 502 by rotating the key clockwise. The direction of rotation of the key and the direction of rotation of the setting key are opposite to each other, making it difficult to understand the transition to the setting change state.

The same applies to the slot machine 10 as described above.
The setting key switch 152 may be configured to be turned on by rotating the setting key counterclockwise after inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151. In this case, by configuring the settings key so that it can be rotated clockwise, and by configuring it so that it does not shift to the settings change state when the settings key is rotated clockwise, the transition to the settings change state will be made less obvious. be able to.
In particular, when opening the front door 12, if the structure is such that the front door 12 is opened by rotating the key clockwise, the rotation direction of the key when opening the front door 12 and the rotation direction of the setting key and are in the opposite direction, making it difficult to understand the transition to the setting change state.

FIG. 113 is a side sectional view showing the positional relationship among the upper case 560 of the board case 550, the cover 561, the setting key insertion slot 534, and the setting change (reset) switch 536. Note that in FIG. 113, like FIG. 108, the cross section is not hatched from the viewpoint of ease of viewing the drawing.
As shown in FIGS. 105 and 113, the highest surface of the upper case 560 is surface S1, and the opening surface of setting key insertion slot 534 and setting change (reset) switch 536 is surface S2. In this case, the surface S2 is formed lower than the surface S1. By forming it in this way, for example, when attempting to access the setting key insertion slot 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536 by inserting a wire-like object from the outside, it is possible to Accessing S2 becomes more difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress setting mistakes.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 113, when the cover 561 is attached to the top surface of the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536, the surface S3 (FIG. 113) which is the top surface of the cover 561 is , is arranged at a position lower than the surface S1 of the upper cover 560.
By forming it in this way, when an attempt is made to access the setting key insertion slot 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536, an attempt is made to insert a wire-like object between the upper cover 560 and the cover 561, or the cover Even if an attempt is made to open the 561, it is made difficult to do so, so it is possible to suppress the setting mistake.

Although the nineteenth to twenty-second embodiments have been described above, these embodiments are not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
A. Nineteenth embodiment (1) In the nineteenth embodiment, a setting confirmation end sound may be output when the setting confirmation state is ended. For example, a sound saying "Setting confirmation is ended" may be output.
Furthermore, if you start playing at the same time as the setting confirmation state ends,
a) The output of the setting confirmation completion sound is terminated before the end of the game when the game is ended at the shortest possible time.
b) The output of the setting confirmation completion sound is terminated before the end of the game when the game is completed in the average time for one game.
c) In a game in which a special role is won (in the case of the slot machine 10) or a game in which a jackpot is won (in the case of the pachinko game machine 500), the output of the setting confirmation completion sound is terminated before the end of the game when the game is completed in the average time for one game.
Examples of setting this include:

(2) Furthermore, at the same time as the setting confirmation state ends, an effect indicating that the setting confirmation state has ended is outputted by the effect lamp 21 (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the effect lamp 541 (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500). It's okay. In this case, as in the nineteenth embodiment, the presentation time by the lamp is
a) End the lamp performance before the end of the game at the earliest.
b) End the lamp performance before the end of the game when the game ends in the average time of one game.
c) Before the end of the game when the game is completed in the average time of one game in the game that won a special prize (in the case of slot machine 10) or the game that became a jackpot (in the case of pachinko gaming machine 500) , ends the lamp display.
Examples include:

(3) When the setting change state is ended (or when the setting confirmation state is ended as in the above example), a setting change (or confirmation) completion sound and a lamp effect are output. However, these setting change (or confirmation) completion sounds and lamp effects are controlled by the sub-control board 80 or 540.
However, this is not limited to the above, and when the setting change (or confirmation) state is ended, an output indicating that the setting change (or confirmation) state has been ended may be executed by an output device controlled by the main control board 50 or 530.

(4) In the slot machine 10, the setting key insertion port 151 (setting key switch 152) and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided on the main control board 50, but this is not limited to the above. A setting change board may be provided separately from the main control board 50, and the setting key insertion port 151 (setting key switch 152), setting change (reset) switch 153, and setting value display LED 73 may be provided on this setting change board.
The same applies to the pachinko game machine 500. A setting change board may be provided separately from the main control board 530, and a setting key insertion port 534 (setting key switch 535), a setting change (reset) switch 536, and a setting value display LED 537 may be provided on this setting change board.

(5) Although we have shown an example of outputting the sound "Settings change has finished" as the settings change completion sound, it is not necessarily limited to this wording; for example, "Settings have been updated" etc. There may be.
(6) In the 19th embodiment, an example is shown in which the game starts immediately after the setting change state ends, but during actual hall operation, it is assumed that the game starts immediately after the setting change state ends. I haven't. For example, it is assumed that a hall manager changes settings and then tries out one game. In such a case, while confirming that the setting change state has been correctly completed by outputting the setting change end sound and the effect lamp, be careful not to confuse the notification by the setting change end sound and the effect lamp with the effect output during the game. One of the objectives is to

B. 20th Embodiment (1) In the 20th embodiment, the lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and the outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are brought into contact with each other to enable sliding movement. However, there are various methods of engaging the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 before sliding movement, and the method is not limited to that shown in FIG. 108. Further, when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped, the shapes may be such that they can be overlapped with a certain degree of freedom. Alternatively, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 may overlap only at specific positions.

(2) How to arrange the connectors 539a to 539h on the main control board 530, and which connector legs should be set to be exposed when the upper case 560 and lower case 570 are temporarily fitted. , various methods can be mentioned.
When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 slide as in this embodiment, the connector legs 539g' and 539h' are exposed first, as shown in FIG. 109. Therefore, in the case of the connector 539a provided on the main control board 530 at a symmetrical position to the connectors 539g and 539h, its connector legs are not exposed even if the amount of sliding movement increases.

Therefore, for example, on the main control board 530, as shown in FIG. 103, from the connector 539a side (left side in the figure), connectors important in terms of security (connectors with signal lines related to starting, signals related to reception and payout of game media) connectors with signal lines, connectors with signal lines related to output of external signals, and connectors with signal lines related to presentation) are arranged in sequence, and connectors with signal lines that are not so important in terms of security are adopted as connectors 539g and 539h. This can be mentioned.

(3) Although the board case 550 has the crimped parts 562 and 572 as an example, the present embodiment can be applied to the board case 550 that does not have the crimped parts. For example, the board case that houses the sub-control board 540 of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 may not have a caulking part, but the 20th embodiment can be applied to such a board case as well.

C. 21st Embodiment (1) The types and numbers of connectors and the types and numbers of harnesses (connector terminals) shown in the above embodiments are examples, and are not limited to these.
For example, in FIG. 111, harnesses B and C may be composed entirely of thick lead wires, or may be composed entirely of thin lead wires.
Further, although the harness E has shown an example in which only thin lead wires are arranged in one row, it may be a harness and a connector terminal in which two or more rows of thin lead wires are arranged.
Furthermore, the harness and connector terminals may be arranged in any number of rows, and the number of lead wires (terminals) in one row may be any number.
Further, in a harness in which thick lead wires and thin lead wires are mixed in one row, it is sufficient that the number of thick lead wires in one row is one or more, and the number of thin lead wires in one row is also one or more.

(2) In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, a set of lead wires connected to one connector of the main control board 530 is defined as "one harness."
For example, harness G connected to connector 539g is one harness, and harness H connected to connector 539h is one harness. When the harness G and the harness H are tied into one at the end, this is called a "harness group" and not a "single harness."

(3) When the main control board 530 and other boards are connected by a harness, a specific connector is mounted on the main control board 530, and a harness consisting of N lead wires is connected to the specific connector. Assume that the connector terminals are connected.
On the other hand, at the other end of the harness, the N lead wires are divided into Nx wires (Nx≧1) and Ny wires (Ny≧1), and a connector terminal X is attached to the tip of the Nx lead wires. The connector terminal X is connected to another board, and the connector terminal Y (≠connector terminal It is assumed that the line is connected to the same board or a different board).
In this case, "one harness" in this embodiment refers to a set of N lead wires connected to the main control board 530 side.

D. 22nd Embodiment (1) In the pachinko gaming machine 500, it is possible to shift to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on, but similarly to the slot machine 10, the setting key switch 535 must be turned on after the power is turned on. It may also be possible to shift to the settings confirmation state. In this case as well, it is possible to determine whether or not the frame opening switch 523 is on, and to shift to the setting confirmation state on the condition that it is on.

(2) As described above, a setting change board may be provided as a separate board from the main control board 50 or 530. In this case, in the case of the slot machine 10, the setting is changed to the side of the open axis of the front door 12 (closer to the open axis) inside the casing, in other words, to the side away from the open end when viewed from the player side. Preferably, the substrate is arranged. Similarly, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, the setting is made on the back side of the front frame 502 on the side of the hinge mechanism 503 (closer to the hinge mechanism 503), in other words, on the side away from the open end when viewed from the player side. It is preferable to arrange a modified board. With this arrangement, the setting key insertion slots 151, 534 and the setting change (reset) switches 153, 536 can be arranged at positions far from the open end. Furthermore, even in this case, it is preferable that the main control board 50 or 530 be placed far from the open end.

In particular, the main control board 50 or 530 is equipped with a management information display LED 74 or 538, respectively, and it is preferable that the information displayed by the management information display LED 74 or 538 is not easily visible. Therefore, it is preferable that the management information display LED 74 or 538 on the main control board 50 or 530 is disposed in a position away from the open side, and the main control board 50 or 530 is also disposed in a position away from the open end.
However, it is possible to make the information displayed by the management information display LED 74 or 538 easily invisible by simply arranging the management information display LED 74 or 538 in a position away from the open side on the main control board 50 or 530, respectively. Similarly, even if the management information display LED 74 or 538 is mounted in approximately the center of the main control board 50 or 530, respectively, it is also possible to make the information displayed by the management information display LED 74 or 538 easily invisible by simply arranging the main control board 50 or 530 in a position away from the open end.

E. All of the embodiments and various modified examples described in this specification, including the 19th to 22nd embodiments, may be implemented in any suitable combination, rather than being limited to being implemented alone.

<23rd embodiment>
Next, a twenty-third embodiment will be described.
The meanings of terms in the twenty-third embodiment are as follows.
"RT" means that the type (number) of winning combinations to be drawn and the winning probability are unique to the lottery, and "RT transition" means a transition from one RT to another RT. This means that the winning probability of at least one replay to be drawn will vary. Therefore, the type of replay and the probability of winning for one RT are values specific to that RT, and the types of replay and the probability of winning for one RT will never be the same. do not have. However, it is acceptable for one RT and another RT to have the same total replay winning probability.

In this embodiment, the RT includes a non-RT and an RT1, as shown in FIG. 131 described later.
Note that "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to "RT0." Therefore, when "RT" is mentioned in this specification, it includes non-RT.
In addition, in this embodiment, the special games (operation states of the role object) include a 1BB game (1BB operation state) and an RB game (RB operation state). Although the 1BB game (1BB operation state) and the RB game (RB operation state) are not strictly included in the RT, they may be considered as one of the RTs.

In addition, RB in this embodiment is a winning combination drawn during the general game of the 1BB game (meaning a game other than the RB game), and if the RB is won during the general game of the 1BB game and the RB wins. , during the 1BB game, transition from the general game to the RB game. For this reason, the RB that is drawn in the general game of the 1BB game is also referred to as "SRB (shift RB)".

Furthermore, it has a main gaming state which is a different concept from RT and whose transition is controlled by the main control board 50 like RT. The main game states of this embodiment include main game states 0 to 5, as shown in FIG. 132, which will be described later.
RT and the main game state have cases where they are linked and cases where they are not linked. For example, when the transition conditions for both RT and main game state are satisfied, both RT and main game state are transitioned. On the other hand, when the transition conditions for RT are satisfied but the transition conditions for the main game state are not satisfied, only RT is transitioned to, leaving the main game state unchanged. On the contrary, when the transition conditions for the main game state are satisfied but the transition conditions for RT are not satisfied, only the main game state is transitioned while leaving RT unchanged.

In the 23rd embodiment, the lottery of "winning numbers" is executed by the winning combination lottery means 61. Therefore, the winning number lottery means 61 is also referred to as "winning number lottery (determination, selection) means". The winning numbers of this embodiment include winning numbers "1" to "41", as shown in FIG. 126, which will be described later.
When the winning number is determined, a "conditional device number" corresponding to the winning number is generated. For example, in FIG. 126, when the winning number "1" is determined, the winning and replay condition device number "1" is generated.

The "condition device number" (also referred to as "winning information") includes an "accessory condition device number" and a "winning and replay condition device number." In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122, which will be described later, "1" to "17" are provided as accessory condition device numbers. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 123 to 125, which will be described later, "1" to "24" are provided as winning and replay condition device numbers.
Then, when the winning number is determined and a conditional device number is generated, the conditional device corresponding to that conditional device number is activated, and the symbol combination of the role corresponding to the activated conditional device can be stopped and displayed on the active line. becomes.
Note that 1BB and RB in this embodiment may not win in a winning game, so they may be inside 1BB and RB, respectively.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the left reel 31 may be referred to as the first reel 31, the middle reel 31 may be referred to as the second reel 31, and the right reel 31 may be referred to as the third reel 31.
In particular, in the names of the RWM 53 described later, the first reel 31, the second reel 31, and the third reel 31 are called.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the twenty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 114, in this embodiment, each reel 31 consists of 20 frames.
In FIG. 114, the symbol numbers are also illustrated. For example, on the left reel 31, the symbol with symbol number 0 is "Replay". Furthermore, in FIG. 114, the symbol numbers when the reels 31 rotate in reverse are also displayed. The symbol numbers when the reels 31 rotate in reverse will be described later.

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reels 31 stop is set to "4". For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated just before the No. 1 "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 passes the active line, the symbol will be moved up to 4 symbols from that symbol to the No. 5 "Replay". It becomes possible to stop on the effective line.
Therefore, for example, if four specific symbols are arranged at five symbol intervals on one reel 31, the specific symbols can always be stopped on the active line no matter where the stop switch 42 is operated. For example, on the left reel 31, "Replay" is placed at No. 5, No. 10, No. 15, and No. 0. That is, the "replay" on the left reel 31 is arranged with four symbols at intervals of five symbols. Therefore, for the left reel 31, no matter at what timing the left stop switch 42 is operated, the "replay" can always be stopped at the active line. Note that such a symbol arrangement may be referred to as a "PB=1" arrangement.

On the left reel 31, the "Bell A" and "Watermelon" are each in the "PB=1" configuration.
Also, on the center reel 31, "Replay", "Bell A", and "Cherry" are each arranged as "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell A", and "Bell B" are each in the "PB=1" configuration.
Furthermore, on the left reel 31, the "black BAR" at No. 3, the "special chart" at No. 8, the "red 7" at No. 13, and the "blue BAR" at No. 18 are arranged as "PB=1" in total. Therefore, no matter when the left stop switch 42 is operated, any of the "black BAR", "special chart", "red 7", or "blue BAR" can be stopped on the active line.
Similarly to the left reel 31, the center reel 31 has a "PB=1" arrangement for the four symbols "black BAR", "blue BAR", "red 7" or "special chart" in total.
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, the combination of the "blue BAR" or "special chart below" and these two symbols results in a "PB=1" arrangement.

FIG. 115 is a diagram showing the display window (transparent window) 18, the positional relationship of each reel 31, and the effective line (display line that displays symbol combinations).
The reel 31 arranged inside can be seen through the display window 18.
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction. Furthermore, each reel 31 is arranged so that three consecutive symbols can be seen from the display window 18. Therefore, a total of nine symbols (pieces) are arranged so as to be visible from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10.

Further, FIG. 115 illustrates the names of symbol positions in this specification. In this specification, for each reel 31, the symbol positions when stopped that can be seen from the display window 18 are referred to as "upper row," "middle row," and "lower row" in order from the top. ”, “middle left row”, and “lower left row”.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 115, valid lines are set for nine symbols visible from the display window 18.
Here, the "valid line" is a line where symbols are lined up when the reels 31 are stopped, a symbol combination line (display line) that forms a symbol combination, and a symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations. This is the line that will win the prize when the line stops on that line. In this embodiment, the prescribed number is three in any gaming state, and the active line is set to be the same in any gaming state.
The effective line in the 23rd embodiment is a so-called linear line descending to the right ("upper left row" - "middle middle row" - "lower right row"). Lines other than this are invalid lines.
Note that the prescribed number may be different for each gaming state (for example, the prescribed number during 1BB operation may be set to "2", etc.). Furthermore, the position and number of active lines may be varied for each gaming state or for each specified number (for example, a plurality of active lines may be provided for a specific specified number).

FIGS. 116 to 121 are diagrams showing the types of winning combinations (such as winning winning numbers drawn by the winning lottery means 61), symbol combinations, number of coins to be paid out, etc. in the twenty-third embodiment.
The roles can be broadly classified into special roles, replays (replayed roles), and small roles.
The symbol combinations and the number of coins to be paid out at the time of winning are determined for each role. When all the reels 31 are stopped, when the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on the active line (the winning combination is won, the same applies hereinafter), the number of medals corresponding to that winning combination is paid out (dividend (profit) ) is given).
However, the number of coins paid out when winning a special winning combination is set to 0 coins. In addition, in replay, medals are automatically inserted and the game can be played again.

In FIGS. 116 to 121, "3 pieces (1)" corresponds to the time when the accessory is not activated, and especially in the 23rd embodiment, games other than 1BB games (for example, 1BB game in a state where 1BB is not won) This corresponds to a state where the winning information (conditional device number) of 1BB is carried over, etc.). In addition, in the 23rd embodiment, since there is a case where AT is executed during a 1BB game, games other than the 1BB game are non-AT. Therefore, in the 23rd embodiment, games other than the 1BB game may be referred to as "normal games (accessories not activated, non-AT)". However, even in a normal game, there are cases of advantageous sections and cases of non-advantageous sections.
Moreover, "3 pieces (2)" corresponds to the time when RB is not activated while 1BB is in operation (during 1BB game). Furthermore, "3 pieces (3)" corresponds to when 1BB is in operation (during 1BB game) and RB is in operation (during RB game).
For example, in Figure 116, 1BB with the winning number "001" becomes a lottery target when the specified number is 3 (1) (when the accessory is not activated), but when the specified number is 3 (2) and the specified number is 3. (3) means that it is not eligible for lottery.

The winning numbers "001" to "017" shown in FIG. 116 correspond to special winning combinations (official objects). In this embodiment, one type of 1BB and 16 types of RB (RBA to RBP) are provided as special winnings.
In the 23rd embodiment, only 1BB is drawn when the accessory is not activated, and RB is not drawn, so there is no case where there is a transition from when the accessory is not activated to when the RB is activated.
If 1BB is won and 1BB is won when the accessory is not activated, no medals will be paid out in the current game, but the next game will shift to 1BB activation (1BB game) corresponding to a special game.

Further, during 1BB operation (1BB game), RB is drawn. If the RB wins and the RB wins during the 1BB operation, no medals will be paid out in the current game, but the next game will shift to the RB operation (RB game) during the 1BB operation (1BB game).
In addition, in the 23rd embodiment, the time when 1BB is in operation and RB is not in operation may be referred to as "general game of 1BB game".
When the termination condition of the RB operation is satisfied, when the termination condition of the 1BB operation is satisfied, the 1BB operation is terminated and the game shifts to the time when the accessory is not activated (normal game). On the other hand, when the termination conditions for RB operation are met, but when the termination conditions for 1BB operation are not satisfied, the process shifts to 1BB operation (and when RB is not activated).

The winning numbers "018" to "047" shown in FIG. 117 all correspond to replays (replay winnings). In the twenty-third embodiment, replays 01 to 10 are provided as types of replays. As shown in FIG. 117, when the accessory is not activated (3 pieces (1)), all of Replays 01 to 10 are eligible for lottery. On the other hand, when 1BB is in operation and RB is not in operation (3 sheets (2)), only Replay 01 is selected for lottery. Furthermore, when RB is activated (3 pieces (3)) while 1BB is activated, replay will not be drawn.

118 to 121 show the small prizes of the 23rd embodiment. As the small prizes of the 23rd embodiment, small prizes 01 to 34 are provided.
Of the small prizes 01 to 34, the payout amount for small prizes 01 to 12 is set to 15 coins when winning, and is a prize that becomes a high-value bell when the so-called push order bell is won (when the small prize group A (small prizes A1 to A6) and small prize group B (small prizes B1 to B6) described below are won).
In addition, the number of coins to be paid out when small prizes 13 to 24 are set to 3, and these prizes result in a low-numbered bell when the so-called push order bell is won (when small prize group A (small prizes A1 to A6) is won).
Furthermore, the payout amount for small prizes 25 to 33 is set to one coin when the prize is won, and the prize becomes a low-numbered bell when the so-called push order bell is won (when small prize group B (small prizes B1 to B6) is won).
Furthermore, the small prize 34 is a prize that is the subject of a lottery when RB is activated during 1BB operation (when 3 coins (3) are activated).

In each of the above-mentioned roles, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role does not stop on the active line in a game where the winning role is won, the roles that will be carried over to the next game and the subsequent games and the roles that will not be carried over are determined.
The hands carried over are 1BB and RB in this embodiment. Since the symbol combinations of 1BB and RB are both set to "PB≠1", there is a case where a game in which 1BB or RB is won does not win a prize. When 1BB or RB is won, the winning information of 1BB or RB is controlled to be carried over to the next game or later in the game until 1BB or RB is won, respectively.

On the other hand, when winning a small winning combination or a replay, that winning winning combination is valid only in the current game, and the winning is not carried over to the next game or later. That is, in a game in which these winning combinations are won, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be won, but regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won, at the end of the game, The rights related to that winning role shall be extinguished.
In the 23rd embodiment, when a winning number including a minor winning combination or a replay is won, it is set so that one of the replays or the minor winning combination always wins, and there is no possibility that the winning number will be missed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is of course possible to provide a small winning combination ("PB≠1") that may be missed.

122 to 125 are diagrams showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc.
First, the winning numbers are drawn in the winning combination lottery means 61. The winning numbers include, for example, winning numbers "1" to "41" as shown in FIG. 126, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 126, for example, when the winning number "1" is won, the condition device "Replay A" corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number "1" becomes operational.
For example, when the winning number "25" is won, the condition device "1BB" corresponding to the accessory condition device number "1" becomes operable.

As shown in FIG. 138, which will be described later, the RWM 53 has a memory area (address "F0A9(H)") capable of storing the winning and replay condition device number, and a memory area (address "F0AA(H)") capable of storing the reel condition device number. For example, suppose that the winning number "11" is won when the reel is not in operation. In this case, the winning and replay condition device number can be updated by storing the winning number value ("11") in address "F0A9(H)". Also, suppose that the winning number "25" is won when the reel is not in operation. In this case, the reel condition device number can be updated by storing the value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation on the winning number value (in the 23rd embodiment, "1", which is the value obtained by subtracting "24" from the winning number) in address "F0AA(H)".

In the 23rd embodiment, the winning number selected in the lottery by the role selection means 61 is compared with "25", and if it is determined that the winning number is less than "25", the winning number can be stored in address "F0A9(H)". If it is determined that the winning number is not less than "25", a control process is performed to derive the role condition device number from the winning number by a predetermined calculation (as described above, in the 23rd embodiment, subtracting "24") and to store the derived role condition device number in address "F0AA(H)". This is an effective derivation method, particularly when the total number of role condition device numbers, "17", is less than the total number of winning and replay condition device numbers, "24", as in the 23rd embodiment.

FIG. 122 shows an accessory (especially 1BB or RB in the 23rd embodiment) condition device.
For example, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the accessory condition device number "1" is an accessory condition device that becomes operational when 1BB is won. When this 1BB condition device is activated, it becomes possible to win the winning combination of 1BB.
In addition, the remarks column in FIG. 122 shows the operation end conditions of the accessory condition device. The 1BB condition device continues until the number of acquired medals exceeds 170, and when the number of acquired medals exceeds 170, the operation termination condition of the 1BB condition device is satisfied and the operation of the 1BB condition device is terminated.
Similarly, the RBA condition device to RBP condition device all end based on 12 games, 8 wins, or the end of operation of the 1BB condition device.

123 to 125 show winning and replay condition devices. Among the winning and replay condition device numbers, “1” to “9” are condition device numbers related to replay, and “10” to “24” are condition device numbers related to small winnings.
For example, when the replay B condition device corresponding to winning and replay condition device number "2" is activated, the winning combination includes replays 01 and 02, so replays 01 and 02 can win. Note that when a condition device is activated, not all of the winning combinations corresponding to that condition device can be won; for example, when the Replay B condition device is activated, Replay 02 can be won in the 23rd embodiment. becomes.
Therefore, in the 23rd embodiment, even if multiple types of replays are won multiple times, only one of the replays wins. Similarly, as will be described later, multiple types of small winning combinations may be won over and over again, but even in this case, only one of the small winning combinations can be won (no duplicate winnings).

When the Replay A condition device corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number “1” is activated, only Replay 01 can win a prize. The symbol combinations of Replay 01 are the winning numbers “018” to “021” in FIG. 117. Therefore, "Replay" - "Blue BAR/Black BAR/Red 7/Special Map Top" - "Bell A" stops on the valid line. When the middle reel 31 stops and "Blue BAR/Black BAR/Red 7/Special Figure Top" stops on the active line (middle middle row), "Replay" stops on the middle upper row. Furthermore, when the right reel 31 stops and "Bell A" stops on the active line (lower right row), "Replay" stops on the upper right row. Therefore, when the symbol combination of Replay 01 stops on the valid line (Replay 01 wins), "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay" (upper replay) stops on the upper line (invalid line).

When the Replay B condition device is activated, Replay 02 becomes a winning prize. The symbol combination of Replay 02 is the winning number "022" in FIG. 117. Therefore, "replay" - "replay" - "replay" (replay downward to the right) stops at the effective line.
When the Replay C condition device is activated, Replay 03 or 10 can be won. Here, the reason why "weak cherry" is written in the notes column is because it can be a so-called square cherry ("cherry" is stopped at the lower left row) in the stopped form. Note that the lower left row is not an effective line. The symbol on the left reel 31 of Replay 03 is "Bell A", but when the number 4 "Bell A" on the left reel 31 is stopped on the active line (upper left row) in Figure 114, the symbol on the left reel 31 is "Cherry". stops at the lower left (invalid line).

In the replay D1 condition device, the reason why "strong cherry 1" is written in the notes column is because it is possible to become a so-called middle cherry ("cherry" stopped at the middle left row). Note that the middle left row is not a valid line. The same applies to "strong cherry 2" of the replay D2 condition device and "strong cherry 3" of the replay D3 condition device.
When the Replay D1 condition device is activated, the winning combination Replay 03, 04, or 10 can be won. Among these, the symbol combination of Replay 04 is "Black BAR" - "Red 7/Cherry" - "Replay/Bell B" as shown in the hand numbers "027" to "030" in FIG. 117. Then, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the No. 3 "Black BAR" is stopped on the effective line (upper left row), and the No. 2 "Cherry" is stopped on the middle left row.

Furthermore, when the Replay D2 condition device is activated, the winning combination Replay 02, 03, 04, or 10 can be won, and when the Replay D3 condition device is activated, Replay 03, 04, 05, or 10 can be won.
Then, when the replay D2 condition device or the replay D3 condition device is activated, if Replay 04 wins, the second “cherry” stops at the middle left row when the left reel 31 stops, similarly to when the replay D1 condition device is activated.

When the Replay E condition device is activated, Replay 06, which is the winning combination, can be won. The symbol combination of Replay 06 is "Watermelon" - "Replay/Watermelon" - "Red 7/Watermelon/Special Figure Top/Black BAR" as shown in FIG. 117. Here, since the "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 has "PB=1", the "Watermelon" always stops on the active line. Further, the “Watermelon” on the middle and right reels 31 has “PB≠1”, but if you press the “Watermelon” with your eyes, the “Watermelon” can be stopped on the active line.
When the Replay F condition device is activated, Replay 07, which is the winning combination, can be won.

When the Replay G condition device is activated, the winning combination Replay 08 or 09 can be won. Here, in order to win Replay 08, when the left reel 31 stops, press the button so that the number 8 "Special Map Top" stops at the upper left row, and when the right reel 31 stops, the number 16 " If you press your eyes so that "Replay" stops at the lower right row, Replay 08 will win, and "Tokuzu Upper" and "Tokuzu Lower" will stop at the upper left and middle left rows. Furthermore, "Tokuzu Upper" and "Tokuzu Lower" also stop at the upper right row and the middle right row. This stop type is referred to as the "strongest cherry" in the 23rd embodiment.

In FIG. 124, when the small winning combination A1 condition device to the small winning combination A6 condition device are activated, any of the small winning combinations 01 to 06 or small winning combinations 13 to 24 included in the winning combination can be won.
Here, when the small winning combination A1 condition device to the small winning combination A6 condition device are activated during the 1BB game (1BB operation), and the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the correct answer, the 15-card winning combination (included in the winning combination) If any of the minor winning combinations 01 to 06) is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in an incorrect pressing order (a pressing order other than the correct pressing order), a 3-card winning combination (minor winning combinations 13 to 06 included in the winning combination) is activated. 24) will win the prize.
On the other hand, when the accessory is not activated, there is no correct pressing order when the small win A1 condition device to the small win A6 condition device are activated. When the accessory is not activated, when the minor winning combination A1 condition device to the minor winning combination A6 condition device are activated, a 3-card winning combination is won even if they are all pressed in the order.

Note that the small win A1 condition device to the small win A6 condition device can only operate when RB is not activated while 1BB is in operation. Therefore, the small win A1 condition device to the small win A6 condition device operate during the general game of the 1BB game (other than the RB game).
Here, the relationship between the small winning combinations A1 to A6 condition devices and the correct pressing order during 1BB operation is as follows.
Small role A1 condition device: 123 (left middle right)
Small role A2 condition device: 132 (left and right middle)
Small role A3 condition device: 213 (middle left and right)
Small role A4 condition device: 231 (middle right left)
Small role A5 condition device: 312 (right left center)
Small role A6 condition device: 321 (right middle left)

For example, when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated during a 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order of "123", in order to win the small winning combination 01, "Watermelon" - " Cherry” - Stop “Bell A”. As a result, "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell A" are stopped on the lower line (invalid line).
In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect pressing order "132", when the left first stop, the correct pressing order is at this point, so when the left reel 31 stops, a "watermelon" (small role) is displayed on the active line. 01) is stopped. Next, at the second stop on the right, since it is the order of incorrect pressing at this point, out of the winning combinations 13 to 17, the small winning combination 17 whose left reel 31 is "Watermelon" is stopped on the active line. That is, when the second right stop is made, the "replay" is stopped at the lower right stage. Furthermore, when the middle third stop occurs, "Red 7/Replay" is stopped at the middle middle stage.

On the other hand, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the incorrect push sequence "213" or "231", the first stop in the middle reel will be an incorrect push sequence at this point, so for example, in order to stop the minor winning combination 14 on an active line, "Bell A" is stopped in the middle middle row when the first stop in the middle reel is performed. Also, when the left reel 31 stops, "Replay" is stopped in the upper left row, and when the right reel 31 stops, "Bell A/Bell B" is stopped in the lower right row.
In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the incorrect push sequence "312" or "321", the first stop on the right will be an incorrect push sequence at this point, so in order to stop the minor winning combination 17 on the activated line, for example, "Replay" is stopped in the lower right row when the first stop on the right is made. In addition, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Watermelon" is stopped in the upper left row, and when the center reel 31 is stopped, "Red 7/Replay" is stopped in the middle-middle row.

As described above, when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "123", a 15 winning combination is won. On the other hand, when the 1BB game is not in progress, that is, in the 23rd embodiment, when the accessory is not activated (1BB not inside and 1BB inside), even if the small role A1 condition device is activated, the correct answer is There is no pressing order. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "123" when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, a 3-card winning combination is won (without a 15-card winning combination). Examples of the winning three-card winning combination include the small winning combination 14 or 17 with "PB=1".

The above is the same for the minor winning combination A2 to minor winning combination A6 condition devices (condition device numbers "11" to "15").
When the small winning combination A2 condition device is activated during a 1BB game, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "132", the small winning combination 02 which is a 15-card winning combination will be won, and the winning combination other than "132" in the pressing order will be won. When the stop switches 42 are operated in the order in which they are pressed, any three-card combination included in the winning combination is won.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination A2 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, any 3-card combination included in the winning combination will be played regardless of the pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order). Let them win.

When the small winning combination A3 condition device is activated during a 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "213", the small winning combination 03, which is a 15-card winning combination, will be won, and if the pressing order other than "213" is When the stop switches 42 are operated in the order in which they are pressed, any three-card combination included in the winning combination is won.
Furthermore, if the small role A3 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, any 3-card combination included in the winning combination will be played regardless of the pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order). Let them win.

When the small winning combination A4 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "231", the small winning combination 04, which is a 15-card winning combination, will be won, and the winning combination other than "231" in the pressing order will be won. When the stop switches 42 are operated in the order in which they are pressed, any three-card combination included in the winning combination is won.
Furthermore, if the small winning combination A4 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, any three-card combination included in the winning combination will be played regardless of the pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order). Let them win.

When the small winning combination A5 condition device is activated during a 1BB game, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "312", the small winning combination 05, which is a 15-card winning combination, will be won, and if the pressing order other than "312" is When the stop switches 42 are operated in the order in which they are pressed, any three-card combination included in the winning combination is won.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination A5 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, any 3-card combination included in the winning combination will be played regardless of the pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order). Let them win.

When the small win A6 condition device is activated during a 1BB game, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct push order "321", a small win 06 which is a 15-coin win is won, and if the stop switch 42 is operated in a push order other than the push order "321", any of the 3-coin wins included in the winning combination is won.
Furthermore, when the small prize A6 condition device is activated while the role is not activated, any three-coin role included in the winning role will be awarded regardless of the pressing order (since there is no correct pressing order).

In addition, when the small prize B1 condition device to the small prize B6 condition device (condition device numbers "16" to "21") are activated inside the SRB while 1BB is in operation, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct button press sequence, a 15-coin role (any of the small prizes 07 to 12 included in the winning role) is won, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in an incorrect button press sequence (a button press sequence other than the correct button press sequence), a 1-coin role (any of the small prizes 25 to 33 included in the winning role) is won.
In contrast, when the special feature is not activated, and when the SRB is not inside during 1BB operation, when the small role B1 condition device to the small role B6 condition device are activated, there is no correct push order. When the special feature is not activated, and when the SRB is not inside during 1BB operation, and when the small role B1 condition device to the small role B6 condition device are activated, a 1-coin role will be won regardless of the push order.
The winning and replay condition device numbers "16" to "21" are selected only when RB is not in operation while 1BB is in operation.

When the minor win B1 condition device is activated during 1BB play and inside the SRB, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct push order "123", "watermelon"-"cherry"-"bell B" are stopped on the effective line to win minor win 07. As a result, "bell A"-"bell A"-"bell B" are stopped on the lower line (invalid line).
In addition, when the minor win B1 condition device is activated during 1BB play and inside the SRB, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the incorrect push order "132", the correct push order is reached at the first left stop, so the left reel 31 stops with "watermelon" (the symbol that constitutes the minor win 07) on the active line. Next, the right reel stops with the second right stop, so the incorrect push order is reached at this point, so of the winning combinations 25, 26, and 28, the left reel 31 stops with "watermelon", for example, minor win 28, on the active line. That is, when the right reel stops with the second right stop, "bell A" stops on the lower right row. Furthermore, when the middle reel stops with the third middle stop, "bell B/watermelon" stops on the middle middle row.

On the other hand, when the small role B1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect release order of "213" or "231", at the time of the middle first stop, at this point Since this is an incorrect pressing order, for example, in order to stop the small winning combination 25 on the active line, when the middle first stop is made, "Blue BAR/Black BAR/Red 7/Tokuzu Top" is stopped in the middle middle row. Furthermore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Replay" is stopped at the upper left stage, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Black BAR/Red 7/Watermelon/Special Figure Top" is stopped at the lower right stage.
In addition, when the small role B1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect release order of "312" or "321", when the right first stop occurs, at this point Since this is an incorrect pressing order, for example, the small winning combination 25 is stopped on the active line in the same way as above.

In addition, in a game in which the small winning combination B1 to B6 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and while the SRB is not inside, there is no correct answer pressing order. Therefore, for example, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the press order "123" when the small winning combination B1 condition device is activated during a 1BB game and SRB is not inside, (without winning the small winning combination 07 which is a 15-card winning combination) ) Win a prize for one card. Examples of the winning one-card winning combination include small winning combinations 25 and 28 where "PB=1".
Similarly, when the 1BB game is not in progress, that is, when the accessory is not activated (1BB not inside and 1BB inside), there is no correct answer pressing order in the game in which the small role B1 condition device is activated. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "123" when the small win B1 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, the small win 07 ( Instead of winning a 15-card winning combination, a 1-card winning combination (for example, a small winning combination of 25 or 28 with "PB=1") is allowed to win.

The above also applies to the operation of the small winning B2 condition device to the small winning B6 condition device.
When the small winning combination B2 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "132", the small winning combination 08, which is a 15-card winning combination, is won, and the correct pressing order When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "132", the small winning combination 08 is not won, but any one-card winning combination included in the winning winning combination is won.
Furthermore, if the small winning B2 condition device is activated during a 1BB game and SRB is not inside or when the accessory is not activated, no matter which pressing order is used (because there is no correct pressing order), the small winning 08 To win any one-card combination included in the winning combination without winning the winning combination.

When the small winning combination B3 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "213", the small winning combination 09, which is a 15-card winning combination, is won, and the correct pressing order When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "213", the small winning combination 09 is not won, but any one-card winning combination included in the winning winning combination is won.
Furthermore, if the small winning B3 condition device is activated during a 1BB game and SRB is not inside or when the accessory is not activated, no matter which pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order), the small winning 09 To win any one-card combination included in the winning combination without winning the winning combination.

When the small winning combination B4 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "231", the small winning combination 10, which is a 15-piece winning combination, is won, and the correct pressing order When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "231", the small winning combination 10 is not won, but any one-card winning combination included in the winning winning combination is won.
Furthermore, if the small winning B4 condition device is activated during a 1BB game and when the SRB is not inside or the accessory is not activated, no matter which pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order), the small winning 10 To win any one-card combination included in the winning combination without winning the winning combination.

When the small winning combination B5 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "312", the small winning combination 11, which is a 15-card winning combination, is won, and the correct pressing order When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "312", the small winning combination 11 is not won, but any one-card winning combination included in the winning winning combination is won.
Furthermore, if the small winning B5 condition device is activated during a 1BB game and SRB is not inside or when the accessory is not activated, no matter which pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order), the small winning 11 To win any one-card combination included in the winning combination without winning the winning combination.

When the small winning combination B6 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "321", the small winning combination 12, which is a 15-card winning combination, is won, and the correct pressing order When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "321", the small winning combination 12 is not won, but any one-card winning combination included in the winning winning combination is won.
Furthermore, if the small winning B6 condition device is activated during a 1BB game and the SRB is not inside or when the accessory is not activated, no matter which pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order), the small winning 12 To win any one-card combination included in the winning combination without winning the winning combination.

The small role C condition device is a condition device that becomes operable when the winning number "22" is won during RB operation (gaming). When the small winning combination C condition device is activated, any one of the small winning combinations 01 to 12 (15 pieces) included in the winning winning combination is won. In this case, which of the 15 winning combinations to win is arbitrary, but for example, the small winning combinations to be won may be varied depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.
The small win D condition device is a condition device that becomes operable when the winning number "23" is won during the RB operation. When the small winning combination D condition device is activated, any one of the small winning combinations 13 to 24 (3-card winning combination) included in the winning combination is won. In this case, which three-card combination is selected to win a prize is arbitrary, but for example, the small combination to be won may be changed depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.
The small win E condition device is a condition device that becomes operable when the winning number "24" is won during RB operation. When the small winning combination E condition device is activated, any one of the small winning combinations 25 to 34 (one-card winning combination) included in the winning winning combination is won. In this case, which one-card winning combination can be won is arbitrary, but for example, the small winning combinations to be won can be varied depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.

126 to 130 show the winning probabilities determined by the lottery table when the winning numbers are drawn by the winning combination lottery means 61, and show the number of winning numbers for each RT (gaming state) and each set value. This is a diagram (number table). Dividing the numerical values shown in FIGS. 126 to 130 by "65536" gives the probability of winning. For example, in FIG. 126, the winning number "1" is set to "4338" in common to all settings, so the probability of winning is "4338/65536."
In FIGS. 126 to 130, for example, if the winning number "1" in FIG. 126 is won, the winning and replay condition device number "1", that is, the replay A condition device becomes operational, and replay 01 becomes possible to win.

The setting value refers to the value displayed on the setting value display LED 73 in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and is different from the information stored in the RWM 53 as the setting value information. Specifically, the setting value information stored in the RWM 53 is in the range of "0" to "5" in the 23rd embodiment. For example, when the setting value information stored in the RWM 53 is "0", the value displayed on the setting value display LED 73 is "1", when the setting value information stored in the RWM 53 is "1", the value displayed on the setting value display LED 73 is "2", when the setting value information stored in the RWM 53 is "2", when the setting value information stored in the RWM 53 is "2", when the setting value information stored in the RWM 53 is "3", when the setting value information stored in the RWM 53 is "3", the value displayed on the setting value display LED 73 is "4", and when the setting value information stored in the RWM 53 is "5", the value displayed on the setting value display LED 73 is "6".

Moreover, the winning combination lottery means 61 executes the winning lottery drawing using the winning combination lottery table. For example, in FIG. 126, winning number 1 (Replay A) indicates that the setting number "4338" is common from setting 1 to setting 6, but in such a case, winning number 1 (Replay A) ) is a winning number, one number "4338" is stored in the winning combination lottery table. On the other hand, if at least some of the numbers are different between settings 1 and 6, such as winning number 3 (replay C), the numbers that correspond to the set values are stored in the winning combination lottery table.
Specifically, in the winning lottery table, for example, "940 (D)" is stored in the 2-byte addresses "XXX0 (H)" and "XXX1 (H)" corresponding to setting 1, and "940 (D)" is stored in the 2-byte addresses of the corresponding addresses "XXX2 (H)" and "XXX3 (H)", and the addresses "XXX4 (H)" and "XXX5 (H)" corresponding to setting 3 are stored. "940(D)" is stored in the 2-byte address of ". In addition, "950 (D)" is stored in the 2-byte addresses "XXX6 (H)" and "XXX7 (H)" corresponding to setting 4, and "950 (D)" is stored in the 2-byte addresses "XXX8 (H)" and "XXX8 (H)" corresponding to setting 5. “950(D)” is stored in the 2-byte address of “XXX9(H)”. Furthermore, "960(D)" is stored in the 2-byte address of address "XXXA(H)" and "XXXB(H)" corresponding to setting 6. Note that the above “XXX0(H)” to “XXXB(H)” indicate consecutive arbitrary addresses in the ROM 54.

For example, when the setting value information is "1" (that is, setting 2), the address "XXX0 (H)" is used as the reference address, the value obtained by doubling the setting value information is used as the offset value, and the address "XXX2 (H)" is set. and "940 (D)" stored in "XXX3 (H)", compare and calculate the random number and the set number "940 (D)", and check whether winning number 3 (Replay C) has been won. Decide whether or not. In the above example, since the digit is 2 bytes, the value obtained by doubling the setting value information is used as the offset value. However, if the arranging number is 1 byte, the setting value information is doubled. It can be used as an offset value without having to do so. In this way, by using a specific address as a reference address and setting the setting value information or a value obtained by doubling the setting value information as an offset value, it is possible to obtain a numeric value corresponding to the setting value information. .

In a game where the special winning combination (1BB) has not been won, if the winning number "25" is won in the current game and the 1BB condition device is activated, if the winning combination 1BB does not win, The winnings will be carried over to the next game. Then, from the next game onwards (within 1BB), the winning number "25" will not be drawn, and the winning numbers "1" to "21" will be drawn. When any of the winning numbers "1" to "21" is won within 1BB, the condition device corresponding to the winning number won in the current game becomes operable, and the accessory condition device does not operate. On the other hand, if none of the winning numbers "1" to "21" are won within 1BB, the 1BB condition device related to 1BB that carries over the winning will become operational, and 1BB will be able to win. .

The same applies to RB, which is another special role.
In a game when RB is not won in a 1BB game, in a game in which one of the winning numbers "26" to "41" is won in the current game and the RBA~RBP condition device is activated, the winning combination RBA~ If the RBP does not win, the winning will be carried over to the next game. Then, from the next game onwards (within SRB), the winning numbers "26" to "41" will not be drawn, but the winning numbers "10" to "21" will be drawn. When any of the winning numbers "10" to "21" is won within the SRB, the condition device corresponding to the winning number won in the current game becomes operable, and the RBA to RBP condition devices do not operate. On the other hand, if none of the winning numbers "10" to "21" are won within the SRB, the RBA-RBP condition device related to RBA-RBP that carries over the winning becomes activated and the winning number is not won. RBA to RBP that have been entered can win prizes.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a number table for non-RT. In non-RT, 1BB is drawn for the accessory (winning number "25"), but RB is not drawn. RB is drawn at the time of 1BB operation (during 1BB game) which will be described later.
In addition, in non-RT, all winning numbers "1" to "9" corresponding to replay wins are subject to lottery. In addition, the winning numbers "10" to "21" corresponding to the winning of the small role will be selected for lottery. Note that the winning numbers "10" to "27" are eligible for lottery in any RT (gaming state) except when the RB is activated.
Winning numbers "22" to "24" are eligible for lottery only when the RB is activated during a 1BB game, which will be described later, and are not eligible for lottery in other RTs (gaming states).

127 is a diagram showing a number setting table in RT1. RT1 differs from non-RT in that the winning number "9" (Replay G) is not drawn. Other than that, it is the same as non-RT.
In both non-RT and RT1, 1BB (winning number "25") is drawn by the numbers shown in Fig. 126 and Fig. 127 during non-1BB, and 1BB (winning number "25") is not drawn in non-RT and RT1 after the winning number "25" is drawn (during 1BB). In other words, the number "19930" shown in Fig. 126 and Fig. 127 becomes "0" after 1BB is won.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a numeral table for non-internal RB (SRB) during 1BB operation. The time when RB is not inside while 1BB is in operation corresponds to the time when the RB is not inside the 1BB game.
In this gaming state, winning number "25" (1BB) is not drawn, but all RBs (winning numbers "26" to "41") are drawn. In this embodiment, all RBs are set to the same number "1807" in all setting values.
Furthermore, replays are not drawn when 1BB is in operation and is not inside the RB. Therefore, the numbers set for the winning numbers "1" to "9" are set to "0".
As with the non-RT and RT1 mentioned above, the winning numbers "10" to "21" are selected for the lottery for the small prize. In addition, the winning numbers "22" to "24" corresponding to small winning combinations during the RB game are not drawn.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a table of numbers inside the RB (SRB) during 1BB operation. RB inside while 1BB is in operation corresponds to RB non-inside while 1BB is in operation, and corresponds to the normal game of 1BB game.
While RB is in operation, RB is not drawn in addition to 1BB, so the numbers set for winning numbers "25" to "41" are all "0".
Furthermore, when the RB is inside when 1BB is in operation, the winning number "1" (Replay A) is drawn, unlike when the RB is not inside when 1BB is in operation.
FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a number table when 1BB is in operation and RB is in operation. While 1BB is operating and RB is operating, only winning numbers "22" to "24" are drawn.

The payout rate in each of the above game states will now be explained.
There are various definitions of the ball output rate, but in the twenty-third embodiment, the ball output rate is defined as "number of out coins/number of in coins."
Here, the "number in" refers to the number of bet coins, and in the twenty-third embodiment, it is "3" coins in any gaming state.
In addition, the "number of outs" refers to the number of coins paid out, and in terms of design, refers to the expected number of coins paid out. For example, in a game where the instruction function is activated (a game where the correct push order is notified), when the winning numbers "10" to "21" are won (when the push order bell is won), the high bell (15 coins in the 23rd embodiment) is always won.
Specifically, when the number of in coins is "3" and the number of out coins is "1", the payout rate is approximately "0.33".
Also, when the number of in coins is "3" and the number of out coins is "3", the payout rate is "1".
Furthermore, when the number of in coins is "3" and the number of out coins is "9", the payout rate is "3".

Also, when the winning numbers "10" to "15" are won when the accessory (1BB) is not activated, a 3-card winning combination will always be won, and when the accessory (1BB) is not activated, the winning number "16" to "21" is won. In this case, one hand always wins the prize.
Furthermore, during a 1BB game when RB is not internal and AT is not activated (a game in which the instruction function does not operate), when winning numbers "10" to "15" are won, there is a probability of "1/6" that the high bell ( It is assumed that 15 bells) will win a prize, and a cheap bell (3 bells) will win with a probability of 5/6. The reason why "1/6" is set is to set the probability of winning when the stop switch 42 is operated at random since there are six options in the pressing order. Furthermore, when the winning numbers "16" to "21" are won during a 1BB game when the RB is not internal and when the winning number is not AT, one bell is always won.

Furthermore, during a 1BB game, when the RB is inside and there is no AT (a game in which the instruction function does not work), when winning numbers "10" to "15" are won, there is a probability of "1/6" that the high bell (15 It is assumed that the low bell (3 bells) wins the prize with a probability of "5/6". In addition, when the winning numbers "16" to "21" are won during 1BB gaming and when the RB is not AT, the high bell (15 bells) will be won with a probability of "1/6" and the winning number will be "5". It is assumed that a cheap bell (one bell) will win with a probability of ``/6''.

When a replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the first method is to set the number of out coins for the current game to "0" and the number of in coins for the next game to "0". The second method is to set the number of out coins for the current game to "3" and the number of in coins for the next game to "3". In the following example, the latter method is used for calculation.
Furthermore, the payout rate differs depending on the settings 1 to 6, but below, the payout rate will be calculated using setting 1 as an example.

In non-RT, the total number of winning numbers "1" to "9" corresponding to replay winnings is "8982".
Further, the total number of winning numbers "10" to "15" corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination A group is "16800".
Furthermore, the total number of winning numbers "16" to "21" corresponding to the winning of the small winning group B is "19824".
In the non-RT gaming state, games with winning numbers "10" to "15" always win a 3-card combination, and games with winning numbers "16" to "21" always win a 1-card combination.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of coins paid out per game is
3 x (8982/65536) + 3 x (16800/65536) + 1 x (19824/65536)
≒1.483 (sheets)
becomes.
In addition, the ball payout rate is
1.483/3≒0.494
becomes.

Next, while the 1BB is in operation and the RB is not inside, the ball payout rate is calculated separately for AT time and non-AT time.
First, during AT, games in which winning numbers "10" to "15", which correspond to winnings in group A, are won will pay out 15 coins, and games in which winning numbers "16" to "21" are won, will pay out 15 coins. One coin will be paid out.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of coins paid out per game is
15 x (16800/65536) + 1 x (19824/65536)
≒4.148 (sheets)
becomes.
In addition, the ball payout rate is
4.148/3≒1.383
becomes.

In addition, when 1BB is active and RB is not inside, and when it is not AT, in a game where winning numbers "10" to "15" corresponding to the winning of the small role A group are won, there is a probability of "1/6" that 15 3 pieces will be paid out with a probability of "5/6". Furthermore, in games where winning numbers "16" to "21" are won, one coin will be paid out.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of coins paid out per game is
15 x (16800/65536) x (1/6) + 3 x (16800/65536) x (5/6) + 1 x (19824/65536)
≒1.584 (sheets)
becomes.
In addition, the ball payout rate is
1.584/3=0.528
becomes.

Next, while the 1BB is in operation and inside the RB, the ball payout rate is calculated separately for AT and non-AT times.
First, during AT, a game in which winning numbers "10" to "15", which correspond to the winning of small prize group A, will result in a payout of 15 coins, and a game in which winning numbers "16" to "21" will win, will result in a payout of 15 pieces. The payout will be 15 pieces.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of coins paid out per game is
15×(16800/65536)+15×(19824/65536)
≒8.383 (sheets)
becomes.
In addition, the ball payout rate is
8.383/3≒2.794
becomes.

In addition, when 1BB is active and inside RB, when non-AT, in a game where winning numbers "10" to "15" corresponding to the winning of small role A group are won, there is a probability of "1/6" that 15 coins will be won. The payout is 3 cards with a probability of "5/6". Furthermore, in a game where the winning numbers "16" to "21" are won, 15 coins will be paid out with a probability of "1/6", and 1 coin will be paid out with a probability of "5/6".
Therefore, the expected value of the number of coins paid out per game is
15 x (16800/65536) x (1/6) + 3 x (16800/65536) x (5/6) + 15 x (19824/65536) x (1/6) + 1 x (19824/65536) x (5/ 6)
≒2.290 (sheets)
becomes.
In addition, the ball payout rate is
2.290/3≒0.763
becomes.

Furthermore, during 1BB operation and RB operation, the ball payout rate is the same in non-AT and AT.
As shown in Figure 130, when 1BB is in operation and RB is in operation, the number set for winning number "22" is "3310" and the number of payouts is 15, and the number set for winning number "23" is "16230" and the number of payouts is 15. is 3 pieces, the number placed for the winning number ``24'' is ``19825'', and the number of payouts is 1 piece.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of coins paid out per game is
15 x (3310/65536) + 3 x (16230/65536) + 1 x (19825/65536)
≒1.803 (sheets)
becomes.
In addition, the ball payout rate is
1.803/3≒0.601
becomes.

In the above, when the ball payout rate exceeds "1", it is a game state in which the number of medals increases, and when the ball payout rate is less than "1", it is a game state in which the number of medals decreases.
Therefore, the ball output rate exceeds "1" (the number of medals increases) at the AT time when 1BB is in operation and the RB is not inside, and at the AT time when 1BB is in operation and the RB is inside.
On the other hand, when 1BB is not activated, when 1BB is activated and RB is not inside and it is not AT, when 1BB is activated and RB is not inside and it is not AT, and when 1BB is activated and RB is activated, the ball is not put out. The rate falls below "1" (medals decrease).
Therefore, the relationship between the size of the ball payout rate is as follows:
(1) When 1BB is not activated (ball output rate "0.494")
(2) During non-AT when 1BB is in operation and RB is not inside (ball output rate "0.528")
(3) When 1BB is operating and RB is operating (ball output rate "0.601")
(4) When 1BB is operating and RB is not AT (ball output rate "0.763")
(5) AT when 1BB is in operation and RB is not inside (ball output rate "1.383")
(6) AT when 1BB is operating and RB is inside (ball output rate "2.794")
becomes.

From the above,
(1) When the RB is not activated during AT, the ball output rate exceeds "1", but during non-AT, the ball output rate does not exceed "1".
(2) Even during AT, if the RB is placed in a prize and the RB is activated, the ball payout rate will be less than "1".
(3) When 1BB is activated during non-AT, the ball output rate is higher than when 1BB is not activated during non-AT.
Therefore, for example, even if you win 1BB without having the right to execute AT and move to 1BB game, the ball output rate will be less than "1" during both the general game and RB game of 1BB game, so the medal cannot be increased.
Furthermore, during non-AT, the ball payout rate is higher when 1BB is activated than when 1BB is not activated. However, since the AT lottery is executed only within 1BB (when 1BB is not activated), the AT lottery cannot be received when 1BB is activated. Therefore, when 1BB is activated during non-AT, the player is at a disadvantage.
Also, during AT (when 1BB is activated), if the RB is inside, a 15-piece winning combination can be won when the small winning combination B1 to B6 condition device is activated. Therefore, during AT (when 1BB is activated), when the RB is inside, it is more advantageous to the player than when the RB is not inside.
Although the above-mentioned ball output rate was calculated using setting 1, the magnitude relationship of the ball output rate is the same for other setting values (settings 2 to 6).

FIG. 131 is a diagram showing RT transition in the twenty-third embodiment.
Non-RT and RT1 correspond to when 1BB is not activated. Non-RT and RT1 continue until the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed. In the 23rd embodiment, the transition timing of RT is set when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, that is, when all the reels 31 are stopped (when all the reels 31 are stopped).
For non-RT and RT1, 1BB (winning number "25" mentioned above) will be drawn, but if you win 1BB and it is only within 1BB, RT will not be transferred and the non-RT or RT1 will be maintained respectively. . Then, when the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed in non-RT or RT1, the game shifts to 1BB operation and RB non-inside (general game of 1BB game).

When 1BB is activated and RT is not inside, RBA (winning number "26") to RBP (winning number "41") are drawn, as shown in FIG. 123 described above. Then, if one of RBA to RBP is won and the winning RBA to RBP is not won, the game moves to RB when 1BB is activated. When 1BB is activated and RB is inside, this continues until the RB symbol combination that carries over winning is stopped and displayed. Then, when the RB symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to 1BB operation and RB operation (RB game).
In addition, if you win RB when 1BB is activated and RB is not inside, and the RB symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the relevant game, then when 1BB is activated and RB is not inside, if the RB symbol combination is stopped and displayed, then when 1BB is activated and RB is not inside, you can win the RB when 1BB is activated and RB is not inside. Transition.

As shown in FIG. 122, the operation of the 1BB condition device (1BB game) ends when more than 170 medals are won. Furthermore, if the RB condition device is activated while the 1BB condition device is activated (when transitioning to RB game), the game will continue until 12 games have been played or 8 winning combinations have been won, provided that the number of medals won does not exceed 170. If the RB condition device is activated and 12 games have been played or 8 winning combinations have been won, and more than 170 medals have not been won by the operation of the 1BB condition device, the game will again transition to the state when the 1BB condition device is activated but the RB condition device is not activated. Additionally, when the 1BB condition device is activated and the RB condition device is not activated, or when the 1BB condition device is activated and the RB condition device is activated, if more than 170 medals are won by the activation of the 1BB condition device, the operation of the 1BB condition device will end (1BB play will end) (even if 12 plays or 8 wins have not been reached after the activation of the RB condition device).

After the operation of the 1BB condition device is completed, the process shifts to RT1. RT1 continues until 1400 games are played or until the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed. When moving to RT1, each game and the number of games are counted and stored in the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) of address "F00A(H)" which will be described later. When the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed in RT1, as described above, the state shifts to 1BB operation and RB non-internal state. On the other hand, when 1400 games are played in RT1, the game shifts to non-RT. Once the game shifts to non-RT, 1BB is won again, and when the 1BB operation ends, the game shifts to RT1.
In the 23rd embodiment, it is set that non-RTs are more likely to win AT than RT1. Therefore, when "1400" games are played in RT1, the so-called ceiling has been reached, and it becomes easier to win AT in non-RT.

Further, an advantageous section may end during RT1, and at the end of the advantageous section, the section type number, advantageous section clear counter, difference counter (MY counter), and data related to AT are cleared. On the other hand, the number of games played in RT1 (the above-mentioned "_CT_RT_GAME") is not cleared. For example, when the 1200th game of RT1 satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section, the next game will be the 1201st game of RT1 and the non-advantageous section.
Furthermore, in the 23rd embodiment, even if the game changes from RT1 to non-RT based on the completion of 1400 games, the main game state, which will be described later, does not change. For example, in the 1400th game of RT1, if the player is staying in main game state 1, the next game will be non-RT and main game state 1.

However, when the conditions for shifting to the main gaming state are satisfied in the 1400th game of RT1, the main gaming state will of course shift.
For example, firstly, in main game state 1, when RT1 and the number of RT games is the 1400th game, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the advantageous section ends in the current game, and the next game is , becomes non-RT and main game state 0.
Second, if AT is won in the main game state 1 and RT1 and the number of RT games is the 1400th game, the next game will be non-RT and main game state 2 (AT precursor).

Here, the transition determination of the advantageous section in the twenty-third embodiment is performed in the non-advantageous section of the non-RT or RT1. In particular, in determining the transition to the advantageous section in the 23rd embodiment, the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is made when winning numbers "1" to "4" and "6" to "21" are won. ing. Therefore, in the non-advantageous section of non-RT or RT1, most players will move to the advantageous section after playing several games. Once an advantageous section is won, the transition to an advantageous section will not be determined unless the end conditions of the advantageous section are satisfied and the transition is made to a non-advantageous section. Note that the transition to the advantageous section may be determined by lottery based on winning numbers.

Further, the AT lottery of the twenty-third embodiment is executed in a non-RT or RT1 advantageous section. Furthermore, in the 23rd embodiment, carrying over the winning of 1BB is a condition for executing the AT lottery. In other words, the AT lottery is not executed when 1BB is not won and when 1BB is in operation. The AT lottery is executed when winning numbers "3" to "9" are won, which correspond to winnings in Rare Replay.
In FIG. 127 (RT1), the winning probability of AT is, for example,
The settings are as follows: Replay F condition device activated < Replay C condition device activated < Replay E condition device activated < Replay D (D1 to D3) condition device activated < Replay G condition device activated.

Specifically, for example, when the Replay F condition device is activated: AT winning probability 10-30%
When the replay C condition device is activated: AT winning probability 15-30%
When the Replay E condition device is activated: AT winning probability 20-35%
When the replay D1 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 30-50%
When the replay D2 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 40-50%
When the replay D3 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 35-80%
When the replay G condition device is activated: AT winning probability 100%
The reason why each probability of winning has a range is, for example, to make the probability of winning different depending on the performance stage (low probability, normal probability, high probability, etc.) when the corresponding condition device is activated.

In addition, when 1,400 plays are played in non-AT and RT1, the so-called ceiling is reached, and the game transitions to non-RT, an AT is drawn with the following winning probabilities, for example.
When the replay F condition device is activated: AT winning probability 90%
When the replay C condition device is activated: AT winning probability 90%
When the replay E condition device is activated: AT winning probability 90%
When the replay D1 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 75%
When the replay D2 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 80%
When the replay D3 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 85%
When the replay G condition device is activated: AT winning probability 100%
Therefore, it is set up so that it is easier to win the AT in non-RT than in RT1.

When the AT is won in non-RT or RT1 and the conditions for starting the AT are met (for example, after the AT standby counter becomes "0"), the 1BB symbol combination is displayed as stopped and the 1BB is in operation (when the game shifts to 1BB play), and the AT can be started. The AT continues until the 1BB operation ends.
In non-RT or RT1, even if a 1BB pattern combination is displayed without having the right to execute the AT (without winning the AT) and the process transitions to 1BB operation, a favorable push order (push order for winning a 15-coin role) when the push order bell is won (when the winning number is "10" to "21") is won is not displayed (the instruction function does not operate).
In contrast, in non-RT or RT1, if the player has the right to execute the AT (wins the AT), and the 1BB pattern combination is displayed frozen after the conditions for starting the AT are met, and the player transitions to 1BB operation, the AT is executed, and when a winning number with the correct button press sequence is won, the correct button press sequence for winning a 15-coin role (high-point bell) is displayed (the instruction function is activated).
In addition, even if you have the right to execute the AT, if the AT start conditions are not met (for example, if the AT premonition counter is greater than "0" or the AT standby counter is greater than "0"), the AT will not be executed even if the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and the 1BB operation is started. In other words, the advantageous push order will not be displayed when the push order bell is won (the instruction function will not work).

Here, when the AT is in progress and the RB is not inside while 1BB is in operation, when winning numbers "10" to "15" (small winning combination A1 to small winning combination A6) are won, the correct answer pressing order will be displayed. (activation of instruction function).
On the other hand, during AT, when 1BB is activated and RB is not inside, the instruction function does not operate even if winning numbers "16" to "21" (minor combinations B1 to B6) are won. As mentioned above, when 1BB is activated and RB is not inside, there is no correct pressing order when the small role B1 to B6 condition device is activated, and no matter which pressing order the stop switch 42 is operated, 1 piece is issued. This is because the winning combination wins (the 15-card winning combination does not win).
On the other hand, when the AT is in progress and the RB is in operation with 1BB in operation, if the winning numbers "10" to "15" (small winning combination A1 to small winning combination A6) are won, the correct answer pressing order will be displayed. (The instruction function is activated).
Similarly, when AT is in progress and the RB is in operation with 1BB in operation, if the winning numbers "16" to "21" (minor combinations B1 to B6) are won, the order in which the correct answers are pressed will be displayed (instruction function is activated).

In addition, the winning probability setting number of RB during 1BB operation is "28912" in total, and the winning probability is about 44%. Therefore, when 1BB is in operation, the player wins the RB early. However, the premise of the 23rd embodiment is that during AT, the game is played without winning the winning RB. When entering the RB during 1BB operation, as shown in FIG. 129, the sum of the winning numbers "1" and "10" to "21" is "50424" at setting 1, for example. Therefore, there is a probability of approximately 23% that the player will not win, and in the game in which the game is not won, there is a possibility of winning the RB. In a game where the game is non-winning and has a possibility of winning RB, an effect is output to the player indicating that the game has a possibility of winning RB. When this effect is output, the player operates the stop switch 42 to stop the RB from winning. In addition, in a game in which there is a possibility of winning RB, the display on the main control board 50 side (for example, the winning number display LED 78) does not notify the pressed position etc. (the instruction function does not operate).
If the RB wins during the 1BB operation, the game shifts to the RB game. As mentioned above, in the RB game, the payout rate is lower than in the general game of the 1BB game. In the RB game, the game ends after 12 games or 8 winnings, and if the conditions for ending the 1BB game (obtaining more than 170 medals) are not met at that point, you can play the regular 1BB game again. return.

FIG. 132 is a diagram showing the transition of the main game state in the twenty-third embodiment.
The main gaming states in the twenty-third embodiment include main gaming states 0 to 5.
Main gaming state 0 is a non-advantageous zone, and main gaming state 1 to main gaming state 5 are advantageous zones.
In addition, main gaming states 2 and 3 are gaming states in which the AT is won but not the AT. In addition, main gaming state 4 is a gaming state during the AT. Furthermore, main gaming states 0, 1, and 5 are gaming states that are not the AT and have not won the AT.

The main game state 0 is a non-advantageous period and a non-AT state. In the main game state 0, an advantageous section lottery and an AT lottery are executed. In main game state 0, if the player wins in the advantageous section and is not AT, the main game state 1 is entered. On the other hand, in the main game state 0, when the player wins the advantageous section and wins the AT, the game shifts to the main game state 2.

In main game state 1, the advantageous section lottery is not executed, but the AT lottery is executed. When AT is won, the game shifts to main game state 2. Furthermore, when an AT is won, the number of AT sets is also randomly selected, and the number of AT sets determined by the lottery is stored in the AT set number counter. The "AT set number" is a counter that determines how many times main game state 4 (AT and 1BB operation) is to be executed.
On the other hand, in main game state 1, when the end conditions of the advantageous section are met without winning AT (for example, when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, or when you win the falling lottery of the advantageous section ), the state shifts to main game state 0.

Note that even if the conditions for transition to main gaming state 0 are satisfied in main gaming state 1, RT does not transition. For example, in RT1 and main game state 1, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, unless 1400 games have been reached in RT1, the next game will be in RT1 and main game state 0.
Main gaming state 2 is a gaming state that is a precursor to AT. At the time of AT winning, the number of AT precursor games is determined, for example, by lottery, and is set in the AT precursor counter. Then, the main game state 2 is executed until the AT precursor counter becomes "0". When the AT precursor counter becomes "0", the game shifts to main game state 3.

Main game state 3 is a game state during AT preparation. Main game state 3 continues until the AT standby counter becomes "0" and the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed. Here, in the 23rd embodiment, when AT has multiple sets, when the main game state 4 (1BB operation and AT), which will be described later, is finished and the main game state 3 is returned, the 1BB symbol combination is quickly set. In order to prevent the number of balls from increasing too much, instead of displaying a stopped display and moving to main game state 4, in order to adjust (reduce) the number of balls to a certain extent and then move to main game state 4, A certain number of games in the main game state 3 is ensured. For example, when moving from main game state 4 to main game state 3, the AT standby counter is set to one of "1" to "8" (determined by lottery), and the game winning 1BB, small role, or Subtract "1" for games that do not win replays. Then, when the AT standby counter reaches "0", if it is within 1BB, notification is made to stop displaying the symbol combination of 1BB.
The reason why the ball output adjustment (reduction) is performed in the main game state 3 is that if a plurality of sets of AT are executed in succession, it is likely to result in non-conformity in the test shooting test. In the test shooting test, for example, the ball payout rate must be less than 220% over a given number of 400 games. Therefore, when performing multiple sets of AT, after one set of AT ends, there is a game period in which no AT is performed (a period in which ball output adjustment (reduction) is performed), and then the next set of AT is started. I'm trying to execute it.

Further, in the main game state 3, an AT set number counter addition lottery is executed. For example, when a rare combination (winning numbers "2" to "9") is won in main game state 3, an additional lottery for the number of AT sets is executed. When the AT set number addition lottery is won, the winning AT set number is added to the AT set number counter.
In main game state 3, when the AT standby counter reaches "0", in subsequent games where the winning and replay condition device number is "0", "Aim for the "Blue BAR"! ” is displayed as an image. In addition, “Aim for the “Blue BAR”! ” is displayed on condition that the winning of 1BB has been carried over or the winning of 1BB has been carried over. This prompts the player to stop displaying the symbol combination of 1BB.

In addition, “Aim for the “Blue BAR”! If the player is unable to stop and display the 1BB symbol combination in a game that displays the image "Aim for the Blue BAR" in subsequent games where the winning and replay condition device number is "0". ! ” is displayed as an image. Also, first, “Aim for the “Blue BAR”! After displaying the image "Aim for the 'Blue BAR'!", you may not perform the additional lottery for the number of AT sets. Even after the image is displayed, the AT set number addition lottery is executed until the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed. However, the winning probability of the additional lottery for the number of AT sets is set so that there is no benefit to the player even if the number of 1BB symbol combinations is intentionally extended. (The counter is set lower than before it reached 0).

When the AT standby counter becomes "0" in the main game state 3 and the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the state transitions to the main game state 4. The main game state 4 corresponds to the time when the 1BB is activated (1BB game) and the AT. Therefore, the main game state 4 is executed until the number of medals acquired exceeds 170 (see FIG. 122). When the number of medals acquired exceeds 170 in the main game state 4, it is determined that the end condition of the main game state 4 is met, and the state transitions to either the main game state 3 (AT preparation), the main game state 5 (AT pullback), or the main game state 0 (non-advantageous section) based on the value of the AT set number counter and the ending counter at that time.
The AT set number counter is decremented by "1" each time the main game state 4 ends. When the AT set number counter is "0", it is determined that there is no right to execute the AT, and when it is "1" or more, it is determined that there is a right to execute the AT.

The ending counter is set based on the values of the difference counter (also called the "MY counter") and the advantageous zone clear counter described in other embodiments. The advantageous zone must end when the difference counter reaches "2400 (D)" or when the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches "1500". Therefore, in this embodiment, when the difference counter value exceeds "1951 (D)" or the advantageous zone clear counter value falls below "200 (D)", the ending counter is set to "2".
Then, at the end of main game state 4, if the ending counter is equal to or greater than "1", it subtracts "1". When the ending counter goes from "1" to "0", it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous zone (and the AT) are met, and the game transitions to main game state 0. By setting it in this way, the advantageous zone can be ended before the difference counter value reaches "2400 (D)" and before the advantageous zone clear counter becomes "0".

On the other hand, when the main game state 4 ends, unless the AT set number counter is "1" or more and the ending counter changes from "1" to "0", the main game state 3 is entered. When the main game state 3 is entered, one AT standby counter value is determined by lottery from "0" to "8" and set.
Furthermore, when the AT set number counter is "0" at the end of main game state 4, the main game state 5 (AT pullback) is entered. Main game state 5 is non-AT, but when an AT is won in main game state 5, the data of the number of coins acquired and the number of sets in the previous AT are taken over and displayed as images on the image display device 23.

When the main game state 5 is entered, a predetermined value, for example, "50 (D)" is set in the AT pullback counter, and "1" is subtracted every game. The condition for ending the main game state 5 is that the AT pullback counter becomes "0" or that the AT is won.
When the AT pullback counter reaches "0", the advantageous section clear counter value is determined, and when the advantageous section clear counter value is less than "600 (D)", the advantageous section is ended and the main game state is returned. Transition to 0. If the advantageous section clear counter value is less than 600 (D), there is a risk that you will not be able to continue AT if you subsequently switch to AT because the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is small. , ends the advantageous section. As described above, if the player moves to the main game state 0, he will win the advantageous section again after playing several games, and the player will move to at least the main game state 1.

On the other hand, when the AT pullback counter reaches "0" in main game state 5, if the advantageous section clear counter value is "600 (D)" or more, the main game is played without ending the advantageous section. Move to state 1. Then, the AT lottery continues.
Further, if the AT is won in the main game state 5 before the AT pullback counter reaches "0", the state shifts to the main game state 3. Note that when AT is won in main gaming state 5, the player may move to main gaming state 2 (AT precursor), but in this embodiment, the player moves to main gaming state 3 (AT preparation). When the main game state 3 is entered, the AT standby counter value is randomly selected in the same manner as described above, and the value determined by the lottery is stored in the AT standby counter.

In addition, in main game state 4 or 5, when transitioning to main game state 0 before the advantageous section clear counter reaches "0", and in main game state 1, before the advantageous section clear counter reaches "0", the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0". When transitioning to the main game state 0 based on winning the fall lottery of the section, before the advantageous section clear counter management in Fig. 51 is executed, the advantageous section clear counter (regardless of the previous value) is A process of storing "1" is executed (preparation for ending the advantageous section shown in FIG. 150, which will be described later). As a result, when the advantageous section clear counter management shown in FIG. 51 is subsequently executed, the value of the advantageous section clear counter value before subtracting "1" is "1", and the value after subtracting "1" is "0". Therefore, it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, and the process proceeds from step S424 to step S435, where RWM clear processing based on the end of the advantageous section is executed.

In addition, even if the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed in main game state 0 or 1, the game does not transition to main game state 4 (AT). Therefore, in this case, the game will be in main game state 0 or 1, 1BB will be activated, and the game will not be in AT.

133 to 138 are diagrams showing main data according to the 23rd embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the 23rd embodiment. Note that the data shown in FIGS. 133 to 138 are part of the data, and in addition to the data shown, various data is stored in the RWM 53. In addition, in the following explanation (especially the RWM name), "#" refers to all of "1" (first reel 31) to "3" (third reel 31), and "#" refers to all of "1" to "3". It can refer to any one of the following.
Furthermore, the numerical value shown in parentheses in the "address" column indicates the number of bytes of that storage area.

In Fig. 133, the RT state number (_NB_RT_STS) at address "F009(H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating the current RT, where "0" is stored when it is non-RT and "1" is stored when it is RT1. As shown in Fig. 131, in the 23rd embodiment, there are cases where the game transitions from RT1 to non-RT, and when the game reaches "1400" in RT1, for example, at the end of the game, "0" is stored as the RT state number.
In addition, when the termination conditions for 1BB operation are met and a transition to RT1 occurs, "1" is stored as the RT state number at the end of the game in which the termination conditions for 1BB operation are met.

The number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) at address "F00A(H)" is a storage area of a counter for counting the number of games played in RT1. When the 1BB operation is completed and the transition is made to RT1, "1400 (D)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted every time one game is played. When the number of RT games becomes "0", it is determined that the conditions for transition to non-RT are satisfied.
The accessory condition device number (_NB_CND_BNS) at the address "F00D(H)" is a storage area that stores data indicating the type of accessory currently in operation. The value stored here corresponds to the accessory condition device number shown in FIG. 122. For example, "0" is stored when the accessory is not activated, "1" is stored when 1BB is activated, and "2" is stored when RBA is activated.

The number of coins that can be obtained at the time of 1BB operation (_CT_BIG_PAT) at address "F00E (H)" is a storage area that stores the remaining number of coins that can be acquired at the time of 1BB operation (1BB game). When 1BB is activated, "170 (D)" is stored in this storage area. Then, while the 1BB is in operation (during the 1BB game), the value of this storage area is subtracted every time a medal is paid out. When the value of this storage area becomes "0" during 1BB operation, it is determined that the termination condition for 1BB operation is satisfied.

The number of games played when the RB is activated (_CT_BONUS_PLAY) at the address "F00F(H)" is a storage area that stores a counter that counts the number of games played when the RB is activated. When the RB is activated, "12 (D)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted for every "1" game when the RB is activated. Then, when the number of games during the RB operation becomes "0", the condition for ending the RB operation is satisfied.
The number of winnings when the RB is activated (_CT_BONUS_WIN) at the address "F010(H)" is a storage area that stores a counter that counts the number of winnings when the RB is activated. When the RB is activated, "8 (D)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted every time the winning combination is won when the RB is activated. Then, when the number of winnings during the RB operation becomes "0", the condition for ending the RB operation is satisfied.

Input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at address "F012(H)" is a storage area that stores on/off of the signals of the start switch 41 and stop switch 42. In the current interrupt processing, the signals of the start switch 41 and (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 are judged, and when they are on, "1" is stored, and when they are off, "0" is stored.
Input port level data A (previous) (_PT_IN_A_BK) at address "F015(H)" is a storage area that stores the value of input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) in the previous interrupt process.

Input port rise data A at address "F017(H)" is a storage area that stores whether or not the signals of the start switch 41 and stop switch 42 rise. When the level data of the previous interrupt processing is "0" and the level data of the current interrupt processing is "1", "1" is stored as the rising data. On the other hand, when the level data in the previous interrupt processing is "1" and the level data in the current interrupt processing is "1", the rising data is "0". Similarly, when the level data during the previous interrupt processing is "0" and the level data during the current interrupt processing is "0", the rising data is "0". Furthermore, when the level data of the previous interrupt processing is "1" and the level data of the current interrupt processing is "0", the rising data is "0" (in this case, the falling data is "0"). 1”).

In FIG. 134, the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1) at address "F019(H)" is a storage area that stores which phase of the motor 32 related to the first reel is to be excited. In the first reel motor signal data, "1" corresponds to on (excitation is applied) and "0" corresponds to off (excitation is not applied). Based on the data stored in this storage area, the motor 32 is excited in port output processing during interrupt processing (step S462 in FIG. 151, which will be described later).
In this embodiment, the first reel corresponds to the left reel 31, the second reel corresponds to the middle reel 31, and the third reel corresponds to the right reel 31.

Further, among the first reel motor signal data, the D0 bit corresponds to φ1, the D1 bit corresponds to φ2, the D2 bit corresponds to φ3, and the D3 bit corresponds to φ4. One pulse data selected from a reel drive pulse table shown in FIG. 158, which will be described later, is stored in the first reel motor signal data. For example, as shown in FIG. 158, in the current interrupt process, when excitation is applied to turn on φ0 and φ3, pulse data “00001001(B)” at address “1100(H)” is changed to address “F019(H)”. H)".

The second reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR2) at address "F01A(H)" is a storage area that stores which phase of the motor 32 related to the second reel (middle reel 31) is to be excited. Its contents are the same as the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1) at address "F019(H)".
Similarly, the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) at address "F01B(H)" is a storage area that stores which phase of the motor 32 related to the third reel (right reel 31) is to be excited. Its contents are the same as the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1) at address "F019(H)".

The first reel specified symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TARPIC_WAIT) at address "F039 (H)" is a timer value for measuring the waiting time to start decelerating the first reel 31 when executing a standby effect. This is the storage area of At the start of execution of the standby performance, a predetermined value is stored in this storage area, and is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process. Then, on condition that the value of this storage area becomes "0", stopping of the first reel 31 is permitted. In other words, when the value of this storage area is not "0", the first reel 31 is kept rotating without being stopped.

Specifically, from among reel effect execution timer tables 1 to 8 shown in Fig. 145 described later, a reel effect execution timer table corresponding to the stopped symbol is selected. For example, in Fig. 144 described later, when the stopped symbol is determined to be "middle row "black BAR"line-up" which corresponds to standby effect number 1, reel effect execution timer table 1 (_TBL_TARPIC_TM1) in Fig. 145 is selected as the reel effect execution timer table corresponding to standby effect number 1. In reel effect execution timer table 1, the designated symbol position search standby time for the first (left) reel 31 is "14112 (D)", and this value is stored in address "F039 (H)".
When a predetermined value is stored in the first reel designated symbol position search standby time at address "F039(H)", "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process, and when the value becomes "0", it is determined that the standby time has elapsed. Note that instead of subtracting "1" for each interrupt process, "1" may be subtracted for each multiple interrupt processes.

Here, in the 23rd embodiment, one rotation (360 degree rotation) of the reel 31 at a constant speed corresponds to "336" steps of the motor 32. Since the motor 32 is driven one step for every two interrupts, one rotation (360 degree rotation) of the reel 31 at a constant speed corresponds to "672" interrupts.
Therefore, in FIG. 145, for example, when reel performance execution timer table 1 (_TBL_TARPIC_TM1) (standby performance 1) is selected, the left reel 31 stops first, and then the center reel 31 stops after about one rotation (after the "670" interrupt). Furthermore, after the center reel 31 stops, the right reel 31 stops after about two rotations (after the "1340" interrupt). Similarly, when another reel performance execution timer table is selected, after the first reel 31 stops, the second reel 31 stops after rotating about one rotation or more than one rotation. Furthermore, after the second reel 31 stops, the third reel 31 stops after rotating about two rotations or more than two rotations.
In addition, the time from when the second reel 31 stops to when the third reel 31 stops is set longer than the time from when the first reel 31 stops to when the second reel 31 stops. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to which symbol the third reel 31 will stop with, and to give the player time to enjoy (a sense of accomplishment) looking at the symbols of the first and second reels 31 that stop.

The above address "F039(H)" is a storage area for the first (left) reel's designated pattern position search standby time, while addresses "F03B(H)" and "F03D(H)" are provided as storage areas for the second (center) reel's designated pattern position search standby time and the third (right) reel's designated pattern position search standby time, respectively.
For example, in the above-mentioned FIG. 145, when reel performance execution timer table 1 (_TBL_TARPIC_TM1) is selected, "14112+670=14782(D)" is stored in address "F03B(H)" as the waiting time for searching the designated symbol position of the second (center) reel. Similarly, "14112+2010=16122(D)" is stored in address "F03D(H)" as the waiting time for searching the designated symbol position of the third (right) reel.

The waiting time (_TM2_WAIT) at address "F041(H)" is a storage area for the waiting time until acceptance of an operation for the third stop is permitted when the winning information of 1BB is carried over and the 1BB symbol combination can be stopped and displayed at the second stop, in other words, when the 1BB symbol combination is ready (when the symbols constituting the 1BB symbol combination stop on an active line at the second stop and have not yet stopped at the third stop).
Here, "Tenpai" refers to a situation in which, for example, when one reel 31 is spinning and the remaining two reels 31 stop, the symbols that make up the 1BB symbol combination are displayed (on an active line), and when the symbols that make up the 1BB symbol combination are displayed when the one reel stops, the 1BB symbol combination is displayed (1BB has won). For example, if the one reel 31 is the right reel 31, this corresponds to a situation in which "Blue BAR (upper left)" - "Blue BAR (middle middle)" - "Spinning" are displayed on the active line.

This waiting time is not set in a state where the stop display of the 1BB symbol combination is permitted (main game state 3 and when the AT standby counter is "0"), but in other cases, the 1BB symbol combination The waiting time is set at the timing when the machine is full (at the second stop). The initial value is "896(D)". Then, the waiting time is subtracted for each interrupt processing, and when it becomes "0", the third stop operation is accepted.
Note that the interrupt cycle in the twenty-third embodiment is "1.117" ms.
Furthermore, in the 23rd embodiment, it is set so that 1BB is not tenpai unless the game is such that the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB can be stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in a game where the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB cannot be stopped and displayed, 1BB may be made tenpiable. For example, it is possible to make 1BB tenpai in a game when a small winning combination is won. In a game where the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB cannot be stopped and displayed, it is also possible not to set the standby time even if 1BB is at tenpai.

The standby time is set to "896 (D)" and is decremented by "1" for each interrupt, so that a standby process (a process that does not stop the third reel 31 even if the third stop switch 42 is operated; in other words, a process that does not accept a stop operation of the third stop switch 42) is executed for approximately 1 second (1.117 x 896 = approximately 1000 ms) from the timing when the 1BB symbol combination is completed.
As described above, one rotation (360 degree rotation) of the reel 31 corresponds to 336 steps of the motor 32 in the 23rd embodiment. In the 23rd embodiment, one step of the motor 32 corresponds to two interrupts (2.234 ms), and the time it takes for the motor 32 to drive 336 steps, in other words, the time it takes for the reel 31 to make one rotation, is 2.234 x 336 = 750.624 ms.
Therefore, the waiting time from the timing when the 1BB symbol combination is completed (about 1000 ms) > one rotation time of the reel 31 (about 751 ms)
It is as follows.
By setting it in this way, it is possible to minimize the waiting time while preventing the player from accidentally winning 1BB due to an unexpected stopping operation.

On the other hand, it is preferable to set the waiting time to be equal to or less than the time it takes for the reel 31 to rotate four times (approximately three seconds). For example, if the third reel 31 does not stop when the third stop switch 42 is operated because the waiting time has not yet elapsed, the player will carefully try to operate the third stop switch 42 again to stop the reel, but it is preferable that the waiting time has elapsed by that point.

135 to 137, FIG. 135 shows data on the first reel 31, FIG. 136 shows data on the second reel 31, and FIG. 137 shows data on the third reel 31.
In FIG. 135, the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) at address “F04D(H)” is a storage area that stores data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 related to the first reel 31. In this embodiment, the excitation update timing is set to occur once every two interrupt processes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, excitation may be updated for each interrupt process. If it is possible to update the excitation for each interrupt process, the cycle of the interrupt process may be set to every "2.235" ms. When excitation is performed once in multiple interrupt processes as in this embodiment, the D7 bit is assigned as a flag for determining whether it is the excitation update timing. In this embodiment, when the D7 bit is "1", it indicates the de-energized update timing, and when it is "0", it indicates the excitation update timing.
The D7 bit of this data is determined for each interrupt process, and when it is "0", it is updated to "1", and when it is "1", it is updated to "0".

Furthermore, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 represent the reel drive state number. As shown in FIG. 135, "0" indicates stop, "1" indicates deceleration, "2" indicates acceleration, "3" indicates start of acceleration, "4" indicates start of deceleration, and "5" indicates constant speed. For example, when the interrupt process is a non-excitation update timing and the reel drive state is constant speed ("5"), "10000101 (B)" is stored.

The first reel drive state of the above address "F04D(H)" is about the motor 32 related to the first reel 31, but data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 related to the second reel 31 is stored. As a storage area, the driving state (_WK_RL2_STS) of the second reel at address "F058(H)" (FIG. 136) is provided.
Further, as a storage area for storing data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 related to the third reel 31, the drive state of the third reel (_WK_RL3_STS) at address "F063(H)" (FIG. 137) is provided. .

The first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX) at address "F04E(H)" is a storage area that stores the on/off state of the motor index signal of the first reel 31, and the signal acquired in the previous interrupt process is stored in the D4 bit. The signal obtained in the current interrupt processing is stored in the D0 bit.
Here, the motor index 1 signal is a signal that is on when the reel sensor 33 is detecting the index of the first reel 31, and is off when the reel sensor 33 is not detecting the index of the first reel 31. It is.
Therefore, for example, when the first reel motor index is "00000000 (B)", the motor index 1 signal is off in both the previous interrupt process and the current interrupt process (the reel sensor 33 detects the index). (not). Furthermore, when the first reel motor index is "00000001 (B)", the motor index 1 signal was off in the previous interrupt process, and the motor index 1 signal is on in the current interrupt process (reel sensor 33 (detected the index) (rising).

Furthermore, when the first reel motor index is "00010001 (B)", it means that the motor index 1 signal is on in both the previous interrupt process and the current interrupt process.
Furthermore, when the first reel motor index is "00010000 (B)", the motor index 1 signal was on in the previous interrupt processing, and the motor index 1 signal is off in the current interrupt processing (falling edge). means.

The first reel motor index at the above address "F04E (H)" is a memory area for the left reel 31, while a second reel motor index (_FL_RL2_MT_IDX) at address "F059 (H)" (Figure 136) is provided as a memory area for the reel motor index of the second reel 31.
In addition, a third reel motor index (_FL_RL3_MT_IDX) at address "F064 (H)" (Figure 137) is provided as a memory area indicating the reel motor index of the third reel 31.

The first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL1_PLSOUT) at address "F04F(H)" is a storage area that stores a value corresponding to the number of interrupts that switch the excitation of the motor 32 related to the first reel 31. Specifically, in the acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) shown in FIG. 156 described later, the value corresponding to the current step is stored in this storage area. For example, in the first step during acceleration, the value "25(D)" corresponding to the address "1058(H)" is stored in this storage area. Then, "1" is subtracted every two interrupt processes, and when it becomes "0", the value "25(D)" of the next second step is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted every two interrupt processes. Furthermore, during deceleration, the value "90(D)" corresponding to the address "1050(H)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted every two interrupt processes. However, when the reel 31 is stopped, moving at a constant speed, or starting to decelerate, this memory area stores "1," and "1" is not subtracted during interrupt processing.

The first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL1_PLSOUT) at the above address "F04F(H)" is a storage area for the motor 32 related to the first reel 31, but the drive pulse for the motor 32 related to the second reel 31 is As a storage area for the output counter, a second reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL2_PLSOUT) is provided at address "F05A(H)" (FIG. 136).
Furthermore, as a storage area for the drive pulse output counter for the motor 32 related to the third reel 31, a third reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL3_PLSOUT) is provided at address "F065(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel drive pulse switching count (_CT_RL1_PLSCHG) at address "F050 (H)" is a storage area that stores the number of times the drive pulse is switched when the motor 32 for the first reel 31 accelerates. As shown in FIG. 156 (Acceleration/Deceleration Pulse Output Counter Table (TBL_PULSE_UP)) described later, when the reel 31 accelerates, the pulse is switched eight times from the first step to the eighth step. For this reason, the initial value of the first reel drive pulse switching count is set to "9", and when "1" is subtracted for the first time to become "8", the value "25 (D)" corresponding to the first step is stored in the first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL1_PLSOUT) described above. As described above, the first reel drive pulse output counter is subtracted by "1" every two interrupt processes during acceleration or deceleration. Then, when the first reel drive pulse output counter becomes "0", "1" is subtracted from the first reel drive pulse switching count. In this way, each time the first reel drive pulse output counter reaches "0", it is decremented by "1" until the number of first reel drive pulse switches reaches "0".

The first reel drive pulse switching count (_CT_RL1_PLSCHG) of the above address "F050(H)" is a storage area for the motor 32 related to the first reel 31, but it is a storage area for the motor 32 related to the second reel 31. As such, the number of times the second reel drive pulse is switched (_CT_RL2_PLSCHG) is provided at the address "F05B(H)" (FIG. 136).
Further, as a storage area for the motor 32 related to the third reel 31, the number of times the third reel drive pulse is switched (_CT_RL3_PLSCHG) is provided at address "F066(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel rotation defect detection counter (_CT_RL1_BAD) at address "F051(H)" is a storage area of a counter for determining whether the rotation of the first reel 31 is normal or abnormal (step-out). The first reel rotation defect detection counter stores "0" as an initial value when the first reel 31 reaches a constant speed. When the first reel 31 is at a constant speed, "1" is added, and when the value after adding "1" becomes "0" (that is, the value before addition is "255 (D)") (If the digit is carried forward and the zero flag = "1" as a result of adding "1"), it is determined that the rotation of the first reel 31 is not normal.
After the first reel 31 reaches a constant speed, when it is determined that the value of the first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX) has changed, the first reel rotation defect detection counter is cleared.

The first reel rotation defect detection counter (_CT_RL1_BAD) at the above address “F051(H)” is a storage area for the first reel 31, but the storage area for the second reel 31 is at the address “F05C(H)”. ” (FIG. 136), a second reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL2_BAD) is provided.
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel rotation defect detection counter (_CT_RL3_BAD) is provided at address "F067(H)" (FIG. 137).

The step number of one symbol on the first reel at address "F052 (H)" (_NB_RL1_STEP) is a memory area that stores the step number when the driving state of the first reel is at a constant speed or when deceleration has started.
At the rising edge of the first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX_), the initial value (design value) is stored as "3."
In addition, when the first reel is in a constant speed or decelerating state, "1" is subtracted at the excitation update timing, and when it becomes "0", it is determined that the reel has moved by one symbol.
When it is determined that one symbol has moved, if the symbol number is "2,""7,""12," or "17,""16(D)" is stored as the initial value, and if the symbol number is any other than the above, "17 (D)" is stored as the initial value.
In the 23rd embodiment, the number of steps per rotation of the motor 32 is "336", and the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "20", so for 4 symbols, the number of steps per symbol is "16", and for 16 symbols, the number of steps per symbol is "17" (4 x 16 + 16 x 17 = 336). In other words, since 16 steps are assigned to one symbol at approximately equal intervals, the reel 31 is configured to stop at the center of the symbol as much as possible when it stops.

The step number (_NB_RL1_STEP) of one symbol on the first reel at the above address "F052(H)" is the storage area for the first reel 31, but the storage area for the second reel 31 is the step number (_NB_RL1_STEP) at the address "F05D(H)". H)” (FIG. 136), the step number (_NB_RL2_STEP) of one symbol on the second reel is provided.
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, the step number (_NB_RL3_STEP) of one symbol of the third reel is provided at address "F068(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) at address “F053(H)” is a storage area that stores the symbol number of the first reel 31 that is currently passing. “255(D)(FF(H))” is stored as the initial value. When it is determined that there has been a change in the first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX), "10 (D)" is stored at the time of rise (D0 bit is "1", D4 bit is "0"). At the falling edge (the D0 bit is "0" and the D4 bit is "1"), "0" is stored.

In this way, "255 (D)" is stored as the initial value until the value of the first reel motor index changes. When it is determined that there has been a change in the value of the first reel motor index, "10 (D)" is stored at the time of rising, and "0" is stored at the time of falling.
In addition, the first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) is incremented by 1 every time it is determined that it has moved by one symbol after "10 (D)" or "0" is stored. .

The first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) of the above address "F053(H)" is the storage area for the first reel 31, but the address "F05E" is the storage area for the second reel 31. (H)” (FIG. 136), the second reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC) is provided.
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) is provided at address "F069(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) at address "F054(H)" is a storage area that stores the symbol number of the stop position (4-phase excitation is applied). “255(D)(FF(H))” is stored as the initial value. Then, when the first stop switch 42 is operated and the stop position is determined, the determined symbol number is stored in this storage area.

The first reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_PL1_STPPIC) at the above address "F054(H)" is the storage area for the first reel 31, but the address "F05F" is the storage area for the second reel 31. (H)” (FIG. 136), the second reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL2_STPPIC) is provided.
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL3_STPPIC) is provided at address "F06A(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL1_PLUS) at address "F055(H)" is a storage area for a counter to determine the excitation phase of the first reel 31. The first reel drive pulse data search counter is incremented by "1" at each excitation update timing. Furthermore, when the first reel 31 is rotating forward, "0" is incremented, and when it is rotating reversely, "254(D)(FE(H))" is incremented. For example, when the counter value stored up to that point is "100(D)", it becomes "101(D)" by adding "1". Also, when the first reel 31 is rotating reversely, "254(D)" is incremented, and it becomes "99(D)". In other words, adding "254(D)" is the same as subtracting "1". In this way, the first reel drive pulse data search counter takes values in the range of "0" to "255(D)".

Furthermore, when the first reel drive pulse data search counter value is ANDed with "00000111 (B)", the values of "0" to "255 (D)" are "0" to "7". ” value. Then, drive pulse data corresponding to values of "0" to "7" are set. For example, when the value after conversion is "7", the drive pulse stored at address "1107 (H)" which corresponds to the offset value "7" of the reel drive pulse data table (TBL_REEL_PULSE) in FIG. Data "00001000(B)" is set, and excitation to turn on φ3 is executed.

The first reel drive pulse data retrieval counter (_CT_RL1_PLUS) at the above address "F055(H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but the counter (_CT_RL1_PLUS) for searching address "F060(H)" is a storage area for the second reel 31. A second reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL2_PLUS) is provided in "H)" (FIG. 136).
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL3_PLUS) is provided at address "F06B(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL1_WAIT) at address "F056(H)" is a counter for random delay of the first reel 31 after the standby performance.
Here, "random delay" will be explained.
When a standby effect is executed and the reels 31 are automatically stopped without the player operating the stop switch 42, if all the reels 31 are rotated at the same time (all at once) after the reels 31 have automatically stopped, the eye press assist will be activated. It may lead to Therefore, when restarting the reels 31 after automatically stopping the reels 31 by a standby effect, a delay time at the start of rotation is set for each reel 31, so that the rotation start timing of each reel 31 is random (separate). Set it so that Such control is called "random delay."

When the standby effect is not executed, "0" is stored in this storage area. Furthermore, when the standby effect is executed, a value is determined by lottery or the like from among the values "0" to "335 (D)", and the determined value is stored. Then, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing, and when it becomes "0", restarting of the first reel 31 is permitted.

The first reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL1_WAIT) at the above address "F056(H)" is the storage area for the first reel 31, but the storage area for the second reel 31 is at the address "F061(H)". ” (FIG. 136), a second reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL2_WAIT) is provided.
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL3_WAIT) is provided at address "F06C(H)" (FIG. 137).

In FIG. 138, the section type number (_NB_ADV_KND) at address "F070(H)" is a storage area that stores a number indicating whether or not it is an advantageous section. When it is an advantageous section, "1" is stored, and when it is a non-advantageous section, "0" is stored. This storage area is the same storage area as the advantageous section type flag at address "F061(H)" shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.
The AT flag (_FL_AT) of address "F078(H)" is a flag for determining whether or not AT has won. When AT is won, "1" is stored, and when AT is not won, "0" is stored. This storage area is the same storage area as the AT flag at address "F067(H)" shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.

The advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) at address "F07A(H)" is a storage area for a counter (decrement counter) for the number of games played in the advantageous section. When shifting to the advantageous section, the initial value "1500 (D)" is set, and during the advantageous section, "1" is subtracted for each game. When the value becomes "0", the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. This storage area is the same storage area as the advantageous section clear counter at address "F063(H)" shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.

The difference number counter (also referred to as "MY counter") (_CT_MY) at address "F07C(H)" is a counter (increment counter) that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets during the advantageous section.
The difference counter does not simply store the cumulative value of the difference number itself, but stores "a value corresponding to" the cumulative value of the difference number. For example, when the difference in the number of sheets becomes a value corresponding to a minus value, the value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, "cumulative value of difference number of sheets ≠ difference number counter value". In other words, the difference counter stores a value that indicates "0" when the cumulative value of the difference number decreases the most during the advantageous section.

In addition, when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous period is met. Therefore, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is "2399 (D)" in the current game, and when 15 coins are paid out in the next game, it becomes "2414 (D)".
In addition, it is sufficient for the difference number counter to count the cumulative value of the difference number of coins at least during the advantageous period, and it is not necessary to count during the non-advantageous period (normal period), but it may be a counter that continues counting including the non-advantageous period.
This storage area is the same as the difference counter at address "F065(H)" shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.

The main gaming state number (_NB_GAM_STS) at address "F07E(H)" is a storage area that stores the number of the main gaming state. As shown in FIG. 132, in the twenty-third embodiment, main game states 0 to 5 are provided, and the number of the main game state in which the player is currently staying is stored in this storage area. When there is a transition to the main game state, the value of this storage area is updated.
The AT precursor counter (_CT_AT_ZN) at address "F080(H)" is a storage area for a counter for the number of AT precursor games. When AT is won, the number of AT precursor games is determined from a range of, for example, "0" to "33", and the determined number of games is stored in this storage area. Then, in the AT precursor, that is, the main gaming state 2, "1" is subtracted from the AT precursor counter every game, and when it becomes "0", it is determined that the end condition of the AT precursor (main gaming state 2) is satisfied. do.

The ending counter (_CT_ENDING) of the address "F097 (H)" is set when the AT set number counter value described below is "1" or more, and when the difference counter value exceeds "1951 (D)" or This is a storage area for a counter that is set to an initial value of "2" when the section clear counter value becomes less than "200 (D)".
Then, when the ending counter is equal to or greater than "1" at the end of main game state 4, "1" is subtracted. When the ending counter changes from "1" to "0", it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section (and AT) are satisfied, and the state shifts to main game state 0. Therefore, after the ending counter is set to "2", up to two sets of AT can be executed, including AT when the ending counter is set to "2".

The AT wait counter (_CT_AT_WAIT) at address "F098(H)" is a storage area of a counter for managing AT activation. If the AT set number counter is "1" or more, after the main game state 4 (AT) ends, the main game state 3 (AT preparation in progress) is entered. In this main game state 3, the value that manages whether or not to permit the stop display of the 1BB symbol combination is the AT standby counter value. In other words, it is a counter for reducing a certain number of balls in the main game state 3. The AT standby counter is determined from a range of "0" to "8" and stored, for example, when the main game state 4 shifts to the main game state 3.

In main game state 3, the AT standby counter value is subtracted by 1 in a game in which 1BB is won, or in a game in which a small winning combination or replay is not won within 1BB (a game in which 1BB can be won). . Then, after the AT standby counter reaches "0", in games where the 1BB symbol combination can be stopped and displayed (games that have not been won in small roles or replays), an effect that encourages winning of 1BB (for example, "Aim for the 'Blue BAR'!" etc.) is output. When the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed, the main game state 4 is entered.

In addition, in the main game state 3, if 1BB is won before the AT standby counter reaches "0", the main game state 3 remains and the main game state 4 (AT) is not entered. Therefore, 1BB is in operation and non-AT (AT in preparation). In this case, the AT standby counter is reset after the 1BB operation is completed. Note that the previously stored AT standby counter may be inherited without being reset. By doing this, even if the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed by mistake, it is possible to prevent further disadvantage to the player.

The AT set number counter (_CT_AT_SET) at address "F09C(H)" is a storage area that stores the AT set number. When an AT is won, the number of AT sets is determined by lottery, and the determined number of AT sets is stored in this storage area. Further, in main game state 3 (AT preparation), an AT set number addition lottery is executed according to the winning combination, and when this addition lottery is won, the winning addition number is added to an AT set number counter.

Also, at the end of main game state 4, it is determined whether the AT set number counter is "1" or more, and if the AT set number counter is "1" or more, it is determined that the AT continuation condition is satisfied. When the AT set number counter is "0", it is determined that the AT continuation condition is not satisfied, and the main game state 5 is entered. When shifting from main game state 4 to main game state 3, the AT set number counter is decremented by "1".
In addition, even if the number of AT sets is "1" or more, if the ending counter changes from "1" to "0" at the end of main game state 4, the end conditions of the advantageous section (AT) are met. The AT set number counter is cleared at the same time as the judgment is made and the state shifts to the main game state 0. Here, as an example of a method of transitioning to the main game state 0 and a method of clearing the AT set number counter, RWM initialization processing (step S435 in FIG. 51) executed at the end of an advantageous section by advantageous section clear counter management can be mentioned.

The AT withdrawal counter (_CT_AT_BACK) at address "F09D(H)" is a storage area for a counter of the number of remaining games that will be an AT withdrawal. When shifting from main game state 4 to main game state 5, an initial value "50 (D)" is set, and in main game state 5, "1" is subtracted every game. When the AT pullback counter reaches "0" without winning the AT, it is determined that the conditions for ending the main game state 5 are satisfied, and the main game state 0 or 1 is entered.
Further, when AT is won in main game state 5 and the game moves to main game state 3, the AT pullback counter is cleared.

The standby performance type (_WK_PRD) at address "F09E(H)" is a storage area that stores the type of standby performance number.
Here, the "standby effect" in the 23rd embodiment means that the reels 31 are rotated in reverse when the start switch 41 is operated, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, " This is a reel effect (also referred to as a freeze effect) that stops and displays "Black BAR". As a standby effect, when the start switch 41 is operated, the reels 31 are rotated in the forward direction, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a set of "black BAR") is stopped and displayed without the player operating the stop switch 42. May contain things. Alternatively, as a standby effect, the reels 31 are rotated in the forward direction when the start switch 41 is operated, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a set of "black BAR") is stopped and displayed without the player operating the stop switch 42. It may consist only of things.

The standby performance includes cases in which it is performed as a performance to indicate that AT winning is confirmed (for example, by stopping display of "Black BAR" set and "Red 7" set), or as a performance that stimulates AT winning expectation level (for example, , ``Stopping and displaying the ``watermelon'' arrangement, etc.'').
When it is decided to execute a standby effect, if any standby effect number from "1" to "4" (address "F0A0(H)" to be described later) is determined, "2" is memorized. , "3" is stored when any of the three-way numbers from "5" to "8" (address "F0A1(H)" to be described later) is determined. Further, at the start of standby performance (M_TARPIC_EXE) in FIG. 143, which will be described later, it is cleared in step S835.

The search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) at the address "F09F(H)" is a storage area that stores data that determines whether the rotation is forward rotation or reverse rotation in the standby performance. When the standby performance is forward rotation, "0" is stored, and when it is reverse rotation, "FE (H)" is stored.
When starting a standby effect, it is determined whether the value stored in the above-mentioned standby effect type (_WK_PRD) is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, the standby effect (in the 23rd embodiment, When performing reverse rotation), "FE(H)" is stored in the search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV).
Furthermore, when the standby performance ends, this storage area is cleared ("0" is stored).

The standby performance number (_NB_PRD_NO) at the address “F0A0(H)” is a storage area for a number that manages the standby performance that indicates AT winning confirmation. As shown in FIG. 138, "1" to "4" are stored depending on the stopped symbol. Note that the standby performance number "4" corresponds to the number at which the "Red 7" set is once stopped and displayed, and then changed again to stop and display the "Black BAR" set. The number of winning AT sets and the symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed by standby performance are set to be related.

The triple role number (_NB_TRIO) of the address "F0A1 (H)" is a storage area for numbers that manage standby effects that indicate the AT winning expectation level. For example, in the main game state 1, when a rare replay (winning numbers "3" to "9" in FIG. 126) is won, a three-way winning number is determined by lottery and set at the end of the game. For example, when the triple winning number "5" is determined, the middle stage "Watermelon" set is stopped and displayed as a standby effect when the start switch 41 is operated to start the next game. The AT winning expectation level and the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed by the standby performance are set to be related.

The winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) at address "F0A9(H)" is a memory area for storing the winning number when the winning number is determined in the current game and the replay and winning condition device to be operated in the current game is determined. As shown in FIG. 126, when the winning number "1" to "24" is won, "1" to "24" are stored as the winning and replay condition device number of the game.
The reel condition device number (_NB_CRRT_BNS) at address "F0AA(H)" is a storage area for storing the reel condition device number when a reel is won. As shown in FIG. 126, when the winning numbers "25" to "41" are won, "1" to "17" are stored as the reel condition device number for that game.

The minimum gaming time (_TM2_GAME) at the address "F0AB(H)" is a timer that monitors the minimum gaming time for one game, and when it is determined that the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the number of interrupts "3672(D)" is set. In order to count, an initial value is set (step S767 in FIG. 140, which will be described later). Note that the minimum game time in this embodiment is set to approximately "4.1" seconds (1.117ms x 3672≈4100ms).
When the minimum playing time is set in the current game, the reels 31 start rotating in the next game on the condition that the minimum playing time is "0".

Of the above data of RWM53, when the advantageous zone ends, the data relating to the advantageous zone and the AT are cleared.
In the 23rd embodiment, as in the 11th embodiment, the game end check process (FIG. 148) is executed at the end of the game, and the advantageous zone clear counter management is executed in step S945. The advantageous zone clear counter management is the same as the process shown in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52.

Therefore, the advantageous section clear counter (“_CT_ADV_CLR” at address “F07A(H)”)
") becomes "0"("Yes" in step S424 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), the process advances to step S435 to clear the data in the RWM 53 regarding the advantageous section and AT.
In the 23rd embodiment, the data cleared at the end of the advantageous section includes the section type number (_NB_ADV_KND), AT flag (_FL_AT), difference counter (MY counter) (_CT_MY), AT precursor counter (_CT_AT_ZN), and ending counter. (_CT_ENDING), AT standby counter (_CT_AT_WAIT), AT set number counter (_CT_AT_SET), AT pullback counter (_CT_AT_BACK), standby performance type (_WK_PRD), standby performance number (_NB_PRD_NO), and triple role number (_NB_TRIO).
On the other hand, data that is not cleared at the end of the advantageous period includes the RT state number (_NB_RT_STS), the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME), and the main gaming state number (_NB_GAM_STS).
Therefore, as described above, the current game is the 1000th game of RT1, and when the advantageous section ends in the current game, the next game will be the non-advantageous section and the 1001st game of RT1.

Further, the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS) and the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) are not initialized even by turning the power on/off or changing settings.
Therefore, for example, even if the power is turned off at the 1000th game of RT1 and the setting change process is executed before returning, the first game after returning will start from the 1001st game of RT1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the setting change process is executed, the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS) is not initialized, but the RT game count (_CT_RT_GAME) may be initialized. Alternatively, when the setting change process is executed, both the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS) and the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) may be initialized.

Furthermore, the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS) and the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) are not initialized only by turning the power on/off, but when the setting change process is executed, at least the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) is initialized. Good too.
Note that when the power is turned on/off, the number of games (non-AT) displayed as an image on the image display device 23 is set to "0". This point will be discussed later.

Next, in the twenty-third embodiment, each process during a game will be explained using a flowchart.
FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) by the main control board 50. This flowchart corresponds to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment. In FIG. 139, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 41. Further, in FIG. 139, steps different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined under the step number.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 41 will be mainly explained.
In FIG. 139, if it is determined in step S278 that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S751 and a start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) is executed. It is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated when the D6 bit of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) at the address "F017(H)" in FIG. 133 becomes "1".

Then, when the process proceeds to the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) of step S751, the process moves to the process shown in FIG. 140, which will be described later.
Next, the process advances to step S752, and a reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 146, which will be described later. Then, a reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) is executed for each reel 31 until it is determined in the next step S289 that all reels 31 have stopped.
Further, in FIG. 139, the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) (step S753) in the twenty-third embodiment executes the process shown in FIG. 148, which will be described later.

FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 of FIG.
In step S761, a lottery process for a winning combination is executed. In this process, the combination lottery means 61 draws a winning number. For example, when the current game is not RT, the winning number is determined according to the number setting table shown in FIG. 126. When the winning number is determined, the winning and replay condition device number corresponding to the determined winning number is stored in the memory area of address "F0A9(H)", and the role condition device number corresponding to the determined winning number is stored in the memory area of address "F0AA(H)".

In the next step S762, the main control board 50 determines the shift to an advantageous section. As mentioned above, when the winning numbers "1" to "4" and "6" to "21" are won, it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section.
Here, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section, the section type number (address "F070(H)") is set to "1".

In the next step S763, a game start process in the main game state is executed, which executes processes such as a lottery and updating of a counter according to the main game state of the current game.
For example, when the main game state is 0, 1, or 5, an AT lottery is executed. As described above, when a rare replay occurs (one of the winning numbers "3" to "9"), an AT lottery with a set number of "1" or more is executed. When the AT is won, the AT flag (address "F078(H)") is set to "1", and the number of AT sets determined by the lottery is stored in address "F09C(H)".

Moreover, when the main game state 2 is, "1" is subtracted from the AT precursor counter (address "F080(H)").
Furthermore, when the main game state is 3, "1" is subtracted from the AT standby counter (address "F098(H)").
Furthermore, when the main game state is 5, "1" is subtracted from the AT pullback counter (address "F09D(H)").

In the next step S764, a symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) is executed. This process is shown in FIG. 141, which will be described later, and is a process for outputting a test signal regarding the operation timing and pressing order of the stop switch 42 to the testing machine side. Note that when the gaming machine is actually installed in a hall (store), the gaming machine is not connected to the testing machine, so the test signal is not actually received by the testing machine. However, since the symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) exists in the main processing program, test signals regarding the operation timing and pressing order of the stop switch 42 are sent every game even after the gaming machine is installed in the hall. The processing itself for outputting is executed.
In the next step S765, a standby effect start (M_TARPIC_EXE) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 143, which will be described later, and corresponds to the process of executing a standby effect when the start switch 41 is operated.

In the next step S766, the main control board 50 determines whether the minimum gaming time has elapsed. This process is a process for determining whether the value stored at the address "F0AB(H)" is "0". When it is determined that the minimum gaming time has become "0", the process advances to step S767. In step S767, the initial value of the minimum playing time "3672 (D)" is stored in the address "F0AB (H)". From this point on, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process, and in step S766 of the next game, it is determined whether the minimum game time has become "0". In the next step S768, the main control board 50 sets an acceleration start state. This process is a process of storing "3" (00000011 (B)) indicating the start of acceleration in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS). It is. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) in step S764 in FIG.
Prior to explaining FIG. 141, stop acceptance designation tables 1 and 2 will be explained.
FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the symbol stop signal tables, where (A) shows symbol stop signal table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1), and (B) shows symbol stop signal table 2 (TBL_ORD_INF2).

As shown in FIG. 141(A), two types of symbol stop signal data are stored in the stop acceptance specification table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1). Furthermore, each symbol stop signal data is composed of four pieces of data.
First, the symbol stop signal data when "accessory condition device number = 1, main game state number 3 and AT standby counter = 0" in (1) is data "0, 16, 7, 2". . Here, "Accessories condition device number = 1, main game state number 3 and AT standby counter = 0" means that it is inside 1BB, main game state 3 (AT preparation), and AT standby counter is "0", that is, it is possible to win 1BB.
This data is for aiming at the valid line by matching "Blue BAR".
The four data of the symbol stop signal data are "press order, stop operation position of left reel 31, stop operation position of middle reel 31, stop operation position of right reel 31".

First, the press order data has "0" to "5". "0" indicates the push order 123, "1" indicates the push order 132, . . . , "5" indicates the push order 321. Here, each symbol stop signal data in the stop reception specification table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1) in (A) is actually symbol stop signal data for a game in which the instruction function is not activated, but the pressing order is It is set to 123. Note that instead of the push order 123, push order data indicating another push order may be used.
Further, the stop operation position of the left reel 31, the stop operation position of the middle reel 31, and the stop operation position of the right reel 31 all indicate the symbol number aimed at the lower row.
For example, among the symbol stop signal data (1) of the stop acceptance specification table 1, the data indicating the stop operation position of the left reel 31 is "16". Here, as shown in Figure 114, if you aim so that the 16th "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 stops at the lower left row, the 18th "Blue BAR" can stop on the active line (upper left row). Become.
In the above example, data indicating the stop operation position centered on the lower stage is stored, but data indicating the stop operation position centered on the middle stage or the upper stage may be stored. In either case, the effective line in this embodiment is an irregular line that descends to the right, whereas the data indicating the stop operation position is set in a horizontal straight line (it is not set along the effective line). When the test machine performs a test according to the test signal, it is possible to stop the test machine at a predetermined timing regardless of the effective line. Thereby, the processing burden on the testing machine side and the processing burden on the gaming machine side can be reduced.

Further, among the symbol stop signal data, data indicating the stop operation position of the middle reel 31 is "7". If you aim so that the number 7 "Watermelon" on the middle reel 31 will stop at the middle lower row, the number 8 "Blue BAR" will be able to stop on the active line (middle middle row).
Furthermore, among the symbol stop signal data, data indicating the stop operation position of the right reel 31 is "2". If you aim so that the 2nd "Blue BAR" on the right reel 31 will stop at the lower right row, this "Blue BAR" will be able to stop on the active line (lower right row).
Therefore, the above-mentioned symbol stop signal data is data for aiming to line up the "Blue BAR" in the push order 123.

In addition, if it is a game in which 1BB is inside and no small role or replay has been won in the current game, if each reel 31 is stopped based on the above symbol stop signal data, "Blue BAR" will be aligned. Stop display. On the other hand, even if it is within 1BB, in a game where you have won either a small role or a replay in the current game, even if you stop each reel 31 based on the above symbol stop signal data, the "Blue BAR" Matching is not displayed.

Further, the symbol stop signal data "0, 6, 127, 127" in (2) is symbol stop signal data under conditions other than the above (1). This symbol stop signal data is symbol stop signal data that prevents "Blue BAR" from aligning.
In the symbol stop signal data "0, 6, 127, 127", "0" is data indicating the pressing order 123 as described above. Further, the data indicating the stop position of the left reel 31 is "6". Here, as shown in FIG. 114, if you aim so that the No. 6 "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 stops at the lower left row, the No. 18 "Blue BAR" will not stop on the active line.
Furthermore, the data "127" indicating the stop operation positions of the middle and right reels 31 means that the operation timing is irrelevant (any operation position). Therefore, since the left reel 31 is set so that the "blue BAR" does not stop on the active line, this means that the operation timing of the stop switch 42 of the middle and right reels 31 is arbitrary. Although the data indicating the stop operation positions of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is "127", it is also possible to store data indicating a predetermined stop operation position instead of an arbitrary operation position. It is.

As described above, the symbol stop signal is a signal that includes the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the stop operation position of each reel 31, and is a test signal sent to the test machine. Upon receiving this symbol stop signal (test signal), the testing machine executes a simulation in which the stop switch 42 is operated in accordance with this symbol stop signal. Then, when a simulation is executed in which the stop switch 42 is operated according to the symbol stop signal, it is determined (confirmed) whether or not the reel 31 stops at the correct position, and whether or not the ball payout rate is within the appropriate range. Make judgments (confirmations). Furthermore, by outputting the symbol stop signal before determining whether or not the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the testing machine can perform a stop operation immediately after the minimum gaming time has elapsed.

In addition, the stop acceptance designation table 2 (TBL_ORD_INF2) in Figure 142 (B) stores six types of pattern stop signal data, which correspond to push order 123, push order 132, ..., push order 321, respectively.
When the winning number "10" is won during the AT, or when the winning number "16" is won during the AT and inside the SRB, the symbol stop signal data "0, 127, 127, 127" corresponding to the push sequence 123 is selected.
In addition, when the winning number "11" is won during the AT, or when the winning number "17" is won during the AT and inside the SRB, the symbol stop signal data "1, 127, 127, 127" corresponding to the push sequence 132 is selected.
Furthermore, when the winning number "12" is won during the AT, or when the winning number "18" is won during the AT and inside the SRB, the symbol stop signal data "2, 127, 127, 127" corresponding to the push sequence 213 is selected.

Furthermore, when the winning number "13" is won during the AT, or when the winning number "19" is won during the AT and inside the SRB, the symbol stop signal data "3, 127, 127, 127" corresponding to the push sequence 231 is selected.
Similarly, when the winning number "14" is won during the AT, or when the winning number "20" is won during the AT and inside the SRB, the symbol stop signal data "4, 127, 127, 127" corresponding to the push sequence 312 is selected.
Similarly, when the winning number "15" is won during the AT, or when the winning number "21" is won during the AT and inside the SRB, the symbol stop signal data "5, 127, 127, 127" corresponding to the push sequence 312 is selected.

In this way, in a game where press order notification is performed during AT, a process for outputting press order data corresponding to the press order and stop operation position data indicating that the stop operation position is arbitrary is performed. executed. By outputting stop operation position data indicating that the stop operation position is arbitrary, the discrepancy between the test on the testing machine side and the gaming method played by the player after the gaming machine is actually installed in the hall is confirmed. It becomes possible to reduce the amount.

Returning to FIG. 141, the symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) will be explained.
First, in step S771, the stop reception designation table 2 shown in FIG. 141(B) is set.
In the next step S772, it is determined whether there is a push order instruction. Here, when winning a small winning combination A group during AT, or when winning a small winning combination B group during AT and inside SRB, the push order instruction number (in FIGS. 133 to 138) is stored in the specified storage area of the RWM 53. (not shown) is stored, this press order instruction number is stored in the A register. When the A register value is not "0", it is determined to be "Yes" (pressing order is instructed), and when it is "0", it is determined to be "No" (pressing order is not instructed).
When it is determined that there is a push order instruction, the process advances to step S773, and when it is determined that there is no push order instruction, the process advances to step S775.

In step S773, an offset value is set. Here, it is assumed that the push order instruction numbers for the six push orders 123, 132, ..., 321 are set to "1", "2", ..., "6", respectively. In this case, the offset values are "0", "1", ..., "5". Therefore, "1" is subtracted from the A register, and the offset value is set.
Next, proceed to step S774 and obtain the symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value. For example, the symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value "0" is "0, 127, 127, 127" in Fig. 142 (B), the symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value "1" is "1, 127, 127, 127", ..., the symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value "5" is "5, 127, 127, 127". Then proceed to step S781.

On the other hand, when the process advances from step S772 to step S775, the stop reception designation table 1 is set. This process is a process of setting the suspension acceptance specification table 1 in place of the suspension acceptance specification table 2 initially set in step S771.
Next, the process advances to step S776, and it is determined whether the winning and replay condition device number is "0". In this process, it is determined whether the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) stored at the address "F0A9(H)" is "0". When it is determined that there is "0" (that is, when the minor prize or replay has not been won in the current game), the process advances to step S7777, and when it is determined that there is not "0", the process advances to step S780.

In step S777, it is determined whether the reel condition device number is "1" (whether 1BB has been won). This process determines whether the reel condition device number (_NB_CRRT_BNS) stored at address "F0AA(H)" is "1". If it is determined that it is "1", the process proceeds to step S778, and if it is determined that it is not "1", the process proceeds to step S780.

In step S778, it is determined whether or not winning of 1BB is permitted in the current game. Here, "1BB winning is permitted" corresponds to the main game state 3 (AT preparation in progress) and the AT standby counter being "0". Therefore, whether the value of address "F07E(H)" (main game state number) is "3" or not, and whether the value of address "F098(H)" (AT standby counter) is "0" or not. to judge. When it is determined that the main game state number is 3 and the AT standby counter is "0", the process advances to step S779, and when it is determined that the main game state number is 3 and the AT standby counter is not "0", the process advances to step S780.
In step S779, symbol stop signal data "0, 16, 7, 2" is acquired. Then, the process advances to step S781. On the other hand, in step S780, symbol stop signal data "0, 6, 127, 127" is acquired. Then, the process advances to step S781.

In the next step S781, the serial communication circuit data register is set. Here, the address of the transmission register in the serial communication circuit of the chip contained in the main CPU 55 is stored in a predetermined register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S782, where a process for outputting the push order of the test signal is executed. For example, when the symbol stop signal data is "0, 16, 7, 2", the push order data "0" is written to the address of the transmission register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S783, where a process is executed to output the stop operation position of the first reel 31 (the left reel 31 in this embodiment) from the test signal. For example, when the symbol stop signal data is "0, 16, 7, 2", the process here is to write the stop operation position "16 (D)" of the left reel 31 to the address of the transmission register.

Next, the process advances to step S784, and processing for outputting the stop operation position of the second reel 31 (in this embodiment, the middle reel 31) is executed. The processing here is, for example, when the symbol stop signal data is "0, 16, 7, 2", the stop operation position "7" of the middle reel 31 is written in the address of the transmission register.
Next, the process advances to step S785, and processing for outputting the stop operation position of the third reel 31 (right reel 31 in this embodiment) is executed. The processing here is, for example, when the symbol stop signal data is "0, 16, 7, 2", the stop operation position "2" of the right reel 31 is written to the address of the transmission register.
Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In steps S782 to S785, the pressing order and the stop operation position of the reel 31 are written in the transmission register, thereby executing processing for transmitting these data to the test machine. Note that in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 151, which will be described later, processing for transmitting these data to the testing machine may be executed when the test signal is output in step S842.

As described above, in a situation where winning of 1BB is permitted, the symbol stop signal data is transmitted to make winning of 1BB possible, and in a situation where winning of 1BB is not permitted, a symbol stop signal data is sent to prevent winning of 1BB. Send symbol stop signal data. As a result, it is possible to transmit a test signal in accordance with the player's playing style in the market. Therefore, it is possible to bring the ball released in the test machine closer to the ball released in the market.

It should be noted that the process in FIG. 141 is one of the processes in the main process, so it is performed every game. When the slot machine 10 and the test machine are electrically connected, a symbol stop signal (test signal) is output to the test machine every game by the process shown in FIG. 141.
On the other hand, even when the slot machine 10 and the test machine are not connected, for example when the slot machine 10 is installed in a hall, the process shown in FIG. 141 is executed every game. However, since the slot machine 10 and the test machine are not connected, the symbol stop signal (test signal) is not output to the outside.

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the start of standby performance (M_TARPIC_EXE) in step S765 in FIG.
First, in step S821, the standby effect type is acquired. This process is a process of storing data of the standby effect type (_WK_PRD) at address "F09E(H)" in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S822, and it is determined whether the standby effect type is "0". Here, it is determined whether the A register value is "0". Then, when it is determined that the A register value is "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that the A register value is not "0", the process advances to step S823. When the standby effect type is "0", it means that there is no standby effect when the start switch 41 is operated, and when it is not "0", it means that there is a standby effect.

In step S823, "-2" is stored in the search counter update correction data. This process stores "FE(H)" in the search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) at address "F09F(H)". "FE(H)" is data for reverse rotation.
The next step S824, "control command set 1", is a process for transmitting a command to the sub-control board 80, similar to step S303 in Fig. 41 (eleventh embodiment), for example. Here, information on the standby performance number (_NB_PRD_NO) of address "F0A0(H)" or the triple role number (_NB_TRIO) of address "F0A1(H)" is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
In the next step S825, "0" is stored in the triple role number (_NB_TRIO) of "F0A1(H)".

Next, proceed to step S826, and based on the reel performance data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT), the specified position (stop position of reel 31) is saved in the #th reel pattern number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) of addresses "F054(H)", "F05F(H)", and "F06A(H)".
Fig. 144 is a diagram showing the reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT) stored in the ROM 54. As shown in Fig. 144, the reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT) stores designated positions (stop positions) corresponding to standby effect numbers. The "designated positions (stop positions)" correspond to symbol numbers.
For example, in the figure, addresses "1000(H)" to "1002(H)" indicate the designated stopping symbol positions of each reel 31 when the standby effect number (_NB_PRD_NO) is "1" (a "black BAR" line-up). The value "8(H)" stored in address "1000(H)" indicates the designated stopping symbol position of the left reel 31, the "8(H)" in address "1001(H)" indicates the designated stopping symbol position of the center reel 31, and the "3(H)" in address "1002(H)" indicates the designated stopping symbol position of the right reel 31.

Further, the symbol number during forward rotation and the symbol number during reverse rotation are different. In the 23rd embodiment, the index (also referred to as "initial" or "detection piece") provided on each reel 31 is within a range of approximately half the circumference (approximately 180 degrees) of the entire circumference (360 degrees) of the reel 31. is formed. The current position of the reel 31 can be determined when the reel 31 rotates about half a revolution depending on whether the index is detected or not.
The details will be described later, but in steps S897 and S899 of FIG. 155 (reel drive control), the reference symbol number when the rise of the # reel motor index is detected (when the index is detected) is set to "10". ing. Similarly, the reference symbol number when the fall of the #th reel motor index is detected is set to "0".

Therefore, when the reel 31 is rotating in the forward direction, the symbol with symbol number "10" (for example, "Replay" on the left reel 31 in FIG. 114) is displayed at the moment when the rising of the # reel motor index is detected. It is determined that it has passed the middle stage.
Similarly, when the reel 31 is rotating forward, the moment the fall of the # reel motor index is detected, the symbol number "0" (for example, in the left reel 31 in FIG. 114, "Replay") ) is judged to have passed through the middle stage.

On the other hand, when the reel 31 is rotating in the opposite direction, if it is determined that the symbol with symbol number "10" is passing at the moment when the rise of the # reel motor index is detected, in reality, As shown in FIG. 114, the symbol with symbol number "1" during forward rotation is passing. Similarly, if it is determined that the symbol with symbol number "0" is passing at the moment when the falling of the # reel motor index is detected, it is actually the symbol number "11" during forward rotation. You will be able to pass through the middle stage.
In this way, as shown in FIG. 114, when the reel 31 rotates forward and backward, the symbol numbers passing through the middle stage are different when the # reel motor index rises and falls (9 symbols). This means that there is a discrepancy between the two. Therefore, in the reel performance data table of FIG. 144, the stop position is stored in consideration of this deviation. For example, if it is determined that the reels 31 are to be stopped at symbol number "8" when rotating in reverse, they can actually be stopped at symbol number "3" as shown in FIG.

The reel performance data table shown in FIG. 144 defines the stop symbol position during standby performance, that is, when the reels 31 rotate in reverse. For example, in Fig. 144, if the stop symbol position when the standby performance number is "1" is set as "8, 8, 3", the actual position is "Black BAR (number "3" during forward rotation) - "Black BAR (No. 3 during forward rotation) - Black BAR (No. 8 during forward rotation) stops.
The same applies to standby performance numbers "2" to "8" other than "1".
For example, when the standby performance number is "2", the stop symbol position is "18, 18, 8", but the symbol number "18" when rotating in reverse is the symbol number "13" (red 7) when rotating forward. The symbol number "8" during reverse rotation corresponds to the symbol number "3" (red 7) during forward rotation.
As described above, in step S826 in FIG. 143, the reel symbol number (for the stop position) is stored based on the reel performance data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT).

The explanation returns to FIG. 143.
After step S826, the process advances to step S827, and the designated symbol position search waiting time is saved. In addition, as mentioned above, the "designated symbol position search waiting time" is the waiting time (after starting the standby effect (rotating the reels 31) until searching the designated symbol position (stop position) of the reels 31). In other words, it is approximately the rotation time of the reel 31).
FIG. 145 is a diagram showing reel performance execution timer table 1 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1) to reel performance execution timer table 8 (TBL_TARPIC_TM8) stored in ROM54. The data values shown in FIG. 145 are decimal numbers. Reel performance execution timer table 1 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1) to reel performance execution timer table 8 (TBL_TARPIC_TM8) correspond to standby performance numbers "1" to "8", respectively. For example, when the standby performance number is "1", the reel performance execution timer table 1 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1) is used.
In addition, in FIG. 145, for example, addresses "1018(H)" and "1019(H)", "101A(H)" and "101B(H)", and "101C(H)" and "101D(H)" indicate the timer values of the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31, respectively. In addition, although FIG. 145 shows how much the timer value is larger than the timer value of the left reel 31 based on the timer value of the left reel 31, in reality, the address "1018 (H)" The timer values of "1019(H)", "101A(H)" and "101B(H)", "101C(H)" and "101D(H)" are "14112(D)" and "14782(D)". , 16122 (D)''.

This timer value specifies the waiting time until the reel 31 starts decelerating. For example, when the standby performance number is "1", the left reel 31 indicates that it is possible to start decelerating after "14112 (D)" has passed since the start of the standby performance, that is, after "1.117 x 14112 = approximately 15763ms" has elapsed. ing.
Note that this timer value is also subtracted while the reels 31 are accelerating in the standby performance. As shown in FIG. 156, which will be described later, the acceleration process of the reel 31 requires a total of "62 times x 2 interruptions = approximately 139 ms" for the first to eighth steps. The timer value of each reel 31 is set to at least a time longer than the time required for this acceleration process.
Further, in the reel performance execution timer tables 1 to 4, the standby time of the middle reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the left reel 31. Furthermore, the standby time of the right reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the middle reel 31. As a result, when the reels 31 stop, they stop in the order of "left -> middle ->right." Further, in the reel performance execution timer tables 5 to 8, the standby time of the middle reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the right reel 31. Furthermore, the standby time of the left reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the middle reel 31. As a result, when the reel 31 stops, it stops in the order of "right → middle → left".
In this way, by setting the standby time of each reel 31 in the reel production execution timer table, the order in which the reels 31 are stopped can be determined, and the order and timing in which the reels 31 are stopped can be regularized. .
On the other hand, if the standby time for each reel 31 is not set, it will not be possible to secure a sufficient constant speed time after starting the reel 31, and the necessary effects will not be output while the reel 31 is rotating. . Furthermore, if the reels 31 are stopped in the order in which the designated symbol positions arrive at the stop positions, the reels may stop in a disjointed manner, for example, in the order of "right → left → center."

Furthermore, the difference between the standby time of the first reel 31 to stop and the standby time of the second reel 31 to stop is set to "670" interrupts in reel effect execution timer table 1, "1008" interrupts in reel effect execution timer tables 2 to 4, and "1176" interrupts in reel effect execution timer tables 5 to 8. The number of interrupts per rotation of the reel 31 is "672" as described above. Therefore, after the first reel 31 stops, the second reel 31 is set to stop after rotating approximately one or more times.
Furthermore, the difference between the standby time of the second reel 31 to stop and the standby time of the third reel 31 to stop is set to "1340" interrupt in reel effect execution timer table 1, "1008" interrupt in reel effect execution timer tables 2 to 4, "1176" interrupt in reel effect execution timer tables 5 to 7, and "1848" interrupt in reel effect execution timer table 8. Therefore, after the second reel 31 stops, the third reel 31 is set to stop after rotating approximately two or more times.

For example, even if the center reel 31 goes out of step after the left reel 31 stops (the second reel rotation failure detection counter determines that an abnormality has occurred), the timer value that was set continues to be subtracted during this time. Then, if the center reel 31 cannot stop even when it is unable to reach a constant speed after going out of step, and the timer value of the right reel 31 reaches "0", the right reel 31 is stopped before the center reel 31 as an irregularity. Therefore, the stopping order of the reels 31 in this case is "left → right → center". By responding in this way in the event of an irregularity such as a step-out, the time required for the standby performance can be prevented from being unintentionally extended due to step-out. This can shorten the time until the game can be started.

Furthermore, in the fourth timer value of each reel performance execution timer table, for example, in reel performance execution timer table 1, the values stored at addresses "101E (H)" and "101F (H)" are shows the waiting time. For example, when the standby performance number is "1", restarting is possible after "1.117 x 5371 = approximately 5999 ms" has elapsed after a complete stop.
In step S827 of FIG. 143, for example, when the standby effect number is "1", the first reel specified symbol position search wait time (_TM2_TAR1_WAIT) of the addresses "F039(H)" and "F03A(H)" is set to " 14112 (D)" is stored, and "14782 (D)" is stored in the second reel specified symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TAR2_WAIT) of addresses "F03B (H)" and "F03C (H)", and address "F03D "16122(D)" is stored in the third reel specified symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TAR3_WAIT) of "(H)" and "F03E(H)".

In the next step S828, acceleration start is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Disable interrupts.
(2) Store “10000011(B)” in the A register.
(3) The A register value is stored in the first reel drive number (_WK_RL1_STS) at address "F04D(H)".
(4) The A register value is stored in the second reel drive number (_WK_RL2_STS) at address “F058(H)”.
(5) The A register value is stored in the third reel drive number (_WK_RL3_STS) at address “F063(H)”.
(6) Enable interrupts.
If an interrupt process is performed between the above steps (3) to (5), the reels 31 will not start spinning all at once. For this reason, an interrupt process is not performed while the reel drive numbers are being updated.
As a result of the above processing, the first reel drive number (_WK_RL1_STS) through the third reel drive number (_WK_RL3_STS) all become "10000011 (B)", and when they become "00000011 (B)" in the next interrupt processing, the acceleration of each reel 31 is actually executed.

At the start of acceleration, the lower four digits of the reel drive number are "0011 (B)", but when the next acceleration starts, they become "0010 (B)", and when the speed reaches constant speed, they become "0101 (B)".
After the reels 31 reach a constant speed, the constant speed state is maintained until the reel designated symbol position search waiting time set in step S827 is reached, and when the reel designated symbol position search waiting time reaches "0", Start decelerating the reels. When the reel 31 starts decelerating, the reel drive number becomes "0100 (B)" and when the reel 31 enters the deceleration state, it becomes "0001 (B)". Then, when the reel 31 stops, the reel drive number becomes "0000(B)".

In the next step S829, a check for completion of all reels 31 is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "0" in the A register.
(2) Perform a logical sum (OR) operation between the A register value and the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS). Then, the result of the logical sum is stored in the A register.
(3) Perform a logical OR operation between the A register value and the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS). Then, the result of the logical sum is stored in the A register.
(4) Perform a logical OR operation between the A register value and the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS). Then, the result of the logical sum is stored in the A register.
(5) Perform a logical product (AND) operation between the A register value and "01111111 (B)".

Here, when all the reels 31 stop, the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel driving state (_WK_RL3_STS) are all "10000000 (B)" or " 00000000(B)”. Therefore, in the calculation (5) above, the calculation result becomes "0" only when all the reels 31 are stopped.
In addition, in the above calculation (5), the number used to calculate the logical product to determine whether all the reels 31 have stopped is not limited to "01111111(B)", but may also be "00001111(B)". , the same calculation result as above can be obtained. In other words, by determining whether the lower four bits are "0", it is possible to determine whether all reels 31 have stopped.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, actual reel drive control is executed once every two interrupts, so the most significant bit of the reel drive status (_WK_RL#_STS) changes to "0" or "1" for each interrupt process. Become. Therefore, not limited to such specifications, for example, if the most significant bit is always "0", "11111111 ( B)" can also be used.

In the next step S830, it is determined whether or not all of the reels 31 have stopped. In this process, when the result of the calculation in (5) above is "0" (when the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that all of the reels 31 have stopped.
If it is determined in step S830 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S831. If it is determined in step S830 that all the reels 31 have not stopped, the above process of step S829 is executed again.
In step S831, the waiting time to end the effect is set. This process obtains the waiting time to end the effect corresponding to the standby effect number in the current standby effect from the reel effect execution timer table (TBL_TARPIC_TM1-8) and stores it in the BC register. For example, when the standby effect number in the current standby effect is "1", the addresses "101E(H)" and "101F(H)" in the reel effect execution timer table 1 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1) in FIG. 145 are read.
The value "5371 (D)" (waiting time at the end of the performance) stored by " is stored in the BC register.

Next, the process advances to step S832, and a 2-byte time wait is executed. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the BC register value for each interrupt process until the BC register value becomes "0".
Then, when the BC register value becomes "0", the 2-byte time wait is ended and the process advances to step S833.
In step S833, a standby effect type RWM address is set. This process is a process of storing "F0A0(H)", which is the address of the standby performance number (_NB_PRO_NO), in the HL register.
In the next step S834, it is determined whether the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (namely, the standby performance number (_NB_PRO_NO)) is "4". When it is determined that the value is "4", the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not "4", the process advances to step S835.
Here, when the standby effect number "4" is selected as the standby effect, as shown in FIG. 144, it is a standby effect in which "red 7" is aligned and then "black BAR" is aligned. Therefore, when the standby performance number is "4", the process proceeds to the next process without clearing the data related to the standby performance start process or initializing the symbol number.

On the other hand, when proceeding to step S835, search for the standby effect type (_WK_PRD) of the address "F09E(H)", the standby effect number (_NB_PRO_NO) of the address "F0A0(H)", and the address "F09F(H)" Clear the counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV). Specifically, a process of storing "0" in each of the above addresses is executed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S836, and the data of the symbol number (for the passing position) and the symbol number (for the stopping position) are initialized.
in particular,
1st reel symbol number (for passing position) of address “F053 (H)” (_NB_RL1_PASPIC),
1st reel symbol number (for stop position) of address “F054 (H)” (_NB_RL1_STPPIC),
2nd reel symbol number (for passing position) of address “F05E (H)” (_NB_RL2_PASPIC),
2nd reel symbol number (for stop position) of address “F05F(H)” (_NB_RL2_STPPIC),
3rd reel symbol number (for passing position) of address “F069 (H)” (_NB_RL3_PASPIC),
3rd reel symbol number (for stop position) of address “F06A(H)” (_NB_RL3_STPPIC)
The initial value "11111111(B)" (FF(H)) is stored in all of the FF(H).

Next, the process advances to step S837, and a random delay time is set. This process is executed by counting the first reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL1_WAIT) at address "F056(H)", the second reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL2_WAIT) at address "F061(H)", and the second reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL2_WAIT) at address "F06C(H)". The third reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL3_WAIT) is set to a value determined by lottery. Specifically, any one value from "0" to "335(D)" is determined, and the value is stored in each of the above three addresses. When the value is stored in the above address, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing, and when the value becomes "0", the reels 31 can be restarted.

The above standby performance start process shown in FIG. 143 is executed before determining whether or not the minimum gaming time has elapsed (step S766), as shown in FIG. 140. In other words, the standby performance start process is executed even if the minimum game time has not elapsed. After the standby performance ends, it is determined in step S766 whether or not the minimum gaming time has elapsed. In the 23rd embodiment, since the standby effect is executed according to the timer value shown in FIG. 145, the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) will always have elapsed by the time the standby effect ends.
In this way, when executing a standby effect, it starts without waiting for the minimum playing time, so even if the standby effect is executed close to the closing time of the hall, for example, it will not cause unpleasant feelings to the player. It is possible to reduce the possibility of this happening.

FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) in step S752 of FIG. 139.
First, in step S791, it is determined whether the wait time (_TM2_WAIT) stored by the addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)" is "0" (whether the zero flag is "1" or not). to decide. If it is "0", the process advances to step S792, and if it is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended. In other words, unless the waiting time (_TM2_WAIT) stored by addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)" is "0", the reel 31 will not be stopped even if the stop switch 42 is operated. Not executed.

The reason for controlling in this way is as follows.
In the 23rd embodiment, a non-RT or a non-internal 1BB in RT1 will win 1BB with a relatively high probability (with "19930/65536"), as shown in FIGS. 126 and 127. If you win 1BB and it becomes inside 1BB, the symbol combination of 1BB will be stopped and displayed in games where you have not won a small role or replay in that game (games where the winning and replay condition device number is "0"). It becomes possible.
On the other hand, in the 23rd embodiment, AT is executed in a 1BB game. For this reason, when it is not AT, you do not want to win 1BB even if it is inside 1BB. Even if 1BB is won during non-AT, the 1BB game itself will be executed, but AT will not be executed. Furthermore, since the AT lottery is not executed while 1BB is in operation, it is disadvantageous for the player if 1BB is in operation during non-AT. When the 1BB is activated, the ball payout rate is slightly higher than when the 1BB is not activated, as described above, but since it is a game period in which the AT lottery is not executed, it is actually disadvantageous to the player.

Therefore, when the stop display of the 1BB symbol combination is not permitted, specifically when the main game state is not "3" (AT preparation), or even when the main game state is "3", AT standby When the flag is not "0", in order to avoid as much as possible the symbol combination of 1BB from being stopped and displayed, the symbol combination of 1BB is tenpai (when the two reels 31 are stopped, the symbol "Blue BAR" related to 1BB is A period is provided in which, even if the third stop switch 42 is operated, the stop operation does not become effective when the third stop switch 42 is operated.

If it is determined in step S791 that the waiting time is "0", the flow proceeds to step S792, where an index passing check is performed for all motors. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the first reel pattern number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) in the A register.
(2) A logical sum (OR) is calculated between the value of the A register and the second reel symbol number (for the passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC). The result of the calculation is then stored in the A register.
(3) A logical OR operation is performed on the value of the A register and the third reel symbol number (for the passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC). The result of the operation is then stored in the A register.
(4) Add "1" to the value of the A register.

Here, the first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC), the A register value and the second reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC), and the third reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) are , before there is a change in the #th reel motor index, it is "FF (H)", that is, "11111111 (B)".
Therefore, if at least one data is "11111111(B)", the calculation result up to (3) above will be "11111111(B)", and as shown in (4), adding "1" will result in "0". become. Therefore, before there is a change in the #th reel motor index for at least one reel 31, the above calculation result will be "0", and after there is a change in the #th reel motor index for all reels 31, the above calculation result will be "0". The calculation result will be a value other than "0".

As mentioned above, when there is a change in the # reel motor index, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) will be set to "10 (D)" (at the rising edge) or "0" (at the falling edge). time) is memorized. Then, each time it is determined that the symbol has moved by one symbol, "1" is subtracted from the #th reel symbol number (for passing position). In this way, after the # reel motor index changes, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) changes from "0" (00000000 (B)) to "19 (D)" (00010011 (B)). It will be a cycle. Therefore, after the change of the #th reel motor index, the above logical OR operation of (1) to (3) will not result in "11111111(B)".

Further, as another method for the above calculation (4), there is a method of performing a logical product (AND) calculation with "11100000(B)". With this method, if the calculation result is not "0", it is possible to determine "No" in step S793, which will be described later. Furthermore, as another method for the above calculation (4), there is a method of performing a calculation of "1" bit shift to the left. With this method, if the calculation result is not "0", it is possible to determine "No" in step S793, which will be described later. In other words, before there is a change in the # reel motor index, the upper 3 bits of the # reel symbol number (for passing position) are "111", so in the calculation in (4) above, the upper 3 bits are It is determined whether at least one bit of the bits is "1". If there is a "1" in the upper three bits, it is not possible to accept the stop switch 42 in step S793, which will be described later, and if there is no "1" in the upper three bits, it can be determined that the stop can be accepted. becomes.

Next, the process advances to step S793, and it is determined whether or not it is possible to accept a stop of the stop switch 42. This determination is made by determining whether or not the above calculation (4) in step S792 is "0" (zero flag is "1"). In other words, when there is a change in the #th reel motor index for all reels 31, the stop switch 42 is permitted to accept the stop.
In step S793, if it is determined that the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the process proceeds to step S794, and if it is determined that the stop switch 42 cannot be accepted, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S794, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 42 (corresponding to the reel 31 that has not yet been controlled to stop) has been operated based on the value of bits D0 to D2 of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) at address "F017(H)". If it is determined that the stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S795, and if it is determined that the stop switch 42 has not been operated, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S795, the stop position is determined based on the result of the lottery for the current game (addresses "F0A9(H)" and "F0AA(H)") and the reel position at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated.
Next, the process proceeds to step S796, where the process moves to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET).

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S796 of FIG. 146.
As mentioned above, this flowchart restricts the 1BB symbol combination from being stopped and displayed when the 1BB symbol combination is full and the situation allows the 1BB symbol combination to be stopped and displayed. However, in a situation where it is not desired to stop displaying the 1BB symbol combination, the waiting time until the third stop switch 42 becomes effective is set. If the waiting time is set here and the third stop switch 42 is operated before the waiting time has elapsed, the result in step S791 of FIG. 146 is "No", and the stop control of the third reel 31 is not executed.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the second stop switch 42 has been stopped. Here, in step S794 of FIG. 146, it is determined whether the stop switch 42 determined to have started is the second stop switch 42 (the second stop switch 42 operated). If it is determined in step S801 that it is after the second stop, the process advances to step S802, and if it is determined that it is not after the second stop, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S802, it is determined whether 1BB can be won. Specifically, at the time of the second stop, it is determined whether the symbol combination of 1BB reaches the active line or not. For example, when determining whether or not you have reached tenpai, after the second reel 31 has stopped, both the "blue BAR" (symbols that make up the 1BB symbol combination) on the first reel 31 and the second reel 31 are on the active line. When it is stopped, it is determined that 1BB is full (1BB can win). On the other hand, even before the second reel 31 stops (regardless of whether it has stopped or not), it may be determined whether or not the second reel 31 is full. For example, when the first reel 31 stops, the "blue BAR" is stopped on the active line, and the second stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "blue BAR" of the second reel 31 can be stopped on the active line. When this happens, it is determined that 1BB is tenpai (1BB can win).
When it is determined that 1BB is possible to win, the process proceeds to step S803, and when it is determined that 1BB is not possible to win, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S803, it is determined whether the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) of the current game is "0". Here, it is determined whether the value of address "F0A9(H)" is "0". When it is determined that the winning and replay condition device number is "0", the process proceeds to step S804, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended.
Therefore, even if it is determined in step S802 that 1BB is full, the waiting time is not set in step S810 since the answer in step S803 is "No" in the game when the small winning combination is won. In the 23rd embodiment, in a game in which a small winning combination is won, small winning combination priority control (in a game in which the winning of 1BB is carried over and a small winning combination is won, the winning of the small winning combination is prioritized and control that does not allow winning of 1BB) is executed, so 1BB will never win. Therefore, there is no need to provide a waiting time in a game where the player wins a small prize.
In step S804, the accessory condition device number (_NB_CRRT_BNS) is acquired. This process is a process of acquiring the value of address "F0AA(H)" and storing it in the A register.
In the next step S805, it is determined whether the acquired accessory condition device number is less than "2", in other words, whether it is "1". Here, a comparison operation is performed between the A register value and "2", and when it is determined that the A register value is smaller, it is determined as "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S806, and when it is determined as "No", the main Finish the process according to the flowchart.

In the 23rd embodiment, the symbol combination of 1BB is not tenpai unless the accessory condition device number is "1". Therefore, when the accessory condition device number is "0" in the current game, it is configured such that "No" is determined in step S802. Therefore, in step S805, it is not determined whether the accessory condition device number is "1" (of course, it is determined whether the accessory condition device number is "1" in step S805). ), it is determined whether or not it is less than "2".

In step S806, the main game state number is acquired. This process is a process of storing the value of the main gaming state (_NB_GAM_STS) at address "F07E(H)" in the A register. Then, the process advances to step S807, and it is determined whether the A register value is "3" (AT preparation in progress). Here, a comparison operation is performed between the A register value and "3", and if the A register value and "3" are the same value, it is determined as "Yes". When it is determined that the main game state number is "3", the process advances to step S808, and when it is determined that it is not "3", the process advances to step S809.

In step S808, the value of the AT wait counter (_CT_AT_WAIT) of address "F098(H)" is acquired. Then, it is determined whether the AT standby counter value is "0" or not. When the AT standby counter value is "0", the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the AT standby counter is not "0", the process advances to step S809.
In step S809, "896(D)" is stored in the HL register. Next, the process advances to step S810, and the HL register value (896(D)) is stored in the wait time (_TM2_WAIT) of addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
When the waiting time is stored in addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)", "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing. Further, it is determined whether the time set here becomes "0" in step S791 of FIG. 146.
In the above processing, when the main game state is "3" and the AT standby counter is "0", no standby time is stored. That is, in this case, winning of 1BB is permitted.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S753 of FIG. 139.
First, in step S941, main game state game end processing is executed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, and is a process shown in FIG. 149, which will be described later.
Next, the process advances to step S942, and 1BB operation management is executed. The 1BB operation management is a process of determining whether or not the termination condition of the 1BB game is satisfied when the current game is a 1BB game. Specifically, based on whether or not the D2 bit of the operation state flag (in the 23rd embodiment, like the 11th embodiment, "FL_ACTION" shown in FIG. 35 is provided) is "1", Determine whether 1BB is in operation.
When it is determined that 1BB is in operation, the number of coins that can be obtained when 1BB is in operation ("_CT_BIG_PAY" of address "F00E(H)") is read, and it is determined whether or not it has become "0".
Then, when it is determined that the obtainable number of coins has become "0" (when the obtainable number of coins satisfies the 1BB operation end condition), processing is executed to clear the D2 bit of the operation state flag.

Next, the process advances to step S943, and it is determined whether or not the RB is in operation. Here, it is determined whether the RB is in operation by determining whether or not the D3 bit of the operation state flag (FIG. 35) is "0". When it is determined that the RB is not in operation (the RB operation state flag is "0"), the process advances to step S945, and when it is determined that the RB is in operation, the process advances to step S944.

In step S944, RB operation management is executed. This process judges whether the number of games played when the RB of the address "F00F (H)" is activated has reached "12", or the number of wins when the RB of the address "F010 (H)" is activated has reached "8". If it is judged that the number of games played with the RB is less than "12" and the number of wins of the small role is less than "8", the process of step S944 is terminated and the process proceeds to step S945. On the other hand, if it is judged in step S944 that the number of games played with the RB has reached "12" or the number of wins of the small role has reached "8", the D3 bit of the operation status flag is set to "0" and the process proceeds to step S945.
Step S945 executes the advantageous zone clear counter management. This process is the process shown in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52 shown in the eleventh embodiment, and executes the update process of the advantageous zone clear counter and the difference counter, and the initialization process when the advantageous zone end condition is satisfied. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the process at the end of the main game state game in step S941 of FIG. 148.
First, in step S951, it is determined whether the advantageous section clear counters (_CT_ADV_CLR) for addresses "F07A(H)" and "F07B(H)" have become less than "600". When it is determined that it is less than "600", the process advances to step S952, and when it is determined that it is not less than "600", the process advances to step S955.
In step S952, it is determined whether the main game state 1 (advantageous section normal (non-AT)) is present. This process is a process for determining whether or not the main gaming state number of address "F07E(H)" is "1". When it is determined that the main game state 1 is present, the process advances to step S957, and when it is determined that the main game state 1 is not, the process advances to step S953.

In step S953, it is determined whether the main game state 5 (AT pullback) is reached. This process is a process for determining whether or not the main gaming state number of address "F07E(H)" is "5". When it is determined that the main game state 5 is present, the process proceeds to step S954, and when it is determined that the main game state is not the main game state 5, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S954, it is determined whether the AT pullback counter is "0". This process is a process for determining whether the value of address "F09D(H)" is "0". When it is determined that the AT pullback counter is "0", the process advances to step S957, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended.

On the other hand, when the process advances from step S951 to step S955, it is determined whether or not the end conditions for main game state 4 are satisfied. This process determines whether the number of coins that can be acquired at the time of 1BB operation of address "F00E (H)" is "0" or not, and if it is "0", it is the end condition of main game state 4 (1BB operation). It is determined that the following is satisfied. When it is determined that the end conditions for main game state 4 are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S956, and when it is determined that the end conditions for main game state 4 are not satisfied, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S956, it is determined whether the ending counter has changed from "1" to "0". This process determines whether the ending counter of address "F097(H)" has been updated from "1" to "0" in the current game. When it is determined that the ending counter has changed from "1" to "0", the process advances to step S957, and when it is determined that the ending counter has not changed from "1" to "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S957, advantageous section end preparation (M_ADVEND_STBY) is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 150, which will be described later. Then, after executing preparations for ending the advantageous section, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

Figure 150 is a flowchart showing preparation for the end of the advantageous period (M_ADVEND_STNBY) in step S957 of Figure 149.
In step S961, the advantageous zone clear counter is set to "1." This process executes the following steps.
(1) Store "1(H)" in the HL register, causing the H register value to become "0(H)" and the L register value to become "1(H)."
(2) Next, the L register value "1 (H)" is stored in the lower address (F07B (H)) of the favorable zone clear counter, and the H register value "0 (H)" is stored in the upper address (F07A (H)).
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends. As a result of the above, the upper byte of the advantageous zone clear counter becomes "00000000 (B)" and the lower byte becomes "00000001 (B)."

By storing "1" in the advantageous section clear counter through the preparation for ending the advantageous section as described above, it becomes unnecessary to store data indicating whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied at a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
If data indicating whether the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53, the capacity of the RWM 53 will be compressed to that extent.
Further, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, it is necessary to store data indicating that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Furthermore, for each game, it is necessary to perform a process of reading the data stored at the predetermined address and determining whether or not the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met. Therefore, the program capacity is required accordingly, and the capacity of the ROM 54 is compressed.

On the other hand, in the 23rd embodiment, simply saving "1" in the favorable zone clear counter in preparation for the end of the favorable zone makes it possible to execute the "1" subtraction process in step S422 in the favorable zone counter management executed thereafter, for example in FIG. 51, so that the value before the subtraction is "1" and the value after the subtraction is "0", resulting in "No" in step S423 and "Yes" in step S424, and proceeding to step S435 to execute the RWM53 clear process at the end of the favorable zone.

FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) in the 23rd embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 53 in the 11th embodiment. In FIG. 151, the same steps as those in FIG. 53 are given the same step numbers.
In FIG. 151, the reel drive control in step S461 in FIG. 53 is referred to as reel drive management (I_REEL_ADM) in step S841, and this specific process will be described in detail.
Further, in FIG. 151, a test signal output is provided in step S842. Note that in FIG. 53 of the eleventh embodiment, this process is omitted, but this does not mean that the test signal output is not provided in the eleventh embodiment.
The test signal output in step S842 may include the output of data on the push order in the current game and the designated position of the reel 31. Further, for example, output such as condition device information may be included, but the explanation will be omitted in the twenty-third embodiment.

Furthermore, in the twenty-third embodiment, the interrupt period is "1.117" ms, which is different from the other embodiments (2.235 ms).
Here, when the interrupt period is "2.235" ms, the drive control of the reel 31 is executed for each interrupt (for example, step S461 in FIG. 53 in the 11th embodiment), but in the 23rd embodiment When the interrupt cycle is "1.117" ms, drive control of the reel 31 (processing after step S872 in FIG. 154, which will be described later) is executed once every two interrupts.

FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing reel drive management (I_REEL_ADM) in step S841 of FIG. 151.
Here, the program shown in FIG. 152 (including FIGS. 153, 154 to 155, 157, and 159 to be described later) is used not only for reel control during standby performance but also for normal reel control. Therefore, it is possible to perform normal reel control and standby performance (reverse rotation of the reels 31) with the program shown in FIG. 152 without providing a program dedicated to standby performance.
In FIG. 152, in step S851, the number of reels is set. Note that the number of reels is "3". Here, processing is performed to store "00000100 (B)" in the C register.
In the next step S852, reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 153, which will be described later, and is a process in which the value of the reel drive state to be controlled or its address is stored in each register. Through the process of step S852, each register value becomes as follows.
A register value: Value of the reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) of the reel 31 to be controlled DE register value: Address of the reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) of the reel 31 to be controlled HL register value: To be controlled Address of reel drive status (_WK_RL#_STS) of reel 31

In the next step S853, reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) is executed. This process is for actually performing the acceleration, constant speed, deceleration, stopping, etc. of the reel, and is the process shown in Figures 154 and 155 described later.
In the next step S854, it is determined whether the processes of steps S852 and S853 have been performed for all reels 31. In this process, first, the process of shifting the C register value to the right by "1" is performed. For example, since the initial value is "00000100 (B)" as described above, in the first step S854, the value is shifted to the right by "1" to become "00000010 (B)". Next, it is determined whether the value after the right shift of "1" is "0". If it is determined that the value is "0", it is determined that the processes of steps S852 and S853 have been performed for all reels 31, and the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not "0", the process returns to step S852.

FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing the reel control data address setting (C_RLDAT_SET) in step S852 of FIG.
First, in step S861, a top RWM address request is set. Here, the following processes are executed.
(1) Store the address of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), i.e., “F04D(H)”, in the HL register.
(2) Store the C register value in the A register. Note that the initial value of the C register is "00000100(B)" as described above.
(3) Shift the value of the A register to the right by "1" and store the result in the A register. As a result, in the first operation, the value of the A register becomes "00000010(B)."
(4) The value in the A register is multiplied by "11(D)" and the result of the multiplication is stored in the A register. Here, multiplying "00000010(B)", or "2(D)", by "11(D)" results in "22(D)", or "16(H)".

Note that this "11(D)" is based on the address interval stored in the RWM 53. Specifically, the address for storing the first reel drive state is "F04D(H)", and various information regarding the first reel is stored up to "F057(H)". Further, the address for storing the second reel driving state is "F058(H)", and various information regarding the second reel is stored up to "F062(H)". Furthermore, the address for storing the third reel driving state is "F063(H)", and various information regarding the third reel is stored up to "F06D(H)".
In this way, the interval between the address "F04D(H)" for storing the first reel drive state and the address "F058(H)" for storing the second reel drive state is "11" addresses, and This is because the interval between the address "F058(H)" for storing the reel drive state and the address "F063(H)" for storing the third reel drive state is "11" addresses. As a result, by repeating the same process in subsequent processes, it becomes possible to obtain, for example, reel drive state information for the reel to be controlled.

Furthermore, various pieces of information for each reel 31 are also arranged at the same intervals. For example, the address of the first reel drive pulse output counter is the address "F04E(H)" which is obtained by adding "2" to the address "F04D(H)" of the first reel drive state. Similarly, the address of the second reel drive pulse output counter is the address "F05A(H)" which is obtained by adding "2" to the address "F058(H)" of the second reel drive state. Similarly, the address of the third reel drive pulse output counter is the address "F065(H)" which is obtained by adding "2" to the address "F063(H)" of the third reel drive state. The same applies to other information.
As a result, in step S881 (FIG. 154) described later, for example, "6" is added to the address of the #th reel drive state to obtain the address of the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC). However, for example, for the first reel 31, add "6" to the address "F04D(H)" of the first reel drive state, and add "6" to the address "F053(H)" of the first reel symbol number (for passing position). )” can be obtained. Similarly, for the second reel 31, add "6" to the address "F058(H)" of the second reel drive state, and obtain the address "F05E(H)" of the second reel symbol number (for passing position). can be found.
In this way, by repeatedly executing the same module, processing for three reels can be executed.

Next, the process advances to step S862, and designated address data is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. In the first calculation, the A register value is "16(H)", so adding "16(H)" to the HL register value "F04D(H)" results in "F063(H)".
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(3) Store the H register value in the D register.
(4) Store the L register value in the E register.
With this process,
A register value: Value of the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) HL register value: Address value of the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (H register value is the upper address, L register value is the lower address) "F063 (H )”
DE register value: "F063 (H)" which is the address value of the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (D register value is the upper address, E register value is the lower address)
becomes.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

The reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) in FIG. 153 is executed three times in total until it is determined "Yes" in step S854 in FIG. 152.
The second calculation using the reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) is as follows.
(1) Step S861
a) Store the address of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), that is, "F04D(H)" in the HL register.
b) Store the C register value in the A register. The second time, the C register value is "00000010(B)".
c) Shift the A register value to the right by '1' and store the result in the A register. As a result, the A register value becomes "00000001(B)".
d) Multiply the A register value by "11 (D)" and store the multiplication result in the A register. Here, when "00000001(B)" or "1(D)" is multiplied by "11(D)", it becomes "11(D)" or "0B(H)".

(2) Step S862
a) Add the A register value to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. In the second calculation, the A register value is "0B(H)", so adding "0B(H)" to the HL register value "F04D(H)" results in "F058(H)". Become.
b) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
c) Store the H register value in the D register.
d) Store the L register value in the E register.
With this process,
A register value: Value of the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) HL register value: Address value of the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (H register value is the upper address, L register value is the lower address) "F058 (H )”
DE register value: "F058 (H)" which is the address value of the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (D register value is the upper address, E register value is the lower address)
becomes.

The third calculation of the reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) is as follows:
(1) Step S861
a) The address of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), i.e., "F04D(H)", is stored in the HL register.
b) Store the C register value in the A register. The third time, the C register value is "00000001(B)."
c) Shift the value of the A register to the right by "1" and store the result in the A register, so that the value of the A register becomes "00000000(B)."
d) Multiply the value in the A register by "11 (D)" and store the multiplication result in the A register. Here, multiplying "00000000 (B)" by "11 (D)" results in "0".

(2) Step S862
a) Add the A register value to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. Here, in the third calculation, the A register value is "0", so adding "0" to the HL register value "F04D(H)" results in "F04D(H)".
b) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
c) Store the H register value in the D register.
d) Store the L register value in the E register.
With this process,
A register value: The value of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) HL register value: The address value of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (H register value is the upper address, L register value is the lower address) "F04D (H )”
DE register value: "F04D (H)" which is the address value (D register value is the upper address, E register value is the lower address) of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS)
becomes.

154 and 155 are flowcharts showing the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) in step S853 of FIG. 152. FIG. 155 is a flowchart following FIG. 154.
In FIG. 154, in step S871, it is determined whether the current interrupt processing is the excitation update timing. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Exclusive OR (XOR) operation is performed between the A register value (value of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS)) and "10000000 (B)", and the operation result is stored in the A register.
As a result, when the D7 bit of the A register value before the operation is "0", the operation becomes "1", and when the D7 bit of the A register value before the operation is "1", the operation becomes "0". ”. Further, bits D0 to D6 do not change before and after the operation.
(2) Store the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value (the address indicated by the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS)).
(3) Determine whether the D7 (most significant) bit stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is "0" or not, and if it is "0", determine that it is excitation update timing. .

From the above, the D7 bit of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) takes a value of "0" or "1" for each interrupt process. Therefore, the D7 bit becomes "0" once every two interrupts, and the excitation update timing arrives.
When it is determined that it is the excitation update timing, the process proceeds to step S872, and when it is determined that it is not the excitation update timing, the process according to this flowchart is ended. In other words, the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) processing from step S872 onwards is executed once every two interrupts. Therefore, the counters and data updated in the processing after step S872 can be updated every two interrupts. Note that control for driving the motor 32 (output processing from the output port) is executed for each interrupt.

In the next step S872, a reel rotation start standby counter is acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Save the HL register value to the stack area.
(2) Add "9" to the HL register value to make the HL register value the address value of the #th reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL#_WAIT).
Next, the process advances to step S873, and the counter value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is counted down (subtracted by "1").
In addition, the # reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL#_WAIT) stores "0" when there is no standby effect, and when there is a standby effect, the counter for the random delay of # reel 31 after the standby effect is stored. A counter value is stored.
Then, the process advances to step S874, and it is determined whether there is a standby time when the reel rotation starts. Here, if the value before the subtraction of "1" in step S873 is not "0" (the carry flag does not become "1"), it is determined that there is no standby at the start of reel rotation, and the process proceeds to step S875. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a standby at the start of reel rotation, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In the next step S875, it is determined whether the reels 31 are stopped. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value saved in the stack area (the address value of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS)) is restored to the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is "0", it is determined that the reels 31 are stopped.
Note that when the process proceeds to step S875, the D7 bit of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) is "0".
If it is determined in step S875 that the reel 31 is not stopped, the process proceeds to step S876, and if it is determined that the reel 31 is stopped, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S876, it is determined whether the reels 31 are accelerating or decelerating. Here, when the A register value (value of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS)) is less than "3", it is determined that the reel 31 is accelerating or decelerating.
When it is determined that the reels 31 are accelerating or decelerating, the process advances to step S882, and when it is determined that the reels 31 are not accelerating or decelerating, the process advances to step S877.

In step S877, it is determined whether the reel 31 is at a constant speed or has started decelerating. Here, it is determined whether the A register value is "0" or not, and when it is not "0", it is determined that the reel 31 is at a constant speed or has started decelerating, and when it is "0", the reel 31 is 31 is determined to be at a constant speed or not to start deceleration.
When it is determined that the reel 31 is at a constant speed or has started to decelerate, the process advances to step S892, and when it is determined that the reel 31 is at a constant speed or has not started to decelerate, the process advances to step S878.
In step S878, acceleration set processing is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the L register. Note that since the E register value is the lower address value of the reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS), this process stores the address of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) in the HL register.
(2) Store "2(D)" at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the value indicating the reel driving state becomes "2" (a value corresponding to acceleration).

In the next step S879, the reel drive pulse output counter and the number of reel drive pulse switching times are initialized. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "1" at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value. Here, the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value becomes the address of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT).
(2) Store "9" at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "3" to the HL register value. Here, the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "3" to the HL register value is the address of the #th reel drive pulse switching number (_CT_RL#_PLSCHG).

Next, the process proceeds to step S880 to determine whether or not the standby effect is in progress. This process determines whether or not the standby effect type (_WK_PRD) at address "F09E(H)" is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the standby effect is not in progress. If it is determined that the standby effect is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S881, and if it is determined that the standby effect is in progress, the process proceeds to step S882.
In step S881, the symbol number (for passing position) and the symbol number (for stopping position) are initialized. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The initial value "255 (D)" (FF (H)) is stored in the address obtained by adding "6" to the HL register value. Here, the address obtained by adding "6" to the HL register value is the address of the #th reel symbol number (for the passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC).
(2) The initial value "255 (D)" (FF (H)) is stored in the address obtained by adding "7" to the HL register value. Here, the address obtained by adding "7" to the HL register value is the address of the #th reel symbol number (for the stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC).

In the next step S882, "1" is subtracted from the reel drive pulse output counter. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set the HL register value to the address of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT).
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
Next, the process advances to step S883, and it is determined whether the reel drive pulse output counter is "0". This process determines whether the result of subtracting "1" in (2) above is "0". When it is determined that it is "0", the process advances to step S884, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In the next step S884, it is determined whether the number of reel drive pulse switching is "0". Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set the HL register value to the address value of the #th reel drive pulse switching count (_CT_RL#_PLSCHG).
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(3) Store the A register value in the B register.
(4) When it is determined that the A register value is "0", it is determined that the number of reel drive pulse switching is "0".
When it is determined that the number of reel drive pulse switching is "0", the process advances to step S914 (FIG. 155), and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process advances to step S885.

In step S885, "1" is subtracted from the number of times the reel drive pulse is switched. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (the address of the #th reel drive pulse switching count (_CT_RL#_PLSCHG)). Also, the value subtracted by "1" is stored in the A register.
In the next step S886, an acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) is set.
FIG. 156 is a diagram showing the acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP).
In FIG. 156, the numerical value "90 (D)" at the address "1050 (H)" indicates the pulse output counter value during deceleration. Further, each numerical value of the addresses "1058 (H)" to "1051 (H)" indicates the pulse output counter value for the 1st to 8th steps during acceleration.
Then, in step S886, the start address "1050 (H)" of the acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S887, the specified data is obtained from the acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP). This process is to store the data (pulse output counter value) stored in the address of the value obtained by adding the A register value (number of times the #th reel drive pulse has been switched) to the HL register value (1050 (H)) in the B register.
Next, the flow advances to step S888, where the reel driving pulse output counter is saved. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the L register.
(2) Store the D register value in the H register.
By this process, the address of the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) is stored in the HL register.
(3) The B register value (pulse output counter value) is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value plus "2".
Here, the address indicated by the HL register value is the address of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS), and the address obtained by adding "2" to this is the address of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT).

In the next step S889, it is determined whether acceleration has ended. In this process, it is determined whether the A register value (#th reel drive pulse switching number) is "0" or not, and if it is "0", it is determined that acceleration has ended. When it is determined that the acceleration has ended, the process advances to step S890, and when it is determined that the acceleration has not ended, the process advances to step S892.
In step S890, constant speed is set. This process stores "5" at the address (#th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS)) indicated by the HL register value.
In the next step S891, the reel rotation defect detection counter is cleared. This process is a process of storing "0" in the address of the value obtained by adding "4" to the HL register value (the address of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD)).
In the next step S892, the reel drive pulse is updated (I_PULSE_INC). This process is the process shown in FIG. 157, which will be described later.

Next, the process advances to step S893, and it is determined whether or not the reel 31 is moving at a constant speed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the L register.
(2) Store the data stored in the address (#th reel motor index (_FL_RL#_MT_IDX)) indicated by the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value in the A register.
(3) Add "4" to the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value becomes the address of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD).
(4) When the data stored at the address indicated by the DE register value is "5", it is determined that the speed is constant.
Here, the address indicated by the DE register value is the address of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) in step S888.
When it is determined that the vehicle is at a constant speed, the process advances to step S894, and when it is determined that the vehicle is not at a constant speed, the process advances to step S903.

In step S894, "1" is added to the reel rotation defect detection counter. This process is a process of adding "1" to the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
Next, the process advances to step S895 in FIG. 155, and it is determined whether or not a reel rotation defect is detected. This process determines whether the result of adding "1" to the reel rotation defect detection counter in step S894 is "0", and if it is "0" (when the zero flag is "1"), , it is determined that a reel rotation failure is detected.
If it is determined that the reel rotation is not required, the process advances to step S878 and the acceleration process is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel rotation failure is not detected, the process advances to step S896.

In step S896, it is determined whether there is a change in the #th reel motor index (motor index # signal). In this process, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the motor index # signal based on the A register value (value of the #th reel motor index (_FL_RL#_MT_IDX)), and when it is determined that there is a change, the process proceeds to step S897. If it is determined that there is no change, the process advances to step S903.
In step S897, the standard symbol number "10" and the standard step number "3" when passing the index are set. This process is a process of storing "10 (D)" in the D register and "3 (D)" in the E register.
Here, "10 (D)" stored in the D register is a value that is subsequently stored in the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC). Further, "3 (D)" stored in the E register is a value that will be stored in the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of one symbol on the #th reel after this, and both are designed values.

In the next step S898, it is determined whether or not it is time for the #th reel motor index to rise. This process is based on the A register value (value of the #th reel motor index (_FL_RL#_MT_IDX)), and when the D0 bit is "1" and the D4 bit is "0", the rise of the #th reel motor index I decide it's time. If it is determined that it is the rising time of the #th reel motor index, the process advances to step S900, and if it is determined that it is not the time that the #th reel motor index is rising, the process advances to step S899.

In step S899, the reference drawing number "0" and the reference step number "3" at the time of passing the index are set. This process is a process of storing "0" in the D register and "3(D)" in the E register. In other words, "0" is stored in the value that becomes the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC), and "3 (D )” is memorized.
In the next step S900, the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD) is cleared. This process is a process of storing "0" in the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (address of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD)).

In the next step S901, the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PLUS) is acquired. This process is to store the data stored at the address of the HL register value plus "4" in the A register.
Here, the HL register value is the address value of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD) as described above, and adding "4" to this address value becomes the address value of the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PLUS).

In the next step S902, the reference symbol number and reference step number when passing the index are stored. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value at the address of the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value. Here, the address of the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value is the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of the 1st symbol on the #th reel. The E register value "3" is stored at this address.
(2) Store the D register value at the address of the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value. Here, the address of the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value is the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC). The D register value ("10 (D)" set in step S897 when the #th reel motor index rises, "0" set in step S899 when it falls) is stored at this address. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
As described above, when steps S896 to S902 are executed, the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of one symbol of the #th reel and the number of the #th reel every time the #th reel motor index rises and falls. A reference value (design value) is set for each symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC).

In this way, in the 23rd embodiment, both the rising and falling times of the reel motor index are detected, and the step number and passing position symbol number of one symbol are updated respectively, so that only when the reel motor index is rising is detected. In some cases, the reel 31 can be stopped before it rotates once, compared to the case where the reel 31 is detected. Furthermore, even if there is a problem in the rotation of the reel 31, it can be corrected immediately.
As described above, the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) is executed regardless of whether it is normal (forward rotation) or standby performance (reverse rotation). Therefore, in step S898, it is determined whether or not it is the rising time, regardless of whether it is the normal time (forward rotation) or the standby performance (reverse rotation), and in step S902, it is determined whether it is the rising time or the rising time. Predetermined values are set depending on the time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S893 that the speed is not constant, and if it is determined in step S896 that there is no change in the #th reel motor index, the process advances to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether the index has passed (or not after the reel sensor 33 has detected the index). Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data stored at the address of the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value is stored in the A register.
The HL register value is the address value of the # reel rotation defect detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD), and when "2" is added to this address value, the value of the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) is It becomes an address value.
(2) Add "1" to the value stored in the A register.
(3) If the result of adding "1" in the above (2) is "0", it is determined that the #th reel motor index has not changed from the initial value, and therefore the index has not passed.

Here, as mentioned above, the initial value "255 (D)" (FF (H)) is stored in the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC), and the # reel motor index When the value changes, "0" or "10(D)" is stored in step S902, and after that, "0" to "19(D)" are cycled. In other words, after the value of the # reel motor index changes, if the reel 31 is rotating normally, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) becomes "255". (D)" (if the acceleration process is executed again due to step-out, "255 (D)" will be stored again as the initial value).
Therefore, if "1" is added to the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and it becomes "0", it can be determined that the # reel motor index has not changed yet. becomes.

In step S903, if it is determined that the index has been passed, the process advances to step S904, and if it is determined that the index has not been passed, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S904, the number of steps per symbol is subtracted by "1". Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add "1" to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. Here, the HL register value before adding "1" is the address value of the # reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD), so if "1" is added, the number of steps for one symbol on the # reel (_NB_RL #_STEP) address value.
(2) Subtract "1" from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.

In the next step S905, it is determined whether or not the reel has moved by one symbol. Here, when the value of the number of steps for one symbol on the #th reel (_NB_RL#_STEP) becomes "0" (the zero flag becomes "1") as a result of subtracting "1" in step S904, it is determined that the reel has moved by one symbol. If it is determined that the reel has moved by one symbol, the process proceeds to step S906, and if it is determined that the reel has not moved by one symbol (the subtraction result is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S909.
In step S906, the number of steps for one symbol, "16 (D)", is saved. This process is a process of storing "16 (D)" in the address indicated by the HL register value (the number of steps for one symbol on the #th reel (_NB_RL#_STEP)).

In the next step S907, the symbol number is updated. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) Add "1" to the HL register value, and store the added value in the HL register. As a result, the address indicated by the HL register value becomes the #th reel symbol number (for the passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC).
(2) A special addition process is executed to add "1" to the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value. Here, the "special addition process" is an operation in which the upper limit is set to "19 (D)" (corresponding to the maximum value of the symbol number) and adding "1 (D)" to "19 (D)" results in "0". Specifically, the operation is performed as follows.
Example 1) 0 + 1 = 1
Example 2) 10 + 1 = 11
Example 3) 19 + 1 = 0
This allows the symbol number to cycle between "0" and "19 (D)" without determining whether it is the maximum value or not.

Next, the process proceeds to step S908, where the number of steps for one symbol is corrected. Note that in step S906, "16 (D)" is stored in the number of steps for one symbol on the #th reel (_NB_RL#_STEP).
Here, in the 23rd embodiment, for the four patterns having pattern numbers "2,""7,""12," and "17," the number of steps per pattern is set to "16," and for the other 16 patterns, the number of steps per pattern is set to "17."
In step S908, the symbol number after the update in step S907 is judged, and if the symbol number is "2", "7", "12", or "17", the "16 (D)" stored in the number of steps for one symbol on the #th reel (_NB_RL#_STEP) in step S906 is maintained. In contrast, if the symbol number is other than the above four symbol numbers, "17 (D)" is stored in the number of steps for one symbol on the #th reel (_NB_RL#_STEP).
The number of steps for one revolution of the reel 31 is set to "336" in accordance with the number of steps of the motor 32. The number of symbols is "20". Therefore, the number of steps is set to "16" for the 4 symbols and "17" for the 16 symbols.
16 x 4 + 17 x 16 = 336
It is set so that

In the next step S909, it is determined whether the deceleration starting symbol position has been reached. Here, in order to compare the passing symbol number and the deceleration start symbol, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the HL register value (#th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC)) and use the subtraction result as the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value becomes the address of the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of one symbol on the #th reel.
Furthermore, the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register. Note that the reason why the number of steps for one symbol on the #th reel is stored in the B register is to use it in the deceleration start test (I_REDUCE_CHK) process in step S910, which will be described later.
(2) Add "1" to the HL register value and set the result of the addition as the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value becomes the address of the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC).
(3) Store the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(4) Add "1" to the HL register value and set the result of the addition as the HL register value.
(5) Compare the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (# reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) and the A register value, and if the values are the same, determine "Yes" do.

In the next step S910, a deceleration start test (I_REDUCE_CHK) is executed. This process is a test to determine whether the conditions for starting deceleration are satisfied, and is the process shown in FIG. 159, which will be described later.
Then, in the next step S911, it is determined whether or not it is time to start deceleration. In this process, when the zero flag is "1" as a result of the deceleration start test in step S910, it is determined that deceleration is to start.
Although details will be described later, when the standby performance type is "0", the zero flag becomes "1". In addition, when the standby performance type is not "0" (during reverse rotation standby performance), the # reel specified symbol position search wait time (TM2_TAR#_WAIT) is "0" and the current step number is "13" ( design value), the zero flag becomes "1".

When it is determined that it is time to start deceleration, the process advances to step S912, and when it is determined that it is not time to start deceleration, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S912, deceleration is set. This process is a process of storing "1" in the A register.
In the next step S913, pulse data during deceleration is set (4 phases on). This process is a process of storing "00001111(B)" in the B register.
In the next step S914, the reel drive state is set. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the DE register value. Here, the DE register value is the address of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS). As a result, the #th reel drive state becomes "1" (a value indicating deceleration).

Next, the process advances to step S915, and a reel drive pulse is set. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#).
In the next step S916, it is determined whether the deceleration starting state has changed to the decelerating state. In this process, it is determined whether the B register value is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", it is determined that the vehicle is decelerating from the start of deceleration. If it is determined that the deceleration has progressed from the start of deceleration, the process advances to step S917, and if it is determined that this has not been the case, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
As mentioned above, in step S913, "00001111 (B)" is stored in the B register, so when proceeding to step S916 via step S913, it is determined that it is not "0", and the deceleration is in progress from the start of deceleration. It is judged that. On the other hand, when the determination in step S884 is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S914, the B register value is "0" in step S884, so the determination in step S916 is "No".
In step S917, an output request when the reel rotation is stopped is set. This process is a process for transmitting the symbol number of the reel 31 to be stopped to the sub-control board 80. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the reel drive pulse update (I_PULSE_INC) in step S892 of FIG. 154.
First, in step S921, "1" is added to the reel drive pulse data search counter. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add "8" to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. Here, the HL register value before adding "8" is the address value of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS), and when "8" is added, the HL register value becomes the address value for the #th reel drive pulse data search. This is the address value of the counter (_CT_RL#_PULS).
(2) Add "1" to the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
Here, for example, if the value stored in the # reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS) is "255 (D)", the result of adding "1" is "0". becomes.

Next, the process advances to step S922, and search counter update correction data is added. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the value of the search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) at address "F09F(H)" in the A register. Here, when the value of the search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) is "0", it means forward rotation data, and when it is "FE (H)", it means reverse rotation data. It means that.
(2) Add the A register value to the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (#th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS)), and store the addition result in the A register.

Here, when the reel 31 is rotating forward, the A register value is "0", so the A register value is the same value as the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value before addition.
On the other hand, when the reel 31 is rotating in the reverse direction, the A register value is "FE (H)", so in effect, the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value before addition is "2". ” will be subtracted.
for example,
Value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value: 100 (D)
A register value: FE (H) or 254 (D)
When
The A register value becomes "98 (D)".

In the next step S923, the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS) is updated. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value.
Through the processing of steps S921 to S923 above, the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS) is incremented by "1" during forward rotation, and "1" is subtracted during reverse rotation.
Next, the process advances to step S924, and an offset for reel drive pulse data search is generated. This process is a process of executing a logical product (AND) operation between the A register value and "00000111(B)". Then, the result of the AND operation is stored in the A register.
The A register value is the value of the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS), and is a value in the range of "0" to "255(D)". When this value and "00000111 (B)" are subjected to a logical product (AND) operation, the result of the operation becomes a value between "0" and "7".

Specifically, for example, it would look like this:
Example 1) When the A register value is "00000000(B)", a logical AND operation with "00000111(B)" results in "00000000(B)".
Example 2) When the A register value is "00000010(B)", the logical AND operation with "00000111(B)" results in "00000010(B)".
Example 3) When the A register value is "000100001(B)", the logical AND operation with "00000111(B)" results in "00000001(B)".
Example 4) When the A register value is "111111111(B)", the logical AND operation with "00000111(B)" results in "00000111(B)".
In other words, the maximum value after the logical product (AND) operation is "00000111(B)" (7(D)).

Next, the process advances to step S925, and a reel drive pulse table is set. This process is a process of storing the address of the reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE) in the HL register.
FIG. 158 is a diagram showing the reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE). As shown in FIG. 158, eight types of reel drive pulse data are stored in the reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE). The upper 4 bits (D4 to D7 bits) of the reel drive pulse data are unused bits. Further, the D0 bit corresponds to the data of φ0, the D1 bit corresponds to the data of φ1, the D2 bit corresponds to the data of φ2, and the D3 bit corresponds to the data of φ3. Further, "1" indicates on, and "0" indicates off.
For example, "00001001(B)" stored at address "1100(H)" means that φ0 and φ3 are on. Note that φ0 to φ3 correspond to excitation phases of a four-phase stepping motor.
Then, in step S925, "1100 (H)", which is the start address of the reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE), is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S926, reel drive pulse data is acquired. This process is a process in which the result of adding the A register to the HL register value is set as the HL register value, and the value of the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register.
Here, the A register value is the offset value generated in step S924 (a value obtained by converting the reel drive pulse in the range of "0" to "255 (D)" to "0" to "7").
For example, when the A register value is "1", the value "00000001 (B)" of "1101 (H)" which is obtained by adding "1 (H)" to the HL register value "1100 (H)" is stored in the B register. Remember.
Next, the process advances to step S927, and reel drive pulse data is set. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the deceleration start test (I_REDUCE_CHK) in step S910 of FIG. 155.
First, in step S931, it is determined whether the standby effect type is "0". Here, it is determined whether the value stored in the standby performance type (_WK_PRD) of address "F09E (H)" is "0" or not, and if it is "0", it is determined as "Yes". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not "0", the process advances to step S932.
In step S932, it is determined whether the search waiting period is "0". In this process, it is determined whether the # reel specified symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TAR#_WAIT) is "0" or not, and when it is "0", it is determined as "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S933. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S933, the deceleration start step number is set to 13 (D). Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set “13(D)” in the A register.
(2) A comparison is made with the value in the B register.
Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
The B register value is the number of steps for one symbol on the #th reel (_NB_RL#_STEP) stored in step S909 in FIG. 155. If the result of the comparison operation is "0", the zero flag becomes "1". When the zero flag becomes "1", "Yes" is determined in step S911 in FIG. 155. In other words, it is set to start deceleration when the current number of steps becomes "13 (D)" (design value).

Next, the control unique to the twenty-third embodiment of the sub-control board 80 will be described.
(1) Output to Prevent Addiction In the 23rd embodiment, after one set of AT is completed, an output to prevent addiction may be performed before the start of the next set. Here, in the 23rd embodiment, "output to prevent addiction" corresponds to displaying an image such as "Pachinko and Pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to get addicted" on the image display device 23. Note that it is not limited to displaying an image, and it is also possible to output an audio such as "Pachinko and Pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to get addicted" . It is acceptable to display an image only, to display an audio only, or to display both an image and an audio, but it is considered preferable to at least display an image.
Since the addiction prevention output is generally executed when a certain number of medals or more have been paid out, in the 23rd embodiment, when one set of AT (main game state 4, 1BB operation) ends, if the addiction prevention output conditions are met, the addiction prevention output is executed.

FIG. 160 is a flowchart for controlling the jamming prevention output during AT by the sub-control board 80.
First, in step S971, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. When it is determined that AT is in progress, the process advances to step S972, and when it is determined that AT is not in progress, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
The sub control board 80 receives commands related to the main gaming state from the main control board 50. When a command indicating that the main game state is "4" is received, it is determined that AT is in progress.

In step S972, it is determined whether a notification to continue AT has been output. In the 23rd embodiment, when the next AT has been determined, in other words, when the AT set number counter is "1" or more, a notification indicating that AT will be executed next time is provided during AT. There are cases where it is output (when notifying AT continuation) and cases where it is not output.
The sub control board 80 receives an AT set number counter command from the main control board 50. There is no case where an AT continuation notification is output under a situation where the next AT is not determined (when the AT set number counter is "0"), but under a situation where the next AT is determined (when the AT set number counter is "0"), an AT continuation notification is not output. (When the counter is "1" or more), it is determined whether or not to output an AT continuation notification by, for example, a lottery. When it is decided to output the AT continuation notification, the effect for outputting the AT continuation notification is selected and the effect is output.

An example of outputting the AT continuation notification is, for example, a production in which a main character and an enemy character confront each other and the main character wins. When the main character and the enemy character confront each other and the main character wins, the next AT will be determined and the current AT will not end the AT. If the player does not operate the stop switch 42, there is a possibility that the advantageous section itself will end during the current AT due to the advantageous section clear counter management. Furthermore, when a main character and an enemy character face off and a presentation in which the main character loses is output, there are cases where the AT ends with the current AT and cases where the AT continues.

In step S972, if it is determined that the AT continuation notification has been output, the process advances to step S973, and if it is determined that the AT continuation notification has not been output, the process advances to step S974.
In step S973, the AT continuation notification flag is turned on. Note that the AT continuation notification flag is provided in the storage area of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, and is a flag for determining whether AT continuation has been notified.

In step S974, it is determined whether one set of AT has ended. This determination is made based on a command sent from the main control board 50, and is made when the end condition of the main game state "4" is met (when the operation of 1BB game ends (when the game ends)). If it is determined that one set of AT has ended, the process proceeds to step S975, and if it is determined that it has not ended, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S975, it is determined whether the AT continuation notification flag is on. If it is determined that the AT continuation notification flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S976, and if it is determined that the AT continuation notification flag is on, the process proceeds to step S977.

In step S976, an AT end effect is output. Here, the "AT end performance" is a performance that suggests ending AT and transitioning to non-AT. Therefore, even if the AT set number counter is "1" or more at this point, if the AT continuation notification flag is not on, in other words, if the AT continuation notification is not output during the current set of AT, Output AT end effect. Note that even if the AT end effect is output, the AT does not necessarily end.

Next, the process advances to step S978, and the above-mentioned addictive prevention effect is output.
In the next step S979, it is determined whether the AT set number is present (whether the AT set number counter is "1" or more). When it is determined that there is no AT set number, the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of AT sets is present, the process advances to step S980.
In step S980, an AT revival effect is output. That is, although the AT end effect was output in step S976, a reverse effect for denying the AT end effect is output.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S975 that the AT continuation notification flag is on, the process proceeds to step S977, where the AT continuation notification flag is cleared, and the process according to this flowchart ends. Note that when going through step S977, since the AT continuation notification has already been output, there is no need to output an AT revival effect like step S980. However, at the end of one set of AT, it is of course possible to output a new effect indicating that AT will continue.

Further, the AT end effect in step S976, the addictive prevention effect in step S978, and the AT recovery effect in step S980 may be outputted sequentially at predetermined time intervals without any operation by the player. Alternatively, after outputting the AT end performance and the addictive prevention performance, wait for the player to operate the operation switches (bet switch 40, start switch 41, settlement switch 43), and when the operation switch is operated, proceed to step S979. You may proceed.
Further, the sinking prevention output in step S978 is secured for a certain period of time. For example, when proceeding to step S978, a predetermined timer value is set, the predetermined timer value is subtracted for each interrupt processing, and the process of step S978 is performed on the condition that the predetermined timer value becomes "0". One example is to terminate.
Specifically, it is preferable that the output to prevent getting stuck continues for at least 3 seconds.
Further, if the power is cut off while the immersion prevention information is being output, the immersion prevention information will not be output when the power is restored. If the power is turned off while the addictive prevention message is being output and then the power is restored, the above-mentioned predetermined timer value is cleared (has been cleared).

Therefore, even if the specification is such that the process moves from step S978 to S979 when the operation switch is operated, if the predetermined timer value is not "0" at the time the operation switch is operated, the step Continue to output S978's addictive prevention. Then, when the predetermined timer value becomes "0", the process proceeds to step S979.
Further, even if the predetermined timer value reaches "0" after starting the addictive prevention output in step S978, if the operation switch is not operated, the addictive prevention output may be maintained, or , the display may be switched to a demonstration screen displaying the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer.

Furthermore, when the 1BB game ends, the main control board 50 executes a wait process (also referred to as "freeze process" or "standby process") for about 1 second. While this wait process is being executed, no matter which operation switch is operated, control based on that operation will not be executed. Furthermore, the blocker 45 is controlled so that even if medals are inserted while this wait process is being executed, the medals are returned. The reason why the control of the main control board 50 is different from the control of the sub-control board 80 is that the power is cut off while the wait process is being executed (for example, 0.3 seconds after the start of the wait process). The point is that, if the power is restored after that (when the power is restored without transitioning to the setting change mode), the wait process continues to be executed. The timer managed on the main control board 50 side is not cleared when the power is turned off during wait processing and then the power is restored (power restoration without shifting to setting change mode). On the other hand, when the power is returned to the setting change mode, the wait processing timer value is cleared.

By controlling as described above, the output for preventing addictive play is ensured for a certain period of time, so that the image display for preventing addicting can be reliably shown to the player.
Note that the wait process by the main control board 50 is about 1 second, and if the output for preventing getting stuck is about 3 seconds, the operation of the operation switch becomes valid even if the output for preventing getting stuck is in progress, once the wait process is finished. become. Therefore, when the operation switch is operated immediately after the wait process ends, the next effect may be executed while continuing the output to prevent immersion. For example, after starting the output to prevent addicting in step S978, the wait process by the main control board 50 is completed, the operation switch is enabled, and the AT revival effect in step S980 is output based on the operation of the bet switch 40, for example. In such a case, while outputting the prevention message, an AT revival effect is outputted.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the output of the addictive prevention is conditioned on the output of the AT end effect. Therefore, in the case of "Yes" in step S975, since the AT end effect is not output (step S976 is not executed), the immersion prevention display is also not output.

As described above, when the player is notified of the continuation of the next AT at the end of one set of AT (when the player knows that the AT will continue), the addictive prevention output is not executed. In other cases, since the message for prevention of addiction is output on the condition that the AT end screen is output, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether to continue AT based on the presence or absence of the output for prevention of addiction.
In other words, if the AT ends when the addictive prevention signal is output, and if the AT does not end unless the addictive prevention signal is output, the continuation of the AT will be determined by the presence or absence of the addictive prevention output.
Furthermore, when the player knows that he is going to continue playing AT, even output to prevent him from getting addicted to the game will have little effect, so there is also the effect that there is no need to output wastefully.

(2) Output of confrontation performance (variation in output timing of performance ending)
In the twenty-third embodiment, during AT, a confrontation effect may be output as an effect indicating whether or not AT will continue next time.
The confrontation performance of the 23rd embodiment is a performance in which the main character faces off against the enemy character, and if the main character wins, the AT will continue next time as well. Here, when the protagonist side character outputs a victory effect, it means that the AT continuation notification described above has been output, and the AT continuation notification flag is turned on. On the other hand, if the enemy character wins, it is not certain that AT will continue next time. However, even if the enemy character wins, it does not mean that AT ends with the current set. If the enemy character wins, the AT continuation notification flag is not turned on at that point.

When outputting a confrontation performance, in a game that outputs the conclusion of the confrontation performance (a performance indicating whether the main character wins or not), the output timing of the performance is controlled as follows.
First, in a game that outputs an effect indicating whether or not the main character wins, a timer starts counting when the start switch 41 is operated. Timer measurement is performed by a timer on a sub-main board of the sub-control board 80. In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 includes a sub-main board and an image control board (sub-sub board) that is a board subordinate to the sub-main board and is specialized for controlling the image display device 23. Be prepared.

Next, the sub-main board of the sub-control board 80 receives a command from the main control board 50 indicating that all reels 31 have stopped. The sub-main board determines whether the timer value has reached 10 seconds, and if it determines that 10 seconds have passed, sends a command to the sub-sub board to permit image progression (whether the main character will win or not, in other words, a command to permit output of the outcome of the showdown presentation). Upon receiving this command, the sub-sub board outputs a presentation indicating whether the main character will win or not.
On the other hand, when a command indicating that all reels 31 have stopped is received, if the timer value has not yet reached 10 seconds, the sub-main board waits until the timer value reaches 10 seconds. Then, when the timer value reaches 10 seconds, the sub-main board transmits the above command to the sub-sub board.
Note that "10 seconds" is just an example, and various settings such as 5 seconds, 15 seconds, etc. can be used.

FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing control of confrontation effect output.
First, in step S991, it is determined whether the start switch 41 has been operated. When the start switch 41 is operated, a command indicating that the start switch 41 has been operated is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 (sub-main board). , it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S992.
Here, when the sub-main board receives a command indicating that the start switch 41 has been operated, it selects a performance to be output in the current game and transmits a command corresponding to the selected performance to the sub-sub board. The sub-sub board controls the output of the effect based on the received command (command corresponding to the effect). Further, when the sub-main board receives a command indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated from the main control board 50, it transmits a command indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated to the sub-sub board. When the sub-sub board receives a command indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated, it switches the effect as necessary (it may not switch depending on the content of the effect).

In step S992, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game that outputs the outcome of the confrontation performance. In this process, it is determined whether or not a confrontation performance has already been output before the previous game, and the current game corresponds to a game in which a performance indicating the conclusion of the confrontation performance is output. When it is determined that the game is a game that outputs the conclusion of the confrontation performance, the process proceeds to step S993, and when it is determined that the game is not a game that outputs the conclusion of the confrontation performance, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S993, the sub-main board sets a timer value. Then, the timer value is subtracted for each interrupt process. For example, assuming that the interrupt cycle of the sub-main board is 1 ms, one example is to set the timer value to "10000 (D)" and subtract "1" each time the interrupt is processed. Then, the process advances to step S994.
In step S994, it is determined whether all reels 31 have stopped. When all the reels 31 stop, a command indicating that all the reels 31 have stopped (hereinafter referred to as "all reel stop command") is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 (sub main board). Therefore, when the all reels stop command is received, it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that the all reel stop command has been received, the process advances to step S995.

In addition, in the main process, the determination as to whether all the reels 31 have stopped is executed in step S289 in FIG. 139.
Here, the following patterns may be used to determine that all the reels 31 have stopped.
(1) When the level data of the stop switch 42 that was last operated to stop is OFF.
(2) When the level data of the all stop switch 42 is off.
(3) When the level data of the all stop switch 42 is off and the level data of the other switches (bet switch 40, start switch 41, and settlement switch 43) are off.
(4) In addition to any of the above (1) to (3), when the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of all reels 31 is information indicating stop (“0”).
In the 23rd embodiment, when the above conditions (2)+(4) are satisfied, the main control board 50 determines that all reels 31 have stopped, and sends an all reel stop command to the sub-main board. .

In step S995, it is determined whether the timer value has reached "0". If it is determined that the timer value has not reached "0", the process waits until it is determined that the timer value has reached "0". If it is determined that the timer value has reached "0", the process proceeds to step S996. In step S996, the sub-main board sends a command to the sub-sub board to permit output of the conclusion of the showdown performance. When the sub-sub board receives this command, it outputs the conclusion of the showdown performance. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, if the timer value is "0" when the command to stop all reels is received (when 10 seconds or more have passed since the start switch 41 was operated), the battle will begin after receiving the command to stop all reels. The outcome of the performance is output. On the other hand, if the timer value is not "0" when the command to stop all reels is received, wait until the timer value becomes "0" even after receiving the command to stop all reels. The conclusion of the confrontation performance is output.
In the 23rd embodiment, even after the timer value reaches "0", the ending of the showdown effect is not output until an all reel stop command is received, but the present invention is not limited to this. '', the ending of the showdown may be output even before receiving the command to stop all reels.

As described above, the all reel stop command is issued when the level data of the all stop switch 42 is off and the # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of all reels 31 is information indicating stop. It is configured to be transmitted from the control board 50 to the sub-main board.
As a result, in a game that outputs the conclusion of a confrontation performance, the player presses and holds the last stop switch 42 (meaning the last stop switch 42 operated (operated); the same applies hereinafter) and releases it at the timing. (However, the condition is that 10 seconds have elapsed since the start switch 41 was operated), it becomes possible to output the conclusion of the confrontation performance.
Therefore, if a player who does not want to see the end of the showdown right away continues to press the last stop switch 42 (unless he releases his hand), the end of the showdown will not be output. Then, at the timing when the last stop switch 42 is released, the conclusion of the confrontation performance can be output.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the all reel stop command may be transmitted when the last stop switch 42 is turned on (when the rising data of the last stop switch 42 is turned on). In this way, it becomes possible to output the conclusion of the confrontation performance at the timing when the last stop switch 42 is turned on.

(3) Volume Setting In the twenty-third embodiment, the volume from the speaker 22 can be set. The volume setting includes a manager (store manager) mode in which the installation manager of the slot machine 10 (hall manager) sets the volume, and a player mode in which the player playing the slot machine 10 sets the volume.
In Figure 162, (A) shows an image displayed by the image display device 23 indicating the administrator mode related to tone setting, and (B) shows an image displayed by the image display device 23 indicating the player mode related to tone setting.

In (A) of the figure, the tone setting in the administrator mode is a setting change state that can be executed by turning on the setting key switch and turning the power on/off, or the setting key when the power is turned on/off. This is one of the system menus that can be executed under at least one setting confirmation state that can be executed by turning on the switch.
There are three sound levels that can be selected in the administrator mode: "loud,""standard," and "low" (of course, the volume is not limited to these three levels).
When the administrator selects the volume using the cross key of the slot machine 10 and presses the chance button, the volume is determined.
Although not shown in FIG. 1, on the sub-control board 80, a cross key (also referred to as a "selection button") and a chance button (also referred to as a "production button" or a "determination button") are electrically connected. connected. The cross key is a switch that is operated when moving the cursor position on a menu screen or the like. Further, the chance button is a switch that is operated when developing a performance, and is also used as a switch that is operated when determining an object selected on a menu screen or the like.

In administrator mode, when the volume is changed using the cross key, a test sound is output at the changed volume. The test sound may be, for example, a cursor movement sound, or a predetermined sound (pattern) may be output. For example, if the currently selected volume is "Normal" and the cursor position is changed from "Volume" to "Loud" using the four-way controller, the test will be performed at the volume corresponding to "Loud". Output sound. This allows the administrator to understand how "loud" the volume is. Similarly, when the cursor position is changed from "normal" to "low", the test sound is output at the volume corresponding to "low". In this way, the administrator can confirm the level of the set volume.

The volume of the test sound is based on the volume of a predetermined effect sound. Here, the "predetermined effect sound" includes, for example, a game start sound outputted when the start switch 41 is operated, a stop sound outputted when the stop switch 42 is operated, a ready sound of a symbol combination, a winning combination sound (or a payout sound), a background music sound during the AT, and the like.
Therefore, for example, when the volume is set to "standard" in the administrator mode and to "volume 3" in the player mode described later, if the volume of the test sound is 80 decibels, the volume of the predetermined effect sound during gameplay will also be set to approximately 80 decibels.

Further, when "Large" is selected in the administrator mode, even if the cursor position is moved further upward by operating the cross key, the cursor position remains "Large". However, when "loud" is selected and the cursor is moved upward by operating the cross key, the test sound is output again at the volume corresponding to "loud".
Then, when any one of "loud", "standard", and "low" volume is selected, operating the chance button may confirm the volume. Note that when one of the volume levels "Large", "Standard", and "Low" is selected, if the cursor position is moved to the right using the cross key, "Close" can be selected. If you move the cursor to "close" and press the chance button, you can confirm with that volume. In this case, the volume setting in administrator mode is ended and the screen returns to the system menu (not shown). Also, if the cursor position can be moved to the settings of other items (for example, energy saving mode, etc.) instead of "Close", move the cursor position to "Setting other items" and operate the chance button. Then, the volume indicated by the cursor position at that time may be set. In this case, the volume setting in the administrator mode is ended, and the process moves to setting other items (not shown).

The volume selected in the administrator mode can be stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80. This predetermined area is configured so that it will not be erased by changing settings or turning off the power. With this configuration, once the volume is set, the hall side can omit the work of setting the volume again. Furthermore, even if an unrecoverable error occurs on the main control board 50 side and the storage area containing the setting values is initialized by clearing the RWM 53 due to a setting change, the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80 The predetermined area may not be initialized. Also, when selecting the volume in administrator mode, for example, when you move the four-way controller to "Large" among "Large", "Standard", and "Small", "Large" will be displayed in the specified area. Alternatively, when the volume is determined, data corresponding to "loud" may be stored in the predetermined area.

After the volume is set in the administrator mode as described above, the player can set the volume while waiting for a game. FIG. 162(B) illustrates the display screen (player mode) at this time.
When the player is on standby for the game, for example, by operating the cross key, a menu screen is displayed (not shown in FIG. 162), and by selecting "Tone Setting" from the menu screen, it is possible to move to the volume setting screen.
The volume setting in player mode can be set in five levels from "Volume 1" to "Volume 5." Moving the cursor with the cross key to select the volume and confirming the volume with the chance button is the same as in the administrator mode. Note that in the administrator mode, a test sound corresponding to the selected volume was output each time the cursor was moved, but this is not done in the player mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a test sound corresponding to the selected volume may be output in the player mode as well as in the administrator mode.

FIG. 162(C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the volume setting value in administrator mode and the volume setting value in player mode. In the figure, for example, when the volume is set to "loud" in the administrator mode and the volume is set to "volume 5" in the player mode, the volume is set to "100" (reference value). Note that each numerical value shown in FIG. 162(C) indicates a value corresponding to the volume, and does not indicate a decibel (dB) itself.
In the example of FIG. 162(C), the maximum volume is "100" and the minimum volume is "20". Note that the volume and the range between the maximum value and minimum value in each mode are not limited to these, and can be set in various ways.
As shown in FIG. 162(C), one of the characteristics of the twenty-third embodiment is that when the player selects "Volume 1", the volume is set to "loud" in the administrator mode. However, the minimum volume is set to "20". In this way, when the lowest volume (volume 1) is selected in the volume setting in the player mode, the minimum volume is set regardless of the volume setting value in the administrator mode.

In other words,
a) When the volume is set to "loud" in administrator mode and "volume 1 (minimum volume)" in player mode (setting pattern A),
b) When the volume is set to "Standard" in administrator mode and "Volume 1 (minimum volume)" in player mode (setting pattern B),
c) When the volume is set to "low" in administrator mode and "volume 1 (minimum volume)" in player mode (setting pattern C), the volume of the predetermined performance sound to be output. are both "20" and the same.
However, this is not limited to this, and settings may be made slightly different, such as setting the volume for setting pattern A to "22", setting the volume for setting pattern B to "21", and setting the volume for setting pattern C to "20". You may.
In any case, the volumes of the predetermined effect sounds output in the case of setting patterns A to C are substantially the same ("substantially the same" is a concept that includes "the same"). For example, when the maximum volume is set to "100", the minimum volume is set within a range of "±3" with "20" as the standard.

Therefore, if a player wants to play the game at the lowest possible volume, by selecting "Volume 1", the player can play the game at the minimum volume without being affected by the difference in volume settings between halls. Can be done.
Note that the minimum volume of "20" means that a player with normal hearing can hear the character's lines, correct answer press order, "Aim!", etc. in a typical hall environment (in a somewhat noisy environment). The volume is audible.

As shown in FIG. 162(C), one of the characteristics of the twenty-third embodiment is the degree of change in volume. For example, if the volume is set to "Standard" in the administrator mode, and you change it from "Volume 1" to "Volume 2" in the player mode, the volume will change from "20" to "50" (increase amount "30"). On the other hand, when changing from "volume 4" to "volume 5" in the player mode, the volume changes from "80" to "90" (increase amount "10"). In this way, when changing from the minimum volume "Volume 1" to "Volume 2", the amount of increase will be larger than when changing from a volume other than "Volume 1" to one level higher. It is set. Therefore, by changing the minimum volume to another volume, it is possible to immediately change the volume to a higher volume.
In the example of FIG. 162(C), when the volume is set to "low" in the administrator mode, when changing from "volume 1" to "volume 2" in the player mode, and when the volume is set to "low" in the player mode, In both cases where the volume is changed from a volume other than "1" to one level higher, the volume increase amount is set to "5". In this way, depending on the volume setting in the administrator mode, the amount of increase may not be the largest when changing from "volume 1" to "volume 2" in the player mode.
On the other hand, if the volume is set to "low" in administrator mode, the volume in player mode can be changed to, for example,
Volume 1:20
Volume 2:30
Volume 3:35
Volume 4:40
Volume 5:45
It is also possible to set it as follows, so that the amount of increase is greatest when changing from "volume 1" to "volume 2."

In the twenty-third embodiment, after setting the volume in the administrator mode, if the volume is not set in the player mode, the volume in the player mode is set to "volume 5" as a default.
Furthermore, if the time without playing a game (game standby state) continues for 10 minutes, the previous volume setting in the player mode is cleared and returns to the default "volume 5". This is to return the volume to the default when the player is replaced. Therefore, the default of the player mode may be "volume 3" or the like.
Further, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on/off, the volume of the player mode is set to the default "volume 5".
On the other hand, the volume in administrator mode remains at its previous value unless it is reset. For example, if you set the volume to "low" in administrator mode, the volume will remain "low" even after you turn the power on/off, change settings, or confirm settings.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing control of volume setting in administrator mode.
First, in step S1001, the current volume is read. For example, "0" for "small", "1" for "standard", and "2" for "large" are stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 83, and this volume setting data is read. Next, the process advances to step S1002, and the current volume is displayed as an image. For example, when the volume data stored in the RWM 83 is "1", an image is displayed to show that the current setting value is "standard" as in the example of FIG. 162(A).
Next, the process advances to step S1003, and it is determined whether the cross key has been operated. If it is determined that it has been operated, the process advances to step S1004, and if it is determined that it has not been operated, the process advances to step S1007.

In step S1004, it is determined whether the volume setting can be changed. For example, when the current volume setting is "standard" and further up is selected using the cross key, it is determined that the volume setting can be changed. On the other hand, when the current volume setting is "loud" and further up is selected using the cross key, it is determined that the volume setting cannot be changed. If it is determined that the volume setting can be changed, the process advances to step S1005, and if it is determined that the volume setting cannot be changed, the process advances to step S1006.
In step S1005, the volume setting value is updated. As described above, when the current volume setting is "Standard" and further up is selected using the cross key, the volume setting is updated to "Large". Then, the process advances to step S1006.

In step S1006, a test sound is output at the currently set volume. As described above, for example, when the volume is changed from "standard" to "loud", the test sound is output at the volume corresponding to "loud" after the change. On the other hand, if the current volume is set to "loud" and a higher volume is selected using the four-way controller ("No" in step S1004), the current volume is set to "loud". Outputs a test sound at a volume corresponding to .
Next, the process advances to step S1007, and it is determined whether the chance button has been operated. When it is determined that the chance button has been operated, the process according to this flowchart (volume setting in administrator mode) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the chance button has not been operated, the process returns to step S1003.

The above volume settings are for predetermined sound effects. On the other hand, the volume of the error (recoverable error and non-recoverable error) sound is fixed and is configured not to change depending on the volume setting in the administrator mode or player mode. This is because, for example, a person who performs a trifle may set the volume to the minimum volume in the above-mentioned player mode before performing the trifle.
For example, for error sounds, the volume may be uniformly set to "100" when set to "loud" in administrator mode and set to "volume 5" in player mode ( For example, error sounds are uniformly set to "90" decibels).
However, the present invention is not limited to this. Although the volume of the error sound cannot be changed in the player mode, the volume of the error sound may be settable in the administrator mode. However, even if the error sound is set to the lowest volume in administrator mode, the error sound will still be set at a volume that is loud enough to be heard by those around you.
Furthermore, when the volume ("loud", "standard", "low") is set in the administrator mode shown in FIG. (the volume may change depending on the volume). Alternatively, a dedicated menu screen for setting the volume of the error sound may be provided in the administrator mode.

(4) Effects when 1BB symbol combination is tenpai When 1BB is tenpai, the sub-control board 80 outputs a flash (light emitted by the effect lamp 21) and a tenpai sound (sound from the speaker 22). The flash and tenpai sound are executed regardless of whether the conditions for transition to the main game state 4 (AT, 1BB operation) are met or not. This allows the player to know that 1BB is tenpai even if 1BB is tenpai by chance while playing the game casually.

Furthermore, as described above, when 1BB is full and the conditions for transition to main game state 4 are satisfied, the third reel 31 does not stop even if the third stop switch 42 is operated. Although no time is set, if the conditions for transition to main game state 4 are not satisfied, the waiting time is set (steps S809 to S810 in FIG. 147). Thereby, it is possible to prevent 1BB from being won due to the player's unexpected stop operation.

Also, if you meet the conditions for transitioning to AT, as mentioned above, "Aim for the Blue BAR!"" is displayed as an image, and a voice saying "Aim!" is also output.
Here, during the game, there are many cases where the transition condition to main game state 4 is not satisfied, so when the above-mentioned flash and tenpai sound are output every time 1BB becomes tenpai, the player can: There is also a possibility that the flash and tenpai sound may be recognized as an effect to avoid winning the 1BB prize.
However, if you meet the conditions for transitioning to main game state 4, you can "Aim for the Blue BAR!"'' and the sound ``Aim!'' are output, so even if the flash and tenpai sound are output at the same time, the player can recognize that it is okay to win 1BB in this game. can.

In addition, when 1BB becomes tenpai, if the conditions for transition to main game state 4 are not met, a flash and tenpai sound will be output, and if the conditions for transition to main game state 4 are met, these flashes and tenpai will be output. It is possible that no sound is output. However, since the rules do not allow effects that do not stop the symbol combinations, in the 23rd embodiment, when 1BB is full, regardless of whether the conditions for transition to main game state 4 are satisfied or not. It uniformly outputs a flash and a tempai sound.

(5) Production during 1BB gaming (when AT start conditions are met/unsatisfied) The sub control board 80 displays the 1BB symbol combination in a stopped state when the transition conditions to main gaming state 4 are met. At this time, AT (1BB game) will be started from the next game.
In the case of shifting to main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game), before winning SRB, when winning small winning combination A group (winning numbers "10" to "15"), the correct answer pressing order is notified. Examples of the notification method include displaying an image of the correct press order and outputting by voice which stop switch 42 is to be operated next.
On the other hand, when moving to main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game), before winning SRB, even if you win the small winning group B (winning numbers "16" to "21"), press the correct answer. Do not announce order. This is because in a game where the SRB is not won, even if the small winning combination B group is won, there is no correct pressing order (pressing order for winning the high bell) (see FIG. 125).

Then, when moving to main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game), if you win SRB and become inside SRB, both when winning small role A group and when winning small role B group. , to notify the correct answer press order. SRB winnings are carried over to the next game, so when you win SRB for the first time. In the next game after the game in which SRB is won, the correct pressing order will be notified when the small winning combination B group is won.

On the other hand, even if the conditions for shifting to main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game) are not satisfied, when the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the 1BB game is started. However, even if 1BB is won, the main gaming state does not shift, so for example, when 1BB is won in RT1 and main gaming state 1, 1BB is activated and the main gaming state 1 is entered.

When the game state transitions to 1BB play without transitioning to the main game state 4, the main control board 50 does not activate the instruction function, and the sub-control board 80 does not execute the AT. Therefore, even if a small role with a correct push order (small role group A when not inside the SRB, and small role group A and small role group B when inside the SRB) is won, the push order instruction number is not displayed on the number of wins display LED 78, and the correct push order is not notified by the performance output device such as the image display device 23.
In addition, when the game shifts to 1BB game without shifting to the main game state 4, the sub-control board 80 maintains the normal presentation content during non-AT (the previous presentation content). Therefore, from the player's perspective, it feels like the normal game (non-AT, non-special game) is continuing even during 1BB game.

(6) Display of the number of games played in RT1 (non-AT) As mentioned above, in RT1, the number of games played is counted, and when the number of games played in RT1 reaches "1400", it is determined that the end condition of RT1 is satisfied. Shift to non-RT.
RT1 starts at the end of 1BB operation (end of AT). Therefore, the number of games played in RT1 is essentially the number of games played in non-AT.
In the twenty-third embodiment, the number of non-AT games is displayed as an image on the image display device 23. Thereby, the player can easily know how many games have passed since he became a non-AT. Furthermore, it is possible to easily know how many games remain until reaching the so-called ceiling of "1400" games (games before transitioning to non-RT).

Note that there are cases where the advantageous zone ends during RT1 and a transition occurs to a non-advantageous zone, but the number of plays in RT1 ("_CT_RT_GAME" at address "F00A(H)") is not cleared when the advantageous zone ends. Therefore, even if a transition occurs from an advantageous zone to a non-advantageous zone during RT1, the number of plays in RT1 is maintained and continues to be counted even after the transition to the non-advantageous zone. The same applies when a transition occurs from a non-advantageous zone to an advantageous zone.

Furthermore, in the 23rd embodiment, the number of non-AT games displayed as an image on the image display device 23 is calculated using the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 without using the data of the number of RT games "_CT_RT_GAME" of the address "F00A(H)". I remember it. When the 1BB operation ends, the initial value "0" is set as the number of non-AT games (increment counter) in the RWM 83, and this number of games is updated as the games are completed, and is stored in the image display device 23 as the number of non-AT games. do.
However, when the power is turned on/off, the sub-control board 80 initializes the predetermined area of the RWM 83 when the power is turned off, regardless of whether the setting change process is executed or not. The AT game count data is also initialized (cleared). Therefore, upon recovery from power-off, the number of non-AT games displayed on the image display device 23 becomes "0".
In addition, on the menu screen that can display the specifications of the gaming machine, the gaming history, etc., it is possible to display the number of non-AT games as one of the gaming histories, and this gaming number is the number of gaming times displayed as an image on the image display device 23. (displayed based on the data of the number of non-AT games stored in the RWM 83). Therefore, when the power is turned on/off, the number of non-AT games displayed on the menu screen also becomes "0".

Therefore, for example, when the number of games played by RT1 on the RWM 53 (main control board 50 side) "_CT_RT_GAME" is "100" and the number of games played by non-AT displayed on the image display device 23 is "100", the power is turned on. /When turned off, the number of games "_CT_RT_GAME" of RT1 maintains "100" but becomes "0" displayed on the image display device 23. Next, when the first game is executed, the number of games "_CT_RT_GAME" of RT1 is updated to "101", and the number of games displayed on the image display device 23 is updated to "1". In this way, when the power is turned on/off, the number of games played in RT1 "_CT_RT_GAME" in the RWM 53 and the number of games played in non-AT displayed on the image display device 23 (the number of games stored in the RWM 83) are changed. become different. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing how many games remain until the ceiling is reached first thing in the morning (when the hall opens).

Furthermore, in the twenty-third embodiment, even when the setting change process is executed, the RT status number "_NB_RT_STS" and the number of games played in RT1 "_CT_RT_GAME" are not cleared. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the setting change process is executed, the number of games played in RT1 "_CT_RT_GAME" may be cleared. If you clear RT1's number of games "_CT_RT_GAME" when you execute the setting change process, the data of RT1's number of games "_CT_RT_GAME" after the setting change process and the number of non-AT games displayed on the image display device 23 and will match. With this configuration, it becomes possible to know the number of games played at the first thing in the morning (when the hall opens) and the number of games played until the ceiling is reached, so it is possible to determine whether or not a player will play on that machine first thing in the morning. It becomes possible to use it as motivation (use it as judgment material).

Although the twenty-third embodiment has been described above, the twenty-third embodiment is not limited to the above content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible for the twenty-third embodiment.
(1) When the small winning group A is won, it is a winning role that has a correct pressing order during 1BB operation, and the small winning group B is a winning role that has a correct pressing order within SRB while 1BB is operating. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the small winning combination B group may also have a correct pressing order during 1BB operation (regardless of whether it is inside the SRB), like the small winning combination A group.
On the contrary, for the small winning combination A group, like the small winning combination B group, only when 1BB is in operation and inside the SRB, the winning combination may have a correct pressing order.

(2) The ball payout rates when 1BB is not activated, when non-AT and 1BB is activated, and when AT and 1BB are activated are merely examples, and are not limited to the above embodiments. However, in order to prevent the transition to 1BB operation (1BB game) even though AT has not been won, it is preferable that the ball output rate when not AT and 1BB operation is less than "1". .
On the other hand, when the 1BB is activated, even if it is a non-AT game machine, the payout rate is set higher than when the 1BB is not activated, thereby creating an advantageous situation for the player. It will satisfy the principle of

(3) In the above embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed when non-AT and 1BB is operating, or when AT and 1BB is operating, but the AT lottery is not executed even when non-AT and 1BB is operating. May be executed. However, in order to prevent the 1BB from being activated easily during non-AT, it is preferable to set the AT winning probability when non-AT and 1BB is operating to be lower than the AT winning probability when 1BB is not operating.
Furthermore, while AT and 1BB are in operation, it is possible to perform an additional lottery for the number of AT sets.

(4) In the 23rd embodiment, even if the player is in the SRB during the AT and 1BB operation, the game is assumed to be completed without winning the SRB. This is because if the SRB is won and the game shifts to the RB game, the payout rate will decrease.
Here, when the AT and 1BB are activated and the SRB is ready while inside the SRB, a waiting time may be set using the processing shown in FIG. 147 in order to avoid the SRB winning.
On the other hand, in the case where a transition to 1BB play is made without having the right to execute the AT, when an SRB is won, even if the SRB is in a ready state, it is not necessary to execute processing to prevent the SRB from winning (setting a waiting time).
In addition, when the AT and 1BB are activated and the SRB is ready while inside the SRB, a process of alerting the player by outputting a flash or sound may be executed, similar to when 1BB is ready.

(5) In the above embodiment, when the conditions for transition to AT are not met, the standby time when 1BB is full is set to "896 (D)" (approximately 1000 ms). The reason is that the time required for one rotation of the reel 31 at constant speed is "1.117 x 2 x 336 = approximately 750 ms", so the waiting time is set longer than the one rotation time of the reel 31. . With this setting, when the "Blue BAR" symbol on the third reel 31 reaches the active line for the first time after operating the second stop switch 42, the waiting time has not yet elapsed. Even if the third stop switch 42 is operated at the right timing, winning of 1BB can be avoided.
However, the waiting time is not limited to this, and the waiting time can be set arbitrarily. For example, in order to secure enough time to avoid winning 1BB, it may be set to about 3 seconds.

(6) In the example of the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in Fig. 147, the waiting time is stored in step S810 on the condition that it is determined in step S801 that the second stop switch 42 has been operated to stop. In this case, the determination in step S802 may be made in two ways: "Yes" when the second stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when 1BB is ready, or "Yes" when the second reel 31 actually stops and 1BB is ready, but either method may be used.
For example, if the answer to the question "Yes" in step S802 is given before the second reel 31 actually stops, then at the time of step S810, the second reel 31 may not have yet stopped, or the second reel 31 may have already stopped.

(7) Setting the standby time when 1BB is tenpai and not stopping the third reel 31 during the standby time can also be used in the specifications within 1BB.
Here, "1BB internal medium spec" means that the game is executed while carrying over the winning of 1BB, and both non-AT and AT are executed with 1BB internal medium spec. In the case of 1BB internal medium spec, it is assumed that the game will proceed without winning 1BB. In such a case, the waiting time can be set as shown in step S810 of FIG. 147, and the configuration can be configured such that the transition to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) does not occur unless the waiting time has elapsed, as shown in step S791 of FIG. For example, it is possible to effectively prevent the 1BB from entering the 1BB operating state from inside the 1BB.

(8) The standby performance was performed by rotating the reels 31 in reverse. However, the rotation direction of the reels 31 in the standby performance is not limited to this, and may be normal rotation. When the standby effect is executed in forward rotation (when the reels 31 are not rotated in reverse), the storage area for search counter update correction data at address "F09F(H)" in FIG. 138, the storage area in FIG. 143, The process of step S823 (storage of search counter update correction data) and the process of step S933 in FIG. 159 (correction of the number of deceleration start steps) are no longer necessary.
However, if the standby effect is performed in reverse rotation, the player can easily recognize that it is a standby effect. Further, even if the standby effect is performed in the normal rotation, if it is performed at a rotation speed different from the rotation speed of the normal game, the player can easily recognize that it is a standby effect.
Furthermore, in the standby performance, the symbol number at which each reel 31 should be stopped is set in advance using the reel performance data table shown in FIG. be. In other words, even if the stop results before the execution of the standby effect (previous game) are inconsistent, the standby effect causes a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a set of "black BARs") to be stopped and displayed. That is, it is not necessary to stop the preparation move in the previous game of the game in which the standby performance is executed.

(9) The addictive prevention output is not limited to the example described above, and may be executed even when an AT continuation notification is output, for example. Alternatively, even if the AT end effect is not output, the addictive prevention output may be executed.

(10) In the showdown effect output control shown in FIG. 161, in this example, the timer value is set based on the start switch 41 being operated (steps S991 and S993). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timer value may be set (the timer may be counted) based on the operation of other operation switches, such as the bet switch 40 or the first or second stop switch 42.
Also, instead of setting the timer value (starting the timer count) when one of the operation switches is operated, it is also possible to start the timer count from a predetermined timing after the operation switch is operated. good.

For example, firstly, when the operation switch is the bet switch 40, the timer may start counting one second after the bet switch 40 is operated.
Second, when the operation switch is the start switch 41, the timer may start counting at the timing when the output of the current game effect is started after the start switch 41 is operated.
Thirdly, when the operation switch is the first or second stop switch 42, when the reel 31 corresponding to the first or second stop switch 42 is stopped or when the first or second stop switch 42 is operated. The timer may start counting at the timing when the effect based on is started.

(11) In addition, in the 23rd embodiment, the timing for outputting the conclusion of the showdown performance is when the third stop switch 42 changes from on to off (when the hand is released) when the timer value is "0". However, this is not limited to this, and if another (already operated) stop switch 42 is operated before the third stop switch 42 changes from on to off, the conclusion of the showdown performance may not be output even if the third stop switch 42 changes from on to off. For example, a new game can be provided in which, while a player is continuing to press the third stop switch 42 to prevent the conclusion of the showdown performance from being output, a nearby player (friend) mischievously operates another stop switch 42, preventing the performance conclusion from being output.

(12) Furthermore, in a game that outputs the conclusion of a confrontation performance, when the payout process is executed based on the third stop switch 42 turning from on to off, and a hopper error (no medals) occurs, The output of the performance ending is interrupted and the continuation of the performance ending is output after the hopper error is canceled, or the performance ending is output again from the beginning after the hopper error is canceled.
Further, when the third stop switch 42 is turned off from on and the payout process is executed just before the timer value becomes "0", the timer is counted even during the execution of the payout process. Therefore, if the timer value reaches "0" during the payout process, the effect ending will be output based on the timer value reaching "0" (regardless of whether the payout process has ended or not). be done.

(13) Furthermore, in a game in which the conclusion of a showdown performance is output, output of the performance conclusion is started based on the third stop switch 42 being turned from on to off. However, this is not limited to this. When the third stop switch 42 is turned on or when the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off, for example, an icon of a push button (sub button) may be displayed as an image (the performance conclusion is not output at this point), and the performance conclusion may be output when the push button is operated.

(14) In the example of FIG. 132, in main game state 5 (AT pullback), if the AT pullback counter is "0" and the advantageous section clear counter is less than "600", the transition to main game state 0 is made. I made it. However, the invention is not limited to this, and when the AT pullback counter reaches "0" in main game state 5, the advantageous section clear counter is cleared regardless of the value of the advantageous section clear counter, and the transition to main game state 0 is made. You may. Furthermore, in the main gaming state 1, if the game is highly accurate, the main gaming state 1 may not be ended (not transferred to the main gaming state 0) even if the advantageous section clear counter becomes less than "600".
(15) In the twenty-third embodiment, since the number of reels 31 is three, it is determined in step S801 in FIG. 147 whether or not it is after the second stop. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case where the reel is configured with four reels 31 as shown in FIG. 59 (13th embodiment), in step S801 of FIG. 147, it is determined whether or not it is after the third stop. It turns out.

(16) In the twenty-third embodiment, the volume setting in the administrator mode is three levels, but this is not limited to this and may be any number of levels (for example, five levels, ten levels, etc.). Also, the volume setting in the player mode is five levels, but this is not limited to this and may be any number of levels (for example, three levels, ten levels, etc.).
(17) The numerical values (setting values, timer values, etc.) given in the twenty-third embodiment are all examples and are not meant to be limited to these values.
(18) The twenty-third embodiment can be implemented alone, or can be implemented in combination with any of the first to twenty-second embodiments.

<24th embodiment>
FIG. 164 is a diagram showing the hardware configuration of the main CPU 55 in the slot machine 10 of FIG. 1.
Further, FIG. 165 is a diagram showing the structure of the ROM 54 and RWM 53 in FIG. 164 in more detail.
In the 24th embodiment, when expressing the address of the built-in memory or the data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 in hexadecimal, "(H)" (the initial letter of "hexadecimal") indicating hexadecimal is added. .

In FIG. 164, the main CPU 55 consists of a 1-chip microprocessor (MPU) (hereinafter also simply referred to as a "chip" as necessary), and includes an ALU (arithmetic unit) 55d and a built-in memory. including (but not limited to). Note that the term "built-in memory" refers to user memory unless otherwise specified.
The main CPU 55 executes programs, performs calculations, etc. necessary for the progress of the game. Specifically, it executes control processing for the inserted medals, lottery processing for winning combinations, drive control processing for the reels 31, payout processing at the time of winning, and the like.

The ALU 55d is an arithmetic unit of the main CPU 55 that executes logical operations, four arithmetic operations, and the like. Further, as shown in FIG. 164, an internal bus (including an address bus, a data bus, and a control bus) 55a in the main CPU 55 is connected to the ALU 55d, and the internal bus 55a is connected to a predetermined storage area in the built-in memory. linked. Here, "connect" refers to forming a path through which information can be communicated (the same applies hereinafter). The entire storage area of the built-in memory may be connected to the internal bus 55a, or a part of the storage area of the built-in memory (for example, excluding a storage area provided with confidentiality) may be connected to the internal bus 55a. You can leave it there.

When a specified storage area in the built-in memory is connected to the internal bus 55a and the ALU 55d, the information stored in the specified storage area can be output (transmitted) to the outside by a program executed by the main CPU 55.
It should be noted that the above-mentioned "program executed by the main CPU 55" includes both a program stored in an internal memory (e.g., ROM 54) within the main CPU 55, and a program stored outside the main CPU 55 (slot machine 10) but configured so that the program can be executed by the main CPU 55.

Although not shown in FIG. 164, the memory area of the main CPU 55 is divided into a boot area and a user area. The boot area is a storage area used by the chip manufacturer, and may include a boot ROM, boot RWM, and the like.
For example, the boot ROM may store a program for checking security, a program for diagnosing failure, a program for performing authentication and verification, and the like. Further, the boot RWM may be used as a work area (data area, stack area, etc.) for the boot program.

The user area is a storage area used by the manufacturer of the slot machine 10 (however, not all of the user area is necessarily used by the manufacturer of the slot machine 10), and includes a (built-in) ROM 54 and a (built-in) RWM 53. , a built-in register area 56, a decode area 57, and the like. Note that the ROM, RWM, and other storage means may be provided outside the one-chip microprocessor (on the main control board 50) instead of being provided inside the one-chip microprocessor.

As shown in FIG. 164, the user area of the built-in memory is composed of storage areas from addresses "0000(H)" to "FFFF(H)". Here, the "1" address of the user area has a storage capacity of "1" byte. Therefore, the entire user area is "65536" bytes.
The addresses of the ROM 54 and the unused area following it in the user area, the RWM 53 and the unused area following it, the built-in register area 56 and the unused area following it, the decode area 57 and the unused area following it, are in the user area. It is continuous.
Note that in the user area, the storage capacity of the ROM 54 and RWM 53 and the storage capacity of each area shown in FIGS. 164 and 165 are examples, and the storage capacity is not limited thereto.

The ROM 54 is a storage area for storing a program (user program) created by a user, that is, a manufacturer of the slot machine 10 .
The storage capacity of the ROM 54 is set to about "12K bytes" in this embodiment, and has consecutive storage areas from address "0000(H)" to "2FFF(H)".
The storage area of the ROM 54 has a usage area and an outside usage area, as shown in Fig. 165. Furthermore, both the usage area and the outside usage area have a control area and a data area. Note that the control area of the usage area may be referred to as a first control area, and the control area outside the usage area may be referred to as a second control area.

"Used area" refers to a storage area where information other than information necessary to prevent unauthorized modification or other changes is stored or will be stored (same for ROM 54 and RWM 53).
Further, the "control area" refers to a storage area other than the data area among the used areas, and is an area where various programs executed by the main control board 50 are stored. The control area may also be referred to as a "program area." Specifically, programs related to game progress and performance (programs for executing main processing (for example, FIG. 41) and interrupt processing (for example, FIG. 53)) are stored. Therefore, the commands of the programs shown in FIGS. 168 to 171, which will be described later, are stored in the control area of the used area of the ROM 54.
Furthermore, "data area" refers to a storage area in which only information other than the program is stored or will be stored in the used area, and is an area where data used when the program is executed is stored. be.

Furthermore, in a control area outside the use area (second control area), there are programs that are not related to the progress of the game, such as a program for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 (winning ratio monitor), a program used during testing, and Programs and the like for preventing fraud are stored.
Further, the program management area of the ROM 54 is an area that stores information and the like necessary for the main CPU 55 to execute a user program. A header, manufacturer code, product code, program code end address, etc. are stored in the program management area.

The RWM 53 is used as a work area for user programs. The RWM 53 has a backup function, and the information stored in the RWM 53 can be retained even after the chip (slot machine 10) is powered off.
As shown in FIG. 165, the storage area of the RWM 53 has a used area and a non-used area, similar to the ROM 54. Furthermore, both the used area and the outside of the used area have a work area and a stack area, respectively.
The work area in the usage area of the RWM 53 includes a storage area for storing data necessary for the game, as shown in FIG. 35 (11th embodiment) and FIGS. 133 to 138 (23rd embodiment), for example. (Note that in FIG. 35, a part of the storage area for data regarding advantageous sections overlaps with FIG. 138.)

In addition, among the areas used by the RWM 53, the stack area is used to save the value of a register and then return the value to the register, or when executing a predetermined instruction, the stack area is used to save the value of a register and then return the value to the register. This is an area used for storing the address of the caller to return to (also referred to as a return address or return address).
Furthermore, in the work area outside the area used by the RWM 53, there is data for displaying the ratio on the management information display LED 74 (winning ratio monitor), specifically, a ring buffer, a number of games counter, a number of payouts counter, and ratio data. It has storage areas such as
The storage capacity of the RWM 53 is set to approximately "1 Kbyte" in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and has a storage area of addresses "F000(H)" to "F3FF(H)".

Here, as shown in FIG. 165, the work area in the used area of the RWM 53 has a range of addresses "F00(H)" to "F1CF(H)", but FIG. As shown in FIGS. 133 to 138 (23rd embodiment), most of the storage areas for storing data necessary for the progress of the game are storage areas with the upper address "F0 (H)".
On the other hand, the storage area of the data for displaying the ratio on the management information display LED 74 (rotation ratio monitor) is the storage area whose upper address is "F2 (H)".

In FIG. 164, the built-in register area 56 that is continuous from the RWM 53 across an unused area has a storage area with addresses "FE00(H)" to "FEBF(H)" in this embodiment, and in the 24th embodiment, It has a storage capacity of 192 bytes.
Further, the decode area 57 that is continuous from the built-in register area 56 with an unused area in between is a storage area consisting of "46 bytes" of addresses "FED0(H)" to "FEFD(H)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 164, the main CPU 55 is provided with a general-purpose register area (storage area). The general-purpose register area may be provided outside the built-in memory, or may be provided within the built-in memory, for example, within the built-in register area 56.
The registers provided in the general-purpose register area consist of A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, F register, H register, L register, and Q register (1 byte each) (however, (The types of registers are not limited to these.) Other general-purpose registers include SP (stack pointer), but a description thereof will be omitted in the twenty-fourth embodiment.

The above-described ROM 54, RWM 53, built-in register area 56, decode area 57, and general-purpose registers are connected to an internal bus 55a and can be accessed by a program (main program) executed by the main CPU 55. Therefore, the information stored in the ROM 54 can be read by the main program. Further, the main program can read information stored in the RWM 53 and write information to the RWM 53. Furthermore, information in the built-in register area 56 can be read by the main program (however, only in some areas). Further, the main program can read information from the decode area 57 and write information to the decode area 57. Similarly, the main program can read information from and write information to registers.

Furthermore, even if data is stored in the registers when the power switch 11 is turned off, these register values are initialized to "0" when the power switch 11 is turned on.
In the 24th embodiment, when the power switch 11 of the slot machine 10 is turned on, the Q register value is "0 (H)" at the time the power is turned on, but from immediately after the power is turned on until the user program is started. The initial value "F0(H)" is stored in the Q register at a predetermined timing between the two.

Furthermore, when the power switch 11 is turned on after the power is turned off, the unused area of the user area is initialized. Here, data may be stored even in an unused area due to noise or the like. In the unlikely event that a value is stored in an unused area, it may lead to fraud or other fraud. For these reasons, the unused area is initialized when the power is turned on (usually once a day).

FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the register in detail. In the figure, (A) indicates registers A to F, H, L, and Q.
In the main CPU 55 of this embodiment, A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (seven registers) can be used as registers for temporarily storing data during calculation. Further, the F register is a flag register having a carry flag and a zero flag. Furthermore, as described above, the Q register is a register in which the upper address "F0 (H)" of the work area in the used area of the RWM 53 is stored and is used when issuing an instruction.
Here, the A register and F register, the B register and C register, the D register and E register, and the H register and L register are respectively referred to as pair registers. Note that the F register is a register for storing the value of a specific flag, and a 2-byte value is not stored in the AF register together with the A register.

The A register is used to store a 1-byte value. For example, the A register is used in the process shown in step S772 in FIG. 141 (23rd embodiment).
On the other hand, 2-byte data may be stored in the BC register, DE register, and HL register as pair registers. Here, when 2-byte data is stored in the BC register, the B register is the upper one and the C register is the lower one. Similarly, when 2-byte data is stored in the DE register, the D register is the upper one and the E register is the lower one. Similarly, when 2-byte data is stored in the HL register, the H register becomes the upper register and the L register becomes the lower register.

For example, an example of storing 2-byte data in the BC register is storing the waiting time for the end of the performance (2-byte data) in the BC register when executing 2-byte waiting processing for the waiting time for the end of the performance in step S831 of Figure 143 (23rd embodiment).
Even when storing 1-byte data, a pair of registers may be used. For example, in step S395 of Fig. 49 (11th embodiment), in order to store the number of interrupt processes "46", "00000000(B)" is stored in the B register and "00101110(B)" (corresponding to 46(D)) is stored in the C register. Even when the data is 1-byte data, the data is stored in a pair of registers consisting of 2 bytes in order to reuse the program for the 2-byte wait process.

On the other hand, the BC register is not always used as a pair register, but may be used alone. For example, as shown in step S497 in FIG. 55 (eleventh embodiment), there is an example in which error number display data is stored in the B register and bet display data is stored in the C register.
The above also applies to the DE register and the HL register.

The F register is called a flag register. FIG. 166(B) is a diagram showing the structure of the F register.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the "D0" bit (lowest bit) of the F register is set to the carry flag (C). Here, the "carry flag (C)" is a flag that becomes "1" when a downflow or a carry (also referred to as overflow) occurs as a result of an operation.
Note that in this embodiment, the carry flag may be abbreviated as "C". In this embodiment, "C" means a carry flag and does not mean a C register. When referring to the C register, it is called "C register." However, in the instructions described below, the BC register may be referred to as "BC".
Furthermore, in the instructions described later, "C" means "when the carry flag becomes "1" (when a carry occurs)". On the other hand, "NC" means "when the carry flag is not "1" (when no carry occurs)".

For example, in step S434 in FIG. 51 (eleventh embodiment), the carry flag changes in response to a comparison operation between the HL register value (difference counter value) and "2401(D)". In step S434 of FIG. 51, in the comparison operation between the HL register value and "2401(D)", a process of subtracting "2401(D)" from the HL register value is executed. Therefore, when the HL register value is "2400 (D)" or less, the carry flag becomes "1", and when the HL register value becomes "2401 (D)" or more, the carry flag becomes "0".
For example, if the HL register value is "2400 (D)",
"2400 (D)" - "2401 (D)" = "-1 (D)", carry flag = "1"
becomes.
Also, if the HL register value is "2402 (D)",
"2402(D)" - "2401(D)" = "1(D)", carry flag = "0"
becomes.

Therefore, since the operation result is "1", no underflow occurs and the carry flag is "0" (the D0 bit of the F register is "0").
On the other hand, if the HL register value is "2402(D)",
"2401 (D)" - "2402 (D)" = "-1 (D)" (Actually, "FFFF (H)"
As a result, a digit decreases and the carry flag becomes "1" (the D0 bit of the F register becomes "1").

Further, even if the calculation result does not have a carry-over or a carry-over, the carry flag may become "1".
For example, in the process of step S422 in FIG. 51 (eleventh embodiment), a special operation is performed to maintain "0000(H)" without causing a downgrade even if "1" is subtracted from "0000(H)". Execute. However, in the process of step S422, when "1" is subtracted from "0000(H)", the carry flag becomes "1".
Once the carry flag becomes "1", another operation is executed next, and the carry flag is maintained until it becomes "0" (the process of clearing the carry flag is not executed).

Further, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the "D7" bit (most significant bit) of the F register is set to the zero flag (Z). Here, the "zero flag (Z)" is a flag that becomes "1" when the calculation result becomes "0".
Furthermore, in the instructions described below, "Z" means the condition "when the zero flag becomes "1" (when the operation result is "0")". On the other hand, "NZ" means the condition "when the zero flag is not "1" (when the calculation result is not "0")".
For example, in the process of step S422 in FIG. 51 (eleventh embodiment), if the value before calculation is "0001 (H)" and "1" is subtracted and becomes "0000 (H)", the zero flag is It becomes "1".

Similar to the carry flag, once the zero flag becomes "1", another operation is executed next, and the zero flag is maintained until it becomes "0" (the process to clear the zero flag is not executed).
Note that in the F register, in this embodiment, only the D0 bit (carry flag) and D7 bit (zero flag) are used, and the D1 to D6 bits are unused. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to use other bits of the F register for other flags.

As described above, the Q register is a register in which "F0(H)" (the upper address of the working area of the used area in RWM53) is stored, and in the 24th embodiment, it is used in an instruction to read data whose upper address is "F0(H)" from the storage area of RWM53. In particular, in the 24th embodiment, most of the upper addresses of the working area in the used area of RWM53 are set to "F0(H)". For example, the first "F000(H)" is set to the setting value data (_NB_RANK) as shown in FIG. 35 (11th embodiment).

35 and 133 to 138 (23rd embodiment), the upper addresses of the memory areas in which each data is stored are all "F0##(H)" (where "#" is any value from "0" to "F"). When "F0(H)" is once stored in the Q register, and an instruction specifies the upper address "F0(H)" of the memory area of RWM 53, the Q register is specified.
In addition, in the area used by RWM 53, if the main upper address of the working area is not "F0(H)", for example "E1(H)", then "E1(H)" is stored in the Q register accordingly.

In addition, when "F0 (H)" is stored in the Q register, for example, in the used area of the RWM 53, predetermined data related to the progress of the game is stored in a storage area whose upper address is other than "F0 (H)". If you need to access the data, the following methods are available:
For example, first, the address where the data to be read is stored is stored in the HL register, for example, and the program instruction specifies the HL register value (instruction to read the contents stored in the HL register). Can be mentioned.

Second, when accessing data in a storage area whose upper address is other than "F0 (H)", temporarily change the Q register value from "F0 (H)" to another value (the data you want to access is stored). The data in the storage area of the upper address can be accessed by changing the address to a higher-order address (the higher-order address) and then specifying the Q register with an instruction. After this instruction is completed, for example, the Q register value may be returned to "F0(H)".

FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the command "LDQ A, (20(H))".
This instruction corresponds to an instruction to save (memorize) the content (also referred to as "contents" or "data"; the same applies hereinafter) stored at address "F020 (H)" at address A. do.
Here, the entire description "LDQ A, (20(H))" is referred to as an "instruction."
Furthermore, when the instruction is actually stored in the ROM 54, it is encoded (binarized data of "0" or "1") and stored. Binarized data in the form in which instructions are stored in the ROM 54 is referred to as an "instruction code."

Further, the command includes command information and identification information. In this example, "LDQ A," corresponds to command information, and "(20(H))" corresponds to identification information.
In the instruction "LDQ A, (20(H))", "LD" means transfer, "Q" refers to the upper address, and "(20(H))" refers to the lower address to be accessed. . The operand of the instruction (variable to be operated on) is specified within the parentheses of the identification information, and becomes the lower address to be accessed. Moreover, "A" indicates the register (in this example, the A register) as the storage destination.
Therefore, the data stored in the A register becomes the contents of address "F020(H)".

In the above case, it is assumed that data "n" is stored at address "F020(H)" as shown in FIG. 167(B). In this case, "n" is stored in the A register by the instruction "LDQ A, (20(H))". If some data is stored in the A register before saving "n", the A register is overwritten with "n".

Next, specific examples of instructions in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described.
FIGS. 168 to 171 are diagrams showing types of instructions in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and show 37 types, numbered 1 to 37. Note that these commands are just examples, and the commands are not limited to the 37 types shown in FIGS. 168 to 171, and many more commands are provided.
First, the first and second instructions indicate "JTQ" instructions.
The first "JTQ NZ, (k), e" is the content stored at the address where the content of the Q register is the upper one and k is the lower one (hereinafter, the content stored at the address that is the target of the operation is , abbreviated as "target address value." be.

Furthermore, the last "e" indicates the migration destination address. For example, when the destination address is "0010(H)", "e" is written as "0010(H)" (2 bytes).
Furthermore, "NZ" is a conditional symbol in a branch instruction. Condition symbols for branch instructions explained below include the following.
NZ: When the operation result is not "0", in other words, when the zero flag is not "1" Z: When the operation result is "0", in other words, when the zero flag is "1" NC: When the operation result is a digit C: If the operation result does not go down, in other words, the carry flag is not "1". C: If the operation result goes down, in other words, the carry flag is "1".

In the above instruction, to determine whether the target address value is "0", "0" is subtracted from the target address value (target address value - "0"), and if the zero flag is not "1", then , determines that the target address value is not "0", and moves to e (address).
For example, when determining whether the content stored in address "F001(H)" is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", moving to address "0010(H)", The command is "JTQ NZ, (01(H)), 0010(H)".
In this case, whether the content stored in the address with the Q register value "F0(H)" as the upper one and "01(H)" as the lower one, that is, the address "F001(H)" is "0" or not. to judge.
And here:
"Contents of address "F001(H)"" - "0"
Calculate.

For example, when "1(H)" is stored in "F001(H)", "1-0≠0" and the zero flag is "0". Therefore, it is determined that the content stored at address "F001(H)" is not "0", and the process is shifted to address "0010(H)".
On the other hand, if, for example, "0(H)" is stored at address "F001(H)", "0-0=0" and the zero flag becomes "1". Therefore, it is determined that the content stored at address "F001(H)" is "0", and the process ends (the process does not move to address "0010(H)", but the next command (specific (The instruction stored at the address consecutive to the instruction is executed).

In addition, as a method to judge whether the target address value is "0" or not, "0" is subtracted from the contents stored in the target address, and if the zero flag is "1", the contents stored in the target address are subtracted. The method of determining whether the content stored in the target address is "0" (or, if the zero flag is not "1", the content stored at the target address is not "0") is to If the condition has the condition symbol "Z", similar calculations are performed.

Furthermore, the contents stored in the RWM 53 do not change before and after the execution of the above instruction. When the instruction "JTQ NZ, (k), e" is executed, the contents stored in the address with the Q register at the upper level and k at the lower level do not change before and after the instruction.
Furthermore, even if an interrupt processing period arrives during the execution of an instruction, the interrupt processing is not executed until the instruction is completed. When an interrupt processing period arrives during the execution of an instruction, the interrupt processing is put on hold until the instruction is completed, and the interrupt processing is executed after the instruction is completed.

Depending on the operation executed by the instruction, the zero flag or carry flag will have a value corresponding to the operation result of the instruction, but the value of the zero flag or carry flag corresponding to the operation result of the instruction will not change until the instruction is completed. It is necessary to In other words, after the zero flag or carry flag changes due to the execution of an instruction, interrupt processing is executed before the instruction finishes, and the zero flag or carry flag changes due to the interrupt processing (the result of the operation of the instruction does not change). Corresponding zero flags and carry flags are corrupted by operations based on interrupt processing). To prevent this, interrupt processing is not executed while an instruction is being executed.

In the 24th embodiment, not only the first above-mentioned instruction but also all the instructions shown in FIGS. 168 to 171, interrupt processing is not executed during execution of the instruction even if the interrupt processing cycle has arrived. , executes interrupt processing after the instruction is completed.
For example, if there is no interrupt disabled period between at least the "N"th instruction and the "N+1"th instruction, and the "N"th instruction and the "N+1"th instruction are executed consecutively, If the interrupt processing cycle comes while the Nth instruction is being executed, the interrupt processing is not executed until the Nth instruction is completed, and the interrupt processing is executed after the Nth instruction is completed. do. Furthermore, while this interrupt processing is being executed, the "N+1"-th instruction is not executed. After the interrupt processing is completed, the "N+1"th instruction is executed.
On the other hand, if the interrupt prohibition period is set between at least the "N"th instruction and the "N+1"th instruction, and the "N"th instruction and the "N+1"th instruction are executed consecutively. In , when the interrupt processing cycle comes while the "N"th instruction is being executed, the interrupt processing is not executed after the "N"th instruction is completed, and the interrupt processing is started after the interrupt prohibition period ends. Execute. Here, the above-mentioned interrupt prohibition period corresponds to, for example, the period from the DI instruction to the EI instruction.
Note that the instructions shown in FIGS. 168 to 171 may be executed not only in the main processing but also in the interrupt processing.

The second instruction "JTQ Z, (k), e" is the same as the first instruction except that the condition symbol "NZ" in the first instruction is changed to "Z". be. In this instruction, contrary to the first instruction, when the content of the Q register is determined to be "0" stored at the address where the upper address is set and k is the lower address, that is, the zero flag is "1". If so, the process moves to e (address). On the other hand, if it is determined that the target address value is not "0", the process ends.

An example of the second command is step S803 in FIG. 147 (23rd embodiment). In step S803, it is determined whether the value (winning and replay condition device number) stored in the address "F0A9(H)" is "0". If it is determined that the value is "0", the process advances to step S804. Therefore, for example, if the instruction in step S804 is stored at address "0011(H)", the instruction in step S803 is "JTQ Z, (A9(H)), 0011(H)".

The third and fourth instructions indicate "RTQ" instructions.
These instructions are the same as the first and second instructions in that they determine whether the contents stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower are "0". This command differs from the first and second commands in that when the conditions specified in the command are met, the command moves to the caller.
First, the third "RTQ NZ, (k)" judges whether the content stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower is "0", and returns "0". If not (NZ), the process ends and the process returns to the calling source.
Here, when moving to the caller after the instruction ends, as in this third instruction, at the start of the instruction, the address (caller; 2 bytes) to return to after the end of the instruction is stored in the stack area. do.

The method for determining whether it is "0" is the same as the "JTQ" command described above, and calculates "target address value - "0".
Then, the third "RTQ NZ, (k)", when it is determined that the target address value (the content stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower) is not "0", Then, if the zero flag is not "1", the process ends and the process returns to the caller, and if the zero flag is "1", the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored in the address consecutive to the instruction) is executed. (instructions) are executed.
In addition, the fourth "RTQ Z, (k)" ends processing and moves to the caller when the zero flag is "1", and when the zero flag is not "1", it executes the next instruction (specifically is an instruction that executes an instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction.

An example of the fourth command is step S808 in FIG. 147 (23rd embodiment). In step S808, it is determined whether the value of address "F098(H)" (AT standby counter) is "0" or not, and if it is "0", the process moves to step S289 in FIG. 139, which is the calling source. do. Therefore, for example, if the instruction in step S289 is stored at address "0021(H)", the instruction in step S808 in FIG. 147 becomes "RTQ Z, (98(H))", and the stack area is , "0021(H)" which is the address of the caller is saved.

The fifth to eighth instructions indicate "RCP" commands.
The fifth instruction "RCP NZ, A, n" compares the A register value (indicates the contents stored in the A register. The same applies hereinafter) and "n", and if the zero flag is not "1", This is an instruction that ends processing and moves to the caller. Note that the comparison between the A register value and "n" is the same for the 6th to 8th instructions.
"Comparison" in this RCP instruction calculates "A register value - 'n'".
Example 1)
A register value = 6
n=5
If so, the command becomes "RCP NZ, A, 5".
In this case, an operation is performed to subtract "5" from the A register value.
Therefore,
6-5=1 (≠0)
Therefore, the zero flag is "0".
Since the zero flag is "0", the process moves to the address (2 bytes) saved in the caller, that is, the stack area.
Example 2)
A register value = 4
n=5
If so, the command becomes "RCP NZ, A, 5".
In this case, an operation is performed to subtract "5" from the A register value.
Therefore,
4-5=-1(FF(H))(≠0)
Therefore, the zero flag is "0".
Since the zero flag is "0", the process moves to the address (2 bytes) saved in the caller, that is, the stack area.
Example 3)
A register value = 5
n=5
If so, the command is "RCP NZ, A, 5".
In this case, an operation is performed to subtract "5" from the A register value.
Therefore,
5-5=0
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Since the zero flag is "1", it does not move to the caller, that is, the address (2 bytes) stored in the stack area, but moves to the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address following the instruction). ).

Furthermore, the above instruction (and the following sixth to eighth instructions) subtracts "n" from the A register value, but the A register value remains unchanged after the operation. For example, in Example 1 above, even if the operation to subtract n (5) from the A register value (4) is performed, the A register value remains "4."
In this way, the A register value remains unchanged by the RCP instruction and can therefore continue to be used after the RCP instruction.

The sixth instruction "RCP Z, A, n" differs from the fifth instruction in that it is an instruction to transition to the caller when the zero flag is "1." The comparison between the A register value and "n" is the same as the fifth instruction.
The seventh instruction "RCP NC, A, n" is an instruction that compares the value of the A register with "n" and transfers to the caller if the carry flag is not "1".

An example of this command is step S805 in FIG. 147 (23rd embodiment). In step S805, the accessory condition device number is stored in the A register value, and "n" is "2". Therefore, step S805 becomes the command "RCP NC, A, 2".
here,
Example 1)
For example, when the A register value (accessory condition device number) is "2" (at the time of RBA winning or when RBA winning information is carried over),
2-2=0
Therefore, the carry flag is "0".
Therefore, since the carry flag is "0", the process moves to the calling source. In this case, the caller is the address where the command in step S289 in FIG. 139 is stored after the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) (FIG. 146).
Example 2)
For example, when the A register value (accessory condition device number) is "0",
0-2=-2(FE(H))
Therefore, the carry flag is "1".
Therefore, since the carry flag is "1", the next instruction (instruction in step S806) is executed without moving to the calling source.
Example 3)
For example, when the A register value (accessory condition device number) is "3",
3-2=1
Therefore, the carry flag is "0".
Therefore, since the carry flag is "0", the process moves to the calling source. In this case, the caller is the address where the command in step S289 in FIG. 139 is stored after the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) (FIG. 146).
Furthermore, the 8th "RCP C, A, n" is an instruction in which "NC" in the 7th instruction is changed to "C", and when the carry flag is "1", it is transferred to the caller. However, when the carry flag is "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, an instruction stored at an address subsequent to the instruction).

The ninth and tenth "LDWQ" instructions are instructions for storing a predetermined value in two consecutive addresses. In this instruction, "LD" means transfer as described above, and "W" indicates that the target address is two addresses.
This command can be executed even if the register is full (if a value is stored in the register). It can also be used, for example, to actually adopt and save temporarily stored data.
The ninth instruction, "LDWQ (k),(k')," is an instruction that saves the contents stored in the address with the Q register as the upper part, "k'" as the lower part, and the address obtained by adding "1" to that address (in other words, the address with the Q register as the upper part and "k'+1" as the lower part), to the address with the Q register as the upper part, "k" as the lower part, and the address obtained by adding "1" to that address (in other words, the address with the Q register as the upper part and "k+1" as the lower part).

for example,
Contents stored in upper address "Q" and lower address "k'": x
Contents stored in upper address "Q" and lower address "k'+1": y
In that case,
Save “x” in the storage area of upper address “Q” and lower address “k”,
This is an instruction to save "y" in the storage area of upper address "Q" and lower address "k+1".

The tenth instruction, "LDWQ (k), mn," is an instruction to store "mn" (a 2-byte value) into an address with the contents of the Q register at the upper level and "k" at the lower level, and into an address resulting from adding "1" to that address; in other words, an address with the contents of the Q register at the upper level and "k+1" at the lower level.
This instruction is used, for example, when storing a 2-byte timer value in a 2-byte storage area.

An example of this command is, for example, in step S767 of FIG. 140 (23rd embodiment), the initial value of the minimum playing time "3672 (D)" is added to the addresses "F0AB(H)" and "F0AC(H)". An example of this is the process of storing .
Here, since "3672(D)" = "0E58(H)", the instruction in the above example becomes "LDWQ (AB(H)), 0E58(H)" and is placed at address "F0AB(H)". “0E(H)” is saved, and “58(H)” is saved in “F0AC(H)”.

This command is also used, for example, when setting the initial value of the number of coins acquired during 1BB operation. For example, in FIG. 133 (23rd embodiment), the number of coins that can be acquired for 1BB in the 23rd embodiment is 170, so the storage area that stores the number of coins that can be acquired for 1BB is 1-byte storage at address "F00E (H)". It has become an area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of coins that can be obtained for 1BB is 256 or more, the storage area for storing the number of coins that can be acquired for 1BB is 2 bytes. Then, at the start of the 1BB game, the initial value of the number of obtainable coins (2-byte value) during the 1BB operation is stored in the storage area.

The 11th and 12th indicate "JTWQ" commands. This instruction is an instruction that determines whether the contents stored in two consecutive addresses are "0" or not, and shifts the processing to address "e" depending on the determination result. This instruction may be used, for example, to determine whether a 2-byte timer has elapsed.
First, the 11th instruction "JTWQ NZ, (k), e" stores the contents of the Q register at the upper address and "k" at the lower address, and sets "1" to the address. Determine whether the content of the added address, in other words, the content (i.e. 2-byte data) stored at the address with the content of the Q register as the upper and "k+1" as the lower, is "0" or not, If it is not "0", the process is transferred to e (address), and if it is "0", the process is not transferred to e (address) and the next instruction (specifically, the instruction This is an instruction that executes instructions stored in consecutive addresses.

Here, to determine whether it is "0", calculate "2-byte data value - 0", and if the zero flag is "1", the 2-byte data value is "0". I judge that there is. The same applies to the following 12th to 14th instructions.
The 12th instruction "JTWQ Z, (k), e" differs from the 11th instruction in that if the 2-byte data is "0", the process moves to e (address). .
An example of this command is step S766 in FIG. 140 (23rd embodiment). Step S766 is a process of determining whether the 2-byte data stored at addresses "F0AB(H)" and "F0AC(H)" is "0". When it is determined that the value is "0", the process moves to e (address), in this example, the address where the next instruction in step S767 is stored. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", the process does not proceed to e (address), but in this example, proceeds to the address where the next instruction in step S766 is stored.

The 13th and 14th instructions are "RTWQ" instructions. This instruction is an instruction that determines whether the contents (2-byte data) stored in two consecutive addresses are "0" or not, and moves to the calling source according to the determination result. In other words, the 11th and 12th instructions above move to e (address) if the conditions specified in the instruction are met, but the 13th and 14th instructions move to e (address) if the conditions specified in the instruction are met. This instruction is different from the 11th and 12th instructions in that if the specified conditions are met, the instruction is transferred to the calling source. Like the 11th and 12th instructions, this instruction may also be used, for example, to wait for a 2-byte timer.

The 13th instruction, "RTWQ NZ, (k)", writes the contents of the Q register to the contents stored at the upper address and "k" to the lower address, and to the address obtained by adding "1" to that address. Determine whether the stored content, in other words, the content (i.e. 2-byte data) stored at an address with the contents of the Q register as the upper and "k+1" as the lower, is "0" or not, If it is not "0", it moves to the caller, and if it is "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address consecutive to the instruction in question). be.
An example of this command is step S791 in FIG. 146 (23rd embodiment). In step S791, it is determined whether the contents (waiting time) of addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)" are "0" (whether the zero flag is "1" or not), and "0" is determined. If not, the process according to the flowchart of FIG. 146 is ended, and the process moves to the calling source, in this example, the address where the instruction of step S289 in FIG. 139 is stored. On the other hand, it is determined whether the contents (waiting time) of addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)" are "0" (whether the zero flag is "1" or not), and it is determined that they are "0". If so, the instruction in step S792 in FIG. 146 (the next instruction in step S791) is executed.
In addition, the 14th instruction "RTWQ Z, (k)" moves to the caller if the 2-byte data value is "0", and if it is not "0", the next instruction ( Specifically, this instruction differs from the 11th instruction in that it executes an instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction. Other than that, it is the same as the 13th instruction.

In FIG. 169, the 15th and 16th "ICPLDS" instructions are instructions that compare the target register value and "n" (1-byte value) and execute predetermined processing according to the calculation result.
First, the 15th instruction "ICPLDS A,n" compares the contents stored in the A register with "n". This 15th command includes patterns 1 to 3 shown below (however, it is not limited to these three patterns).

<Pattern 1>
The value obtained by adding "1" to the contents stored in the A register is compared with "n", and if "A register value + 1" exceeds "n", the value of "n" is added to the A register. Set the value.
Here, the value obtained by adding "1" to the A register value is subtracted from "n"("n" - "A register value + 1"), and when the carry flag becomes "1", the value is added to the A register. If the value of "n" is set and the carry flag does not become "1", the value of "n" is not set in the A register.
This command, for example, adds "1" to some counter every time a predetermined condition is met (for example, every time one game is played), and when that value exceeds "n" (upper limit), maintains that state. There are cases where it continues. Specifically, when a parameter (for example, number of games played) reaches a ceiling, the ceiling state is maintained, and when the ceiling state is reached, a specific lottery is executed every game.

<Pattern 2>
a) If the content stored in the A register is less than "1", add "1" to the content stored in the A register (A register value = A register value + 1) and end the process. do.
b) If the content stored in the A register is "1" or more, set the A register to "n" (1-byte value) (A register value = "n") and end the process.
Here, "1" is subtracted from the content stored in the A register (A register value - "1"), and when the carry flag is "1", the content stored in the A register is "1". ”. Alternatively, "0" is subtracted from the contents stored in the A register (A register value - "0"), and if the zero flag is "1", the contents stored in the A register are less than "1". It is determined that
Also, if "1" is subtracted from the content stored in the A register (A register value - "1"), and the carry flag is "0", the content stored in the A register becomes "1". It is determined that this is the above.

<Pattern 3>
a) If the content stored in the A register is less than "n" (1 byte value), then "1" is added to the content stored in the A register and the process ends.
b) If the content stored in the A register is "n", the process ends.
c) If the content stored in the A register exceeds "n", set "n" (1 byte value) in the A register and end the process.

Here, "n" is subtracted from the content stored in the A register (A register value - "n"), and when the carry flag is "1", the content stored in the A register is "n". ”.
Also, subtract "n" from the content stored in the A register (A register value - "n"), and if the zero flag is "1", the content stored in the A register is "n". I judge that there is.
Furthermore, "n" is subtracted from the contents stored in the A register (A register value - "n"), and when the carry flag is "0" and the zero flag is "0", the A register It can be determined that the contents stored in the file exceed "n".

The 16th instruction "ICPLDS (HL),n" means that "A" (A register value (1 byte data)) in the 15th instruction is changed to "(HL)" (HL register value (2 byte data)). ). Other than that, it is the same as the 15th instruction.
Note that the HL register is often used to store 2-byte data (for example, an address value, etc.), and one example thereof is "HL" in the above instruction. However, the instruction is not limited to this, and may be an instruction that specifies another pair of registers (BC register, DE register). In this case, they become "ICPLDS (BC), n" and "ICPLDS (DE), n", respectively.
This also applies to instructions (26th, 29th, and 30th) that specify the "HL" register, which will be explained below.

Hereinafter, the 16th instruction will be explained again, although the explanation will partially overlap with the 15th instruction.
"ICPLDS (HL),n" compares the contents stored in the HL register with "n". Examples of this command include patterns 1 to 3 shown below (however, the command is not limited to these three patterns).

<Pattern 1>
The value obtained by adding "1" to the contents stored in the HL register is compared with "n" (1 byte value), and if "HL register value + 1" exceeds "n", the HL register is Set the value of “n” to . When "n" is set in the HL register, the H register value becomes "0" and the L register value becomes "n".
Here, the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value is subtracted from "n"("n" - "HL register value + 1"), and when the carry flag becomes "1", the value is added to the HL register. If the value of "n" is set and the carry flag does not become "1", the value of "n" is not set in the HL register.

<Pattern 2>
a) If the content stored in the HL register is less than "1", add "1" to the content stored in the HL register (HL register value = HL register value + 1) and end the process. do.
b) If the content stored in the HL register is "1" or more, set "n" (1 byte value) in the HL register (HL register value = "n") and end the process.
Here, "1" is subtracted from the content stored in the HL register (HL register value - "1"), and when the carry flag is "1", the content stored in the HL register is "1". ”. Alternatively, subtract "0" from the content stored in the HL register (HL register value - "0"), and if the zero flag is "1", the content stored in the HL register is less than "1". It is determined that
Also, if "1" is subtracted from the content stored in the HL register (HL register value - "1"), and the carry flag is "0", the content stored in the HL register becomes "1". It is determined that this is the above.

<Pattern 3>
a) If the content stored in the HL register is less than "n" (1 byte value), "1" is added to the content stored in the HL register and the process ends.
b) If the content stored in the HL register is "n", the process ends.
c) If the content stored in the HL register exceeds "n", set "n" (1 byte value) in the HL register and end the process.

Here, "n" is subtracted from the content stored in the HL register (HL register value - "n"), and when the carry flag is "1", the content stored in the HL register is "n". ”.
Also, subtract "n" from the content stored in the HL register (HL register value - "n"), and if the zero flag is "1", the content stored in the HL register is "n". I judge that there is.
Furthermore, "n" is subtracted from the contents stored in the HL register (HL register value - "n"), and when the carry flag is "0" and the zero flag is "0", the HL register It can be determined that the contents stored in the file exceed "n".

The "JCPQR" instruction, which is the 17th to 20th instruction, subtracts "n" (1 byte value) from the contents of the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower, and depending on the result, e This is an instruction to move processing to (address).
This "JCPQR" instruction allows conditional branching without using the A register or the HL register, so it can be executed even in a situation where there are not enough registers.

First, the 17th instruction "JCPQR NZ, (k), n, e" reads "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower. If the result of subtraction is not "0", this is an instruction to move the processing to e (address).
This instruction calculates "target address value - 'n'", and when the zero flag is not "1", the process moves to e (address), and when the zero flag is "1", the next instruction ( Specifically, the instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction is executed.
In addition, the 18th instruction "JCPQR Z, (k), n, e" extracts "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower. If the result of subtracting is "0", this is an instruction to move the processing to e (address).
This instruction calculates "target address value - 'n'", and when the zero flag is "1", the process moves to e (address), and when the zero flag is not "1", the next instruction ( Specifically, the instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction is executed.

Furthermore, the 19th instruction "JCPQR NC, (k), n, e" reads "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower ), if no carry occurs (if the carry flag is "0"), this is an instruction to move the processing to e (address).
This instruction calculates "target address value - 'n'", and when the carry flag is "0", the process moves to e (address), and when the carry flag is "1", the next (Specifically, an instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction) is executed.
Furthermore, the 20th instruction "JCPQR C, (k), n, e" extracts "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower. This is an instruction to move processing to e (address) if a carry occurs as a result of subtracting (carry flag is "1").
Here, we calculate "target address value - 'n'", and when the carry flag is "1", the process moves to e (address), and when the carry flag is not "1", the next instruction (Specifically, an instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction) is executed.

In FIG. 170, the 21st to 24th instructions are "RCPQ" instructions.
The "RCPQ" instruction is an instruction that subtracts "n" from the target address value and terminates the process according to the subtraction result.
Therefore, the "RCPQ" instruction terminates processing if the conditions specified in the instruction are met, and, like the "JCPQR" instruction, which is the 17th to 20th instruction, the "RCPQ" instruction is an instruction that moves to e (address). It differs from

The "RCPQ" instruction is an instruction that directly compares target address values, and so, like the above-mentioned "JCPQR" instruction, it can be executed even if there is no free space in the register.
The 21st instruction, "RCPQ NZ, (k), n", is an instruction to subtract "n" (a 1-byte value) from the contents stored in the address with the contents of the Q register at the upper level and k at the lower level, and if the result is not "0", then the processing ends (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area).
Here, the "target address value - "n"" is calculated, and if the zero flag is not "1", the processing is terminated, and if the zero flag is "1", the next instruction (an instruction that is not the instruction corresponding to the return address stored in the stack area, specifically, an instruction stored in the address consecutive to the instruction in question) is executed.
Furthermore, the 22nd instruction, "RCPQ Z,(k),n", is an instruction to end processing if the result of subtracting "n" (a 1-byte value) from the contents stored in the address with the contents of the Q register at the upper address and k at the lower address is "0".
Here, the "target address value - n" is calculated, and if the zero flag is "1", the processing is terminated, and if the zero flag is not "1", the next instruction (an instruction that is not the instruction corresponding to the return address stored in the stack area, specifically, an instruction stored in the address consecutive to the instruction in question) is executed.

Furthermore, the 23rd instruction "RCPQ NC, (k), n" extracts "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower. If no carry occurs as a result of the subtraction (carry flag is "0"), an instruction is issued to end the process (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area). be.
Here, we calculate "target address value - 'n'", and if the carry flag is not "1", we end the process, and if the carry flag is "1", we execute the next instruction (stored in the stack area). Executes an instruction other than the instruction corresponding to the return address currently being stored (specifically, an instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction).
Furthermore, the 24th instruction "RCPQ C, (k), n" subtracts "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower. As a result, if the number is less than "n", the process is terminated (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area).
Here, we calculate "target address value - 'n'", and when the carry flag is "1", the process ends, and when the carry flag is not "1", the next instruction (stored in the stack area) is executed. Executes an instruction other than the instruction corresponding to the return address currently being stored (specifically, an instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction).

The 25th instruction, "LDQ (k), (k')", saves the contents of the Q register at the upper address and k' at the lower address. This is an instruction to save to a lower address.
for example,
Contents stored in upper address "Q" and lower address "k'": x
In that case,
This is an instruction to save "x" in the storage area of upper address "Q" and lower address "k".
This instruction is used when it is desired to move the value of a predetermined RWM address (copy source) to another address (copy destination) in a situation where no register is available.

The 26th "CLRHL (HL),n" sets (clears) the contents of each address to "0" from the address indicated by the HL register to "n" addresses, in other words, to "HL+n" addresses. It is a command. In this case, the content before saving the "0" is not looked at, and the "0" is saved regardless of whether the content of the address where the "0" is saved is "0" or not.

Such processing, for example, as in step S435 in FIG. 51 (eleventh embodiment), sequentially updates the contents of a series of addresses (addresses for storing data regarding the advantageous section and AT) of the RWM 53 as " Used when setting the value to 0.
It can also be used to clear RWM of a predetermined range of addresses at the start of a game.
Furthermore, although "n" in this instruction is a 1-byte value, for example, if "n" can also be applied to a 2-byte value, RWM clearing of a predetermined range of addresses when changing settings (for example, It can also be used in step S224 in FIG. 39 (eleventh embodiment).

FIG. 172 is a diagram showing addresses of the RWM 53 for storing data regarding advantageous sections and AT in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 172, the addresses for storing data regarding the advantageous section and AT, in other words, the addresses to be initialized in the RWM initialization process in step S435 of FIG. 51, are arranged consecutively. do. Then, in the process of step S435, a process of saving "0" in the storage area from address "F070(H)" to "F07B(H)" is executed. For example, in the example of FIG. 172, it is "CLRHL (F070(H)), B(H)".

Furthermore, in the instruction "CLRHL (F070(H)), B(H)", the HL register value at the beginning of the instruction is "F070(H)", but the value of the HL register after the end of this instruction is is also “F070(H)”. That is, this instruction does not change the HL register value. As a result, when the HL register value is used in the next instruction, it can be used as is.

On the other hand, in the prior art, when the reference address is stored in the HL register and data at addresses from the reference address to "n" addresses are sequentially cleared, the following processing is performed.
For example, as shown above, if the HL register value is "F070(H)" and you want to clear the data at the address up to address "B(H)", that is, up to "F07B(H)",
Save “0” at the address indicated by the HL register value (F070(H)) ↓
HL register value = HL register value + 1
Save “0” at the address indicated by the HL register value (F071(H)) ↓
HL register value = HL register value + 1
Save “0” at the address indicated by the HL register value (F072(H)) ↓
:
↓
HL register value = HL register value + 1 (F07B(H))
“0” is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (F07B(H)).

Therefore, when "0" is saved in the storage area from address "F070(H)" to "F07B(H)", the HL register value at the end of the instruction is "F07B(H)".
Therefore, in order to execute some instruction again using "F070(H)" as the reference address in the next instruction, it was necessary to save "F070(H)" in the HL register again.
On the other hand, in the instruction "CLRHL (HL), n", the initially set HL register value is maintained even after the instruction ends, so there is no need to return the HL register value to the reference address value. Therefore, it is possible to reduce program capacity and processing time.

In FIG. 170, the 27th instruction "DCPLDQ (k), 0" is an instruction to subtract "1" if the content stored in the address with the Q register at the upper level and k at the lower level is not "0".
Here, to determine whether the content stored in the address with the Q register content at the upper level and k at the lower level is "0", the "target address value - "0"" is calculated, and if the zero flag is "1", it is determined that the content stored in the target address is "0". If the content is not "0", "1" is subtracted.

The following two patterns are possible for this command.
<Pattern 1>
If the content stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower is "0", "1" is not subtracted.
<Pattern 2>
If the carry flag becomes "1" as a result of subtracting "1", "0" is stored in the target address. In this case, it means that the content before subtraction is "0".
Any of these may be adopted.

The 28th instruction "DCPWLDQ (k), 0" is an address with the contents of the Q register as the upper part and k as the lower part, and the address +1 (an address with the contents of the Q register as the upper part and "k+1" as the lower part). ) is not "0", this is an instruction to subtract "1".
This 28th instruction differs from the 27th instruction, which subtracts "1" from 1-byte data, in that it subtracts "1" from 2-byte data. Other points, such as Pattern 1 and Pattern 2 above, also apply to this instruction.

The 29th and 30th instructions indicate the "LDWQ" instruction.
The 29th instruction, "LDWQ (k), (HL+d)," is an instruction to save the contents of the address "HL+d (1 byte value)" to an address with the Q register as the upper bit and k as the lower bit, and to save the contents of the address "HL+d (1 byte value) +1" to address +1 with the Q register as the upper bit and "k" as the lower bit (the address with the Q register as the upper bit and "k+1" as the lower bit).
This command is used, for example, when taking a value from the input port 51 and storing it in a target address.

for example,
HL=51(H)
d=1
Contents of F052(H) (HL+d) = 1(H)
Contents of F053(H) (HL+d+1) = 2(H)
k=60(H)
In this case, the value "1 (H)" stored in the address "F052 (H)" is stored in the address "F060 (H)", and the value "1 (H)" stored in the address "F053 (H)" is stored in the address "F060 (H)". The value "2(H)" is stored in the address "F061(H)".

The 30th instruction "LDWQ (HL+d), (k)" is an instruction in which "k" and "HL+d" are reversed from the above 29th instruction, and the Q register is Save the contents of the address with k as the low order in the address "HL+d (1 byte value)", and save the contents of the address with the Q register as the high order and k as the low order +1 (the address with the Q register as the high order and "k+1" as the low order) ) is stored at the address "HL+d (1 byte value)+1".
This command may be used, for example, when writing data directly from a target address when outputting to the output port 52.
for example,
k=60(H)
Contents of F060(H) = 1(H)
Contents of F061(H) = 2(H)
HL=51(H)
d=1
In this case, the value "1(H)" stored in the address "F060(H)" is stored in the address "F052(H)" and the content "2(H)" of the address "F061(H)" is stored. H)” is stored at address “F053(H)”.

In FIG. 171, "cc" in the 31st to 36th instructions indicates either "NZ" or "Z".
In the 31st instruction, "JT NZ, (DE), e" is an instruction that calculates the contents of the DE register, and if it is not "0", moves the processing to e (address), and returns "0". If so, it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address next to the instruction) without moving the process to e (address).
Here, "calculating the contents of the DE register" is a calculation for determining whether the DE register value is "0". In this embodiment, "DE register value - "0"" is calculated, and if the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that the contents of the DE register are not "0".

On the other hand, "JT Z, (DE), e" is an instruction opposite to the above, which calculates the contents of the DE register, and if it is "0", in other words, if the zero flag is "1", is an instruction that transfers processing to e (address), and if the zero flag is not "1", processing does not transfer to e (address) and the next instruction (specifically, the next instruction after the This is an instruction to execute the instruction stored at the address.
Note that in the 31st instruction, "DE" is used to specify the register that stores 2-byte data, but the instruction is not limited to this, and the BC register or HL register may be specified. In this case, they will be "JT cc, (BC), e" and "JT cc, (HL), e", respectively.
This also applies to the 32nd instruction below.

The 32nd instruction differs from the 31st instruction, which moves the processing to e (address), in that the processing ends if the instruction conditions are met. The rest is the same as the 31st instruction.
In the 32nd instruction, "RT NZ, (DE), e" calculates the contents of the DE register, and if it is not "0", ends the process (the next instruction is stored in the stack area). If it is "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the next address of the instruction).
Here, "calculating the contents of the DE register" is the same as above.
Also, "RT Z, (DE), e" calculates the contents of the DE register, and if it is "0", ends the process (the next instruction is the return address stored in the stack area). If it is not "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address next to the instruction).

In the 33rd instruction, "JTQ NZ, (k), e" is an instruction that calculates the contents stored in the address with the Q register at the upper position and k at the lower position, and if the value is not "0", it transfers processing to e (address), and if the value is "0", it executes the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored in the address consecutive to the current instruction).
Here, "calculating the contents stored in the address with the Q register as the upper register and k as the lower register" means calculating "the contents of the address indicated by the target register minus "0"", and if the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that the contents stored in the address with the Q register as the upper register and k as the lower register are not "0".

On the other hand, in the 33rd instruction, "JTQ Z, (k), e" calculates the contents stored in the address with Q register as upper and k as lower, and if it is "0", The process moves to e (address), and if it is not "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address following the instruction). Here, in the same way as above, we calculate "the content of the address indicated by the target register - '0'", and if the zero flag is "1", the data is saved at the address with Q register as upper and k as lower. It is determined that the content is "0".

The 34th instruction differs from the 33rd instruction, which moves the processing to e (address), in that the processing ends if the instruction conditions are met. The rest is the same as the 33rd instruction.
In the 34th instruction, "RTQ NZ, (k)" calculates the contents stored in the address with Q register as upper and k as lower, and if it is not "0", ends the process ( The next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area), and if it is "0", the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address consecutive to the instruction) This is an instruction to execute.
Also, "RTQ Z, (k)" calculates the contents stored in the address where the Q register is the upper one and k is the lower one, and if it is "0", it ends the process (the next instruction is an instruction that starts from the return address stored in the stack area), and if it is not 0, executes the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address consecutive to the instruction) It is.
These instructions calculate "the contents of the address indicated by the target register - '0'" and terminate the process depending on the value of the zero flag.

The 35th "RTW" instruction is an instruction that determines whether the content stored in the target register is "0" or not, and terminates the process according to the determination result.
This instruction may be used, for example, to store a timer value in a register and to determine whether or not the timer value has elapsed.
In the 35th instruction, "ss" indicates either the BC register, DE register, or HL register.
For example, the instruction "RTW NZ, (BC)" calculates the contents of the BC register, and if it is not "0", ends the processing (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area). If the instruction is "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address following the instruction).

Here, "calculating the contents of the BC register" refers to a calculation to determine whether the BC register value is "0". In this embodiment, "BC register value - "0"" is calculated, and if the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that the contents of the BC register are not "0". "RTW NZ, (DE)", which calculates the contents of the DE register, and "RTW NZ, (HL)", which calculates the contents of the HL register, are similar to the above.

Further, "RTW Z, (BC)" is an instruction that calculates the contents of the BC register and ends the process if it is "0". The contents of the BC register are calculated by calculating "BC register value - "0", and if the zero flag is "1", it is determined that the contents of the BC register are "0". "RTW Z, (DE)" which calculates the contents of the DE register and "RTW Z, (HL)" which calculates the contents of the HL register are also similar to the above.

The 36th instruction, "RBITQ", is an instruction that judges whether a specific bit in the contents stored in the target address is "0" or not, and ends the process according to the judgment result. This instruction does not judge (look at) the register value directly, so it can be used even when there are no free registers.
In the 36th instruction, "RBITQ NZ, b, (k)" is an instruction to end processing (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area) if "b" (any of bits 0 to 7) of the contents stored in the address with the Q register at the upper position and k at the lower position is not "0", and to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored in the address consecutive to the current instruction) if "b" (any of bits 0 to 7) is "0".
For example, the instruction to determine whether the D1 bit is "0" is "PBITQ NZ, 1, (k)." Here, "0" is subtracted from the target bit value, and if the zero flag is "0," it is determined that the target bit value is not "0."

On the contrary, "RBITQ Z, b, (k)" is "b" (any of 0 to 7 bits) of the contents stored at the address where Q register is the upper part and k is the lower part. If it is "0", it is an instruction to end the process. In this case as well, "0" is subtracted from the target bit value, and if the zero flag is "1", it is determined that the target bit value is "0".

The 37th "BITQ" instruction determines which bit of the content stored at the target address is set (is it "1") or how many bits are set (which bit is "1"). This is a command to find out how many there are.
"BITQ A, (k)" is an instruction to check the position of the content of "A" among the contents stored at the address where Q register is upper and k is lower.
The following two patterns are mainly considered for this command.

<Pattern 1>
As pattern 1, it is checked whether a specified bit in the contents stored at the target address is "1".
For example, if the instruction is "BITQ 3, (k)", it is an instruction to check whether the D3 bit of the contents stored at the address where Q register is upper and k is lower is "1". Become.
<Pattern 2>
Further, as pattern 2, the number of bits that are "1" is searched for among the contents stored at the target address, and the number of bits that are "1" is stored in the A register.

The above-described instructions 1 to 37 are binarized (coded) and stored as instruction codes in the ROM 54. As shown in Fig. 167(A), an instruction consists of instruction information and identification information, so when an instruction is coded, it consists of an instruction information code and an identification information code.
Here, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, when an instruction is coded, the code including the most significant bit of the instruction code is defined as an instruction information code.
If the instruction code including the most significant bit is an instruction information code, the main CPU 55 can quickly determine which instruction to execute when reading the instruction code starting from the most significant bit.
The command code may be arranged, for example, as "(command information code) (identification information code) (command information code)" or as "(command information code) (identification information code)".

However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and when an instruction is encoded, the least significant bit of the instruction code may be determined to include the instruction information code.
In this case, the instruction code arrangement may be, for example, "(identification information code) (instruction information code)" or "(instruction information code) (identification information code) (instruction information code)". In this case, when reading the instruction code, by reading the code including the least significant bit first, the main CPU 55 can quickly determine which instruction should be executed for that instruction code. Become.

Although the twenty-fourth embodiment has been described above, the twenty-fourth embodiment is not limited to the above content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible for the twenty-fourth embodiment.
(1) Although the initial value of the Q register is "F0 (H)", it is not limited to this, and varies depending on the upper address value of the work area in the area used by the RWM 53. For example, when the upper address of the work area in the area used by the RWM 53 is set to "E1(H)", the initial value of the Q register becomes "E1(H)".
(2) The bits corresponding to the carry flag (C) and zero flag (Z) in the F register shown in FIG. 166(B) are illustrative and are not limited thereto. For example, the D3 bit may be a carry flag (C) and the D4 bit may be a zero flag (Z).
(3) In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the instructions are not limited to those illustrated in FIGS. 168 to 171, and many more instructions are provided for executing the program of the slot machine 10.
Furthermore, the commands illustrated in FIGS. 168 to 171 are not limited to the illustrated descriptions.
(4) In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the slot machine 10 (FIG. 1) is used as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be implemented with a pachinko gaming machine 500 (FIG. 99).

<25th embodiment>
Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The twenty-fifth embodiment is, first, an invention regarding a method for determining a winning combination (symbol combination that stops on an active line). Second, the invention relates to a method of determining the number of payouts when winning a small winning combination.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the basic configuration of the slot machine 10 is the same as that of the twenty-third embodiment. Therefore, the twenty-fifth embodiment includes FIGS. 114 to 163.
Note that in this specification (including all embodiments) and the claims, "when the reels 31 or symbols are stopped" means that when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel is operated to stop, the stop switch 42 is stopped. When the stop operation of the symbol is detected (when the level data or rising data is turned on), when the stop position of the symbol is determined based on the stop operation of the stop switch 42, after the stop position of the symbol is determined. When the symbols (reels 31) have not yet stopped (when they are about to stop, for example when decelerating), the output state to the motor 32 is set to the excitation state (for example, the 4-phase excitation state (fourth phase excitation state) for stopping the reels 31). ), the same applies in this paragraph below), when the excitation state for stopping the reels 31 is finished, when the reels 31 are actually stopped, or when the symbols are stopped and displayed ( It is assumed that the meaning (any meaning) includes everything after the excitation state for stopping the reel 31 has ended (when no excitation output is being performed to the motor 32).
Therefore, when the reels 31 or the symbols are referred to as "when they are stopped," it does not necessarily mean that the reels 31 or the symbols are actually stopped.

Also, although this partially overlaps with what was explained at the beginning of the first embodiment, to explain it again, in all of this specification and claims, "payout" refers to actually putting medals into a hopper. This includes not only paying out from 35 but also adding credits. Furthermore, if the gaming machine is a managed gaming machine that does not use medals (sometimes referred to as an enclosed gaming machine, a medalless gaming machine, or an ECO gaming machine; the same shall apply hereinafter), electronic gaming media must be provided. Also included.
Therefore, in this specification (including all embodiments) and claims, "disbursement" can also be referred to as "granting." Therefore, for example, the "payout number table" can also be referred to as the "grant number table."

173 to 175 are diagrams showing the contents of the RWM 53 in the twenty-fifth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 173 to 175 include some of the contents already explained in the other embodiments described above.
In FIGS. 173 to 175, the numerical value written in parentheses below the address indicates the number of bytes of the storage area of the address (same as in FIGS. 133 to 138).
In FIG. 173, the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) at address "F00C(H)" is a storage area for flags for determining whether or not the accessory is activated, and the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) at address "F00C(H)" is a storage area for flags for determining whether or not the accessory is activated. This corresponds to the status flag.
In the 25th embodiment, the D3 bit corresponds to 1BB and the D4 bit corresponds to RB (RBA to RBP). Similar to the eleventh embodiment, the operating state flag is updated in the game start setting process (step S272 in FIG. 139). It is also cleared in the game end check process (not shown in FIG. 148).

The number of games played (_CT_BONUS_PLAY) when the RB is activated at the address "F00F(H)" and the number of prizes won when the RB is activated (_CT_BONUS_WIN) at the address "F010(H)" are shown in FIG. 133 (25th embodiment), respectively. It has the same storage area as the original. In the 25th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 202, which will be described later, the method of updating the number of winnings during RB operation is different from other embodiments.

The stop reception information data (_PT_STOP_STS) at the address “F01E(H)” is a storage area that stores whether or not the stop switch 42 can accept the stop switch 42.
First (left) to third (right) stop switches 42 are assigned to bits D0 to D2 of the stop acceptance information data, respectively. The value is "0" before the reel 31 starts rotating and from the start of the reel 31 rotation until the speed becomes constant and the stop switch 42 can be operated. When the stop switch 42 can be operated, the value is "1". ”.
Note that "until the stop switch 42 can be operated" means that the index sensor corresponding to the reel 31 is detected and the symbol number is stored (until any reel 31 that does not detect an index) (even if there is another reel 31 whose index has been detected, the other reel 31 may be stopped), or the index sensor corresponding to all reels 31 is detected and the symbol number is stored. Examples include until the end.
Particularly in this embodiment, after storing the minimum gaming time in the RWM 53 in step S767 in FIG. 140 (23rd embodiment), "00000111 (B)" is set as the initial value in the stop reception information data. For example, when the first (left) stop switch 42 is operated, the bit corresponding to the first stop switch 42 in the stop reception information data becomes "0" and is updated to "00000110 (B)".
This stop acceptance information data may be used to mask bits other than bits D0 to D2 of input port rise data A (FIG. 133).

The payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F023(H)" and the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F024(H)" are respectively the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) shown in FIG. 35 (11th embodiment). This is the same storage area as the payout number data buffer (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) and payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL).
To explain again, when any of the minor winning combinations wins and the number of coins to be paid out is determined, the number of coins to be paid out (same value) is stored in the number of coins to be paid out data and the number of coins to be paid out data buffer, respectively. The payout number data is subtracted by "1" each time one medal is paid out (including addition of credits), and becomes "0" when the payout process is completed. On the other hand, the payout number data buffer is not subtracted even if the payout process is executed, and the initial value is maintained even after the payout process. The payout number data buffer is updated (overwritten) at the end of the next game. The payout number is updated using the value of this payout number data buffer, and the above-mentioned instruction included accessory ratio (cumulative), continuous accessory ratio (6000 games), accessory ratio (6000 games), continuous accessory ratio (cumulative total), accessory ratio (cumulative total) can be calculated.

The reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address "F0AD(H)" is a storage area of a flag for determining whether or not stopping of the reel 31 has been accepted. When the reel stop reception has not been completed, the value becomes "1", and when the reel stop reception has been completed, the value becomes "0". Therefore, when the stoppage of any reel 31 is not accepted while the reels 31 are rotating, the value is "00000111(B)", and for example, when the stoppage of the first (left) reel 31 is received, the value is "00000110(B)". becomes.

The stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) at the address "F0AF(H)" is a storage area that stores the reel number during control or when a stop is accepted. It is "0" when the reel 31 is not being controlled or when stopping is not accepted, for example, when the third stop switch 42 is operated and the stopping of the third reel 31 is accepted, or when the stopping of the third reel 31 is being controlled. becomes "00000011(B)" (3(D)).

The control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) at address "F0B4(H)" is a storage area that stores the symbol number stopped at the reference position. Here, the reference position in the twenty-fifth embodiment is "lower stage". Furthermore, the line from "lower left row" to "lower middle row" to "lower right row" is referred to as a "reference line" in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
On the other hand, in FIGS. 135 to 137, the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) indicates the symbol number of the symbol stopped in the middle row.
Therefore,
"Control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) = "#th reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC)" - "1"
The relationship is as follows.
Specifically, when the first (left) reel 31 is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 115(A), the first reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL1_STPPIC) is "13(D)( Red 7)", and the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) becomes "12 (D) (Bell B)".

In Figures 174 and 175, the stopping pattern data (1st group to 9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) at addresses "F0B7 (H)" to "F0BF (H)" is a memory area that stores data (stopping pattern data) for determining the pattern combination that stops on an active line.
In the 25th embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 121,
1BB
RB (RBA-RBP)
Replay (Replay 01 to Replay 10)
Small role (small role 01 to small role 34)
is provided.
The group of symbols related to the symbol combinations of winning combinations is defined as follows:
Group 1: RBA to RBH operation symbols Group 2: RBI to RBP operation symbols Group 3: 1BB operation symbols and Replay 01 to Replay 07 operation symbols Group 4: Replay 08 to Replay 10 operation symbols Group 5: Small role 01 to small role 08 operation symbols Group 6: Small role 09 to small role 16 operation symbols Group 7: Small role 17 to small role 24 operation symbols Group 8: Small role 25 to small role 32 operation symbols Group 9: Small role 33 and small role 34 operation symbols In addition, although "operation symbols" are written in Figures 174 and 175, "operation symbols" have the same meaning as "symbol combination". Hereinafter, they will be referred to as "symbol combination" or "operation symbols" as necessary. In addition, the symbol combination that has been determined to stop or the symbol combination that is actually stopped may be referred to as "stop symbol combination".

The stop symbol data (first group) and the stop symbol data (second group) correspond to RBA to RBP.
For example, when all the reels 31 are stopped, when the stopped symbol data (first group) is "00000000 (B)", it means that the symbol combinations RBA to RBH are not stopped on the active line. On the other hand, when all the reels 31 are stopped, when the stopped symbol data (first group) is "00000010 (B)", it means that the RBB symbol combination is stopped on the active line.
Further, in the stop symbol data (third group), the D0 bit corresponds to 1BB, and the D1 to D7 bits correspond to Replay 01 to Replay 07, respectively.

Furthermore, in the stop symbol data (fourth group), bits D0 to D2 correspond to replay 08 to replay 10, respectively. Bits D4 to D7 are unused.
Furthermore, bits corresponding to small prizes 01 to 34 are assigned to each bit of the stop symbol data (5th group) to the stop symbol data (9th group). Bits D2 to D7 of the stop symbol data (9th group) are unused.
Then, combinations with no payout (1BB, RB, and replay) are assigned to the stopping pattern data (first group) through the stopping pattern data (fourth group), and minor combinations with payouts are assigned to the stopping pattern data (fifth group) through the stopping pattern data (ninth group).
In this way, by dividing the memory area for the stopping pattern data, when any of the pattern combinations for a winning combination that has a payout stops on a winning line, it is possible to simplify the determination of the number of coins to be paid out, and it is also possible to simplify the counting of the number of times a small combination is won when a special combination (RB) is activated (details will be described later).
In addition, in the stopping pattern data (5th group) to the stopping pattern data (9th group) which have a payout, the D0 to D7 bits (small prize 01 to small prize 08) of the stopping pattern data (5th group) and the D0 to D3 bits (small prize 09 to small prize 12) of the stopping pattern data (6th group) correspond to a payout of 15 coins.
Furthermore, the D4 to D7 bits (small prize 13 to small prize 16) of the stopping pattern data (sixth group) and the D0 to D7 bits (small prize 17 to small prize 24) of the stopping pattern data (seventh group) correspond to the payout of three coins.
Furthermore, the D0 to D7 bits (small prize 25 to small prize 32) of the stopping pattern data (8th group) and the D0 to D1 bits (small prize 33 to small prize 34) of the stopping pattern data (9th group) correspond to the payout of one coin.

In the 25th embodiment, the operation of the start switch 41 triggers the lottery process (step S761 in FIG. 140), and after the device number for the condition of the reel and the device number for the winning and replay conditions are saved based on the winning number, the initial value is set to the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC). Here, the bits corresponding to all the operation symbols in the stop symbol data (first group) to the stop symbol data (ninth group) are set to "1".
in particular,
Stop symbol data (first group): 11111111 (B)
Stop pattern data (second group): 11111111 (B)
Stop pattern data (third group): 11111111 (B)
Stop pattern data (4th group): 00000111 (B)
Stop pattern data (5th group): 11111111 (B)
Stop pattern data (6th group): 11111111 (B)
Stop pattern data (7th group): 11111111 (B)
Stop pattern data (8th group): 11111111 (B)
Stop pattern data (9th group): 00000011 (B)
Set to.

Then, after the stop position of the reel 31 is determined (this may be after the reel 31 actually stops), the bit corresponding to the winning that has no longer a possibility of stopping on the active line is updated to "0". . For example, when the left reel 31 stops and the symbol that stops on the active line is "Replay", as shown in FIG. 116, there is a possibility that all RB (RBA to RBP) symbol combinations will stop on the active line. It disappears. In this case, when the left reel 31 stops and the symbol that stops on the active line is "Replay",
Stop symbol data (1st group): 00000000 (B)
Stop symbol data (2nd group): 00000000 (B)
will be updated to.

For example, when the middle reel 31 stops and the symbol that stops on the active line is "Red 7", the symbol combinations RBA to RBH and RBM to RBP of RB are valid, as shown in FIG. Eliminates the possibility of stopping in the line. On the other hand, among RB, symbol combinations RBI to RBL have the possibility of stopping on the active line. Therefore, when the middle reel 31 stops in this case,
Stop symbol data (1st group): 00000000 (B)
Stop symbol data (2nd group): 00001111 (B)
will be updated to.

In this way, after the stop position of each reel 31 is determined, the stop symbol data (first group) to stop symbol data (ninth group) are updated, and after the stop position of all reels 31 is determined, the stop symbol data (first group) to stop symbol data (ninth group) are updated. When all of the symbol data (first group) to stop symbol data (ninth group) are "00000000 (B)", the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination in the game does not stop on the active line (the winning combination is It is determined that the applicant has not won a prize.
On the other hand, when any bit of the stop symbol data (first group) to stop symbol data (ninth group) is "1", the symbol combination of the combination corresponding to the bit stops on the active line. It is determined that
Furthermore, when any bit of the data from the stop symbol data (first group) to stop symbol data (fourth group) is "1", it is determined that there is no medal payout in the game.
On the other hand, if any bit of the data from the stopped symbol data (fifth group) to the stopped symbol data (ninth group) is "1", it is determined that medals will be paid out in the game. .

Here, in this embodiment,
Small win 01 to small win 12: 15 coins paid out Small win 13 to small win 24: 3 coins paid out Small win 25 to small win 34: 1 coin paid out
Therefore, when any bit of the stopping symbol data (fifth group) or any bit D0 to D3 of the stopping symbol data (sixth group) is "1", it is determined that 15 coins will be paid out.
In addition, when any of the D4 to D7 bits of the stopping symbol data (sixth group) or the D0 to D7 bits of the stopping symbol data (seventh group) is "1", it is determined that three coins will be paid out.
Furthermore, when any one of the D0 to D7 bits of the stopping symbol data (8th group) or the D0 to D1 bits of the stopping symbol data (9th group) is "1", it is determined that one coin will be paid out.

176 to 179 are diagrams showing definition data in the 25th embodiment. In the definition data, "EQU" is an assembler command that defines a symbol as having an integer value, and means "equal."
FIG. 176 shows reel symbol definitions and symbol definitions.
The reel symbol definition shows the relationship between the symbols and the numerical values for the 10 types of symbols in the 25th embodiment. For example, the "blue BAR" symbol is represented by "@ZGR_01" and by the numerical value "0".
The symbol definition also shows the relationship between each symbol of group 1 to group 9 and the numerical value. For example, "@_PIC1" is a symbol that indicates group 1. As described above, group 1 is made up of RBA to RBH, and each bit (D0 to D7) corresponds to RBA to RBH, respectively. And the D0 bit of the numerical value of group 1 is the bit that corresponds to RBA.

FIGS. 177 to 179 show definition data of each operating symbol among the symbol group 1 to symbol group 9. Each bit of each symbol group matches the bit corresponding to each operating symbol of the stop symbol data (first group) to stop symbol data (ninth group).
As mentioned above, for example, the D0 bit of the stop symbol data (first group) is a bit corresponding to the RBA operating symbol, but the numerical value of the symbol "@SRB_A" indicating the RBA operating symbol among the first symbol group is It is defined as "00000001(B)" where the D0 bit is "1". Similarly, the numerical value corresponding to the RBB operating symbol "@SRB_B" is set to "00000010 (B)" where the D1 bit is "1", and the numerical value corresponding to the RBH operating symbol "@SRB_H" is , the D7 bit is set to "1", which is "10000000 (B)".

In the definition data, "@SRB" is a symbol indicating the shift RB (SRB) operating pattern, and essentially indicates the RBA operating pattern to the RBP operating pattern.
For example, "@SRB_A_H" indicates the RBA to RBH operating symbols. The numerical value is "11111111 (B)", which is equivalent to all bits of the stop symbol data (first group) being "1".
Furthermore, "@1BB" is a symbol that refers to the 1BB operation pattern.
Furthermore, "@REP" is a symbol that indicates a replay activation symbol. For example, "@REP_01" is a symbol that indicates a replay 01 activation symbol.
In addition, in FIG. 178, "@WIN" is a symbol that indicates a small win operation pattern. For example, "@WIN_01" is a symbol that indicates a small win 01 operation pattern.
In this manner, the symbols and numerical values of each operating symbol, etc. of each symbol group are defined.

FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an overview of various tables used in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
Note that all the tables described below are stored at predetermined addresses in the ROM 54.
The reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH) shown in FIG. 180(A) specifies the start address (offset value) of the target table for each reel 31 when searching for a stop symbol on each reel 31. This is a table for
For example, when searching for a stopped symbol on the first reel 31, the value (offset value) stored at the address "1200 (H)" is referred to. Since the offset value is "3 (H)", the offset value "3 (H)" is added to the address "1200 (H)" indicating the first reel 31 of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH). The address “1203(H)” indicated by the value is specified as the first address of the first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1). As shown in FIG. 180(B), the first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) is stored at addresses "1203(H)" to "120C(H)" (details will be described later), and the first address is The address is "1203(H)".

Furthermore, when searching for the stopped symbols on the second reel 31, the value (offset value) stored in the address "1201(H)" is referenced. Since the offset value is "39(H)", the address "123A(H)" indicated by the value obtained by adding the offset value "39(H)" to the address "1201(H)" indicating the second reel 31 in the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH) is specified as the top address of the second reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) (FIG. 180(B)).
Similarly, when searching for the stopped symbol on the third reel 31, the value (offset value) stored in the address "1203(H)" is referenced. Since the offset value is "8D(H)", the address "128F(H)" indicated by the value obtained by adding the offset value "8D(H)" to the address "1202(H)" indicating the third reel 31 in the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH) is specified as the top address of the third reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3) (FIG. 180(B)).

As described above, the three addresses of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH) store offset values for specifying the leading addresses of the symbol arrangement tables of the first to third reels 31, respectively.
Then, a first reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_1) corresponding to the first reel 31, a second reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_2) corresponding to the second reel 31, and a third reel symbol array table corresponding to the third reel 31. (TBL_PICARG_3) is provided.
These #th reel symbol arrangement tables (TBL_PICARG_#) are tables used when specifying the symbol that stops on the active line from the symbol number that stops at the reference position (details will be described later).

Further, as shown in FIG. 180(B), a # reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_#) is provided at an address following the # reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_#).
Each data of the #th reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_#) is composed of reel symbol data information, reel symbol data information + table offset, and symbol data. Details of these data will be described later.

FIG. 181 is a diagram showing the first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1). In FIG. 181, the reel symbol definition shown in FIG. 176 is also shown.
Here, the data stored in each address of the # reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_#) is referred to as "symbol data." This "design data" is data that allows identification of the type of design.
The first reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_1), the second reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_2) and the third reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_3), which will be described later, are all tables consisting of "10" addresses, and "10" Symbols 0 to 19 (20 symbols) are specified by address. In other words, two pieces of symbol data are specified with one address.

In FIG. 181, "*16" indicates the upper 4 bits. For example, in the address "1203 (H)", the upper 4 bits are "@ZGR_08" (2nd symbol, "Cherry") and the lower 4 bits are "@ZGR_02" (3rd symbol, "Black BAR"). Show that something is true.
As shown in FIG. 114, on the left reel 31, the second symbol is "Cherry" and the third symbol is "Black BAR".
According to the definition data, "@ZGR_08" is "7(H)", that is, "0111(B)". Further, "@ZGR_02" is "1(H)", that is, "0001(B)".
Therefore, in the address "1203(H)", the upper 4 bits are "0111(B)" and the lower 4 bits are "0001(B)", so in reality, "0111/0001(B)" is (The "/" indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits.)

Here, for example, when the left (first) reel 31 stops, if the symbol that stops at the reference position (bottom row) is number 1 “watermelon,” the symbol that stops on the pay line will be number 3 “black BAR” (see Figures 114 and 115).
In this case, when the number 1 "watermelon" stops at the reference position (lower row), the program (flowchart) described later is configured to identify the value corresponding to the pattern that will stop on the active line as the value of the lowest 4 bits of address "1203 (H)"("@ZGR_02", i.e., "black BAR").
Furthermore, for example, when the number 2 "Cherry" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the pattern that stops on the active line is specified to be the value of the upper 4 bits of address "1204 (H)", i.e., "@ZGR_05" (Bell A).

As shown in FIG. 181, in this embodiment, 20 symbol data are stored in 10 addresses. That is, in one address, the upper 4 bits specify 1 symbol data, and the lower 4 bits specify 1 symbol data. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the ROM 54 that stores symbol data. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 181, there are 10 types of symbols (@ZGR_01 to @ZGR_10), which is less than 16 types, so "0000(B)" to "1010(B)" It can be expressed as a range. Therefore, since it is possible to store the information in the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits, the capacity of the ROM 54 can be reduced.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and 20 pieces of symbol data may be stored in 20 addresses. In this case, one symbol data is stored per one address. This example is shown in FIG. 228 (Example 1 of the 27th embodiment), which will be described later.

Figures 182 to 184 are diagrams showing the first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1). In Figures 182 to 184, and Figures 186 to 188 and 190 to 192 described later, "; //" means that there is no address storing the value. For example, the address "120F (H)" is an address storing a value corresponding to the "Blue BAR" of the symbol 1 group, but there is no address storing values corresponding to the "Black BAR" to "Special Chart Down" of the symbol 1 group, and the next address "1210 (H)" is an address storing the value of the reel symbol data information of the symbol 2 group. In other words, since the drawings are for ease of explanation, not all of the data shown in the drawings is stored in the ROM 54 (data and definition data written in "; //" are not stored in the ROM 54).

Note that an address is also provided for the content of ";//", and when data is stored, "0" is stored. In that case, reel symbol data information and table offset data (for example, "120D(H)" and "120E(H)"), which will be described later, become unnecessary. Specifically, symbol combination data corresponding to each symbol (for specifying the symbol combination having each symbol) is stored in a predetermined order. For example, in the first group of symbols, if the symbol combination data includes "Blue BAR" on the left reel 31, the address is "XXX0(H)", and if the symbol combination data includes "Black BAR" on the left reel 31, the address is "XXX1". (H)", ..., if the symbol combination data includes "Top of special pattern" on the left reel 31, the address is "XXX8(H)", and if the symbol combination data includes "Top of special pattern" on the left reel 31, For example, symbol combination data can be stored for each symbol group at address intervals corresponding to the number of symbols (10 addresses in this example), such as address "XXX9(H)". However, in this example, even if the data is "0", it will be stored in the ROM 54, so although the capacity of the ROM 54 will increase, it will be easier to re-verify the data stored in the ROM 54. become.

Here, in each address of the # reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_#), for example, taking symbol group 1 in the first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) in FIG. 182, the first address "120D (H) ” and the data stored in the D7 and D6 bits of “120E(H)” are referred to as “reel symbol data information”.
Furthermore, the data stored in bits D5 to D0 of address "120E(H)" is referred to as "table offset".
Furthermore, the data stored at address "120F(H)" is referred to as "symbol combination data."

First, bits D0 to D7 of address "120D(H)" and bits D6 and D7 of the next address "120E(H)" correspond to reel symbol data information and correspond to 10 types of symbols.
in particular,
(1) Reel symbol data information for address “120D (H)” D7: Blue BAR
D6: Black BAR
D5: Red 7
D4: Replay D3: Bell A
D2: Bell B
D1: Watermelon D0: Cherry (2) Reel symbol data information of address "120E (H)" D7: Special figure top D6: Special figure bottom.

This means that the symbol data corresponding to the bit "1" among the reel symbol data information is stored at the address following the addresses "120D(H)" and "120E(H)". For example, among the reel symbol data information stored in addresses "120D(H)" and "120E(H)", only the D7 bit of the reel symbol data information stored in address "120D(H)" is "1". ”. Therefore, the symbol combination data ("Blue BAR" data) regarding the D7 bit of the reel symbol data information of the address "120D(H)" is stored at the next address "120F(H)".

Furthermore, the lower 6 bits (D0 to D5) of the data at address "120E(H)" are the table offset value.
For example, the table offset value stored at address "120E(H)" is "3(H)". In this embodiment, the reel symbol data information and the table offset value are expressed separately in order to make it easier to understand the reel symbol data information and the table offset value. For example, in the data of the address "120E(H)", the reel symbol data information is "00000000(B)" and the table offset value is "03(H)". The address "120E(H)" actually stores data obtained by ORing the reel symbol data information and the table offset value, that is, "00000011(H)".

The above reel symbol data information and reel symbol data information + table offset are the same for symbol group 2 to symbol group 9. Furthermore, the same is true for each of symbol group 1 to symbol group 9 in the second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) (Figures 186 to 188) and the third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) (Figures 190 to 192).

Here, symbol group 1 of the first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) shown in FIG. 182 will be explained in more detail.
The D0 to D7 bits of the first address "120D(H)" and the D6 and D7 bits of the next address (120E(H)) indicate which symbols on the first (left) reel 31 are the symbol combinations of symbol group 1. Indicates whether the pattern is part of a .
The symbol combinations of symbol group 1 are:
RBA: "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Black BAR"
RBB: "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Red 7"
RBC: "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Watermelon"
RBD: "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Special map top"
RBE: "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Black BAR"
RBF: "Blue BAR" - "Black BAR" - "Red 7"
RBG: "Blue BAR" - "Black BAR" - "Watermelon"
RBH: "Blue BAR" - "Black BAR" - "Tokuzu Top"
(See Figure 116).

Therefore, in the symbol combinations of symbol group 1, all the symbols on the first (left) reel 31 are "blue BAR".
From this, the D7 bit of address "120D(H)" corresponding to "Blue BAR" is "1", and the other D6 to D0 bits are "0".
Similarly, bits D7 and D6 of address "120E(H)" are "0".
Further, the table offset value indicated by the lower 6 bits of the address "120E(H)" indicates the numerical value up to the address of the next symbol group (in this example, symbol group 2). The table offset value stored at the address "120E(H)" is "3(H)", but the address "1211(H)" which is the addition of "3(H)" to the address "120E(H)" is , this is the address where the table offset of the second group of symbols is stored.
Similarly, the address "1211(H)" stores an offset value "3(H)" up to the address where the table offset of the third group of symbols is stored. That is, the address "1211 (H)" + "3 (H)" = "1214 (H)" (address storing the table offset of the 3rd group of symbols).
Furthermore, in the same way, the offset value "8 (H)" to the address where the table offset of the 4th symbol group is stored is stored in the address "1214 (H)". That is, the address "1214 (H)" + "8 (H)" = "121C (H)" (address storing the table offset of the 4th group of symbols) (description will be omitted below).

In this way, the first two addresses are
First address: Reel symbol data information for "Blue BAR" to "Cherry" Next address: Reel symbol data information for "Special symbol top" and "Special symbol bottom" and table offset of the next symbol group are stored. The offset value to the address is memorized.
In this way, the "next address" stores two completely different data: the reel symbol data information and the offset value to the address where the table offset of the next symbol group is stored. Control processing is not hindered because the corresponding bits of the data are different. If such a storage method is adopted, the capacity of the ROM 54 can be reduced.
If the number of symbols is 8 or less, the reel symbol data information is stored in the "first address" and the offset value to the address where the table offset of the next symbol group is stored is stored in the "next address". You may. Also, if the number of symbols is 9 or more, the reel symbol data information is stored at the "first address", the reel symbol data information is also stored at the "next address", and the next address is stored at the "next address". It is possible to adopt various patterns, such as storing the offset value to the address where the table offset of the symbol group is stored (in this case, there are three addresses in total).

Furthermore, the next address "120F (H)" stores symbol combination data for specifying what symbol combination has the "Blue BAR" symbol on the first (left) reel 31. There is.
As described above, in the eight symbol combinations of symbol group 1, the symbols on the first (left) reel 31 are all "blue BAR". Therefore, "@SRB_A_H" (RBA to RBH) indicating the type of winning in which the first (left) reel 31 is "Blue BAR" is stored in the address "120F(H)".
In addition, as shown in FIG. 177, "@SRB_A_H" means the operating symbols related to all of the symbol group 1, and the value corresponding to this symbol is "11111111 (B)". Therefore, in reality, "11111111(B)" is stored in address "120F(H)".

Of the first reel symbol combination table, the second group of symbols is also defined in the same way as the first group of symbols.
Next, the third group of symbols in the first reel symbol combination table will be explained.
First, bits D7 to D0 of address “1213(H)” and bits D7 and D6 of address “1214(H)” are
(1) Reel symbol data information of address “1213 (H)” D7: “1” (Blue BAR)
D6: "1" (black BAR)
D5: “0” (red 7)
D4: "1" (replay)
D3: "1" (Bell A)
D2: "0" (Bell B)
D1: "1" (watermelon)
D0: “0” (cherry)
(2) Reel symbol data information of address “1214 (H)” D7: “1” (on special map)
D6: "0" (lower special map)
It becomes.
Therefore, among the three symbol groups (1BB or the symbol combinations of Replay 01 to Replay 07), the symbols on the first (left) reel 31 are "Blue BAR,""BlackBAR,""Replay," and "Bell A." , "watermelon", or "on the special map".

in fact,
1BB: "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR"
Replay 01: "Replay" - "Blue BAR/Black BAR/Red 7/Special Map Top" - "Bell A"
Replay 02: "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay"
Replay 03: "Bell A" - "Red 7/Cherry" - "Replay/Bell B"
Replay 04: "Black BAR" - "Red 7/Cherry" - "Replay/Bell B"
Replay 05: “Special map top” – “Replay” – “Bell A”
Replay 06: "Watermelon" - "Replay/Watermelon" - "Red 7/Watermelon/Special Map Top/Black BAR"
Replay 07: "Replay" - "Replay" - "Bell A"
(See FIGS. 116 and 117).

Of the reel symbol data information, symbol combination data corresponding to the bit (symbol) that is "1" is stored at addresses after address "1215 (H)".
in particular,
(1) Reel symbol data information of address “1213 (H)” D7: “1” (Blue BAR) → Address “1215 (H)”
D6: "1" (black BAR) → Address "1216 (H)"
D5: "0" (red 7) → No address (no symbol combination data)
D4: "1" (Replay) → Address "1217 (H)"
D3: "1" (Bell A) → Address "1218 (H)"
D2: "0" (Bell B) → No address (No symbol combination data)
D1: "1" (watermelon) → address "1219 (H)"
D0: "0" (cherry) → No address (no symbol combination data)
(2) Reel symbol data information of address “1214 (H)” D7: “1” (on special map) → address “121A (H)”
D6: "0" (lower special pattern) → No address (no pattern combination data)
It becomes.

First, symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Blue BAR" is stored at address "1215(H)". In the 3rd symbol group, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Blue BAR" is 1BB as described above, so "@1BB" is stored in the address "1215 (H)". has been done. “@1BB” is “00000001(B)” as shown in FIG. 177, and the value is stored at address “1215(H)”.
Next, symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "black BAR" is stored at address "1216 (H)". In the symbol group 3, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Black BAR" is Replay 04 as described above, so "@REP_04" is in the address "1216 (H)". remembered. “@REP_04” is “00010000(B)” as shown in FIG. 177, and the value is stored at address “1216(H)”.

In addition, since there is no symbol combination in the symbol group 3 in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Red 7", there is no symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Red 7". There is no address where symbol combination data for identification is stored.
At the next address "1217(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "Replay" is stored. In the symbol group 3, the symbol combinations in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Replay" are Replay 01, Replay 02, and Replay 07 as described above, so the address "1217 (H)" is , "@REP_01 OR @REP_02 OR @REP_07" are stored. "@REP_01 OR @REP_02 OR @REP_07" is "00000010(B)" OR "00000100(B)" OR "10000000(B)" as shown in Figure 177, so the address is "1217(H)" “10000110(B)” is stored in .

At the next address "1218 (H)", symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Bell A" is stored. In the symbol group 3, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Bell A" is Replay 03 as described above, so "@REP_03" is in the address "1218 (H)". remembered. “@REP_03” is “00001000(B)” as shown in FIG. 177, and the value is stored at address “1218(H)”.
In addition, since there is no symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Bell B" in the symbol group 3, there is no symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Bell B". There is no address where symbol combination data for identification is stored.

At the next address "1219(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "Watermelon" is stored. In the 3rd symbol group, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Watermelon" is Replay 06 as described above, so "@REP_06" is stored in the address "1219 (H)". has been done. As shown in FIG. 177, "@REP_06" is "01000000 (B)", so that value is stored in the address "1219 (H)".

Furthermore, since there is no symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "cherry" in the third symbol group, a symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "cherry" is specified. There is no address where symbol combination data for is stored.
At the next address "121A(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "Top" is stored. In the symbol group 3, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Top" is Replay 05 as described above, so the address "121A (H)" is "@REP_05". is memorized. “@REP_05” is “00100000(B)” as shown in FIG. 177, and the value is stored at address “121A(H)”.

In addition, since there is no symbol combination in the 3rd symbol group where the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Special Figure Bottom", there is no symbol combination where the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Cherry". There is no address where symbol combination data for identification is stored.
As described above, reel symbol data information, reel symbol data information + table offset, and symbol combination data are stored for other symbol groups as well.
The first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) is provided with addresses "120D(H)" to "1239(H)" (FIGS. 180, 182 to 184).

FIG. 185 is a diagram showing the second reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2), and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 181 of the first reel 31. FIG. 185 also shows the reel symbol definition shown in FIG. 176.
For example, when the second (middle) reel 31 stops, if the symbol that stops at the reference position (lower row) is the number 1 "Cherry", the symbol that stops on the active line is the number 2 "Watermelon" (Fig. 114 and FIG. 115).
In this case, when the number 1 "cherry" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the symbol that stops on the active line is determined by the program (flowchart) described later at the address "123A (H)". It is configured to be specified as the value of the lower 4 bits. The lower 4 bits of the address "123A(H)" correspond to "@ZGR_07", that is, "watermelon" (see FIG. 114).
Also, when the number 2 "Watermelon" stops at the standard position (lower row), the value corresponding to the symbol that stops on the active line is identified as the value of the upper 4 bits of the address "123B (H)". It is configured to The upper 4 bits of address "123B(H)" correspond to "@ZGR_02", that is, "black BAR".

186 to 188 are diagrams showing the second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2), and correspond to FIGS. 182 to 184 for the first reel 31. FIG.
The second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) will be explained using the symbol group 4 in FIG. 187 as an example.
The D0 to D7 bits of the first address “1255(H)” and the D6 and D7 bits of the next address “1256(H)” indicate which symbols on the second (center) reel 31 make up the symbol combination of group 4.
The pattern combinations for group 4 are as follows:
Replay 08: "Special Chart" - "Replay" - "Replay"
Replay 09: "Bell A" - "Red 7/Cherry" - "Blue BAR/Special Chart Bottom"
Replay 10: "Replay" - "Red 7/Cherry" - "Bell B"
(See FIG. 117).

Therefore, in the symbol combinations of the 4 symbol groups, the symbols on the second (middle) reel 31 are "Replay", "Red 7", or "Cherry".
From this, of the reel symbol data information of address "1255 (H)", the D5 bit corresponding to "Red 7", the D4 bit corresponding to "Replay", and the D0 bit corresponding to "Cherry" are "1". The other bits of the reel symbol data information are "0".
Also, since the address "125B(H)" where the table offset of the symbol group 5 is stored is five places ahead from the address "1256(H)" where the table offset of the symbol group 4 is stored, the address "1256(H)" is 5 places ahead. The table offset value stored in "(H)" is "5(H)".

In the 4th symbol group, there is no symbol combination in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "Blue BAR" or "Black BAR", so the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "Blue BAR" or "Black BAR". There is no address where symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination "Black BAR" is stored.
The first address “1257 (H)” following address “1255 (H)” and address “1256 (H)” specifies a symbol combination in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is “Red 7”. The symbol combination data for is stored. In the symbol group 4, the symbol combinations in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "Red 7" are Replay 09 and Replay 10, so the address "1257 (H)" is "@REP_09 OR @REP_10". ' is memorized. As shown in Figure 178, "@REP_09" is "00000010(B)" and "@REP_10" is "00000100(B)", so the address "1257(H)" is "00000110(B)". ' is memorized.

At the next address "1258 (H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "Replay" is stored. In the symbol group 4, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "Replay" is Replay 08, so "@REP_08" is stored in the address "1258 (H)". As shown in FIG. 178, since "@REP_08" is "00000001(B)", that value is stored at address "1258(H)".
Next, since there is no symbol combination in the symbol group 4 in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "Bell A", "Bell B", or "Watermelon", the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is There is no address where symbol combination data for specifying symbol combinations such as "Bell A", "Bell B", or "Watermelon" is stored.

At the next address "1259 (H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "cherry" is stored. In the symbol group 4, the symbol combinations in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "Cherry" are Replay 09 and Replay 10, so the address "1259 (H)" is "@REP_09 OR @REP_10". is memorized. As shown in Figure 178, "@REP_09" is "00000010(B)" and "@REP_10" is "00000100(B)", so the address "1259(H)" is "00000110(B)". ' is memorized.

Next, since there is no symbol combination in the 4th symbol group in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "Top of the special symbol", the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "Top of the special symbol". There is no address where symbol combination data for specifying symbol combinations is stored.
Furthermore, since there is no "special pattern bottom" on the second (middle) reel 31 (see FIG. 114), a symbol combination in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "special pattern bottom" is specified. There is no address where symbol combination data for is stored.
As described above, the second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) is composed of addresses "1244(H)" to "128E(H)" (FIG. 180, FIG. 186 to FIG. 188).

FIG. 189 is a diagram showing the third reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3), and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 181 of the first reel 31. FIG. 189 also shows the definition data of the reel symbols shown in FIG. 176.
For example, when the right (third) reel 31 stops, if the symbol that stops at the reference position (lower row) is the number 1 "Replay", the symbol that stops on the active line also becomes the number 1 "Replay" ( (See FIGS. 114 and 115).
In this case, when the number 1 "Replay" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the symbol that stops on the active line is determined by the program (flowchart) described later at the address "128F (H)". It is configured to be specified as the value of the lower 4 bits. The lower 4 bits of address "128F(H)" correspond to "@ZGR_04", that is, "replay" (see FIG. 114).
Also, when the No. 2 "Blue BAR" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the symbol that stops on the active line is determined to be the value of the upper 4 bits of the address "1290 (H)". is configured to be The upper 4 bits of address "1290(H)" correspond to "@ZGR_01", that is, "blue BAR".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 181, FIG. 185, and FIG. 189, in the # reel symbol arrangement table, the symbol numbers specified by the start addresses are different.
Specifically, at the first address "1203(H)" of the first reel symbol arrangement table, symbol data is stored starting from the second symbol. This is because when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol number of the symbol on the active line on the left reel 31 is number 2.
Further, at the start address "123A(H)" of the second reel symbol arrangement table, symbol data is stored starting from the number 1 symbol. This is because when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol number of the symbol on the active line on the middle reel 31 is number 1.
Furthermore, at the start address "128F(H)" of the third reel symbol arrangement table, symbol data is stored starting from symbol No. 0. This is because when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol number of the symbol on the active line on the right reel 31 is number 0.

In this way, by shifting the symbol data stored in the symbol arrangement table (taking into account the difference) and storing it as necessary, corrections can be made for each acquired control symbol number (BF_PICTURE). There is no need to add or subtract differences. Therefore, by simple calculation based on the symbol number of the symbol stopped at the reference position (lower row), it becomes possible to obtain the symbol data on the active line, thereby simplifying the program processing and reducing the capacity of the ROM 54. Can be done.
Further, the order of symbol data stored in the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31 is determined according to the reference line and the active line. Note that the reference line (reference position) and effective line can be freely determined. However, it is preferable that the reference line is a horizontal line.
Here, the effective line in this embodiment is "upper left row"-"middle middle row"-"lower right row" as shown in FIG. 115. Further, the reference line is "lower left row" - "lower middle row" - "lower right row". Therefore, in the first reel symbol arrangement table, the difference is "+2", in the second reel symbol arrangement table, the difference is "+1", and in the third reel symbol arrangement table, the difference is "0". In other words, the difference refers to the amount of deviation (number of stages) between the position of the effective line and the reference position.
Therefore, for example, if the active line is "left middle row" - "middle middle row" - "right middle row", the difference between the symbol arrangement tables of each reel 31 will be "+1". In this case, in the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31, symbol data is stored in order starting from the number 1 symbol. Also, for example, when the reference line is the middle line ("middle left" - "middle middle" - "middle right") and the effective line is "middle left" - "middle middle" - "middle right", , the differences in the symbol arrangement tables of each reel 31 are all "0" (there is no difference). In this case, the symbol data of each reel 31 is stored in the symbol arrangement table in order starting from the symbol number 0.
The above also applies to FIG. 228 (Example 1 of the 27th embodiment), which will be described later.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 229 (Example 2 of the 27th Embodiment), which will be described later, in each symbol arrangement table of the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31, the symbol data of symbol number "0" is There is also a method in which the difference data corresponding to each reel 31 is stored in order. When acquiring the symbol data, the symbol data of the symbol on the active line is acquired by adding or subtracting the difference data of the reel 31 to the symbol number of the symbol stopped at the reference position. In this case, even if there is a change in the effective line, it is only necessary to change the difference data, so the number of development steps can be reduced.

In FIG. 229 (Example 2 of the 27th embodiment), the difference data corresponds to the above-mentioned "difference" value. That is, in the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31, the difference data of the left reel 31 is "+2", the difference data of the middle reel 31 is "+1", and the difference data of the right reel 31 is "0".
Therefore, similarly to the above, when the reference line is "lower left" - "lower middle" - "lower right" and the effective line is, for example, "middle left" - "middle middle" - "middle right", The difference data of the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31 is "+1". Also, when the reference line is, for example, the middle line ("middle left" - "middle middle" - "middle right") and the effective line is, for example, "middle left" - "middle middle" - "middle right". In this case, the difference data of the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31 is "0". In this case, there is no need to provide differential data, and there is no need to add or subtract differential data.

190 to 192 are diagrams showing the third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3), and are diagrams corresponding to FIGS. 182 to 184 of the first reel 31.
The third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) will be explained using the symbol group 5 in FIG. 191 as an example.
The D0 to D7 bits of the first address "12B5 (H)" and the D6 and D7 bits of the next address "12B6 (H)" indicate which symbols on the third (right) reel 31 are the symbol combinations of the five symbol groups. Indicates whether the pattern is part of a .
The symbol combinations of the 5 symbol groups are:
Small role 01: "Watermelon" - "Cherry" - "Bell A"
Small role 02: "Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Blue BAR/Special map bottom"
Small role 03: "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell A"
Small role 04: "Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Bell A"
Small role 05: "Bell A" - "Replay" - "Blue BAR/Special map bottom"
Small role 06: "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Blue BAR/Special map bottom"
Small role 07: "Watermelon" - "Cherry" - "Bell B"
Small role 08: "Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Black BAR/Red 7/Watermelon/Special map top"
(See Figure 118).

Therefore, the symbols on the third (right) reel 31 in the symbol combinations of the five symbol groups are "Bell A", "Blue BAR", "Special Figure Bottom", "Bell B", "Black BAR", and "Red 7". , "Watermelon" or "Special Map".
From this, among the reel symbol data information of address "12B5 (H)", D7 bit corresponds to "Blue BAR", D6 bit corresponds to "Black BAR", D5 bit corresponds to "Red 7", The D3 bit corresponding to "Bell A", the D2 bit corresponding to "Bell B", and the D1 bit corresponding to "Watermelon" are "1".
In addition, among the reel symbol data information of the address "12B6 (H)", the D7 bit corresponding to "Special Figure Top" and the D6 bit corresponding to "Special Figure Bottom" are "1".
Furthermore, the address "12C0(H)" where the table offset of the 6th symbol group is stored is 10 addresses ahead from the address "12B6(H)" where the table offset of the 5th symbol group is stored, so the address "12B6 The table offset value stored in "(H)" is "0A(H)".

Since there is no symbol combination in the symbol group 5 in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Replay", it is necessary to specify the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Replay". There is no address where symbol combination data is stored.
Also, since "cherry" is not provided on the right reel 31 (see FIG. 114), symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "cherry" is stored. There are no addresses provided.
First, the first address "12B7 (H)" following the addresses "12B5 (H)" and "12B6 (H)" specifies a symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Blue BAR". The symbol combination data for this purpose is stored. In the 5th symbol group, the symbol combinations in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Blue BAR" are minor winnings 02, minor winnings 05, and minor winnings 06, so the address "12B7 (H)" is , "@WIN_02 OR @WIN_05 OR @WIN_06" are stored. As shown in Figure 178, "@WIN_02" is "00000010 (B)", "@WIN_05" is "00010000 (B)", and "@WIN_06" is "00100000 (B)", so “00110010(B)” is stored at address “12B7(H)”.

At the next address "12B8(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "Black BAR" is stored. In the 5th symbol group, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Black BAR" is a small winning combination of 08, so "@WIN_08" is stored in the address "12B8 (H)". There is. As shown in FIG. 178, since "@WIN_08" is "10000000 (B)", that value is stored in the address "12B8 (H)".
At the next address "12B9(H)", symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "Red 7" is stored. In the 5th symbol group, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Red 7" is a small winning combination of 08, so the address "12B9 (H)" has "10000000 ( B)" is stored.

The next address "12BA(H)" stores symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Bell A." In the 5th symbol group, the symbol combinations in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Bell A" are minor winnings 01, minor winnings 03, and minor winnings 04, so the address "12BA (H)" is , "@WIN_01 OR @WIN_03 OR @WIN_04" are stored. As shown in Figure 178, "@WIN_01" is "00000001(B)", "@WIN_03" is "00000100(B)", and "@WIN_04" is "00001000(B)". “00001101(B)” is stored at address “12BA(H)”.

At the next address "12BB(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "Bell B" is stored. In the 5th symbol group, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Bell B" is the small winning combination 07, so "@WIN_07" is stored in the address "12BB (H)". There is. As shown in FIG. 178, since "@WIN_07" is "01000000(B)", that value is stored in the address "12BB(H)".
The next address "12BC(H)" stores symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Watermelon". In the 5th symbol group, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Watermelon" is a small winning combination of 08, so "@WIN_08" is stored in the address "12BC (H)". . As shown in FIG. 178, since "@WIN_08" is "10000000 (B)", that value is stored in the address "12BC (H)".

The next address "12BD(H)" stores symbol combination data for identifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "special symbol on". In the symbol 5 group, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "special symbol on" is the minor win 08, so "10000000(B)" is stored in the address "12BD(H)" as in the address "12BC(H)".
The next address "12BE(H)" stores symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "special symbol down". In the symbol 5 group, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "special symbol down" is small symbol 02, small symbol 05, and small symbol 06, so "@WIN_02 OR @WIN_05 OR @WIN_06" is stored in the address "12BE(H)". As shown in FIG. 178, "@WIN_02" is "00000010(B)", "@WIN_05" is "00010000(B)", and "@WIN_06" is "00100000(B)", so "00110010(B)" is stored in the address "12BE(H)".
As described above, the third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) is composed of addresses "1299 (H)" to "12DE (H)" (FIG. 180, FIG. 190 to FIG. 192).

FIG. 193 is a diagram showing the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL). In the 25th embodiment, after the symbol combination that stops on the active line is determined, in other words, after the stop positions of all reels 31 are determined and the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) are updated, the symbol combination is It is determined whether or not there is a payout corresponding to , using this payout number table.
First, "6" stored at address "1400(H)" means the number of inspections. This means checking whether or not there is a payout is performed up to six times.
These six times are
1st time: Small role 01 to small role 08 (15 pieces) (stop symbol data (5th group) D0 to D7)
2nd time: Small role 09 to small role 12 (15 pieces) (stop symbol data (6th group) D0 to D3)
3rd time: Small role 13 to small role 16 (3 pieces) (D4 to D7 of stop symbol data (6th group))
4th time: Small role 17 to small role 24 (3 pieces) (stop symbol data (7th group) D0 to D7)
5th time: Small role 25 to small role 32 (1 piece) (stop symbol data (8th group) D0 to D7)
6th time: Small role 33 to small role 34 (1 piece) (D0 to D1 of stop symbol data (9th group))
corresponds to
In particular, (in the stop symbol data (6th group), D0 to D3 bits (minor winnings 09 to 12) and D4 to D7 bits (minor winnings 13 to 16) have different payout numbers, Inspect separately.

In the next address "1401 (H)", the upper 3 bits (*32) indicate the number of bytes to be transferred, and the lower 5 bits indicate the number of coins to be paid out. Here, since the upper 3 bits are "0*32", it is "000 (B)", and the lower 5 bits are "01111 (B)" because the number of coins to be paid out is "15 (D)". Therefore, "00001111(B)" is actually stored in address "1401(H)".

The structure of the number of transferred bytes and the number of payouts is the same for addresses "1403(H)", "1405(H)", "1407(H)", "1409(H)", and "140B(H)". . For example, in "1407 (H)", the upper 3 bits (number of bytes to be transferred) are "1*32", so it is "001 (B)", and the lower 5 bits (number of payout coins) are "3 (D)". Therefore, it becomes "00011(B)". Therefore, "00100011(B)" is stored in address "1407(H)".

Here, the "number of bytes to be moved" means the number of bytes to be moved from the address of the stop symbol data. In this example, the initial value of the address of the stop symbol data is the address "F0BB (H)" of the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5). Since the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) to stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) are combinations without payouts (RB, 1BB, or replay), they are subject to inspection to see if they have payouts. It won't be. Therefore, the initial value of the stop symbol data to be inspected becomes the address of the stop symbol data (fifth group). In this embodiment, the payout process can be simplified by organizing the symbol groups of the winning combinations (small winning combinations) that have payouts into the fifth to ninth groups.
Therefore, for example, the number of transition bytes specified by the address "1401 (H)" is "0", but this is the transition from the address "F0BB (H)" of the stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5). It means not to let it happen.
Also, since the number of transition bytes specified by the address "1403 (H)" is "1", "1" is added to the address "F0BB (H)" of the stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5). Therefore, the address to be inspected is "F0BC (H)" (stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)).

Furthermore, the "designated data" means the bits (test data) corresponding to the symbol combination to be tested. For example, the address "1402 (H)" is "@_PIC5", so it is "11111111 (B)" as shown in FIG.
In this case, an AND operation is performed on the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) when all reels 31 are stopped and the data stored in address "1402(H)", i.e., the test data of the stop symbol data (fifth group) "11111111(B)". If the operation result is "0", it is determined that there will be no payout corresponding to the symbol combination in the fifth group. On the other hand, if the operation result is not "0", it is determined that the value stored in the lowest 5 bits of address "1401(H)", i.e., "15" coins, will be paid out.

At the next address "1403(H)", the number of transferred bytes is "1" and the number of payouts is "15". Further, the specified data (address “1404(H)”) is “@WIN_09_12”. Therefore, if the result of ANDing the stop symbol data (6th group) at the address "F0BC (H)" and "@WIN_09_12", that is, "00001111 (B)" (Fig. 178), is not "0", then 15 It means paying out a piece.
As mentioned above, the stop symbol data (6th group) includes small roles 09 to 16, but among these small roles, the number of payouts when winning small roles 09 to 12 is 15 pieces. Yes, the number of coins paid out when winning small prizes 13 to 16 is 3, so at address "1404 (H)", 15 coins will be paid out as minor prizes 09 to 12. is specified.

At the next address "1405(H)", the number of transferred bytes is "0" and the number of payouts is "3". Further, the specified data (address “1406(H)”) is “@WIN_13_16”. Therefore, if the result of ANDing the stop symbol data (6th group) of the address "F0BC (H)" and "@WIN_13_16", that is, "11110000 (B)" (Fig. 178), is not "0", then 3 It means paying out a piece.
As described above, for addresses "1407(H)" to "140C(H)" as well, the number of transition bytes, acquired data, and specified data are determined for the remaining small winning combinations and the number of payouts.

Next, control processing (program) in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be explained using a flowchart.
FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_PIC). In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the process proceeds to step S752 in FIG. 139 (the twenty-third embodiment), the process proceeds to the flowchart of FIG. 194.
Note that in FIG. 194, step S1013 is the same as step S792 in FIG. 146. Further, step S1014 is the same as step S793 in FIG. 146. Furthermore, step S1017 is the same as step S794 in FIG. 146.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 194, after step S1012, the process of step S791 in FIG. 146 (determination as to whether or not the standby time has elapsed) is executed.

Here, the standby process shown in step S791 in FIG. 146 is to set a waiting time when 1BB is full when the conditions for allowing winning of 1BB are not satisfied (steps S809 and S810 in FIG. 147), This is a determination as to whether or not the waiting time has elapsed.
On the other hand, the waiting time shown in step S1012 in FIG. 194 is a determination as to whether or not the interrupt waiting process in step S1011 has ended.
In addition, in FIG. 194, when proceeding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024, the process in FIG. 195 is executed.

The processing in FIG. 194 will be described below, although some of the explanation overlaps with the explanation in FIG. 146.
The reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_PIC) in FIG. 194 is a process that determines whether or not the stop switch 42 can accept a stop, and when an operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, shifts to a stop symbol set process.
In FIG. 194, in step S1011, interrupt wait processing is executed. The interrupt wait process is the same as the process in step S239 in FIG. 39 (eleventh embodiment). However, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt cycle is "1.1175" ms, similar to the twenty-third embodiment. Then, in the next step S1012, it is determined whether the next interrupt has arrived (whether the waiting time for waiting for an interrupt has become "0"). When it is determined that the next interrupt has not arrived, this flowchart ends. On the other hand, after starting the interrupt wait process in step S1011, when the next interrupt arrives, the process advances to step S1013.

Note that this interrupt wait processing prevents the plurality of reels 31 from stopping at the same time even when a plurality of stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time. This is because stop control is executed for one reel 31 in the processing after step S1015, and then when the process returns to step S794, the rising data A is cleared by the interrupt wait processing in step S1011.
Furthermore, since the processes from step S1012 onwards are executed all at once, it is possible to prevent the interrupt process from being executed (make it difficult to execute it) until the next interrupt wait process (step S1011). As a result, after the rise data A is first obtained in step S1016, an interrupt process is inserted between the time when the rise data A is obtained in step S1016, and the data obtained in the first step S1016 and the next step S1016 are processed. It is possible to avoid discrepancies between the acquired data and the acquired data.

In step S1013, all motor index passing checks are performed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) (Fig. 135) in the A register.
(2) Perform an OR (logical sum) operation between the A register value and the second reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC) (Fig. 136). Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(3) Perform an OR (logical sum) operation between the A register value and the third reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) (Fig. 137). Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(4) Add "1" to the A register value.

Here, the first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC), the second reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC), and the third reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) are Before there is a change in the motor index, it is "FF (H)", that is, "11111111 (B)".
Therefore, if at least one data is "11111111(B)", the calculation result up to (3) above will be "11111111(B)", and as shown in (4), adding "1" will result in "0". become. Therefore, before there is a change in the #th reel motor index for at least one reel 31, the above calculation result is "0", and after there is a change in the #th reel motor index for all reels 31, The result of the above calculation is a value other than "0".

In addition, when there is a change in the # reel motor index, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) is set to "10 (D)" (at the time of rising) or " 0" (at falling edge) is stored. Then, each time it is determined that the symbol has moved by one symbol, "1" is subtracted from the #th reel symbol number (for passing position). In this way, after the # reel motor index changes, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) changes from "0" (00000000 (B)) to "19 (D)" (00010011 (B)). It will be a cycle. Therefore, after the #th reel motor index changes, the OR operation of (1) to (3) above will not result in "11111111(B)".

Next, the process advances to step S1014, and it is determined whether or not it is possible to accept a stop of the stop switch 42. This determination is made by determining whether or not the above calculation (4) in step S1013 is "0" (zero flag is "1"). When it is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 cannot be accepted. In other words, when there is a change in the #th reel motor index for all reels 31, acceptance of the stop of the stop switch 42 is permitted.
In step S1014, if it is determined that the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the process advances to step S1015, and if it is determined that the stop switch 42 cannot be accepted, the process goes to step S1021.

In step S1015, the first reel number and first reel bit are set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address "F0AD(H)" of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) in the HL register.
(2) Store "00000001 (B)" in the B register.
Here, the B register value is a value corresponding to the value (any one of "1" (first reel 31) to "3" (third reel 31)) of the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL).
(3) Store "00000001(B)" in the C register.
Here, the C register value is a value corresponding to the stop switch 42. When the C register value is "00000001 (B)", it corresponds to the first (left) reel 31, when it is "00000010 (B)", it corresponds to the second (middle) reel 31, and "00000100 (B)". This corresponds to the third (right) reel 31.

Next, proceeding to step S1016, the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of address "F017(H)" in Fig. 133 is obtained. Here, the value of the input port rising data A is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1017, it is determined whether or not there is a rising edge of the stop switch 42 (whether or not the rising edge data of the stop switch 42 is ON).
Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) An AND (logical product) is performed on the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored in the address (F0AD(H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rising edge data A). The result of this operation is stored in the A register value.
(2) Perform an AND (logical product) operation on the value of the A register and the value of the C register. Store the result of the operation in the A register.

Here, for example, when the loop processing of steps S1016 to S1019 is performed for the first time, the C register value is "00000001 (B)", so the rising data of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first (left) reel 31 is A. Stored in register value.
Also, when the loop process is performed for the second time, the C register value is updated to "00000010 (B)", and the rise data of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the second (middle) reel 31 is stored in the A register value. be done.
Furthermore, when the loop process is performed for the third time, the C register value is updated to "00000100 (B)", and the rise data of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (right) reel is stored in the A register value. be done.
Further, in step S1019 where the loop processing is performed for the third time, the C register value is updated to "00001000 (B)", and it is determined that the processing of all reels 31 has been completed ("Yes" in step S1019).
(3) As a result of the calculation in (2) above, when it is determined that it is not "0" (zero flag≠"1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 has been turned on, and the process proceeds to step S1022. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the calculation is "0" (zero flag="1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 is not turned on, and the process proceeds to step S1018.

In step S1018, the next reel number and reel bit are set. This process is a process of adding "1" to the B register value. Therefore, during the first loop of steps S1016 to S1019, "00000001(B)" is updated to "00000010(B)", and during the second loop, "00000010(B)" is updated to "00000011(B)". Updated.

Next, the process advances to step S1019, and it is determined whether or not processing has been completed for all reels 31.
Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Perform a shift operation to shift the C register value to the left by "1". Therefore, in the first loop, "00000001 (B)" is updated to "00000010 (B)", in the second loop, "00000010 (B)" is updated to "00000100 (B)", and in the third loop, The time is updated from "00000100(B)" to "00001000(B)".
(2) When the D3 bit of the C register value is "1", it is determined as "Yes" (the processing of all reels 31 has been completed).
If the determination in step S1019 is "No", the process returns to step S1016, and if the determination is "Yes", the process advances to step S1020.

In step S1020, a reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is acquired. At this point, the address value of the reel stop flag is stored in the HL register (step S1015), so the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S1021, and the stop reception information data (_PT_STOP_STS) is saved. This process is a process of storing the A register value at address "F01E(H)" (stop reception information data (_PT_STOP_STS)). Through this process, the value of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) and the value of the stop reception information data (_PT_STOP_STS) become the same.
Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, in step S1017, it is determined that the stop switch 42 is turned on, and when the process proceeds to step S1022, acceptance of the stop switch 42 is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Update the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) to the latest information.
Here, the A register value (the value obtained by ANDing the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) and the input port rise data A in step S1017, and then ANDing the result and the C register value) and the reel stop flag ( _FL_STOP_LP), performs an XOR (exclusive OR) operation, stores the result in the A register, and stores the A register value in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).

For example, in step S1017,
Reel stop flag: 00000111 (B)
Input port rising data A: 00000001 (B)
When , ANDing the two results in "00000001(B)".
Further, if the C register value is "00000001(B)", ANDing the two results in "00000001(B)".
Furthermore, when this value is XORed with the reel stop flag "00000111 (B)", it becomes "00000110 (B)". This value becomes the reel stop flag after updating.
(2) Update the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) to the latest information. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the stop/control reel number data.

Next, the process advances to step S1023, and symbol combination control is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set the reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIGS. 135 to 137) to "start deceleration", that is, "4 (D)".
(2) Save the symbol number that becomes the stop position in the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) (FIGS. 135 to 137).
(3) The value obtained by subtracting "1" from the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) is stored in the A register value. In addition, when "1" is subtracted from the symbol number "0", the subtraction (special subtraction) is executed so that it becomes "19 (D)" (the maximum value of the symbol number).
This process is an operation to obtain the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) (lower row) by subtracting "1" from the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (middle row). At this point, the control symbol number is stored in the A register. For example, when the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) is "4", "3" is stored as the control symbol number. Moreover, when the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) is "0", "19" is stored as the control symbol number.
Then, the process advances to step S1024, stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) (FIG. 195).

In the example of FIG. 194, even if a plurality of stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time, reel stop control can be executed for one reel 31.
Here, "simultaneous pressing" refers to a case where the rising data of a plurality of (two in this example) stop switches 42 are turned on in the same interrupt process.
less than,
1. When the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously while all the reels 31 are rotating 2. When the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right reels 31 are rotating, and the middle and right stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time.3. An example will be described in which the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously when the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right reels 31 are rotating.

1. When the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time while all reels 31 are rotating In FIG. 194, if it is determined "Yes" in step S1014 and the process proceeds to step S1015, as described above,
(1) Store the address "F0AD(H)" of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) in the HL register.
(2) Store "00000001(B)" in the B register.
(3) Store "00000001(B)" in the C register.

In the next step S1016, the value of input port rising data A is stored in the A register. Here, when the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously, the input port rise data A (A register value) is "00000011 (B)".
In the next step S1017, the following processing is executed.
(1) Perform an AND operation on the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored at the address (F0AD(H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rising data A). . The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
At this point, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000111 (B)". Therefore, when this value is ANDed with the A register value "00000011(B)", it becomes "00000011(B)". The value after this calculation becomes the A register value.
(2) Perform an AND (logical product) operation on the A register value and the C register value, and store the operation result in the A register value. Therefore, the AND operation result "00000001(B)" of the A register value "00000011(B)" and the C register value "00000001(B)" is set as the A register value.

Then, in step S1017, since the result of the above calculation is not "0" (zero flag≠"1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen, and the process proceeds to step S1022.
In step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to the latest information.
Here, the A register value (00000001 (B)) and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) (00000111 (B)) are XORed (exclusive OR), and the result of the operation is "00000110 (B)" in the A register. and stores the A register value in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).
Next, the B register value (00000001 (B)) is stored in the stop/control reel number data.

As described above, when the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously while all the reels 31 are rotating, the stop control of the left reel 31 corresponding to the operation of the left stop switch 42 is executed. In other words, the stop control of the middle reel 31 corresponding to the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is not executed at this timing.
Further, through the process of step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to data "00000110 (B)" indicating that the left stop switch 42 has been accepted "0".
Furthermore, when the process returns to step S752 again after executing the stop control of the left reel 31, one interrupt time has generally elapsed, so the rising data A has been cleared. However, even before one interrupt time has elapsed, when the process advances to step S752, the rising data A is cleared in steps S1011 and S1012, so unless the middle stop switch 42 is operated again, the middle reel No. 31 stop control is not executed.

2. When the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right reels 31 are rotating, and the middle and right stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time. Proceeding, as mentioned above,
(1) Store the address "F0AD(H)" of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) in the HL register.
(2) Store "00000001(B)" in the B register.
(3) Store "00000001(B)" in the C register.

In the next step S1016, the value of the input port rise data A is stored in the A register. Here, since the center and right stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously, the input port rise data A (A register value) is "00000110(B)."
In the next step S1017, the following process is executed.
(1) An AND (logical product) is performed on the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored in the address (F0AD(H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rising edge data A). The result of this operation is stored in the A register value.
At this point, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000110(B)." Therefore, when this value and the A register value "00000110(B)" are ANDed, the result is "00000110(B)." The value after this operation becomes the A register value.
(2) The A register value and the C register value are ANDed, and the result of the AND is stored in the A register value. Therefore, the A register value is set to "00000000(B)", which is the result of the AND operation between the A register value "00000110(B)" and the C register value "00000001(B)".

Then, in step S1017, since the result of the above calculation is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 is not turned on, and the process proceeds to step S1018.
In step S1018, "1" is added to the B register value. Therefore, the B register value is updated to "00000010(B)".
Next, the process advances to step S1019, and it is determined whether or not processing has been completed for all reels 31.
Here, first, a shift operation is performed to shift the C register value to the left by "1". Therefore, the C register value is updated to "00000010(B)".
Next, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the C register value is "1". Since it is not "1" here, the determination is "No" and the process advances to step S1016.

In the second step S1016, the value of input port rising data A is stored in the A register. Therefore, the A register value becomes "00000110(B)".
In the next step S1017, the following processing is executed.
(1) Perform an AND operation on the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored at the address (F0AD(H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rising data A). . The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
At this point, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000110 (B)". Therefore, when this value is ANDed with the A register value "00000110(B)", it becomes "00000110(B)". This value becomes the A register value.
(2) Perform an AND (logical product) operation on the A register value "00000110 (B)" and the C register value "00000010 (B)" and store the result of the operation in the A register value. Therefore, the A register value becomes "00000010(B)".

Then, in step S1017, since the result of the above calculation is not "0" (zero flag ≠ "1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen, and the process proceeds to step S1022.
In step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to the latest information. This process involves performing an XOR (exclusive OR) operation on the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) value "00000110 (B)," storing the operation result "00000100 (B)" in the A register, and storing the A register value in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).
Next, the B register value (00000010 (B)) is stored in the stop/control reel number data.

As described above, when the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously while the middle and right reels 31 are rotating, the middle reel corresponding to the operation of the middle stop switch 42 No. 31 stop control is executed. In other words, the stop control of the right reel 31 corresponding to the operation of the right stop switch 42 is not executed at this timing.
Further, through the process of step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to data "00000100 (B)" indicating that the left and middle stop switches 42 have been accepted "0".
Furthermore, when the process returns to step S752 again after executing the stop control of the middle reel 31, the rise data A is cleared as described above, so unless the right stop switch 42 is operated again, the right reel 31 Stop control is not executed.

3. In the case where the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right reels 31 are rotating, and the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time, in FIG. As you proceed,
(1) Store the address "F0AD(H)" of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) in the HL register.
(2) Store "00000001 (B)" in the B register.
(3) Store "00000001(B)" in the C register.

In the next step S1016, the value of the input port rise data A is stored in the A register. Here, since the left and center stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously, the input port rise data A (A register value) is "00000011(B)."
In the next step S1017, the following process is executed.
(1) An AND (logical product) is performed on the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored in the address (F0AD(H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rising edge data A). The result of this operation is stored in the A register value.
At this point, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000110(B)." Therefore, when this value is ANDed with the A register value "00000011(B)," the result is "00000010(B)." The value after this operation becomes the A register value.
(2) The A register value and the C register value are ANDed, and the result of the AND is stored in the A register value. Therefore, the A register value is set to "000000010(B)", which is the AND result of the A register value "00000010(B)" and the C register value "00000001(B)".

Then, in step S1017, since the result of the above calculation is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 is not turned on, and the process proceeds to step S1018.
In step S1018, "1" is added to the B register value. Therefore, the B register value is updated to "00000010(B)".
Next, the process advances to step S1019, and it is determined whether or not processing has been completed for all reels 31.
Here, first, a shift operation is performed to shift the C register value to the left by "1". Therefore, the C register value is updated to "00000010(B)".
Next, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the C register value is "1". Since it is not "1" here, the determination is "No" and the process advances to step S1016.

In the second step S1016, the value of input port rising data A is stored in the A register. Therefore, the A register value becomes "00000011(B)".
In the next step S1017, the following processing is executed.
(1) Perform an AND operation on the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored at the address (F0AD(H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rising data A). . The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
At this point, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000110 (B)". Therefore, when this value is ANDed with the A register value "00000011 (B)", it becomes "00000010 (B)". This value becomes the A register value.
(2) Perform an AND (logical product) operation on the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the C register value "00000010 (B)" and store the result of the operation in the A register value. Therefore, the A register value becomes "00000010(B)".

Then, in step S1017, since the result of the above calculation is not "0" (zero flag≠"1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen, and the process proceeds to step S1022.
In step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to the latest information. This process performs an XOR (exclusive OR) operation on the A register value “00000010 (B)” and the value “00000110 (B)” of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP), and the result is “00000100 (B)”. is stored in the A register, and the A register value is stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).
Next, the B register value (00000010 (B)) is stored in the stop/control reel number data.

As described above, when the left reel 31 is stopped and the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously while the middle and right reels 31 are rotating, the middle reel corresponding to the operation of the middle stop switch 42 No. 31 stop control is executed. In other words, even if the left stop switch 42 corresponding to the already stopped left reel 31 is operated, the stop control of the left reel 1 is not executed.
Further, through the process of step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to data "00000100 (B)" indicating that the left and middle stop switches 42 have been accepted "0".
As described above, even if the stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time, only one reel 31 can be controlled to stop.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol setting (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG.
This process updates the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) based on the reel 31 that is to stop this time.
In step S1031, the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is saved. This process is a process of storing the A register value in the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE). Here, the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is stored in the A register value in step S1023 of FIG. 194.

In the next step S1032, the number of symbol groups is set. Since the symbol group of this embodiment consists of the first group to the ninth group, this process is a process of storing "9" in the B register. Next, the process advances to step S1033, and reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) is executed. This process is shown in FIG. 196, which will be described later, and is a process of identifying any one address in the # reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_#) and acquiring the symbol combination data stored in that address. . The symbol combination data obtained through this process is stored in the A register.
Furthermore, after storing "9" in the B register in step S1032, the B register value is saved in the stack area before executing the next step S1033. After executing the reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) in step S1033, the B register value saved in the stack area is restored. This is because in step S1033, the B register is newly used and the value stored in the B register is used again.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1034, where the RWM address of the stop symbol data corresponding to the symbol group to be updated is set. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The address “F0B6(H)” which is one address before the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) is stored in the HL register.
(2) The value of the B register is added to the value of the HL register, and the result of the addition is set as the value of the HL register.

Here, in step S1032, "9" is stored in the B register, so in the first step S1034,
HL register value = HL register value "F0B6 (H)" + "9 (H)" = "F0BF (H)"
This becomes the address of the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9). In step S1036 described later, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, and steps S1033 to S1036 are repeated until the B register value becomes "0". As a result, the reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) is repeatedly executed from the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) to the stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1).

In step S1035, the stop symbol data is saved. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Perform an AND (logical product) operation between the A register value (symbol combination data acquired in step S1033) and the data (stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC)) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(2) The A register value is stored in the address (stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC)) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is updated.

Next, the process advances to step S1036, and it is determined whether or not processing for the number of symbol groups has been completed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value and use the subtraction result as the B register value.
(2) When the B register value is "0", it is determined as "Yes" (processing for the number of symbol groups has been completed), and this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined "No" (processing for the number of symbol groups has not been completed), the process returns to step S1033 and executes the reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) corresponding to the next symbol group.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) in step S1033 of FIG. 195.
As described above, before executing this flowchart, the B register value is saved in the stack area.
The reel symbol data set is a process of acquiring symbol combination data corresponding to the current symbol group. For example, this process is
Stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) = “1” (1st (left) reel)
Control pattern number (_BF_PICTURE) = “3” (symbol number that stops at the bottom)
3rd group (B register value = “3”)
shall be.
The following example explains the case where processing is performed under the above conditions.
Stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) = one of “1”, “2”, or “3” Control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) = one of “0” to “19” B register value = “0” to “ 9, symbol combination data can be obtained in the same manner.

As mentioned above, when the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is "3", the symbol number that stops on the active line is "5", and the corresponding symbol becomes "Replay".
In this case, by processing the reel symbol data set, data "@REP_01 OR @REP_02 OR @REP_07" at address "1217 (H)" in FIG. 182, that is, "10000110 (B)" is stored in the A register. becomes.

196, in a step S1041, the stop/control reel number data is obtained. This is a process for storing the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) in the A register.
In the next step S1042, the reel symbol search table address offset table (FIG. 180(A)) is set. This process is a process of storing the address "11FF(H)" obtained by subtracting "1" from the top address of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH) in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1043, where table selection (R_TBL_SET) is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 197, which will be described later. By this process, the top address of the #th reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_#) is stored in the HL register, specifically,
One of the following values is stored: 1203 (H): the top address of the first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1); 123A (H): the top address of the second reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2); 128F (H): the top address of the third reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3).

Next, the process advances to step S1044, and a control symbol number is acquired. This process is a process of storing the value stored in the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) in the A register.
In the next step S1045, 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 198, which will be described later. When this process is executed, the symbol data corresponding to the symbol on the active line is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1046, the number of reel symbol data searches is set. This process is a process of storing the A register value (symbol data) in the C register value. The C register value that stores the symbol data is used in the bit count (M_BIT_COUNT) described later.

Next, the process advances to step S1047, and the offset of the symbol combination table is set. This process is a process of storing "11(D)" in the A register value. For example, the first address of the first reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_1) is "1203 (H)", but from this position to the address "120E (H)" where the first table offset is stored is "11". Since there is an address, it is set to "11".

In the next step S1048, designated address data is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value to the HL register value. Then, the result of the addition is set as the HL register value.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
Here, if "1203 (H)" (the first address of the first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1)) is stored in the HL register in step S1043,
HL register value = 1203 (H) + 11 (D) = 120E (H)
becomes.
Therefore, the A register value becomes "00000011(B)". As described above, of the data at address "1203(H)", the upper 2 bits are reel symbol data information, and the lower 6 bits indicate the table offset value.

Next, the process advances to step S1049, and an offset for the next symbol combination table is generated. This process performs an AND (logical product) operation between the A register value and "00000011 (B)". Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register. As a result, in the above example, the A register value becomes "00000011 (B)".
In the next step S1050, it is determined whether a symbol combination table of the number of symbol groups has been obtained. In this process, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, and if the subtraction result is not "0", it is determined as "No" (the symbol combination table of the number of symbol groups has not been acquired).
Here, the loop processing of steps S1048 to S1050 will be described using an example in which the HL register value is "120E(H)" and the B register value is, for example, "3" as in the above example.
(1) First time In step S1048,
HL register value = 1203 (H) + 11 (D) = 120E (H)
becomes.
In step S1049,
A register value = 3 (H)
becomes.
In step S1050,
B register value = 3-1 = 2
becomes.
Therefore, the determination is "No" and the process returns to step S1048.

(2) Second time In step S1048,
HL register value = 120E (H) + 3 (D) = 1211 (H)
becomes.
In step S1049,
A register value = 00000011 (B)
becomes.
In step S1050,
B register value = 2-1 = 1
becomes.
Therefore, the determination is "No" and the process returns to step S1048.

(3) Third time In step S1048,
HL register value = 1211 (H) + 3 (D) = 1214 (H)
becomes.
In step S1049,
A register value = 8 (H) (00001000 (B))
becomes.
In step S1050,
B register value = 1-1 = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the determination is "Yes" and the process advances to step S1051.
As a result, the table offset "8 (H)" for the third group of symbols is stored in the A register.
Further, when the result in step S1050 is "Yes", the HL register value is saved in the stack area. The HL register value at this point is an address value that stores "reel symbol data information + table offset".

In step S1051, the reel symbol combination table is corrected. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value. So, for example, in the above example,
HL register value = 1214 (H) - 1 (H) = 1213 (H)
becomes.
Next, the process advances to step S1052, and a bit number count (M_BIT_COUNT) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 199, which will be described later, and is a process of counting how many bits are "1" in the reel symbol data information. For example, when the number of bits is counted for data "11011010(B)" at address "1213(H)", it is counted as "5". After the bit number count is executed, the bit number is stored in the A register.
After completing the bit count in step S1052, the HL register value and BC register value are restored from the stack area.

In the next step S1053, it is determined whether the test final bit is on. In this process, it is determined whether the carry flag is "1" or not, and when the carry flag is "1", the determination is "Yes".
The details will be described later, but in the bit number count (M_BIT_COUNT), the reel symbol data information is shifted by 1 to the left by the number corresponding to the symbol to be stopped this time. The structure is such that the carry flag becomes "1" when the card is released. For example, if the symbol to be stopped this time is "Replay" among the reel symbol data information "11011010 (B)" of address "1213 (H)", shift "1" to the left four times corresponding to "Replay". do. Therefore, in this case, the carry flag becomes "1" at the fourth "1" shift to the left.
If it is determined in step S1053 that the carry flag is not "1", the process advances to step S1054, and if it is determined that the carry flag is "1", the process advances to step S1055. In other words, in step S1053, it is determined whether or not there is a symbol combination on the left reel 31 that includes "replay" and belongs to the third group. In this case, when the carry flag is not "1", it is determined that the symbol combination is not present, and when the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the symbol combination is present.
In step S1054, reel symbol data is set. This process executes an XOR (exclusive OR) operation between the A register value and the A register value to set the A register value to "0". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, in step S1055, designated address data is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value to the HL register value. The result of the addition is set as the HL register value.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
Here, the HL register value is a value saved when the result in step S1050 is "Yes", and is an address storing reel symbol data information and table offset. Further, the A register value stores the number of bits turned on in the bit number count in step S1052. For example, when the HL register value is "1214 (H)" and the A register value is "3 (H)", the HL register value becomes "1217 (H)".
Therefore, the data at address "1217(H)" is "@REP_01 OR @REP_02 OR @REP_07", that is, "10000110(B)", and this value is stored in the A register.

FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing table selection (R_TBL_SEL) in step S1043 of FIG. 196.
In FIG. 197, in step S1061, designated address data is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value to the HL register value. The result of the addition is set as the HL register value.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In step S1042 in FIG. 196, "11FF(H)" is stored in the HL register. Further, the A register value is the value of stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL), and is any one of "1", "2", or "3".
Therefore, by the process of step S1061, the HL register value becomes one of "1200(H)", "1201(H)", or "1202(H)".
Furthermore, by the process (2) above, one of the offset values shown in FIG. 180(A) is stored in the A register.

Next, the process advances to step S1062, and a designated address is set. This process is a process of adding the A register value to the HL register value and using the result of the addition as the HL register value. For example, when the HL register value is "1200 (H)" and the A register value (offset value) is "3 (H)", the HL register value will be "1203 (H)", and the first reel symbol arrangement This is the start address of the table (TBL_PICARG_1). Also, when the HL register value is "1201 (H)" and the A register value (offset value) is "39 (H)", the HL register value becomes "123A (H)" and the second reel symbol This is the start address of the array table (TBL_PICARG_2). Furthermore, when the HL register value is "1202 (H)" and the A register value (offset value) is "8D (H)", the HL register value is "128F (H)", and the third reel This is the start address of the symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_3).
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) in step S1045 of FIG.
This process obtains the symbol data of the symbol that will stop on the pay line using the #th reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_#) based on the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) corresponding to the symbol that will stop.
For example, in a game in which the symbol that will stop on the pay line is determined to be the number 3 "black BAR" based on the acceptance of a stop operation for the left reel 31, symbol data "@ZGR_02" corresponding to the lower 4-bit data of address "1203 (H)" in FIG. 181 is obtained. As shown in the reel symbol definition in FIG. 181, "@ZGR_02" is symbol data corresponding to "black BAR." Also, as shown in the reel symbol definition, the actual value of "@ZGR_02" is "1 (H)."

198, in step S1071, the table offset is generated. This is a process for executing an instruction to shift the value of the A register to the right by "1".
Here, prior to this process, in step S1044 of FIG. 196, the control pattern number (_BF_PICTURE) is stored in the A register.
Therefore, if the A register value is, for example, "00000001(B)" (odd number), shifting "1" to the right will set the carry flag to "1." Also, if the A register value is, for example, "00000010(B)" (even number), shifting "1" to the right will set the carry flag to "0." Furthermore, if the A register value is, for example, "00000011(B)" (odd number), shifting "1" to the right will set the carry flag to "1."
Then, the value after being shifted to the right by "1" is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1072, specified data is acquired. This process is a process in which data stored at an address obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the A register.
Here, the head address of the #th reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_#) is stored in the HL register in step S1043 of FIG. 196 (FIG. 197). Further, the A register value is a value obtained by shifting the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) to the right by "1". Therefore, when the HL register value is, for example, "1203 (H)" (see Figure 181) and the A register value is, for example, "1" (control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is "3"), the A The register value is the data at the address “1204(H)”, that is, “@ZGR_05 * 16 + @ZGR_04”.
Here, as shown in Figure 181, "@ZGR_05" (upper 4 bits) is "0100 (B)" (4 (H)), and "@ZGR_04" (lower 4 bits) is "0011 (B)". ” (3(H)), so the A register value becomes “0100/0011(B)”.

In the next step S1073, it is determined whether the table data search number is an odd number. In this process, it is determined whether the carry flag was "1" in the process of step S1071, and if the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the table data search number is an odd number. If it is determined that the table data search number is an odd number, the process proceeds to step S1075, and if it is determined that the table data search number is not an odd number, the process proceeds to step S1074.
In step S1074, data for even numbers is obtained. This is a process of swapping the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits of the data (A register value) obtained in step S1072.
For example, if the A register value is "0100/0011(B)" as in the above example, executing the process of step S1074 results in the value being "0011/0100(B)."

In step S1075, designated data is generated. This process is a process of executing an AND (logical product) operation between the A register value and "00001111 (B)" and storing the result of the operation in the A register value. This process masks the upper 4 bits.
For example, when the A register value is "01000011(B)" as shown above, an AND (logical product) operation is performed between this value and "00001111(B)", and the A register value becomes "00000011(B)". )”.
Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the bit count (M_BIT_COUNT) in step S1052 of FIG. 196.
Here, immediately before the bit number counting process, the HL register value is the data updated in step S1051 of FIG. , "120D(H)" in FIG. 182).
Further, the C register value is the 4-bit data acquired in the 4-bit data acquisition in step S1045 through the process in step S1046 in FIG. 196.

In FIG. 199, in step S1081, the number of inspections is set. This process is a process of adding "1" to the C register value and setting the result of the addition as the C register value.
In the next step S1082, "0" is set as the initial value of the number of on bits. This process is a process in which the A register value is set to "0" by performing an XOR (exclusive OR) operation on the A register value and the A register value.
Next, the process advances to step S1083, and the number of times of processing is set. This process is a process of storing "8" in the B register. "8" here is a value corresponding to the number of bits.

In the next step S1084, test data is acquired. This process is a process of storing data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the D register. Therefore, the D register value becomes reel symbol data information.
Next, the process advances to step S1085, and it is determined whether the relevant bit is on. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Perform an operation to shift the D register value to the left by "1".
(2) As a result of the above calculation, if the carry flag is "1", it is determined as "Yes".

If it is determined in step S1085 that the bit is on, the process advances to step S1086, and if it is determined that the bit is not on, the process advances to step S1087.
In step S1086, "1" is added to the number of on bits. This process is a process of adding "1" to the A register value.
In the next step S1087, "1" is subtracted from the number of inspections. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the C register value and using the subtraction result as the C register value.
Next, the process advances to step S1088, and it is determined whether or not to end the inspection. This process determines whether the C register value is "0" (whether the zero flag is "1"). When it is determined that the C register value is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that the test is to be completed, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the inspection is not to be completed, the process advances to step S1089.

In step S1089, it is determined whether the number of times of processing has been completed. This process subtracts "1" from the value of the B register, and determines whether the result of the subtraction is "0", and if it is determined that the number of times of processing has been completed, it is determined that the number of times of processing has been completed. If it is determined that the number of times of processing has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S1085. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of times of processing has been completed, the process proceeds to step S1090.
In step S1090, "1" is added to the HL register value, and the value after the addition is set as the HL register value.Then, the process proceeds to step S1083.

The above bit number counting process will be explained using a specific example.
Although an example will be described below, the process can be executed in the same manner as described below regardless of the symbols of any group on any reel 31.
In this specific example,
HL register value = 1213 (H) (3 groups of symbols on the first reel 31)
C register value = 3 (replay) (“4” by step S1081)
shall be.
in this case,
(1) First time Step S1083: B register value = 8 (initial value)
Step S1084: D register value “11011010(B)” (symbol data stored at address “1213(H))”
Step S1085: Shift the D register value to the left by "1", carry flag = 1, therefore "Yes"
Step S1086: A register value=0+1=1
Step S1087: C register value = 4-1 = 3
Step S1088: Zero flag≠1, therefore “No”
Step S1089: B register value = 8-1 = 7, therefore "No"
(2) Second time Step S1085: Shift the D register value to the left by "1", carry flag = 1, therefore "Yes"
Step S1086: A register value=1+1=2
Step S1087: C register value = 3-1 = 2
Step S1088: Zero flag≠1, therefore “No”
Step S1089: B register value = 7-1 = 6, therefore "No"
(3) Third time Step S1085: Shift the D register value to the left by "1", carry flag ≠ 1, therefore "No"
Step S1087: C register value = 2-1 = 1
Step S1088: Zero flag≠1, therefore “No”
Step S1089: B register value = 6-1 = 5, therefore "No"
(4) Fourth time Step S1085: Shift the D register value to the left by "1", carry flag = 1, therefore "Yes"
Step S1086: A register value=2+1=3
Step S1087: C register value = 1-1 = 0
Step S1088: Zero flag = 1, therefore "Yes" (processing completed)
becomes.

In this case, when the bit count is finished and the process proceeds to step S1053 in FIG. 196, since the carry flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S1055.
In step S1055,
HL register value = HL register value "1214 (H)" + A register value "3 (H)" = 1217 (H)
A register value = Data of address "1217 (H)" indicated by HL register value = @REP_01 OR @REP_02 OR @REP_07 (10000110 (B))
becomes.
As described above, in the bit number counting, when a stopped symbol is determined, symbol combination data of the Nth group of the #th reel 31 corresponding to the stopped symbol is specified.

Next, how the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is updated by the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) shown in FIG. 195 when each stop switch 42 is operated will be explained using a specific example.
In the following explanation,
1. Examples of non-winning roles 1-1. When the left stop switch 42 is stopped 1-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped 1-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped 2. Example of winning a special role (RBA) 2-1. When the left stop switch 42 is stopped 2-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped 2-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped 3. Example of winning in Replay (Replay 01) 3-1. When the left stop switch 42 is stopped 3-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped 3-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped 4. Example of winning a small role (when the pressing order is correct when the pressing order bell is won) 4-1. When the left stop switch 42 is stopped 4-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped 4-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped 5. Example of winning a small role (when the pressing order is incorrect when winning the pressing order bell) 5-1. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped 5-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped 5-3. The operation of stopping the left stop switch 42 will be explained in order.

1. When a winning combination is not won In this example, in a game where the winning number “26” is determined as a result of the lottery, the left stop occurs when the symbol number “18” is passing through the middle row of the left reel 31. The switch 42 is operated, and then, when the symbol with symbol number "17" is passing through the middle stage of the middle reel 31, the middle stop switch 42 is operated, and then the middle stage of the right reel 41 is moved to the middle stage with symbol number "19". When the stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol is passing,
Symbol control number when left reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 1 (Watermelon)
Symbol control number when middle reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 0 (Bell A)
Symbol control number when right reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 2 (Blue BAR)
shall each cease.
In this case, the symbol combination on the active line is "Black BAR (No. 3)" - "Cherry (No. 1)" - "Blue BAR (No. 2)", and the winning combination is non-winning.
In addition, the initial value of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000011 (B)"
It is.

1-1. At the time of stop operation of the left stop switch 42 In the stop symbol set of FIG. 195, in step S1031, "1" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
(1st time)
Through the process of step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "black BAR" does not exist in the symbol group 9 on the left reel 31 (see address "1236 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "00000011 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

(2nd time)
Through the process of step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "black BAR" does not exist in the symbol group 8 on the left reel 31 (see address "1230(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

(3rd time)
Through the process of step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "black BAR" does not exist in the symbol group 7 on the left reel 31 (see address "122B(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

(4th time)
By the process of step S1033, the symbol combination data "01000000(B)" (@WIN_15) of the address "1226(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that the symbol group 6 on the left reel 31 includes the small win 15 as "black BAR".
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) (initial value is "11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "01000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

(5th time)
By the process of step S1033, "00000000(B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that there is no "black BAR" in the group of five symbols on the left reel 31 (see address "1220(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BB (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (initial value is "11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

(6th time)
By the process of step S1033, "00000000(B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that the "black BAR" does not exist in the group of 4 symbols on the left reel 31 (see address "121B(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BA (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (initial value is "00001111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

(7th time)
Through the process in step S1033, symbol combination data "00010000(B)" (@REP_04) at address "1216(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that Replay 04 exists as a "black BAR" in the third symbol group on the left reel 31.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00010000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00010000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

(8th time)
In step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that the "black BAR" does not exist in the second symbol group on the left reel 31 (see address "1210 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) (initial value is "11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

(9th time)
In step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "black BAR" does not exist in the first group of symbols on the left reel 31 (see address "120D(H)").
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

By the above-mentioned processing, the stop pattern data when the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop is as follows:
Stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00010000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "01000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (Group 8) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, it can be seen that when the "black BAR" stops on the effective line during the stopping operation of the left stop switch 42, there is a possibility that a pattern combination of group 3 or group 6 of symbols will stop, but there is no possibility that a pattern combination of other groups of symbols will stop.

Next, the reel symbol data set (FIG. 196) in step S1033 during the stop symbol setting in FIG. 195 will be explained by giving an example.
Among the above, the fourth step S1033 (symbol group 6) is taken as an example. Note that the B register value in this case is "6".
In FIG. 196, in step S1041, stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL), that is, "1" is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1042, "11FF(H)" is stored in the HL register.
Next, the process advances to step S1043, and table selection (R_TBL_SET) is executed. Through this process, the leading address "1203(H)" of the first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) is stored in the HL register.

Next, the process advances to step S1044, and the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE), that is, "1" is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1045, 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) is executed. Through this process, symbol data "00000001 (B)" corresponding to "black BAR" is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1046, the A register value (symbol data) is stored in the C register value. Therefore, the C register value becomes "00000001(B)".

Next, the process advances to step S1047, and "11(D)" (offset value) is stored in the A register value.
In the next step S1048, the HL register value = "1203 (H)" (starting address of the first reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_1)) + "11 (D)" (offset value) = "120E (H)". .
Further, the A register value becomes the table offset value of the lower 6 bits of the data at address "120E(H)", and becomes "00000011(B)".

In the next step S1049, an AND (logical product) operation is performed on the A register value and "00000011(B)", and the operation result is stored in the A register. As a result, the A register value becomes "00000011(B)".
In the next step S1050, "1" is subtracted from the value of the B register, and if the subtraction result is not "0", it is determined to be "No" (the symbol combination table for the number of symbol groups has not been acquired).
Here, at the initial point,
HL register value = 120E (H)
B register value=6
It is.
Therefore, the loop process of steps S1048 to S1050 is as follows.
(1st time)
HL register value = 120E (H)
A register value = 3 (H)
B register value = 6 - 1 = 5 (determined as "No" and returns to step S1048)
(2nd time)
HL register value = 120E (H) + 3 (D) = 1211 (H)
A register value = 3 (H)
B register value = 5 - 1 = 4 (determined as "No" and returns to step S1048)
(Third time)
HL register value = 1211 (H) + 3 (D) = 1214 (H)
A register value = 8 (H) (00001000 (B))
B register value=4-1=3 (determined as "No" and returns to step S1048)

(4th time)
HL register value = 1214 (H) + 8 (D) = 121C (H)
A register value = 5 (H) (00001000 (B))
B register value = 3-1 = 2 (determined as “No” and returns to step S1048)
(5th time)
HL register value = 121C (H) + 5 (D) = 1221 (H)
A register value = 4 (H)
B register value=2-1=1 (determined as “No” and returns to step S1048)
(6th time)
HL register value = 1221 (H) + 4 (D) = 1225 (H)
A register value = 7 (H)
B register value = 1-1 = 0 (determined as “Yes” and proceeds to step S1051)

Here, the HL register value "1225 (H)" is saved in the stack area.
In step S1051, the HL register value = "1225 (H)" - "1 (H)" = "1224 (H)".
In step S1052, a bit number count (M_BIT_COUNT) is executed. Here, the number of bits is counted for data "01111010(B)" at address "1224(H)". In this example, since it is counted as "1", the A register value becomes "1".
Thereafter, the HL register value and BC register value are restored from the stack area.

In the next step S1053, since the carry flag is "1", the determination is "Yes".
In step S1055, the data stored at the address indicated by the value "1226(H)" obtained by adding the A register value "1" to the HL register value "1225(H)" is stored in the A register.
Therefore, data "@WIN_15" at address "1226(H)", ie, "01000000(B)" is stored in the A register.
This A register value "01000000 (B)" is then ANDed with the initial value "11111111 (B)" stored in the stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) in the stop symbol set (_M_STOPPIC_SET). (logical product) is calculated. As a result, the data of the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) is updated from "11111111 (B)" to "01000000 (B)".

Next, a specific example of 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) (FIG. 198) in step S1045 in the above example will be described.
Before this process,
A register = 1 (control pattern number (_BF_PICTURE))
HL register = 1203 (H) (first address of the first reel pattern arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1))
It is as follows.
198, in step S1071, the value of the A register is shifted to the right by "1." As a result, the carry flag becomes "1." Also, the value of the A register becomes "00000000(B)."

In step S1072, the data stored at the address obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the A register. Since the HL register value is "1203 (H)" and the A register value is "0", the A register value after the operation is the data "@ZGR_08*16 + @ZGR_02" at the address "1203 (H)", i.e. It becomes "0111/0001(B)".
In step S1073, the carry flag is "1" according to the above calculation, so the process advances to step S1075.
In step S1075, an AND (logical product) operation is performed between the A register value and "00001111 (B)". As a result, the A register value becomes "0000/0001(B)", and symbol data "00000001(B)" corresponding to the "black BAR" is stored.

Next, a specific example of the bit number count (M_BIT_COUNT) (FIG. 199) in step S1052 of FIG. 196 in the above example will be described.
Immediately before counting the number of bits,
HL register = 1224 (H) (data updated in step S1051 in FIG. 196)
C register = 00000001 (B) (symbol data acquired in 4-bit data acquisition (step S1045) in Figure 196)
It becomes.
In FIG. 199, in step S1081, "1" is added to the C register value, and the result of the addition is set as the C register value. As a result, the C register value becomes "2".
In step S1082, the A register value is set to "0".
In step S1083, "8" is stored in the B register.

In step S1084, the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value "1224(H)" is stored in the D register. Therefore, the D register value becomes "01111010(B)".
In step S1085, the D register value is shifted to the left by "1". As a result, since the carry flag is "0", it is determined as "No" and the process proceeds to step S1087.
In step S1087, "1" is subtracted from the C register value. As a result, the C register value becomes "1".
The process advances to step S1088, and since the C register value is not "0", it is determined as "No", and the process advances to step S1089.
In step S1089, "1" is subtracted from the B register value. As a result, the B register value becomes "7", which is not "0", so the process returns to step S1085.

In step S1085, the value of the D register is shifted left by "1." Since the carry flag is "1," the answer is determined as "Yes."
Therefore, the process proceeds to step S1086, where "1" is added to the A register value, causing the A register value to become "1."
In step S1087, "1" is subtracted from the C register value, causing the C register value to become "0."
The process proceeds to step S1088, where the C register value is "0" so that the answer is "Yes" and the process according to this flowchart ends.
Then, when the process proceeds to step S1053 in FIG. 196, it is determined that the final check bit is on, and the process proceeds to step S1055.
In step S1055, the designated address data is set.
In this example, the HL register value "1225(H)" returned from the stack area is added to the A register value "1" to obtain the HL register value "1226(H)", and the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register. Therefore, the A register value becomes the data at address "1226(H), i.e. "01000000(B)".

1-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above,
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE): 0 (Bell A)
Symbol that stops on the active line: “Cherry (No. 1)”
shall be.
Also, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) at this point is as described above.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00010000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "01000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
It is.

In this case, when the center reel 31 stops, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "0" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000001(B)" at the address "128E(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000001 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, symbol combination data "00110000(B)" of address "1289(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00110000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010(B)" of the address "127F(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Cherry" does not exist in the 6th symbol group of the middle reel 31 (see address "125F(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("01000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "01000001(B)" of the address "125E(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01000001 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000110(B)" at the address "1259(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000110 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011000(B)" at the address "1253(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00011000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (00010000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00010000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "cherry" does not exist in the second group of symbols on the middle reel 31 (see address "1248 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000(B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "cherry" does not exist in the symbol group 1 of the center reel 31 (see address "1244(H)").
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000(B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the result is determined as "Yes", so that the setting of the stopped symbols is terminated.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the middle stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00010000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, when the "Black BAR" stops on the active line when the left reel 31 stops, and when the "Watermelon" stops on the active line when the middle reel 31 stops, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 04. It can be seen that there is a possibility of stopping.

1-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped When the right stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above,
Pattern control number (_BF_PICTURE): 2 (Blue BAR)
Symbols that stop on the active line: "Blue BAR (No. 2)"
shall be.
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "2" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol group 9 on the right reel 31 (see address "12DA(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000110(B)" of the address "12D3(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000110 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011010(B)" of the address "12CA(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00011010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000000 (B)" of the address "12C1 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("01000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00110010(B)" at the address "12B7(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00110010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010(B)" at the address "12B1(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000001(B)" at the address "12A7(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000001 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("00010000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the second group of symbols on the right reel 31 (see address "129F(H)").
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the first symbol group of the right reel 31 (see address "1299(H)").
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the right stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, when the left reel 31 stops, "Black BAR" stops on the active line, when the middle reel 31 stops, "Watermelon" stops on the active line, and when the right reel 31 stops, "Black BAR" stops on the active line, and when the right reel 31 stops, "Black BAR" stops on the active line. When the "Blue BAR" stops, it can be seen that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination does not stop on the active line (the winning combination is non-winning).

2. When winning a special role Next, updating of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) when winning a special role will be explained.
In this example, the left stop switch 42 is operated when the winning number "26" is determined as the winning number "26" as a result of the lottery, and the symbol number "16" is passing through the middle row of the left reel 31. Then, the middle stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol with symbol number "5" is passing through the middle row of the middle reel 31, and after that, the symbol with symbol number "7" is passing through the middle row of the right reel 31. If the right stop switch 42 is operated while the player is in the position, RBA will win a prize.
Symbol control number when left reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 16 (Watermelon)
Symbol control number when middle reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 7 (Bell B)
Symbol control number when right reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 8 (Black BAR)
shall each cease.
In this case, the symbol combination on the active line is "Blue BAR (No. 18)" - "Blue BAR (No. 8)" - "Black BAR (No. 8)".
In addition, the initial value of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000011 (B)"
It is.

2-1. When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "16 (D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, symbol combination data "00000010(B)" at address "1238(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000011 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol group 8 on the left reel 31 (see address "1230(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol group 7 on the left reel 31 (see address "122B(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, "00000000(B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that the "Blue BAR" does not exist in the group of 6 symbols on the left reel 31 (see address "1224(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol group 5 on the left reel 31 (see address "1220(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the 4th symbol group of the left reel 31 (see address "121B(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00001111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000001(B)" of the address "1215(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that the group of three symbols on the left reel 31 includes 1BB as "blue BAR".
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000001 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("11111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, the symbol combination data "11111111(B)" at the address "1212(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that in the second group of symbols on the left reel 31, RBI to RBP exist as "blue BAR".
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11111111 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "11111111 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In step S1033 for the ninth time, the symbol combination data "11111111 (B)" of the address "120F (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that the first group of symbols on the left reel 31 includes RBA to RBH as "blue BAR."
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11111111 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("1111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "11111111 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the result is determined as "Yes", so that the setting of the stopped symbols is terminated.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the left stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000010 (B)"
From the above, when the "Blue BAR" stops on the active line when the left reel 31 stops, there is a possibility that symbol combinations from symbol group 1 to symbol group 3 and symbol group 9 will stop, but symbol group 4 ~ It can be seen that there is no possibility of stopping the symbol combinations of the 8 symbol groups.

2-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above,
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE): 7 (Bell B)
Symbols that stop on the active line: "Blue BAR (No. 8)"
shall be.
In this case, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "7" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In step S1033 (first time), "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the 9th group of symbols on the middle reel 31 (see address "128B(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000010 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000111(B)" at the address "1283(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000111 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, symbol combination data "00010000(B)" of address "1279(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00010000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000000 (B)" at the address "1271 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the 5th symbol group of the middle reel 31 (see address "125A(H)").
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the 4th symbol group of the middle reel 31 (see address "1255 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000011(B)" at the address "124E(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000011 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (00000001 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the second group of symbols on the middle reel 31 (see address "1248 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001111(B)" at the address "1246(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that in the first group of the middle reel 31, there are RBA to RBD as the "Blue BAR" symbols.
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001111 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00001111 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the middle stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00001111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, when the "Blue BAR" stops on the active line when the left reel 31 stops, and when the "Blue BAR" stops on the active line when the middle reel 31 stops, RBA to RBD and 1BB It can be seen that there is a possibility of stopping the corresponding symbol combination.

2-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped When the right stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above,
Pattern control number (_BF_PICTURE): 8 (black BAR)
Symbols that stop on the active line: "Black BAR (No. 8)"
shall be.
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "8" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In step S1033 (first time), symbol combination data "00000001(B)" at address "12DC(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000001 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, symbol combination data "00010001(B)" of address "12D4(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00010001 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "01100000(B)" of the address "12CB(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01100000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000(B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001100 (B)" of the address "12C2 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001100 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("00000000 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000000 (B)" at the address "12B8 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "01000000(B)" at the address "12A8(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("00000001 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011111(B)" at the address "12A1(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that in the second group of symbols on the right reel 31, RBI to RBM exist as "black BAR" symbols.
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00011111 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In step S1033 for the ninth time, the symbol combination data "00010001(B)" of the address "129B(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that the first group of symbols on the right reel 31 includes RBA or RBE as the "black BAR" symbol.
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed on the A register value "00010001 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00001111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000001 (B)."
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the result is determined as "Yes", so that the setting of the stopped symbols is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop pattern data when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop is as follows:
Stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (Group 8) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, it can be seen that when a “blue BAR” stops on an active line when the left reel 31 stops, a “blue BAR” stops on an active line when the middle reel 31 stops, and a “black BAR” stops on an active line when the right reel 31 stops, the symbol combination corresponding to the RBA will stop on an active line.

3. When a Replay is won Next, the update of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) when a Replay is won will be described.
In this example, the winning number is determined as "1" as a result of the lottery, and the left stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol with the symbol number "11" passes through the middle section of the left reel 31, the middle stop switch 42 is then operated when the symbol with the symbol number "5" passes through the middle section of the middle reel 31, and then the right stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol with the symbol number "2" passes through the middle section of the right reel 31, resulting in Replay 01 winning.
Symbol control number when the left reel stops at 31 (_BF_PICTURE): 13 (red 7)
Symbol control number when center reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 7 (Bell B)
Symbol control number when the right reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 4 (Bell A)
shall each be stopped.
In this case, the symbol combination on the valid line is "REPLAY (No. 15)" - "BLUE BAR (No. 8)" - "BELL A (No. 4)".
In addition, the initial value of the stop pattern data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (Group 8) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (Group 9) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000011 (B)"
It is.

3-1. When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "13 (D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000011 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "11000001 (B)" at the address "1233 (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that in the group of 8 symbols on the left reel 31, there are small winnings 25, 31, and 32 as winnings having "replay" symbols.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11000001 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "11000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "11001100(B)" at the address "122E(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that in the group of 7 symbols on the left reel 31, there are small winnings 19, 20, 23, and 24 as winnings having "replay" symbols.
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11001100 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "11001100 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10100000(B)" at the address "1228(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that in the group of 6 symbols on the left reel 31, the small winning combination 14 and the small winning combination 16 exist as winning combinations having "replay" symbols.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10100000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "10100000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000100(B)" of the address "121D(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BA (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000100 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) (00001111 (B)) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000100 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000110(B)" at the address "1217(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that in the symbol group 3 on the left reel 31, Replay 01, Replay 02, and Replay 07 exist as combinations having the "Replay" symbol.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000110 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "10000110 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000(B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("1111111 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the left stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "10000110 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000100 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "10100000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11001100 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"

3-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop When the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop, as described above,
Picture control number (_BF_PICTURE): 7 (Bell B)
Symbols that stop on an active line: Blue BAR (No. 8)
It is assumed that.
In this case, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "7" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, "00000000(B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that the "Blue BAR" does not exist in the group of 9 symbols on the center reel 31 (see address "128B(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000(B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000111 (B)" at the address "1283 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000111 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("11000001 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, symbol combination data "00010000(B)" of address "1279(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00010000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("11001100 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000000 (B)" at the address "1271 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("10100000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "10000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the 5th symbol group of the middle reel 31 (see address "125A(H)").
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the 4th symbol group of the middle reel 31 (see address "1255(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("00000100 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, symbol combination data "00000011(B)" at address "124E(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000011 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("10000110 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the second group of symbols on the middle reel 31 (see address "1248 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001111(B)" at the address "1246(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001111 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00001111 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the middle stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000010 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "10000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
Therefore, at the time of the second stop, the winning combinations that have the possibility of winning are Replay 01, Minor Prize 16, and Minor Prize 25.

3-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped When the right stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above,
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE): 4 (Bell A)
Symbol that stops on the active line: “Bell A (No. 4)”
shall be.
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "4" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010(B)" at the address "12DE(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001000(B)" of the address "12D7(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000001 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, "00000000(B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000(B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001100 (B)" of the address "12C4 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001100 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("10000000 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001101(B)" at the address "12BA(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001101 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "10100010(B)" at the address "12AB(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10100010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("00000010 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000(B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed on the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data of the address indicated by the HL register value (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the result is determined as "Yes", so that the setting of the stopped symbols is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop pattern data when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop is as follows:
Stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000010 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (Group 8) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, it can be seen that when “REPLAY” stops on a valid line when the left reel 31 stops, “BLUE BAR” stops on a valid line when the middle reel 31 stops, and “BELL A” stops on a valid line when the right reel 31 stops, then the symbol combination corresponding to REPLAY 01 will stop on a valid line.

Next, in order to explain "4. When winning a small winning combination (when the pressing order is correct when the pressing order bell is won)", the reel stop control when the pressing order bell is won will be explained.
Here, an example will be explained in which the winning number "10" is determined as a result of the lottery.
In the 23rd embodiment cited in the 25th embodiment, when the push order bell (winning numbers "10" to "21") is won, the small winning combination is "PB=1" and there is no loss. It is set as follows.
Generally, the following methods can be used to control the reels 31 to stop when a plurality of small winning combinations with different payout numbers are won repeatedly, such as the winning number "10".
As a first priority, if all the symbols (on the reel 31) constituting a winning symbol combination can be stopped on the active line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to stop all the symbols constituting the winning symbol combination on the active line (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the second priority is "quantity priority" or " The reels 31 are controlled to stop by either "Number Priority".
Here, "priority on the number of pieces" means to give priority to the symbol on the reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts out of the symbol combinations of the winning combinations that have been won twice, and to stop (draw) it on the active line. means. Therefore, when the winning number "10" is won, the small winning combination 01 corresponds to the symbol combination with the largest number of paid out pieces (15 pieces).
On the other hand, "number priority" means that the symbols on the reel 31 are stopped on the active line so that the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the active line is maximized.
In this embodiment, since the number of active lines is one, it is not possible to stop the symbol combinations corresponding to all winning roles on the active line (first priority), so the number of winning combinations cannot be stopped on the active line (first priority). 31 is stopped.
When the pressing order bell is won, if the pressing order is correct, the reel 31 is controlled to stop with priority given to the number of pieces, and when the pressing order is incorrect, the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped with priority given to the number of pieces.

In the game when the small win A1 condition device is activated (during the 1BB game), when the first stop is on the left, the pressing order is correct at this point, so "Watermelon" is stopped on the active line (upper row). As shown in FIG. 114, the "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 is arranged in 4 pieces at 5 symbol intervals (hereinafter referred to as "PB=1" arrangement), so the left stop switch 42 is operated at any timing. Even if the watermelon is set to 1, the watermelon can be stopped at the upper stage by setting PB=1.

Next, when it is the middle second stop, the pressing order is correct at this point, so "Cherry" is stopped at the effective line (middle stage). As shown in FIG. 114, since the "Cherry" on the middle reel 31 is arranged in "PB=1", no matter which timing the middle stop switch 42 is operated, "PB=1" and the "Cherry" is placed in the middle row. can be stopped.
Furthermore, when it is the third stop on the right, the pressing order is correct, so "Bell A" is stopped at the effective line (lower row). As shown in FIG. 114, "Bell A" on the right reel 31 is arranged in "PB=1", so no matter which timing the right stop switch 42 is operated, "PB=1" and "Bell A" can be stopped at the bottom.

On the other hand, when the first stop on the left is followed by the second stop on the right, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, so the symbol on the left reel 31 is "Watermelon" and it is included in the small win A1 condition device. Any of the winning combinations (excluding the minor combination 01) is stopped on the active line.
As shown in FIG. 124, the winning combinations (excluding the small combination 01) included in the small combination A1 condition device are as follows:
Small role 13: "Red 7" - "Bell A" - "Bell A/Bell B"
Small role 14: "Replay" - "Bell A" - "Bell A/Bell B"
Small role 15: "Black BAR" - "Bell A" - "Bell B"
Small role 16: "Replay" - "Blue BAR / Black BAR / Red 7 / Special map top" - "Blue BAR"
Small role 17: "Watermelon" - "Red 7/Replay" - "Replay"
It is.

Therefore, the small winning combination 17 whose symbol on the left reel 31 is "Watermelon" is stopped.
As shown in FIG. 114, "Replay" on the right reel 31 is arranged in "PB=1", so no matter when the right stop switch 42 is operated, "PB=1" and "Replay" on the lower row are arranged. can be stopped.
Furthermore, when the middle third stop occurs, "Red 7/Replay" is stopped on the effective line (middle stage). As shown in FIG. 114, "Replay" on the middle reel 31 is arranged in "PB=1", so no matter when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, "PB=1" and "Replay" on the middle reel are set. An example of this is to specify that the "replay" is to be stopped at the effective line. Therefore, the small winning combination 17 can be won. Note that when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing that allows "Red 7" to be stopped on the effective line, it is of course possible to stop "Red 7" on the effective line.

On the other hand, in a game when the small role A1 condition device is activated (during 1BB game), if it is the first stop in the middle, the pressing order will be incorrect at this point, so the small role will be on the active line (middle stage). Any of the symbols related to 13 to 17 of small winning combinations is stopped. In this case, "Bell A" is stopped on the valid line by executing the number priority. "Bell A" on the middle reel 31 is arranged in "PB=1", so no matter what timing the middle stop switch 42 is operated, "PB=1" will stop "Bell A" in the middle row. can.
Next, when it is the second left stop, one each of "Red 7", "Replay", and "Black BAR" are provided, so there is no superiority or inferiority, and any one can be determined. Therefore, the "replay" with the "PB=1" arrangement is stopped at the effective line (upper row).
Next, at the third stop on the right, "Bell A/Bell B" is stopped at the effective line (lower stage). Regarding the right reel 31, since both "Bell A" and "Bell B" are arranged in "PB=1", either one may be stopped.

On the other hand, when it is the second stop on the right after the middle first stop, "Bell B" is stopped at the lower stage based on quantity priority. As described above, “Bell B” on the right reel 31 is arranged in “PB=1”.
Further, at the third stop on the left, either "Red 7", "Replay" or "Black BAR" is stopped. For example, it may be determined that a "replay" with a "PB=1" arrangement is to be stopped. In addition, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when "Red 7" or "Black BAR" can be stopped on the effective line, "Red 7" or "Black BAR" may be stopped on the effective line, respectively. Of course.

In addition, in a game when the small win A1 condition device is activated (during a 1BB game), if the first stop is on the right, the pressing order will be incorrect at this point, so the active line (lower row) will have the small win 13~ Any of the symbols related to the small winning combination 17 is stopped. In this case, "Bell B" is stopped on the valid line by executing the number priority.
Next, when it is the second stop on the left, either "Red 7", "Replay" or "Black BAR" is stopped. In this case, similarly to the above, it may be determined that the "replay" in the "PB=1" arrangement is to be stopped at the effective line (upper row).
Then, at the middle third stop, "Bell A" is stopped at the effective line (middle stage).
On the other hand, when it is the second middle stop after the first right stop, "Bell A" is stopped at the effective line (middle stage).
Next, at the third stop on the left, either "Red 7", "Replay" or "Black BAR" is stopped. In this case, similarly to the above, it may be determined that the "replay" in the "PB=1" arrangement is to be stopped at the effective line (upper row).

As mentioned above, when the small role A1 condition device is activated during 1BB gaming,
Press order 123: Small role 01 prize (15 pieces)
Press order 132: Small role 17 prizes (3 pieces)
Press order 213: Small role 14 prizes (3 pieces)
Press order 231: Small role 14 prizes (3 pieces)
Press order 312: Small role 14 prizes (3 pieces)
Press order 321: Small role 14 prizes (3 pieces)
becomes.

Furthermore, when the winning number "10" is won during a normal game (during a non-special game), there is no correct pressing order, so the reels 31 are controlled to stop based on number priority.
For example, if you win the winning number "10" during a normal game and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "123", at the first stop on the left, the "Replay" will be stopped at the active line (upper row) due to number of pieces priority. let
Next, at the time of the middle second stop, either "Bell A" or "Blue BAR/Black BAR/Red 7/Top Top" is stopped. Here, if you stop "Blue BAR/Black BAR/Red 7/Special Map Top" related to small winning combination 16 on the active line, when the right reel 31 stops, "Blue BAR" will be placed in "PB≠1". Therefore, there is a possibility that it may not be possible to stop on the effective line. Therefore, at the middle second stop, "Bell A" is stopped at the effective line (middle stage).
Next, at the third stop on the right, "Bell A/Bell B" is stopped at the effective line (lower stage). This results in a prize of 14 small winnings.

4. When winning a small role (when the pressing order is correct when winning the pressing order bell)
Next, updating of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) at the time of stop operation of each stop switch 42 when a small winning combination is won will be explained.
In this example, in FIG. 124, the winning number "10" is won during a 1BB game, and in a game in which the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, the stop switch is operated with the correct pressing order "123", and the winning number is 15 pieces. It is assumed that the small role 01 wins.
In addition, the left stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol with symbol number "8" is passing through the middle row of the left reel 31, and after that, the symbol with symbol number "8" is passing through the middle row of the middle reel 31. When the middle stop switch 42 was operated, and then when the symbol with symbol number "2" was passing through the middle stage of the right reel 31, the right stop switch 42 was operated.
Symbol control number when left reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 9 (Bell A)
Symbol control number when middle reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 10 (Bell A)
Symbol control number when right reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 4 (Bell A)
shall each cease.
In this case, the symbol combination on the active line is "Watermelon (No. 11)" - "Cherry (No. 11)" - "Bell A (No. 4)".
In addition, the initial value of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000011 (B)"
It is.

4-1. When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "9 (D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000011 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011010(B)" at the address "1234(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00011010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00011010(B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000011(B)" of the address "122F(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000011 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000011 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, symbol combination data "00000010(B)" of address "122A(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, symbol combination data ``11001011(B)'' of address 1223(H)'' is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11001011 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "11001011 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) (00001111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, symbol combination data "01000000(B)" of address "1219(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "01000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the left stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "01000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11001011 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000010 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000011 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00011010 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"

4-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above,
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE): 10 (Bell A)
Symbol that stops on the active line: "Cherry (No. 11)"
shall be.
In this case, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "10 (D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, symbol combination data "00000001(B)" at address "128E(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000001 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, symbol combination data "00110000(B)" of address "1289(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00110000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00011010 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00010000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010(B)" of the address "127F(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000011 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("00000010 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, symbol combination data "01000001(B)" of address "125E(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01000001 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("11001011 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "01000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000110(B)" at the address "1259(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000110 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, symbol combination data "00011000(B)" at address "1253(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00011000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("01000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000(B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000(B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the result is determined as "Yes", so that the setting of the stopped symbols is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop pattern data when the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop is as follows.
Stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "01000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000010 (B)"
Stop symbol data (Group 8) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00010000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
Therefore, at the time of the second stop operation, the winning combinations that have the possibility of winning are small combination 01, small combination 07, small combination 18, and small combination 29.

4-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped When the right stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above,
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE): 4 (Bell A)
Symbol that stops on the active line: “Bell A (No. 4)”
shall be.
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "4" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010(B)" at the address "12DE(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001000 (B)" of the address "12D7 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00010000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000(B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000010 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001100(B)" of the address "12C4(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001100 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001101(B)" of the address "12BA(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001101 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("01000001 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "10100010(B)" of the address "12AB(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10100010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000(B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000(B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. )(_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000(B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the right stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, when the left reel 31 stops, "Watermelon" stops on the active line, when the middle reel 31 stops, "Cherry" stops on the active line, and when the right reel 31 stops, "Bell" stops on the active line. It can be seen that when "A" stops, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 01 stops on the active line.

5. When a small prize is won (when the push order is incorrect when winning the push order bell)
In this example, in FIG. 124, during general play of 1BB game, the winning number is determined to be "10", and in a game in which the minor prize A1 condition device is activated, the stop switch is operated with the incorrect button sequence of "321", and the symbol combination of "Replay"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" for minor prize 14, which is a 3-coin prize as in the above example, is won.
In addition, the left stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol with the symbol number "1" is passing through the middle row of the left reel 31, the middle stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol with the symbol number "7" is passing through the middle row of the middle reel 31, and the right stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol with the symbol number "19" is passing through the middle row of the right reel 31 (the pressing order is right → middle → left).
Symbol control number when the left reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 3 (black BAR)
Symbol control number when center reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 9 (replay)
Symbol control number when the right reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 0 (Bell B)
shall each be stopped.
In this case, the symbol combination on the valid line will be "Replay (No. 5)"-"Bell A (No. 10)"-"Bell B (No. 0)."
In addition, the initial value of the stop pattern data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (Group 6) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (Group 8) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (Group 9) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000011 (B)"
It is.

5-1. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped When the right stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above,
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE): 0 (Bell B)
Symbols that stop on the active line: “Bell B (number 0)”
shall be.
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "0" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000011 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, symbol combination data "01110011(B)" of address "12C5(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "0" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("11111111(B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "01110011 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "01000000(B)" of the address "12BB(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "01000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, symbol combination data "00000100(B)" of address "12B3(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000100 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("0001111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000100 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011000(B)" of the address "12AC(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00011000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00011000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. )(_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000(B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the right stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00011000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000100 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "01000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "01110011 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"

5-2. When the center stop switch 42 is operated to stop When the center reel 31 stops, as described above,
Pattern control number (_BF_PICTURE): 9 (replay)
Symbols that stop on an active line: Bell A (number 10)
It is assumed that.
In this case, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "8 (D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010(B)" at the address "128D(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000(B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "11000000 (B)" at the address "1286 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "01100100(B)" of the address "127D(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01100100 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "01111011(B)" at the address "1275(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01111011 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("01110011 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "01110011 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, symbol combination data "10101110(B)" of address "125D(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10101110 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("01000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("00000100 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, "00000000(B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("00011000 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000(B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000(B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000(B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000(B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the result is determined as "Yes", so that the setting of the stopped symbols is terminated.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the middle stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "01110011 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"

5-3. When the left stop switch 42 is stopped When the left stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above,
Pattern control number (_BF_PICTURE): 3 (black BAR)
Symbols that stop on the active line: "Replay (No. 5)"
shall be.
In this case, when the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "3 (D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In step S1033 (first time), "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "11000001 (B)" at the address "1233 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11000001 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "11001100(B)" at the address "122E(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11001100 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10100000(B)" at the address "1228(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10100000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("01110011 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00100000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000(B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BB (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000(B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000(B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000(B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, symbol combination data "00000100(B)" of address "121D(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000100 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000110 (B)" at the address "1217 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000110 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("00000000 (B)") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the left stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00100000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
Therefore, the data indicates that the small winning combination 14 has won.

By determining the stop symbol data as described above, even if a power outage occurs, the game can be restarted correctly using the already stored stop symbol data after recovering from the power outage.
For example, as shown in FIG. 194, when it is decided to determine the stop position ("Yes" in step S1017), the stop position is determined and the stop symbol data is updated (step S1035 in FIG. 195). ) (the stop symbol set in step S1024 in FIG. 194) is completed. Even if a voltage of 12V is applied, the interrupt processing is not executed (by the interrupt wait processing), so the determination of the stop position and the stopping The symbol data is updated. Therefore, even if the power-off process is executed after the process and the reels 31 do not stop at the determined stop position, the stop symbol data has already been updated, so when the power is restored afterwards, Normal payout processing can be executed.

In addition, when all reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, even if multiple stop switches 42 are operated simultaneously, the operation of only one stop switch 42 is accepted. Therefore, for example, when the voltage drops to a level at which power-off processing is executed between the time when it is decided to determine the stop position (when "Yes" is selected in step S1017 of FIG. 194) and the time when the stop position is determined and processing including updating the stop pattern data (step S1035 of FIG. 195) is completed (stop pattern setting in step S1024 of FIG. 194), even if the reel 31 does not stop at the determined stop position, since there is only one reel 31, it is possible to avoid a situation in which multiple reels 31 do not stop at the determined stop position.

Furthermore, even if, for example, a power outage occurs after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 31 is operated under a situation where all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, and the power outage process is executed. , Since the stop symbol data has been updated, after the power is restored, the stop symbol data is updated based on the stop operation of the middle reel 31 and the stop operation of the right reel 31 using the stop symbol data before the power cut. update can be resumed (games can be resumed).

Generally, the data that can be held in one register is 1 byte data, and there are seven types of general-purpose registers that can be used in the 1-chip microprocessor (Z80) of the gaming machine (main control board 50). In this way, in order to hold symbol combination data having a number of stopped symbol data exceeding the types of general-purpose registers (nine in this embodiment), it is necessary to store the stopped symbol data in the RWM 53. be.
If the stop symbol data is stored in the general-purpose register, if the power is cut off and then the power is restored, the stop symbol data (value stored in the general-purpose register) will be cleared (set to the initial value). (For example, it is set to "0".) Therefore, when stopping symbol data is stored in a general-purpose register, if a power outage occurs after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 31 is operated, and the power outage process is executed, after the power is restored, , there is a high possibility that the game will not be able to be resumed.
Furthermore, when the stop symbol data is stored in the RWM 53, the stop symbol data is updated each time the stop switch 42 is operated. This can be confirmed by inspecting the stopped symbol data.

As described above, when a symbol combination that stops on the active line is specified, the number of payouts is determined based on the stopped symbol data.
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing one line display determination (M_LINE_JUDGE). This process is executed after all reels 31 have stopped and before the payout process. For example, this corresponds to the process of step S291 in FIG. 139.
Through this process, the payout number is determined from the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC).
In FIG. 200, in step S1101, a payout number table is set. This process is a process of storing the top address "1400 (H)" of the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) shown in FIG. 193 in the HL register.

Next, the process advances to step S1102, and the stop symbol data 5 ("5" means the fifth group) RWM address is set. This process is a process of storing the address "F0BB(H)" of the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) in the DE register.
In this embodiment, there is no winning combination in the stopped symbol data (first group) to the stopped symbol data (fourth group), and there is no winning combination in the stopped symbol data (first group) to the stopped symbol data (fourth group). Only in Group 9) there is a combination that has a payout when winning. Therefore, in order to determine whether any bit of the stop symbol data (fifth group) to stop symbol data (ninth group) is "1", the stop symbol data (fifth group) is set as an initial value. group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5).

Next, the process advances to step S1103, and specified data acquisition (M_SELDAT_SET) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 201, which will be described later, and is a process for identifying specified data corresponding to the number of payouts from the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL).
Next, the process advances to step S1104, and data on the number of coins to be paid out is saved. Here, at the end of the process in step S1103, a value corresponding to the number of coins to be paid out is stored in the A register. Therefore, this process is a process of storing the A register value in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F023(H)".
Next, the process advances to step S1105, and the payout number buffer is saved. This process is a process of storing the A register value in the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F024(H)". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing specified data acquisition (M_SELDAT_SET) in step S1103 in FIG. For reference, FIG. 201 also shows the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) shown in FIG. 193.
In FIG. 201, in step S1111, the number of inspections is set. This process is a process of storing data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the B register. The HL register value is "1400 (H)" and the data stored at address "1400 (H)" is "6 (H)", so "6 (H)" is stored in the B register. Ru.
When inspecting the number of dispensed sheets,
1st time: 15 pieces of stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (11111111 (B))
2nd time: 15 pieces of stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) (00001111 (B))
3rd time: 3-piece combination of stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) (11110000 (B))
4th time: Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) 3-piece combination (11111111 (B))
5th time: 1 piece of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) (11111111 (B))
6th time: 1 piece of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) (00000011 (B))
The number of inspections is set to ``6'' because the inspection is performed a maximum of 6 times.

In the next step S1112, the table address is updated. In this process, "1" is added to the HL register value, and the value after adding "1" is set as the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value becomes "1401 (H)".
Next, the process advances to step S1113 and table data is acquired. This process is a process of storing data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register. In the first step S1113, the HL register value is "1401(H)", so the data stored at address "1401(H)" is "0*32+15" (actually, "00001111(B )'') is stored in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S1114, and the A register value is divided by "32(D)". Then, the quotient is stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the C register. As a result, the first time, the A register value is "0" and the C register value is "15 (D)". This C register value corresponds to the number of coins to be paid out when there is a winning combination.

Next, the process advances to step S1115 and RWM data is acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the DE register value (address value of stopped symbol data) to the A register, and let the result of the addition be the DE register value.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the DE register value in the A register.
Therefore, in the first step S1115, the DE register value is "F0BB(H)" stored in step S1102 in FIG. 200, and the A register value is "0", so the DE register value after addition is It is “F0BB(H)”.
Next, if the data (stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) stored at the address indicated by "F0BB(H)" is, for example, "00000001(B)", the A register value is "00000001(B)". )”.

Next, the process advances to step S1116, and the table address is updated. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add "1" to the HL register value, and use the result after adding "1" as the HL register value. In the first step S1116, the HL register value before this process is "1401 (H)", so by adding "1", the HL register value becomes "1402 (H)".
(2) AND (logical product) is performed between the A register value and the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. If the result of the AND operation is "0", the zero flag becomes "1", and if it is not "0", the zero flag does not become "1".
Here, the value "@_PIC5" stored at the address "1402(H)" corresponds to the value where all bits of the stop symbol data (fifth group) are set to "1" (see FIG. 176). Therefore, by ANDing this value and the A register value (the actual value of the stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)), it can be determined whether any of the winning combinations in the 5th group has won. It becomes possible.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1117, where the acquired data is set. This is a process for storing the C register value in the A register.
In the next step S1118, it is determined whether or not there is designated data. Here, if the zero flag is not "1" (as a result of the calculation in step S1116), it is determined that there is designated data. If it is determined that there is designated data, the process according to this flowchart ends, and if it is determined that there is no designated data, the process proceeds to step S1119.

In step S1119, it is determined whether the number of tests has been completed. In this process, if the result of subtracting "1" from the B register value is not "0", it is determined to be "No" (the number of tests has not been completed). If it is determined that the number of tests has been completed, the process proceeds to step S1120, and if it is determined that the number of tests has not been completed, the process returns to step S1112.
In step S1120, "no acquired data" is set. This process stores the value of register B in register A. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Here, when the process proceeds to step S1120, the number of inspections has been completed, so the B register value is "0". Therefore, the A register value becomes "0". This A register value corresponds to the number of coins to be paid out. In this way, when a symbol combination with no number of coins to be paid out is stopped and displayed, it is possible to use the data "0" for the number of inspections to store the number of coins to be paid out.

Next, the one-line display determination shown in FIG. 200 will be explained using a specific example.
In this example, it is assumed that the small winning combination 19 has won (the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 19 has stopped).
Therefore, before the 1-line display judgment is executed,
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): 00000000 (B)
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): 00000000 (B)
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): 00000100 (B)
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): 00000000 (B)
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): 00000000 (B)
It becomes.
Furthermore, even if the symbol combination actually stopped on the active line is different from the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 19 due to a malfunction of the motor 32 or a power cut, the stopped symbol data (7th group) ( Since the data stored in _WK_STOP_PIC7) is "00000100(B)", payout control corresponding to the small winning combination 19 can be executed.

In this case, in step S1101 (set payout number table) in FIG. 200, "1400 (H)" is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1102 (stop symbol data 5RWM address set), "F0BB (H)" is stored in the DE register value.
When the process proceeds to step S1103 (obtain designated data), the process proceeds to step S1111 (set number of inspections) in FIG. 201, and "6" is stored in the B register value.
In the next step S1112 (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1401 (H)".
In the next step S1113 (table data acquisition), data "15 (D)" stored at address "1401 (H)" is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1114 (division), the A register value "15 (D)" is divided by "32 (D)", the quotient "0" is stored in the A register, and the remainder "15 (D)" is stored in the C register. to be memorized.
In the next step S1115 (RWM data acquisition), the A register value "0" is added to the DE register value "F0BB(H)", so the DE register value remains "F0BB(H)".
Next, the data (stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) "00000000 (B)" stored at the address "F0BB (H)" is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1116 (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1402 (H)".
Furthermore, AND (logical product) is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the value "11111111 (B)" stored at the address indicated by the HL register value "1402 (H)". As a result, the zero flag becomes "1".
In step S1117 (obtained data set), the C register value "15 (D)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1118 (specified data available?), since the zero flag is "1", it is determined as "No", and the process advances to step S1119.
In step S1119 (Is the number of tests completed?), "1" is subtracted from the B register value and updated to "5". Since the B register value is not "0", the determination is "No" and the process returns to step S1112.

In step S1112 (second time) (table address update), the HL register value is set to "1403 (H)".
In the next step S1113 (table data acquisition), data "47(D)" stored at address "1403(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1114 (division), the A register value "47 (D)" is divided by "32 (D)". As a result, the quotient "1 (D)" is stored in the A register, and the remainder "15 (D)" is stored in the C register.
In step S1115 (RWM data acquisition), the A register value "1 (H)" is added to the DE register value "F0BB (H)" to make the DE register value "F0BC (H)".
Then, the data stored in "F0BC(H)" (data "00000000(B)" of stop symbol data (sixth group)) is stored in the A register.

In step S1116 (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1404 (H)".
Further, the A register value "00000000(B)" and the value "00001111(B)" stored at the address "1404(H)" indicated by the HL register value are ANDed. As a result, the zero flag becomes "1".
In step S1117 (obtained data set), the C register value "15 (D)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1118 (specified data available?), since the zero flag is "1", it is determined as "No", and the process advances to step S1119.
In step S1119 (Is the number of tests completed?), the B register value is subtracted by "1" and updated to "4". Since the B register value is not "0", the determination is "No" and the process returns to step S1112.

In step S1112 (third time) (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1405 (H)".
In the next step S1113 (table data acquisition), data "3(D)" stored at address "1405(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1114 (division), "3(D)" is divided by "32(D)". As a result, the quotient "0" is stored in the A register, and the remainder "3 (D)" is stored in the C register.
In step S1115 (RWM data acquisition), the A register value "0(H)" is added to the DE register value "F0BC(H)" to set the DE register value to "F0BC(H)".
Then, the data stored in "F0BC(H)" (data "00000000(B)" of stop symbol data (sixth group)) is stored in the A register.

In step S1116 (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1406 (H)".
Further, the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the value "11110000 (B)" stored at the address "1406 (H)" indicated by the HL register value are ANDed. As a result, the zero flag becomes "1".
In step S1117, the C register value "3(D)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1118, since the zero flag is "1", the determination is "No", and the process advances to step S1119.
In step S1119, the B register value is subtracted by "1" and updated to "3". Since the B register value is not "0", the determination is "No" and the process returns to step S1112.

In step S1112 (fourth time) (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1407 (H)".
In the next step S1113 (table data acquisition), data "35 (D)" stored at address "1407 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1114 (division), "35(D)" is divided by "32(D)". As a result, the quotient "1" is stored in the A register, and the remainder "3 (D)" is stored in the C register.
In step S1115 (RWM data acquisition), the A register value "1 (H)" is added to the DE register value "F0BC (H)" to set the DE register value to "F0BD (H)".
Then, the data stored in "F0BD(H)" (data "00000100(B)" of stop symbol data (seventh group)) is stored in the A register.

In step S1116 (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1408 (H)".
Further, the A register value "00000100 (B)" and the value "11111111 (B)" stored at the address "1408 (H)" indicated by the HL register value are ANDed (logical product). As a result, the zero flag becomes "0".
In step S1117, the C register value "3(D)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1118, since the zero flag is "0", it is determined that designated data exists, and the process advances to step S1104 in FIG. 200. Note that, at this point, "3(D)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1104 of FIG. 200, the A register value "3 (D)" is stored in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at the address "F023 (H)".
In the next step S1105, the A register value "3(D)" is stored in the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F024(H)".
Through the above processing, when the small winning combination 17 is won, the payout number "3 (D)" is stored in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) and the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL).

As described above, first, it is determined whether any of the symbol combinations that make up the 15-card winning combination is stopped and displayed, and it is determined that any of the symbol combinations that make up the 15-card winning combination are not stopped and displayed. If so, then it is determined whether any symbol combination constituting a three-card combination has been stopped and displayed. In addition, in the above example, it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination 19 that forms the 3-card winning combination is stopped and displayed, so that the subsequent processing is not executed. If it is determined that any of the symbol combinations to be played is not stopped and displayed, then it is determined whether or not any of the symbol combinations constituting the one-card winning combination are stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, it is determined whether any of the symbol combinations constituting the 15-card winning combination has been stopped and displayed, and if it is determined that any symbol combination making up the 15-card winning combination has been stopped and displayed, the 3-card winning combination is It is not determined whether any of the constituent symbol combinations are stopped and displayed. With this configuration, processing time can be shortened.

In addition, whether or not any of the symbol combinations constituting the 15-piece combination is displayed in a stopped state can be determined using the two addresses of the stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) and the stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6). The judgment is made based on the data (however, for the stop symbol data (sixth group), some bit data of the address). In this way, if symbol combination data that gives the same number of payouts cannot be stored in one address, by arranging consecutive addresses, it is possible to continuously check whether there is symbol combination data that pays out, for example, 15 pieces. You can make a judgment. In other words, between the stopped symbol data (fifth group) and the stopped symbol data (sixth group), there is an address for storing symbol combination data constituting a 3-card winning combination and symbol combination data constituting a 1-card winning combination. has not been established.

Furthermore, since the bits are consecutive for the same payout amount in the same address, for example, if the bit for 15 coins is "X" and the bit for 3 coins is "Y", the bit "Y" is not placed between multiple bits "X" as in "XXXYYXXX(B)". If the bit "X" for 15 coins and the bit "Y" for 3 coins are placed in the same address, they are placed as, for example, "XXXXXYYY(B)" or "YYYXXXXX(B)".
By arranging the bits in this manner, it is possible to prevent errors in the number of coins paid out during the development stage.
Also, by judging from the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. For example, even if the winning number is actually determined to be "10" and the symbol combination corresponding to the small role 01 is stopped and displayed, and not only the bit corresponding to the small role 01 but also the bit corresponding to the small role 25 is "1" due to noise, when judging from the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts, the judgment of the payout number is terminated at the point when it is judged that the symbol combination corresponding to the small role 01 is stopped and displayed, so that 15 coins corresponding to the small role 01 can be paid out.

FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing RB operation management in the twenty-fifth embodiment. This process corresponds to step S944 in FIG. 148 (23rd embodiment). As shown in FIG. 148, in the game completion check process (M_GAME_CHK), if the RB operation state flag is not "0"("No" in step S943), RB operation management is executed.
In the example shown in FIG. 202, the number of winnings during RB operation is updated based on the stopped symbol data.
In FIG. 202, in step S1201, it is determined whether the RB is in operation. Here, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is "1", and when it is "1", it is determined that the RB is in operation. When it is determined that the RB is in operation, the process advances to step S1201, and when it is determined that the RB is not in operation, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S1202, "1" is subtracted from the number of games played when the RB is activated. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the number of games played during RB operation (_CT_BONUS_PLAY).
In the next step S1203, it is determined whether the number of games played during the RB operation is "0". In this process, it is determined whether or not the zero flag has become "1" in the process of step S1202, and when the zero flag is "1", it means that the number of games during the RB operation has become "0".
If the number of games played during RB operation is not "0", the process advances to step S1204, and if it is "0", the process advances to step S1211.

In the next step S1204, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step S1205; if it is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1209.
In step S1205, it is determined whether the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step S1206, and if it is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1209.
In the next step S1206, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol data (seventh group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step S1207, and if it is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1209.
In step S1207, it is determined whether the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step S1208, and if it is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1209.
Next, in step S1208, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) is 0. If it is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1209, and if it is 0, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S1209, the number of winnings when the RB is activated is decremented by one. This is a process for decrementing the number of winnings when the RB is activated (_CT_BONUS_WIN) by one.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1210, where it is determined whether the number of winnings when the RB was activated has become "0." This process determines whether the zero flag has become "1" in the process of step S1209, and if the zero flag is "1," this means that the number of winnings when the RB was activated has become "0."
If the number of winnings when the RB is activated is not "0", the process according to this flowchart ends, and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1211.

When the process advances to step S1211, the RB operation state flag is cleared because the RB operation termination condition is satisfied. This process is a process of setting the D4 bit of the operating state flag to "0". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
As described above, when updating the number of winnings during RB operation, it is possible to update using the stopped symbol data (fifth group) to stopped symbol data (ninth group). If any of the stopped symbol data (fifth group) to stopped symbol data (ninth group) is not "0", it means that a winning combination (in this embodiment, any of the minor winning combinations 01 to 34) that has a payout has been won. This is because the condition for updating the number of winnings when RB is activated is satisfied.

<26th embodiment>
The twenty-sixth embodiment shows a modification of the twenty-fifth embodiment.
Furthermore, in the 26th embodiment, the symbol arrangement, the type of winning combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination, and the definition data (FIGS. 176 to 179) are the same as in the 25th embodiment.
FIG. 203 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RWM 53 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. The types of RWM 53 in FIG. 203 are those used in the following explanation, and are not meant to be limited to these.
In FIG. 203, the same storage areas as in the twenty-fifth embodiment (FIGS. 173 to 175) have the same addresses. The description of the storage areas at the same addresses as in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be omitted unless particularly necessary.

The symbol array address buffers 1 to 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1 to 3) indicated by addresses “F0A0(H)” to “F0A5(H)” are storage areas that store addresses for specifying symbol combination data when the reels 31 are stopped. It is. The symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1) for "F0A0(H)" and "F0A1(H)" is for the first (left) reel 31, and the symbols for "F0A2(H)" and "F0A3(H)" The array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2) is for the second (middle) reel 31, and the symbol array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3) for "F0A4 (H)" and "F0A5 (H)" is for the third (right) reel. It is for 31.
When the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the leading address "1200 (H)" of the symbol control data table (TBL_PIC_DAT) (described later) is stored in the symbol array address buffer.
Further, when accepting a stop, any address of the # reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_#) (described later) is stored in the symbol array address buffer.

In FIG. 204, (A) is a diagram showing the symbol control data table (TBL_PIC_DAT), and (B) is a diagram showing the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH).
The data stored in each address of the symbol control data table corresponds to the initial values of the stop symbol data (first group) to stop symbol data (ninth group) of the twenty-fifth embodiment.
The symbol groups (first group to ninth group) in the twenty-sixth embodiment are the same as those in the twenty-fifth embodiment. That is,
Group 1: RBA to RBH
Group 2: RBJ to RBP
Group 3: 1BB, Replay 01 to Replay 07
Group 4: Replay 08 to Replay 10 (D0 to D2), unused (D3 to D7)
Group 5: Small role 01 to small role 08
Group 6: Small role 09 to small role 16
Group 7: Small roles 17 to 24
Group 8: Small role 25 to small role 32
Group 9: Minor roles 33 to 34 (D0 to D1), unused (D2 to D7)
It becomes.

For example, "11111111 (B)" is stored in the address "1200 (H)", and this value corresponds to the initial value "11111111 (B)" of the stop symbol data (first group).
Therefore, the D4 to D7 bits of the data at address "1203(H)" (4th group of symbols) and the D2 to D7 bits of the data at address "1208(H)" (9th group of symbols) are "0". The other bits are "1".

The reel symbol search table address offset table is a data table for specifying the start address of the # reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_#).
The details will be explained later, but
1st reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1): Address “1300 (H)” ~ “13B3 (H)”
2nd reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2): Address “13B4 (H)” to “1467 (H)”
3rd reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3): Address “1468(H)” to “151B(H)”
It consists of
In the reel symbol search table address offset table, the address value immediately before the top address of the #th reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_#) is specified.

FIGS. 205 to 209 are diagrams showing the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1).
Further, FIGS. 210 to 214 are diagrams showing the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2).
Furthermore, FIGS. 215 to 219 are diagrams showing the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3).
The # reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_#) shows, for each reel 31, which role is the symbol of the symbol number that corresponds to the symbol of the # reel 31 for the symbol number of the symbol that stops on the active line. This is defined for all groups 1 to 9.
The symbol combination data stored in each address of these # reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_#) is the symbol combination stored in each address of the # reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_#) in the 25th embodiment. It is similar to data.

Regarding the left reel 31, when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol on the active line corresponds to symbol number 2, "Cherry". Therefore, after address "1300(H)",
Address "1300 (H)" - "1308 (H)": 2nd symbol "Cherry" (1st group - 9th group)
Address “1309(H)” to “1311(H)”: No. 3 pattern “Blue BAR” (1st group to 9th group)
Address “1312(H)” to “131A(H)”: No. 4 pattern “Bell A” (1st group to 9th group)
:
Address “1399 (H)” ~ “13A1 (H)”: No. 19 pattern “Bell A” (1st group to 9th group)
Address “13A2(H)” to “13AA(H)”: No. 0 symbol “Replay” (1st group to 9th group)
Address “13AB(H)” to “13B3(H)”: No. 1 pattern “Watermelon” (1st group to 9th group)
The first reel symbol search table is configured in this order.

Further, nine addresses are assigned to each symbol, and each corresponds to the first to ninth groups. For example, in the second pattern "cherry",
Address "1300 (H)" is the first group,
Address “1301(H)” is the second group,
:
Address "1308(H)" is assigned to the 9th group.
Therefore, in the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1), the number of symbols "20" x the number of symbol groups "9" = "180" addresses (1300 (H) to 13B3 (H)) are assigned. The same applies to the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) and the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3).

Furthermore, the symbol combination data stored in each address is such that when the symbol of the symbol number stops on the active line when the reel 31 stops, the symbols constituting the symbol combination of which role in the Nth group of symbols It determines what it can become.
For example, the symbol combination data for the address "1300 (H)" is "0", but this means that when the left reel 31 stops and the number 2 "Cherry" stops on the active line, the first group's winning combination (RBA ~RBH) means that it cannot be a symbol that constitutes a symbol combination.
On the other hand, the symbol combination data of address "1307(H)" (eighth group) is "@WIN_27 OR WIN_30" (00100100(B)). Therefore, when the number 2 "cherry" stops when the left reel 31 stops, it means that it can become a symbol that constitutes the symbol combination of the small winning combination 27 and the small winning combination 30 among the winnings in the 8th group. (See Figure 121).
Therefore, the same symbols on the same reel 31 have the same symbol combination data. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 205, addresses "131B(H)" to "1323(H)" store symbol combination data for the 5th symbol "Replay", but the same "Replay" symbol A certain address "1348 (H)" to "1350 (H)" (10th symbol "Replay"), address "1375 (H)" to "137D (H)" (15th symbol "Replay"), address "13A2" (H)” to “13AA(H)” (number 0 symbol “Replay”) are also the same as the symbol combination data of addresses “131B(H)” to “1323(H)”.

As described above, the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) stores symbol combination data starting from the second symbol (cherry). This is because when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol on the active line on the left reel 31 is number 2.
On the other hand, in the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) shown in FIGS. 210 to 214, symbol combination data is stored starting from the number 1 symbol "Cherry". This is because when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol on the active line on the middle reel 31 is number 1.
Similarly, in the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3), symbol combination data is stored starting from the 0th symbol "Bell B". This is because when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol on the active line on the right reel 31 is number 0.
In this way, the symbol data to be stored in the left, middle, and right reel symbol search tables is stored with an offset (difference) (shifting the symbol number). By doing so, there is no need to perform correction (add or subtract the difference) for each acquired control symbol number (BF_PICTURE). Therefore, it is possible to simplify program processing and reduce the capacity of the ROM 54.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 229 (Example 2 of the 27th embodiment) described later, in each symbol arrangement table of the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31, symbol data with symbol number "0" There is also a method in which the difference data corresponding to each reel 31 is stored in order. When acquiring the symbol data, the symbol data of the symbol on the active line is acquired by adding or subtracting the difference data of the reel 31 to the symbol number of the symbol stopped at the reference position. In this case, even if there is a change in the effective line, it is only necessary to change the difference data, so the number of development steps can be reduced.

115, the pay lines in this embodiment are as shown in Fig. 115, and therefore the offset (difference) in each of the left, center, and right reel symbol search tables is set as follows: the left reel 31 is set to "+2", the center reel 31 is set to "+1", and the right reel 31 is set to "0". In other words, the offset value indicates the amount of deviation (number of steps) between the position of the pay line and the reference position.
Therefore, for example, when the control pattern number (BF_PICTURE) indicates a pattern that will stop in the bottom row and the active line is "left middle row"-"middle middle row"-"right middle row", each offset in the left, middle and right reel pattern search tables will be "+1".
Also, for example, when the control pattern number (BF_PICTURE) indicates a pattern that stops in the middle row and the active line is "left middle row"-"middle middle row"-"right middle row", no offset is required (or "0") in the left, middle and right reel pattern search tables.

Next, a specific example of the symbol array address buffer in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be explained.
For example, assume that "Replay (No. 5)" - "Cherry (No. 16)" - "Bell B (No. 0)" stops on the valid line.
In this case, the symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1) contains the address "131A(H)" which is the one before the start address "131B(H)" of the 5th symbol (replay) in the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1). ' is memorized.
In addition, the symbol array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2) contains the address "143A (H)" which is the one before the start address "143B (H)" of the 16th symbol (cherry) in the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2). is memorized.
Furthermore, the symbol array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3) contains the address "1467 (H)" which is the one before the start address "1468 (H)" of the symbol No. 0 (Bell B) in the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3). )” is memorized.
Note that the process by which the above value is stored will be described later.

220 and 221 are diagrams showing the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) in the twenty-sixth embodiment.
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, one address is provided for each combination, and the number of payouts is stored. Set the address "1600 (H)" to the payout number of RBA of symbol group 1 as "0", and sequentially write the addresses of all the roles of symbol group 1, all the symbols of symbol group 2, ..., all the symbols of symbol group 9. The number of payouts is stored in each machine.
In addition, in the 4th symbol group, in order to correspond to the bits, the addresses "1618(H)" to "161A(H)" are set to Replay 08, Replay 09, and Replay 10 corresponding to the D0 to D2 bits, and the address "161B( H)" to "161F(H)" are unused areas corresponding to bits D3 to D7.
For example, when winning a small winning combination 01, the address "1620 (H)" is specified, and "15 (D)" stored in the address "1620 (H)" is the number of coins to be paid out. Stored in data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL).

Next, the control process in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to a flowchart.
Fig. 222 is a flowchart showing main processing in the 26th embodiment. The flowchart in Fig. 222 mainly shows processing related to the 26th embodiment, and does not mean that only the processing shown in Fig. 222 is performed.
The main processing is a process that is executed by the main control board 50 once per game, and corresponds to, for example, FIG. 139 of the twenty-third embodiment.
In FIG. 222, the game start processing of step S1131 corresponds to steps S271 and S272 in FIG. 139, and executes update processing of the operating state flag, etc. (see, for example, FIG. 42).
In the next step S1132, medal acceptance start processing is executed. This processing is, for example, the processing shown in steps S273 to S276 in Fig. 139, and includes processing for detecting whether medals have been inserted or whether the bet switch 40 has been operated, and processing for updating the number of bets when medals have been inserted or the bet switch 40 has been operated.

In the next step S1133, start switch acceptance processing is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 223, which will be described later, and executes the same process as step S751 in FIG. 139. Specifically, when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, a predetermined lottery process or the like is executed. However, in FIG. 223, which will be described later, the process shown in FIG. 140 is simplified.
Next, the process advances to step S1134, and rotation of the reel 31 is started. In the next step S1135, reel stop control is performed. This process is shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and is a process for stopping the corresponding reel 31 at a predetermined position based on the winning number when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected.
In the next step S1136, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped (corresponding to step S289 in FIG. 139), and when it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process advances to step S1137, and all reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that there is no such information, the process returns to step S1135.

In step S1137, display determination processing is performed. This process is shown in FIG. 227, which will be described later, and corresponds to step 291 in FIG. 139.
In the next step S1138, a game end check process is performed. This process corresponds to step 753 in FIG. 139. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the start switch reception process in step S1133 of FIG. 222.
In FIG. 223, in step S1141, a game start process is executed. This process is a process for executing a lottery for winning numbers (combinations), a lottery for advantageous sections (AT), etc., and corresponds to the process including steps S761 to S768 in FIG. 140.
In the next step S1142, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 224, which will be described later, and is a process for setting initial values in the above-mentioned symbol array address buffers 1 to 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1 to 3). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the reel rotation start preparation process in step S1142 of FIG. 223.
In FIG. 224, in step S1151, a symbol control data table (TBL_PIC_DAT) is set. This process is a process of storing the start address "1200 (H)" of the symbol control data table in the HL register.
Next, the process advances to step S1152, and the address of the symbol control data table is stored in the symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1). This process is a process of storing the HL register value (1200 (H)) in the symbol array address buffer 1 at the address "F0A0 (H)".
In the next step S1153, the address of the symbol control data table is stored in the symbol array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2). This process is a process of storing the HL register value (1200 (H)) in the symbol array address buffer 2 at address "F0A2 (H)".
In the next step S1154, the address of the symbol control data table is stored in the symbol array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3). This process is a process of storing the HL register value (1200 (H)) in the symbol array address buffer 3 at address "F0A4 (H)". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
With the above processing, the initial value at the start of reel rotation is
Symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1): 1200 (H)
Symbol array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2): 1200 (H)
Symbol array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3): 1200 (H)
is memorized.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the reel stop control in step S1135 of FIG. 222.
225, in step S1161, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 42 has been operated for the spinning reel 31. Details of this process will not be described, but as shown in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment, when input port rising data A is detected and the rising data of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the spinning reel 31 is turned on, the determination in step S1161 is "Yes."
If it is determined in step S1161 that the stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1162, and if it is determined that the stop switch 42 has not been operated, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S1162, a value corresponding to the (operated) stop switch 42 is stored in the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL). For example, if it is the left stop switch 42, "1" is stored.
In the next step S1163, a stop symbol determination process is executed. This process is a process for determining the stop position of the reel 31 based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated, the winning number in the game, etc. By this process, the symbol number to be stopped in the middle row is stored in the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC).
In the next step S1164, the symbol number is stored in the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE). In this process, "1" is subtracted from the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) to calculate and store the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE). Note that in this calculation, when "1" is subtracted from "0", a special calculation is executed to become "19 (D)".
Next, the process proceeds to step S1165, where the symbol arrangement address buffer is set. This process is shown in Fig. 226, which will be described later, and is a process for obtaining and storing the reel symbol arrangement table address. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the symbol array address buffer set in step S1165 of FIG. 225.
In FIG. 226, in step S1171, stop/control reel number data is acquired. This process is a process of storing the value stored in the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S1172, and the RWM address is set in the symbol array address buffer according to the stop/control reel number data. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value and the A register value, and use the result of the addition as the A register value. In other words, this process is a process of doubling the A register value.
(2) Store the address "F09E (H)" value, which is shifted by "2" addresses from the address "F0A0 (H)" of the symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1), in the DE register.
(3) Add the A register value to the DE register value. The result of the addition is set as the DE register value.
As a result, for example, when the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) is "1", the DE register value becomes "F0A0(H)".
Further, when the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) is "2", the DE register value becomes "F0A2 (H)".
Furthermore, when the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) is "3", the DE register value becomes "F0A4(H)".
Through the process of step S1172, the address of the symbol array address buffer (_BF_PICARG_ADR#) corresponding to the reel 31 is stored in the DE register.

In the next step S1173, a reel symbol search table address offset table is set. This process is a process of storing in the HL register a value "1207 (H)" obtained by subtracting "2" from the start address "1209 (H)" of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH).
In the next step S1174, a reel symbol arrangement table address corresponding to the stop/control reel number data is acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value to the HL register value, and use the result of the addition as the HL register value.
For example, when the A register value is "2", the HL register value is "1209 (H)".
Further, when the A register value is "4", the HL register value is "120B(H)".
Furthermore, when the A register value is "6", the HL register value is "120D(H)".
Therefore, the address of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH) corresponding to the reel 31 is stored in the HL register (see FIG. 204(B)).

(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the HL register value.
For example, when the HL register value is "1209(H)", the HL register value becomes "12FF(H)".
Also, when the HL register value is "120B(H)", the HL register value becomes "13B3(H)".
Furthermore, when the HL register value is "120D(H)", the HL register value becomes "1467(H)".

Next, the process advances to step S1175, and a reel symbol arrangement table address corresponding to the control symbol number is acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data stored in the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) in the A register.
(2) Multiply the A register value by "9" and store the calculation result in the A register. Here, multiplying by "9" corresponds to the number of symbol groups.
(3) Add the A register value to the HL register value, and use the result of the addition as the HL register value.

The above process will be explained using specific examples (Example 1 to Example 3).
(Example 1)
On the left reel 31, when the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is "10" (number 12 "Bell B" stops on the active line),
12FF(H)+10×9(D)(5A(H))=1359(H)
This is the address immediately before the leading address "135A(H)" corresponding to No. 12 "Bell B" on the left reel 31.
(Example 2)
Also, on the middle reel 31, when the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is "10" (the 11th "cherry" stops on the active line),
13B3(H)+10×9(D)=140D(H)
This is the address immediately before the first address "140E(H)" corresponding to number 11 "Cherry" on the middle reel 31.
(Example 3)
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, when the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is "10" (number 10 "Bell B" stops on the active line),
1467(H)+10×9(D)=14C1(H)
This is the address immediately before the first address "14C2(H)" corresponding to the number 10 "Bell B" on the right reel 31.
In this way, in step S1175, the first address value of the leading address corresponding to the stopped symbol number of the reel 31 is stored in the HL register.

Next, the process advances to step S1176, and a symbol array address buffer corresponding to the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) is acquired. This process is a process of storing the HL register value at the address indicated by the DE register value.
Note that as shown in step S1172,
Stop/control reel number data “1” → DE register value “F0A0(H)”
Stop/control reel number data “2” → DE register value “F0A2(H)”
Stop/control reel number data “3” → DE register value “F0A4 (H)”
It is.
Therefore, in the case of the left reel 31, in the above example 1, "1359 (H)" is stored in the symbol array address buffer 1 at the address "F0A0 (H)".
Further, in the case of the middle reel 31, in the above example 2, "140D(H)" is stored in the symbol array address buffer 2 at the address "F0A2(H)".
Furthermore, in the case of the right reel 31, in the above example 3, "14C1(H)" is stored in the symbol array address buffer 3 at address "F0A4(H)".
Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, by storing the address value where the symbol combination data is stored in the symbol array address buffer of each reel, even if a power outage occurs, the data will already be stored after the power is restored from the power outage. The game can be restarted correctly using the correct address value.
For example, in a situation where all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, even if the power is cut off after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 31 is operated and the power cut-off process is executed, the symbols Since the address value where the symbol combination data of the left reel 31 is stored is stored in the array address buffer 1, after the power is restored, based on the stop operation of the middle reel 31 and the stop operation of the right reel 31, The process of storing address values in the symbol array address buffers 2 and 3 can be restarted (the game can be restarted).

Note that if the address value where the symbol combination data is stored (the value stored in the symbol array address buffer) is stored in a general-purpose register, if the power is turned off and the power is restored, the address will be saved. The value (the value stored in the general-purpose register) is cleared (set to the initial value; for example, set to "0"). For this reason, when the address value where the symbol combination data is stored is stored in a general-purpose register, for example, a power outage occurs after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 31 is operated, and the power outage process is executed. In this case, there is a high possibility that the game will not be able to be resumed after the power is restored.
In addition, if a symbol array address buffer is provided in the RWM 53 and the address value where symbol combination data is stored is stored, the address value will be stored in the symbol array address buffer each time the stop switch 42 is stopped. At the development stage, it is possible to check whether the stop position is correct for each stop operation by checking the symbol array address buffer of the RWM 53.

FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the display determination process in step S1137 of FIG. 222.
This process is a process of determining symbol combination data based on the address value stored in the symbol array address buffer, and determining whether or not the combination corresponding to the symbol combination data has a payout.
In FIG. 227, in step S1181, the number of symbol groups is set to "9". This process stores "9" in the B register and "8" in the C register. "8" in the C register is a value corresponding to the number of bits.
In the next step S1182, the symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1) is acquired. This process is a process of storing the symbol combination data stored in the symbol array address buffer 1 in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1183, where first reel symbol arrangement table data corresponding to the number of symbol groups is obtained. Here, the following process is executed.
(1) The B register value is added to the HL register value, and the result of this addition becomes the HL register value.
(2) The symbol combination data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register value.
For example, when the HL register value is "12FF(H)", then "12FF(H) + 9(H) = 1308(H)", and therefore "@WIN_33" stored at address "1308(H)", i.e. "00000001(B)", is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1184, the symbol array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2) is acquired. This process is a process of storing the symbol combination data stored in the symbol array address buffer 2 in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1185, and a logical product of the second reel symbol arrangement table data according to the number of symbol groups is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the B register value to the HL register value and use the addition result as the HL register value.
(2) Execute an AND (logical product) operation between the symbol combination data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the A register value. The result of the operation is set as the A register value.

In the next step S1186, the symbol array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3) is acquired. This process is a process of storing the symbol combination data stored in the symbol array address buffer 3 in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1187, and a logical AND operation is performed on the third reel symbol arrangement table data according to the number of symbol groups. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the B register value to the HL register value and use the addition result as the HL register value.
(2) Execute an AND (logical product) operation between the symbol combination data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the A register value. The result of the operation is set as the A register value.
Note that at this point, when the calculation result is "0", the zero flag becomes "1".

Through the processing of steps S1181 to S1187, for example, when the B register value is "9", the symbol combination data of the 9th group of the stop symbol data of the left reel 31 and the 9th group of the stop symbol data of the middle reel 31 are combined. The symbol combination data of the group and the symbol combination data of the ninth group of the stop symbol data of the right reel 31 are ANDed.
Specifically, for example,
B register value = 9
Symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1) = 12FF (H) (2nd symbol (cherry))
Symbol array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2) = 13B3 (H) (No. 1 symbol (cherry))
Symbol array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3) = 1482 (H) (3rd symbol (red 7))
When it is,
Design combination data for address “1308 (H)” (@WIN_33)
AND
Design combination data for address “13BC(H)” (@WIN_33)
AND
Design combination data for address “148B(H)” (@WIN_33)
Therefore, the logical product data becomes "@WIN_33" (00000001(B)).
On the other hand, if any of the symbol combination data of the address "1308 (H)", the address "13BC (H)", or the address "148B (H)" is "0", then the AND As a result of the calculation, the logical product data becomes "0".

Next, the process advances to step S1188, and it is determined whether the logical product data is "0". In this process, it is determined whether the zero flag is "1" or not, and when the zero flag is "1", the determination is "Yes". When it is determined that the logical product data is "0", the process advances to step S1195, and when it is determined that the logical product data is not "0", the process advances to step S1189.
In step S1195, "1" is subtracted from the number of symbol groups. This process executes the process of subtracting "1" from the B register value.
In the next step S1196, it is determined whether the number of symbol groups has become "0". This process determines whether the result of subtracting "1" from the B register in step S1195 is "0". When the B register value after subtracting "1" is "0", it is determined as "Yes" (the number of symbol groups has become "0").
When it is determined in step S1196 that the number of symbol groups is "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of symbol groups is not "0", the process returns to step S1182.

On the other hand, when the process advances from step S1188 to step S1189, a payout number table address corresponding to the number of symbol groups is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Multiply the B register value by the C register value "8". Then, the multiplication result is stored in the BC register.
(2) In the HL register, store the results of subtracting "8" and further subtracting "1" from the top address "1600 (H)" of the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL). Therefore, "15F7(H)" is stored in the HL register.
(3) Add the BC register value to the HL register value.
Next, the process advances to step S1190, and "1" is added to the table address. This process is a process of adding "1" to the HL register value and using the addition result as the HL register value.

Here, in steps S1189 and S1190,
"1600 (H)" - "8 (H)" - "1 (H)" + B register value (value of symbol group) x C register value "8" (number of data included in one symbol group) + "1 (H)”
= "1600 (H)" + (value of symbol group - 1) x (number of data included in one symbol group "8")
is being calculated.
Examples 1 and 2 are given below as specific examples.
(1) Example 1
If the B register value is “1” (symbol group 1) when proceeding to step S1189,
1600(H)+(1-1)×8=1600(H)
Then, the start address of the first group of symbols is specified.
(2) Example 2
If the B register value is “5” (symbol group 5) when proceeding to step S1189,
1600(H)+(5-1)×8=1600(H)+20(H)(32(D))
=1620(H)
Then, the start address of the 5th group of symbols is specified.

In the next step S1191, the logical product data is shifted to the right by "1". This process is a process of shifting the bit of the A register value to the right by "1".
Then, in the next step S1192, it is determined whether the carry flag has become "1" by the above-mentioned rightward shift process by "1". When it is determined that the carry flag has become "1", the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S1193. On the other hand, if it is determined that the carry flag is not "1", the process returns to step S1190.

In step S1193, it is determined whether the number of coins to be paid out is "0". In this process, it is determined whether or not the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the payout number is "0". When it is determined that the number of payouts is "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of payouts is not "0", the process advances to step S1194.
In step S1194, payout number data is saved. This process is a process of storing the value indicated by the address indicated by the HL register value in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Examples 1 and 2 are given as specific examples of steps S1190 to S1192 above.
(1) Example 1 (when the symbol combination of small win 33 stops)
In the first step S1190, when the B register value is "9" and the logical product data is "@WIN_33" (00000001(B)), the HL register value becomes "1640(H)."
In the next step S1191, when the logical product data "00000001 (B)" is shifted one bit to the right, the carry flag becomes "1", so that the answer in step S1192 is determined to be "Yes". Therefore, in step S1194, the data "1" stored in the address "1640 (H)" indicated by the HL register value is stored as the payout number data.

(2) Example 2 (when the symbol combination of small role 03 stops)
In the first step S1190, when the B register value is "5" and the AND data is "@WIN_03" (00000100 (B)), the HL register value is "1620 (H)".
In the next step S1191, if the AND data "00000100(B)" is shifted to the right by 1 bit to become "00000010(B)", the carry flag is "0", so it is determined "No" in step S1192. , the process returns to step S1190.
In step S1190 (second time), the HL register value becomes "1621 (H)". In the next step S1191, if the AND data "00000010(B)" is shifted one bit to the right and becomes "00000001(B)", the carry flag is "0", so it is determined "No" in step S1192. and returns to step S1190.
In step S1190 (third time), the HL register value becomes "1622 (H)". In the next step S1191, when the logical product data "00000001(B)" is shifted to the right by 1 bit, the carry flag becomes "1", so the determination in step S1192 is "Yes". Therefore, in step S1194, the data "15 (D)" stored at the address indicated by the HL register value "1622 (H)" is stored as payout number data.

The above display determination process will be explained using specific examples (the following first example and second example).
(Example 1)
In a game where the winning number "10" has been determined by lottery, the left stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol number "10" is passing through the middle row of the left reel 31, and then the middle reel 31 is The middle stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol with symbol number "9" is passing through the middle row of the right reel 31, and then the right stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol with symbol number "3" is passing through the middle row of the right reel 31. As a result of the operation, "Watermelon (No. 11)" - "Cherry (No. 11)" - "Bell A (No. 4)" stopped on the active line, and the small winning combination 01 (15 pieces) was won. do.
In this case, the symbol array address buffer set of FIG. 226 is as follows.
1. left reel 31
In step S1171, the A register value becomes "1" (stop/control reel number data).
In step S1172,
(1) A register value = 1 x 2 = 2
(2) DE register value = F09E (H)
(3) DE register value = DE register value + A register value = F0A0 (H)
In step S1173,
HL register value = 1207 (H)
becomes.
In step S1174,
(1) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 1209 (H)
(2) HL register value = value of address indicated by HL register value = 12FF (H)
becomes.
In step S1175,
(1) A register value = “9” (control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE))
(2) A register value = A register value x 9 = 81 (D) (51 (H))
(3) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 1350 (H)
becomes.

2. middle reel 31
In step S1171, the A register value becomes "2" (stop/control reel number data).
In step S1172,
(1) A register value = 2 x 2 = 4
(2) DE register value = F09E (H)
(3) DE register value = DE register value + A register value = F0A2 (H)
In step S1173,
HL register value = 1207 (H)
becomes.
In step S1174,
(1) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 120B (H)
(2) HL register value = value of address indicated by HL register value = 13B3 (H)
becomes.
In step S1175,
(1) A register value = “10 (D)” (control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE))
(2) A register value = A register value x 9 = 90 (D) (5A (H))
(3) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 140D (H)
becomes.

3. Right reel 31
In step S1171, the A register value becomes "3" (stop/control reel number data).
In step S1172,
(1) A register value = 3 x 2 = 6
(2) DE register value = F09E (H)
(3) DE register value = DE register value + A register value = F0A4 (H)
In step S1173,
HL register value = 1207 (H)
It becomes.
In step S1174,
(1) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 120D (H)
(2) HL register value = value of the address indicated by the HL register value = 1467 (H)
It becomes.
In step S1175,
(1) A register value = "4 (D)" (control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE))
(2) A register value = A register value x 9 = 36 (D) (24 (H))
(3) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 148B (H)
It becomes.

From the above,
Pattern array address buffer 1: 1350 (H)
Pattern array address buffer 2: 140D (H)
Pattern array address buffer 3: 148B (H)
It becomes.
In this case, in step S1181 of FIG.
B register value=9
C register value=8
Set.
(1st time)
In step S1182,
HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1)
It becomes.
In the next step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1359 (H)
A register value = 0 (value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value)
It becomes.

In the next step S1184,
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In the next step S1185,
HL register value = 140D (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1416 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 00000001 (B) (@WIN_33)
A register value = data indicated by the address of HL register value (@WIN_33) AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
It becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1494 (H)
A register value = HL register value (@WIN_34) AND A register value = 0
It becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the result in step S1188 is "Yes", so the process proceeds to step S1195.
B register value = 9 - 1 = 8
It becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value .noteq.0), and the flow returns to step S1182.

(2nd time)
In step S1182, the HL register value=1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1358 (H)
A register value = 00011010 (B) (@WIN_26 OR @WIN_28 OR @WIN_29)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 140D (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1415 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 00110000 (B) (@WIN_29 OR @WIN_30)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 00010000 (B)
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1493 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 00001000 (B) (@WIN_28)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the answer in step S1188 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 8-1 = 7
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(Third time)
In step S1182, the HL register value becomes 1350 (H) (the value of the symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 1357 (H)
A register value = 00000011 (B) (@WIN_17 OR @WIN_18)
It becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 140D (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 1414 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0000010 (B) (@WIN_18)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 00000010 (B)
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
It becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 1492 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
It becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the result in step S1188 is "Yes", so the process proceeds to step S1195.
B register value = 7 - 1 = 6
It becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value .noteq.0), and the flow returns to step S1182.

(4th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value=1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 1356 (H)
A register value = 00000010 (B) (@WIN_10)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 140D (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 1413 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 1491 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 00110000 (B) (@WIN_13 OR @WIN_14)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, since the answer is "Yes" in step S1188, the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 6-1 = 5
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(5th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1). In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 1355 (H)
A register value = 11001011 (B) (@WIN_01_02 OR @WIN_04 OR @WIN_07_08)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
It becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 140D (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 1412 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 01000001 (B) (@WIN_01 OR @WIN_07)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 01000001 (B)
It becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 1490 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00001101 (B) (@WIN_01 OR @WIN_03 OR @WIN_04)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 00000001 (B)
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag≠“1”.
Therefore, "No" is obtained in step S1188, and the process proceeds to step S1189.
In step S1189,
BC register value = B register value (value of symbol group) × C register value (number of data included in one symbol group) = 5 × 8 = 40 (D) (28 (H))
HL register value = 15F7 (H)
HL register value = HL register value + BC register value = 15F7 (H) + 28 (H) = 161F (H)
becomes.

In step S1190,
HL register value = 161F (H) + 1 (H) = 1620 (H)
becomes.
In step S1191, when the A register value "00000001 (B)" is shifted to the right by 1, it becomes "00000000 (B)" and the carry flag becomes "1".
In step S1192, since the carry flag is "1", it is determined as "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S1193.
In step S1193,
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 15 (D)
Therefore, it is determined that the number of payouts is not "0", and the process advances to step S1194.
In step S1194, "15 (D)" is stored in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL).
As described above, when winning the minor winning combination 01, the address "1620 (H)" of the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) is specified and the payout number "15 (D)" is stored.

Next, as a second example of the display determination process, in a game where the winning number "26" is determined by the winning combination lottery, when the symbol number "10" is passing through the middle row of the left reel 31, the left stop The switch 42 is operated, and then, when the symbol with symbol number "2" is passing through the middle row of the middle reel 31, the middle stop switch 42 is operated, and then the symbol number "3" is passing through the middle row of the right reel 31. When the right stop switch 42 was operated while the symbols were passing, "Watermelon (No. 11)" - "Black BAR (No. 3)" - "Bell A (No. 4)" stopped on the active line. , an example of a winning role is shown. This symbol combination differs from the symbol combination of the first example only in the symbols on the middle reel 31.
First, regarding the middle reel 31, the symbol arrangement address buffer set shown in FIG. 226 results in the following.

In step S1171, the A register value becomes "2" (stop/control reel number data).
In step S1172,
(1) A register value = 2 x 2 = 4
(2) DE register value = F09E (H)
(3) DE register value = DE register value + A register value = F0A2 (H)
In step S1173,
HL register value = 1207 (H)
becomes.
In step S1174,
(1) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 120B (H)
(2) HL register value = value of address indicated by HL register value = 13B3 (H)
becomes.
In step S1175,
(1) A register value = “2 (D)” (control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE))
(2) A register value = A register value x 9 = 18 (D) (12 (H))
(3) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 13C5 (H)
becomes.

Therefore,
Symbol array address buffer 1: 1350 (H)
Symbol array address buffer 2: 13C5 (H)
Symbol array address buffer 3: 148B (H)
becomes.
In this case, in FIG. 227, in step S1181,
B register value = 9
C register value = 8
Set.
(1st time)
In step S1182,
HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1)
becomes.
In the next step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1359 (H)
A register value = 0 (value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value)
becomes.

In the next step S1184,
HL register value = 135C (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In the next step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 13CE (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1494 (H)
A register value = HL register value (@WIN_34) AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, since the answer is "Yes" in step S1188, the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 9-1 = 8
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(2nd time)
In step S1182, the HL register value=1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1358 (H)
A register value = 00011010 (B) (@WIN_26 OR @WIN_28 OR @WIN_29)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
It becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 13CD (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00000111 (B) (@WIN_25 OR @WIN_26 OR @WIN_27)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 00000010 (B)
It becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1493 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 00001000 (B) (@WIN_28)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, since the answer is "Yes" in step S1188, the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 8-1 = 7
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(3rd time)
In step S1182, the HL register value=1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 1357 (H)
A register value = 00000011 (B) (@WIN_17 OR @WIN_18)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 13CC (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 00010000 (B) (@WIN_21)
A register value = data indicated by the address of HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 1492 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the answer in step S1188 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 7-1 = 6
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(4th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value becomes 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 1356 (H)
A register value = 00000010 (B) (@WIN_10)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 13CB (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 10000000 (B) (@WIN_16)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 1491 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 00110000 (B) (@WIN_13 OR @WIN_14)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, since the answer is "Yes" in step S1188, the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 6-1 = 5
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(5th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value is set to 1350 (H) (the value of the symbol array address buffer 1). In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 1355 (H)
A register value = 11001011 (B) (@WIN_01_02 OR @WIN_04 OR @WIN_07_08)
It becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 13CA (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 1490 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00001101 (B) (@WIN_01 OR @WIN_03 OR @WIN_04)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the answer in step S1188 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 5-1 = 4
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(6th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value=1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 4 (H) (HL + B) = 1354 (H)
A register value = 0
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 4 (H) (HL + B) = 13C9 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 4 (H) (HL + B) = 1491 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the answer in step S1188 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 4-1 = 3
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(7th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1). In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 3 (H) (HL + B) = 1353 (H)
A register value = 01000000 (B) (@REP_06)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 3 (H) (HL + B) = 13C8 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 00000010 (B) (@REP_01)
A register value = data indicated by the address of HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 3 (H) (HL + B) = 148E (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 10100010 (B) (@REP_01 OR @REP_05 OR @REP_07)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the answer in step S1188 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 3-1 = 2
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(8th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1). In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 2 (H) (HL + B) = 1352 (H)
A register value = 0
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 2 (H) (HL + B) = 13C7 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 2 (H) (HL + B) = 148D (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, since the answer is "Yes" in step S1188, the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 2-1 = 1
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(9th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value is set to 1350 (H) (the value of the symbol array address buffer 1). In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 1 (H) (HL + B) = 1351 (H)
A register value = 0
It becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 1 (H) (HL + B) = 13C6 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 11110000 (B) (@SRB_E_H)
A register value = data indicated by the address of HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
It becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 1 (H) (HL + B) = 148C (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
It becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the result in step S1188 is "Yes", so the process proceeds to step S1195.
B register value = 1 - 1 = 0
It becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "Yes" (B register value = 0), and the process according to this flowchart ends.
As a result, the payout amount data remains at "0".

<27th embodiment>
The twenty-seventh embodiment relates to a symbol arrangement table.
FIGS. 228 and 229 are diagrams showing symbol arrangement tables in the twenty-seventh embodiment. The symbol arrangement table stores symbol data corresponding to a symbol number in each address. In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the specific contents of the symbol data stored in each address will be omitted.
The symbol arrangement table in the twenty-fifth embodiment is configured as follows.
(1) 1st reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) (Figure 181)
1203 (H): 2nd symbol + 3rd symbol 1204 (H): 4th symbol + 5th symbol:
120B (H): 18th symbol + 19th symbol 120C (H): 0th symbol + 1st symbol (2) 2nd reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) (Figure 185)
123A (H): 1st symbol + 2nd symbol 123B (H): 3rd symbol + 4th symbol:
1242 (H): 17th symbol + 18th symbol 1243 (H): 19th symbol + 0th symbol (3) 3rd reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3) (Figure 189)
128F (H): No. 0 symbol + No. 1 symbol 1290 (H): No. 2 symbol + No. 3 symbol:
1297 (H): 16th symbol + 17th symbol 1298 (H): 18th symbol + 19th symbol

As can be seen from the above, the No. 2 symbol (upper 4 bits) is stored in the top address (1203 (H)) for the first (left) reel 31. This setting is because the reference position for the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is the lower row, so when the No. 0 symbol stops on the lower row, which is the reference position, on the left reel 31, the No. 2 symbol stops on the pay line (upper row).
For the second (center) reel 31, the number 1 symbol (upper 4 bits) is stored in the top address (123A(H)). This is because, when the number 0 symbol stops on the lower row, which is the reference position, on the center reel 31, the number 1 symbol stops on the pay line (middle row).
Similarly, for the third (right) reel 31, the number 0 symbol (upper 4 bits) is stored in the top address (128F(H)). This is because the reference position of the right reel 31 coincides with the position on the pay line.

In the examples of FIGS. 181, 185, and 189 in the 25th embodiment, two symbol data (one symbol data in the upper 4 bits and one symbol data in the lower 4 bits) is stored per address.
On the other hand, when storing one symbol data at one address, the configuration is as shown in FIGS. 228 and 229.
In the symbol arrangement table of the twenty-seventh embodiment, to simplify the explanation, the symbol data of the left reel 31 starts from address "1000 (H)", and the symbol data of the middle reel 31 starts from address "1100 (H)". ”, and the symbol data on the right reel 31 starts from address “1200 (H)”.

FIG. 228 is a diagram illustrating an example (Example 1) in which one symbol per address is used as data in the symbol array table of the twenty-fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 228, the symbol data on the left reel 31 is stored in order from the top address, starting with the symbol data with symbol number 2. Further, the symbol data on the middle reel 31 is stored in order from the leading address, starting from the symbol data with symbol number 1. Furthermore, the symbol data of the right reel 31 is stored in order from the top address, starting with the symbol data of symbol number 0.

In this way, by shifting the symbol number of the symbol data at the start address in the symbol arrangement table of the left, middle, and right reels 31, the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the reference position (position on the reference line) can be changed to the offset value. As a result, it is possible to obtain the symbol number of the symbol that stops on the active line.
For example, when the left reel 31 stops and a symbol with symbol number 0 stops at the reference position (lower row), the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the active line (upper row) is "1000 (H) (starting address value)". ” + “0 (symbol number)” = “1000 (H)”, it is possible to acquire the symbol data (for symbol number 2) stored at the address “1000 (H)”.
Similarly, when the symbol with symbol number 10 stops at the reference position (lower row) when the left reel 31 stops, the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the active line (upper row) is "1000 (H)" + "10 ( D)"="100A(H)", it is possible to acquire the symbol data (for symbol number 12) stored at the address "100A(H)".

Regarding the middle reel 31, for example, when the symbol with symbol number 0 stops at the reference position (lower stage) when the middle reel 31 stops, the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the active line (middle stage) is "1100 (H) ( It is possible to obtain the symbol data (for symbol number 1) stored at the address "1100 (H)" by "start address value)" + "0 (symbol number)" = "1100 (H)". .
Similarly, when the symbol number 10 stops at the reference position (lower row) when the middle reel 31 stops, the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the active line (middle row) is "1100 (H)" + "10 ( D)"="110A(H)", it is possible to acquire the symbol data (for symbol number 11) stored at the address "110A(H)".

Regarding the right reel 31, when the symbol with symbol number 0 stops at the reference position (lower row) of the right reel 31, the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the active line (lower row) is "1200 (H) (first It is possible to obtain the symbol data (for symbol number 0) stored at the address "1200 (H)" by "address value)" + "0 (symbol number)" = "1200 (H)".
Similarly, when the symbol with symbol number 10 stops at the reference position (lower row) when the right reel 31 stops, the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the active line (lower row) is "1200 (H)" + "10 ( D)"="120A(H)", it is possible to obtain the symbol data (for symbol number 10) stored at the address "120A(H)".

In this example, the pay lines are "upper left" - "middle middle" - "lower right", so the symbol data is shifted as described above. However, if the pay lines are, for example, V-shaped "upper left" - "lower middle" - "upper right",
(1) Symbol arrangement table for left reel 31 1000 (H): for symbol number 2 1001 (H): for symbol number 3:
(2) Symbol arrangement table for center reel 31 1100 (H): for symbol number 0 1101 (H): for symbol number 1:
(3) Right reel 31 symbol arrangement table 1200 (H): for symbol number 2 1201 (H): for symbol number 3:
And it is sufficient.

FIG. 229 is a diagram showing an example (Example 2) in which the symbol data of the left, middle, and right reels 31 is not shifted in the symbol arrangement table. Further, in this example, the reference line is "upper left row"-"upper middle row"-"upper right row" (the effective line is the same as in FIG. 228).
As shown in FIG. 229, in each of the symbol arrangement tables for the left, middle, and right reels 31, symbol data is stored in order starting from the symbol data for symbol number 0.
On the other hand, in this example, the difference data is stored at the final address.
In the case of Example 2, by adding the difference data to the symbol number that stops at the reference position, it is possible to obtain the symbol number that stops at the active line.

For example, when the symbol with symbol number 0 stops at the reference position of the left reel 31, "1000 (H) (starting address value)" + "0 (symbol number)" + "0 (difference data)" = "1000 ( H)” makes it possible to acquire the symbol data (for symbol number 0) stored at the address “1000(H)”.
Similarly, when the symbol with symbol number 10 stops at the reference position of the left reel 31, the address "100A (H)" + "10 (D)" + "0" = "100A (H)" is used. It is possible to acquire the data (for symbol number 10) stored in "(H)".

Regarding the middle reel 31, when the symbol with symbol number 0 stops at the reference position of the middle reel 31, "1100 (H) (starting address value)" + "0 (symbol number)" + "1 (difference) Data)"="1101(H)", it is possible to obtain the data (for symbol number 1) stored at the address "1101(H)".
Similarly, when the symbol with symbol number 10 stops at the reference position of the middle reel 31, it is stored in "1100 (H)" + "10 (D)" + "1" = "110B (H)". It is possible to acquire data (for symbol number 11).

Furthermore, regarding the right reel 31, when the symbol with symbol number 0 stops at the reference position of the right reel 31, "1200 (H) (starting address value)" + "0 (symbol number)" + "2 ( Difference data)"="1202(H)", it is possible to obtain the data (for symbol number 2) stored at address "1202(H)".
Similarly, when the symbol number 10 stops at the reference position on the right reel 31, the address "120C(H)" is set to "1200(H)" + "10" + "2" = "120C(H)". ” (for symbol number 12).
As mentioned above, in order to obtain the symbol number of a symbol that stops on the active line from the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the reference position, there are two methods: Examples include a method of storing the symbol data in the array data without shifting it and acquiring the symbol number using the difference data.

In the above twenty-seventh embodiment, in example 1 of FIG. 228, the symbol numbers of the symbol data specified by the start address are different. In this way, the symbol data to be stored in the symbol arrangement tables of the first reel 31, the second reel 31, and the third reel 31 are stored with the symbol numbers shifted (in consideration of the difference, the symbol data is stored). ), it becomes unnecessary to perform correction (add or subtract the difference) for each acquired control symbol number (BF_PICTURE). Therefore, it is possible to simplify program processing and reduce the capacity of the ROM 54.

On the other hand, as in Example 2 of Figure 229, in the pattern arrangement tables for the left reel 31, center reel 31, and right reel 31, the pattern data is stored in order starting from pattern number 0, and when pattern data is obtained, the differential data of that reel 31 is added to or subtracted from the pattern number of the pattern that stops at the reference position. If this is the case, then even if there is a change in the pay line, it is only necessary to change the differential data, thereby reducing development man-hours.

Further, in the example of the twenty-seventh embodiment (including the twenty-fifth embodiment), the effective line does not change depending on the specified number. On the other hand, if the effective line changes depending on the specified number, for example, do as follows.
First, in the case of Example 1 (including the 25th embodiment) in FIG. 228, a symbol arrangement table may be provided for each specified number.
Furthermore, in the case of Example 2 in FIG. 228, difference data may be provided for each specified number. In particular, in the case of Example 2 in FIG. 228, the symbol arrangement table does not change depending on the specified number (the symbol arrangement table remains the same even if the specified number changes), so it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage area.

Further, in the example of the twenty-seventh embodiment (including the twenty-fifth embodiment), the number of effective lines is one, but if the number of effective lines is multiple, for example, the following procedure is used. .
First, in the case of Example 1 (including the 25th embodiment) in FIG. 228, a symbol arrangement table may be provided for each active line.
Furthermore, in the case of Example 2 in FIG. 228, difference data may be provided for each effective line. In particular, in the case of Example 2 in FIG. 228, the symbol arrangement table does not change even if the number of active lines increases (the symbol arrangement table remains the same even if the number of effective lines changes), so the increase in storage area is suppressed. be able to.
Furthermore, in the case where the position and number of active lines change depending on the specified number, in the case of example 1 of FIG. 228 (including the 25th embodiment), a symbol arrangement table is provided for every active line, In the case of the specified number, it is possible to specify which (one or more) symbol arrangement table is to be used.
Similarly, in the case of Example 2 in FIG. 228, it is possible to provide difference data for every effective line, and specify which (one or more) difference data to use, for example, in the case of a predetermined number of valid lines. Can be mentioned.

<28th embodiment>
In the twenty-fifth to twenty-seventh embodiments described above, there is one effective line.
On the other hand, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a case will be described in which there are a plurality of effective lines.
FIG. 230 is a diagram showing the display window 18, effective lines, and RWM area in the twenty-eighth embodiment. In the figure, (A) shows the relationship between each symbol in the display window 18 and the RWM area, and (B) shows the relationship between the valid lines L1 to L5 and the RWM area.
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, nine symbols of "3x3" are displayed in the display window 18, similar to the twenty-third embodiment shown in FIG. 115.

As shown in (A) in the figure, one RWM (memory) area is provided for each stop position (symbol). For example, in the left reel 31, the RWM area of the upper row "1" is determined as "_WK_PIC_LFT1", the RWM area of the middle row "2" is determined as "_WK_PIC_LFT2", and the RWM area of the lower row "3" is determined as "_WK_PIC_LFT3". Therefore, nine RWM areas corresponding to a total of nine stop positions (symbols) are also provided. Furthermore, each RWM area is composed of 2 bytes.
Further, as shown in (B) in the figure, an RWM area is provided for each effective line. There are five effective lines L1 to L5 in the twenty-eighth embodiment. For example, the RWM area of the effective line L1 downward to the right is "_WK_PIC_L1".
Furthermore, an RWM area "_WK_ALL_PIC" for all effective lines is provided.
“_WK_ALL_PIC” is a value obtained by performing an OR (logical sum) operation on “_WK_PIC_L1” to “_WK_PIC_L5”.

FIG. 231 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement in the twenty-eighth embodiment. In the 23rd embodiment shown in FIG. 114, the number of symbols per reel 31 is "20", but in the 28th embodiment, the number of symbols is "21".
Further, FIG. 232 is a diagram showing the first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 181 in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
Further, FIG. 233 is a diagram showing the second reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 185 in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
Furthermore, FIG. 234 is a diagram showing the third reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3) in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 189 in the twenty-fifth embodiment.

In FIG. 232, in the first symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) of the left reel 31, symbol data for each symbol is provided in order from the top address, from symbol number "0" to "20" in FIG. Along with the addresses "1200(H)" to "1228(H)"), the last two pieces of data are symbol data of symbol numbers "0" and "1". Therefore, the symbol data at address "122A(H)" is the same as the symbol data at address "1200(H)", and the symbol data at address "122C(H)" is the same as the symbol data at address "1201(H)". are the same.
Similarly to the first symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_1), the second symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_2) on the middle reel 31 and the third symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_3) on the right reel 31 are sequentially assigned symbol numbers "0" from the top address. '', symbol data with symbol number "1", . . . , symbol data with symbol number "20", symbol data with symbol number "0", and symbol data with symbol number "1" are arranged.

For example, when the left reel 31 stops, a "Bell" with symbol number "0" on the upper row, a replay with symbol number "1" on the middle row, and a "blank" with symbol number "2" on the lower row,
_WK_PIC_LFT1=00001000(B), 00000001(B)(Bell)
_WK_PIC_LFT2=00000011(B), 00000001(B)(Replay)
_WK_PIC_LFT3=00000000 (B), 00000000 (B) (blank)
is memorized.
The same applies when the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are stopped.
Further, when each reel 31 stops, the following method can be mentioned as a method for storing symbol data in each storage area.
(Example 1) Method using the upper row as a reference For example, when the left reel 31 stops, the address corresponding to the symbol data of the symbol to be stopped at the upper row is specified. Specifically, if the address corresponding to the symbol data of the symbol that stops on the upper row is "1200 (H)", "_WK_PIC_LFT1" stores the symbol data stored in the address "1200 (H)". do.
Next, in "_WK_PIC_LFT2", the symbol data stored in the address "1202(H)", which is obtained by adding "2(H)" to the above address "1200(H)", is stored.

Further, "_WK_PIC_LFT3" stores the symbol data stored at the address "1204(H)" which is the address "1200(H)" plus "4(H)".
In addition, when the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the upper row is "0", the symbol data stored at address "1200 (H)" is used instead of the symbol data stored at address "122A (H)". do. Similarly, when the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the top row is "1", the symbol data stored at address "1202(H)" is used instead of the symbol data stored at address "122C(H)". use.

(Example 2) Method using the lower row as a reference For example, when the left reel 31 stops, the address corresponding to the symbol data of the symbol that stops at the lower row is specified. Specifically, if the address corresponding to the symbol data of the symbol that stops at the bottom is "1204 (H)", "_WK_PIC_LFT3" stores the symbol data stored at the address "1204 (H)". do.
Next, in "_WK_PIC_LFT2", the symbol data stored in the address "1202(H)" obtained by subtracting "2(H)" from the address "1204(H)" is stored.
Further, "_WK_PIC_LFT1" stores the symbol data stored at the address "1200(H)" which is obtained by subtracting "4(H)" from the address "1204(H)".

In addition, when the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the bottom is "0", the symbol data stored at address "122A (H)" is used instead of the symbol data stored at address "1200 (H)". do. Similarly, when the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the top row is "1", the symbol data stored at address "122C (H)" is used instead of the symbol data stored at address "1202 (H)". use.
In either method of Example 1 or Example 2 above, for each reel 31, symbol data of one row can be used as a reference to obtain symbol data of other rows.
Then, as shown in FIGS. 232 to 234, symbol combination data exceeding the number of symbol numbers is stored (the symbol combination data of symbol number 0 is stored again next to the symbol combination data of symbol number 20, and Next, by storing the symbol combination data of symbol number 1 again), for example, even if the symbol number 0 stops in the lower row, the symbol combination of symbol number 20 will stop in the middle row. It becomes possible to easily obtain the data and the symbol combination data of symbol number 19 that will stop at the upper stage.

Next, a method for identifying symbol combination data that stops on an active line will be described.
For example, for the symbol combination data "_WK_PIC_L1" of the activated line L1, the symbol data of the left reel 31 is "_WK_PIC_L1_L," the symbol data of the center reel 31 is "_WK_PIC_L1_C," and the symbol data of the right reel 31 is "_WK_PIC_L1_R." The same is true for the other activated lines L2 to L5.
First, as a result of the role drawing, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" is determined as the winning number that can be stopped on the active line, and the left stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol with the symbol number 20 passes through the middle section of the left reel 31, and then the middle stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol with the symbol number 1 passes through the middle section of the middle reel 31, and then the right stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol with the symbol number 3 passes through the middle section of the right reel 31. As a result, when all the reels 31 have stopped,
"1" (upper left): Pattern number "0" (bell)
"2" (middle left): Pattern number "1" (replay)
"3" (lower left): Pattern number "2" (blank)
"4" (middle upper row): Pattern number "2" (bell)
"5" (middle row): Pattern number "3" (blue cherry)
"6" (middle lower row): Pattern number "4" (replay)
"7" (upper right row): Pattern number "4" (bell)
"8" (middle right): Pattern number "5" (replay)
"9" (bottom right): Pattern number "6" (red cherry)
Assume that stops.

In this case, the symbol data stored in the storage area corresponding to each stop position is
_WK_PIC_LFT1:00001000(B), 00000000(B)
_WK_PIC_LFT2:00000011(B), 00000001(B)
_WK_PIC_LFT3:00000000(B), 00000000(B)
_WK_PIC_CEN1:00111000(B), 00000001(B)
_WK_PIC_CEN2:00110000(B), 00000000(B)
_WK_PIC_CEN3:00110011(B), 00000000(B)
_WK_PIC_RIG1:00111001(B), 00000001(B)
_WK_PIC_RIG2:00110010(B), 00000000(B)
_WK_PIC_RIG3:00110000(B), 00000000(B)
becomes.

For the valid line L1,
_WK_PIC_L1_L = _WK_PIC_LFT1: 00001000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L1_C = _WK_PIC_CEN2: 00110000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L1_R = _WK_PIC_RIG3: 00110000 (B), 00000000 (B)
It becomes.
Then, the value obtained by performing an AND (logical product) operation on the (three) most significant bytes and an AND operation on the (three) least significant bytes is set to "_WK_PIC_L1".
Specifically, the upper bytes are "00001000(B)" AND "00110000(B)" AND "00110000(B)".
In addition, the lower byte is "00000000(B)" AND "00000000(B)" AND "00000000(B)". The result of this operation is called "_WK_PIC_L1".
therefore,
_WK_PIC_L1: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
It becomes.

Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by OR (logical sum) operation between this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC". "_WK_ALL_PIC" is "0" before the first operation.
In the OR operation, an OR operation is performed between upper 1-byte data and an OR operation between lower 1-byte data.
Therefore,
_WK_ALL_PIC =00000000(B), 00000000(B)
becomes.

Next, for the effective line L2,
_WK_PIC_L2_L = _WK_PIC_LFT1: 00001000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L2_C = _WK_PIC_CEN1: 00111000 (B), 00000001 (B)
_WK_PIC_L2_R = _WK_PIC_RIG1: 00111001 (B), 00000001 (B)
It becomes.
therefore,
_WK_PIC_L2: 00001000 (B), 00000000 (B)
It becomes.
In addition, the updated "_WK_ALL_PIC" (which is ORed with "_WK_ALL_PIC" when the valid line is L1) is
_WK_ALL_PIC = 00001000 (B), 00000000 (B)
It becomes.

Regarding effective line L3,
_WK_PIC_L3_L=_WK_PIC_LFT2:00000011(B), 00000001(B)
_WK_PIC_L3_C=_WK_PIC_CEN2: 00110000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L3_R=_WK_PIC_RIG2:00110010(B), 00000000(B)
becomes.
therefore,
_WK_PIC_L3:00000000(B), 00000000(B)
becomes.
Also, "_WK_ALL_PIC" after updating is
_WK_ALL_PIC =00001000(B), 00000000(B)
becomes.

For the valid line L4,
_WK_PIC_L4_L = _WK_PIC_LFT3: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L4_C = _WK_PIC_CEN3: 00110011 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L4_R = _WK_PIC_RIG3: 00110000 (B), 00000000 (B)
It becomes.
therefore,
_WK_PIC_L4: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
It becomes.
Also, after the update, "_WK_ALL_PIC" will be
_WK_ALL_PIC = 00001000 (B), 00000000 (B)
It becomes.

For the valid line L5,
_WK_PIC_L5_L = _WK_PIC_LFT3: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L5_C = _WK_PIC_CEN2: 00110000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L5_R = _WK_PIC_RIG1: 00111001 (B), 00000001 (B)
It becomes.
therefore,
_WK_PIC_L5: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
It becomes.
Also, after the update, "_WK_ALL_PIC" will be
_WK_ALL_PIC = 00001000 (B), 00000000 (B)
It becomes.
As a result of the above, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is calculated when the symbol combination data of the five active lines L1 to L5 is calculated (combined), and this symbol combination data becomes the data of the symbol combination that will stop on any of the active lines.

FIG. 235 is a diagram showing the winning combination definition in the twenty-eighth embodiment.
Execute an AND (logical AND) operation on the upper byte of "_WK_ALL_PIC" and the small win or replay role definition one by one, and if it is "0", it is determined that the corresponding win has not been won, and if it is "0" If not, it is determined that the role has won.
Also, perform an AND (logical product) operation on the lower byte of "_WK_ALL_PIC" and the role definition of the accessory one by one, and if it is "0", it is determined that the accessory has not won, and "0" If not, it is determined that the accessory has won a prize.

In addition, the above judgment may be performed for all small roles, replays, and accessories, but if the specification is such that there will be no duplicate winnings, as soon as it is determined that the winning role has been won, subsequent The calculation may be canceled.
In the above example, the upper byte of "_WK_ALL_PIC" is "00001000 (B)", so when you perform an AND operation with the small win or replay role definition, when you AND the small win B role definition, the result is "00001000 (B)". ” ≠ “0”, and it is determined that small role B has won.
Furthermore, since the lower byte of "_WK_ALL_PIC" is "00000000 (B)", the result is "0" even if the AND operation is performed with the winning combination definition of any of the characters.

Also, as a result of the lottery, if the design combination corresponding to the small role C (red cherry) or the small role D (blue cherry) is determined to be a winning number that can be stopped and displayed, there will be no duplicate winnings. , when the left reel 31 stops, regardless of whether "red cherry" or "blue cherry" stops at "1" (upper left row), "2" (middle left row), or "3" (lower left row), the payout will not be made. The number of sheets is uniform (for example, 2 sheets).
On the other hand, in a game where the symbol combination corresponding to the small role C or D is determined to be a winning number that can be stopped and displayed as a result of the winning lottery, if the specification is such that there will be duplicate winnings, the left reel 31 will stop. Sometimes, if the "red cherry" or "blue cherry" stops at "2" (left middle row), it will be a single win on the active line L3. On the other hand, if the "red cherry" or "blue cherry" stops at "1" (top left row), it will be a duplicate win on the active lines L1 and L2. Similarly, if the "red cherry" or "blue cherry" stops at "3" (lower left row), it will be a duplicate win on active lines L4 and L5.
In the case of a single winning, two coins will be paid out, and in the case of a duplicate (double) winning, four coins will be paid out.
In such a case, the following method may be used to calculate the number of coins to be paid out.

(First method)
Small winnings C (red cherries) and small winnings D (blue cherries) should not be won individually (“red cherries” and “blue cherries” do not stop on the middle left row), and only be won in duplicate (on the left reel 31). When stopping a "red cherry" or "blue cherry", one example is to stop at either the upper left row or the lower left row.
In this case, if the number of coins to be paid out when winning the minor role C or minor role D is set to "2", when winning the minor role C or minor role D, there will always be two duplicate winnings, so the number of coins to be paid out should be set in advance. An example of this is to set the number to "4".

(Second method)
When winning the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D, the stopping position of the "blue cherry" or "red cherry" symbol on the left reel 31 may be determined.
For example, the symbol data of "_WK_PIC_LFT1", "_WK_PIC_LFT2", and "_WK_PIC_LFT3" are judged, and if the symbol data of "_WK_PIC_LFT2" (left middle row) is the symbol data corresponding to minor role C or minor role D, 2 The payout will be in pieces.
On the other hand, when the symbol data of "_WK_PIC_LFT1" or "_WK_PIC_LFT3" (upper left row or lower left row) is the symbol data corresponding to the minor winning combination C or the minor winning combination D, four pieces may be paid out.

(Third method)
For example, the winning combination and the number of coins to be paid out may be determined for each active line.
When the "(red or blue) cherry" stops on the left middle row when the left reel 31 stops, only the symbol combination data "_WK_PIC_L3" becomes data other than "0". As a result, it is determined that two coins will be paid out.
On the other hand, when the "(red or blue) cherry" stops in the upper left row when the left reel 31 stops, the symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L1" and the symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L2" are data other than "0". Become. As a result, it is determined that two coins will be paid out based on the symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L1", and it is determined that two coins will be paid out based on the symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L2". Then, the total of both is set as a payout of 4 pieces.

When set in this way, it can also be used when, for example, the small winning combination C or D (cherry) and the small winning combination A (bell) are set to be won in duplicate.
For example, when the left reel 31 stops, "Red Cherry" with symbol number 3 stops on the upper row, and "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" stops on the active line L3, the number of Bell payouts Assuming that there are 8 pieces,
Symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L1": Payout of 2 pieces Symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L2": Payout of 2 pieces Symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L3": Payout of 8 pieces, making it possible to pay out a total of 12 pieces.

Further, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of coins to be paid out in one game is set to, for example, 15 coins, and the number of coins to be paid out when winning a small prize C or D alone is set to 8 coins.
In this case, when the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D wins alone, 8 pieces will be paid out.
Furthermore, when winning the minor prize C or the minor prize D twice, the number of coins will be 8×2=16, but the upper limit of 15 coins will be given priority and 15 coins will be paid out. Specifically, a method is to perform a comparison operation between the calculation result "16" of "8+8" and the upper limit value "15", and if the upper limit value is exceeded, the upper limit value is set.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the initialization timing of the storage areas "_WK_PIC_LFT1" to "_WK_PIC_RIG3", "_WK_PIC_L1" to "_WK_PIC_L3", and "_WK_ALL_PIC" is, for example, after the payout process is completed, and the next time This is until the reels 31 can be stopped in the game. For example, it may be set at a predetermined timing after the payout process ends, a predetermined timing after the start switch 41 is operated, or a predetermined timing after the reels 31 start rotating.

Furthermore, in the 28th embodiment, nine memory areas "_WK_PIC_LFT1" to "_WK_PIC_RIG3" and "_WK_ALL_PIC" shown in FIG. 230 (A) are provided, but it is also possible not to provide the memory areas "_WK_PIC_L1" to "_WK_PIC_L5" for each valid line.
In this case, the following calculation method can be used.
First, the values obtained by performing an AND (logical product) operation on the upper bytes (three) of "_WK_PIC_LFT1", "_WK_PIC_CEN2", and "_WK_PIC_RIG3", and an AND operation on the lower bytes (three) are stored, for example, in the HL register (for example, the upper bytes are stored in the H register and the lower bytes are stored in the L register value).
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by performing an OR (logical sum) operation between this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC." The initial value of "_WK_ALL_PIC" is "0."
In the OR operation, an OR operation is performed between the upper 1 byte data and between the lower 1 byte data.
As a result, the symbol combination data on the activated line L1 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC."

Next, an AND (logical product) operation is performed on the upper bytes (three) of "_WK_PIC_LFT1", "_WK_PIC_CEN1", and "_WK_PIC_RIG1", and an AND operation is performed on the lower bytes (three) of "_WK_PIC_LFT1", "_WK_PIC_CEN1", and "_WK_PIC_RIG1", and the result is stored in the HL register.
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by performing an OR (logical sum) operation between this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC".
As a result, the symbol combination data on the activated line L2 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC."
Next, an AND (logical product) operation is performed on the upper bytes (three values) of "_WK_PIC_LFT2", "_WK_PIC_CEN2", and "_WK_PIC_RIG2", and an AND operation is performed on the lower bytes (three values) of "_WK_PIC_LFT2", "_WK_PIC_CEN2", and "_WK_PIC_RIG2", and the result is stored in the HL register.
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by performing an OR (logical sum) operation between this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC".
As a result, the symbol combination data on the active line L3 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC."

Next, the value obtained by performing an AND (logical product) operation between the upper bytes (3) of "_WK_PIC_LFT3", "_WK_PIC_CEN3", and "_WK_PIC_RIG3" and an AND operation between the lower bytes (3) is stored in the HL register. Remember.
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by performing an OR (logical sum) operation on this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC".
As a result, the symbol combination data on the valid line L4 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC".
Next, the value obtained by performing an AND (logical product) operation between the upper bytes (3) of "_WK_PIC_LFT3", "_WK_PIC_CEN2", and "_WK_PIC_RIG1" and an AND operation between the lower bytes (3) is stored in the HL register. Remember.
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by performing an OR (logical sum) operation on this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC".
As a result, the symbol combination data on the valid line L5 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC".
If the calculation is performed as described above, there is no need to provide the storage areas "_WK_PIC_L1" to "_WK_PIC_L5", so the storage area of the RWM 53 can be reduced.

Although the twenty-fifth to twenty-eighth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and can be modified in various ways, such as the following.
(1) For example, in the 25th embodiment, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is composed of nine pieces (first group to ninth group) based on the number of 1BB, RB, replay, and small roles. Various settings can be made depending on the type and number of winnings.
For example, when the number of winning combinations is 8 or less, the stop symbol data can be composed of 1-byte data.

In addition, in the 25th embodiment, in order to separate replays and small winnings, bits D3 to D7 of the stop symbol data (fourth group) are left unused, and the bits corresponding to small winnings 01 and later are replaced with the stop symbol data (fourth group). Group 5) and thereafter. However, this is not limited to this, and the D3 bit of the stop symbol data (4th group) is set as the minor winning symbol 01 winning symbol, the D4 bit is the minor winning symbol 02 winning symbol, etc., and unused bits are eliminated, and RWM storage of the stopping symbol data is performed. May save space.
In this case, when calculating the payout number data, it is possible to AND the data of the stop symbol data (fourth group) and "11111000 (B)" to mask the data related to the replay activation symbol. .

Or, contrary to the above,
Stop symbol data (5th group): Small role 01 winning symbol to small role 08 winning symbol (15 pieces paid out)
Stop symbol data (6th group): Small role 09 winning symbol to small role 12 winning symbol (15 pieces paid out)
Stop symbol data (7th group): Small role 13 winning symbols to small role 20 winning symbols (3 pieces paid out)
Stop symbol data (8th group): Small role 21 winning symbol to small role 24 winning symbol (3 pieces paid out)
Stop symbol data (9th group): Small role 25 winning symbol to small role 32 winning symbol (1 payout)
Stop symbol data (10th group): Small role 33 winning symbol to small role 34 winning symbol (1 payout)
It is also possible to divide the data so that one stop symbol data does not include data with different payout numbers.
In addition, in this case, it is preferable that the addresses of the stop symbol data (fifth group) to stop symbol data (tenth group) are continuous.

(2) In the designated data acquisition (M_SELDAT_SET) shown in FIG. 201, if it is determined in step S1118 that there is designated data, the flow chart is terminated. However, for example, in the case of a specification with overlapping small wins, even if it is determined that there is designated data, the flow chart is not terminated, and the payout number is determined for all stop pattern data. On the other hand, in the case of a specification without overlapping small wins, as shown in FIG. 201, the flow chart can be terminated at the point in time when it is determined that there is designated data.
In addition, in the case of a specification that allows for multiple wins of small prizes, when the maximum number of coins to be paid out in one game is set to 15 coins, the following method can be mentioned.
First, when it is determined that a 15-coin role (the maximum payout number in one game), such as a small role 01, has been won, acquisition of the specified data is terminated as in this embodiment.

Second, the number of paid out pieces is determined for all the stopped symbol data, and each time it is determined that a small role has been won, the number of paid out pieces is added up and stored (for example, the number of paid out pieces data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) or A Finally, if the total value exceeds "15 (D)", the number of coins to be paid out should be corrected to "15 (D)" (set to the upper limit). It will be done. Alternatively, each time it is determined that a small role has won, the number of paid out coins is added up, and it is determined whether the total value exceeds "15 (D)", and the total value exceeds "15 (D)". In this case, the number of coins to be paid out is corrected to "15 (D)" and the specified data acquisition is ended, and when the total value does not exceed "15 (D)", the specified data acquisition is continued.

(3) In the 27th embodiment, as shown in Figures 232 to 234, the address of each symbol combination data in the reel symbol arrangement table is configured from 2 bytes. However, this is not limited to this, and when the number of symbol combinations is 8 or less, it can be configured from 1 byte.

(4) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, for example, the following process may be executed after execution of the stop symbol set (FIG. 195) and before proceeding to the one line display determination (FIG. 200).
In the example shown in FIG. 173, replay is not provided in the operating state flag, but as shown in FIG. 35 (eleventh embodiment), a flag related to replay is provided in the D0 bit of the operating state flag, for example.
Then, after all the reels 31 have stopped, the operating state flags are checked, and if the operating state flags related to replay, 1BB, and RB are on, the process does not proceed to the 1-line display determination (FIG. 200). Thereby, it is possible to proceed to the one-line display determination only when a small winning combination is won or when a winning combination is not won.

(5) In FIG. 229, a storage area for differential data is provided at the final address of the symbol arrangement table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that the difference data may be stored outside the symbol arrangement table.

(6) In Figure 173, the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of the address “F00C(H)” will be “1” if it is determined that there is a winning of a small winning combination (a winning combination with a payout), and if there is no winning. A bit area may be provided that becomes "0" when the determination is made. In that case, in a game when the RB is in operation, it is determined whether the data in the bit area is "1" or not, and if it is "1", the number of winnings when the RB is in operation at the address "F010 (H)". (for example, by subtracting ``1'' or adding ``1''), and when it is ``0'', the number of winnings when the RB is activated is not updated.

(7) As shown in step S1017 in FIG. 194, the stop position was determined based on the rise data of the stop switch 42. Here, it is also possible to employ level data instead of rise data.
However, when level data is used instead of rise data, for example, the stop switch 42 continues to be operated before the reel 31 reaches a certain speed, and after that, the reel 31 reaches a certain speed and the reel 31 is stopped. The reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 that continues to be operated is controlled to stop at the timing when it becomes possible to accept the reel. Therefore, the reels 31 will stop regardless of the player's skill. In this case, by adjusting the timing at which the reel 31 stop operation can be accepted, it becomes possible to stop symbol combinations that require eye-pressing (for example, the 1BB symbol combination) regardless of the player's skill. In some cases. On the other hand, if the stop position is determined based on the rising data, the above problem does not occur. Therefore, from this point of view, it is preferable to determine the stop position based on the rising data.

(8) In the example of FIG. 194, the stop position is determined based on the rise data of the stop switch 42, and the stop position is determined from when it is decided to determine the stop position (when "Yes" is determined in step S1017). An interrupt wait process was executed (step S1011) so that no interrupt process was performed until the process including updating the symbol data (step S1035 in FIG. 195) (stop symbol set in step S1024 in FIG. 194) was completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of interrupt waiting processing, interrupts may be prohibited so that interrupt processing is not executed during that period.

(9) In the 25th embodiment, the update of the stop symbol data was executed from the 9th group. However, the process is not limited to this, and may be executed starting from the first group.
Specifically, in FIG. 195, "9" is set in the B register in step S1032, and "1" is subtracted from the B register value in step S1036. Instead, "1" is set in the B register in step S1032. , and in step S1036, the process of adding "1" to the B register value may be executed. In this case, in step S1036, when the B register value after adding "1" becomes "10 (D)", the process may be terminated.
Note that the above also applies to the display determination process (FIG. 227) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. Specifically, in FIG. 227, "9" is set in the B register in step S1181, "1" is subtracted from the B register value in step S1195, and whether or not the B register value is "0" is determined in step S1196. judged. Instead, "1" is set in the B register in step S1181, "1" is added to the B register value in step S1195, and it is determined whether the B register value is "10 (D)" in step S1196. If the B register value becomes "10 (D)", the process may be terminated.

(10) In the above embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of one of the gaming machines, but the slot machine 10 is a "reel-type gaming machine" installed in a No. 4 business store that is subject to the Entertainment Business Law. (so-called "pachislot gaming machines"), but can also be applied to casino machines, for example. Furthermore, regardless of whether the gaming machine is a reel-type gaming machine or not, the present invention can also be applied to a managed gaming machine that does not use medals.
(11) All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification, including the 25th to 28th embodiments, are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<29th embodiment>
Hereinafter, in the description of the 29th to 36th embodiments, the left reel 31 will be referred to as the first reel 31, the middle reel 31 will be referred to as the second reel 31, and the right reel 31 will be referred to as the third reel 31.
In addition, in the description of the 29th to 36th embodiments, the left stop switch 42 is referred to as the first stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42 is referred to as the second stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 is referred to as the third stop switch 42. There are cases where it is called.

Furthermore, in the description of the 29th to 36th embodiments, "#" may refer to all of "1" to "3" or may indicate any one of "1" to "3". have
Further, in FIGS. 237, 243, 249, 253, and 254, which will be described later, the numerical value shown in parentheses in the "address" column indicates the number of bytes of the storage area.
Furthermore, in FIGS. 237, 243, 249, 253, and 254, which will be described later, "D0" to "D7" respectively indicate bits D0 to D7 of 8-bit data.

In the 29th embodiment, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed before the predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the reels 31 has elapsed, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) is This is to execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).
Here, "four-phase excitation output" has the same meaning as "four-phase excitation state" in the fourth embodiment and FIG. 13.
Moreover, the "predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output" has the same meaning as "the time from the start of the four-phase excitation state to the end of the four-phase excitation state" in the fourth embodiment and FIG. 13.

In this embodiment as well, like the other embodiments, the slot machine 10 includes three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, right reel 31), and three reels 31 corresponding to each reel 31. stop switches 42 (left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, right stop switch 42).
Further, the symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the active line, the type of winning combination, the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, the winning combination, RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
Furthermore, in this embodiment as well, similarly to the fourth embodiment and the twenty-third embodiment, the motor 32 for rotating the reel 31 is a four-phase stepping motor, and while the reel 31 and motor 32 are rotating, A 1-2 phase excitation output is performed in which 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are alternately performed, and when stopping the reel 31 and motor 32, a 4-phase excitation output is performed in which 4 phases are simultaneously excited.

Furthermore, in this embodiment as well, as in the twenty-fifth embodiment, all motor index passing checks are performed in step S1013 of the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) (FIG. 194) during the main process (M_MAIN).
Here, for all reels 31, after there is a change in the # reel motor index, the first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) (Figure 135), the second reel symbol number (for passing position) The values of (_NB_RL2_PASPIC) (FIG. 136) and the third reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) (FIG. 137) are all values other than "FF(H) (11111111(B))". Therefore, if "1" is added to the result of sequential ORing of these values, the result will be a value other than "0".

Further, in step S1014 in FIG. 194, it is determined whether or not it is possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 (stop acceptance). When the calculation result in step S1013 is a value other than "0", the result is "Yes" in step S1014. Thereafter, when the stop switch 42 is operated, "Yes" is determined in step S1017 in FIG. 194, and the process proceeds to step S1022, where the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted.

In this embodiment, as described in the fourth and twenty-third embodiments, when the stop switch 42 is operated (the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 is pressed), the detection sensor 42e changes from off to on, the signal of the stop switch 42 changes from off to on, and "1" is stored in the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) at address "F012 (H)."
For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the signal of the left stop switch 42 changes from off to on, and "1" is stored in the D0 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV). At this time, if the center stop switch 42, the right stop switch 42, and the start switch 41 are not operated, the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) becomes "00000001 (B)."

Further, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the signal of the middle stop switch 42 is turned on from off, and "1" is stored in the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV). At this time, if the left stop switch 42, right stop switch 42, and start switch 41 are not operated, the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) becomes "00000010(B)".

Furthermore, when the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 are operated, the signals of both the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 turn from off to on, and input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) ``1'' is stored in both the D0 bit and D1 bit of . At this time, if the right stop switch 42 and the start switch 41 are not operated, the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) becomes "00000011 (B)".

Then, when the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) changes from "0" to "1" and "1" is stored in the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) at address "F017(H)", it is determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted.
For example, if the D0 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) during the previous interrupt processing was "0" and the D0 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) during the current interrupt processing is "1," then "1" is stored in the D0 bit of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP). This indicates that the operation of the left stop switch 42 has been accepted.

In addition, if the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) during the previous interrupt processing was "0" and the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) during the current interrupt processing is "1", then "1" is stored in the D1 bit of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP). This determines that the operation of the middle stop switch 42 has been accepted.

Furthermore, both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the time of the previous interrupt processing are "0", and the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the time of the current interrupt processing. When both the D1 bits are "1", "1" is stored in both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP). Thereby, it is determined that the two operations of the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 have been accepted at the same time.

Note that in this embodiment as well, the cycle of interrupt processing is set to "1.117 ms" similarly to the twenty-third embodiment. Then, during this "1.117ms", when both the signals of the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 turn from off to on, both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) are set to " 1'' is stored, and it is determined that the two operations of the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 have been accepted at the same time.

Further, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal of the stop switch 42 is changed from off to on, but it may be changed from on to off. That is, the signal of the stop switch 42 is not limited to active high, but may be active low. Then, when the signal of the stop switch 42 changes from on to off, it may be determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted.
In other words, "the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted" means that the signal of the stop switch 42 is turned on from OFF when it is active high, and the signal of the stop switch 42 is changed from OFF to ON when it is active low. means going from on to off. The same applies not only to the stop switch 42 but also to other switches.

Then, in step S1022 of FIG. 194, when operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted ("1" is stored in the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)), the process proceeds to the next step S1023.
In step S1023, "4 (D)" indicating "deceleration started" is stored in the #th reel drive status (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIGS. 135 to 137).

In addition, in step S1023, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination result of the current game and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined according to the determined stop position. The symbol number is stored in the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) (FIGS. 135 to 137).

For example, when winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, and the small winning combination 01, which pays out 15 pieces, or the small winning number 13, which pays out 3 pieces. -17 will be eligible to win.
Here, when the small winning A1 condition device is activated during the general game of the 1BB game (when 1BB is activated) and the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order (left center right), the small winning combination 01 (15 coins) is activated. When a winning combination (win) is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in an incorrect pressing order (a pressing order other than the correct pressing order), any one of the small winning combinations 13 to 17 (3-card winning combination) is won.
On the other hand, when the accessory is not activated, there is no correct pressing order when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and even if both are pressed in the pressing order, any one of the small winning combinations 13 to 17 (3-card winning combination) is Win a prize.
Then, when the small win A1 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, the symbols constituting the small win 13, for example, are moved from the effective line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames. is located, the symbol number of that symbol is stored in the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC).

Furthermore, in step S909 of the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) (FIG. 154) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after the process of step S1023, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC), When it is determined that the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) is the same value, the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) (Figure 134) is set to "00001111(B)" (4-phase ON) is stored, and "1(D)" indicating "deceleration" is stored in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIGS. 135 to 137). .
Then, in the port output process in step S462 during the interrupt process (I_INTR) that is executed thereafter, φ1 of the motor 32 is A four-phase excitation output is performed to simultaneously excite the four phases of ~φ4. This applies a brake to the motor 32 and stops the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32.

In this way, when the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) become the same value, the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #), the deceleration pulse data "00001111(B)" is stored, and four-phase excitation output is performed.
Therefore, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, the four-phase excitation output is not immediately performed.

In addition, the deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" may be stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) and a four-phase excitation output may be performed not only when the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the #th reel symbol number (for stopping position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) become the same value, but also, for example, when the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the #th reel symbol number (for stopping position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) become the same value and the step number of one symbol on the #th reel 13 (_NB_RL#_STEP) becomes a predetermined value (for example, "3").

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the four-phase excitation output is performed at every "1.117 ms" interrupt processing while "00001111 (B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#).
Furthermore, when deceleration begins, the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) (Figs. 135 to 137) stores "90 (D)" (deceleration pulse output counter) (Fig. 156) which corresponds to address "1050 (H)", and thereafter, the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) is decremented by "1" every two interrupts.

Then, when the value of the # reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) becomes "0", "00000000 (B)", which is the pulse data at the time of stop, is stored in the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#). At the same time, "0 (D)" indicating "stop" is stored in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS). This ends the four-phase excitation output.

In this way, while the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) is "1" or more and "00001111 (B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#), , the 4-phase excitation output continues, the value of the # reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) becomes "0", and "00000000 (B)" is stored in the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#). Then, the four-phase excitation output stops.
Additionally, the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) becomes "0", the stop pulse data "00000000 (B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#), and the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) becomes "0". A state in which "0 (D)" indicating "stop" is stored in the reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) and the four-phase excitation output is completed is a state in which the reel 31 is stopped.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the interrupt processing cycle is set to "1.117ms", and the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) is subtracted by "1" every two interrupts. .
Therefore, it takes "1.117 x 2 x 90 = 201.06 ms" for the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) to go from "90 (D)" to "0 (D)". Therefore, the four-phase excitation output continues for "201.06 ms", and after "201.06 ms" has elapsed, the four-phase excitation output ends.
That is, in this embodiment, the "predetermined period" for performing four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 corresponds to "201.06 ms".

Note that the period of the interrupt processing is not limited to "1.117 ms", and the subtraction of the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) is not limited to every two interrupts.
For example, the cycle of the interrupt processing may be set to "2.235 ms" and the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) may be subtracted by "1" for each interrupt.

Furthermore, when the stop switch 42 is released (the player's hand is released from the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 that had been pressed, and the stop button 42a returns to its original position (the position shown in FIG. 12(a))), , the detection sensor 42e goes from on to off, the signal of the stop switch 42 goes from on to off, and "0" is stored in the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) at address "F012(H)". be done.
In other words, "the stop switch 42 is released" means that the signal of the stop switch 42 is turned off from on when it is active high, and the signal of the stop switch 42 is turned off when it is active low. It means to turn on from. The same applies not only to the stop switch 42 but also to other switches.

In the present embodiment, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last is accepted, before a predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the reel 31 to be stopped last has elapsed. (For example, the timing when the 4-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31, or the timing before the 4-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31) Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and after the predetermined period (after the end of the four-phase excitation output), the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed. Execute medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).
For this reason, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last is released during the predetermined period (during the 4-phase excitation output) during which 4-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the reel 31 to be stopped last. Also, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, but the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed after the predetermined period has elapsed (after the end of the four-phase excitation output).

Also, in this embodiment, if operation of any of the start switch 41 or the three stop switches 42 (left, center, right) is accepted, the result in step S1307 in FIG. 236 will be "No" and processing will not proceed to step S291 and subsequent steps. Therefore, regardless of whether the specified period for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the last reel 31 to stop has elapsed, the medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) when a prize is won is not executed.
Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the last reel 31 to stop, and the start switch 41 and the three stop switches 42 (left, center, right) are released, the result in step S1307 in FIG. 236 becomes “Yes”, and processing proceeds to step S291 and subsequent steps, making it possible to execute the display determination processing and the medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) in the event of a win.

FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the twenty-ninth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the twenty-third embodiment.
In the flowchart of the twenty-ninth embodiment shown in FIG. 236, steps that are different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the twenty-ninth embodiment, the processing from step S295 to step S300 in FIG. 139 is executed, but the illustration of the processing from step S295 to step S300 is omitted in FIG. 236.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly explained.

As shown in FIG. 236, in the 29th embodiment, after executing the reel stop reception check (M_STOP_CHK) in step S752, the process proceeds to step S1301, and the main control board 50 checks the address "F012(H)" of the RWM 53. The data stored in input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) is stored in the A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1302.

In step S1302, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation on the A register value and the mask data "01000111 (B)" and stores the result in the A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1303.
Here, the mask data "01000111 (B)" used in step S1302 is data for masking (setting to "0") bit data other than the D0 bit, D1 bit, D2 bit, and D6 bit. That is, by performing a logical product (AND) operation on input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) and "01000111 (B)", the D0 bit (left stop switch signal), D1 bit (middle stop switch signal), Bit data other than the D2 bit (right stop switch signal) and the D6 bit (start switch signal) can be masked (set to "0").

In step S1303, the main control board 50 performs a logical sum (OR) between the A register value and the data stored in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (FIG. 135) of the address "F04D(H)" of the RWM 53. Perform the calculation and store the result in the A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1304.
In step S1304, the main control board 50 performs a logical sum (OR) between the A register value and the data stored in the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (FIG. 136) at address "F058(H)" of the RWM 53. Perform the calculation and store the result in the A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1305.

In step S1305, the main control board 50 performs a logical sum (OR) between the A register value and the data stored in the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (FIG. 137) at address "F063(H)" of the RWM 53. Perform the calculation and store the result in the A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1306.

In step S1306, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation between the A register value and the mask data "01111111 (B)". Then, the process advances to the next step S1307.
Here, the mask data "01111111 (B)" used in step S1306 is data for masking (setting to "0") the bit data of the D7 bit. That is, by performing a logical product (AND) operation between the data of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) and "01111111 (B)", the D7 bit (data indicating whether it is the excitation update timing) is obtained. It can be masked (set to "0").

In step S1307, it is determined whether the zero flag is "1". That is, it is determined whether the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1306 is "0".
Then, when the zero flag is "1" (the result of the AND operation in step S1306 is "0"), it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, and the result is "Yes" in step S1307, and the display judgment in step S291 is made. Proceed to. This makes it possible to execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in the subsequent step S294.

In other words, when the data of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), the data of the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the data of the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) are data indicating a stop, all It is determined that the reels 31 have stopped, and display determination and medal payout processing at the time of winning can be executed.

On the other hand, if the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that one of the reels 31 is not stopped, "No" is obtained in step S1307, and the process returns to the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) in step S752. In this case, the processing from step S752 onwards will be repeated. As a result, the process does not proceed to the display determination in step S291, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 is also not executed.

In other words, if any of the data of the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS), the data of the second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the data of the third reel driving state (_WK_RL3_STS) is not data indicating stop. , does not execute the medal payout process when winning a prize.
For example, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 have stopped, and the right reel 31 has received the operation of the right stop switch 42 but is still in the state of starting deceleration or is decelerating (during 4-phase excitation output). In some cases, the medal payout process upon winning is not executed.

When the D0, D1, D2, and D6 bits of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (Figure 133) are all "0," that is, when the left stop switch signal, center stop switch signal, right stop switch signal, and start switch signal are all off, the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1302 becomes "00000000 (B)."

Further, when the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel driving state (_WK_RL3_STS) are all "00000000 (B)" or "10000000 (B)", that is, , when all reels 31 are stopped, the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) are sequentially ORed, and the result is The result of performing an AND operation on the mask data "01111111 (B)" is "00000000 (B)".

Therefore, the result of the logical product (AND) calculation in step S1306 will be "00000000 (B)" only when the left stop switch signal, center stop switch signal, right stop switch signal, and start switch signal are all OFF and all reels 31 are stopped. Only at this time will step S1307 result in "Yes", making it possible to execute the display determination in step S291 and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) in the event of a win in step S294.

Also, when one or more of the left stop switch signal, middle stop switch signal, right stop switch signal, and start switch signal is on, that is, the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42. , and the start switch 41, the result of the AND operation in step S1306 is "00000000(B)" even if all the reels 31 are stopped. "do not become.

Specifically, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 to be stopped last is completed, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last is not operated. If it remains accepted, the result of the AND operation in step S1306 will not be "00000000(B)".
In this case, since "No" is obtained in step S1307, neither the display determination in step S291 nor the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 is executed.

In addition, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all reels 31, including the motor 32 of the last reel 31 to stop (e.g., the right reel 31), has ended, if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last reel 31 to stop (e.g., the right reel 31) has been accepted, and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first reel 31 to stop (e.g., the left reel 31) is operated, and then the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last reel 31 to stop is released while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first reel 31 to stop is still operated, the result of the logical product (AND) calculation in step S1306 will not be "00000000 (B)" because the stop switch corresponding to the first reel 31 to stop has been operated.

In this case as well, since the answer is "No" in step S1307, neither the display determination in step S291 nor the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 is executed.
In this way, in a situation where any of the stop switches 42 is operated, by preventing the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 from being executed, the number of credits can be changed at the timing desired by the player. addition or payout of medals from the hopper 35.

In addition, even if the left stop switch signal, the middle stop switch signal, the right stop switch signal, and the start switch signal are all off, i.e., even if the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, the right stop switch 42, and the start switch 41 are all released, if there is one or more reels 31 that are not stopped, the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1306 will not be "00000000 (B)."

Specifically, for example, even if all the stop switches 42 including the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last and the start switch 41 are released, the motor 32 of the reel 31 to be stopped last is 4-phase excited. If the output is not completed, the result of the AND operation in step S1306 will not be "00000000(B)".
In this case, since "No" is obtained in step S1307, neither the display determination in step S291 nor the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 is executed.

Here, for example, suppose that the winning number "10" is selected by the prize selection means 61, the small prize A1 condition device (Figure 124) is activated, and either the small prize 01, which pays out 15 coins, or any of the small prizes 13 to 17, which pay out 3 coins, becomes available for winning.
Furthermore, suppose that two reels 31 stop (the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 ends), operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, and the symbol combination (Figure 119) corresponding to the minor win 13, which will result in a payout of three coins, can be displayed in a stopped state.

Under such circumstances, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, before the predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed. (For example, the timing when the 4-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31, or the timing before the 4-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31). Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the eye reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.
Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released during the predetermined period when the four-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the third reel 31, medals will not be paid out at the time of winning. Processing (M_WIN_PAY) is not executed.
Then, after a predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 49, in the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning, the number of credits data is acquired in step S393, and in the next step S394, the acquired number of credits data is "50 (D)". Determine whether it exists or not. That is, it is determined whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50".
When the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50", "Yes" is determined in step S394, and the process proceeds to one medal payout process in step S398. In this case, the process does not proceed to the process of adding the number of credits in step S397.

On the other hand, if the number of credits has not yet reached the upper limit of 50, the result of step S394 is "No." In this case, the process proceeds to step S397 for adding the number of credits, and does not proceed to step S398 for paying out one medal.
Furthermore, when the process proceeds to step S398 for paying out one medal, as described in the first embodiment (C), the process of outputting a drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is executed to drive the hopper motor 36 and pay out an actual medal from the hopper 35. Furthermore, by detecting the on/off state of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, it is determined that one medal has been paid out from the hopper 35.

In this way, in the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when winning a prize, the process of adding the number of credits is executed until the number of credits reaches the upper limit "50", and once the number of credits reaches the upper limit "50", , executes a process of outputting a drive signal for the hopper motor 36, drives the hopper motor 36, and pays out actual medals from the hopper 35.
In addition, common processing is executed halfway when driving the hopper motor 36 to pay out medals from the hopper 35 and when adding up the number of credits. This makes it possible to simplify the processing and reduce the amount of ROM used by the program.

That is, when the number of credits is the upper limit "50", the winning number "10" is won by the prize drawing means 61, the minor prize A1 condition device is activated, and the two reels 31 are stopped. In a game in which the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 in which three medals are awarded is stopped and displayed, the third reel is After the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 is accepted, at a predetermined timing before the elapse of a predetermined period for performing excitation output to stop the third reel 31, the third reel 31 is activated. Even if the corresponding stop switch 42 is released, after a predetermined period of excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 has elapsed, a drive signal output process is executed to output a drive signal for the hopper 35. do.

As a result, the hopper motor 36 is not driven while the motor 32 (stepping motor) is being energized in four phases, and the hopper motor 36 can be driven after the four-phase excitation of the motor 32 is completed. The current necessary to drive the motor 36 can be secured.

On the other hand, when the number of credits is "0", the winning number "10" is won by the prize drawing means 61, the minor prize A1 condition device is activated, and the two reels 31 are stopped. In a game in which the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 in which three medals are awarded is stopped and displayed, the third reel is After the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 is accepted, at a predetermined timing before the elapse of a predetermined period for performing excitation output to stop the third reel 31, the third reel 31 is activated. Even if the corresponding stop switch 42 is released, an addition process for adding the number of credits is executed after a predetermined period of time during which excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31.

In this case, the drive signal output process for the hopper 35 is not executed, but the number of credits is By executing the addition process, it is possible to standardize the process up to the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning. That is, since the processing up to the medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be shared without determining the number of credits at the start of the game, the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced.

Also, for example, suppose that the winning number "10" is selected in the role selection means 61, the small role A1 condition device (Figure 124) is activated, and either the small role 01, which pays out 15 coins, or any of the small roles 13 to 17, which pay out 3 coins, becomes available for winning.
Furthermore, suppose that two reels 31 are stopped, operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 (third reel 31) is accepted, and a symbol combination (Figure 119) corresponding to a minor win 13 resulting in a payout of three coins becomes capable of being displayed in a stopped state.

Under such a situation (in which two reels 31 are stopped), even if the predetermined period of 4-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed, the third reel 31 If the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 continues to be accepted, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed. Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

In this way, in a game in which a symbol combination that results in the payout (awarding) of medals is displayed in a stopped state, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continuously operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of a winning prize is not executed, and if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of a winning prize can be executed.
This allows the amount of credits to be added or medals to be paid out from the hopper 35 to be determined at the timing desired by the player.

Furthermore, regardless of whether the predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed, if operation of the start switch 41 or any of the three stop switches 42 (left, center, right) is accepted, the result in step S1307 in FIG. 236 becomes "No" and processing does not proceed to step S291 and subsequent steps, so that the medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) when a prize is won is not executed.
Then, when the start switch 41 and the three (left, center, right) stop switches 42 are all released and a predetermined period of time has elapsed for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31, the result in step S1307 in FIG. 236 becomes “Yes” and processing proceeds to step S291 and subsequent steps, making it possible to execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when a prize is won.

In this way, in a game where symbol combinations for which medals are paid out (granted) are displayed in a stopped state, the start switch 41 and any one of the three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 are continuously operated. , the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and when the start switch 41 and all three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 are released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed. It becomes possible.
Thereby, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

Note that even if the power switch 11 is unintentionally turned off and the power-off process is executed while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is operated. By turning on the power switch 11 while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning will not be executed and the third reel 31 will be dealt with. When the stop switch 42 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning becomes executable.
Thereby, even if the power is cut off at an unintended timing, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at the timing desired by the player.

Similarly, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all the reels 31, including the motor 32 of the last reel 31 to be stopped (for example, the right reel 31), is completed, when the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last reel 31 to be stopped (for example, the right reel 31) is accepted, and then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first reel 31 to be stopped (for example, the left reel 31) is operated and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last reel 31 to be stopped is released while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first reel 31 is still operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when a prize is won is not executed even if a predetermined period for performing the four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed. Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first reel 31 to be stopped (for example, the left reel 31) is released (at least when all the stop switches are released), the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when a prize is won can be executed.
This allows the amount of credits to be added or medals to be paid out from the hopper 35 to be determined at the timing desired by the player.

Also, in this embodiment, similarly to the sixth embodiment, the medal payout device 15 includes a hopper 35 that stores medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper disk 101 that rotates the hopper disk 101. It is equipped with a hopper motor 36 for detecting medal dispensing, and dispensing sensors 37a and 37b for detecting medal dispensing.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to the medal payout device 15 and controls the drive of the hopper motor 36.

Furthermore, the hopper motor 36 is a DC motor (direct current motor), and when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on and current is applied to the hopper motor 36, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates from a stopped state. , it eventually reaches a constant speed (constant speed). Thereafter, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually decelerates from a constant speed state and eventually stops.
Note that when stopping the rotation of the drive shaft, it is also possible to suddenly stop the rotation of the drive shaft by passing a current through the hopper motor 36 in the opposite direction to that when dispensing medals.

Here, the maximum value of the current required to perform four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 (stepping motor) in order to stop the reel 31 is set to "500 to 800 mA" per motor 32.
In addition, the maximum value of the current required to drive the hopper motor 36 is set to "2.5 to 4.0 A (2500 to 4000 mA)."
Furthermore, when the lamps and LEDs (such as the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78) controlled by the main control board 50 are turned on, a current of "1A" is required.

If a current exceeding "10 A" flows through the main control board 50, the protection circuit provided on the main control board 50 determines that this is an overcurrent (overload) and turns off the power.
In the case of power failure at this time, there may be a case where power failure processing is not executed. If such a power failure occurs during a game (for example, when the number of credits is "50", the winning number "10" is won by the role selection means 61, all the reels 31 are stopped, and a symbol combination for awarding three medals is displayed in a stopped state, and immediately before the medal payout processing at the time of winning (processing for driving the hopper motor 36 to pay out medals) is executed), and the power failure processing is not executed, even if the power is restored from the power failure, an irrecoverable error occurs, and after the irrecoverable error is released (setting change processing is executed), the game cannot be restored to the state when the power failure occurred (for example, the processing for awarding three medals is not executed), which may cause a disadvantage to the player.

Note that the configuration may be such that when an overcurrent flows on the main control board 50 side, the fuse on the power supply board is blown. In this case, if the fuse blows, even if the power switch 11 is turned on, the device will not be able to recover from the power-off state (it will break down).
Further, on the sub-control board 80 side, power supply is managed separately from that on the main control board 50 side.

In this way, the maximum value of the current required to drive the hopper motor 36 (DC motor) is set to be greater than the maximum value of the current required to provide a four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 (stepping motor) in order to stop the reel 31.
For this reason, when driving the hopper motor 36, in order to ensure the current required for driving the hopper motor 36, it is preferable not to execute any other control that requires a large current.

Therefore, as described above, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, before the predetermined period for performing the four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed. (For example, at the timing when the 4-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the third reel 31, or the timing before the 4-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the third reel 31), 3 Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the eye reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed after a predetermined period has elapsed. I have to.

As a result, the hopper motor 36 (DC motor) is not driven while the motor 32 (stepping motor) is being energized in four phases, and the hopper motor 36 is driven after the four-phase excitation of the motor 32 is completed. Therefore, the current necessary to drive the hopper motor 36 can be secured. That is, the current necessary to drive the hopper motor 36 can be reliably secured, and in turn, the hopper motor 36 can be reliably driven.

Furthermore, as described in the twenty-third embodiment, in the reel drive management (I_REEL_ADM) (FIGS. 151 and 152) in step S841 during the interrupt processing (I_INTR), the right reel 31, middle reel 31, and left reel 31 are , the drive control of the motors 32 (stepping motors) of the three reels 31 is sequentially performed. As a result, drive control of three motors 32 can be executed with one interrupt process.
In the port output process (FIG. 151) of step S462 during the interrupt process (I_INTR), drive signals can be output to three motors 32 simultaneously.

This makes it possible to start the rotation of the three reels 31 and the motor 32 all at once, and then rotate them all at a constant speed.
In addition, when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, if the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, the operation is performed while the other two reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed. It is possible to perform a four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 for which the request has been accepted, thereby stopping the rotation.

Furthermore, when three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and any two stop switches 42 are operated in quick succession, it is possible to stop the rotation of the remaining reel 31 by applying a four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 whose operation was accepted first while the remaining reel 31 continues to rotate at a constant speed, and then, regardless of whether the four-phase excitation output has ended, apply a four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 whose operation was accepted last to stop the rotation.

Furthermore, when operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted before the first reel 31 has stopped and a predetermined period of time has elapsed for performing a four-phase excitation output to stop the second reel 31 (for example, at the time when the four-phase excitation output to stop the second reel 31 is being performed or before the four-phase excitation output to stop the second reel 31 is being performed), it is possible to execute a four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 even before the predetermined period has elapsed.
In this way, in order to stop any one of the reels 31, before the predetermined period of time has elapsed for outputting four-phase excitation to the motor 32 of that reel 31, operation of another stop switch 42 can be accepted, and four-phase excitation output can be executed to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42, thereby allowing the game to proceed smoothly.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the maximum value of current required to provide four-phase excitation output to one motor 32 (stepping motor) is "500 to 800 mA," so three motors 32 have four-phase excitation output. The maximum value of current required to perform excitation output is "1500 to 2400 mA".
Since the maximum value of current required to drive one hopper motor 36 is "2500 to 4000 mA", the maximum value of current required to drive one motor 32 with four-phase excitation output. is smaller than the maximum value of current required to drive one hopper motor 36. Furthermore, the maximum value of current required to provide four-phase excitation output to three motors 32 is smaller than the maximum value of current required to drive one hopper motor 36.
Therefore, even if four-phase excitation output is applied to three motors 32 at the same time, sufficient current can be secured to stop them.

Although the twenty-ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) In the above embodiment, in step S1301, the data stored in the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) of the address “F012(H)” of the RWM 53 is stored in the A register. Not exclusively.
For example, the data of the input port 51 to which the left stop switch signal, middle stop switch signal, right stop switch signal, and start switch signal are input may be directly stored in the A register.

(2) In the above embodiment, in step S1302, a logical product (AND) operation is performed between the A register value and the mask data "01000111(B)". However, this is not limited to this.
For example, data indicating the on/off state of the signal of the 3-bet switch 40b is stored in the D3 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) at address "F012(H)" of the RWM 53. Similarly, data indicating the on/off state of the signal of the 1-bet switch 40a is stored in the D4 bit, data indicating the on/off state of the signal of the settlement switch 43 is stored in the D5 bit, and data indicating the on/off state of the signal of the door switch 17 is stored in the D7 bit.

Then, in step S1301, data of input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is stored in the A register, and in the next step S1302, a logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and mask data "11111111 (B)" is performed. You may go.
As a result, in addition to the start switch 41, left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42, even when any of the signals from the 1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b, and door switch 17 are on, It is possible to make the determination "No" in step S1307 in FIG. 236. That is, it is possible to prevent the process from proceeding to the display determination in step S291 in FIG. 236 or the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294.

(3) In the above embodiment, the logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and the mask data "01111111 (B)" is performed in step S1306, but the invention is not limited to this.
For example, even if "00001111(B)" is used as the mask data in step S1306, the same calculation result as above can be obtained.
In addition, in this embodiment, the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) is executed once every two interrupts, so the D7 bit of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) is set to "0" or "1" for each interrupt process. ”. Therefore, not limited to such specifications, for example, if the D7 bit of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) is always "0", "11111111 (B)" is set as mask data in step S1306. It is also possible to use

(4) For example, when the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of the reel 31 to be stopped last becomes "10000000 (B)" or "00000000 (B)", it is assumed that the 4-phase excitation output has ended. It may be determined that the reel 31 has stopped.
Then, input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "00000000 (B)", and the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) of the reel 31 that stops last is "10000000 (B)" or "00000000 (B)". )'', the process may proceed to the display determination in step S291 in FIG. 236 or the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294.

(5) For example, when the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) of the last reel 31 to stop becomes “00000000 (B),” that is, when all of the φ1 to φ4 data of the motor 32 become “0,” it may be determined that the four-phase excitation output has ended and that the reel 31 has stopped.
Then, when the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "00000000 (B)" and the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) of the last reel 31 to stop is "00000000 (B)," the process may proceed to the display determination of step S291 in FIG. 236 or to the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) in the event of a win of step S294.

(6) For example, when the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) of all reels 31 becomes "00000000 (B)", the 4-phase excitation output of all motors 32 ends, and all reels 31 may be determined to have stopped.
That is, the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1), the second reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR2), and the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) are sequentially ORed, and the result is "00000000 (B)". '', it may be determined that the four-phase excitation output of all the motors 32 has ended and all the reels 31 have stopped.
Then, when the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "00000000 (B)" and the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) of all reels 31 is "00000000 (B)", the The process may proceed to the display determination in step S291 or the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294.

(7) For example, when the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) of the reel 31 to be stopped last becomes "00000000 (B)", it is determined that the four-phase excitation output has ended, and the reel 31 may be determined to have stopped.
Then, when the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "00000000 (B)" and the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) of the reel 31 that stops last is "00000000 (B)" , the process may proceed to the display determination in step S291 in FIG. 236 or the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294.
Note that, once again, the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) is updated (subtracted) by interrupt processing. This point also applies to other embodiments.

(8) For example, when the # reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) of all reels 31 becomes "00000000 (B)", the 4-phase excitation output of all motors 32 ends, and all It may be determined that the reels 31 have stopped.
That is, the first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL1_PLSOUT), the second reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL2_PLSOUT), and the third reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL3_PLSOUT) are sequentially ORed, and the result is "00000000. (B), it may be determined that the four-phase excitation output of all the motors 32 has ended and all the reels 31 have stopped.
Then, when the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "00000000 (B)" and the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) of all reels 31 is "00000000 (B)", The process may proceed to the display determination in step S291 of 236 or the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294.

(9) In the above embodiment, after the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, before a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which four-phase excitation output is performed to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, At the timing when the 4-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the reel 31, or the timing before the 4-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the reel 31), the operation of the other stop switch 42 is accepted, and the other stop switches 42 are activated. Although four-phase excitation output can be executed to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42, the present invention is not limited thereto.
For example, after the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, the operation of the other stop switch 42 is not allowed until a predetermined period for outputting four-phase excitation to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 has elapsed. may not be accepted and the stop control of the other reels 31 may not be executed.

In addition, from the time when the operation of any one of the stop switches 42 is accepted until the start of four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42, the operation of other stop switches 42 is not accepted, and stop control of the other reels 31 is not executed.
Furthermore, during a specified period in which four-phase excitation output is being applied to the motor 32 of any one of the reels 31, operation of other stop switches 42 is not accepted, and stop control of the other reels 31 is not executed.

Here, as in the above embodiment, after the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, before a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which four-phase excitation output is performed to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 ( For example, the operation of the other stop switch 42 is received at the timing when the 4-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the reel 31, or the timing before the 4-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the reel 31, If the motors 32 of the reels 31 corresponding to other stop switches 42 are enabled to perform four-phase excitation output, the order in which the stop switches 42 are operated and the order in which the reels 31 are stopped may be reversed.

Specifically, for example, when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, it is assumed that the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 are quickly operated in this order. It is assumed that the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted, and then, before the left reel 31 stops, the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted. At this time, the number of moving symbols (number of sliding frames) from when the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted until the left reel 31 stops is set to "4", and after the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted. , it is assumed that the number of symbols to be moved until the middle reel 31 stops is set to "0". In such a case, the middle reel 31 may stop first, and then the left reel 31 may stop.

Therefore, after the operation of any one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, before a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which four-phase excitation output is performed on the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42, the operation of the other stop switches 42 is not accepted and stop control of the other reels 31 is not executed, thereby preventing the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 and the stop sequence of the reels 31 from being interchanged.

Similarly, from the time the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted until the start of four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42, the operation of the other stop switches 42 is not allowed. Even when the stop switch 42 is not accepted and the stop control of the other reels 31 is not executed, it is possible to prevent the order in which the stop switches 42 are operated and the order in which the reels 31 are stopped from being switched.
Also, during the predetermined period when the motor 32 of one of the reels 31 is being outputted with four-phase excitation, the operation of the other stop switches 42 is not accepted and the stop control of the other reels 31 is not executed. , it is possible to prevent the order in which the stop switches 42 are operated and the order in which the reels 31 are stopped from being switched.

(10) In the above embodiment, when stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, a 4-phase excitation output is provided to the motor 32 (stepping motor) as an excitation output for stopping the reel 31. However, the present invention is not limited to this. do not have.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, the excitation output for stopping the reel 31 may be, for example, a one-phase excitation output, a two-phase excitation output, or a three-phase excitation output. It's okay. Also, first, a two-phase excitation output is performed to apply a weak brake, and then the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32 is stopped by switching from the two-phase excitation output to a four-phase excitation output and applying a strong brake. You may also do so.
(11) The first to twenty-ninth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to twenty-ninth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Thirtieth embodiment>
In the 30th embodiment, based on the data stored in the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) (FIG. 237) of the RWM 53, a predetermined period of time has elapsed for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the reel 31. Determine whether or not. Furthermore, during the predetermined period of time during which the four-phase excitation output is performed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed. When the data stored in the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) becomes "0", it is determined that the predetermined period for performing 4-phase excitation output has passed (the 4-phase excitation output has ended), and then , executes the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when winning a prize.

The symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the active line, the type of winning combination, the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payout pieces, the condition device, the winning combination, RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
FIG. 237 is a diagram showing main data according to the 30th embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the 30th embodiment. Note that the data shown in FIG. 237 is a part of the data, and in addition to the data shown, various data is stored in the RWM 53.
In FIG. 237, the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) at address "F005 (H)" includes the input sensor 1 signal (D0 bit), input sensor 2 signal (D1 bit), which is input to each bit of input port 2, This is a storage area that stores the on/off state of the full detection signal (D3 bit) and the cancellation release signal (D4 bit).

The input sensor 1 signal is a signal that is turned on when the input sensor 44a (FIG. 2) detects a medal, and is turned off when no medal is detected.
Further, the input sensor 2 signal means a signal that is turned on when the input sensor 44b (FIG. 2) detects a medal, and is turned off when no medal is detected.
Furthermore, it is equipped with a sub-tank that accommodates medals overflowing from the hopper 35, and a full sensor that turns on when a medal comes into contact with the sub-tank when this sub-tank is full, and a full detection signal is sent to the medal from the full sensor. This means a signal that turns on when the medal touches, and turns off when the medal does not touch.

Furthermore, it is possible to perform a normal game and a special game (1BB game) that is advantageous to the player, and when the normal game shifts to a special game, it will be stopped at the end of the special game, and the progress of the game will be stopped. is possible. The conditions for stopping the game are not limited to the end of the special game, and can be set as appropriate. It is also equipped with a stop cancellation switch, and when the conditions for stopping the game are met, by operating the stop cancellation switch, the stoppage can be canceled and the game can be continued. The stop release signal means a signal that turns on when the stop release switch is operated and turns off when it is released. Note that the stop release switch can also be used as other switches such as the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14.

In the current interrupt processing, the signals input to each bit of input port 2 are read, and the on/off status of the input sensor 1 signal, input sensor 2 signal, full detection signal, and stop cancellation signal is determined and turned on. When it is off, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit, and when it is off, "0" is stored in the corresponding bit.

In FIG. 237, the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) at address "F006(H)" includes a setting/reset switch signal (D1 bit) input to each bit of input port 4, a settlement switch signal (D3 bit), This is a storage area for storing on/off states of a 1-bet switch signal (D4 bit), a 2-bet switch signal (D5 bit), a 3-bet switch signal (D6 bit), and a start switch signal (D7 bit).
The setting/reset switch signal means a signal from the setting change (reset) switch 153, which serves both as a setting change switch and a reset switch.

The settlement switch signal refers to a signal that turns on when the settlement switch 43 is operated and turns off when it is released.
The 1-bet switch signal means a signal that is turned on when the 1-bet switch 40a is operated and turned off when the 1-bet switch 40a is released.

Furthermore, the 3-bet switch signal means a signal that is turned on when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated and is turned off when the switch is released.
Furthermore, the machine is provided with a 2-bet switch for inserting two medals, and the 2-bet switch signal means a signal that is turned on when the 2-bet switch is operated and turned off when the switch is released.
Furthermore, the start switch signal means a signal of the start switch 41 .

In the current interrupt process, the signals input to each bit of input port 4 are read, and the settings/reset switch signal, settlement switch signal, 1 bet switch signal, 2 bet switch signal, 3 bet switch signal, and start It determines whether the switch signal is on or off, and when it is on, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit, and when it is off, "0" is stored in the corresponding bit.

In FIG. 237, the input port 3 level data (_PT_IN3_OLD) at address “F00A(H)” includes the first stop switch signal (D0 bit) and the second stop switch signal (D1 bit) input to each bit of input port 3. ), and the on/off status of the third stop switch signal (D2 bit).

The #th stop switch signal means a signal that is turned on when the #th stop switch 42 is operated and turned off when it is released.
In this interrupt processing, the signals input to each bit of input port 3 are read, and the on/off status of the first stop switch signal, second stop switch signal, and third stop switch signal is determined. When it is off, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit, and when it is off, "0" is stored in the corresponding bit.

In FIG. 237, the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) at address “F007(H)” is a storage area that stores data for managing the stop order of the reels 31.
In step S1311 in FIG. 238, which will be described later, reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) is initialized (cleared, initial value "0" is set). Thereafter, each time step S1323 in FIG. 239, which will be described later, is executed, the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) is incremented by "1". Then, when the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) becomes the number of reels "3", the result becomes "Yes" in step S1315 of FIG. 238, which will be described later.

In FIG. 237, the stopped reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) at address "F008(H)" is a memory area that stores data indicating the reel number at the time of stop acceptance.
When the first stop switch signal is turned on (the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted), in step S1322 of FIG. 239 described later, “1 (D)” indicating the first reel 31 is stored in the stopped reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL).

Furthermore, when the second stop switch signal is turned on (the operation of the second stop switch 42 is accepted), in step S1322 in FIG. 2(D)" is stored.
Furthermore, when the third stop switch signal is turned on (the operation of the third stop switch 42 is accepted), in step S1322 of FIG. 239, which will be described later, "3(D)" is stored.

In Fig. 237, the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) at address "F020(H)" is a timer that manages the four-phase excitation output time of the first reel 31. In other words, it is a memory area that stores data that measures the predetermined time for performing the four-phase excitation output to stop the first reel 31.
When the first reel 31 starts to decelerate (when the four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the first reel 31 starts), the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) is set to an initial value of "108 (D)". After that, the value of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) is decremented by "1" each time an interrupt process is executed. Also, when the value of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) is "1" or greater, four-phase excitation output is performed to the motor 32 of the first reel 31 each time an interrupt process is executed. Then, when the value of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) becomes "0", the four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the first reel 31 ends.

In this embodiment, the cycle of interrupt processing is set to "2.235 ms", and the value of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt processing.
Therefore, it takes 2.235 x 108 = 241.38 ms for the value of the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) to change from 108 (D) to 0 (D). The four-phase excitation output continues for "241.38ms", and after "241.38ms" has passed, the four-phase excitation output ends.
That is, in this embodiment, the "predetermined period" for performing four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 corresponds to "241.38 ms".

Further, in FIG. 237, the second reel management timer (_WK_RL2_TIME) at address “F030(H)” is a timer that manages the four-phase excitation output time of the second reel 31. That is, it is a storage area that stores data for measuring a predetermined time period for performing four-phase excitation output for stopping the second reel 31.
Furthermore, in FIG. 237, the third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME) at address “F040(H)” is a timer that manages the four-phase excitation output time of the third reel 31. That is, it is a storage area that stores data for measuring a predetermined time period for performing four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31.
These contents are the same as the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) of address "F020(H)".

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the 30th embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the 23rd embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 30th embodiment shown in FIG. 238, steps that are different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the 30th embodiment, the processing from step S295 to step S300 in FIG. 139 is executed, but the illustration of the processing from step S295 to step S300 is omitted in FIG. 238.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly explained.

As shown in FIG. 238, in the 30th embodiment, after executing the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in step S751, the process proceeds to step S1311, where the main control board 50 initializes the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER). (Clear, set initial value "0"). Then, the process advances to the next step S1312.
Proceeding to step S1312, the main control board 50 executes a reel stop reception check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 239, which will be described later. When the reel stop reception check in step S1312 is completed, the process advances to step S1313.

Proceeding to step S1313, the main control board 50 executes an input test. This process is the process shown in FIG. 240, which will be described later. When the input check in step S1313 is completed, the process advances to step S1314.
In step S1314, the main control board 50 determines whether input port level data is present (the carry flag of the flag register is set to "1").
When the process proceeds to step S1337 in FIG. 240, which will be described later, "1" is set in the carry flag bit of the flag register. The carry flag set in step S1337 serves as a flag indicating that input port level data is present.
Note that the flag register is updated when some arithmetic processing is executed. Therefore, even if the carry flag bit is "1", it may be updated to "0" by another calculation process.

Input sensor 1 signal, Input sensor 2 signal, Stop cancellation signal, 1st stop switch signal, 2nd stop switch signal, 3rd stop switch signal, Setting/reset switch signal, Settlement switch signal, 1 bet switch signal, 2 bet switch If either the signal, 3 bet switch signal, or start switch signal is on, a flag indicating that input port level data is present is set in step S1337 of FIG. "1" is set).

On the other hand, when all of the above signals are off, step S1337 in FIG. 240, which will be described later, is skipped, so the flag indicating that input port level data is present is not set.
Note that in step S1337 in FIG. 240, which will be described later, the signal to be checked when setting the flag indicating that input port level data is present is not limited to the above signals, and can be set as appropriate.
For example, some of the above-mentioned signals, such as the cancellation release signal and the setting/reset switch signal, do not need to be checked when setting the flag indicating that input port level data is present.
Conversely, in addition to the above signals, signals from other switches such as the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152 may be checked when setting the flag indicating that input port level data is present.

Then, in step S1314, when the carry flag bit is set to "1", it is determined that input port level data is present ("Yes"), and the process returns to step S1313. In this case, the processing in steps S1313 and S1314 is repeated.
Note that returning to the input check in step S1313, when some arithmetic processing is executed, the flag register is updated. As a result, even if the carry flag bit is "1", it may be updated to "0" by another calculation process.

On the other hand, if the carry flag bit is not set to "1" in step S1314, it is determined that there is no input port level data ("No"), and the process proceeds to the next step S1315.
Thereby, when any of the above signals is on, the process does not proceed to step S1315, but when any of the above signals are off, the process can proceed to step S1315.

Proceeding to step S1315, the main control board 50 determines whether the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) and the number of reels "3" are the same value. That is, it is determined whether the stop control has been executed for all reels 31 or not.
Here, if it is determined that the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) and the number of reels "3" are not the same value, the process returns to step S1312. Thereby, the processing from step S1312 to step S1315 is repeated until the stop control is executed for all reels 31. When it is determined that the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) and the number of reels "3" are the same value, it is determined that the stop control has been executed for all reels 31, and the process advances to step S1316.

In step S1316, the main control board 50 executes a check to see if all the reels have stopped. This check is shown in Fig. 241, which will be described later. When the check to see if all the reels have stopped in step S1316 is completed, the program proceeds to step S291.
In step S291, the main control board 50 executes a display determination. That is, it determines whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been stopped and displayed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S292.

Also, if the result of step S292 is "No" and the process of step S293 is executed, the flow proceeds to step S294.
When the process proceeds to step S294, the main control board 50 executes a medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) for winning. That is, if the number of credits has not reached the upper limit of "50", the number of credits is increased, and if the number of credits has reached the upper limit of "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out actual medals from the hopper 35. The determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit of "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG.

FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the reel stop reception check in step S1312 of FIG. 238.
In step S1321, the main control board 50 determines whether a stop request has been received. That is, it is determined whether the operation of any one of the first to third stop switches 42 to 42 has been accepted.
Specifically, the main control board 50 outputs the D0 bit (first stop switch signal), D1 bit (second stop switch signal), and D2 bit of the input port 3 level data (_PT_IN3_OLD) at address "F00A(H)". (third stop switch signal) is on. Then, step S1321 is repeated until the stop is accepted, and when the stop is accepted, the process advances to the next step S1322.

In step S1322, the main control board 50 stores the stopped reel number data corresponding to the stop switch signal.
Specifically, when the first stop switch signal is ON (the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted), “1 (D)”, which indicates the first reel 31, is stored in the stopped reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL).

Further, when the second stop switch signal is on (operation of the second stop switch 42 is accepted), "2 (D)" indicating the second reel 31 is stored in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL).
Furthermore, when the third stop switch signal is on (the operation of the third stop switch 42 is accepted), "3 (D)" indicating the third reel 31 is stored in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL).
After storing the stop reel number data corresponding to the stop switch signal, the process advances to the next step S1323.

In step S1323, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) at the address "F007(H)". Then, the process advances to the next step S1324.
Proceeding to step S1324, the main control board 50 executes processing when accepting a stop. In this process, the stop position of the ## reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination result of the current game and the position of the ## reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the ## stop switch 42 is accepted, and the determined stop position is determined. The symbol number corresponding to the position is stored in the # reel symbol number (for the stop position). Furthermore, the stopped symbol data for determining the symbol combination to be stopped on the active line is updated. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

More specifically, in the process at the time of stop acceptance in step S1324 in FIG. 239, the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment is executed. That is, for the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be on in step S1321, the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. 194 determines the stop position of the reel 31 based on the result of the role selection for the current game and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and stores the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position in the reel symbol number (for stop position). Furthermore, the process corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 in FIG. 194 updates the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination that stops on the activated line. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Note that the # reel symbol number (for passing position) and the # reel symbol number ( When it is determined that the values for the stop position) have become the same value, the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) is set to the initial value "108 (D)" and the #4 reel 31 motor 32 is stopped. Start phase excitation output.
Also, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping position) will be the same value, and the step number of one symbol on the # reel 13 will be a predetermined value (for example, " 3), the #th reel management timer may be set to the initial value "108 (D)" and the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 may be started.

FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the input test in step S1313 of FIG. 238.
In step S1331, the main control board 50 acquires the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) (FIG. 237) at the address "F005(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to the next step S1332.

Proceeding to step S1332, the main control board 50 determines whether the input sensor 1 signal, input sensor 2 signal, and stop cancellation signal are on.
Specifically, check whether the D0 bit (input sensor 1 signal), D1 bit (input sensor 2 signal), and D4 bit (cancellation release signal) of the acquired input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) are "1". to judge.
Then, in step S1332, if it is determined that any signal is on, the process advances to step S1337, and if it is determined that any signal is off, the process advances to the next step S1333.

In step S1333, the main control board 50 acquires the data stored in the input port 3 level data (_PT_IN3_OLD) (FIG. 237) at address "F00A(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1334.
In step S1334, the main control board 50 determines whether the first stop switch signal, the second stop switch signal, and the third stop switch signal are on.

Specifically, the D0 bit (first stop switch signal), D1 bit (second stop switch signal), and D2 bit (third stop switch signal) of the acquired input port 3 level data (_PT_IN3_OLD) are "1". Determine whether it exists or not.
Then, in step S1334, if it is determined that any signal is on, the process advances to step S1337, and if it is determined that any signal is off, the process advances to the next step S1335.

In step S1335, the main control board 50 acquires the data stored in the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) (FIG. 237) of the address "F006(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to the next step S1336.
Proceeding to step S1336, the main control board 50 determines whether the setting/reset switch signal, settlement switch signal, 1 bet switch signal, 2 bet switch signal, 3 bet switch signal, and start switch signal are on. .

Specifically, the D1 bit (setting/reset switch signal), D3 bit (settlement switch signal), D4 bit (1 bet switch signal), and D5 bit (2 bet switch signal) of the acquired input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) ), the D6 bit (3 bet switch signal), and the D7 bit (start switch signal) are determined to be "1".
If it is determined in step S1336 that any signal is on, the process advances to step S1337, and if it is determined that any signal is off, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S1337, the main control board 50 sets a flag indicating that input port level data is present. Specifically, the carry flag bit of the flag register is set to "1". Here, if a flag (carry flag) indicating that input port level data is present is set, "Yes" will be obtained in step S1314 of FIG. 238. On the other hand, if step S1337 is skipped, the flag (carry flag) indicating that input port level data is present is not set, so the result is "No" in step S1314 in FIG. 238. Then, when step S1337 is executed, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the all reel stop check in step S1316 of FIG. 238.
In step S1341, the main control board 50 sets the address of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) according to the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL).
Specifically, in step S1341, the main control board 50 first stores the data stored in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) of the address "F008(H)" of the RWM 53 in the A register.

At the time of proceeding to step S1316, the stopped reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) at address "F008(H)" stores the reel number of the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) stop switch 42 operated.
For example, if the third (last) stop switch 42 operated is the third (right) stop switch 42, then at the time of proceeding to step S1316, the stopped reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) at address "F008(H)" stores "3(D)", which indicates the third (right) reel 31.

Next, "F010(H)", which is the result of subtracting "16(D)" from the address "F020(H)" of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME), is stored in the HL register. This "F010(H)" becomes the reference address.
Next, the A register value is multiplied by "16 (D)" and the result is stored in the A register.
Next, the A register value is added to the HL register value and the result is stored in the HL register.
Then, the process advances to the next step S1342.

Proceeding to step S1342, the main control board 50 determines whether the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) is "0".
Then, the process of step S1342 is repeated until the data stored in the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) becomes "0", and the data stored in the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) becomes "0". When the value becomes "0", the process according to this flowchart ends.
In this way, in this embodiment, when the data of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 becomes "0", this flowchart Terminates processing.

Specifically, in step S1342, the main control board 50 determines whether the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (#th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME)) is "0" or not.
If the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is not "0"("No"), the process of step S1342 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1342 is repeated.

On the other hand, when the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is "0"("Yes"), the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
Furthermore, when the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (#th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME)) becomes "0", the process proceeds to the display determination in step S291 of FIG. Proceed to the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).
As a result, after a predetermined period of outputting four-phase excitation to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42, display judgment and medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning occur. becomes executable.

More specifically, for example, "3 (D)" indicating the third (right) reel 31 is stored in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) (FIG. 237) of the address "F008 (H)" of the RWM 53. Suppose that That is, it is assumed that the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is the third (right) stop switch 42 . In this case, "3(D)" is first stored in the A register by the process of step S1341.

Next, "F010(H)", which is the result of subtracting "16(D)" from the address "F020(H)" of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME), is stored in the HL register. This "F010(H)" becomes the reference address.
Next, "48(D)", which is the result of multiplying the A register value "3(D)" by "16(D)", is stored in the A register.
Next, "F040(H)", which is the result of adding the A register value "48(D)" to the HL register value "F010(H)", is stored in the HL register.

Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1342, and the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value "F040(H)", that is, the data stored in the third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME), is determined to be "0". Make a judgment as to whether or not.
Here, if the data stored in the address (third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME)) indicated by the HL register value is not "0"("No"), the process of step S1342 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1342 is repeated. In this case, the process does not proceed to steps S291 and subsequent steps in FIG. 238.

On the other hand, when the data stored in the address (third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME)) indicated by the HL register value is "0"("Yes"), the process according to this flowchart is ended.
Further, when the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME)) becomes "0", the process advances to step S291 in FIG. 238, and then to step S294.
As a result, after a predetermined period of outputting four-phase excitation to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 has elapsed, display judgment and medal payout processing at the time of winning (M_WIN_PAY) are performed. becomes executable.

Here, for example, if the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, and the small winning combination 01 becomes a payout of 15 pieces, or a small winning number 01 becomes a payout of 3 pieces. It is assumed that any one of the small winning combinations 13 to 17 becomes possible to win.
Furthermore, when two reels 31 are stopped (in a situation where the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 has ended for the two reels 31), the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is activated. It is assumed that the operation is accepted and the symbol combination (FIG. 119) corresponding to the small winning combination 13 that results in a payout of three pieces can be stopped and displayed.

Under such circumstances, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, before the predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed. (For example, the timing when the 4-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31, or the timing before the 4-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31). Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the eye reel 31 is released, "No" is returned in step S1342 of FIG. 241 and the process does not proceed from step S291 of FIG. 238 onwards, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning is Not executed.
That is, when the data stored in the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for the third reel 31 is "1" or more, four-phase excitation is performed to stop the third reel 31. Since the output continues and step S1342 in FIG. 241 is repeated, the process does not proceed from step S291 in FIG. Processing (M_WIN_PAY) is not executed.

Then, when the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for the third reel 31 becomes "0", the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 ends, step S1342 in FIG. 241 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S291 in FIG. 238, so that the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in the subsequent step S294 can be executed.
Furthermore, in the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when a prize is won, a process of adding up the number of credits is executed until the number of credits reaches the upper limit of "50", and when the number of credits reaches the upper limit of "50", a process of outputting a drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is executed to drive the hopper motor 36 and pay out actual medals from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit of "50" is performed, for example, in step S394 of FIG.

In this way, in this embodiment as well, similarly to the twenty-ninth embodiment, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, the fourth reel 31 is stopped. Before the predetermined period for outputting phase excitation has elapsed (for example, the timing when outputting four-phase excitation to stop the third reel 31, or the timing when outputting four-phase excitation to stop the third reel 31) Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released at the timing before the output is performed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) is not executed. Execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).

As a result, the hopper motor 36 (DC motor) is not driven while the motor 32 (stepping motor) is being energized in four phases, and the hopper motor 36 is driven after the four-phase excitation of the motor 32 is completed. Therefore, the current necessary to drive the hopper motor 36 can be secured. That is, the current necessary to drive the hopper motor 36 can be reliably secured, and in turn, the hopper motor 36 can be reliably driven.

In addition, in this embodiment, switches to which signals are input to the input port 3 and the input port 4 (setting/reset switch 153, settlement switch 43, 1 bet switch 40a, 2 bet switch, 3 bet switch 40b, start switch 41, (Left, middle, right) stop switch 42) If any operation is accepted, "Yes" is returned in step S1314 in FIG. 238, and the process does not proceed to steps S1315 and subsequent steps, so the process is finally stopped. The medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed regardless of whether or not a predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the reels 31 has elapsed.

Then, when all the switches that input signals to input port 3 and input port 4 are released, the result in step S1314 in FIG. 238 becomes “No”, and processing proceeds to step S1315 and subsequent steps. At this time, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the last reel 31 to stop, the display determination processing and the medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) in the event of a win can be executed.
This allows the amount of credits to be added or medals to be paid out from the hopper 35 to be determined at the timing desired by the player.

Further, the present embodiment includes a #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) that stores data for measuring a predetermined time period for performing four-phase excitation output for stopping the #th reel 31. This #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) is a storage area dedicated to data that measures a predetermined time for performing four-phase excitation output.
Then, when the data stored in the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) is "1" or more (not "0"), the 4-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the # reel 31 is continued, When the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) becomes "0", the four-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is ended.

As a result, by checking the data stored in the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME), it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined period for outputting 4-phase excitation to the motor 32 of the # reel 31 has elapsed (4-phase It is possible to easily determine whether excitation output is being performed or not.
In particular, in this embodiment, only the data of the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is checked. It is possible to simplify the process for determining whether or not this is the case, and to reduce the amount of ROM used by the program.

Note that when two reels 31 are stopped (in a situation where the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 has ended for the two reels 31), the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is turned off. In a situation where the operation is accepted and the symbol combination for which medals are paid out (granted) can be stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 remains accepted. Suppose it continues.

In this case, "Yes" is determined in step S1334 of FIG. 240, and a flag (carry flag) indicating that input port level data is present is set in step S1337. Then, the answer is "Yes" in step S1314 of FIG. 238, and the processes of steps S1313 and S1314 are repeated, and since the process does not proceed to steps S1315 and subsequent steps, a four-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31. Even after the predetermined period has passed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.
Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, "No" is returned in step 1314 of FIG. 238, and the process proceeds to step S1315 and subsequent steps, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed. It becomes possible.

Similarly, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all reels 31 including the motor 32 of the last reel 31 to stop (e.g. the right reel 31) has ended, if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last reel 31 to stop (e.g. the right reel 31) has been accepted, and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first reel 31 to stop (e.g. the left reel 31) is operated, and then the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last reel 31 to stop is released while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first reel 31 to stop is still operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when a winning prize is won will not be executed even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed for performing the four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31.
Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first reel 31 to stop (for example, the left reel 31) is released (at least when all stop switches have been released), the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) for winning a prize can be executed.

In this way, in a game where symbol combinations for which medals are paid out (granted) are stopped and displayed, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continued to be operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY ) is not executed and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning becomes executable.
Similarly, in a game where symbol combinations for which medals are paid out (granted) are stopped and displayed, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to any reel 31 is continued to be operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is stopped. If the stop switch 42 corresponding to all the reels 31 is released without being executed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning becomes executable.
Thereby, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

Even if the power switch 11 is unintentionally turned off and a power-off process is executed when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of a winning prize will not be executed by turning on the power switch 11 while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is operated, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of a winning prize can be executed when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released.
As a result, even if a power outage occurs at an unintended timing, the amount of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

Further, in this embodiment, after the number of bets that can execute the game have been placed, the main control board 50 first sends the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address "F005(H)" of the RWM 53 (FIG. 237). It acquires the data stored in , and determines whether the acquired data is "0" or not.
Furthermore, when it is determined that the acquired data is "0", next the data stored in the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) (Fig. 237) at address "F006 (H)" of RWM53 is A logical product (AND) operation is performed on the acquired data and "01111111(B)", and it is determined whether the result is "0".
Furthermore, when it is determined that the result of the above-mentioned AND operation is "0", it is then determined whether the rising data of the start switch 41 is on.

When it is determined that the start-up data of the start switch 41 is on, control to start rotation of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is executed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) at address "F005(H)" is not "0", it is determined that the result of the above AND operation is not "0". In this case, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.
As a result, after the number of bets that allow the game to be executed has been bet, and in a situation where the operation of the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b) is accepted, the start switch 41 cannot be operated. If the request is accepted, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be prevented from being executed.

Also in this embodiment, as described in the eleventh embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment (A), the setting key switch 152 is provided.
As explained in the 11th embodiment and the 19th embodiment (A), when the power is on and no bet has been placed, the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion port 151 and rotated, for example, 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 152 (when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on), and the machine transitions to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode).

Note that when the number of bets has been bet, "Yes" is returned in step S274 of FIG. 41, and the process does not proceed to the medal insertion waiting process of step S275. Therefore, even if the setting key switch 152 is turned on, the setting confirmation state is not reached. Does not migrate.
In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value does not change), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise and the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state is ended.

As described above, in this embodiment, when control of the start of rotation of the reel 31 is executed, the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) at address "F005(H)" and the data stored in the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) at address "F006(H)" are checked, but the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked.

For example, the data of the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, and the setting key switch 152 is not checked. Among the data of the input port to which the signal of 152 is input, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked, and the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input. Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 may not be checked.

Therefore, the signal from the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal from the setting key switch 152 is on) after the number of bets that can be executed for the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) has been placed. If the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off) and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be executed. shall be.

Here, even though the bet switch 40 is released after operating the bet switch 40, there is a possibility that the operation of the bet switch 40 may continue to be accepted due to deterioration of the bet switch 40.
While the operation of the bet switch 40 is still being accepted, in this embodiment, even if the start switch 41 is operated, the rotation start control of the reels 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.

Similarly, even if you release the payment switch 43 after operating the payment switch 43, due to deterioration of the payment switch 43, the operation of the payment switch 43 continues to be accepted, and the start switch 41 is operated, rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.
Thereby, even if the player operates the start switch 41, the reels 31 do not rotate, so the player can recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10. When the player informs the hall clerk of this fact, the hall clerk can also recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10.
Note that even if the operation of the bet switch 40 or the settlement switch 43 continues to be accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 will issue an error notification. This is because if an error notification is made in such a case, there is a risk that the player will feel troubled.

Also, it is usually not conceivable that the setting key switch 152 will be turned on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 will be turned on) during a game, and even if the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on), it is highly likely to be noise. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the number of bets required for a game to be executed (the number of bets corresponding to the prescribed number) is bet, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on) and the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off), if the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, control of the start of rotation of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be executed.
This makes it possible to prevent noise from interrupting the progress of the game.

On the other hand, in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, external signal 4 for notifying an error etc. By outputting the format shown in FIG. 33)), it is possible to notify the hall computer, etc. Therefore, the hall clerk or the like can understand that some kind of error has occurred in the slot machine 10 that outputs the predetermined external signal.
Note that in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, external signal It may be configured to output external signals (other than external signals 1 to 5)).

In addition, in this embodiment, the main control board 50 first outputs the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address "F005(H)" of the RWM 53 (Fig. 237 ) and determines whether the acquired data is "0" or not.
Furthermore, when it is determined that the acquired data is "0", next the data stored in the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) (Fig. 237) at address "F006 (H)" of RWM53 is A logical product (AND) operation is performed on the acquired data and "11111111(B)", and it is determined whether the result is "0".
Furthermore, when it is determined that the result of the above-mentioned AND operation is "0", it is then determined whether the rising data of the #th stop switch 42 is on.

Then, when it is determined that the rising data of the #th stop switch 42 is on, control to stop the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is executed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) at address "F005(H)" is not "0", it is determined that the result of the above AND operation is not "0". In this case, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is not executed.
As a result, when the operation of the ## stop switch 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) is accepted under a situation where the plurality of reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted. Additionally, stop control of the #th reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) can be prevented from being executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when executing the stop control of the #th reel 31, the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) at address "F005(H)" and the data stored in the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) at address "F006(H)" are checked, but the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked.

For example, the data of the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, and the setting key switch 152 is not checked. Among the data of the input port to which the signal of 152 is input, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked, and the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input. Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 may not be checked.

Therefore, when multiple reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on), and the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off), if the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is accepted, stopping control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 can be executed.

Here, even if the start switch 41 is released after the start switch 41 is operated, there is a possibility that the operation of the start switch 41 will continue to be accepted due to deterioration of the start switch 41.
Then, while the operation of the start switch 41 is still being accepted, in this embodiment, even if the #stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #stop switch 42 is executed. do not.

Similarly, when the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b) is operated and then released but the operation of the bet switch 40 remains accepted due to deterioration of the bet switch 40, and when the settlement switch 43 is operated and then released but the operation of the settlement switch 43 remains accepted due to deterioration of the settlement switch 43, even if the #th stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is not executed.

As a result, the player can recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10, because the #th reel 31 does not stop even when the #th stop switch 42 is operated. Then, when the player informs the hall staff of this, the hall staff can also recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10.
Even if the operation of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the settlement switch 43 remains accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 will issue an error notification, since issuing an error notification in such a case may cause the player to feel annoyed.

Furthermore, it is normally unthinkable that the setting key switch 152 turns on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 turns on) during the game, and even if the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 turns on). 152 signal is on), there is a high possibility that it is noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal from the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal from the setting key switch 152 is on), and the front door 12 is closed ( When the operation of the ##th stop switch 42 is accepted under the condition (the door switch 17 is off), the ##th reel 31 can be stopped based on the operation of the ##th stop switch 42.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted due to noise.

On the other hand, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, external signal 4 for notifying an error or the like (FIG. 33 of the 11th embodiment)) can be output based on the fact that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, thereby notifying the hall computer, etc. Thus, a hall attendant, etc. can know that some kind of error has occurred in the slot machine 10 from which the predetermined external signal has been output.
In addition, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, external signal X (other than external signals 1 to 5 in FIG. 33 of the 11th embodiment)) that can identify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on may be output.

Although the 30th embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, in the all reel stop check, only the data of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 was checked; It is not limited to this.
For example, in the all reel stop check, the data of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for all reels 31 may be checked.

Specifically, in the all reel stop check, first, the data stored in the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) is stored in the A register.
Next, a logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the data stored in the second reel management timer (_WK_RL2_TIME), and the result is stored in the A register value.
Next, a logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the data stored in the third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME), and the result is stored in the A register value.

Then, it is determined whether the A register value is "0" or not, and when it is determined that the A register value is not "0"("No"), the timer is stored in the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME). Returning to the process of storing data in the A register. That is, the process after the process of storing the data stored in the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) in the A register is repeated. In this case, the process does not proceed to steps S291 and subsequent steps in FIG. 238.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the A register value is "0"("Yes"), the all reel stop check is completed, the process proceeds to step S291 in FIG. 238, and then proceeds to step S294. As a result, display determination and medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning are sequentially executed.

Here, when the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are rotating at a constant speed, it is assumed that the middle stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 are quickly operated in this order. It is assumed that the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted, and then, before the middle reel 31 stops, the operation of the right stop switch 42 is accepted. At this time, the number of moving symbols (number of sliding frames) from when the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted until the middle reel 31 stops is set to "4", and after the operation of the right stop switch 42 is accepted. , it is assumed that the number of symbols to be moved until the right reel 31 stops is set to "0". In such a case, the right reel 31 may stop first, and then the middle reel 31 may stop.

In other words, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 operated third (last) may stop second (first), and the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 operated second may stop third (last).
In this case, as in the above embodiment, when checking whether all reels have stopped, even if only checking the data of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 that was operated third (last), it is not possible to determine that the four-phase excitation output for all reels 31 has ended.

Therefore, as in this modification (1), in the all reel stop check, by checking the data of the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for all reels 31, the operation order of the stop switch 42 can be determined. Even if the order in which the reels 31 are stopped is changed, it can be determined that the four-phase excitation output for all reels 31 has been completed, and a predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output for all the reels 31 has elapsed. After that, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

(2) In the above embodiment, in step S1337 of FIG. 240, the carry flag bit of the flag register is set to "1" as a flag indicating that input port level data is present, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, predetermined information may be stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 as a flag indicating that input port level data is present.
In this case, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is not cleared when some arithmetic processing is executed like the bit data of the flag register. Before S1331, processing is executed to clear predetermined information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

(3) In the above embodiment, when the plurality of reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, when the operation of the ##th stop switch 42 is accepted, the ## It is assumed that stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 is not executed.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if the operation of the ## stop switch 42 is accepted under a situation where the plurality of reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, Stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #stop switch 42 may be made executable.

As a result, for example, even though the left stop switch 42 was operated first and the middle stop switch 42 was operated second, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, due to deterioration of the start switch 41, etc., the start switch By keeping the operation of 41 accepted, it is possible to prevent it from being determined that the middle stop switch 42 has been operated first.

In particular, in an AT machine, if it is determined that the middle stop switch 42 was operated first even though the left stop switch 42 was operated first, there will be a mistake in the order of presses, which will put the player at a disadvantage. However, even if the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, by making it possible to execute the stop control of the ##th reel 31 based on the operation of the ##th stop switch 42, it is possible to prevent a situation where the push order is incorrect during AT. Occurrence can be prevented.

Specifically, for example, during a general game of a 1BB game (when 1BB is activated), in a game where the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, the correct answer is The pressing order is left, middle right, but if it is determined that the middle stop switch 42 was operated first even though the left stop switch 42 was operated first, the pressing order will be incorrect and the small Any one of the winning combinations 13 to 17 (3-card winning combination) wins.
This puts the player at a disadvantage, but even if the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, by making it possible to execute the stop control of the left reel 31 based on the operation of the left stop switch 42, it is possible to press the correct answer. Since the small winning combination 01 (15-card winning combination) is won, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the pressing order is incorrect during AT.
For example, the same applies when the winning number "16" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the small winning combination B1 condition device (FIG. 125) is activated.

Note that, as in this modification, even if it is possible to execute the stop control of the ##th reel 31 based on the operation of the ## stop switch 42 in a situation where the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the setting key Regardless of whether the signal of the switch 152 is on or off, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 may be made executable. Further, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 may not be executed.

(4) For example, the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted, and then, under the situation where the operation of the first stop switch 42 is still accepted, the operation of the second stop switch 42 can be accepted. At the same time, based on the operation of the second stop switch 42, the stop control of the corresponding reel 31 may be made executable.

As a result, for example, even though the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 have been operated in this order, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, due to deterioration of the stop switch 42, etc., the left stop switch 42 continues to be accepted, it is possible to prevent it from being determined that the right stop switch 42 has been operated second.

In particular, in an AT machine, when the stop operation is performed in the order of the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42, even though the middle stop switch 42 is operated second, the right If it is determined that the stop switches 42 have been operated, the order of presses will be incorrect and the player will be disadvantaged. By making it possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 and to execute the stop control of the corresponding reel 31 based on the operation of the other stop switch 42, it is possible to prevent mistakes in the pressing order during AT. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

Specifically, for example, during general play of 1BB game (when 1BB is activated), in a game in which the winning number "10" is drawn by the role selection means 61 and the small role A1 condition device (Fig. 124) is activated, the correct button press order is left, middle, right. However, in this case, if it is determined that the right stop switch 42 was operated second despite the middle stop switch 42 being operated second, this will result in an incorrect button press order, and one of the small roles 13 to 17 (3-coin role) will be won.
This would be disadvantageous to the player, but by making it possible to execute stop control of the center reel 31 based on the operation of the center stop switch 42 even if the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted, the correct push order is reached and minor prize 01 (15-coin prize) is won, thereby preventing the occurrence of situations such as pushing the wrong order during the AT.
For example, the same applies when the winning number "16" is selected in the prize selection means 61 and the small prize B1 condition device (Figure 125) is activated.

In this modified example, even when stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the second stop switch 42 can be executed while the operation of the first stop switch 42 is still accepted, stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 may be executed regardless of whether the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on or off. Also, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 may not be executed.

(5) In the above embodiment, when stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, a four-phase excitation output is provided to the motor 32 (stepping motor) as an excitation output for stopping the reel 31. However, the present invention is not limited to this. do not have.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, the excitation output for stopping the reel 31 may be, for example, a one-phase excitation output, a two-phase excitation output, or a three-phase excitation output. It's okay. Also, first, a two-phase excitation output is performed to apply a weak brake, and then the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32 is stopped by switching from the two-phase excitation output to a four-phase excitation output and applying a strong brake. You may also do so.

(6) The contents and arrangement of each bit of the input port 2-4 level data shown in FIG. 237 are merely examples, and the contents and arrangement are not limited to these. The contents and arrangement of each bit of the input port 2 to 4 level data can be set as appropriate.
For example, the D4 bit of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) at the address "F005(H)" may be left unused without storing the on/off status of the cancellation release signal.

Also, for example, for the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) at address "F006(H)", the on/off state of the set/reset switch signal may not be stored in the D1 bit, and bits D0 to D2 may be left unused.
Furthermore, for example, the on/off states of the first to third stop switch signals may be stored in the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) of "F006(H)", respectively.
Furthermore, the input inspection flow chart in FIG. 240 can be modified as appropriate according to the contents and arrangement of each bit of the input port 2 to 4 level data.

Note that it is preferable that the input port into which the signal from the setting key switch 152 is input is different from the input port into which the signals from the bet switch 40, start switch 41, and stop switch 42 are input; 41. The signal from the setting key switch 152 may be input to the input port to which the signal from the stop switch 42 is input.
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the data stored in the input port 2 to 4 level data storage area of the RWM 53 is acquired to determine whether each signal is on or off, but the data stored in the RWM 53 is acquired. Instead, the signals input to the input ports 2 to 4 may be directly obtained to determine whether each signal is on or off.

(7) In the input inspection flowchart of FIG. 240, in step S1331, the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address "F005(H)" is acquired, and in step S1332, the input sensor 1 signal, input sensor 2 signal, Although it has been determined whether the signal and the cancellation release signal are on, for example, the processes in steps S1331 and S1332 may not be performed.

Also, for example, the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) of "F006 (H)" store the on/off of the first to third stop switch signals, respectively, and the D3 bit stores the settlement switch signal, the D4 bit stores the 1 bet switch signal, the D5 bit stores the 2 bet switch signal, the D6 bit stores the 3 bet switch signal, and the D7 bit stores the on/off of the start switch signal.
For example, in the input inspection flow chart of FIG. 240, the processes of steps S1331 to S1334 may not be performed, and only the processes of steps S1335 to S1337 may be performed.
(8) The first to thirtieth embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to thirtieth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but may be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<31st embodiment>
In the 31st embodiment, based on the data stored in the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) (FIG. 134) of the RWM 53, a predetermined period of time has elapsed for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the reel 31. Determine whether or not. Furthermore, during the predetermined period of time during which the four-phase excitation output is performed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed. Then, when the data stored in the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) becomes stop pulse data "00000000 (B)", a predetermined period for performing 4-phase excitation output has elapsed (4-phase excitation output is After that, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.

The symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the active line, the type of winning combination, the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payout pieces, the condition device, the winning combination, RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the 31st embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the 23rd embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 31st embodiment shown in FIG. 242, steps that are different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the 31st embodiment, the processing from step S295 to step S300 in FIG. 139 is executed, but the illustration of the processing from step S295 to step S300 is omitted in FIG. 242.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly explained.

As shown in FIG. 242, in the 31st embodiment, once the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 is executed, the process then proceeds to step S1351.
Proceeding to step S1351, the main control board 50 executes a reel stop reception check. This process is similar to the reel stop reception check (M_STOP_CHK) in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment.
Specifically, by processing corresponding to steps S1016 to S1017 in FIG. 194, data of input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of address "F017(H)" in FIG. 133 is acquired, and D0 to D2 bits (left, It is determined whether either the middle or right stop switch signal) is on. Thereby, it is determined whether the operation of any of the stop switches 42 has been accepted.

Furthermore, when it is determined that the operation of one of the stop switches 42 has been accepted, the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the instantaneous position of the reel 31, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (FIGS. 135 to 137). do.
Furthermore, the process corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 in FIG. 194 updates the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination that stops on the active line.
Then, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (for the passing position) (from FIG. When it is determined that the # reel symbol number (for stop position) and the # reel symbol number (Fig. 137) are the same value, the deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" is added to the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) (Fig. 134). (4 phases on). As a result, four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is started.

Note that the # reel symbol number (for passing positions) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping positions) are the same value, and the step number of one symbol on the # reel 13 is a predetermined value (for example, " 3), the deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" may be set in the # reel motor signal data to start the 4-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the # reel 31. .
When the reel stop reception check in step S1351 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1352.

In step S1352, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the reel stop acceptance check in step S1351 has been completed for all of the reels 31. In other words, it determines whether or not the operation of all of the stop switches 42 has been accepted.
Here, in step S1352, when it is determined that the reel stop acceptance check has not been completed for all the reels 31, the process returns to step S1351. In this case, the processes of steps S1351 and S1352 are repeated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1352 that the reel stop acceptance check for all reels 31 has been completed, the process proceeds to the next step S1353.

In step S1353, the main control board 50 stores the data stored in the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) of the address "F012(H)" of the RWM 53 in the A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1354.
Proceeding to step S1354, the main control board 50 determines whether any stop switch signal is on (operation of any stop switch 42 is accepted).

Specifically, the main control board 50 performs an AND operation on the A register value and "00000111 (B)" and determines whether the result is "0" or not. Thereby, it is determined whether any of the stop switch signals is on, that is, whether the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted.
If the result of the above logical AND operation is not "0", it is determined that one of the stop switch signals is on (operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted), and in step S1354, " “Yes” and the process returns to step S1353.
On the other hand, if the result of the above logical AND operation is "0", it is determined that all stop switch signals are off (no operation of any stop switch 42 is accepted), and in step S1354 The answer is "No" and the process advances to step S291.

Here, when the operation of at least one of the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42 is accepted, at least one stop switch signal is turned on, and the input port level data A ( At least one of the D0 to D2 bits of _PT_IN_A_LV) becomes "1".
Further, when at least one of the D0 to D2 bits of input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "1", the result of the above-mentioned AND operation will not be "0".
If the result of the above logical AND operation is not "0", the result is "Yes" in step S1354, and the process returns to step S1353. That is, the processes of step S1353 and step S1354 are repeated. In this case, since the process does not proceed to step S291 and subsequent steps, the display determination is not performed, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning is also not performed.

On the other hand, when the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42 are all released, the left stop switch signal, middle stop switch signal, and right stop switch signal are all turned off. , D0 to D2 bits of input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) all become "0".
Further, when the D0 to D2 bits of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) are all "0", the result of the above logical AND operation is "0".
If the result of the above logical product operation is "0", the result is "No" in step S1354, and the process proceeds to step S291.

In step S291, the main control board 50 executes a display determination.
Specifically, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the pay line. Also, when the symbol combination for which medals are to be paid out (awarded) is stopped and displayed on the pay line, the number of medals to be paid out (awarded) is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step S292.
In addition, the determined number of medals to be paid out (awarded) may be stored (saved) only in a designated register and not stored (saved) in the RWM 53, or it may be stored (saved) in the RWM 53.

Further, if "No" is determined in step S292 and the process in step S293 is executed, the process advances to step S1355.
In step S1355, the main control board 50 determines whether four-phase excitation is being output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42.
Specifically, the main control board 50 acquires the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) (FIG. 134) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42, and uses that value. is "0".

Then, when the value of the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) is not "0", it is determined that 4-phase excitation output is in progress, "Yes" is determined in step S1355, and the process of step S1355 is executed again. .
On the other hand, when the value of the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) is "0", it is determined that the four-phase excitation output is not in progress, "No" is obtained in step S1355, and the process proceeds to step S294.

Here, it is assumed that the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is the right stop switch 42. In this case, in step S1355, the main control board 50 acquires the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) (FIG. 134) corresponding to the right reel 31.
In addition, when the right reel 31 starts decelerating, the deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" (4-phase on) is stored in the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3), and a predetermined period of time for performing 4-phase excitation output has elapsed. Then, the stop pulse data "00000000 (B)" is stored in the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3).

Then, when the value of the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) is not "0", the result is "Yes" in step S1355, and the process of step S1355 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1355 is repeated. In this case, the process does not proceed to step S294, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning is not executed.
On the other hand, when the value of the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) is "0", "No" is determined in step S1355, and the process proceeds to step S294. This makes it possible to execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning.

Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning. That is, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and when the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual Dispense the medals from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49.

Here, for example, if the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, and the small winning combination 01 becomes a payout of 15 pieces, or a small winning number 01 becomes a payout of 3 pieces. It is assumed that any one of the small winning combinations 13 to 17 becomes possible to win.
Furthermore, the two reels 31 stop, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, and the symbol combination (Fig. 119) corresponding to the small winning combination 13 that results in a payout of three pieces stops. Suppose that it is now possible to display.

Under such circumstances, even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, the third reel The # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) corresponding to reel 31 is deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" (4-phase on ) is stored, the answer is "Yes" in step S1355 of FIG. 242, and the process does not proceed to step S294, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.

In other words, when the deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) corresponding to the third reel 31, the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 continues, and step S1355 in FIG. 242 is repeated, so the process does not proceed to step S294, and therefore the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released.

Then, when the data stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) corresponding to the third reel 31 becomes the stop pulse data "00000000 (B)", the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 ends, step S1355 in FIG. 242 becomes "No", and the process proceeds to step S294, making it possible to execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when a prize is won.
In addition, in the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when a prize is won, a process of adding up the number of credits is executed until the number of credits reaches the upper limit of "50", and when the number of credits reaches the upper limit of "50", a process of outputting a drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is executed to drive the hopper motor 36 and pay out actual medals from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit of "50" is performed, for example, in step S394 of FIG.

In this way, in this embodiment as well, similarly to the 29th embodiment and the 30th embodiment, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, the third reel 31 is Before a predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed (for example, the timing when four-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the third reel 31, or the timing when the third reel 31 is stopped) Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released at the timing before the 4-phase excitation output for After the elapsed time, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.
As a result, the hopper motor 36 (DC motor) is not driven while the motor 32 (stepping motor) is being energized in four phases, and the hopper motor 36 is driven after the four-phase excitation of the motor 32 is completed. Therefore, the current necessary to drive the hopper motor 36 can be secured. That is, the current necessary to drive the hopper motor 36 can be reliably secured, and in turn, the hopper motor 36 can be reliably driven.

Also, in this embodiment, when the #th reel 31 begins to decelerate, the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) stores deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" (four phases on), and after a predetermined period of time for four-phase excitation output has elapsed, the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) stores stop pulse data "00000000 (B)."
When the deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#), the four-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is continued, and when the data stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) becomes the stop pulse data "00000000 (B)", the four-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is terminated.

As a result, by checking the data stored in the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#), it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the # reel 31 has elapsed (four-phase It is possible to easily determine whether excitation output is being performed or not.
In particular, in this embodiment, only the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is checked, so that the 4-phase excitation output is completed. It is possible to simplify the process for determining whether or not this is the case, and to reduce the amount of ROM used by the program.

Further, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, "No" will be returned in step S1354 of FIG. 242. Since the process proceeds to step S291, the display determination is executed even under the situation where the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is being performed. Then, in the display judgment, it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, and when the symbol combination for which medals are paid out (granted) is stopped and displayed on the active line, the medal Determine the number of payouts (number of grants).

Furthermore, after determining the number of medals to be paid out (awarded) in step S291, the process proceeds to step S1355, where the data stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) corresponding to the third reel 31 is checked to determine whether the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 has ended.
Then, when the data stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) corresponding to the third reel 31 becomes the stop pulse data "00000000 (B)", it is determined that the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 has ended, the result is "No" in step S1355 of FIG. 242, the process proceeds to step S294, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when a prize is won can be executed.

In this way, in this embodiment, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, it will not occur under the situation where the four-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the third reel 31. However, the display judgment is executed to determine the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals awarded), and after that, when the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is completed, the medal payout process (at the time of winning) is completed. M_WIN_PAY).
As a result, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of awards) can be determined before the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is finished, so the stop corresponding to the third reel 31 can be determined. The time from when the switch 42 is released to when the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) is executed at the time of winning can be shortened.

In addition, in a situation where two reels 31 have stopped, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 has been accepted, and the symbol combination for which medals are paid out (granted) can be stopped and displayed. Assume that the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted.

In this case, the result of step S1354 in FIG. 242 becomes “Yes”, steps S1353 and S1354 are repeated, and processing does not proceed to step S291 and subsequent steps. Therefore, even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed for performing a four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31, a display determination is not performed, and therefore the number of payouts is not determined, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when a prize is won is not performed.
Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the result in step 1354 in FIG. 242 becomes "No", and processing proceeds to step S291 and subsequent steps, making it possible to execute the medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) in the event of a winning combination.

Specifically, for example, suppose that the winning number "10" is selected in the role selection means 61, the small role A1 condition device (Figure 124) is activated, and either the small role 01 with a payout of 15 coins or any of the small roles 13 to 17 with a payout of 3 coins becomes available for winning.
Furthermore, suppose that two reels 31 stop (the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 ends), operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, and the symbol combination (Figure 119) corresponding to the minor win 13, which will result in a payout of three coins, can be displayed in a stopped state.

Under such a situation, assume that the operation of any stop switch 42 or start switch 41 including the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted.
In this case, the answer is "Yes" in step S1354 of FIG. 242, and steps S1353 and S1354 are repeated, and the process does not proceed to steps S291 and subsequent steps. Regardless of whether the period has elapsed or not, display determination is not performed, therefore the number of payouts is not determined, and medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning is not executed.

Then, when all stop switches 42 and start switches 41 including the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 are released, "No" is returned in step 1354 of FIG. 242, and the process proceeds to step S291 and thereafter. When a predetermined period of time for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed, the result in step S1355 of FIG. 242 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step S294, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning occurs. becomes executable.

In this way, in a game where symbol combinations for which medals are paid out (granted) are stopped and displayed, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continued to be operated, the display determination and the winning medal If the payout process (M_WIN_PAY) is not executed and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the display determination and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning become executable.
Thereby, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

Note that even if the power switch 11 is unintentionally turned off and the power-off process is executed while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is operated. By turning on the power switch 11 while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning will not be executed and the third reel 31 will be dealt with. When the stop switch 42 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning becomes executable.
Thereby, even if the power is cut off at an unintended timing, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at the timing desired by the player.

Similarly, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all the reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 to be stopped last (for example, the right reel 31) has finished, the reel 31 to be stopped last (for example, the right reel 31 ), the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first (for example, the left reel 31) is operated, and then the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first is operated. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last stopped reel 31 is released while the switch 42 is being operated, even if the predetermined period for performing the four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed, Do not execute medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when winning a prize. Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first (for example, the left reel 31) is released (at least all stop switches are released), the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed. Become.
Thereby, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

Although the 31st embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) In the above embodiment, in step S1355, only the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is checked. Not exclusively.
For example, in step S1355, the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) for all reels 31 may be checked.

Specifically, in step S1355, first, the data stored in the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1) is stored in the A register.
Next, a logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the data stored in the second reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR2), and the result is stored in the A register value.
Next, a logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the data stored in the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3), and the result is stored in the A register value.

Then, it is determined whether the A register value is "0" or not, and when the A register value is not "0", it is determined that the motor 32 of one of the reels 31 is outputting four-phase excitation, and the step The answer is "Yes" in S1355, and the process in step S1355 is executed again. In this case, the process does not proceed to step S294.
On the other hand, when the A register value is "0", it is determined that the motor 32 of any reel 31 is not outputting four-phase excitation, and the result in step S1355 is "No", and the process proceeds to step S294. As a result, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.

Here, as explained in the modification (1) of the 30th embodiment, the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 stops second, and the second operated stop switch 42 stops. The reel 31 corresponding to the switch 42 may stop third (last).
In this case, as in the above embodiment, only the data of the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 may be checked in step S1355. , it is not possible to determine that the four-phase excitation output for all reels 31 has been completed.

Therefore, as in this modification (1), in step S1355, by checking the data of the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) for all the reels 31, the operation order of the stop switch 42 and the reel 31 Even if the stop order of the reels 31 and 4-phase excitation output is reversed, it can be determined that the 4-phase excitation output for all reels 31 has been completed, and after a predetermined period of time for performing the 4-phase excitation output for all the reels 31 has elapsed. , it is possible to execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when winning a prize.

(2) In the above embodiment, when the reel 31 and the motor 32 are stopped, a four-phase excitation output is provided to the motor 32 (stepping motor) as the excitation output for stopping the reel 31. However, this is not limited to this.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, for example, one-phase excitation output, two-phase excitation output, or three-phase excitation output may be performed as the excitation output for stopping the reel 31. Also, first, two-phase excitation output may be performed to apply a weak brake, and then the two-phase excitation output may be switched to four-phase excitation output to apply a strong brake, thereby stopping the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32.
(3) The first to thirty-first embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to thirty-first embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but may be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<32nd embodiment>
In the 32nd embodiment, even if the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 is accepted and the operation of the stop switch 42 continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out (granted) is After determining the number of medals to be paid out, it is determined whether any stop switch 42 is operated, and if it is determined that none of the stop switches 42 is operated, a prize is awarded. This is to execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time.

The symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the active line, the type of winning combination, the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payout pieces, the condition device, the winning combination, RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
FIG. 243 is a diagram showing main data according to the 32nd embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the 32nd embodiment. Note that the data shown in FIG. 243 is part of the data, and in addition to the data shown, various data is stored in the RWM 53.
In FIG. 243, the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) at address “F067(H)” is a storage area that stores data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31.

Two bits, D0 and D1, indicate the drive state of the motor 32 of the first reel 31. As shown in FIG. 243, "0 (D)" indicates that the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 has detected the index. "1 (D)" indicates that the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is accelerating or in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 has not yet detected the index. "3 (D)" indicates that the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is out of step.

The D2 bit indicates whether or not a standby effect is being executed; "1" indicates that a standby effect is being executed; and "0" indicates that a standby effect is not being executed.
The D3 bit indicates whether or not it is the time to start deceleration; "1" indicates that it is the time to start deceleration, and "0" indicates that it is not the time to start deceleration.

The D5 bit indicates whether or not the reel 31 is in preparation for step-out (a state in which an abnormality is occurring in the rotation of the reel 31), with "1" indicating that the reel 31 is in preparation for step-out and "0" indicating that the reel 31 is not in preparation for step-out.
The D6 bit indicates whether or not the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 has detected an index, with "1" indicating that it has detected an index and "0" indicating that it has not detected an index.
The D7 bit indicates whether the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is stopped or decelerating, with "1" indicating that it is not stopped or decelerating (accelerating or at a constant speed), and "0" indicating that it is stopped or decelerating.

At the start of the standby performance, the D2 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "1".
Further, when the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted, the D3 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "1" (deceleration start state is entered).
Furthermore, when updating the first reel symbol number (for passing position), if the first reel symbol number (for passing position) falls below "0", the D5 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "1" is set.

Further, the signal from the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 is referred to as a first reel sensor signal. The first reel sensor signal is turned on when the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 is sensing the index, and turned off when the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 is not sensing the index. Then, when the first reel sensor signal changes from on to off, the D6 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "1".
Furthermore, when the first reel 31 starts rotating, "81 (H)"("10000001(B)") is set in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS).

Furthermore, when the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is in a constant speed state and the D6 bit is "1", the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "80 (H)"("10000000 (B )") is set.
Furthermore, in the deceleration start state (when the D3 bit is "1"), when the first reel symbol number (for passing position) and the first reel symbol number (for stopping position) become the same value, the first “0(H)” (“00000000(B)”) is set in the reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS). That is, at the start of the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the first reel 31, "0 (H)" is set in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS).
Note that the first reel symbol number (for passing position) and the first reel symbol number (for stopping position) are the same value, and the step number of one symbol on the first reel 13 is a predetermined value (for example, "3"), the first reel drive state may be set to "0 (H)".

Also, when the D5 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is "1" and the D6 bit is "0", the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "83 (H)"("10000011(B)'') is set.
Furthermore, when the D6 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is "1", "0" is set to the D5 bit and D6 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS).

In FIG. 243, the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) at address "F077(H)" is a storage area that stores data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the second (middle) reel 31, The third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) of "H)" is a storage area that stores data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the third (right) reel 31. These contents are the same as the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) of address "F067(H)".

In FIG. 243, the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) at address "F090(H)" includes the first stop switch signal (D0 bit) and the second stop switch signal (D1 bit) input to each bit of input port 2. ), the third stop switch signal (D2 bit), the first reel sensor signal (D4 bit), the second reel sensor signal (D5 bit), and the third reel sensor signal (D6 bit). It is an area.

The ## stop switch signal is turned on when the ## stop switch 42 is operated (the stop button 42a is pushed in), and the ## stop switch signal is turned on when the ## stop switch 42 is released (the pressed stop button 42a is released and returned to its original state). position) and turns off.
The #th reel sensor signal is turned on when the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, and is turned off when the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects no index.
Then, in interrupt processing, the signals input to each bit of input port 2 are read, and the on/off status of each signal is determined. If it is on, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit, and when it is off, If so, "0" is stored in the corresponding bit.

FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the thirty-second embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 of the twenty-third embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 32nd embodiment shown in FIG. 244, steps that differ from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the 32nd embodiment, the processing from step S295 to step S300 in FIG. 139 is executed, but the illustration of the processing from step S295 to step S300 is omitted in FIG.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly explained.

As shown in FIG. 244, in the thirty-second embodiment, after a start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) is executed in step S751, the flow advances to step S1361.
In step S1361, the main control board 50 executes a reel stop acceptance check. This process is the process shown in Fig. 245, which will be described later. Then, when the reel stop acceptance check in step S1361 is completed, the process proceeds to step S291.

Proceeding to step S291, the main control board 50 executes display determination.
Specifically, it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line. Furthermore, when a symbol combination for which medals are paid out (awarded) is stopped and displayed on the active line, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of awards) is determined. Then, the process advances to step S292.
Note that the determined number of medals to be paid out may be stored (saved) only in a predetermined register and not stored in the RWM 53, or may be stored in the RWM 53.

Further, if "No" is determined in step S292 and the process in step S293 is executed, the process advances to step S1362.
Proceeding to step S1362, the main control board 50 determines whether any stop switch signal is on (operation of any stop switch 42 is accepted).

Specifically, in step S1362, the main control board 50 first stores the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) (FIG. 243) at address "F090(H)" of the RWM 53 in the A register. do.
Next, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation on the A register value and "00000111 (B)", and determines whether the result is "0" (the zero flag is "1") or not. to judge. Thereby, it is determined whether any of the stop switch signals is on, that is, whether the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted.

When the result of the above logical AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), one of the stop switch signals is on (the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is being accepted). The determination result is "Yes" in step S1362, and the process of step S1362 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1362 is repeated.
On the other hand, when the result of the above AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), all stop switch signals are off (no operation of any stop switch 42 is accepted). The determination result is "No" in step S1362, and the process advances to step S294.

Here, when the operation of at least one of the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42 is accepted, at least one stop switch signal is turned on, and the input port 2 level data ( At least one of the D0 to D2 bits of _PT_IN2_OLD) becomes "1".
Further, when at least one of the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) is "1", the result of the above-mentioned AND operation does not become "0" (the zero flag does not become "1").
If the result of the above logical product operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), "Yes" is determined in step S1362, and the process of step S1362 is repeated. In this case, the process does not proceed to step S294, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning is not executed.

On the other hand, when the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42 are all released, the left stop switch signal, middle stop switch signal, and right stop switch signal are all turned off. , the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) all become "0".
Furthermore, when the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) are all "0", the result of the above-mentioned AND operation is "0" (the zero flag becomes "1").
If the result of the above logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), "No" is determined in step S1362, and the process proceeds to step S294.

Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning. That is, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and when the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual Dispense the medals from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49.

FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the reel stop reception check in step S1361 of FIG. 244.
In step S1371, the main control board 50 executes a reel drive state inspection.
First, the data stored in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (FIG. 243) at address "F067(H)" of the RWM 53 is stored in the A register.
Next, perform a logical sum (OR) operation between the A register value and the data stored in the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (Fig. 243) of the address “F077 (H)” of the RWM53, and use the result. Store in A register.

Next, perform a logical sum (OR) operation between the A register value and the data stored in the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (Fig. 243) at address "F087 (H)" of the RWM53, and use the result. Store in A register.
Finally, a logical product (AND) operation is performed between the A register value and "83 (H)"("10000011(B)").
Then, the process advances to the next step S1372.

Proceeding to step S1372, the main control board 50 determines whether all the reels 31 are stopped or decelerating.
Specifically, it is determined whether the result of the AND operation of the A register value and "83 (H)"("10000011(B)") in step S1371 is "0" (the zero flag is "1"). to judge.

When the result of the above logical AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that all the reels 31 are stopped or decelerating, and the result is "Yes" in step S1372. The process according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, if the result of the above AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), the motor 32 of any reel 31 is not stopped or decelerating (accelerating or in a constant speed state). ), the result is "No" in step S1372, and the process advances to the next step S1373.

Here, it is assumed that the motors 32 of the two reels 31 have already stopped (stopped). Further, although the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) reel 31 has been accepted, the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of that reel 31 has not yet been performed (4-phase excitation (before output). That is, it is assumed that the motor 32 of the third (last) reel 31 is still in a constant speed state.
In this case, the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) of the two stopped reels 31 is "00000000 (B)", but the driving state of the third (last) reel 31 is "00000000 (B)". Since the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) is "10001000 (B)", the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) of all reels 31 is ORed. ) The result of the calculation is "10001000(B)".

Therefore, the result of the logical AND operation of "10001000(B)" and "83(H)"("10000011(B)" is "10000000(B)", which is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), so the result in step S1372 is "No" and the process proceeds to the next step S1373.
Therefore, the process does not proceed to step S291 in FIG. 244, so that a display determination is not performed and the number of medals to be paid out (awarded) is not determined.

It is also assumed that the motors 32 of the two reels 31 have already stopped (stopped, the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reels 31 has ended). Then, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) reel 31 is accepted, and the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of that reel 31 has already been performed (after the 4-phase excitation output ). That is, it is assumed that the motor 32 of the third (last) reel 31 has also already stopped.
In this case, the #th reel driving states (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) of the three reels 31 are all "00000000 (B)", so the #th reel driving states (_WK_RL #_STS ) (FIG. 243) is subjected to a logical sum (OR) operation, and the result is "00000000 (B)".

Therefore, the result of the logical AND operation of "00000000(B)" and "83(H)"("10000011(B)" is "00000000(B)", which is "0" (the zero flag becomes "1"), so the result in step S1372 is "Yes", and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
Therefore, the process proceeds to step S291 in FIG. 244, whereby a display determination is made and the number of medals to be paid out (awarded) can also be determined.

Further, when proceeding to step S1373 in FIG. 245, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index for all reels 31.
Specifically, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation on the A register value and "03(H)"("00000011(B)"), and the result is "0" ( The zero flag is "1"). Thereby, it is determined whether or not the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index for all the reels 31.

When the result of the above logical product operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), it is determined that the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has not detected the index for at least one reel 31. , the result is "No" in step S1373, and the process advances to the next step S1374.
On the other hand, when the result of the above AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), for all reels 31, the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 is after index detection. It is determined that there is, "Yes" in step S1373, skipping step S1374, and proceeding to step S1375.

Here, for all reels 31, when the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) is is also "80 (H)"("10000000(B)").
In this case, the result of performing a logical sum (OR) operation on the #th reel drive states (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) of the three reels 31 is "10000000 (B)".
Therefore, at the time of proceeding to step S1373, the A register value is "10000000 (B)".

Therefore, in step S1373, when the A register value is ANDed with "03(H)"("00000011(B)"), the result becomes "0" (the zero flag is "1"). ”), and the answer in step S1373 is “Yes”, so step S1374 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1375.
Therefore, the process of step S1375 (the process at the time of accepting the stoppage) can be executed, so that the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 can be executed.

Further, it is assumed that the motor 32 of all three reels 31 is in a constant speed state, but the reel sensor 33 has not yet detected the index of at least one reel 31 (before detection).
In this case, the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) of the reel 31 before the index detection is "81 (H)"("10000001(B)"), so the three reels 31 are The result of performing a logical sum (OR) operation on the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) is "10000001 (B)".
Therefore, at the time of proceeding to step S1373, the A register value is "10000001 (B)".

Therefore, in step S1373, when the A register value is ANDed with "03(H)"("00000011(B)"), the result is "00000001(B)" and "0 ” (the zero flag does not become “1”), the result in step S1373 is “No” and the process advances to step S1374.
Therefore, the process of step S1374 (preparation for step-out test) is performed, and the process of step S1375 (process at the time of stop reception) is not performed, so the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 is also not performed.

Further, when the reel 31 is in a constant speed state, the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) is "10000000 (B)", and when the reel 31 is stopped, the #th reel driving state ( _WK_RL#_STS) is "00000000(B)".
Therefore, in situations where one reel 31 has already stopped (the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 has ended) and the remaining two reels 31 are in a constant speed state, or when two reels 31 31 has already stopped (the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 has ended) and the remaining one reel 31 is in a constant speed state, the #th reel driving state of the three reels 31 remains unchanged. (_WK_RL#_STS), and when the result is ANDed with "00000011(B)", the same result is "00000000(B)".
As a result, even if there is a reel 31 that has already stopped, it can be determined in the same process whether the stoppage can be accepted or not, so the process can be simplified and the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced. can be reduced.

Proceeding to step S1374, the main control board 50 executes step-out test preparation. This process is the process shown in FIG. 246, which will be described later. Then, when the step S1374 preparation for the step-out test is completed, the process proceeds to step S1375.
Proceeding to step S1375, the main control board 50 executes processing when accepting a stop. In this process, the stop position of the ## reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination result of the current game and the position of the ## reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the ## stop switch 42 is accepted, and the determined stop position is determined. The symbol number corresponding to the position is stored in the # reel symbol number (for the stop position). Furthermore, the stopped symbol data for determining the symbol combination to be stopped on the active line is updated. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

More specifically, in the process when accepting a stop in step S1375 in FIG. 245, processes corresponding to steps S1016, S1017, S1022, S1023, and S1024 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment are executed.
That is, the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of the address "F017(H)" in FIG. 133 is obtained by the process corresponding to step S1016 in FIG. 194.
Next, by processing corresponding to step S1017 in FIG. 194, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 42 rises (whether the rise data of the stop switch 42 is on).
Furthermore, if it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen (corresponding to "Yes" in step S1017 in FIG. 194), steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. 194 are performed for the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to have risen. Through the process, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination result of the current game and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and the symbol number is assigned according to the determined stop position. , stored in the reel symbol number (for stop position).
Furthermore, the process corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 in FIG. 194 updates the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination that stops on the active line.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In addition, when the interrupt processing executed after step S1375 (corresponding to steps S1016 to S1024 in Figure 194 of the 25th embodiment) determines that the #th reel pattern number (for the passing position) and the #th reel pattern number (for the stopping position) have become the same value, a four-phase excitation output is initiated to stop the motor 32 of the #th reel 31.
In addition, when the #th reel pattern number (for the passing position) and the #th reel pattern number (for the stopping position) become the same value and the step number of one pattern on the #th reel 13 becomes a predetermined value (for example, "3"), a four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 may be started.

FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing preparation for step-out testing in step S1374 in FIG. 245 and step S1404 in FIG. 248, which will be described later.
In step S1381, the main control board 50 sets the address "F067(H)" of the RWM 53 in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (FIG. 243). Then, the process advances to the next step S1382.

In step S1382, the main control board 50 refers to the address set in step S1381 and performs a step-out inspection on the first (left) reel 31. This process is shown in Fig. 247, which will be described later. Then, when the step-out inspection in step S1382 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1383.
In step S1383, the main control board 50 sets the address of the RWM 53 for the second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS) (FIG. 243) to "F077(H)", and then proceeds to the next step S1384.

Proceeding to step S1384, the main control board 50 refers to the address set in step S1383 and executes a step-out test for the second (middle) reel 31. This process is shown in FIG. 247, which will be described later, and has the same content as step S1382. When the step-out test in step S1384 is completed, the process advances to step S1385.
In step S1385, the main control board 50 sets the address "F087(H)" of the RWM 53 in the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (FIG. 243). Then, the process advances to the next step S1386.

Proceeding to step S1386, the main control board 50 refers to the address set in step S1385 and executes a step-out test for the third (right) reel 31. This process is shown in FIG. 247, which will be described later, and has the same content as step S1382 and step S1384. Then, when the step-out test in step S1386 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1387.
Proceeding to step S1387, the main control board 50 executes a stop acceptance wait. This process is the process shown in FIG. 248, which will be described later. When the stop acceptance wait in step S1387 ends, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the step-out test in steps S1382, S1384, and S1386 in FIG. 246.
In step S1391, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is an out-of-step state. When it is determined that the step is out of step, the process proceeds to the next step S1392, and when it is determined that the step is not out of step, step S1392 is skipped and the process according to this flowchart is ended.

Proceeding to step S1392, the main control board 50 sets parameters for re-accelerating the reel 31 determined to be out of step. As a result, an excitation output is applied to the motor 32 of the reel 31 determined to be out of step to accelerate it again. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the wait for stop acceptance in step S1387 of FIG. 246.
In step S1401, the main control board 50 executes a reel drive state inspection. This process is similar to step S1371 in FIG. 245.
That is, the data stored in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (FIG. 243) of the address "F067(H)" of the RWM 53 is stored in the A register.
Next, perform a logical sum (OR) operation between the A register value and the data stored in the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (Fig. 243) of the address “F077 (H)” of the RWM53, and use the result. Store in A register.

Next, perform a logical sum (OR) operation between the A register value and the data stored in the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (Fig. 243) at address "F087 (H)" of the RWM53, and use the result. Store in A register.
Finally, a logical product (AND) operation is performed between the A register value and "83 (H)"("10000011(B)").
Then, the process advances to the next step S1402.

Proceeding to step S1402, the main control board 50 determines whether the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index for all reels 31. This process is similar to step S1373 in FIG. 245.
In other words, perform a logical AND operation on the A register value and "03(H)"("00000011(B)"), and check whether the result is "0" (the zero flag is "1") Decide whether or not. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index for all the reels 31.

When the result of the above logical product operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), it is determined that the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 is not after index detection for at least one reel 31, "No" is determined in step S1402, and the process advances to the next step S1403.
On the other hand, when the result of the above AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), for all reels 31, the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 is after index detection. It is determined that there is, "Yes" in step S1402, skips steps S1403 and S1404, and ends the process according to this flowchart.

Proceeding to step S1403, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is an out-of-step state. When it is determined that the step is out of step, the process advances to the next step S1404, and when it is determined that the step is not out of step, the process returns to step S1401.
Proceeding to step S1404, the main control board 50 executes step-out test preparation. This process is the process shown in FIG. 246 described above. When the step S1404 preparation for the step-out test is completed, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In this way, in this embodiment, two reels 31 stop (the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reels 31 ends), and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) reel 31 is turned off. When the operation is accepted and the 4-phase excitation output is performed to stop the motor 32 of the reel 31, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (Fig. 243) of the three reels 31 will change at any time. is also "00000000(B)", so the result of performing a logical sum (OR) operation on these is "00000000(B)".
Then, the result of the AND operation of "00000000(B)" and "83(H)"("10000011(B)" is "00000000(B)", so in step S1372 of FIG. 245 Since the answer is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the display determination in step S291 in FIG. 244, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals awarded) can be determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the period for performing the four-phase excitation output to stop the motor 32 of the third reel 31 has not elapsed (even if the four-phase excitation output is in progress), the four-phase excitation At the time when the output is started, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of the third reel 31 becomes "00000000 (B)", so it becomes "Yes" in step S1372 of FIG. Since the process advances to the display determination in step S291, it becomes possible to determine the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals awarded).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted (even if the stop switch 42 remains pressed without being released), When the 4-phase excitation output is started, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of the third reel 31 becomes "00000000 (B)", so "Yes" is determined in step S1372 in FIG. The process proceeds to display determination in step S291 of 244, and the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals awarded) can be determined.
As a result, it is possible to shorten the time from when the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted until the number of medals to be paid out (the number of awards) is determined, and the subsequent payout of medals ( grant) can be executed smoothly.

For example, in a game where the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 during AT and the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, two reels 31 stop in the order of the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31. Then, the operation of the right stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) right reel 31 is accepted, and the symbol combination (Fig. 118) corresponding to the small winning combination 01, which pays out 15 pieces, can be stopped and displayed. Suppose that
Under such circumstances, if the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the third reel 31 is started, even if the period for performing the 4-phase excitation output has not elapsed, Even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the eye reel 31 continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out can be determined.

The number of medals to be paid out is determined in step S291 in FIG. 244, and then the process proceeds to step S1362, where it is determined whether or not operation of any of the stop switches 42 has been accepted based on the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) (FIG. 243) at address "F090(H)" of the RWM 53.

If it is determined in step S1362 that the operation of any stop switch 42 (all stop switches 42 including the last operated stop switch 42) is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S294, and the winning medal is Execute the payout process (M_WIN_PAY). As a result, the number of medals determined in step S291 (the number of medals awarded) is paid out (awarded). At this time, if the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and if the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual medal is is discharged from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50" is made, for example, in step S394 in FIG. 49.
Thereby, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

Note that even if the power switch 11 is unintentionally turned off and the power-off process is executed while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is operated. By turning on the power switch 11 while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning will not be executed and the third reel 31 will be dealt with. When the stop switch 42 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning becomes executable.
Thereby, even if the power is cut off at an unintended timing, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at the timing desired by the player.

Similarly, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all the reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 to be stopped last (for example, the right reel 31) is finished, the reel 31 to be stopped last (for example, the right reel 31) ), the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first (for example, the left reel 31) is operated, and then the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first is operated. If the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last stopped reel 31 is released while the switch 42 is being operated, even if the predetermined period for performing the four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed, Do not execute medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when winning a prize. Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first (for example, the left reel 31) is released (at least all stop switches are released), the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed. Become.
Thereby, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

Further, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is provided with a #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) in which data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 can be stored.
Then, in step S1373 in FIG. 245, the main control board 50 calculates the logical sum (OR) of the #th reel drive states (_WK_RL#_STS) of the three reels 31, and the result of the logical sum (OR) operation and "03(H)"("00000011(B)''), and it is determined whether the result is ``0'' (the zero flag is ``1'').
Thereby, it is determined whether or not the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index for all the reels 31.

For all reels 31, when the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected an index, the result of the above logical AND operation becomes "0" (zero flag is "1"). In this case, step S1373 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S1375, where processing upon acceptance of a stop can be executed, and therefore stopping control of the reels 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 can be executed.

That is, when all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and after the index has been detected for all the reels 31, the #th reel drive states (_WK_RL#_STS) of the three reels 31 are logically summed (_WK_RL#_STS). When the result is ANDed with "03(H)"("00000011(B)"), the result becomes "0" (the zero flag becomes "1"). At this time, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 can be executed.
In other words, when all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, if the index has been detected for all the reels 31, "Yes" is determined in step S1373, and the process advances to step S1375, where the diagram of the twenty-fifth embodiment 194, steps S1016, S1017, S1022, and S1023 are executed.

In contrast, when the reel sensor 33 has not yet detected the index for any of the reels 31 (before detection), the result of the above logical AND operation is not "0" (zero flag is "1"). In this case, step S1373 becomes "No", and the process proceeds to step S1374, where preparations for a step-out inspection are made. Then, the process does not proceed to step S1375, so the process at the time of stop acceptance is not executed, and stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 is not executed.

That is, even if all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, if the index has not yet been detected for any reel 31, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS ), and if you AND the result with "03(H)"("00000011(B)"), the result will not be "0" (the zero flag is "1"). "do not become). At this time, even if the stop switch 42 is operated, stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is not executed.
In other words, even if all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, if the index has not yet been detected for any reel 31, the result in step S1373 is "No", and in this case, the 25th implementation Processing corresponding to step S1016, step S1017, step 1022, and step S1023 in FIG. 194 of the configuration is not executed.

In this way, for all the reels 31, it can be determined by a simple calculation whether the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index, that is, whether or not stop can be accepted. Processing can be simplified and the amount of ROM used by programs can be reduced.

Although the 32nd embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) For example, in step S1373 in FIG. 245, first, input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of address "F017(H)" in FIG. When it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen, the A register value and "03(H)"("00000011(B)") are determined. By performing the logical product (AND) operation of It may be determined whether or not after index detection.

That is, first, it may be determined whether the stop switch 42 has been operated, and then, for all the reels 31, it may be determined whether the motors 32 are in a constant speed state and the reel sensors 33 have detected the index.
If the result of the above logical AND operation is not "0" (zero flag is "1"), step S1373 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step S1374; if the result of the above logical AND operation is "0" (zero flag is "1"), step S1373 becomes "Yes", step S1374 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1375.

Also, as in this modification (1), in step S1373 in FIG. When determining whether or not the reel sensor 33 has detected the index, the process corresponding to step S1022 and step S1023 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is executed in the stop reception process in step S1375 in FIG. 245. do. That is, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination result of the current game and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is determined. Store in reel symbol number (for stop position).

(2) In the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S1362 in FIG. 244 whether or not the operation of any stop switch 42 is accepted, and it is determined that the operation of any stop switch 42 is not accepted. The process proceeds to the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 in FIG. 244, but the process is not limited thereto.

For example, input the start switch signal to input port 2, and store the on/off of the start switch signal in any bit of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) (Fig. 243) at address "F090 (H)" of RWM53. possible.
Furthermore, in step S1362 of FIG. 244, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 41 and any of the three stop switches 42 is accepted, based on the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD). to decide.

When it is determined that the operation of any switch is accepted, the process of step S1362 is repeated, and when it is determined that the operation of any switch is not accepted, the process of winning at step S294 in FIG. 244 is repeated. The process may proceed to the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).
This makes it possible to prevent the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) from being executed not only when the operation of the stop switch 42 but also the start switch 41 is accepted.
Then, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

(3) In step S1362 in FIG. 244, it is determined whether the operation of the stop switch 42 (the last operated stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, and the stop switch 42 ( If it is determined that the last operated stop switch 42) has not been accepted, the process may proceed to the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at step S294 in FIG. 244.

For example, in a game where the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 during AT and the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, two reels 31 stop in the order of the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31. Then, the operation of the right stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) right reel 31 is accepted, and the symbol combination (Fig. 118) corresponding to the small winning combination 01 that results in a payout of 15 pieces can be stopped and displayed. Suppose that
Under such circumstances, if the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the third reel 31 is started, even if the period for performing the 4-phase excitation output has not elapsed, Even if the state in which the operation of the stop switch 42 (last operated stop switch 42) corresponding to the eye reel 31 continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out can be determined.

In addition, the number of medals to be paid out is determined in step S291 of FIG. 244, and then the process proceeds to step S1362, where the operation of the stop switch 42 (the last operated stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted. Determine whether or not.
If it is determined in step S1362 that the operation of the stop switch 42 (the last operated stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S294, and the winning medal is Execute the payout process (M_WIN_PAY). As a result, the number of medals determined in step S291 (the number of medals awarded) is paid out (awarded).

At this time, if the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and if the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual medal is is discharged from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50" is made, for example, in step S394 in FIG. 49.
Thereby, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the reel 31 and the motor 32 are stopped, a four-phase excitation output is provided to the motor 32 (stepping motor) as an excitation output for stopping the reel 31. However, this is not limited to this.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, for example, one-phase excitation output, two-phase excitation output, or three-phase excitation output may be performed as the excitation output for stopping the reel 31. Also, first, two-phase excitation output may be performed to apply a weak brake, and then the two-phase excitation output may be switched to four-phase excitation output to apply a strong brake, thereby stopping the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32.

(5) In the above embodiment, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) is set to "0 (H)" at the start of the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31. For example, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) may be set to "0 (H)" at the end of the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31.
(6) The first to thirty-second embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to thirty-second embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

Thirty-third embodiment
In the thirty-third embodiment, when two reels 31 have stopped (the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 has ended), the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 has been accepted, and a symbol combination for which medals are paid out (awarded) has been stopped and displayed, even in a situation in which the state in which the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 has been accepted continues, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning is executed after the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 has ended. Then, after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, there is a case in which an effect relating to the game result is output.

Furthermore, the 33rd embodiment differs from the 23rd embodiment in the type of winning combination, the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, and the active line.
Specifically, in the 33rd embodiment, the roles can be broadly classified into special roles (accessories), replays (replayed roles), and small roles. In addition, the special prize is 1BB (first-class prize continuous operation device; first-class big bonus), and the small prizes are bell, watermelon, and cherry.

Also, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is set to "Red 7" - "Red 7" - "Red 7", and the symbol combination corresponding to Replay is set to "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay". , the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is set to "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell", and the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon is set to "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" - "Watermelon", which corresponds to Cherry. The symbol combination to be performed is set to "cherry" - "ANY" - "ANY".
Note that "ANY" means that any symbol may be used (any symbol).

The effective lines include five lines: an upper line, a middle line, a lower line, an upward line to the right, and a downward line to the right.
When the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed on the active line, no medals are paid out in the current game, but the 1BB game is started from the next game.
Further, if 1BB is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is not stopped and displayed on the effective line, the winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed on the effective line. A gaming state in which winning information of 1BB is carried over is called "1BB inside".

Furthermore, when a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is stopped and displayed on an active line, a medal is automatically inserted, and the player can play again.
Furthermore, the payout number for bells is set to 15, the payout number for watermelons is set to 7, and the payout number for cherries is set to 1.
In addition, Replay and Bell can only be won individually and cannot be won in combination with other roles.
Furthermore, watermelon can be a single winning berry or a double winning berry in addition to 1BB, and cherry can be a single winning berry or a double winning berry in addition to 1BB.
Furthermore, 1BB can be a single winning combination, or can be a combined winning combination with watermelon or cherry.

Furthermore, in the 33rd embodiment, one of the winning numbers "0" to "7" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. Then, when the winning number is determined, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
Winning number ``0'' corresponds to non-winning, winning number ``1'' corresponds to single winning of replay, winning number ``2'' corresponds to single winning of Bell, winning number ``3'' corresponds to The winning number "4" corresponds to a single winning of a watermelon, and the winning number "4" corresponds to a single winning of a cherry.
In addition, the winning number "5" corresponds to a single win of 1BB, the winning number "6" corresponds to a double win of "1BB + watermelon", and the winning number "7" corresponds to a double win of "1BB + cherry". handle.

For example, when the winning number "1" is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the replay condition device corresponding to the winning number "1" is activated, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay can be stopped and displayed.
In addition, when the winning number "7" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the "1BB + cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, and the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB or cherry is selected. The symbol combination can be stopped and displayed.
In addition, in the game where the winning number "7" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to cherry can be stopped and displayed, but the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is configured not to be stopped and displayed. Good too.

FIG. 249 is a diagram showing main data according to the 33rd embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the 33rd embodiment.
In FIG. 249, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address “F0AD(H)” is a storage area that stores data indicating whether or not the operation (stop operation) of the stop switch 42 corresponding to each reel 31 has been accepted. be.

The D0 bit indicates whether or not the stop operation for the first (left) reel 31 has been accepted; "0" indicates that the stop operation has not been accepted; and "1" indicates that the stop operation has been accepted. (accepted).
Further, the D1 bit indicates whether or not the operation to stop the second (middle) reel 31 has been accepted, and the D2 bit indicates whether or not the operation to stop the third (right) reel 31 has been accepted. These contents are similar to the D0 bit.

Note that the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address "F0AD(H)" in FIG. 249 has the bits "0" and "1" reversed from the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address "F0AD(H)" in FIG. 173. That is, in FIG. 173, "1" indicates that the stop operation has not been accepted, and "0" indicates that the stop operation has been accepted (accepted), but in FIG. 249, "1" indicates that the stop operation has been accepted (accepted), and "0" indicates that the stop operation has not been accepted.

When the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted, the D0 bit of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is set to "1." Similarly, when the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted, the D1 bit is set to "1," and when the operation of the right stop switch 42 is accepted, the D2 bit is set to "1."
In addition, at a predetermined timing (for example, each time a game ends or starts), the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is initialized (cleared and set to the initial value "00000000 (B)").

FIG. 250 is a diagram showing each signal input to input port 0 in the thirty-third embodiment.
It should be noted that the types and arrangement of signals input to input port 0 shown in FIG. 250 are merely examples, and the types and arrangement of signals input to input port 0 can be set as appropriate.
Also, a storage area for level data corresponding to input port 0 may be provided in the RWM 53, and data stored in this storage area for level data may be acquired and used for processing.
FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the thirty-third embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 of the twenty-third embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 33rd embodiment shown in FIG. 251, steps that differ from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the 33rd embodiment, the processing from step S295 to step S300 in FIG. 139 is executed, but the illustration of the processing from step S295 to step S300 is omitted in FIG. 251.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly explained.

As shown in FIG. 251, in the 33rd embodiment, once the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 is executed, the process then proceeds to step S1411.
Proceeding to step S1411, the main control board 50 determines whether a stop request has been received. That is, it is determined whether the operation of any one of the first to third stop switches 42 to 42 has been accepted.
Specifically, the main control board 50 acquires the data of input port 0, and sets the D0 bit (first stop switch signal), D1 bit (second stop switch signal), and D2 bit (third stop switch signal). Determine whether any of them are on. Then, step S1411 is repeated until a stop is accepted, and when a stop is accepted, the process advances to the next step S1412.

When the process proceeds to step S1412, the main control board 50 executes the process for accepting a stop. In this process, the stopping position of the #th reel 31 is determined based on the result of the role selection and the position of the #th reel 31 at the moment the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is accepted, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stopping position is set to the #th reel symbol number (for stopping position) (Figures 135 to 137). In addition, the stopping symbol data for determining the symbol combination that will stop on an active line is updated.

More specifically, in the process at the time of accepting the stop in step S1412 of FIG. 251, the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is executed. That is, for the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be on in step S1411, the winning combination result of the current game and the operation of the stop switch 42 are accepted by the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. 194. The stopping position of the reel 31 is determined based on the instantaneous position of the reel 31, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stopping position is stored in the reel symbol number (for stopping position). Furthermore, by processing corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination that stops on the active line is updated.

Note that the # reel symbol number (for passing position) and the # reel symbol number ( When it is determined that the values for the stop position) have become the same value, the # reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) (Figures 135 to 137) is set to the deceleration pulse output counter "90 (D)" (Figure 156). Set the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) (Fig. 134) to the deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" (4 phases on), and set the # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) ( 135 to 137), "1 (D)" indicating "deceleration" is set.

Also, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping position) will be the same value, and the step number of one symbol on the # reel 13 will be a predetermined value (for example, " 3), set the deceleration pulse output counter "90 (D)" to the # reel drive pulse output counter, and set the deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" to the # reel motor signal data. ", and "1 (D)" indicating "deceleration" may be set in the #th reel drive state.

Thereafter, four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is started.
Further, in this embodiment, the cycle of the interrupt processing is set to "1.117 ms", and the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) is subtracted by "1" every two interrupts.
Then, when the value of the # reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) becomes "0", the pulse data "00000000 (B)" at the time of stop is added to the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) (Fig. 134). and sets "0 (D)" indicating "stop" to the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS). This ends the four-phase excitation output.

After executing the stop reception process in step S1412, the process proceeds to step S1413, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not four-phase excitation output is being performed.
Specifically, when it is determined in step S1411 that the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 has been accepted, and the process for stopping the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31 is executed in step S1412, In step S1413, it is determined whether the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is outputting four-phase excitation.

When it is determined that the 4-phase excitation output is in progress, the process of step S1413 is executed again, and when it is determined that the 4-phase excitation output is not in progress (the 4-phase excitation output has ended), the next step S1414 is executed. Proceed to.
Here, when it is determined in step S1411 that the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 has been accepted, in step S1413, the value of the first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) (FIG. 135) is "0". ”, it is possible to determine whether the four-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31 has ended.

Furthermore, in step S1413, the first (left) reel 31 is It is also possible to determine whether the four-phase excitation output of the motor 32 has ended.
Furthermore, in step S1413, the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31 is It is also possible to determine whether or not the four-phase excitation output has ended.

In this embodiment, the process of step S1413 is repeated until it is determined in step S1413 that the four-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 has ended, and the process does not proceed to the next step S1414.
Therefore, during the period when four-phase excitation output is being applied to the motor 32 of any one of the reels 31, operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the other reels 31 is not accepted, and stop control of the other reels 31 is not executed.
For example, during the period when four-phase excitation output is being applied to the first (left) reel 31, operation of the second (center) stop switch 42 and the third (right) stop switch 42 is not accepted, and therefore stop control of the second (center) reel 31 and the third (right) reel 31 is not executed.

Proceeding to step S1414, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the operation of the stop switch 42 (stop operation) has been accepted for all reels 31.
If it is determined in step S1414 that the stop operation has not been accepted for at least one reel 31, the process returns to step S1411. In this case, the processing from step S1411 to step S1414 is repeated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1414 that the stop operation has been accepted for all reels 31, the process advances to step S291.

Here, in step S1414, the main control board 50 stores the data stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address "F0AD(H)" in FIG. 249 in the A register, and stores it as "00000111(B)". compare.
If the two values are not the same, it is determined that the stop operation has not been accepted for at least one reel 31, the result is "No" in step S1414, and the process returns to step S1411.
On the other hand, if both are the same value, it is determined that the stop operation has been accepted for all reels 31, and the result is "Yes" in step S1414, and the process proceeds to step S291.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, each time a stop operation for one reel 31 is accepted, it is determined in step S1413 whether or not 4-phase excitation output is in progress, and when it is determined that 4-phase excitation output has ended, , the next reel 31 stop operation can be accepted.
As a result, while outputting four-phase excitation to the motor 32 of any one of the reels 31, an operation to stop the other reel 31 cannot be accepted.

Proceeding to step S291, the main control board 50 executes display determination.
Specifically, it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line. Furthermore, when a symbol combination for which medals are paid out (awarded) is stopped and displayed on the active line, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of awards) is determined. Then, the process advances to step S292.

Furthermore, if the result in step S292 is "No" and the process in step S293 is executed, the process advances to step S294.
Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning. That is, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and when the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual Dispense the medals from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50" is made, for example, in step S394 in FIG. 49. Then, the process advances to step S1415.

Proceeding to step S1415, the main control board 50 determines whether the signal at input port 0 is off.
Specifically, the main control board 50 acquires the data of input port 0 and determines whether it is "00000000 (B)".
Then, when the data of input port 0 is not "00000000 (B)", it is determined that any signal is on (operation of any switch including the stop switch 42 is accepted), and step S1415 The answer is "No", and the process of step S1415 is executed again.

On the other hand, when the data of input port 0 is "00000000 (B)", it is determined that all the signals are off (no operation of any switch including the stop switch 42 is accepted), and the step "Yes" is determined in S1415, and the process advances to the next step S1416.
Proceeding to step S1416, the main control board 50 sets a command related to the end of the game (game end command) in the command buffer. Furthermore, once the game end command is set in the command buffer, it is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in an interrupt process that is executed thereafter.

Furthermore, upon receiving the game end command, the sub control board 80 may execute an effect regarding the game result.
Specifically, for example, it is assumed that the winning number "5" is won in a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the 1BB condition device corresponding to the winning number "5" is activated. In this case, when the start switch 41 is operated and the winning lottery means 61 performs a lottery and the 1BB condition device is activated, a command related to the operation of the 1BB condition device (1BB activation command) is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board. 80. Thereby, it can be determined that the 1BB condition device has been activated on the sub-control board 80 side.

Further, it is assumed that the winning number "7" is won in the drawing by the winning combination drawing means 61, and the "1BB+Cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB or the symbol combination corresponding to cherry can be stopped and displayed.
As mentioned above, in a game where the winning number "7" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to cherry can be stopped and displayed, but the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is not stopped and displayed. It may be configured as follows.
Then, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery is performed by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the "1BB+cherry" condition device is activated, the 1BB activation command and the cherry activation command are transferred from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. Sent. Thereby, it can be determined that the 1BB condition device has been activated on the sub-control board 80 side.

In addition, in a game in which the sub-control board 80 receives the 1BB operation command and the cherry operation command, the sub-control board 80 performs a lottery for the presentation of the winning notification of the 1BB condition device. In this lottery, it determines whether or not to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device, the timing of the notification, the mode of the notification, and the like.
For example, let us assume that the lottery determines that the effect lamp is to be lit at the end of the game to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device. In this case, when the sub-control board 80 receives a predetermined command (for example, a game end command), it turns on the effect lamp to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device.

In this way, in this embodiment, two reels 31 are stopped, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) reel 31 is accepted, and medals are paid out (granted) in a pattern. When the combination is displayed as stopped, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted, the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is activated. If the process is completed, the answer is "No" in step S1413, the answer is "Yes" in step S1414, and the process proceeds to steps S291 and subsequent steps. Therefore, the number of medals to be paid out (number of medals awarded) is determined and paid out (granted) in the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning.
As a result, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out (number of awards) and the number of medals to be paid out (granted) can be smoothly determined. can be executed.

For example, in a game where the winning number "7" is won in a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the "1BB+cherry" conditional device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, two reels 31 (for example, the left reel 31, In a situation where the middle reel 31) is stopped, the operation of the stop switch 42 (right stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 (for example, right reel 31) is accepted, and the " It is assumed that the symbol combination "cherry" - "ANY" - "ANY" is stopped and displayed on the middle line of the active lines.

In this case, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted, after the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 ends, the number of medals to be paid out is determined to be "1", and one medal is paid out. At this time, if the number of credits has not reached the upper limit of "50", the number of credits is incremented by "1", and if the number of credits has reached the upper limit of "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out one medal from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit of "50" is performed, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of awards) is determined, and the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be awarded) is determined. ) can be executed, but if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted, "Yes" will be returned in step S1415 and the process will not proceed to step S1416. A prescribed command (for example, a game end command) is not sent to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, on the sub-control board 80 side, no performance is executed based on reception of a predetermined command (for example, a game end command).

Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released (at least when all the stop switches 42 are not operated), "No" is obtained in step S1415, and step S1416 Then, a predetermined command (for example, a game end command) can be sent to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, on the sub-control board 80 side, it becomes possible to execute an effect based on reception of a predetermined command (for example, a game end command).

In particular, in a game in which the winning number "7" is selected by the role selection means 61 and the "1BB + Cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, the symbol combination "Cherry"-"ANY"-"ANY" corresponding to the cherry is displayed stopped on the middle line of the active lines, and even after one medal corresponding to the cherry winning has been paid out (awarded), the performance lamp may be lit after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device.
This allows the presentation of the game result to be executed at the timing desired by the player.

In addition, in a game in which the winning number "7" is won and the "1BB + Cherry" conditional device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, the 1BB is released at the timing when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released. There may also be a case where the operation of the conditional device is not notified.
Furthermore, when the 1BB condition device is activated but the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is not displayed on the active line, the winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed on the active line.

For example, in a game in which the winning number "7" is won in a lottery by the prize lottery means 61 and the "1BB+cherry" conditional device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, the start switch 41 is operated and the prize lottery means 61 When the lottery is held and the "1BB+Cherry" condition device is activated, a 1BB activation command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
Furthermore, the situation in which the operation of the stop switch 42 (for example, the right stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31) is accepted continues even after the medal payout process is executed. If so, after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, a game end command is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.

Furthermore, upon receiving the 1BB activation command and the cherry activation command, the sub-control board 80 performs an effect lottery regarding notification of activation of the 1BB condition device. At this time, it is assumed that it is decided to turn on the performance lamp at the timing of the end of the game to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device.
When the sub-control board 80 receives a predetermined command (for example, a game end command), it lights up the effect lamp to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device.

For example, in a game where the winning number "7" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the "1BB+cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, the third reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31 ) while operating (pushing) the stop switch 42 (for example, right stop switch 42) corresponding to Assume that the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released while the switch 42 is being operated (pressed).
In this case, when the other stop switches 42 are operated (pressed), the game end command is not sent to the sub-control board 80 (no performance related to the game result is executed), and all stop switches 42 including the other stop switches 42 are operated (pressed). When the stop switch 42 is released, it becomes possible to send a game end command to the sub-control board 80 (it becomes possible to perform effects related to the game results).

In addition, when the hopper motor 36 is driven and actual medals are paid out from the hopper 35, the medals collide with each other and make a loud sound, and a payout effect sound accompanying the payout is output, indicating the operation of the 1BB condition device. Although it becomes difficult to hear the sound of the performance (performance related to the game result), in this embodiment, if you continue to operate the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31, even if the medals are paid out, the game will stop. The performance related to the result is not executed, and then when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the performance related to the game result is executed.
Therefore, after the medals are paid out, the performance related to the game result can be executed, so that the sound of the performance can be easily heard.

Further, in this embodiment, during the four-phase excitation output, "Yes" is determined in step S1413, and the process does not proceed to step S294. Therefore, during the 4-phase excitation output, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and after the 4-phase excitation output ends, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.
As a result, the hopper motor 36 is not driven during the 4-phase excitation output, and the hopper motor 36 is driven after the 4-phase excitation output ends, making it possible to secure the current necessary to drive the hopper motor 36. can.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, after the number of bets that can be played is placed, the main control board 50 first acquires the data of input port 0, and determines whether the acquired data is "10000000 (B)". Decide whether or not.
When the acquired data is "10000000 (B)", it is determined that only the start switch signal is on, and control to start rotation of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is executed.

On the other hand, for example, if the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted in a situation where the operation of the 3-bet switch 40b is accepted, the data of input port 0 becomes "11000000 (B)". In this case, it is determined that the start switch signal and a signal other than the start switch signal (3 bet switch signal) are on, and control to start rotation of the reels 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.

As a result, after the number of bets that can be executed for the game have been bet, and in a situation where the operation of the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b) is accepted, the start switch 41 cannot be operated. If the request is accepted, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be prevented from being executed.

Also in this embodiment, as described in the eleventh embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment (A), the setting key switch 152 is provided.
As explained in the 11th embodiment and the 19th embodiment (A), when the power is on and no bet has been placed, the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion port 151 and rotated, for example, 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 152 (when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on), and the machine transitions to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode).

Note that when the number of bets has been bet, "Yes" is returned in step S274 of FIG. 41, and the process does not proceed to the medal insertion waiting process of step S275. Therefore, even if the setting key switch 152 is turned on, the setting confirmation state does not proceed. Does not migrate.
In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value does not change), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise and the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state is ended.

Further, in this embodiment, the signal from the setting key switch 152 is not input to input port 0.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when controlling the rotation start of the reel 31, the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked.

For example, the data of the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, and the setting key switch 152 is not checked. Among the data of the input port to which the signal of 152 is input, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked, and the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input. Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 may not be checked.

Therefore, the signal from the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal from the setting key switch 152 is on) after the number of bets that can be executed for the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) has been placed. If the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off) and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be executed. shall be.

Here, even if the bet switch 40 is released after it is operated, there is a risk that the operation of the bet switch 40 will remain accepted due to deterioration of the bet switch 40.
In this embodiment, while the operation of the bet switch 40 is still being accepted, even if the start switch 41 is operated, the control of the start of rotation of the reels 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.

Thereby, even if the player operates the start switch 41, the reels 31 do not rotate, so the player can recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10. When the player informs the hall clerk of this fact, the hall clerk can also recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10.
Note that even if the operation of the bet switch 40 continues to be accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 issues an error notification. This is because if an error notification is made in such a case, there is a risk that the player will feel troubled.

Furthermore, it is normally unthinkable that the setting key switch 152 is turned on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) during the game. 152 signal is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) when the number of bets that can be executed for the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) is bet. If the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted in a situation where the front door 12 is closed (door switch 17 is off) and the front door 12 is closed (door switch 17 is off), the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is performed. be executable.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted due to noise.

On the other hand, in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, external signal 4 for notifying an error etc. By outputting the format shown in FIG. 33)), it is possible to notify the hall computer, etc. Therefore, the hall clerk or the like can understand that some kind of error has occurred in the slot machine 10 that outputs the predetermined external signal.
Note that in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, external signal It may be configured to output external signals (other than external signals 1 to 5)).

In addition, in this embodiment, the main control board 50 acquires the data of input port 0 in step S1411 of FIG. It is determined whether any of the bits (third stop switch signal) is on.
Then, when only one of the D0 to D2 bits is "1", stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is executed.

On the other hand, when two or more of the D0 to D2 bits are "1", or in addition to one of the D0 to D2 bits, one or more of the D3 to D7 bits is "1". At this time, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is not executed.
In particular, when one or more of the D5 to D7 bits in addition to one of the D0 to D2 bits is "1", the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is performed. Not executed.

As a result, in a situation where the plurality of reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the operation of the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b) or start switch 41 is accepted, the ## stop switch 42 is activated. When the operation is accepted, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 can be prevented from being executed.

Similarly, in a situation where a plurality of reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and an operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted, if the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted, the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is Based on this, the stop control of the middle reel 31 can be prevented from being executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the signal from the setting key switch 152 is not input to input port 0.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when executing the stop control of the #th reel 31, the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked.
For example, the data of the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, and the setting key switch 152 is not checked. Among the data of the input port to which the signal of 152 is input, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked, and the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input. Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 may not be checked.

Therefore, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on), and the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off). ), if the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is accepted, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 can be executed.

Here, even if the start switch 41 is released after the start switch 41 is operated, there is a possibility that the operation of the start switch 41 will continue to be accepted due to deterioration of the start switch 41.
Then, while the operation of the start switch 41 is still being accepted, in this embodiment, even if the #stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #stop switch 42 is executed. do not.

Similarly, even though the bet switch 40 is released after operating the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b), the operation of the bet switch 40 continues to be accepted due to deterioration of the bet switch 40. Even when the state is reached, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is not executed even if the #th stop switch 42 is operated.

Thereby, the player can recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10 because the #th reel 31 does not stop even if the #th stop switch 42 is operated. When the player informs the hall clerk of this fact, the hall clerk can also recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10.
Note that even if the operation of the bet switch 40 or the start switch 41 remains accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 issues an error notification. This is because if an error notification is made in such a case, there is a risk that the player will feel troubled.

Furthermore, it is normally unthinkable that the setting key switch 152 turns on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 turns on) during the game, and even if the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 turns on). 152 signal is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal from the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal from the setting key switch 152 is on), and the front door 12 is closed ( When the operation of the ##th stop switch 42 is accepted under the condition (the door switch 17 is off), the ##th reel 31 can be stopped based on the operation of the ##th stop switch 42.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted due to noise.

On the other hand, in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, external signal 4 for notifying an error etc. By outputting the format shown in FIG. 33)), it is possible to notify the hall computer, etc. Therefore, the hall clerk or the like can understand that some kind of error has occurred in the slot machine 10 that outputs the predetermined external signal.
Note that in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, external signal It may be configured to output external signals (other than external signals 1 to 5)).

Although the 33rd embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing a modification of the main processing (M_MAIN) by the main control board 50 in the 33rd embodiment.
In the flowchart of the modification of the 33rd embodiment shown in FIG. 252, steps that are different from those in FIG. 251 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 251 are assigned the same step numbers. .
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 251 will be mainly explained.

In the modification of the 33rd embodiment shown in FIG. Determine whether the condition device is activated.
Here, the state in which the specific condition device is operating is, for example, a state in which the winning number "6" is won by the winning lottery means 61 and the "1BB + watermelon" condition device corresponding to the winning number "6" is operating. , and a state in which the winning number "7" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the "1BB+Cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated.

Then, when the specific condition device is operating (the winning number "6" or "7" is won), "Yes" is determined in step S1417, and the process proceeds to step S1415, and the specific condition device is not operating. When (a predetermined condition device different from the specific condition device is operating), “No” is determined in step S1417, step S1415 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S294.
Note that the state in which the predetermined condition device is operating includes, for example, a state in which the winning number "3" is won by the winning lottery means 61 and the watermelon condition device corresponding to the winning number "3" is operating, and For example, the winning number "4" is won by the means 61 and the cherry condition device corresponding to the winning number "4" is activated.

Proceeding to step S1415, the main control board 50 determines whether the signal at input port 0 is off. That is, it is determined whether the operation of any switch including the stop switch 42 is accepted.
If it is determined that the operation of any switch is accepted, the process of step S1415 is executed again, and if it is determined that the operation of any switch is not accepted, the process advances to step S294.

Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning. That is, the payout (granting) of medals is executed. At this time, if the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and if the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual medal is is discharged from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50" is made, for example, in step S394 in FIG. 49. Then, the process advances to step S1416.
Proceeding to step S1416, the main control board 50 sets a game end command in the command buffer. As described above, once the game end command is set in the command buffer, it is transmitted to the sub control board 80 in the interrupt processing that is executed thereafter.

In this way, in the modification of the 33rd embodiment shown in FIG. It is determined whether the device is operating or not, and when it is determined that the specific condition device is operating, it is then determined whether the operation of any switch is accepted. If it is determined that no switch operation has been accepted, the process advances to step S294.
Therefore, in a game where the specific condition device is operating, if you continue to operate the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31, medals will not be paid out, and the stop switch corresponding to the third reel 31 will not be paid out. When 42 is released, medals are paid out.

On the other hand, in a game where the specific condition device is not operating, medals are paid out even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continued to be operated.
As a result, medals are paid out even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continued to be operated, or medals are paid out when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continued to be operated. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released without being paid out, it can be determined whether the specific condition device is operating or not depending on whether the medals are paid out or not.

For example, in a game where the winning number "4" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the cherry condition device corresponding to the winning number "4" is activated, the symbols "Cherry" - "ANY" - "ANY" corresponding to the cherry are activated. When the combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, medals are paid out even if you continue to operate the stop switch 42 (for example, right stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 (for example, right reel 31). .

On the other hand, in a game where the winning number "7" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the "1BB + Cherry" conditional device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, "Cherry" - "ANY" - corresponding to the cherry When the "ANY" symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, the stop switch 42 (for example, right stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 (for example, right reel 31) is continuously operated. And the medals are not paid out. Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, medals are paid out.

As a result, when the symbol combination "Cherry"-"ANY"-"ANY" corresponding to cherries is displayed stopped on an active line, even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continued to be operated, it is possible to determine whether or not the 1BB condition device has been activated based on whether or not medals have been paid out.

(2) In the above embodiment, in step S1415, the operation of any one of the first stop switch 42, second stop switch 42, third stop switch 42, 1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b, and start switch 41 is accepted. However, this is not limited to this.
For example, in step S1415, it may be determined whether or not only the first stop switch 42, second stop switch 42, and third stop switch 42 are operated.

(3) In the above embodiment, the game end command is set in the command buffer in step S1416. Then, a game end command was sent to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 side controlled the effects related to the game results. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, effects related to game results may be controlled on the main control board 50 side. Then, in step 1418, the main control board 50 may perform an effect regarding the game result.

(4) In the above embodiment, when stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, a four-phase excitation output is performed to the motor 32 (stepping motor), but the present invention is not limited to this.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, for example, one-phase excitation output, two-phase excitation output, or three-phase excitation output may be performed. Also, first, a two-phase excitation output is performed to apply a weak brake, and then the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32 is stopped by switching from the two-phase excitation output to a four-phase excitation output and applying a strong brake. You may also do so.
(5) The first to thirty-third embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to thirty-third embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<34th embodiment>
In the 34th embodiment, a # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) capable of storing data indicating the drive state of the reel 31 is provided for each reel 31. Executes a logical product (AND) operation between the data in the file and "40 (H)", and when the result is "0", it is determined that the index has been detected, and the result is not "0". When this happens, it is determined that the index has not been detected.

Then, when the logical AND operation between the data stored in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) and "40(H)" is not "0", even if the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 is not stopped.

The symbol arrangement on the reel 31, the active lines, the types of winning combinations, the number of coins to be paid out, the condition devices, the winning combinations, the RT and the main game state are the same as those in the twenty-third embodiment.
253 and 254 are diagrams showing main data according to the 34th embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the 34th embodiment. Note that the data shown in Figs. 253 and 254 is only a part of the data, and various data other than the data shown in the diagrams is stored in the RWM 53.
In FIG. 254, "D0" to "D15" respectively indicate bits D0 to D15 of the 16-bit data.

In FIG. 253, the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) at address “F067(H)” is a storage area that stores data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31.
The D0 bit indicates whether deceleration is occurring due to 4-phase excitation, "1" indicates deceleration is occurring due to 4-phase excitation, and "0" indicates not decelerating due to 4-phase excitation. .
The D1 bit indicates whether or not deceleration is occurring due to 2-phase excitation, "1" indicates deceleration is occurring due to 4-phase excitation, and "0" indicates not decelerating due to 4-phase excitation. .
The D5 bit indicates whether or not the vehicle is decelerating; "1" indicates that the vehicle is decelerating, and "0" indicates that the vehicle is not decelerating.

Even during deceleration due to four-phase excitation, the D1 bit becomes "1".
Further, the D5 bit becomes "1" both during deceleration due to two-phase excitation and during deceleration due to four-phase excitation.
As a result, during deceleration due to two-phase excitation, the D0 bit becomes "0" and the D1 bit and D5 bit become "1".
Further, during deceleration due to four-phase excitation, the D0 bit, D1 bit, and D5 bit all become "1".

In this embodiment, when the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the #th reel symbol number (for stopping position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) become the same value, first, two-phase excitation output is performed. This applies a weak brake to the motor 32. Then, the two-phase excitation output is switched to four-phase excitation output. This applies a strong brake to the motor 32, and the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32 is stopped.
In this manner, in this embodiment, the load on the motor 32 is reduced.

Further, when the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) become the same value, the D5 bit becomes "1".
Further, when the D5 bit is "1" and the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of one symbol on the #th reel 13 is less than "16", two-phase excitation output is performed. At this time, the D1 bit becomes "1". That is, the motor is decelerating by two-phase excitation, and the D0 bit becomes "0" and the D1 bit and D5 bit become "1".

Then, when the D5 bit is "1" and the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of 1 symbol on reel #13 becomes "16" or more, the 2-phase excitation output is switched to the 4-phase excitation output (2-phase excitation deceleration ends). At this time, the D1 bit and the D5 bit remain "1" and the D0 bit becomes "1". That is, the motor is decelerating by four-phase excitation, and the D0 bit, D1 bit, and D5 bit all become "1".

Note that the two-phase excitation deceleration period during which the two-phase excitation deceleration is in progress may be timed (counted), and after the two-phase excitation deceleration period has elapsed, the four-phase excitation deceleration may be started.
In addition, not only when the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) become the same value, for example, The symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) are the same value, and the step number of 1 symbol on # reel 13 (_NB_RL#_STEP ) reaches a predetermined value (for example, "3"), two-phase excitation output may be performed to apply a weak brake to the motor 32, and the D5 bit may be set to "1".

The D2 bit indicates whether or not the speed is constant; "1" indicates that the speed is constant, and "0" indicates that the speed is not constant.
When the acceleration process ends, the D2 bit becomes "1".
Start of deceleration (after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the # reel 31 is accepted, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for the stop position) (_NB_RL #_STPPIC) becomes the same value), the D2 bit is "1" during deceleration, deceleration due to two-phase excitation, and deceleration due to four-phase excitation.

Furthermore, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to reel #31 is accepted, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping position) (_NB_RL# _STPPIC) becomes the same value and the step number of one symbol on reel #13 (_NB_RL#_STEP) reaches a predetermined value (for example, "3"), the deceleration starts, and during that time, The D2 bit may be set to "1".

The D3 bit indicates whether or not it is being accelerated; "1" indicates that it is being accelerated, and "0" indicates that it is not being accelerated.
The D4 bit indicates whether or not it is in a state of preparation for rotation; "1" indicates that it is in a state of preparation for rotation, and "0" indicates that it is not in a state of preparation for rotation.
The D6 bit indicates whether or not it is before index detection; "1" indicates that it is before index detection, and "0" indicates that it is not before index detection (after index detection).

When the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, "50 (H)"("01010000(B)") is set in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS).
Thereafter, when the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 starts accelerating, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) is set to "48(H)"("01001000(B)").
The period from when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted until the motor 32 of the ##th reel 31 starts accelerating is a state of preparation for rotation. During this time, the D4 bit becomes "1". Then, when the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 starts accelerating, the D3 bit becomes "1" and the D4 bit becomes "0".
Thereafter, when the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, the D6 bit changes from "1" to "0" at the rise of the #th reel sensor signal.

The D7 bit indicates whether or not the deceleration is starting. "1" indicates that the deceleration is starting, and "0" indicates that the deceleration is not starting.
When the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the #th reel 31 is accepted, the D7 bit becomes "1".
After the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to reel #31 is accepted, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) are displayed. The period until these become the same value is the state in which deceleration begins.
The D7 bit is also "1" during deceleration, deceleration by two-phase excitation, and deceleration by four-phase excitation.

In FIG. 253, the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) at address "F068(H)" is a storage area that stores data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the second (middle) reel 31, The third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) of "H)" is a storage area that stores data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the third (right) reel 31. These contents are the same as the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) of address "F067(H)".

In FIG. 254, the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) at address “F090(H)” is the first stop switch signal (D0 bit) and second stop switch signal (D1 bit) input to each bit of input port 0. ), 3rd stop switch signal (D2 bit), 1 bet switch signal (D3 bit), 3 bet switch signal (D4 bit), start switch signal (D5 bit), and settlement switch signal (D6 bit) are turned on/off. This is a storage area for storing data.

The ## stop switch signal is turned on when the ## stop switch 42 is operated (the stop button 42a is pushed in), and the ## stop switch signal is turned on when the ## stop switch 42 is released (the pressed stop button 42a is released and returned to its original state). position) and turns off.
The 1 bet switch signal, 3 bet switch signal, start switch signal, and settlement switch signal are also turned on when the corresponding switch is operated, and turned off when the corresponding switch is released, in the same way as the #stop switch signal. Become.
Then, in interrupt processing, the signals input to each bit of input port 0 are read, and the on/off status of each signal is determined. If it is on, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit, and when it is off, If so, "0" is stored in the corresponding bit.

In FIG. 254, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address “F095(H)” is a storage area that stores data indicating whether or not the operation (stop operation) of the stop switch 42 corresponding to each reel 31 has been accepted. be.
The D0 bit indicates whether or not the stop operation for the first (left) reel 31 has been accepted; "1" indicates that the stop operation has not been accepted, and "0" indicates that the stop operation has been accepted. (accepted).
Further, the D1 bit indicates whether or not the operation to stop the second (middle) reel 31 has been accepted, and the D2 bit indicates whether or not the operation to stop the third (right) reel 31 has been accepted. These contents are similar to the D0 bit.

Each time a game is started, an initial value "00000111 (B)" is set in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).
When the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 is accepted, the D0 bit of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is set to "0". Similarly, when the operation of the second (middle) stop switch 42 is accepted, the D1 bit is set to "0", and when the operation of the third (right) stop switch 42 is accepted, the D2 bit is set to "0". Set.

FIG. 255(a) is a diagram showing the stop switch determination table (TBL_STPBTN_CHK). The data stored in the stop switch determination table (TBL_STPBTN_CHK) is compared with the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD), and depending on whether the two data match or not, the stop switch 42 is This is used when determining whether or not the operation is valid.
FIG. 255(b) is a diagram showing a suspension acceptance determination table. The data stored in the stoppage acceptance determination table is used to check whether each reel 31 is before or after index detection, and through this check whether it is possible to accept the stoppage of the reel 31. This is used when determining whether or not.

FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the 34th embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the 23rd embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 34th embodiment shown in FIG. 256, steps that are different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 139 are assigned the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the 34th embodiment, the processing from step S295 to step S300 in FIG. 139 is executed, but the illustration of the processing from step S295 to step S300 is omitted in FIG. 256.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly explained.

As shown in FIG. 256, in the 34th embodiment, once the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 is executed, the process then proceeds to step S1421.
Proceeding to step S1421, the main control board 50 executes a reel stop reception check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 257, which will be described later. When the reel stop reception check in step S1421 is completed, the process advances to step S291.

Proceeding to step S291, the main control board 50 executes display determination.
Specifically, it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line. Furthermore, when a symbol combination for which medals are paid out (awarded) is stopped and displayed on the active line, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of awards) is determined. Then, the process advances to step S292.
Note that the determined number of medals to be paid out may be stored (saved) only in a predetermined register and not stored in the RWM 53, or may be stored in the RWM 53.

Further, if "No" is determined in step S292 and the process in step S293 is executed, the process advances to step S1422.
Proceeding to step S1422, the main control board 50 determines whether any stop switch signal is on (operation of any stop switch 42 is accepted).
Specifically, in step S1422, the main control board 50 first stores the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (FIG. 254) at address "F090(H)" of the RWM 53 in the A register. do.
Next, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation on the A register value and "00000111 (B)", and determines whether the result is "0" (the zero flag is "1") or not. to judge. Thereby, it is determined whether any of the stop switch signals is on, that is, whether the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted.

When the result of the above logical AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), one of the stop switch signals is on (the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is being accepted). The determination result is "Yes" in step S1422, and the process of step S1422 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1422 is repeated.
On the other hand, when the result of the above AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), all stop switch signals are off (no operation of any stop switch 42 is accepted). The determination result is "No" in step S1422, and the process advances to step S294.

Here, when the operation of at least one of the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42 is accepted, at least one stop switch signal is turned on, and the input port 0 level data ( At least one of bits D0 to D2 of _PT_IN0_OLD) becomes "1".
Further, when at least one of the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is "1", the result of the above-mentioned AND operation does not become "0" (the zero flag does not become "1").
If the result of the above logical AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), "Yes" is determined in step S1422, and the process of step S1422 is repeated. In this case, the process does not proceed to step S294 and subsequent steps, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning is not executed.

On the other hand, when the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42 are all released, the left stop switch signal, middle stop switch signal, and right stop switch signal are all turned off. , the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) all become "0".
Furthermore, when the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) are all "0", the result of the above-mentioned AND operation is "0" (the zero flag becomes "1").
If the result of the above logical AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), "No" is determined in step S1422, and the process proceeds to step S294.

Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning. That is, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and when the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual Dispense the medals from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49.

Here, in this embodiment, a display determination is performed in step S291, and then, in step S1422, it is determined whether any stop switch signal is on, and when any stop switch signal is off, Proceeding to step S294, a medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.
For this reason, even if the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of awards) can be determined; If it has been accepted, the answer is "Yes" in step S1422, and the process does not proceed to step S294, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed. Then, when all the stop switches 42 are released, "No" is returned in step S1422, and the process proceeds to step S294, where the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning becomes executable.

For example, in a situation where the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 (for example, right stop switch 42) is accepted, other stop switches 42 (for example, left stop switch 42) are operated, and then Assume that the third (last) stop switch 42 (for example, the right stop switch 42) is released while the third (last) stop switch 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) is being operated.
In this case, even if the operation of the other stop switches 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals awarded) can be determined; 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) has been accepted, the answer is "Yes" in step S1422, and the process does not proceed to step S294, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.

In this way, in a situation where the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted, the result in step S1422 becomes "Yes" and the process does not proceed to step S294, so that the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when a prize is won is not executed.
Then, when all the stop switches 42 are released, the result in step S1422 becomes "No", the process proceeds to step S294, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) for winning can be executed.
This allows the amount of credits to be added or medals to be paid out from the hopper 35 to be determined at the timing desired by the player.

FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the reel stop reception check in step S1421 of FIG. 256.
In step S1431, the main control board 50 determines whether the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (FIG. 254) of the address "F090(H)" of the RWM 53 is "0".
Specifically, the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (Fig. 254) of the address "F090 (H)" of the RWM53 is stored in the A register, and the A register value is "0" or not. Decide whether or not.

If it is determined that the value is not "0", the result is "No" in step S1431, and the process of step S1431 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1431 is repeated until the answer is "Yes".
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is "0", the result is "Yes" in step S1431, and the process advances to the next step S1432.

In this way, in this embodiment, it is determined in step S1431 whether the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is "0", and when it is determined that it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1432. .
As a result, in a situation where the signal of any switch input to input port 0 is on (operation of any switch is accepted), stop control of the reel 31 is not executed. .
Note that in step S1431, instead of acquiring the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) of the RWM 53, the data of the signal input to the input port 0 may be directly acquired.

Proceeding to step S1432, the main control board 50 executes a stop acceptance check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 258, which will be described later. When the stop acceptance check in step S1432 is completed, the process advances to step S1433.
Proceeding to step S1433, the main control board 50 determines whether there is inspection data.
Specifically, in step S1433, it is determined whether the zero flag is "1". That is, it is determined whether the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1454 in FIG. 258, which will be described later, is "0".

If the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that there is test data, the result being "Yes" in step S1433, and the process proceeds to step S1439 for testing whether or not the stop is acceptable.
On the other hand, if the zero flag is "1", it is determined that there is no test data, the result is "No" in step S1433, and the process proceeds to step S1434.
In step S1434, the main control board 50 determines whether the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (FIG. 254) at address "F090 (H)" of the RWM 53 is "0".

Specifically, the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (Fig. 254) of the address "F090 (H)" of the RWM53 is stored in the A register, and it is checked whether the A register value is "0" or not. Decide whether or not.
If it is determined that the value is "0", the result is "Yes" in step S1434, and the process returns to step S1432. As a result, the processes from step S1432 to step S1434 are repeated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "0", the result is "No" in step S1434, and the process proceeds to the next step S1435.

Proceeding to step S1435, the main control board 50 determines that the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) matches any of the data stored in the stop switch determination table (matching data exists). Determine whether or not.
Specifically, first, it is determined whether the data stored in the A register in step S1434 matches "00000100 (B)" stored at the beginning (first line) of the stop switch determination table. .
When it is determined that they match, it is determined that the operation of the third (right) stop switch 42 has been accepted, and the process advances to the next step S1436.

On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match, then check whether the data stored in the A register in step S1434 and "00000010 (B)" stored in the second line of the stop switch determination table match. Decide whether or not.
When it is determined that they match, it is determined that the operation of the second (middle) stop switch 42 has been accepted, and the process advances to the next step S1436.
On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match, then check whether the data stored in the A register in step S1434 and "00000001 (B)" stored in the third row of the stop switch determination table match. Decide whether or not.

When it is determined that they match, it is determined that the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 has been accepted, and the process advances to the next step S1436.
On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match, it is determined that they do not match any data stored in the stop switch determination table (no matching data), and the process returns to step S1431. As a result, the processes from step S1431 to step S1435 are repeated.

For example, when the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 is accepted, the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) becomes "00000001 (B)."
In this case, since this matches "00000001(B)" stored in the third row of the stop switch determination table, it is determined that operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 has been accepted, and the process proceeds to step S1436.

Also, for example, when the operations of the first (left) stop switch 42 and the second (center) stop switch 42 are accepted simultaneously, the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) becomes "00000011 (B)."
In this case, since there is no match with any of the data stored in the stop switch determination table, it is determined that there is no matching data, and the process returns to step S1431.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the operations of a plurality of stop switches 42 are accepted at the same time, the stop switch 42 and other switches (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b, start switch 41, settlement switch 43) If these operations are accepted at the same time, it is determined in step S1435 that there is no matching data, and the process returns to step S1431.
As a result, in this embodiment, when a plurality of stop switches 42 are operated at the same time, or when the stop switch 42 and another switch are operated at the same time, the stop control of the reel 31 is not executed.

In other words, even if all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the indexes are being detected and the stop switches 42 can be operated, if multiple stop switches 42 are operated at the same time, , when the stop switch 42 and another switch are operated at the same time, it is determined in step S1435 that there is no matching data, the process returns to step S1431, and the stop control of the reel 31 is not executed.

Proceeding to step S1436, the main control board 50 determines whether the stop switch signal for the reel 31 for which stop has been accepted has been turned on (the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted).
Specifically, a logical product (AND) operation is performed between the data stored in the A register in step S1434 and the data of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address "F095 (H)" of the RWM 53, and the result is "0". ” (the zero flag is “1”).

When the result of the above logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that the stop switch signal for the reel 31 for which stop has been accepted is turned on, and in step S1436 " Yes”, and the process returns to step S1431. As a result, the processes from step S1431 to step S1436 are repeated. In this case, the process does not proceed to step S1437, so the stop control of the reels 31 is not executed.

On the other hand, if the result of the above AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), it is determined that the stop switch signal for the reel 31 for which stop has not been accepted (stop can be accepted) is turned on. However, the result in step S1436 is "No", and the process advances to step S1437. In this case, stop control of the reel 31 can be executed.
In this way, in this embodiment, stop control is not executed for the reels 31 corresponding to the stop switches 42 for which the stop operation has already been accepted, and for the reels 31 corresponding to the stop switches 42 for which the stop operation has not yet been accepted. I am trying to perform stop control for this.

Proceeding to step S1437, the main control board 50 executes processing when accepting a stop. In this process, the stop position of the ## reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination result of the current game and the position of the ## reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the ## stop switch 42 is accepted, and the determined stop position is determined. The symbol number corresponding to the position is stored in the # reel symbol number (for the stop position). Furthermore, the stopped symbol data for determining the symbol combination to be stopped on the active line is updated.

More specifically, in the process at the time of accepting the stop in step S1437 of FIG. 257, the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is executed. That is, for the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be on in steps S1434 to S1436, the winning combination result of the current game and the operation of the stop switch 42 are accepted by the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. 194. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the reel 31 is stopped, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the reel symbol number (for the stop position). Furthermore, by processing corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination that stops on the active line is updated.

Note that the # reel symbol number (for passing position) and the # reel symbol number ( When it is determined that the values (for the stop position) have become the same value, the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is decelerated by two-phase excitation, and then switched to deceleration by four-phase excitation.

In addition, the # reel symbol number (for the passing position) and the # reel symbol number (for the stop position) will be the same value, and the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of 1 symbol on the # reel 13 will be the same value. When the value (for example, "3") is reached, the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 may be decelerated by two-phase excitation, and then switched to deceleration by four-phase excitation.

Then, after executing the process at the time of stop acceptance in step S1437, the process proceeds to step S1438, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not all of the reels 31 have stopped.
Specifically, it is determined whether the data of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address "F095(H)" of the RWM 53 is "0" or not.
If the data of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is not "0", it is determined that none of the reels 31 are stopped, the result of step S1438 becomes "No", and the process returns to step S1431. As a result, the process from step S1431 onwards is repeated.

On the other hand, when the data of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "0", it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the result is "Yes" in step S1438, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process advances to step S291 in FIG. 256, and display determination is performed. Then, in the display determination in step S291 of FIG. 256, it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, and the symbol combination for which medals are paid out (granted) is stopped and displayed on the active line. If so, the number of medals to be paid out (number of medals awarded) is determined.

As described above, even if the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 continues to be accepted, the process proceeds to step S291 in FIG. 256, so the number of medals to be paid out (number of medals awarded) can be determined. be.
However, if the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 continues to be accepted, "Yes" will be returned in step S1422 of FIG. 256, and the process will not proceed to step S294 of FIG. Do not execute medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).
Then, when all the stop switches 42 are released, "No" is returned in step S1422 of FIG. 256, the process proceeds to step S294 of FIG. 256, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning becomes executable.

Further, when the process advances to step S1439 in FIG. 257, the main control board 50 executes a stop acceptance check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 258, which will be described later. When the stop acceptance check in step S1439 is completed, the process advances to step S1440.
Proceeding to step S1440, the main control board 50 determines whether there is inspection data.
Specifically, in step S1440, it is determined whether the zero flag is "1". That is, it is determined whether the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1454 in FIG. 258, which will be described later, is "0".

If the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that there is test data, "Yes" is determined in step S1440, and the process returns to step S1439, which is a stop-acceptable test. As a result, the processes of step S1439 and step S1440 are repeated.
On the other hand, when the zero flag is "1", it is determined that there is no test data, the result is "No" in step S1440, and the process returns to step S1431. This causes the processing from step S1431 onwards to be repeated.

FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the stop acceptance check in step S1432 and step S1439 in FIG. 257.
In step S1451, the main control board 50 sets a stop acceptance determination table (FIG. 255(b)). Then, the process advances to the next step S1452.
Proceeding to step S1452, the main control board 50 acquires the number of inspections from the stop acceptance determination table. Specifically, the number of inspections "3" stored at the top (first line) of the suspension acceptance determination table is acquired and stored in the B register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1453.

Proceeding to step S1453, the main control board 50 acquires the mask data and the lower address of the inspection RWM address from the stop acceptance determination table. Specifically, the mask data "40 (H)" stored in the second to fourth rows of the stop acceptance determination table is acquired and stored in the C register, and the lower address "LOW_WK_RL1_STS" of the inspection RWM address is acquired. ” to “LOW_WK_RL1_STS” (“67(H)” to “69(H)”) are acquired and stored in the A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1454.

Here, in the first inspection, the mask data "40 (H)" stored in the second line and the lower address "LOW_WK_RL1_STS"("67(H)") of the inspection RWM address are acquired, and the second In the test, the mask data "40 (H)" stored in the third line and the lower address "LOW_WK_RL2_STS"("68(H)") of the test RWM address are acquired, and in the third test, the mask data stored in the fourth row is obtained. The mask data "40(H)" stored in the address and the lower address "LOW_WK_RL3_STS"("69(H)") of the inspection RWM address are acquired.
Note that after performing the first test, if the result in step S1456 (described later) is "No", the second test will be performed, and if the result in step S1456 is "No" again, then the third test will be performed. conduct. In this way, each reel 31 is inspected (checking whether it is before or after index detection).

Proceeding to step S1454, the main control board 50 acquires data in the storage area indicated by the test RWM address. Specifically, data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 whose lower address is the A register value is stored in the A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1455.
Here, in the first test, data of the first reel drive state (WK_RL1_STS) is stored in the A register. Furthermore, in the second test, data on the second reel drive state (WK_RL2_STS) is stored in the A register, and in the third test, data on the third reel drive state (WK_RL3_STS) is stored in the A register.

Proceeding to step S1455, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation on the data acquired in step S1454 and the mask data. Specifically, in step S1455, the data of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS) stored in the A register in step S1454 and the mask data "40 (H)" ("01000000" stored in the C register in step S1453) are combined. (B)''). Then, the process advances to the next step S1456.

Here, when the rotation of the #th reel 31 reaches a constant speed but before the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, the D6 bit of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS) is It is "1". Therefore, the result of the above logical AND operation does not become "0" (the zero flag does not become "1").
Further, when the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 loses synchronization after the rotation of the #th reel 31 reaches a constant speed, re-acceleration processing is performed. At this time, the D6 bit of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS) is set to "1" and re-acceleration processing is performed. In this case as well, the result of the above logical AND operation does not become "0" (the zero flag does not become "1").

On the other hand, when the rotation of the #th reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, the D6 bit of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS) is It is "0". Therefore, the result of the above logical AND operation becomes "0" (the zero flag becomes "1").
Proceeding to step S1456, the main control board 50 determines whether there is inspection data. Specifically, it is determined whether the result of the AND operation executed in step S1455 is "0", and if it is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that there is no test data. However, the result in step S1456 is "No", and the process advances to the next step S1457.

Here, when the rotation of the reel 31 has reached a constant speed and after the reel sensor 33 has detected the index, when the four-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the reel 31, and when the reel 31 has stopped When it is completed, the D6 bit of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS) is "0", so the result of the above-mentioned AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"). In this case, "No" is determined in step S1456, and the process advances to the next step S1457.
On the other hand, when the result of the above-mentioned AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), it is determined that there is test data, "Yes" is determined in step S1456, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

Proceeding to step S1457, the main control board 50 determines whether the number of inspections has been completed. Specifically, "1" is subtracted from the B register value and the result is stored in the B register. Then, it is determined whether the B register value is "0" or not, and if it is "0", it is determined that the number of tests has been completed, and the result is "Yes" in step S1457, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. .
On the other hand, if the B register value is not "0", it is determined that the number of tests has not been completed, the result is "No" in step S1457, and the process returns to step S1453. In this case, the processing from step S1453 onwards will be repeated.

Furthermore, when step S1456 becomes "Yes" (test data present) and processing according to this flowchart is terminated, step S1433 in FIG. 257 becomes "Yes", and step S1440 in FIG. 257 also becomes "Yes". Therefore, the process does not proceed to step 1437 in FIG. 257, and stop control of the reel 31 is not executed. In other words, before the reel sensor 33 detects the index, stop control of the reel 31 is not executed.

Further, for example, the first (left) reel 31 has already stopped, the second (middle) reel 31 is rotating at a constant speed and after index detection, and the third (right) reel 31 is also rotating at a constant speed. Suppose that it is in the middle and after the index is detected.
In this case, since the D6 bit of the first reel drive state (WK_RL1_STS) is "0", the data of the first reel drive state (WK_RL1_STS) and "40 (H)"("01000000 (B )"), the result of the logical AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1").

In addition, since the D6 bit of the second reel drive state (WK_RL2_STS) is also "0", in the second inspection, the AND operation of the data of the second reel drive state (WK_RL2_STS) and "40 (H)" is The result will be "0".
Furthermore, since the D6 bit of the third reel drive state (WK_RL3_STS) is also "0", in the third inspection, the AND operation of the data of the third reel drive state (WK_RL3_STS) and "40 (H)" is The result will be "0".
Then, in the third inspection, the answer is "No" in step S1456, the answer is "Yes" in step S1457, and the process according to this flowchart is ended.

Also, for example, the first (left) reel 31 has already stopped, the second (center) reel 31 is rotating at a constant speed and has not yet detected an index, and the third (right) reel 31 is also rotating at a constant speed and has already detected an index.
In this case, as described above, in the first test, the result of the logical AND operation between the data of the first reel driving status (WK_RL1_STS) and "40 (H)" is "0".

However, since the D6 bit of the second reel drive state (WK_RL2_STS) is "1", in the second inspection, the AND operation of the data of the second reel drive state (WK_RL2_STS) and "40 (H)" is The result is "01000000(B)" (not "0").
Then, in the second test, the answer is "Yes" in step S1456, and the process according to this flowchart ends.

In this way, in the stop acceptance test shown in FIG. 258, it is checked (checked) whether the index is before or after the index is detected for each reel 31. Since each reel 31 can be inspected by a common process, the process can be simplified and the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced.

As described above, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is provided with a #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 253) in which data indicating the drive state of the reel 31 can be stored. Further, in step S1455 of FIG. 258, a logical product (AND) operation is performed between the data stored in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) and the mask data "40 (H)".
Here, when the rotation of the #th reel 31 has reached a constant speed and the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 has detected the index, the D6 bit of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS) is "0". Therefore, the result of the above logical AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"). At this time, it is determined that the index has been detected, and the result is "No" in step S1456 of FIG. 258.

In contrast, when the rotation of the #th reel 31 has reached a constant speed but the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 has not yet detected the index, the D6 bit of the #th reel drive status (WK_RL#_STS) is "1". Therefore, the result of the above AND operation is not "0" (zero flag is "1"). In this case, it is determined that the index has not yet been detected, and "Yes" is returned in step S1456 of FIG. 258.
If the result of the above logical AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), then "Yes" will be determined in steps S1433 and S1440 in FIG. 257, and the process will not proceed to step S1437. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 will not be executed.

That is, the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS) stores information regarding the drive state of the reel 31 that allows it to be determined whether it is before or after index detection even in a constant speed state. When a predetermined calculation is performed using the data of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS), the result of the predetermined calculation is made to be different before and after index detection.
Then, based on the result of the predetermined calculation, it is determined whether the index is detected before or after the index is detected, and by determining whether or not the stop control of the reel 31 can be executed, the stop control of the reel 31 is performed by simple calculation processing. It is possible to determine whether or not it is executable.

Also, in this embodiment, after the number of bets required to play a game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) has been placed, the main control board 50 first obtains the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (Figure 254) at address "F090 (H)" of the RWM 53, and determines whether the obtained data is "0" or not.
Furthermore, if it is determined that the acquired data is not "0", then a logical AND operation is performed between the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) and "11011111 (B)", and it is determined whether the result is "0".

When it is determined that the result of the above-mentioned AND operation is "0", it is determined that only the start switch signal is on, and rotation start control of the reel 31 is executed based on the operation of the start switch 41.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is "0", and when it is determined that the result of the above AND operation is not "0", the Rotation start control of the reel 31 is not executed.

As a result, after the number of bets that allow the game to be executed (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) has been bet, the bet switches 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b), (left, center, right) To prevent rotation start control of a reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 from being executed when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted in a situation where the operations of the stop switch 42 and the settlement switch 43 are accepted. Can be done.

Furthermore, this embodiment also includes the setting key switch 152 as described in the eleventh embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment (A).
Then, as described in the eleventh embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment (A), with the power turned on and no bet number placed, the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on. If you turn on the setting key switch 152 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151 and turning it, for example, 90 degrees clockwise (when the signal of the setting key switch 152 turns on), the setting confirmation state is displayed. (Settings confirmation mode).

Note that when the number of bets has been bet, "Yes" is returned in step S274 of FIG. 41, and the process does not proceed to the medal insertion waiting process of step S275. Therefore, even if the setting key switch 152 is turned on, the setting confirmation state is not reached. Does not migrate.
In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value does not change), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise and the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state is ended.

As described above, when executing the rotation start control of the reel 31, the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is checked. data is not checked.
For example, the data of the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, and the setting key switch 152 is not checked. Among the data of the input port to which the signal of 152 is input, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked, and the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input. Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 may not be checked.

Therefore, the signal from the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal from the setting key switch 152 is on) after the number of bets that can be executed for the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) has been placed. In addition, when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted in a situation where the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off), rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be executed. do.

Here, even though the bet switch 40 is released after operating the bet switch 40, there is a possibility that the operation of the bet switch 40 may continue to be accepted due to deterioration of the bet switch 40.
While the operation of the bet switch 40 is still being accepted, in this embodiment, even if the start switch 41 is operated, the rotation start control of the reels 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.

Similarly, when the (left, center, right) stop switches 42 and the settlement switch 43 deteriorate and their operations remain accepted, even if the start switch 41 is operated, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.
As a result, even if the player operates the start switch 41, the reels 31 do not spin, and the player is able to recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10. Then, when the player informs a hall attendant of this, the hall attendant is also able to recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10.
Even if the operation of the bet switch 40, (left, center, right) stop switch 42, or the settlement switch 43 remains accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 will issue an error notification, since issuing an error notification in such a case may cause the player to feel annoyed.

Furthermore, it is normally unthinkable that the setting key switch 152 is turned on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) during the game. 152 signal is on), there is a high possibility that it is noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) when the number of bets that can be executed for the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) is bet. If the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted in a situation where the front door 12 is closed (door switch 17 is off) and the front door 12 is closed (door switch 17 is off), the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is performed. be executable.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted due to noise.

On the other hand, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, external signal 4 for notifying an error or the like (FIG. 33 of the 11th embodiment)) can be output based on the fact that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, thereby notifying the hall computer, etc. Thus, a hall attendant, etc. can know that some kind of error has occurred in the slot machine 10 from which the predetermined external signal has been output.
In addition, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, external signal X (other than external signals 1 to 5 in FIG. 33 of the 11th embodiment)) that can identify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on may be output.

Also, in this embodiment, in step S1435 of the reel stop acceptance check in FIG. 257, the main control board 50 determines whether the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) matches any of the data stored in the stop switch determination table (matching data exists).
Then, when it is determined that the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) matches the "00000100 (B)" stored at the beginning (first row) of the stop switch determination table, it is determined that operation of the third (right) stop switch 42 has been accepted, and the process proceeds to step S1436.

Also, when it is determined that the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) and "00000010 (B)" stored in the second line of the stop switch determination table match, the second (intermediate) ) It is determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted, and the process advances to step S1436.
Furthermore, when it is determined that the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) and "00000001 (B)" stored in the third row of the stop switch determination table match, the first (left ) It is determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted, and the process advances to step S1436.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the data does not match any data stored in the stop switch determination table (there is no matching data), the process returns to step S1431.
As a result, when the plurality of reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, when the operation of the ## stop switch 42 is accepted, the operation of the ## stop switch 42 is The stop control of the #th reel 31 based on this is not executed.

Also, as described above, when executing stop control for the #th reel 31, the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is checked, but the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked.
For example, the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked, the bit of the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input that corresponds to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked, and the bit of the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked.

Therefore, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on), and the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off). ), if the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is accepted, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 can be executed.

Here, even if the start switch 41 is released after the start switch 41 is operated, there is a possibility that the operation of the start switch 41 will continue to be accepted due to deterioration of the start switch 41.
Then, while the operation of the start switch 41 is still being accepted, in this embodiment, even if the #stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #stop switch 42 is executed. do not.

Similarly, even though the bet switch 40 is released after operating the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b), the operation of the bet switch 40 continues to be accepted due to deterioration of the bet switch 40. or when the operation of the settlement switch 43 continues to be accepted due to deterioration of the settlement switch 43 even though the settlement switch 43 is released after operating the settlement switch 43. Also, even if the #th stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is not executed.

As a result, the player can recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10, because the #th reel 31 does not stop even when the #th stop switch 42 is operated. Then, when the player informs the hall staff of this, the hall staff can also recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10.
Even if the operation of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the settlement switch 43 remains accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 will issue an error notification, since issuing an error notification in such a case may cause the player to feel annoyed.

Furthermore, it is normally unthinkable that the setting key switch 152 is turned on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) during the game. 152 signal is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal from the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal from the setting key switch 152 is on), and the front door 12 is closed ( When the operation of the ##th stop switch 42 is accepted under the condition (the door switch 17 is off), the ##th reel 31 can be stopped based on the operation of the ##th stop switch 42.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted due to noise.

On the other hand, in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, external signal 4 for notifying an error etc. By outputting the format shown in FIG. 33)), it is possible to notify the hall computer, etc. Therefore, the hall clerk or the like can understand that some kind of error has occurred in the slot machine 10 that outputs the predetermined external signal.
Note that in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, external signal It may be configured to output external signals (other than external signals 1 to 5)).

Although the thirty-fourth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, when multiple reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, when operation of the #th stop switch 42 is accepted, stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is not executed.
However, this is not limited to the above, and for example, when multiple reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, when operation of the #th stop switch 42 is accepted, stopping control of the #th reel 31 based on operation of the #th stop switch 42 may be executable.

As a result, for example, even though the left stop switch 42 was operated first and the middle stop switch 42 was operated second, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, due to deterioration of the start switch 41, etc., the start switch 41 continues to be accepted, it is possible to prevent it from being determined that the middle stop switch 42 has been operated first.

In particular, in an AT machine, if it is determined that the middle stop switch 42 was operated first even though the left stop switch 42 was operated first, there will be a mistake in the order of presses, which will put the player at a disadvantage. However, even if the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, by making it possible to execute the stop control of the ##th reel 31 based on the operation of the ##th stop switch 42, it is possible to prevent a situation where the push order is incorrect during AT. Occurrence can be prevented.

In addition, as in this modified example, even when stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is executable in a situation where the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 may be executable regardless of whether the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on or off. Also, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 may not be executed.

(2) In the above embodiment, when operations of a plurality of stop switches 42 are accepted, stop control of the reels 31 is not executed.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted, and then, while the operation of the first stop switch 42 is still accepted, the operation of the second stop switch 42 is In addition to making it possible to accept the request, based on the operation of the second stop switch 42, the stop control of the corresponding reel 31 may be made executable.

As a result, for example, even though the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 have been operated in this order, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, due to deterioration of the stop switch 42, etc., the left stop switch 42 continues to be accepted, it is possible to prevent it from being determined that the right stop switch 42 has been operated second.

In particular, in an AT machine, when the stop operation is performed in the order of the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42, even though the middle stop switch 42 is operated second, the right If it is determined that the stop switches 42 have been operated, the order of presses will be incorrect and the player will be disadvantaged. By making it possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 and to execute the stop control of the corresponding reel 31 based on the operation of the other stop switch 42, it is possible to prevent mistakes in the pressing order during AT. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

In this modified example, even when stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the second stop switch 42 can be executed while the operation of the first stop switch 42 is still accepted, stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 may be executed regardless of whether the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on or off. Also, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 may not be executed.

(3) In the above embodiment, when stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32 (stepping motor), first a two-phase excitation output is performed, a weak brake is applied, and then a two-phase excitation output is output to a four-phase excitation output. , and apply stronger brakes, but this is not limited to this.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, for example, one-phase excitation output, two-phase excitation output, three-phase excitation output, or four-phase excitation output may be performed. Good too.
(4) The first to thirty-fourth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to thirty-fourth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<35th embodiment>
The 35th embodiment stores information for determining which stop switch 42 can perform stop control of the reel 31 when operations of a plurality of stop switches 42 are accepted simultaneously. A stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) (Fig. 259) is provided.

In a situation where the plurality of reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the operation of the first (any one) stop switch 42 and the operation of the second (one other different from the first) stop switch 42 are performed. If the operation is accepted at the same time, stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the first stop switch 42 can be executed based on the information acquired using the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN).

Further, the reel 31 corresponding to the first (any one) stop switch 42 stops, and the reel 31 corresponding to the second (one other different from the first) stop switch 42 rotates at a constant speed. In a situation where the operation of the first stop switch 42 and the operation of the second stop switch 42 are accepted at the same time, based on the information acquired using the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN), Stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the second stop switch 42 can be executed.

The symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the active line, the type of winning combination, the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payout pieces, the condition device, the winning combination, RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
The 35th embodiment also includes a reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at the address "F0AD(H)" of the RWM 53, similar to the 25th embodiment shown in FIG. 173.
The reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is a storage area that stores data indicating whether or not the operation (stop operation) of the stop switch 42 corresponding to each reel 31 has been accepted.
The contents of each bit are the same as in FIG. 173 of the 25th embodiment.

Each time a game is started, an initial value "00000111 (B)" is set in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).
When the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 is accepted, the D0 bit of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is set to "0". Similarly, when the operation of the second (middle) stop switch 42 is accepted, the D1 bit is set to "0", and when the operation of the third (right) stop switch 42 is accepted, the D2 bit is set to "0". Set.

FIG. 259 is a diagram showing the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN).
The data stored in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is used when the operation of multiple stop switches 42 is received simultaneously to determine which of the stop switches 42 corresponds to which reel 31 stop control can be executed.
Also, in FIG. 259, "00000001 (B)" is data indicating that stop control is to be executed for the first (left) reel 31, "00000010 (B)" is data indicating that stop control is to be executed for the second (center) reel 31, and "00000100 (B)" is data indicating that stop control is to be executed for the third (right) reel 31.

Next, control processing in the thirty-fifth embodiment will be explained using a flowchart.
FIG. 260 is a flowchart showing a reel stop reception check in the 35th embodiment. In the 35th embodiment, instead of the reel stop acceptance check in step S752 in FIG. 139, the reel stop acceptance check in step S1460 in FIG. 260 is executed.
In step S1461, the main control board 50 acquires the data stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address "F0AD(H)" in FIG. 173, and stores it in the B register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1462.

In step S1462, the main control board 50 determines whether or not operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the spinning reel 31 has been accepted.
Specifically, first, the data stored in the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) at address "F017(H)" in FIG. 133 is stored in the A register.
Next, a logical AND operation is performed between the A register value and the B register value, and the result is stored in the A register. That is, a logical AND operation is performed between the data stored in the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) and the data stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP), and the result is stored in the A register.

If the result of the above logical AND operation is not "0" (zero flag is not "1"), it is determined that operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the spinning reel 31 has been accepted, the result is "Yes" in step S1462, and the process proceeds to the next step S1463.
On the other hand, if the result of the above logical AND operation is "0" (zero flag is "1"), it is determined that operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the spinning reel 31 has not been accepted, the result is "No" in step S1462, and processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S1463, the main control board 50 sets the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN). Specifically, the main control board 50 subtracts "1" from the top address "1101(H)" of the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) to set "1100(H)" (reference address) in the HL register. Then, the main control board 50 proceeds to the next step S1464.

Proceeding to step S1464, the main control board 50 sets designated address data. Here, the HL register value ("1100 (H)") at the time of proceeding to step S1464 is set as the reference address, and the A register value is set as the offset value. Further, the address obtained by adding the offset value to the reference address is set as the designated address. In step S1464, first, the A register value (offset value) is added to the HL register value (reference address), and the result (designated address) is stored in the HL register. Next, the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (designated address) is acquired and stored in the A register. The A register value at this time indicates the reel 31 that performs stop control. Then, the process advances to the next step S1465.

When the process proceeds to step S1465, the main control board 50 executes the process when the stop is accepted. Here, the A register value at the time of proceeding to step S1465 indicates the reel 31 for which the stop control is to be performed. Then, in step S1465, for the reel 31 indicated by the A register value, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the result of the role selection and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the corresponding stop switch 42 is accepted, and the pattern number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the reel pattern number (for stop position). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1466. Furthermore, the stop pattern data for determining the pattern combination that will stop on the active line is updated.

More specifically, in the process at the time of accepting the stop in step S1465 of FIG. 260, the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is executed. That is, for the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be on in step S1462, the winning combination result of the current game and the operation of the stop switch 42 are accepted by the processing corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. 194. The stopping position of the reel 31 is determined based on the instantaneous position of the reel 31, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stopping position is stored in the reel symbol number (for stopping position). Furthermore, by processing corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination that stops on the active line is updated.

Note that the reel symbol number (for the passing position) and the reel symbol number (for the stop position) are set by the interrupt processing executed after the process of step S1465 (the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment). When it is determined that the values have become the same, four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 is started.
When the reel symbol number (for passing position) and reel symbol number (for stopping position) become the same value, and the step number of one symbol on reel 13 reaches a predetermined value (for example, "3") , a four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 may be started.
Proceeding to step S1466, the main control board 50 updates the reel stop flag. Specifically, the bit of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) corresponding to the reel 31 indicated by the A register value is updated (rewritten) to "0". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Here, it is assumed that all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and all the stop switches 42 can be operated. At this time, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000111 (B)".
Under such a situation, it is assumed that the operations of the first (left) stop switch 42 and the second (middle) stop switch 42 are accepted at the same time.

Here, when both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) at the time of the previous interrupt processing were "0" and both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the time of the current interrupt processing are "1,""1" is stored in both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP). This makes it possible to determine that two operations of the first stop switch 42 and the second stop switch 42 have been accepted simultaneously.
In this case, the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "00000011 (B)," so when a logical AND operation is performed in step S1462 on the A register value (input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)), the result becomes "00000011 (B)."

Furthermore, when this "00000011(B)" is added to the reference address ("1100(H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1103(H)".
The data corresponding to address "1103(H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000001(B)" as shown in FIG. 259. As described above, this "00000001 (B)" is data indicating that the stop control of the first (left) reel 31 is to be executed, so when the process proceeds to step S1465, the stop control of the first reel 31 is executed. be done.

In this way, when all reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the operation of the first stop switch 42 and the second stop switch 42 are accepted simultaneously, stop control of the first reel 31 corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is executed based on the information obtained using the stop switch acceptance table (TBL_STOP_BTN).

Also, the first reel (left reel 31) stops, the second (middle) reel 31 and the third (right) reel 31 rotate at a constant speed, and the second (middle) stop switch 42 and the third (right) reel 31 rotate at a constant speed. Assume that the stop switch 42 is in a state in which operation can be accepted. At this time, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000110 (B)".

Assume that under such a situation, the operations of the first stop switch 42 and the second stop switch 42 are accepted at the same time. In this case, the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is "00000011 (B)", so in step S1462, the A register value (input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) )), the result is "00000010(B)".
Furthermore, when this "00000010(B)" is added to the reference address ("1100(H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1102(H)".

The data corresponding to address "1102(H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000010(B)" as shown in FIG. 259. As described above, this "00000010(B)" is data indicating that the stop control of the second reel 31 is to be executed, so when the process proceeds to step S1465, the stop control of the second reel 31 is executed.
In this way, under the situation where the first reel 31 is stopped and the second reel 31 and the third reel 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the operations of the first stop switch 42 and the second stop switch 42 are not accepted at the same time. When this occurs, stop control of the second reel 31 corresponding to the second stop switch 42 is executed based on information acquired using the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN).

Further, it is assumed that the operations of the first stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 are simultaneously accepted in a state where all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and operations of all the stop switches 42 can be accepted.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000111 (B)" and the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is "00000101 (B)", so in step S1462, the A register value (input port When the rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) are logically ANDed, the result becomes "00000101 (B)".

Furthermore, when this "00000101(B)" is added to the reference address ("1100(H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1105(H)".
The data corresponding to the address "1105 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000001 (B)" as shown in FIG. 259, and the stop control of the first reel 31 is executed. Since the data indicates this, when the process advances to step S1465, stop control of the first reel 31 is executed.

It is also assumed that the operations of the second stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 are simultaneously accepted in a state where all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and operations of all the stop switches 42 can be accepted.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000111 (B)" and the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is "00000110 (B)", so in step S1462, the A register value (input port When the rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) are logically ANDed, the result becomes "00000110 (B)".

Furthermore, when this "00000110(B)" is added to the reference address ("1100(H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1106(H)".
The data corresponding to the address "1106 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000010 (B)" as shown in FIG. 259, and the stop control of the second reel 31 is executed. Since the data indicates this, when the process advances to step S1465, the stop control of the second reel 31 is executed.

Also, assume that all reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, and operations of all stop switches 42 are acceptable, and that operations of all stop switches 42 are accepted simultaneously.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000111 (B)" and the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is also "00000111 (B)", so when a logical product (AND) operation is performed on the A register value (input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) in step S1462, the result becomes "00000111 (B)."

Furthermore, when this "00000111(B)" is added to the reference address ("1100(H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1107(H)".
The data corresponding to the address "1107 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000001 (B)" as shown in FIG. 259, and the stop control of the first reel 31 is executed. Since the data indicates this, when the process advances to step S1465, stop control of the first reel 31 is executed.

Further, the first reel stops, the second reel 31 and the third reel 31 rotate at a constant speed, and the first stop switch 42 is in a state where the second stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 can be operated. It is assumed that the operations of the third stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 are accepted at the same time.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000110 (B)" and the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is "00000101 (B)", so in step S1462, the A register value (input port When the rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) are logically ANDed, the result is "00000100 (B)".

Furthermore, when this "00000100(B)" is added to the reference address ("1100(H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1104(H)".
The data corresponding to the address "1104 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000100 (B)" as shown in FIG. 259, and the stop control of the third reel 31 is executed. Since the data indicates this, when the process advances to step S1465, the stop control of the third reel 31 is executed.

Further, the first reel stops, the second reel 31 and the third reel 31 rotate at a constant speed, and when the second stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 can be operated, the second stop switch 42 It is assumed that the operations of the third stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 are accepted at the same time.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000110 (B)" and the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is also "00000110 (B)", so in step S1462, the A register value (input port When the rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) are logically ANDed, the result becomes "00000110 (B)".

Furthermore, when this "00000110(B)" is added to the reference address ("1100(H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1106(H)".
The data corresponding to the address “1106 (H)” in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is “00000010 (B)” as shown in FIG. 259, and the stop control of the second reel 31 is executed. Since the data indicates this, when the process advances to step S1465, the stop control of the second reel 31 is executed.

Here, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000000(B)", "00000001(B)", "00000010(B)", "00000100(B)", "00000011(B)", "00000101(B)". ),” “00000110(B),” and “00000111(B).”
In addition, the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is also found to be ``00000000 (B),'' ``00000001 (B),'' ``00000010 (B),'' and ``00000100 (B), focusing only on the signals of the three stop switches 42. )", "00000011(B)", "00000101(B)", "00000110(B)", and "00000111(B)".

Therefore, the results of ANDing the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) are also "00000000 (B)," "00000001 (B)," and "00000010 (B)." , "00000100(B)", "00000011(B)", "00000101(B)", "00000110(B)", and "00000111(B)".

If the result of the above logical AND operation is "00000000 (B)", the result in step S1462 is "No" and the process does not proceed to steps S1463 and subsequent steps, so the reference address ("1100 (H)") is The offset value to be added is one of "1(D)" to "7(D)".
Therefore, no matter what driving state each reel 31 is in and no matter what combination of multiple stop switches 42 is operated simultaneously, based on the information acquired using the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN), Stop control of any one reel 31 can be appropriately executed.

<36th embodiment>
In the 36th embodiment, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first (any one) reel 31 is operated at the first timing, and then, before the first reel 31 stops, the stop switch 42 is operated at the second timing. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the second (different from the first) reel 31 is operated, the first reel 31 may stop after the second reel 31 stops. .

Further, the symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the active line, the type of winning combination, the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, the winning combination, RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
Then, as a result of the first reel 31 stopping after the second reel 31 has stopped, the symbols constituting a specific symbol combination (for example, "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR") are aligned in a straight line. When the first reel 31 is stopped and displayed, a predetermined effect (for example, tenpai sound) can be outputted according to the timing at which the first reel 31 stops.

261 to 263 are schematic diagrams showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switch 42, the stopping sequence of the reels 31, the stopped display of symbols, and the output of the ready sound in the thirty-sixth embodiment.
In this embodiment, after the operation of any one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, before a predetermined period of time has elapsed for performing four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 (for example, the timing when the four-phase excitation output is being performed or the timing before the four-phase excitation output is performed), the operation of another stop switch 42 can be accepted and four-phase excitation output can be performed to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to that other stop switch 42.
For this reason, in this embodiment, there are cases where the operation order of the stop switches 42 and the stopping order of the reels 31 are interchanged.

For example, if the winning number "25" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the winning number "25" is activated, and the winning number "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" corresponding to 1BB is activated. In a game where symbol combinations can be stopped and displayed on the active line, as shown in FIGS. 261(a) to 261(c), when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the left stop switch 42, It is assumed that these are quickly operated in the order of the middle stop switch 42. It is also assumed that the operation of the left stop switch 42 is first accepted, and then, before the left reel 31 stops, the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted. At this time, the number of moving symbols (number of sliding frames) from when the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted until the left reel 31 stops is set to "4", and from when the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted until the left reel 31 stops is set to "4". It is assumed that the number of symbols to be moved until the reels 31 stop is set to "0". In such a case, the middle reel 31 may stop first, and then the left reel 31 may stop.

Furthermore, when the center reel 31 stops first, a "Blue BAR" is displayed as stopped in the middle row as shown in FIG. 261(b), and when the left reel 31 stops afterwards, a "Blue BAR" is displayed as stopped in the upper row as shown in FIG. 261(c). In other words, the symbols that make up the symbol combination "Blue BAR"-"Blue BAR"-"Blue BAR" are displayed as stopped on a straight activated line sloping downward to the right.

Here, when two reels 31 are stopped and the remaining one reel 31 is rotating, the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination are stopped and displayed on the active line, and the remaining one reel 31 When the symbol combination that corresponds to that winning combination stops and the symbols that make up the symbol combination that corresponds to that winning combination are stopped and displayed on the active line, the situation where the symbol combination that corresponds to that winning combination is stopped and displayed is called "Tenpai". . That is, when the two reels 31 are stopped, a part of the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, which is called tenpai.
In addition, when there are four reels 31, when three reels 31 stop, a part of the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, which is called tenpai. That is, when there are N reels 31, when N-1 reels 31 stop, part of the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, which is called tenpai.

As shown in FIG. 261(c), as a result of the left reel 31 stopping after the middle reel 31 has stopped, the symbols constituting the symbol combination "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" are on the right. When it is stopped and displayed on a falling active line, the timing when the left reel 31 stops, not the timing when the middle reel 31 stops, is determined based on the timing when the left reel 31 stops. Outputs a tenpai sound, which is a unique sound effect during tenpai. That is, the tenpai sound is output based on the order in which the reels 31 are stopped, not on the order in which the stop switches 42 are operated.

For example, if the winning number "25" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the winning number "25" is activated, and the winning number "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" corresponding to 1BB is activated. In a game where symbol combinations can be stopped and displayed on the active line, it is assumed that "Blue BAR" can be stopped and displayed on the upper row of the left reel 31 only when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time. .
In this case, when the left reel 31 first stops and "Blue BAR" is stopped and displayed on the upper row of the left reel 31, the player can move "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR". It can be recognized that the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination is activated.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the left reel 31 first stops and a "blue BAR" is displayed stopped on the upper row of the left reel 31, a confirmation effect is executed (for example, an effect that outputs a sound such as "Ichikaku~" or "Congratulations") to indicate that a condition device corresponding to the pattern combination of "blue BAR"-"blue BAR"-"blue BAR" is operating.
However, in a game in which a condition device corresponding to the symbol combination of "Blue BAR"-"Blue BAR"-"Blue BAR" is in operation, if the left stop switch 42 and then the middle stop switch 42 are operated in that order, as shown in Figures 261(a) to (c), and the middle reel 31 and then the left reel 31 stop, even if "Blue BAR" is displayed stopped on the upper row of the left reel 31, no confirmation performance is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when symbols constituting a specific symbol combination are stopped and displayed on a straight invalid line, a sound effect similar to that when a winning combination is reached is output.
For example, in a game in which the winning number "2" is won by the role selection means 61, the replay B condition device corresponding to the winning number "2" is activated, and either replay 01 or 02 can be won, as shown in Fig. 262(a) to (c), when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the left stop switch 42 and the center stop switch 42 are quickly operated in that order. Then, assume that the left stop switch 42 is operated at a first timing (the number of moving symbols on the left reel 31 is set to "4"), and the center stop switch 42 is operated at a second timing (the number of moving symbols on the center reel 31 is set to "1").

Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 stops first, as shown in FIG. 262(b), "Replay" is stopped and displayed in the middle row, "Blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the lower row, and then the left reel Assume that when 31 stops, "Replay" is stopped and displayed in the upper row and "Blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the lower row, as shown in FIG. 262(c). That is, assume that the symbols constituting the symbol combination "Blue BAR"-"Blue BAR"-"Blue BAR" are stopped and displayed on the linear invalid line at the bottom. In such a case, a sound effect similar to that at the time of tenpai is output not in accordance with the timing in which the middle reel 31 stops, but in accordance with the timing in which the left reel 31 stops.

For example, in a game where the winning number "2" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the Replay B condition device corresponding to the winning number "2" is activated, and either Replay 01 or 02 can win, FIG. As shown in (a) to (d), when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42 are quickly operated in this order. Suppose that Then, the left stop switch 42 is operated at the first timing (the number of moving symbols on the left reel 31 is set to "4"), and the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the second timing (the number of moving symbols on the middle reel 31 is set to "4"). It is assumed that the right stop switch 42 is operated at the third timing (the number of moving symbols on the right reel 31 is set to "0"). In such a case, the middle reel 31 may stop first, the right reel 31 may stop second, and the left reel 31 may stop last.

Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 stops for the first time, "Replay" is stopped and displayed in the middle row, "Blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the lower row, and the second right When the reels 31 stop, as shown in FIG. 263(c), "Replay" is stopped and displayed in the lower row, "Blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the middle row, and finally, when the left reel 31 stops, As shown in FIG. 263(d), it is assumed that "Replay" is stopped and displayed in the upper row and "Blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the lower row.

In the example shown in Figures 263(a) to (d), a "blue BAR" is displayed stopped on the bottom row of the left reel 31 and the bottom row of the center reel 31. If the reels stop in the same order as the operation of the stop switch 42, that is, left reel 31, center reel 31, and right reel 31, then when the center reel 31 stops, a sound effect similar to that when a winning combination is reached is output.
However, contrary to the operation sequence of the stop switch 42, when the reels 31 stop in the order of center reel 31, right reel 31, and left reel 31, when the right reel 31 stops second, the symbols that make up the symbol combination "Blue BAR"-"Blue BAR"-"Blue BAR" are not displayed stopped on a straight invalid line, and therefore no sound effect similar to that when a winning combination is reached is output.

FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the 36th embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the 23rd embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 36th embodiment shown in FIG. 264, steps that are different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 139 are assigned the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the 36th embodiment, the processing from step S295 to step S300 in FIG. 139 is executed, but the illustration of the processing from step S295 to step S300 is omitted in FIG. 264.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly explained.

As shown in FIG. 264, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, once the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1471.
Proceeding to step S1471, the main control board 50 determines whether a stop reception has been received. That is, it is determined whether the operation of any one of the first to third stop switches 42 to 42 has been accepted.

Specifically, the main control board 50 inputs the D0 bit (left stop switch signal), D1 bit (middle stop switch signal), and D2 of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) at address "F017 (H)" in FIG. Determine whether any of the bits (right stop switch signal) are on. Here, if it is determined that the operation of one of the stop switches 42 has been accepted, the process advances to the next step S1472. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation of any stop switch 42 has not been accepted, steps S1472 and S1473 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1474.

When the process proceeds to step S1472, the main control board 50 executes the process for accepting a stop. In this process, the stopping position of the reel 31 is determined based on the result of the role selection and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stopping position is set to the reel symbol number (for stopping position) (Figures 135 to 137). In addition, the stopping symbol data for determining the symbol combination that will stop on an active line is updated.

More specifically, in the process at the time of accepting the stop in step S1472 of FIG. 264, the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is executed. That is, for the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be on in step S1471, the winning combination result of the current game and the operation of the stop switch 42 are accepted by the processing corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. 194. The stopping position of the reel 31 is determined based on the instantaneous position of the reel 31, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stopping position is stored in the reel symbol number (for stopping position). Furthermore, by processing corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination that stops on the active line is updated.

Note that the reel symbol number (for the passing position) and the reel symbol number (for the stop position) become the same value due to the interrupt processing executed after the process of step S1472 (the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194). When it is determined that the motor 32 of the reel 31 is stopped, a four-phase excitation output is started to stop the motor 32 of the reel 31.
Also, when the reel symbol number (for passing position) and the reel symbol number (for stopping position) become the same value, and the step number of one symbol on reel 13 becomes a predetermined value (for example, "3") At times, four-phase excitation output may be started to stop the motor 32 of the reel 31.

After executing the stop acceptance process in step S1472, the process proceeds to step S1473, where the main control board 50 sets a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted in the command buffer.
Here, the stop acceptance command may include, for example, information indicating which stop switch 42's operation was accepted, and information indicating the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42's operation was accepted. , information indicating which stop switch 42 has been operated, and information from which the stop position of the reel 31 at which the stop switch 42 has been operated can be determined.
Note that the stop acceptance command set in the command buffer is transmitted to the sub control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S1472.

After executing the stop acceptance command set process in step S1473, the process proceeds to step S1474, where the main control board 50 determines whether the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 has been started. . Here, when it is determined that four-phase excitation output has started for the motor 32 of any reel 31, the process advances to the next step S1475. On the other hand, when it is determined that the four-phase excitation output has not been started for the motor 32 of any reel 31, step S1475 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1476.

Proceeding to step S1475, the main control board 50 sets a stop command in the command buffer indicating that four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 has been started.
Here, the stop command includes information indicating which motor 32 of which reel 31 has started four-phase excitation output.
Note that the stop command set in the command buffer is transmitted to the sub control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after the process in step S1475.

Proceeding to step S1476, the main control board 50 determines whether all reels 31 have stopped.
If it is determined in step S1476 that at least one reel 31 is not stopped, the process returns to step S1471. In this case, the processing from step S1471 onward is repeated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1476 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to display determination in step S291.

Here, when a winning number is drawn by the winning combination lottery means 61 and a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated, the main control board 50 sends a condition device command corresponding to the activated condition device to the sub control board 80. Send to. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 can determine which conditional device has been activated.
In the example shown in FIGS. 261(a) to 261(c), a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the left stop switch 42 has been accepted is first transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. , Next, a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the middle stop switch 42 has been accepted is transmitted, then a stop command indicating that the middle reel 31 is to be stopped is transmitted, and finally, the left reel 31 is stopped. A stop command is sent indicating that the

Furthermore, upon receiving the stop acceptance command from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 can determine which reel 31 should stop at which position based on the condition device command and the stop acceptance command. . As a result, it is determined, for example, that the "Blue BAR" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper row, or that the symbols constituting the symbol combination "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" are tenpai. can do.

Furthermore, upon receiving the stop command from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 can determine the order and timing of stopping each reel 31.
Then, the sub-control board 80 outputs a tenpai sound based on the stop position of each reel 31 determined from the condition device command and the stop acceptance command, and the stop order and stop timing of each reel 31 determined from the stop command. , it is possible to output the same sound effects as during tenpai.

In the example shown in FIGS. 261(a) to (c), the sub-control board 80 determines the stop timing of the left reel 31 based on a stop command indicating that the left reel 31 is to be stopped, and Outputs tenpai sound at the stop timing.
Thereby, even if the operating order of the stop switch 42 and the stopping order of the reels 31 are different, the tenpai sound or the same sound effect as the tenpai can be output at an appropriate timing that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the example shown in FIGS. 263(a) to 263(c), a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the left stop switch 42 has been accepted is first transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Next, a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the middle stop switch 42 has been accepted is transmitted, and then a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the right stop switch 42 has been accepted is transmitted. Next, a stop command indicating that the middle reel 31 stops is sent, then a stop command indicating that the right reel 31 stops, and finally a stop command indicating that the left reel 31 stops. is sent.

Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 determines, based on a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the right stop switch 42 has been accepted, that the "blue BAR" on the right reel 31 will be displayed stopped in the middle row, and then, based on a stop command indicating that the right reel 31 will stop, determines that the right reel 31 will stop second.
The sub-control board 80 can determine that two "blue BARs" are not aligned on a straight invalid line when the right reel 31 stops, and can refrain from outputting a sound effect similar to that when a winning combination is achieved.

Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 263(a) to 263(d), "Blue BAR" is stopped and displayed on the lower row of the left reel 31 and the lower row of the middle reel 31.
Therefore, if the reels 31 stop in the same order as the operation order of the stop switch 42, that is, the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31, the "Blue BAR" will be displayed in the lower row when the middle reel 31 stops. It will be stopped and displayed on a straight invalid line.
However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 263(a) to 263(d), the middle reel 31 first stops, so if a sound effect similar to that for tenpai is output at this point, it will give the player a sense of discomfort.

Also, in the example shown in Figures 263(a) to (d), the second reel to stop is the right reel 31, and at this point it is determined that two "blue BARs" will not line up in a straight invalid line, so if a sound effect similar to that when a winning combination is reached is output, it will give the player a strange feeling.
In this embodiment, the sub-control board 80 determines, based on the stop command for each reel 31, that the reels 31 will stop in the order of center reel 31, right reel 31, left reel 31, and determines that two "blue BARs" are not lined up in a straight, inactive line, whether the center reel 31 stops first or the right reel 31 stops second, and does not output the same sound effect as when a winning combination is reached, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, in the slot machine 10 where the main control board 50 controls and manages the AT, the main control board 50 sends winning numbers and condition device commands to the sub control board 80. Send the production group number without sending it.
In this case, the stop position of the reel 31 cannot be determined from the production group number and the information indicating the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted.

Therefore, in the slot machine 10 where the AT is controlled and managed on the main control board 50 side, the main control board 50 sends the sub control board 80 information indicating which stop switch 42 has been operated, and the stop switch 42. A stop acceptance command including information that allows determining the stop position of the reel 31 whose operation of the switch 42 has been accepted is transmitted.
Then, the sub-control board 80 can determine which reel 31 should stop at which position based on information included in the received stop acceptance command and which can determine the stopping position of the reel 31. As a result, it is determined, for example, that the "Blue BAR" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper row, or that the symbols forming the symbol combination "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" are tenpai. can do.

Although the thirty-sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) In the above embodiment, the sub control board 80 determines the stop order and stop timing of each reel 31 based on the stop command received from the main control board 50, and adjusts the tenpai sound and the tenpai time at appropriate timing. A similar sound effect was output.

However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the stop position, stop order, and stop timing of each reel 31 may be determined based on the condition device command and stop acceptance command received from the main control board 50, for example. Then, based on the stop position, stop order, and stop timing of each reel 31 determined from the condition device command and the stop acceptance command, a tenpai sound or a sound effect similar to the tenpai time may be output.
In this case, the stop command for each reel 31 may not be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.

(2) In the above embodiment, when stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, a four-phase excitation output is performed to the motor 32 (stepping motor), but the present invention is not limited to this.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, for example, one-phase excitation output, two-phase excitation output, or three-phase excitation output may be performed. Also, first, a two-phase excitation output is performed to apply a weak brake, and then the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32 is stopped by switching from the two-phase excitation output to a four-phase excitation output and applying a strong brake. You may also do so.

(3) In the twenty-ninth to thirty-sixth embodiments, three reels 31 are provided. However, the number of reels 31 is not limited to three and may be, for example, four or more.
(4) In the twenty-ninth to thirty-sixth embodiments, the slot machine 10 is given as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can be applied to Parrot, which uses gaming balls as gaming media, enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) that use electronic information (electronic medals) instead of physical (tangible) medals, and casino machines.
(5) The first to thirty-sixth embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to thirty-sixth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

Thirty-seventh embodiment
Next, a thirty-seventh embodiment will be described.
The 37th embodiment is a slot machine in which the winning of a special role (1BB) that has been carried over can be avoided by changing the button pressing sequence.
In the thirty-seventh embodiment, the meanings of "RT", "non-RT", "winning number", and "condition device number ("gimmick condition device number" and "winning and replay condition device number") are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
Also, as in other embodiments, the activation of the instruction function and the suggestion of the push order can be performed only during the advantageous zone, and the activation of the instruction function and the suggestion of the push order cannot be performed in the non-advantageous zone (normal zone). Therefore, in the following, when the activation of the instruction function and the suggestion of the push order are performed, it is considered to be a favorable zone.
Furthermore, in the 37th embodiment, as in the 23rd embodiment, a 1BB game (1BB operating state) and an RB game (RB operating state) are provided as special games (operation states of the role device). Although the 1BB game (1BB operating state) and the RB game (RB operating state) are not strictly included in the RT, they may be considered as one of the RTs.
In the 37th embodiment and the embodiments described later, "when the device is not in operation" includes a state where the device has won but has not yet been activated. For example, when the device has not won 1BB, or when the device has won 1BB and is in 1BB but is not playing 1BB, it is called "when 1BB is not in operation", and when the device is playing 1BB, it is called "when 1BB is in operation". The same applies to RB.

Furthermore, the RB in the 37th embodiment is a winning combination that is drawn during the general game of the 1BB game (meaning games other than the RB game in the 1BB game), and the RB is won during the general game of the 1BB game. , RB wins, the normal game shifts to the RB game during the 1BB game. For this reason, RB is also referred to as shift RB (SRB).
In the 37th embodiment, similarly to the 23rd embodiment, the lottery of winning numbers is executed by the winning combination lottery means 61. The winning numbers of the 37th embodiment include winning numbers "0" to "100"("0" corresponds to a non-winning (so-called loser)), as shown in FIGS. 286 and 287, which will be described later.
When the winning number is determined, a "condition device number" corresponding to the winning number is generated. For example, in FIG. 286, when the winning number "4" is determined, the accessory condition device number "1" (FIG. 275) and the winning and replay condition device number "2" (FIG. 276) are generated.

FIG. 265 is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the 37th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 265, in the 37th embodiment, each reel 31 consists of 20 frames. In addition, in FIG. 265, symbol numbers are also shown as in FIG. 114.
Further, in the 37th embodiment, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to "4".

Therefore, similarly to the twenty-third embodiment, if four specific symbols are arranged at intervals of five symbols on one reel 31, no matter where the stop switch 42 is operated, the specific symbols will always be placed on the active line. It can be stopped at Specifically, on the left reel 31, “Replay” is placed at No. 5, No. 10, No. 15, and No. 0. That is, the "replay" on the left reel 31 is arranged with four symbols at intervals of five symbols. Therefore, for the left reel 31, no matter at what timing the left stop switch 42 is operated, the "replay" can always be stopped at the active line. Note that such a symbol arrangement may be referred to as a "PB=1" arrangement. On the other hand, a case where such a symbol arrangement is not used may be referred to as a "PB≠1" arrangement.

On the left reel 31, "Replay" and "Bell A" are each arranged in "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, "Replay", "Bell A", and "Bell B" are each arranged in "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell A", and "Bell B" are each arranged in "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, the 1st "Blank", the 6th "Black BAR", the 11th "Red 7", and the 16th "Cherry" are arranged in "PB = 1" with the total of these 4 symbols. be. Therefore, no matter at what timing the middle stop switch 42 is operated, any one of "Blank", "Black BAR", "Red 7", or "Cherry" can be stopped on the effective line. The same applies to the right reel 31.

Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, "Watermelon A" or "Watermelon B" is arranged in "PB=1" with the sum of these two symbols.
Further, on the right reel 31, "Blue BAR", "Watermelon A", or "Watermelon B" are arranged in "PB=1" in total of these three symbols.
Furthermore, the effective lines in the 37th embodiment are the same as in the 23rd embodiment shown in FIG. 115 (one line from "upper left row" to "middle middle row" to "lower right row"), so illustration thereof is omitted.

FIGS. 266 to 273 are diagrams showing types of winning combinations (such as winning numbers corresponding to the winning numbers drawn by the winning lottery means 61), symbol combinations, number of coins to be paid out, etc. in the 37th embodiment.
First, as shown in FIG. 266, the gaming states of the 37th embodiment include when the accessory is not activated, when the RB (accessory) is not activated when 1BB is activated, and when the RB is activated. The prescribed number is set to "3" in both cases.
In FIGS. 266 to 274, "3 pieces (1)" corresponds to the time when the accessory is not activated, and particularly in the 37th embodiment, corresponds to games other than the 1BB game.

Further, "3 coins (2)" corresponds to the time when RB is not activated while 1BB is in operation (during 1BB game). Furthermore, "3 pieces (3)" corresponds to when 1BB is in operation (during 1BB game) and RB is in operation (during RB game).
For example, in Figure 266, 1BB with the winning number "001" is eligible for lottery when the specified number is 3 (1) (when the accessory is not activated), but when the specified number is 3 (2) and the specified number is 3. (3) means that it is not eligible for lottery.

In FIG. 266, the winning numbers "001" to "003" correspond to special winning combinations (official objects). In this embodiment, one type of 1BB and two types of RB (RBA and RBB) are provided as special winnings.
If 1BB is won and 1BB is won when the accessory is not activated, no medals will be paid out in the current game, but the next game will shift to 1BB activation (1BB game) corresponding to a special game.
Further, during 1BB operation (1BB game), RB is drawn. If the RB wins and the RB wins during the 1BB operation, no medals will be paid out in the current game, but the next game will shift to the RB operation (RB game) during the 1BB operation (1BB game).

Note that the time when 1BB is in operation and RB is not in operation may be referred to as "1BB general game". In the general game of the 1BB game, the state in which the RB is not won is sometimes referred to as 1BB in operation and RB not inside, and the state in which RB is won is sometimes referred to as 1BB in action and RB inside.
When the termination condition of the RB operation is satisfied, when the termination condition of the 1BB operation is satisfied, the 1BB operation is terminated and the game shifts to the time when the accessory is not activated (normal game). On the other hand, when the termination conditions for RB operation are met, but when the termination conditions for 1BB operation are not satisfied, the process shifts to 1BB operation (and when RB is not activated).

The role number "004" shown in FIG. 266 to the role number "149" shown in FIG. 269 all correspond to replays (replay roles). In the 37th embodiment, replays 01 to 15 are provided as types of replays. As shown in FIG. 266 to FIG. 269, when the role is not activated (3 pieces (1)), and when RB is not activated while 1BB is activated (3 pieces (2)), any of replays 01 to 15 are eligible for selection. In contrast, when RB is activated while 1BB is activated (3 pieces (3)), no replays are selected.
In addition, the symbol combination of each replay is set to "PB=1." For example, the symbol combination of replay 03 is "Cherry"-"Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry"-"Bell A," but the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 and the "Bell A" on the right reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement. In addition, the "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" on the center reel 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement for these four symbols combined.

270 to 273 show the small prize of the 37th embodiment. As the small prize of the 37th embodiment, small prize 001 to small prize 118 are provided.
The payout amount for small prizes 001 to 008 is set to 7 coins when winning, which is the maximum payout amount for small prizes. Small prizes 001 to 008 are roles that become high-ranking bells when the so-called push order bell is won (described later).
In addition, the number of coins to be paid out when small prizes 009 to 117 are set to one coin, and these prizes result in a low-numbered bell when the so-called push order bell is won.
Furthermore, the small prize 118 is a special prize that is drawn only when 1BB and RB are activated, and the number of coins to be paid out when the prize is won is set to 1 coin.

In each of the above-mentioned winnings, there are winnings that are carried over from the next game onwards and winnings that are not carried over, but these are the same as in the other embodiments described above. 1BB and RB are roles that can be carried over to the next game or later, and small roles and replays are roles that cannot be carried over to the next game or later.

FIG. 274 is a diagram showing pattern symbol combinations in the 37th embodiment. In the 37th embodiment, when the press order bell is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in an incorrect press order, the above-mentioned one-card winning combination will be won, and the winning combination will be non-winning (missing). has. If the winning combination is non-winning, one of the pattern symbol combinations shown in FIG. 274 is displayed. The pattern design combination is also referred to as a koboshime. Although details will be described later, the pattern symbol combination is set as one of the RT transition conditions.
In FIG. 274, the pattern symbol combinations are not the winning combinations themselves, but for convenience of explanation, winning numbers are also given to the pattern symbol combinations as serial numbers in FIGS. 266 to 274.

275 to 285 are diagrams showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc.
First, the winning numbers are drawn in the winning combination lottery means 61. The winning numbers include winning numbers "0" to "100", as shown in FIGS. 286 and 287, which will be described later, for example. For example, if the winning number "4" in FIG. 286 is won, the condition device "1BB" corresponding to the accessory condition device number "1" (FIG. 275) and the winning and replay condition device number "2" ( The conditional device "Replay B" corresponding to FIG. 276) becomes operational.

FIG. 275 shows the accessory (particularly 1BB and RB in the 37th embodiment) condition device.
The 1BB condition device corresponding to the accessory condition device number "1" is an accessory condition device that becomes operable when 1BB is won. When this 1BB condition device is activated, it becomes possible to win the winning combination of 1BB.
In addition, the remarks column in FIG. 275 shows the operation end conditions of the accessory condition device. The 1BB condition device continues until the number of acquired medals exceeds 218, and when the number of acquired medals exceeds 218, the operation termination condition of the 1BB condition device is satisfied and the operation of the 1BB condition device is terminated.
Similarly, both the RBA condition device and the RBB condition device end based on 8 wins or 12 games, or the end of operation of the 1BB condition device.

Figures 276 to 285 show winning and replay condition devices. Among the winning and replay condition device numbers, “1” to “19” are condition device numbers related to replay, and “20” to “98” are condition device numbers related to small winnings.
For example, the winning combination of the replay A condition device corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number “1” includes replays 01 to 07 (seven types of replays). In this way, when one conditional device includes a plurality of winning combinations, when the conditional device is activated, symbol combinations corresponding to all of the winning combinations may be stopped, or some (at least some) of the winning combinations may be stopped. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination (1) may be stoppable.
In this embodiment, even if multiple types of replays are won multiple times, only one of the replays wins a prize. Similarly, as described below, multiple types of small roles may be won repeatedly, but in this case, in this embodiment, there is no case where multiple small roles are won, and only one of the small roles wins. It becomes possible.

In the Replay A condition device to the Replay K condition device, the notes column also shows the relationship between the push order and the stop symbol combination (replay type). In the notes column, for example, "left 1st" means the first stop on the left.
In the 37th embodiment, replay wins in any order of pressing (left first stop, middle first stop, right first stop).
In addition, in the notes column for Replay A condition device to Replay I condition device, "?" and "○" indicate whether the "Blue BAR" can be stopped in the middle stage during the right first stop ("○" indicates , "Blue BAR"
can be stopped in the middle row, and "?" indicates that the "Blue BAR" cannot be stopped in the middle row.
Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the 37th embodiment, during the 1BB operation, when the Replay A to Replay I condition devices are activated, the effect is made to press right (right first stop) and aim the "Blue BAR" at the middle stage. is output, and a performance suggesting an advantage is output according to the reel 31 and the number of "Blue BAR" stopped in the middle row.

The Replay A condition device includes Replays 01 to 07 as winning roles, and when the Replay A condition device is activated, in this embodiment, Replay 01 or Replay 02 is stopped when the first left or center stop occurs, and Replay 01 is stopped when the first right stop occurs.
The symbol combinations of Replay 01 are the combination numbers "004" to "007" in FIG. 266. Therefore, when Replay 01 wins, "Replay" - "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" - "Bell A" stop on the active line. When the center reel 31 stops and "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" stops on the active line (middle middle row), "Replay" stops on the middle upper row. Also, when the right reel 31 stops and "Bell A" stops on the active line (lower right row), "Replay" stops on the upper right row. Therefore, when the symbol combination of Replay 01 stops on the active line (Replay 01 wins), "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay" (upper row replay) stops on the upper row line (invalid line).
On the other hand, when Replay 02 wins, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" stops on the pay line.

Note that since both Replay 01 and Replay 02 have "PB=1", any one can be stopped. Therefore, when the device is operated under Replay A condition, when the left or middle first stop is performed, depending on the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch 42, the case where Replay 01 is stopped and the case where Replay 02 is stopped are assigned. The stopping results are diversified. This similarly applies to the first stop on the left or center when the device is activated under Replay B to Replay K conditions, which will be described below.

Further, when the replay A condition device is activated, the "blue BAR" does not stop at the middle stage of any reel 31 at the first stop on the right. When the right reel 31 is stopped, if you operate the right stop switch 42 aiming at the No. 4 "Blue BAR" in the middle row, the No. 3 "Bell B" will not stop at the lower right row, but the No. 5 "Bell A" will stop. It stops at the bottom right. Similarly, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, if you operate the middle stop switch 42 aiming at the 19th "Blue BAR" in the middle row, the 19th "Blue BAR" will not stop in the middle row, but the 1st "blank". ” stops in the middle.
Furthermore, in the same way, when the left reel 31 is stopped, if you operate the left stop switch 42 while aiming at the 16th "Blue BAR" in the middle row, the 17th "Cherry" will not stop in the upper left row, but the 0th "Replay" ” stops at the top left. This causes Replay 01 to stop.

The Replay B condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 08 as winning combinations, and its stop control is the same as when the Replay A condition device is activated. Furthermore, when the reverse button is pressed, the "Blue BAR" does not stop at the middle stage, similar to when the Replay A condition device is activated.
The Replay C condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 09 as winning combinations, and when the Replay C condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the left or middle first stops, and the right first When stopped, replay 04 can be stopped.

When the replay C condition device is activated, at the first stop on the right, only the right reel 31 stops with the "blue BAR" in the middle stage, as shown in FIG. 276. When the right reel 31 is stopped, aim at the No. 4 "Blue BAR" in the middle row and operate the right stop switch 42, the right reel 31 will stop at that position, and the No. 3 "Bell B" will move to the lower right row (effective line). Stop at. Further, in the middle row, "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" is stopped, and "Blue BAR" is not stopped. Furthermore, "Cherry/Bell A" is stopped in the upper left row, and "Blue BAR" is not stopped in the middle left row.

The Replay D condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 10 as winning combinations, and when the Replay D condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the left or center first stop, and the right first stop. At this time, replay 05 of winning number "021" can be stopped.
When the right first stop occurs when the Replay D condition device is activated, only the middle reel 31 can stop the "Blue BAR" in the middle row. On the other hand, when the right reel 31 stops and you aim for the No. 4 "Blue BAR" in the middle row, it will not stop at this position (the No. 3 "Bell B" will not stop at the lower right row), but will move to the lower right row. "Bell A" stops. In addition, "Replay" is stopped in the upper left row, and "Blue BAR" is not stopped in the middle left row. As a result, replay 05 of winning number "021" is stopped.

The Replay E condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 11 as winning combinations, and when the Replay E condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the left or center first stop, and the right first stop. At this time, replay 03 can be stopped.
At the first right stop when the Replay E condition device is activated, only the left reel 31 can stop the "Blue BAR" in the middle left row. When the "Blue BAR" stops at the middle left row, the "Cherry" stops at the upper left row (valid line). Further, on the right reel 31, "Bell A" stops on the active line, and on the middle reel 31, "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" stops on the active line.
The Replay F condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 12 as winning combinations, and when the Replay F condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the left or center first stop, and the right first stop. At this time, replay 05 of winning number “022” can be stopped.

When the right first stop occurs when the replay F condition device is activated, the "blue BAR" can be stopped at the middle stage of the right and middle reels 31. When the "Blue BAR" stops on the middle row of the right reel 31, the "Bell B" stops on the lower right row. When the middle reel 31 stops, the "blue BAR" stops at the middle stage. Furthermore, when the left reel 31 stops, "Replay" stops at the upper left row, and "Blue BAR" does not stop at the middle left row. As a result, replay 05 of winning number "022" is stopped.

The Replay G condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 13 as winning combinations, and when the Replay G condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the left or center first stop, and the right first stop. At this time, replay 04 can be stopped.
When the right first stop occurs when the replay G condition device is activated, the "blue BAR" can be stopped in the middle row of the right and left reels 31. When the right reel 31 stops, "Blue BAR" stops at the middle right row, and "Bell B" stops at the lower right row. Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, if you aim for the "Blue BAR" in the middle row, the "Blue BAR" does not stop, but the "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" stops. Furthermore, when the left reel 31 stops and the "Blue BAR" stops at the middle left row, the "Cherry" stops at the upper left row.

The Replay H condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 14 as winning roles, and when the Replay H condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the first left or center stop occurs, and Replay 05 can be stopped when the first right stop occurs.
When the replay H condition device is activated and the right first reel stops, the "Blue BAR" can be stopped in the middle row of the center and left reels 31. When the right reel 31 stops, the "Bell A" stops in the lower right row, and the "Blue BAR" does not stop in the middle right row.
Also, if you aim for "Blue BAR" in the middle middle row when the center reel 31 stops, it will stop at that position. Furthermore, if you aim for "Blue BAR" in the left middle row when the left reel 31 stops, it will stop at that position, and "Cherry" will stop in the upper left row. This causes Replay 05 with the role number "023" to stop.

The Replay I condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 15 as winning combinations, and when the Replay I condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the left or center first stop, and the right first stop. At this time, replay 05 can be stopped.
When the right first stop occurs when the Replay I condition device is activated, the "Blue BAR" can be stopped in the middle row of the right, middle, and left reels 31. When the right reel 31 stops, if you aim for the "Blue BAR" on the middle right row, it will stop at that position, and the "Bell B" will stop on the lower right row.
Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, if you aim at the "blue BAR" in the middle row, it will stop at that position. Furthermore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, if you aim at the "Blue BAR" on the middle left row, it will stop at that position, and the "Cherry" will stop on the upper left row. As a result, all the "Blue BARs" appear on the middle line, and the replay 05 of the winning number "024" is stopped.

The Replay J condition device includes Replay 01, Replay 02, and Replay 15 as winning combinations, and when the Replay J condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the left or middle first stop, and the right first stop. At this time, the replay 15 can be stopped.
Furthermore, when the right first stop occurs, "Red 7" can be stopped at the middle stages of the right, middle, and left reels 31. When "Red 7" stops on the middle row of the right reel 31, "Bell A" stops on the lower right row. Also, if you aim for "Red 7" on the middle row of the middle reel 31, it will stop at that position. Furthermore, if you aim for "Red 7" on the middle row of the left reel 31, it will stop at that position, and "Bell B" will stop on the upper left row. As a result, the replay 15 of the winning number "147" is stopped, and the "Red 7" arrangement is stopped in the middle row.
For example, if a condition that is advantageous to the player is established, such as winning a lottery related to AT (adding the number of AT games, etc.), when the Replay J condition device is activated, the player is asked to press "Red 7". Output the effect to make the "Red 7" match appear.

The Replay K condition device includes Replay 01 and Replay 02 as winning combinations, and when the Replay K condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the left or center first stops, and Replay when the right stops first. 01 can be stopped.
Furthermore, when the right first stop occurs, "Red 7" can be stopped at the middle stage of the right and middle reels 31, but "Red 7" does not stop at the middle stage of the left reel 31. When "Red 7" stops on the middle row of the right reel 31, "Bell A" stops on the lower right row. Furthermore, “Red 7” can be stopped at the middle stage of the middle reel 31. Furthermore, when aiming at "Red 7" on the middle row of the left reel 31, the 15th "Replay" stops on the upper left row and "Red 7" does not stop on the middle left row. As a result, replay 01 of winning number "005" is stopped.
Even when the replay K condition device is activated, similar to when the replay J condition device is activated, an effect that makes the user press the "red 7" is output to prevent the "red 7" from being shown.

When the replay L condition device is activated, the replay 08 is stopped at the effective line. Here, when replay 08 is stopped on the effective line, "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" - "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" - "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" can be stopped on the effective line.
Further, when the replay M condition device is activated, the replay 09 is stopped at the effective line. Here, when replay 09 is stopped on the active line, the watermelon symbols are not aligned on the active line, but "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" is placed on the "upper left row" - "middle middle row" - "upper right row" - "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" - "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" can be stopped.

When the Replay N condition device is activated, Replay 06 can be stopped, and a chance combination consisting of "Replay"-"Bell A/Bell B"-"Bell A/Bell B" is stopped on the activated line.
When the replay O condition device is activated, replay 07 can be stopped, and similarly to when the replay N condition device is activated, a chance eye consisting of "replay"-"Bell A/Bell B"-"Bell A/Bell B" is stopped on the active line.
When the replay P condition device is activated, the replay 10 can be stopped, and the chance combination consisting of "replay"-"watermelon A/watermelon B"-"watermelon A/watermelon B" is stopped on the active line.
The reliability of the chance symbol is "Strong chance symbol>Chance symbol A ≒ Chance symbol B." In FIG. 286 described later, when the winning numbers "16" to "18" are won, the chance symbol appears and the AT lottery is executed. Therefore, the AT winning expectation is "Winning number "18"> Winning number "16" ≒ "17."

The Replay Q condition device includes Replay 11 and Replay 12 as winning combinations, and when the Replay Q condition device is activated, Replay 11 or Replay 12 is stopped. When the left reel 31 is stopped, if you aim for the "cherry" on the upper left row (replay 11), the reel will stop at that position. Furthermore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, if you aim for "Bell A" on the upper left row (replay 12), it will stop at that position, and "Cherry" will stop on the lower left row. The stopped form of "cherry" (square cherry) in the upper left row or lower left row represents a weak cherry.
The Replay R condition device includes Replay 11 to Replay 13 as winning combinations, and when the Replay R condition device is activated, either Replay 11 or Replay 13 is stopped. When the left reel 31 stops, it is possible to stop the number 8 or 18 "Blank" (Replay 13) in the upper left row, or the "Black BAR" (Replay 13) number 3, and the "Cherry" can be stopped in the middle left row. do. This stopped form (middle cherry) represents a strong cherry.
The Replay S condition device includes Replay 11 to Replay 14 as winning combinations, and when the Replay S condition device is activated, any one of Replay 11, Replay 13, or Replay 14 is stopped. Similar to when the Replay R condition device is activated, it is possible to stop a "cherry" (strong cherry) in the middle left row.

In the replay condition device described above, as shown in FIG. 286, Replay A wins alone and does not win multiple times with 1BB.
On the other hand, Replay B to Replay S are always won twice with 1BB in non-internal matches. In games where the 1BB condition device and the Replay B to Replay S condition device operate at the same time, the reel stop control based on the Replay B to Replay S condition device takes priority, and one of the Replays always wins, and 1BB never wins. .
On the other hand, in internal games after winning a 1BB (Fig. 290, Fig. 292), the 1BB condition device is also activated in the game when the replay A to replay S condition device is activated, but the replay prize has priority and the replay is always There is no case where 1BB wins and 1BB wins.

When 1BB is in operation and inside RB, as shown in FIG. 296, when the Replay A to Replay S condition devices are activated, the replay condition devices will not operate at the same time (Replay A to Replay S will win individually), and the replay will always win.
When 1BB is in operation and inside RB, and the Replay A to Replay S condition devices are in operation, the RBA or RBB condition device will also operate at the same time, but the winning of a replay is given priority, so the replay always wins and there is no case in which the RBA or RBB wins.

The so-called push order bell condition devices are comprised of the following types.
Minor role A group condition device: Minor role A01 condition device ~ Minor role A24 condition device Minor role B group condition device: Minor role B01 condition device ~ Minor role B24 condition device Minor role C group condition device: Minor role C01 condition device ~ Small role Win C24 condition device For example, in a game in which the winning number "22" is won in FIG. 286, which will be described later, the small win A01 condition device is activated.
First, the relationship between the small win A01 condition device to the small win A24 condition device and the correct answer pressing order is as follows.
Minor role A01 condition device ~ Minor role A04 condition device: Correct answer press order 123 (left center right)
Small role A05 condition device ~ Small role A08 condition device: Correct answer press order 132 (left and right middle)
Small role A09 condition device ~ Small role A12 condition device: Correct answer press order 213 (middle left and right)
Minor role A13 condition device ~ Minor role A16 condition device: Correct answer press order 231 (middle right left)
Minor role A17 condition device ~ Minor role A20 condition device: Correct answer press order 312 (right left middle)
Minor role A21 condition device ~ Minor role A24 condition device: Correct answer press order 321 (right middle left)
Hereinafter, some condition devices will be selected and reel stop control when the condition devices are activated will be explained.

In FIG. 277 (the same applies to the figures after FIG. 278), for example, in the notes column of the small win A01 condition device, "123" indicates the push order 123 (left middle right). Further, for example, "2--" indicates that the first stop is "2 (medium)" and the second and third stops are optional.
In FIG. 277, the small winning combination A01 condition device includes winning winning combinations of small winning combinations 001, 009 to 016, 025, 026, 041, 042, 065, and 066 (15 in total), and each This is a conditional device that allows a predetermined small winning combination to be won.
When the small winning combination A01 condition device is activated, when the push order is 123, the small winning combination 001 is won with "PB=1 (1/1)". On the other hand, when the push order is 132, small winnings 009 to 016 can be won at a rate of "1/2". In other words, when the push order is 132, the winning combination is non-winning at a rate of "1/2", and the above-mentioned pattern symbol combination appears.
When the small winning combination A01 condition device is activated, at the time of the first left stop, "Replay", which is the left reel symbol of the small winning combination 001, is stopped at the upper left row. Next, when stopping at the second middle stage, "Bell A" is stopped at the middle middle stage. Furthermore, at the third stop on the right, "Watermelon A/Watermelon B/Blue BAR" is stopped at the lower right stage. As a result, the small winning combination 001 is won with "PB=1".
In addition, when winning small role 001, "Replay" - "Bell A" - "Watermelon A / Watermelon B / Blue BAR" will stop on the active line, but "Bell A" - "Bell A" - will stop on the middle line. "Bell A" stops.

On the other hand, after stopping "Replay" in the upper left row at the first stop on the left, when the second stop is on the right, in order to make it possible to win any of the small winnings 009 to 016, the "replay" is placed on the lower right row. Stop "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry". Since the total arrangement of these four symbols is "PB=1", when the second right stop is made, one of these symbols is always stopped at the lower right row.
Next, at the middle third stop, "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" is stopped at the middle middle row in order to make it possible to win any of the small winnings 009 to 016. Then, when the symbols corresponding to the small winning combination cannot be stopped, the symbols corresponding to the pattern symbol combination are stopped.

For example, firstly, when it is "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Black BAR", if you can stop "Black BAR/Red 7" in the middle row, the small winning combination 010 or the small winning combination 012 will be However, if "Black BAR/Red 7" cannot be stopped in the middle row, the winning combination will be non-winning.
In the case of "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Black BAR", the rate at which "Black BAR/Red 7" stops when the middle reel 31 stops is "1/2".
When the stop form becomes "Replay" - "Black BAR/Red 7" - "Black BAR", the prize will be a small winning combination of 010 or 012.
On the other hand, in the case of "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Black BAR", if "Black BAR/Red 7" cannot be stopped when the middle reel 31 stops, "Bell B" is stopped. let As a result, the stop pattern becomes "Replay" - "Bell B" - "Black BAR", resulting in pattern 02 (hand number "301").

Second, when "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Red 7", if you can stop "Black BAR/Red 7" in the middle row, you will win the small prize 009 or small prize 011. However, if "Black BAR/Red 7" cannot be stopped in the middle row, the winning combination will be non-winning.
In the case of "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Red 7", the rate at which "Black BAR/Red 7" stops when the middle reel 31 stops is "1/2".
When the stop type becomes "Replay" - "Black BAR/Red 7" - "Red 7", the winning result is Small Win 009 or Small Win 011.
On the other hand, when "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Red 7" is displayed, if "Black BAR/Red 7" cannot be stopped when the middle reel 31 stops, "Bell B" is stopped. let As a result, the stop pattern becomes "Replay" - "Bell B" - "Red 7", resulting in pattern 02 (hand number "300").

Thirdly, when it is "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Blank", if you can stop "Blank/Cherry" in the middle row, you will win Small Win 013 or Small Win 015. , if the "blank/cherry" cannot be stopped in the middle middle row, the winning combination will be non-winning.
In the case of "replay" - "rotating" - "blank", the rate at which "blank/cherry" stops when the middle reel 31 stops is "1/2".
When the stop form becomes "Replay" - "Blank/Cherry" - "Blank", the winning result is Small Win 013 or Small Win 015.
On the other hand, in the case of "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Blank", if "Blank/Cherry" cannot be stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Bell B" is stopped. As a result, the stop pattern becomes "Replay" - "Bell B" - "Blank", resulting in pattern 02 (hand number "302").

Fourthly, when it is "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Cherry", if you can stop "Blank/Cherry" in the middle row, you will win Small Win 014 or Small Win 016. , if the "blank/cherry" cannot be stopped in the middle middle row, the winning combination will be non-winning.
In the case of "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Cherry", the rate at which "Blank/Cherry" stops when the middle reel 31 stops is "1/2".
When the stop form becomes "replay" - "blank/cherry" - "cherry", the winning result is small winning combination 014 or small winning combination 016.

On the other hand, in the case of "Replay"-"Spinning"-"Cherry", if "Blank/Cherry" cannot be stopped when the center reel 31 stops, "Bell B" is stopped. As a result, the stopping pattern becomes "Replay"-"Bell B"-"Cherry", which is pattern 02 (combination number "303").
As described above, when the small win A01 condition device is activated and the press sequence is 132, there is a 1/2 chance that small wins 009 to 016 will be awarded, and there is a 1/2 chance that pattern 02 will stop (resulting in a non-winning role).

In addition, when the small prize A01 condition device is activated, at the time of the first stop in the middle, as shown in FIG. 277, there is a 1/8 chance that the small prize 025 to small prize 026 will be won, and there is a 7/8 chance that the prize will not be won (the pattern symbol combination will stop).
Specifically, when the first center stop occurs, a "Bell B" is stopped in the center middle row (PB=1). Also, when the left stop occurs after the first center stop, a "Red 7" is drawn into the upper left row. Since the "Red 7" is provided in only one place on the left reel 31, the draw rate, i.e., the stop rate, is "1/4".
Furthermore, when the reel stops on the right side after the first stop in the middle, the "Red 7/Black BAR" is drawn into the lower right section. Since the "Red 7/Black BAR" on the right reel 31 is provided at one location every five symbols, the draw rate, i.e., the stop rate, is "1/2".
On the other hand, in the case where the situation is "Spinning" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR", if the "Red 7" cannot be stopped when the reel stops on the left, "Replay" (PB=1) is stopped.

In addition, in the case of "Red 7" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", if "Red 7/Black BAR" cannot be stopped when stopping on the right, "Bell A" (PB = 1) to stop.
From the above, the ratio at which "Red 7" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR" stops when the middle first stop is "1/8".
In addition, the stop form of small winnings 025 to 026 when there is no winning is,
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR" (Pattern 02)
"Red 7" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (Pattern 03)
It will be one of the following.

Furthermore, when the small win A01 condition device is activated, when the right first stop occurs, as shown in FIG. 277, the small win 041 to 042 are won at a rate of "1/8", and the result is "7/8". The winning combination will be non-winning (the pattern symbol combination will stop) at a ratio of .
Specifically, when the right first stop is made, "Bell B" is stopped at the lower right stage (PB=1). Also, when stopping on the left after the first stop on the right, "Red 7" is drawn into the upper left row. As mentioned above, the attraction rate of "Red 7" is "1/4".
Furthermore, at the middle stop after the right first stop, the "Red 7/Black BAR" is drawn into the middle middle stage. As mentioned above, the attraction rate of "Red 7/Black BAR" is "1/2".
On the other hand, in the case of "Rotating" - "Red 7/Black BAR" - "Bell B", if you cannot stop "Red 7" when stopping on the left, select "Replay" (PB = 1). make it stop.

In addition, in the case of "Red 7" - "Rotating" - "Bell B", if you cannot stop "Red 7/Black BAR" during the middle stop, select "Replay" (PB = 1). make it stop.
From the above, the ratio at which "Red 7" - "Red 7/Black BAR" - "Bell B" stops at the first right stop is "1/8".
In addition, the stop form when small winnings 041 to 042 do not win is,
"Replay" - "Red 7/Black BAR" - "Bell B" (Pattern 05)
"Red 7" - "Replay" - "Bell B" (Pattern 04)
It will be one of the following.

Next, when the small winning combination A01 condition device is activated, the RB inside during the 1BB game (during the general game) is controlled to stop so that the small winning combination 001 is won regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The stop control when winning the small winning combination 001 is the same as the correct answer press order 123.
On the other hand, when the small prize A01 condition device is activated, during the general game during the 1BB game (RB non-internal), the stop control is performed so that the small prize 065 or the small prize 066 is won regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. . Small role 065 and small role 066 do not stop during the normal game (when the role object is not activated), but since they are winning combinations included in the small role A01 condition device, only during the 1BB game, the small role 065 or the small role Role 066 can be stopped. This is because the winning combination of the minor combination included in the condition device needs to be able to appear in any of the game states. This is the same for the small winning combinations 067 to 112 of the small winning combination A02 to small winning combination A24 condition devices.
In addition, the winning combinations such as small winnings 065 and 066 that can be won during general play (inside RB) during 1BB gaming are "PB ≠ 1"("Red7" on the left reel 31 is " The symbols on the middle and right reels 31 are "PB=1". Therefore, the winning ratio is "1/4".

Even when the small winning combination A02 to small winning combination A04 condition device is activated, the small winning combination 001 (high bell (7-card winning combination)) is won when the correct answer press order is 123, similarly to the above. In addition, if the first stop press order is correct (left) and the second stop press order is incorrect (right), a 1-card winning combination will be won at a rate of "1/2", and a winning combination will be awarded at a rate of "1/2". It is controlled so that it is not captured (pattern symbol combination display).
In addition, if the first stop is pressed in the wrong order (middle or right), a 1-card winning combination will be won at a rate of ``1/8'' and a winning combination will be won at a rate of ``7/8'' (pattern symbol combination display). control so that

When the small win A05 condition device is activated, when the correct answer press order is 132, the small win 002 is won with "PB=1". When winning small role 002, "Replay" - "Bell A" - "Replay" stops on the active line, but "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell B" stops on the middle line. .
On the other hand, at press order 123, the small winning combinations 009 to 016 are won at a rate of ``1/2'', and the winning combinations are non-winning at a rate of ``1/2'' (stopping of pattern symbol combinations).
When the small winning combination A05 condition device is activated, at the time of the first stop on the left, the left reel symbol "Replay" of the small winning combination 002 is stopped at the upper left row. Next, at the second stop on the right, the "replay" is stopped at the lower right stage. Furthermore, when stopping at the middle third stage, "Bell A" is stopped at the middle middle stage. As a result, the small winning combination 002 is won with "PB=1".

On the other hand, after "Replay" is stopped in the upper left row when the first left stop occurs, if it is stopped in the second middle row, "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" are stopped in the middle middle row (totaling "PB=1") to make it possible to win any of the small symbols 009 to 016.
Next, at the time of the third stop on the right, a symbol corresponding to a small winning combination that has been completed is stopped on the lower right row, and when the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination that has been completed cannot be stopped, a symbol corresponding to a pattern symbol combination is stopped.
In this case, even if any of the symbols "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" stops in the middle row, the probability that the small winning combination that is in a state of tenpai can be stopped is "1/2". For example, if "Replay"-"Red 7"-"Spinning", there is a probability of "1/2" that "Red 7/Black BAR" can be stopped and the small winning combination 011 or small winning combination 012 can be won.
Therefore, when the small prize A05 condition device is activated and the pressing sequence is 123, there is a 1/2 chance that small prize 009 to small prize 016 will be awarded, and there is a 1/2 chance that the pattern symbol combination will stop (resulting in a non-winning role).

In addition, when the small win A05 condition device is activated, when the middle first stop occurs, as shown in FIG. The ratio will result in a winning combination (stopping of pattern symbol combinations).
Specifically, when the middle first stop occurs, "Bell B" is stopped at the middle middle stage (PB=1). Also, when stopping on the left after the middle first stop, "Red 7" is drawn into the upper left row (ratio "1/4").
Furthermore, when stopping on the right after the first stop in the center, "Red 7/Black BAR" is drawn into the lower right row (ratio "1/2").
On the other hand, the stop form of small winnings 033 to 034 when they do not win is,
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR" (Pattern 02)
"Red 7" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (Pattern 03)
It will be one of the following.

Furthermore, when the small win A05 condition device is activated, when the right first stop occurs, as shown in FIG. 277, the small win 049 to 050 will be won at the rate of "1/8", and it will be "7/8". The winning combination will be non-winning (the pattern symbol combination will stop) at a ratio of .
Specifically, when the right first stop is made, "Bell B" is stopped at the lower right stage (PB=1). Also, when stopping on the left after the first stop on the right, "Red 7" is drawn into the upper left row. As mentioned above, the attraction rate of "Red 7" is "1/4".
Furthermore, at the middle stop after the first right stop, "Blank/Cherry" is pulled into the middle middle stage. The attraction rate of "Blank/Cherry" is "1/2".
From the above, the ratio at which "Red 7" - "Red 7/Black BAR" - "Bell B" stops at the first right stop is "1/8".
On the other hand, the stop form of small winnings 049 to 050 when they do not win is,
"Replay" - "Red 7/Black BAR" - "Bell B" (Pattern 05)
"Red 7" - "Replay" - "Bell B" (Pattern 04)
It will be one of the following.

Furthermore, when the small winning combination A05 condition device is activated, the RB inside during the 1BB game (during the general game) is controlled to stop so that the small winning combination 002 is won regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The stop control in this case is the same as the correct answer press order 123.
On the other hand, when the small winning combination A05 condition device is activated, during normal gaming during 1BB gaming (RB non-internal), stop control is performed so that small winning combination 075 or small winning combination 076 is won regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. .

When the minor prize A06 to minor prize A08 condition device is activated, similarly to the above, if the correct push order is 132, minor prize 002 (high bell (7 coin prize)) will be awarded. Also, if the first stop push order is correct (left) and the second stop push order is incorrect (center), there is a 1/2 chance of a 1 coin prize being awarded, and a 1/2 chance of a missed prize (pattern symbol combination display).
Also, if the first stop button press sequence is incorrect (middle or right), there is a 1/8 chance of winning a 1-piece role, and a 7/8 chance of losing (a pattern symbol combination is displayed).

When the small win A09 condition device is activated, when the correct answer press order is 213, the small win 003 or 004 is won with "PB=1". On the other hand, at press order 231, the small winning combinations 025 to 032 are won at a rate of ``1/2'', and the winning combinations are not won at a rate of ``1/2'' (stopping of pattern symbol combinations).
When the small win A09 condition device is activated, at the first stop in the middle, the middle reel symbol "Bell B" of the small win 003 is stopped in the middle middle row (PB=1). Next, at the second left stop, if the "Blue BAR" or "Bell B" (both "PB≠1") can be stopped, the "Blue BAR" or "Bell B" is stopped, respectively. When "Blue BAR" or "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Bell A" (PB=1) is stopped.
Next, at the third stop on the right, if "Bell A/Blue BAR" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped at the lower right stage (PB=1). As a result, the small winning combination 003 is won.

Further, when the third stop on the right side is "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped at the lower right stage (PB=1). As a result, the small winning combination 004 is won.

When winning the small winning combination 003, "Bell A/Blue BAR" - "Bell B" - "Bell B" stops on the active line.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination 004 is won, "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (all bells) stop on the active line.
In addition to the above-mentioned small win A09 condition device activation, there are two types of small win that can be won, such as when the correct answer press order is 312 when the minor win A17 condition device is activated, which will be described later. There are cases where only a minor role has "PB = 1", but in order to diversify the stopping results, if it is possible to stop a minor role with "PB≠1", that minor role will be stopped. There are cases.

On the other hand, after stopping "Bell B" in the middle middle row at the first stop in the middle, when it is the second stop on the right, in order to make it possible to win any of the small winnings 025 to 032, it is placed in the lower right row. , "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" is stopped ("PB=1" in total).
Next, at the third stop on the left, the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination that is full is stopped in the upper left row, and if it is not possible to stop the symbol that corresponds to the small winning combination that is full, the pattern symbol combination is Stop the corresponding symbol.
In this case, even if any of the symbols "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" is stopped in the lower right row, the ratio of stopping the busy small winning combination is "1/2". For example, if the result is "Rotating" - "Bell B" - "Red 7", "Red 7/Blue BAR" will be stopped at a ratio of "1/2", and a small winning combination of 025 or 027 will be won. can be done.
Therefore, at press order 231 when the small winning A09 condition device is activated, small winnings 025 to 032 will be won at a rate of "1/2", and the pattern symbol combination will stop at a rate of "1/2". ).

In addition, when the small prize A09 condition device is activated, when the first left stop occurs, as shown in FIG. 278, there is a 1/8 chance that small prize 009 to small prize 010 will be won, and there is a 7/8 chance that no prize will be won (the pattern symbol combination will stop).
Specifically, when the first left stop occurs, "Replay" is stopped in the upper left row (PB=1). Also, when the middle stop occurs after the first left stop, "Black BAR" is drawn into the middle middle row (ratio "1/4").
Furthermore, when stopping on the right after the first stop on the left, "red 7/black BAR" is drawn into the lower right row (ratio "1/2").
On the other hand, the stopping patterns for non-winning small symbols 009 to 010 are as follows:
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR" (Pattern 02)
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (Pattern 03)
Either:

Furthermore, when the small win A09 condition device is activated, when the right first stop occurs, as shown in FIG. This will result in non-winning (stopping of pattern symbol combinations).
Specifically, when the first right stop occurs, "replay" is stopped at the lower right stage (PB=1). Furthermore, when stopping on the left after the first stop on the right, "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" is drawn into the upper left row. The attraction rate of "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" is "1/2".
Furthermore, when stopping in the middle after the first stop on the right, a "black BAR" is pulled into the middle middle stage. The attraction rate of "Black BAR" is "1/4".
From the above, the rate at which "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" - "Black BAR" - "Replay" stops at the first right stop is "1/8".
On the other hand, the stop form of small win 057 when it does not win is,
"Watermelon A/Watermelon B/Red 7/Blue BAR" - "Replay" - "Replay" (Pattern 04)
"Replay" - "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" - "Replay" (Pattern 01)
It will be one of the following.

Next, when the small winning combination A09 condition device is activated, the RB inside during the 1BB game (during the general game) is controlled to stop so that the small winning combination 003 or the small winning combination 004 is won regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The stop control in this case is the same as the correct answer press order 213.
On the other hand, when the small win A09 condition device is activated, during the general game during the 1BB game (RB non-internal), the stop control is performed so that the small win 081 or the small win 082 is won regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. .

Even when the small win A10 to small win A12 condition device is activated, in the same way as above, when the correct answer press order is 213, the small win 003 or the small win 004 (high bell (7 card role)) is won, and the first stop press order is If the answer is correct (middle) and the second stop pressing order is incorrect (right), a one-card winning combination is won at a rate of "1/2" and the pattern combination is stopped at a rate of "1/2".
Further, if the first stop pressing order is incorrect (left or right), a one-card winning combination is won at a rate of "1/8", and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "7/8".
Furthermore, in the same way as above, when the small winning combination A13 to small winning combination A16 condition device is activated, the small winning combination 005 (high bell (7 pieces)) is won when the correct answer press order is 231, and the first stop pressing order is correct. (middle) and if the second stop pressing order is incorrect (left), a 1-card winning combination is won at a rate of "1/2", and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "1/2".
Further, if the first stop pressing order is incorrect (left or right), a one-card winning combination is won at a rate of "1/8", and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "7/8".

When the small win A17 condition device is activated, when the correct answer press order is 312, the small win 006 or 007 is won with "PB=1". On the other hand, at press order 321, the small winning combinations 041 to 048 are won at a rate of ``1/2'', and the winning combinations are not won at a rate of ``1/2'' (stopping of pattern symbol combinations).
When the small winning combination A17 condition device is activated, when the right first stop occurs, "Bell B" which is the right reel symbol of the small winning combination 006 and small winning combination 007 is stopped at the lower right row. Next, when stopping the second left, if it is possible to stop the "Blue BAR" or "Bell B" (both "PB≠1"), stop the "Blue BAR" or "Bell B" in the upper left row, If "Blue BAR" or "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Bell A" (PB=1) is stopped at the upper left row.
Furthermore, when stopping at the middle third stage, if "Blue BAR/Bell A" - "Rotating" - "Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped at the middle middle stage. As a result, the small winning combination 006 is won.
On the other hand, when the middle third stop is "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell B", the "Replay" is stopped at the middle third stage. As a result, the small winning combination 007 is won.

On the other hand, after "Bell B" is stopped in the lower right row at the first stop on the right, when it is stopped in the middle second row, "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" are stopped in the middle middle row to make it possible to win any of the small symbols 041 to 048 (total of "PB=1").
Next, at the time of the third left stop, a symbol corresponding to a small winning combination that has been completed is stopped in the upper left row, and when the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination that has been completed cannot be stopped, a symbol corresponding to a pattern symbol combination is stopped.
In this case, even if any of the symbols "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" stops in the middle middle row, the probability that the small winning combination that is in the tenpai can be stopped is "1/2". For example, if "Spinning"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" occurs, there is a probability of "1/2" that "Red 7/Blue BAR" can be stopped and the small winning combination 042 or small winning combination 044 can be won.
Therefore, when the small win A17 condition device is activated and the pressing sequence is 321, there is a 1/2 chance that small wins 041 to 048 will be awarded, and there is a 1/2 chance that the pattern symbol combination will stop (resulting in a non-winning combination).

In addition, when the small win A17 condition device is activated, when the first stop is on the left, as shown in FIG. The ratio will result in a winning combination (stopping of pattern symbol combinations).
Specifically, when the left first stop occurs, the "replay" is stopped at the upper left stage (PB=1). Also, when stopping in the middle after the first left stop, "Black BAR/Red 7" is drawn into the middle row (ratio "1/2").
Furthermore, when stopping on the right after the first stop on the left, "Red 7" is drawn into the lower right row (ratio "1/4").
On the other hand, the stop form of Small Win 009 or Small Win 011 when it is not won is:
"Replay" - "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" - "Replay" (Pattern 01)
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" (Pattern 02)
It will be one of the following.

Furthermore, when the small win A17 condition device is activated, when the middle first stop occurs, as shown in FIG. The winning combination will be non-winning (the pattern symbol combination will stop) at a ratio of .
Specifically, when the middle first stop occurs, "Bell B" is stopped at the lower right stage (PB=1). Furthermore, when stopping on the left after the middle first stop, "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" is pulled into the upper left row (retraction rate "1/2").
Furthermore, when stopping on the right after the first stop in the middle, "Red 7" is pulled into the lower right row (pull rate "1/4").
On the other hand, the stop form when the small prize 037 or the small prize 039 does not win is
"Watermelon A/Watermelon B/Red 7/Blue BAR" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (Pattern 03)
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" (Pattern 02)
It will be one of the following.

Next, when the small winning combination A17 condition device is activated, the RB inside during the 1BB game (during the general game) is controlled to stop so that the small winning combination 006 or the small winning combination 007 is won regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The stop control in this case is the same as when the pressing order is correct 312.
On the other hand, when the small prize A01 condition device is activated, during the general game during 1BB game (RB non-internal), regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, the small prize 097 or the small prize 098 (winning ratio "1/4") ) is controlled to stop so as to win the prize.

Even when the small winning combination A18 to small winning combination A20 condition device is activated, in the same way as above, when the correct answer press order is 312, the small winning combination 006 or small winning combination 007 (high bell (7-card winning)) is won, and the first stop pressing order If the answer is correct (right) and the second stop pressing order is incorrect (middle), a 1-card winning combination is won at a rate of ``1/2'' and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of ``1/2''.
Further, if the first stop pressing order is incorrect (left or middle), a one-card winning combination is won at a rate of ``1/8'', and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of ``7/8''.
In addition, when the small role A21 to minor role A24 condition device is activated, when the correct answer press order is 321, the small role 008 (high bell (7-card role)) is won, and the first stop press order is correct (right) and the second If the stop press order is incorrect (left), a one-card winning combination is won at a rate of ``1/2'' and the pattern combination is stopped at a rate of ``1/2''.
Further, if the first stop pressing order is incorrect (left or middle), a one-card winning combination is won at a rate of ``1/8'', and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of ``7/8''.

The small prize B01 to small prize B24 condition devices are condition devices similar to the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices, and like the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices, a 7-coin role will be awarded if the button press sequence is correct, and if the first stop button press sequence is correct and the second stop button press sequence is incorrect, there is a 1/2 chance that a 1-coin role will be awarded, and there is a 1/2 chance that a pattern symbol combination will stop.
In addition, if the first stop button press sequence is incorrect, there is a 1/8 chance that a 1-coin role will be won, and a 7/8 chance that a pattern symbol combination will stop.
The small prize B01 to small prize B24 condition devices are the same as the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices except that the small prize 116 has been added as a winning combination to the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices.
In addition, the small prize B01 to small prize B24 condition devices have the same correct push order and incorrect push order when the role is not activated as the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices. Furthermore, the small prize B01 to small prize B24 condition devices have the same winning role when the role is not activated as the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices, and the winning role and winning rate when the role is not activated as the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices.

For example, the small winning combination B01 condition device is the same as the small winning combination A01 condition device in that in the correct answer pressing order 123, the small winning combination 001 is won with “PB=1”.
Further, the small winning combination B01 condition device is the same as the small winning combination A01 condition device in that it is possible to win small winning combinations 009 to 016 at a rate of "1/2" in the incorrect release pressing order 132.
Furthermore, the small win B01 condition device is the same as the small win A01 condition device in that it is possible to win small wins 025 to 026 at a rate of "1/8" at the first stop during the incorrect release order. .
Further, the small winning combination B01 condition device is the same as the small winning combination A01 condition device in that it is possible to win small winning combinations 041 to 042 at a rate of "1/8" at the first stop on the right in the order of incorrect release.

On the other hand, the small winning combination B01 condition device to the small winning combination B24 condition device are different from the small winning combination A01 to small winning combination A24 condition device in the winning combination when the accessory is activated.
In the small winning combination B01 to small winning combination B04 condition device, during 1BB operation, when the left first stop is performed, the small winning combination 001 is won with "PB=1".
Further, in the small winning combination B05 to small winning combination B08 condition device, during the 1BB operation, when the left first stop is performed, the small winning combination 002 is won with "PB=1".
Furthermore, in the small winning combination B09 to small winning combination B12 condition device, during the 1BB operation, when the first stop is in the middle, the small winning combination 003 or the small winning combination 004 is won with "PB=1".
Furthermore, in the small winning combination B13 to small winning combination B16 condition device, during the 1BB operation, when the middle first stop is performed, the small winning combination 005 is won with "PB=1".
Further, in the small winning combination B17 to small winning combination B20 condition device, during the 1BB operation, when the right first stop is performed, the small winning combination 006 or the small winning combination 007 is won with "PB=1".
Furthermore, in the small winning combination B21 to small winning combination B24 condition device, during the 1BB operation, when the right first stop is performed, the small winning combination 008 is won with "PB=1".

The small prize C01 to small prize C24 condition devices are condition devices similar to the small prize B01 to small prize B24 condition devices, and like the small prize B01 to small prize B24 condition devices, when the reel is not activated, a 7-coin prize will be awarded if the button presses are pressed in the correct order, and a 1-coin prize or a miss will result if the button presses are pressed in the incorrect order.
The small prize C01 to small prize C24 condition devices are the same as the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices except that the small prize 117 has been added as a winning combination to the small prize A01 to small prize A24 condition devices.
Furthermore, the small win C01 to small win C24 condition devices are condition devices in which the same stop control as the small win B01 to small win B24 condition devices is executed, respectively.

As shown in Figures 287 and 289, in non-internal 1BB play, the small prize D01 to small prize D04 condition devices may operate simultaneously with the 1BB condition device (1BB and one of the small prizes D1 to D4 may be won in combination).
In addition, as shown in Figures 291 and 293, the small prize D01 to small prize D04 condition devices may operate during a game inside 1BB (a game in which the 1BB condition device is operating) (inside 1BB, any one of the small prizes D1 to D4 may win alone).
Furthermore, the small prize D01 to small prize D04 condition devices may operate during 1BB operation, as shown in Figures 295 and 297.

The small winning combination D1 condition device stops small winning combinations 025 to 040 with "PB=1" when the left first stop occurs when 1BB is not activated (non-internal and internal).
On the other hand, when 1BB is not activated, 1BB is displayed at its maximum when the center or right first stop occurs. Here, "maximum display of 1BB" is a stop control that stops the symbol combination of 1BB on the active line as much as possible. For example, when it is the middle first stop, "Watermelon B" is stopped at the middle middle stage. Thereafter, when stopping on the left, "Bell B" is stopped at the upper left stage, and when stopping on the right, "Bell A" is stopped at the lower right stage. Here, “Bell B” on the left reel 31 and “Watermelon B” on the middle reel 31 are “PB≠1”. On the other hand, “Bell A” on the right reel 31 is “PB=1”. Therefore, the symbol combination of 1BB is "PB≠1".

For example, in the case of "Rotating" - "Rotating" - "Bell A", if "Watermelon B" cannot be stopped when the middle reel 31 stops, "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry ” (total “PB = 1”), and when the left reel 31 stops, “Red 7 / Blue BAR / Watermelon A / Watermelon B” (total “PB = 1”) is stopped, and the small role Win 115.
On the other hand, in the case of "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell A", if "Watermelon B" cannot be stopped when the middle reel 31 stops, "Blue BAR/Watermelon A" is stopped. (“PB=1” in “Watermelon B/Blue BAR/Watermelon A”), and win the small prize 113.
Similarly, in the case of "Rotating" - "Watermelon B" - "Bell A", if "Bell B" cannot be stopped when the left reel 31 stops, "Cherry" is stopped (" ``Cherry/Bell B'' with ``PB=1''), and a small role of 114 is won.
Therefore, when 1BB cannot be stopped, any of the small winning combinations 113 to 115 can be stopped, so no winnings (non-winning) occur.

In addition, when the small winning combination D1 condition device operates 1BB, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, the small winning combination D1 condition device allows a single winning combination to be won with "PB=1". In this case, the minor roles 025 to 040, "Red 7/Blue BAR/Watermelon A/Watermelon B" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" are stopped (in total "PB=1").

The small winning combination D2 condition device stops small winning combinations 025 to 040 with "PB=1" when the middle first stop occurs when 1BB is not activated.
On the other hand, when 1BB is not activated and the left or right side is first stopped, 1BB is displayed at its maximum. When 1BB cannot be stopped, small winnings 113 to 116 are won (no winnings are missed).
In addition, when the small winning combination D2 condition device operates 1BB, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, the small winning combination D2 condition device allows a single winning combination to be won with "PB=1". In this case, the small winning combinations 025 to 040 are stopped.

The small winning combination D3 condition device allows the small winning combination 115 to be won with "PB=1" when the push order is 312 when 1BB is not activated. On the other hand, when 1BB is not activated, if the push order is not 312, 1BB is displayed at maximum. When it is not possible to stop 1BB, the small winning combination 113 to 115 or the small winning combination 117 is won (no missed winnings occur).
In addition, when the small winning combination D3 condition device operates 1BB, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, the small winning combination D3 condition device allows a winning winning of one winning combination with "PB=1". In this case, the small winning combinations 025 to 040 are stopped.

The small winning combination D4 condition device allows the small winning combination 115 to be won with "PB=1" when the push order is 321 when 1BB is not activated. On the other hand, when 1BB is not activated, if the push order is not 321, 1BB is displayed at maximum. If 1BB cannot be stopped, small winnings 113 to 117 are won (no winnings are missed).
In addition, when the small winning combination D4 condition device operates 1BB, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, the small winning combination D4 condition device allows a single winning combination to be won with "PB=1". In this case, the small winning combinations 025 to 040 are stopped.

The small role E condition device includes small roles 009-023, 025-039, and 041-055 as winning roles, but even if you add up the symbol combinations of all these roles, "PB≠1" due to the symbol arrangement. There is. Therefore, when the small win E condition device is activated, it is necessary to press the eye, and the win is "PB≠1".
The small winning combination F condition device includes all the small winning combinations 001 to 117 except the small winning combination 118 as the winning combination, and regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, any 7-card winning combination (small winning combination 001 ～Small role 008) is won (PB=1). Further, depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed, for example, the small winning combination 001 is won when the pressing order is 123, the small winning combination 002 is won when the pressing order is 132, and so on.
The small winning combination G condition device includes small winning combinations 001 to 117 and a small winning combination 118 drawn only during 1BB operation as winning winning combinations. Since the small winning combination 118 is drawn only during the 1BB operation, the small winning combination 118 is sometimes referred to as an "increasing winning combination". When the small winning combination G condition device is activated, a small winning combination 118 (one-card winning combination) is won with "PB=1".

286 to 299 are diagrams showing number tables (winning probability for each winning number) in the 37th embodiment. The number table shows the number for each RT (gaming state) and each set value. Dividing the numerical values shown in FIGS. 286 to 299 by "65536" gives the probability of winning. For example, in FIG. 286, the winning number "4" is set to "1524" for all settings, and the winning probability is "1524/65536."
Among the winning numbers "0" to "100", the winning number "0" corresponds to not winning, and the winning numbers "1" to "100" correspond to winning any of the roles.
In FIGS. 286 to 299, for example, if the winning number "4" in FIG. The Replay B condition device (FIG. 276) is enabled and Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped.
Note that the setting values are the same as in the other embodiments described above.

Additionally, each number placement table also indicates whether or not a lottery for the advantageous zone (lottery for transition to the advantageous zone) will be held. "○" means that a lottery for the advantageous zone will be held when the winning number is selected, and "?" means that a lottery for the advantageous zone will not be held when the winning number is selected. "-" means that the number is not subject to the lottery (because the number placed is "0") and therefore will not be subject to the lottery for the advantageous zone. Furthermore, in the 37th embodiment, when a lottery for the advantageous zone is held, it is set to have a probability of "1/1" for winning the advantageous zone.
In the 37th embodiment, the drawing of the favorable zone is not performed when there is no winning, or when RBA, RBB, Replay A, 1BB, Replay B, or small win G is won.

Here, for winning numbers that have different winning probabilities for non-internal and internal winning numbers, it is set so that the lottery in the advantageous section is not performed. For this reason, for example, when winning number "3" (replay A) is won, which has different winning probabilities for non-RT non-internal and non-RT internal, the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed.
In addition, when the winning number "4" is activated (1BB is in operation), the winning probability is different between when the RB is not inside and when it is inside the RB (see Figures 294 and 296). At this time, the advantageous section transfer lottery will not be executed.

Similarly, the winning numbers "1" and "2" have different winning probabilities when the accessory is activated (1BB is in operation), when the RB is not inside the RB, and when the RB is inside the RB. At the time of winning, the lottery for shifting to advantageous areas will not be performed.
Furthermore, since the probability of winning the winning number "100" differs between when 1BB is in operation and the RB is in operation (FIG. 299) and in other gaming states, the advantageous section transfer lottery is not executed when the winning number "100" is won.
Furthermore, in the number table for each gaming state, the last part shows the total value of 1BB, replay, and small winning combination.

First, FIGS. 286 and 287 are diagrams showing the numbers of winning numbers "1" to "100" in non-RT and non-internal (1BB non-internal). In non-inside, 1BB (winning numbers ``4'' to ``21'' and ``94'' to ``97'') will be drawn for accessories, but RB (winning numbers ``1'' and ``2'') will be drawn by lottery. Not done. The RB is drawn among the RB non-internals during the 1BB operation, which will be described later.
Furthermore, in non-RT, the winning number "3" (replay A) is not drawn, unlike in RT1, which will be described later. Replay B to Replay S other than Replay A are set to be won in duplicate with 1BB.
In addition, all winning numbers "22" to "93" corresponding to the bells to be pressed are drawn by lottery. Furthermore, small prizes D01 to D04 as rare minor prizes are set to be won in duplicate with 1BB (winning numbers "94" to "97").
Furthermore, the winning numbers "98" and "99" are drawn as rare minor prizes, but the winning number "100" is not drawn. The winning number "100" is drawn only during 1BB operation and RT operation, which will be described later.

FIGS. 288 and 289 are diagrams showing the numbers placed in RT1 and non-internal. The difference between RT1 and non-internal is that the winning number "3" (Replay A) is drawn. Also, since the number "3638" corresponding to the non-winning probability for non-RT and non-internals is the winning number for the winning number "3", the non-winning probability for RT1 and non-internals is "0". be.
FIG. 290 and FIG. 291 are diagrams showing the number of non-RTs and inside 1BB. If 1BB is inside, 1BB will not be drawn, so winning numbers "4" to "21" will be single wins in the replay. Similarly, the winning numbers "94" to "97" are single winnings of the small winning combination D. The winning numbers "4" to "21" and "94" to "97" are the same in non-RT non-internal and 1BB internal.
In addition, when winning numbers "4" to "21" or "94" to "97" are won internally, the condition device corresponding to the winning number is activated while the 1BB condition device is activated. do. Therefore, there is a combination of conditional devices that operate when the winning numbers "4" to "21" or "94" to "97" are won in non-internal situations, and a conditional device that operates when the winning numbers are won in internal situations. The combinations are the same.

FIGS. 292 and 293 are diagrams showing the numbers placed inside RT1 and 1BB. Similarly to the above, winning numbers "4" to "21" are single wins for replays, and winning numbers "94" to "97" are single wins for small role D. The winning numbers "4" to "21" and "94" to "97" are the same in non-internal portions of RT1 and in internal portions of 1BB.
FIGS. 294 and 295 are diagrams showing the numbers set when 1BB is in operation and RB is not inside. While 1BB is in operation, 1BB and Replay are not drawn, so all winning numbers "3" to "21" are set to "0". Furthermore, among RB non-internals, RBA and RBB are drawn by lottery. Furthermore, the number of winning numbers "22" to "100" corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination is the same as in the 1BB when the 1BB is not activated. Furthermore, the non-winning probability is "0".

FIGS. 296 and 297 are diagrams showing the numbers set during 1BB operation and inside RB (RT2). Since the RB is not drawn when it is inside the RB, the numbers set for the winning numbers "1" and "2" are both "0". Also, unlike RB non-internal matches, all replays (single winnings) are drawn by lottery (winning numbers "3" to "21"). Here, the numbers set for the winning numbers "3" and "4" differ by "1" from those in RT1 and 1BB. Furthermore, the winning numbers "22" to "100" corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination are the same as when 1BB is in operation and RB is not inside. Furthermore, the non-winning probability is "0".
FIG. 298 and FIG. 299 are diagrams showing the number of settings during 1BB operation and RB operation. In this gaming state, only winning numbers "99" and "100" are drawn. The probability of not winning is "17291/65536".

Next, RT transition in the 37th embodiment will be explained.
FIG. 300 is a diagram showing RT transition in the 37th embodiment. First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, it shifts to non-RT. "RWM initialization" here indicates initialization of the entire range of the RWM 53, and includes information on winning 1BB and the RT status. When the data in the RT state is initialized, it becomes "0", but when the data in the RT state is "0", it corresponds to non-RT.
The first non-RT is non-RT and 1BB non-internal. While it is not RT and 1BB is not inside, it is maintained until the push order bell is won and the pattern symbol combination stops, or until 1BB is won. If you win 1BB before the pattern symbol combination stops while it is non-RT and not inside 1BB, it becomes non-RT and inside 1BB, and even if the pattern symbol combination appears in this non-RT and inside 1BB, it will not be RT1. will not migrate.

On the other hand, when a pattern symbol combination appears before winning 1BB during non-RT and non-1BB, the game moves to RT1 and non-1BB. When the game moves to RT1, it will not move to non-RT unless you play 1BB. And when the game wins 1BB during RT1 and non-1BB, the game moves to RT1 and 1BB.
When not in RT and within 1BB, and when in RT1 and within 1BB, this is maintained until 1BB is won.

Here, since the probability of winning 1BB among non-RT and non-internal 1BB is the set number "16682" as described above (see FIG. 287), the winning probability is relatively early.
On the other hand, the total value of the winning numbers of the pressing order bells (the winning numbers "22" to "93" are "45216", and the proportion of pattern symbol combinations appearing among them is:
0 x 1/6 + 1/6 x 1/2 + 1/3 x 7/8 + 1/3 x 7/8
≒0.667
It is.
Therefore,
The rate of winning the push order bell and the pattern symbol combination appearing (number equivalent value) is
45216×0.667
≒30159
becomes.

Therefore, "rate of pattern symbol combination appearing"/(rate of pattern symbol appearing + rate of winning 1BB)
=30159/(30159+16682)
≒0.644
becomes.
Therefore, among non-RT and 1BB non-internal, about 64% of the time it is RT1 and 1BB non-internal, and about 36% of the time it is non-RT and 1BB internal.

When 1BB is won in non-RT and inside 1BB, or in RT1 and inside 1BB, the game shifts to 1BB operation. When 1BB is in operation, initially, 1BB is in operation and RB is not internal. When 1BB is activated and RB is not inside, RB is drawn by lottery. When the RB is won, 1BB is activated and the RB is inside, and this gaming state becomes RT2. Then, in RT2, when RB wins, 1BB is activated and RB is activated.
As shown in FIG. 275, the 1BB operation ends with the payout of more than 218 medals. Furthermore, when 1BB is in operation and RB is in operation, the game ends after winning 8 or 12 times. When the termination conditions for 1BB operation and RB operation are satisfied, and the termination conditions for 1BB operation are not satisfied, the process shifts to 1BB operation and RB non-internal state again.
When the condition for ending the 1BB operation is satisfied in the 1BB operation, the 1BB operation is ended and the state shifts to non-RT.

Fig. 301 is a diagram showing the indication function in the 37th embodiment. In the 37th embodiment, the indication monitor uses one 7-segment display. Therefore, the indication monitor may use the lower digits of the acquisition number display LED 78 as in the other embodiments described above, or may be a dedicated display provided separately.
The instruction function is activated (the instruction monitor is turned on) when the start switch 41 is operated. More specifically, it is activated when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery for a winning combination is executed, a winning number is determined, and it is determined that the activation condition for the instruction function is satisfied in the game.
Furthermore, the operation of the instruction function ends (the instruction monitor goes off) after a complete stop (which corresponds here to the time when all stop switches 42 are released from the player's fingers).

The push order instruction numbers include "A1" to "A7". "A1" to "A6" correspond to "123 (left middle right)" to "321 (right middle left)" in the six selection pressing order. For example, when the small win A01 condition device is activated, the push order instruction number "A1" is selected, and the push order instruction information "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor.
For example, when the push order instruction number "A1" is selected and the push order instruction information "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, the sub display content (the content displayed on the image display device 23) is "1. 2, 3" or "left, middle, right."

In addition, the push order instruction number "A7" is the push order instruction number when winning 1BB in a game when the small role D1 to D4 condition device is activated when AT is executed in non-RT and inside 1BB. , and "7" is displayed on the instruction monitor.
As shown in FIG. 285, when the small win D1 condition device is activated, 1BB is displayed at the maximum except for the left first stop. In addition, when the small winning combination D2 condition device is activated, 1BB becomes the maximum display except for the middle first stop. Furthermore, when the small winning combination D3 condition device is activated, 1BB becomes the maximum display other than the push order 312. Furthermore, when the small winning combination D4 condition device is activated, 1BB becomes the maximum display other than the push order 321.
Therefore, when winning 1BB when the minor role D1 condition device is activated, "7" is displayed on the instruction monitor and the sub-display content is a reverse press ("←" is displayed). Suggest (inform). On the other hand, when the small winning combination D2 to small winning combination D4 condition device is activated, "7" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and a forward push ("→" is displayed) is suggested as the sub-display content. Furthermore, in addition to the above display, a suggestion (notification) by voice and/or display such as "Aim!" may be performed.

FIG. 302 is a diagram showing an example of an image display when the small role D condition device is activated during execution of AT in non-RT (when 1BB is not activated) and an attempt is made to win 1BB.
In the example of FIG. 302, first, the winning symbol combination of 1BB, "Bell B (upper left row)" - "Watermelon B (middle middle row)" - "Bell A (lower right row)" is displayed.
Further, on the left side, the symbol arrangement of the reels 31 of the gaming machine is displayed as an image, and the position of the symbol to be aimed at for each reel 31 is displayed as an image. In this example, the left reel 31 is number 12 (Bell B), the middle reel 31 is either number 4 or 14 (Watermelon B), and the right reel 31 is number 5, 10, 15, or 0. This indicates that you should aim for (Bell A). In addition, in FIG. 302, the symbols on the symbol array of the reel 31 are shown only by numbers, but in reality, the symbols are displayed.
Furthermore, in the case of executing the notification to encourage winning of 1BB, when the small winning combination D1 condition device is activated, a reverse push arrow is displayed as an image along with the words "Please aim". On the other hand, when the small role D2 to minor role D4 condition device is activated, the words "Please aim" are displayed along with an image of an arrow for pressing the order.

In the 37th embodiment, both the non-RT and the RT1 execute the AT lottery, and when they win the AT lottery, they execute the AT after a predetermined number of games have been played. The initial number of AT games is determined when the AT is won or when the AT is started, and the number of AT games is added during the AT. Details regarding the AT lottery method and the like will be omitted in the 37th embodiment.
During AT, when the small winning combination A01 to small winning combination C24 condition device is activated, the correct pressing order for winning the 7-card winning combination is announced. To notify the push order, on the main control board 50 side, the push order instruction information shown in FIG. 301 is displayed on the instruction monitor by activating the instruction function. Further, on the sub-control board 80 side, the image display device 23 displays an image of the correct pressing order (such as "1, 2, 3" or "left, middle, right").

When it is not RT and not 1BB internal, 1BB can be won when the winning numbers "4" to "21" in Figures 286 and 287 are won (when 1BB and replay are both won), and when the winning numbers "94" to "97" are won (when 1BB and small win D are both won).
In a game in which the winning numbers "4" to "21" are won during a non-RT and non-1BB internal game (a game in which 1BB and a replay are both won), the replay always wins, and there is no case in which 1BB wins. Also, in this game, there is no case in which the instruction function is activated or a specific push order is suggested on the image display device 23.

In non-RT and 1BB internal play, when the role is not won (when the winning number is "0"), the only condition device that is in operation is 1BB, so 1BB can be won in that game. However, since the symbol combination of 1BB is "PB ≠ 1", 1BB will not be won unless you press the button carefully. Also, in non-RT and 1BB internal play, when the role is not won, if you aim for the symbol combination of 1BB, you can win 1BB, regardless of the order in which you press the stop switch 42.
In a non-RT and 1BB internal game, when 1BB is won when no winning combination is obtained, the game shifts to 1BB operation, and when 1BB is not won, the non-RT and 1BB internal game continues even after the next game.
In non-RT and 1BB internal play, when the combination is not a winning combination, the operation information of the stop switch 42 for avoiding the winning of 1BB, etc. is not notified. However, in non-RT and 1BB internal play when the combination is not a winning combination (a game in which 1BB can be won), a performance (for example, a reel flash, etc.) suggesting that 1BB can be won may be executed.

In addition, in non-RT (non-internal or internal), when the small win D condition device is activated (when winning numbers "94" to "97" are won), 1BB may be won. As shown in FIG. 285, for example, firstly, when the small win D1 condition device is activated, if the left first stop is "PB=1", any of the small win 025 to 040 (1 card win) will be won. This is because 1BB will be displayed at its maximum when the prize is won, but when the first stop is in the middle or on the right.
In this case, the content of the notification differs depending on whether the game is in AT mode or not.

In non-RT, when AT is not being executed, when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, the pressing order for winning a 1-card winning combination is notified in order to avoid winning a 1BB winning combination. For example, when the small prize D1 condition device is activated, the left first stop is notified. Specifically, the main control board 50 selects either the push order instruction number "A1" or "A2" in FIG. 301. An example of a selection method is to select "A1" or "A2" by lottery with a probability of 50%. Then, press order instruction information corresponding to the selected press order instruction number is displayed on the instruction monitor (operation of instruction function).
Further, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number. For example, when the selected push order instruction number is "A1", the sub control board 80 displays the push order ("1, 2, 3", "left, middle, right", etc.) on the image display device 23. Display the image.

In addition, in non-RT, when the AT is not being executed and the minor role D2 condition device is activated, a middle first stop is notified to avoid winning 1BB. Specifically, the main control board 50 selects either the push order instruction number "A3" or "A4" in FIG. 301. As a method of selection, it is possible to select by lottery as described above. Then, push order instruction information corresponding to the selected push order instruction number is displayed on the instruction monitor (operation of the instruction function), and the image display device 23 displays an image of the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number.

Furthermore, in non-RT, when AT is not being executed, when the small winning combination D3 condition device is activated, the push order "312" is notified in order to avoid winning 1BB. Specifically, the main control board 50 selects the push order instruction number "A5" in FIG. 301. Then, the push order instruction information "5" corresponding to the selected push order instruction number "A5" is displayed on the instruction monitor (operation of the instruction function), and the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number "A5" is displayed on the image display device 23. "312" is displayed as an image.

Further, in non-RT, when AT is not being executed, when the small winning combination D4 condition device is activated, the push order "321" is notified in order to avoid winning 1BB. Specifically, the main control board 50 selects the push order instruction number "A6" in FIG. 301. Then, the push order instruction information "6" corresponding to the selected push order instruction number "A6" is displayed on the instruction monitor (operation of the instruction function), and the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number "A6" is displayed on the image display device 23. Display “321” as an image.
As described above, in non-RT, when AT is not in progress, when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated to notify the pressing order for winning a 1-card winning combination. If the stop switch 42 is operated in accordance with the order, 1BB, which has a winning number, will not win in the game.

On the other hand, in non-RT, when AT is being executed and the small role D condition device is activated, in order to win 1BB, there is a production that suggests the push order to win 1BB (the operation mode for winning 1BB is perform a performance that is understandable to the public.
Here, in non-RT, if the small role D condition device is activated after winning the AT and before the AT is executed (during the AT precursor), an effect that suggests the push order to win 1BB will be executed. Whether or not to do so is optional. If an effect indicating the push order to win 1BB is executed during the AT precursor, the player can know that the AT has been won (that the AT will be executed from now on). Therefore, if you want to avoid players from knowing about the winning of AT, after the start of AT, in a game where the small role D condition device is activated, you can perform an effect that suggests the push order to win 1BB. . Alternatively, if a performance suggesting the push order for winning 1BB is executed during the AT precursor and the performance is used as an AT winning confirmation performance, the performance may be output during the AT precursor.

As a method of executing an effect suggesting the pressing sequence to win 1BB when the small win D condition device is activated, the content shown in Figure 302 described above is displayed as an image.
In this case, the push order instruction number "A7" is selected, and "7" is displayed on the instruction monitor in FIG. 301.
In non-RT, when an AT is being executed, if 1BB is won when the small win D condition device is activated, 1BB will be activated and the AT will start from the next game.

In addition, since the total number of winning numbers "94" to "97" is "7360" (the winning probability is about "11.2"), in most cases, one of the winning numbers "94" to "97" will be won during the AT, and the opportunity to win 1BB will be given. However, if the winning numbers "94" to "97" are not won during the AT, the AT will be executed without RT.
Furthermore, even if the AT is being executed without RT, the number of non-winning combinations is "3638", so when the game becomes a non-winning combination, there is a possibility that 1BB will be won. Even during the AT, in a game where the combination is not won, no performance is executed that suggests that 1BB will be won, but if 1BB is won, the game will proceed in the same manner as above, with 1BB in operation and in the AT state.
However, in a game in which the winning combination during the AT is not won, a performance suggesting that 1BB will be won (such as the reel flash described above) may be executed. This is because the earlier the transition from non-RT to RT1 (via 1BB game) is made, the more advantageous it will be for the player in the long run.

Regardless of whether AT is in progress or not, when the operation of 1BB ends, it transitions to non-RT and non-internal 1BB. If the pattern symbol combination stops before winning 1BB, it transitions to RT1 and non-internal 1BB, and if 1BB is won after that, it transitions to RT1 and internal 1BB.
In contrast, if 1BB is won before the pattern symbol combination stops, the state becomes non-RT and inside 1BB, and thereafter, the state becomes non-RT and inside 1BB until the AT is won and 1BB is won based on the execution of the AT.

Moreover, as mentioned above, the ball payout rate is different between non-RT and inside 1BB and RT1 and inside 1BB. Therefore, after finishing the 1BB operation and moving to non-RT, there will be an advantage/disadvantage in the payout rate depending on whether the ball is moved to non-RT and inside 1BB, or whether it is moved to RT1 and inside 1BB. Specifically, the ball payout rate is lower in non-RT than in RT1.
Therefore, in the 37th embodiment, in order to bring the ball payout rate close to that of RT1 and 1BB inside when it is non-RT and inside 1BB, when the push order bell is won (when the small winning combination A01 to small winning combination C24 condition device is activated) The correct press order is notified at a predetermined rate (instruction function is activated).
In addition, in non-RT, there is a non-winning of the winning combination, and in non-RT and non-AT, it is necessary to keep an eye on the winning combination to avoid winning the 1BB when the winning combination is not won. Therefore, in order to encourage the transition from non-RT to RT1, when AT is started in non-RT, an instruction is given to win 1BB in a game where 1BB can be won.
Note that the number set inside RB while 1BB is in operation is approximately the same as the number set inside RT1 and 1BB. Therefore, if AT is executed while 1BB is in operation and inside RB, the same ball payout as when AT is executed while RT1 and 1BB is inside can be obtained.

Here, the ball payout rate and the like in non-RT and RT1 will be explained.
For non-RTs, as mentioned above, the non-winning probability is "3638/65536". On the other hand, the non-winning probability in RT1 is "0". Furthermore, the probability of winning a small winning combination is the same for non-RT and RT1. Therefore, the ball payout rate is higher in RT1 than in non-RT.
Here, the "ball output rate" is defined as "number of out coins/number of in coins" as in the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment. The "number of coins in" refers to the number of coins bet (specified number), and is "3" when the accessory is not activated.

Furthermore, the "number of coins out" refers to the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out. For example, when the pressing order bell is won, it is assumed that the correct pressing order is at a rate of "1/6" and a winning combination of 7 cards is won. In addition, if the first stop is correct and the second stop is incorrect (ratio ``1/6''), a 1-card winning combination will be won at a ``1/2'' ratio, and a winning combination will be missed at a ``1/2'' ratio. shall be. Furthermore, in the case of an incorrect answer at the first stop (ratio ``2/3''), it is assumed that a one-card winning combination is won at a ratio ``1/8'' and is lost at a ratio ``7/8.''

Furthermore, when the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the first method is to set the number of out pieces in the current game to ``0'' and the number of in pieces in the next game to ``0''. A second method is to set the number of coins out in the current game to "3" and the number of coins in for the next game to be "3". In the example below, the latter is used for calculation.
Furthermore, although the ball payout rate differs depending on settings 1 to 6, the ball payout rate is calculated using setting 1 as an example.

The expected value of the number of coins to be paid out for non-RT is as follows.
(a) Expected number of coins paid out based on replay 8978/65536
(b) Expected number of coins to be paid out based on pressing order bell 45216/65536 x (7 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/2 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8)
(c) Expected number of payouts based on small role D 1840/65536×1×4
It should be noted that when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, it is assumed that the 1-card winning combination is "PB=1" and a prize is won.
(d) Expected number of payouts based on minor role E and minor role F 340/65536×1+4/65536×7
It should be noted that when the small winning combination E condition device is activated, it is assumed that the 1-card winning combination is "PB=1" and a prize is won.
From the above, the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out in non-RT is approximately "1.4488".
Therefore, the ball payout rate is
1.4488/3≒0.4829 (48.29%)
becomes.

On the other hand, in RT1, only the replay winning probability is different.
In RT1, the expected value of the number of coins paid out based on replay is:
12616/65536
It is.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out in RT1 is approximately "1.6153".
Therefore, the ball payout rate is
1.6153/3≒0.5384 (53.84%)
becomes.

Also, the difference in the expected number of payouts between RT1 and non-RT is as follows:
1.6153-1.4488=0.1665
becomes.
Therefore, in order to increase the expected value of the number of coins paid out by "0.1665" when the push order bell is won, if the correct push order is announced once every x times,
45216/65536×7×1/x=0.1665
All you have to do is satisfy.

In addition, the above calculation formula cannot calculate an exact value to make the non-RT ball payout rate and the RT1 ball payout rate the same (if the probability of the correct button press sequence is high, the probability of the incorrect button press sequence will be low accordingly, so this amount must be subtracted from the probability of the incorrect button press sequence), but in order to simplify the calculation formula, an approximate value will be calculated.
Therefore,
x ≒ 29
It becomes.
In other words, if the correct button press sequence is announced once in 29 times (approximately 3.45%) when the button press bell is won, it is possible to make the expected number of payout coins (ball payout rate) approximately the same in non-RT and RT1.

Therefore, in the 37th embodiment, in RT1 and outside of 1BB, unless AT is in progress, the correct pressing order is not announced (the instruction function is not activated) when the pressing order bell is won. On the other hand, in non-RT and non-inside 1BB, the correct pressing order is notified (the instruction function is activated) at a rate of about 3.45%.
In addition, in order to control in this way, for example, when the push order bell is won, a lottery with a probability of winning of about 3.45% is executed, and when the lottery is won, the correct answer press order is announced. .

Secondly, since the total number of push order bells is "45216" as mentioned above, it is possible to set it in advance to notify the correct push order for a number equivalent to "1560", which is approximately 3.45% of that.
For example, since the combined value of the number of small wins B24, "1520", and the total value of small wins C15 to C24, "10 x 4", is "1560", it is possible to set it in advance so that the correct button press order is notified when small win B24 and small wins C15 to C24 are won.

In the 37th embodiment, when it becomes RT1 and 1BB inside, it is assumed that the game is played without winning 1BB and with 1BB inside.
Further, within RT1 and 1BB, the non-winning probability is "0" as described above, so there is no case where 1BB wins based on the winning combination. Among RT1 and 1BB, 1BB has a possibility of winning when the small win D condition device is activated. Therefore, when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, the pressing order is to prevent winning of 1BB, and the pressing order to win winning of 1 winning combination (PB=1) is notified. This point is the same as during non-RT.

In addition, when a pattern symbol combination stops while not in RT and not inside 1BB, after it becomes RT1 and not inside 1BB, the following occurs.
First, in a game in which the winning numbers "4" to "21" are won during RT1 and not within 1BB (a game in which 1BB and replay are both won), the replay always wins and there is no case in which the 1BB wins. Also, in this game, there is no case in which the instruction function is activated or a specific pressing order is suggested on the image display device 23. Therefore, in this game, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the replay always wins and there is no case in which the 1BB wins. Then, from the next game, it will be RT1 and within 1BB.
In addition, in a game in which the winning numbers "94" to "97" are won during RT1 and not inside 1BB (a game in which 1BB and small win D are both won), a button press sequence is instructed to avoid winning 1BB, so if the button press sequence is followed, there is no chance of winning 1BB.

As described above, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the following is performed as the operation of the instruction function and the suggestion of the order of pressing. Note that the operation of the instruction function and the presentation suggesting the push order can be executed only during the advantageous section, and the operation of the instruction function and the presentation suggesting the push order cannot be executed during the non-advantageous section (normal section). In the following, it is assumed that the instruction function is activated and the push order suggestion presentation is executed in an advantageous section.
(1) During non-RT a) During non-AT When the small winning combination D condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated in order to win a 1-card winning combination (not to win a 1BB winning combination), and the press order for winning a 1-card winning combination is notified. .
In addition, when the small winning combination A1 to small winning combination C24 condition device is activated, in order to get the ball payout rate close to RT1, the instruction function is activated at a predetermined rate (in the above example, once every 29 times), and a 7-card winning combination is activated. Notify the order in which to press the button. However, as will be described later, there may be cases where the instruction function is not activated.
b) During AT When the small winning combination A1 to small winning combination C24 condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated to notify the pressing order to win the 7-card winning combination. However, as will be described later, there may be cases where the instruction function is not activated.
Further, when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, a push order suggestion effect for winning 1BB is executed (this may be executed during the AT precursor). In this case, "7" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

(2) During RT1 a) During non-AT When the small winning combination D condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated in order to win a 1-card winning combination (not to win a 1BB winning combination), and notifies the pressing order for winning a 1-card winning combination.
b) During AT When the small winning combination A1 to small winning combination C24 condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated to notify the pressing order to win the 7-card winning combination. However, as will be described later, there may be cases where the instruction function is not activated.
Further, when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, an instruction function is activated to win a 1-card winning combination (not to win a 1BB winning combination), and the pressing order for winning a 1-card winning combination is notified.

The instruction-inclusive accessory ratio needs to be less than 70% in 175,000 games. Therefore, if the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio in 175,000 games is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 68% or more), the push order indicator will change until the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio reaches the predetermined ratio (for example, less than 65%). An example of this is not executing the instruction function at the time of winning.
Alternatively, a conditional device is provided such that when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct order, a 1 piece small winning combination or a 3 piece small winning combination is won, and the proportion of the designated winning parts is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 68% or higher). ), the instruction function is not activated for a 7-card combination, but the instruction function may be activated when a conditional device that makes it possible to win a 1-card combination or a 3-card combination is activated.
In addition, if the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio is more than a predetermined value (for example, 68% or more), the instruction function will not be activated, but for example, when the small role A1 condition device is activated, an image will be displayed as "1・?・?" However, it is possible to carry out a notification that increases the probability of winning a 7-card combination compared to the case where the instruction function is not activated.

If the specifications are set as in the 37th embodiment, the replay winning probability can be set low even within 1BB. As a result, the probability of winning the push order bell can be increased accordingly, so that the gaming machine can have a high instantaneous winning rate.
In addition, when the small role D condition device is activated, it is possible to avoid winning a 1BB by activating the instruction function, so it is easier to avoid winning a 1BB compared to a specification that avoids winning a 1BB by pressing the eyes. can. However, when compared with the 38th embodiment described later, the possibility that 1BB will be won by mistake is higher than in the 38th embodiment.

Note that, as is clear from the thirty-seventh embodiment, the instruction function may be activated even during non-AT. On the other hand, the instruction function may not be activated even during AT.
Therefore, "non-AT" is not necessarily a gaming state in which the instruction function is not activated. Similarly, "AT" is not necessarily a gaming state that activates the instruction function.
However, it is clear that during non-AT, when a winning number that enables the instruction function to be activated is won, the proportion of the instruction function not being activated is higher than the proportion of the instruction function being activated.
Similarly, during AT, when a winning number that allows the instruction function to be activated is won, it is clear that the proportion of the instruction function being activated is higher than the proportion of not operating the instruction function.
Here, the above-mentioned "ratio of activating (not activating) the instruction function" particularly indicates the ratio when the small winning combination A to small winning combination C condition device is activated (when the push order bell is won).
In other words, the ratio (100%) of activating the instruction function to avoid winning 1BB when the small role D condition device is activated in a non-AT, and the rate (100%) of activating the instruction function when the minor role D condition device is activated in an AT. 100%) is the same. Here, in AT and RT1, when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated to avoid winning 1BB. On the other hand, in non-RT and AT, when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated to encourage winning of 1BB.

In addition, the rate at which the indication function is activated in non-AT is not always constant, and in the 37th embodiment, the rate at which the indication function is activated is higher in non-RT than in RT1. Specifically, in RT1, the rate at which the indication function is activated when the small role A to small role C condition device is activated in non-AT is "0" as a rule. On the other hand, in non-RT and non-AT, the indication function is activated at a predetermined rate (in the above example, about once in 29 times) when the small role A to small role C condition device is activated.
It should be noted that the above interpretation does not include extremely rare cases in which the ratio of instruction-containing devices over 175,000 plays has always been at a predetermined value (for example, 68% or more), and therefore the instruction function can hardly be activated even during the AT.

The non-AT of the thirty-seventh embodiment as described above (a state in which the proportion of not operating the instruction function is higher than the proportion of activating the instruction function when a winning number that allows the instruction function to be activated is won) is defined as `` This state may also be referred to as "first notification control state".
Further, the AT of the 37th embodiment (a state in which the proportion of operating the instruction function is higher than the proportion of not operating the instruction function when a winning number capable of activating the instruction function is won) is defined as "second notification". Sometimes referred to as "control state".
In any case, in the 37th embodiment, "non-AT" is a gaming state that has both a case where the instruction function is not activated and a case where the instruction function is activated. Similarly, "AT" is a gaming state that has both a case where the instruction function is not activated and a case where the instruction function is activated.

<38th embodiment>
In the 38th embodiment, in the first game of the advantageous section, it is confirmed which RT the current RT is, and a decision regarding AT (preferential treatment, cold treatment, etc.) is executed according to the RT. In the following example, the "decision related to AT (preferential treatment, preferential treatment, etc.)" is related to the number of AT ceiling games.
In the 38th embodiment, an AT ceiling game count is provided. Here, the "AT ceiling number of games" refers to the maximum (upper limit) number of games that can be reached without winning an AT in a non-AT in an advantageous section. When the number of AT ceiling games is reached in a non-AT, it is decided to execute AT (here, it means "first stage AT" which will be described later), and the (first stage) AT is activated. Furthermore, when the AT ceiling number of games is reached, the AT (first stage) may be activated immediately, or the AT (first stage) may be activated via a sign of the predetermined number of games. Good too.
Further, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, the AT includes a first stage AT and a second stage AT. The first stage AT is an AT that is selected by lottery when 1BB is not activated. Then, when the first stage AT is won and the game moves to the 1BB game, the first stage AT is executed during the 1BB game and the second stage AT is drawn by lottery during the 1BB game. The first stage AT ends with the end of the 1BB game. When the second stage AT is won, the second stage AT is executed when the 1BB is not activated after the 1BB game ends.

FIG. 303 is an RT transition diagram in the 38th embodiment.
Here, in the 37th embodiment, only when the gaming state is non-RT, 1BB is allowed to be won after AT is executed, but 1BB is not allowed to be won when the player is staying in RT1.
On the other hand, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, within 1BB (RT2 in FIG. 303), when it is an advantageous section and the first stage AT has not been won, 1BB is not allowed to win. For example, similar to the 37th embodiment, when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, the pressing order that does not allow winning of 1BB is notified.
On the other hand, when winning the first stage AT in 1BB (RT2 in Figure 303), win 1BB no matter which RT you stay in and execute the first stage AT in the 1BB game. . Furthermore, during an AT and 1BB game (particularly during RT3, which will be described later in RB), whether to execute the second stage AT is determined by lottery or the like. Then, when winning the lottery, the second stage AT is executed at RT1 or RT2 after the 1BB game ends. On the other hand, when the lottery is not won, the first stage AT ends at the end of the 1BB game. That is, in this case, the process does not proceed to the second stage AT.

As shown in FIG. 303, the RTs when 1BB is not in operation (during normal play) include non-RT, RT1, and RT2. Non-RT is a play state (a type of RT) which is entered after RWM initialization, and RT1 is an RT not inside 1BB which is entered after 1BB play ends. RT2 is an RT inside 1BB which is entered when 1BB is won in non-RT or RT1.

When 1BB is won in RT2, the game shifts to 1BB operation and RB non-internal state. In the 1BB game of the 38th embodiment, a general game is first executed, and an RB lottery is executed in this general game. If you win RB, you will move to RT3 (1BB activated and RB inside). Then, when the RB that carries over winning wins, the system shifts to 1BB operation and RB operation.
The 1BB operation is set when the number of coins acquired in the 1BB game reaches a predetermined number. Further, the RB operation ends after two games or two winnings, and if the 1BB operation termination condition is not satisfied at the end of the RB operation, the RB operation shifts to 1BB operation and RB non-internal state again.
When the conditions for ending the 1BB operation are met, the 1BB operation is ended and the process moves to RT1 (RT after 1BB). If you win 1BB in RT1, move to RT2.

Although the description of the type and number of condition devices in the thirty-eighth embodiment will be omitted, it is possible to use the same condition devices and number of conditions as described in the thirty-seventh embodiment, for example.
For example, in FIG. 303, the number of non-RTs (RT after RWM initialization) may be set to the numbers shown in FIGS. 286 and 287. Further, in FIG. 303, the number of RT1 (RT after 1BB) may be set to the number shown in FIGS. 288 and 289. Furthermore, in FIG. 303, the number of RT2 (RT inside 1BB) may be set to the number shown in FIGS. 292 and 293.

Furthermore, in FIG. 303, the numbers set during 1BB operation and RB non-internal may be set to the numbers shown in FIGS. 294 and 295.
In addition, in FIG. 303, the setting number of RT3 (1BB operating and inside RB) may be set to the setting number shown in FIGS. 296 and 297.
Furthermore, in FIG. 303, the numbers for 1BB operation and RB operation may be the numbers shown in FIGS. 298 and 299.

In the 38th embodiment, when AT is won in non-RT or RT1, the player waits until 1BB is won.
Further, in RT2, when the first stage AT is not won, when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated to avoid winning 1BB as in the 37th embodiment.
When the first stage AT is won, when the small role D condition device is activated, a performance suggesting a 1BB win (a performance that allows the player to understand the operation mode for winning the 1BB) is executed. .
The same thing applies when you win AT in non-RT or RT1 and then win 1BB.

In addition, when 1BB is activated and the second stage AT is won while inside RB (RT3), 1BB play ends and transitions to RT1, and the second stage AT is executed in this RT1, even if 1BB is won during execution of the second stage AT and transitions to RT2, the effect for winning 1BB will not be output when the small win D condition device is activated, and the instruction function will be activated to avoid winning 1BB, just as when the first stage AT is not won.

In the 38th embodiment, even if the power is turned on/off or the settings are changed, the winning information of 1BB is not deleted. Therefore, even if the power is turned on/off or the settings are changed, it will not shift to non-RT. The transition to non-RT after factory shipment is limited to when the entire range of the storage area of the RWM 53 is initialized when an unintended event occurs, such as when the RWM 53 is inserted or removed. Note that when the RWM 53 is inserted or removed, the entire range of the storage area of the RWM 53 including setting value information is initialized as a countermeasure against misbehavior.
In this embodiment, the main CPU 55, RWM 53, and ROM 54 in FIG. erased). Therefore, if the entire range of the storage area of the RWM 53 has been initialized, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as a fraudulent act has been committed.

FIG. 304 is a time chart showing the relationship between RT transition, the start and end of the advantageous section, and the presence or absence of AT winning in the 38th embodiment.
In the example of the RT transition diagram shown in FIG. 303, when the RB wins while 1BB is active and inside the RB (RT3), it is shown that the RB moves to the 1BB and RB inside (RT3). To continue a game with 1BB operating and RB inside without winning a prize.

In addition, as mentioned above, if the first stage AT lottery is executed in an advantageous section and 1BB is not activated (non-RT, RT1, or RT2) and the first stage AT lottery is won, 1BB will be won. Then, the game is shifted to a 1BB game, and a second stage AT lottery is executed inside the RB of the 1BB game. When winning the second stage AT lottery, the second stage AT starts at RT1 after the end of the 1BB game. On the other hand, when the second stage AT lottery is not won within the RB of the 1BB game, the first stage AT ends with the end of the 1BB game (1BB operation), and the second stage AT is not executed.

In FIG. 304, "non-advantageous" refers to a non-advantageous zone (normal zone). Similarly, "advantageous" refers to an advantageous zone. In addition, in the example of FIG. 304, for the sake of simplicity, if the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the first game in the non-advantageous zone and a transition to the advantageous zone is determined, the next game will be the advantageous zone. However, in reality, in the non-advantageous zone, the advantageous zone transition lottery is held based on the winning combination in the game, so it is not necessarily the case that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the first game in the non-advantageous zone.
In the normal route, the only time it becomes a non-RT is when it is first shipped from the factory. The first game of a non-RT is a non-advantageous zone, but if the favorable zone transition lottery is won in the first game and a transition to the favorable zone is decided, the second game will transition to the favorable zone. Also, if 1BB is won in a non-RT, the next game will transition to RT2 (RT within 1BB). Then, if the first stage AT lottery is won in RT2, 1BB will be won. If 1BB is won, the game will transition to a non-RB within 1BB game. In a non-RB within 1BB game, the second stage AT lottery is not executed in this example. If RB is won and the game transitions to the RB within 1BB game, the second stage AT lottery is executed.
Within the RB in a 1BB game, FIG. 304 illustrates four types of routes: route A, route B, route C, and route E.

Route A shows an example in which the second stage AT is won during RB in 1BB play. In this case, when 1BB play ends and a transition to RT1 occurs, the second stage AT begins. In this example, 1BB is won during the second stage AT, a transition to RT2 occurs, and then the second stage AT ends in RT2. When the second stage AT ends in RT2, the advantageous zone ends at the same time. Then, in the next play, a favorable zone transition lottery is executed again, and when the favorable zone transition lottery is won and a transition to the advantageous zone is determined, a transition to the advantageous zone occurs.
In the 38th embodiment, when the advantageous zone is intentionally ended, as shown in Figures 149 and 150 (23rd embodiment), preparation for ending the advantageous zone (M_ADVEND_STBY) is executed in the game end processing in the main game state, and "1" is stored in the advantageous zone clear counter. As a result, in the advantageous zone clear counter management, the advantageous zone clear counter value after subtraction becomes "0", and the advantageous zone end processing (initialization of the RWM area related to the instruction function (for example, memory area for the main game state, difference number counter, etc.)) is executed.
In the case of route A, the first game in the advantageous zone is an example in which RT2 is selected. When the first game in the advantageous zone is RT2, the number of AT ceiling games is set high (for example, to "777" games).

Route B shows an example (1) when the second stage AT is not won within the RB of a 1BB game. In this case, even if the 1BB game ends and the game moves to RT1, the second stage AT does not start. Then, when the AT of the second stage is not won within the RB of the 1BB game, a lottery at the end of the advantageous section is executed. Route B is an example in which the lottery at the end of the advantageous section was not won. In this case, as shown in route B, the advantageous section ends when 1BB is won in RT1 (at the end of RT1). Then, in the first game of RT2 of the next game, an advantageous section transfer lottery is executed, and when the advantageous section transfer lottery is won and transfer to the advantageous section is determined, the transfer is made to the advantageous section. In this case, like route A, the first game in the advantageous section is RT2, so the number of AT ceiling games is the same as route A (eg, "777" game).

Route C shows an example (2) when the second stage AT is not won within the RB of the 1BB game.
Routes B and C both show examples where the second stage of AT is not won within the RB of a 1BB game, but route C, for example, executes a production in which the main character loses in a special way. This is an example in which a person wins a lottery to decide whether or not to play, and the performance is executed. In such a case, the AT ceiling game count is set to be given preferential treatment. Here, there is a flag (AT ceiling preferential treatment flag) for determining whether to give preferential treatment to the number of AT ceiling games. When a special performance such as is executed, the AT ceiling preferential treatment flag is turned on.

In route C, as in route B, the AT does not start even if the 1BB game ends and the game moves to RT1. However, in route C, the AT ceiling preferential flag is on, so the advantageous zone is set to end when the 1BB game ends. In other words, when the AT ceiling preferential flag is off, the advantageous zone is set to be maintained when the 1BB game ends.
After the 1BB play ends, the game moves to RT1. In the first play of this RT1, a lottery for moving to the advantageous zone is executed, and if the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone is won and the move to the advantageous zone is decided, the game moves to the advantageous zone. In this case, unlike route B, the first play of the advantageous zone is RT1, so the AT ceiling number of plays is set low (for example, to "333" plays).

Route E shows an example of an irregular bonus. As mentioned above, when the first stage AT lottery is won in RT2, 1BB is awarded, but Route E is an example of what happens when 1BB is (mistakenly) awarded despite not winning the first stage AT lottery in RT2. In this case, the second stage AT lottery is not executed or is neglected within the RB of the 1BB game, and the lottery for the end of the advantageous zone is not executed either. Therefore, after the end of the 1BB game, even if it moves to RT1 and then to RT2, it remains in the advantageous zone.

Route D indicates a special route different from the above-mentioned normal route.
As described above, when the setting change is executed, the RT information and the 1BB winning carryover information are maintained. However, since the information related to the advantageous section is deleted due to the setting change, the section shifts to the non-advantageous section. Therefore, as shown in RT2 at the beginning of the normal route, if the settings are changed when RT2 is in the advantageous section, the first game will be in the non-advantageous section, but in this first game, the lottery to move to the advantageous section will be performed. If the player wins the advantageous section shift lottery and decides to move to the advantageous section, the player will move to the advantageous section from the next game.
Therefore, if it becomes non-RT after being installed in the hall, there is a high possibility that it is a fraudulent act (rogue act). Therefore, when the advantageous section transfer lottery is executed in non-RT and the transfer is made to the advantageous section, the AT ceiling game count is set high (for example, to "777" games) as in route A.

Furthermore, when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section in a non-RT, the RT information of the first game in the advantageous section is stored, and the first step is to move to a 1BB game, and then to the RB inside (RT3) of the 1BB game. When the transition is made, the candidate will not be elected to the second stage of AT (AT not elected (3)). Furthermore, after ending the advantageous section within the RB of the 1BB game and making it a non-advantageous section, an advantageous section transfer lottery is executed in the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section transfer lottery is won, and the transfer to the advantageous section is determined. Then, the next game will be shifted to the advantageous section. When shifting to an advantageous section during the RB of a 1BB game, the number of AT ceiling games is set high.
By setting in this way, it is possible to prevent balls from being easily acquired unintentionally due to fraudulent acts.
Note that even when the special route is selected, if a setting change is executed after winning 1BB and becoming within 1BB, it is possible to shift to RT2 (normal route).

As described above, in the example of Figure 304, the number of AT ceiling plays is varied depending on which RT the first play in the advantageous zone is.
in particular,
When the first game in the advantageous zone is non-RT (special route): AT ceiling high When the first game in the advantageous zone is RT1 (route C): AT ceiling low When the first game in the advantageous zone is RT2 (routes A, B): AT ceiling high When the first game in the advantageous zone is 1BB play (route D): AT ceiling high It is set as follows.
By setting it in this manner, the expected value until the AT is won can be varied depending on which RT the first play in the advantageous zone is.

Therefore, for example, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to give preferential treatment to decisions related to AT, and when the lottery is won, a predetermined flag is turned on. When the predetermined flag is on, the advantageous section is ended at a predetermined RT (in the above example, inside the RB of a 1BB game). Then, by setting the lottery to win the advantageous section transition immediately after the end of the advantageous section, it is possible to transfer to the advantageous section at a desired RT. This makes it possible to arbitrarily give preferential treatment to AT-related decisions.

In the above example, the AT ceiling is lowered when the first game in the advantageous zone is RT1, and is raised when the first game in the advantageous zone is an RT other than RT1, but this is not limited to this, and it may be divided more finely, for example, the AT ceiling is lowered when the first game in the advantageous zone is RT1, the AT ceiling is set to normal when the first game in the advantageous zone is RT2, and the AT ceiling is raised when the first game in the advantageous zone is an RT other than RT1 and RT2. Also, without being limited to the AT ceiling, it is also possible to set the AT winning probability to high when the first game in the advantageous zone is RT1, set the AT winning probability to normal when the first game in the advantageous zone is RT2, and set the AT winning probability to low when the first game in the advantageous zone is an RT other than RT1 and RT2.
In the 38th embodiment, an example was shown in which a decision regarding the AT (favorable, unfavorable, etc.) is made depending on the RT of the first game in the favorable zone, but this is not limited to this, and a decision regarding the AT may be made depending on the RT or condition device operating in a game that has won the favorable zone.
In addition, RT information at the time of transition to the advantageous zone may be retained, and a decision regarding the AT (favorable treatment, poor treatment, etc.) may be made based on the RT information during the first game in the advantageous zone.

<39th embodiment>
In the thirty-seventh embodiment described above, the specified number of coins when the accessory is not activated is "3" regardless of the gaming state (RT) (see FIG. 266, etc.).
On the other hand, in the 39th embodiment, the game is executed with the specified number "2" until winning 1BB, and after winning 1BB (within 1BB), the game is executed with the specified number "3". Assumed.
When winning 1BB with the specified number "2", 1BB can be won only in games with the specified number "2". In other words, after winning 1BB with the specified number "2", when playing a game with the specified number "3", the 1BB will not win even if the game is played when the winning combination is not won. .
Therefore, in the 39th embodiment, after winning 1BB with the specified number "2", a game is executed with the specified number "3". In the 1BB internal game with the specified number "3", there is no case where 1BB wins, and non-AT and AT are repeated with 1BB internal. Note that the specifications for preventing 1BB from winning due to the different prescribed numbers are the same as in the twelfth embodiment (FIG. 58) described above.

The symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the 39th embodiment is the same as that in the 37th embodiment (FIG. 265).
Furthermore, in the 39th embodiment, the winning combination is different from that in the 37th embodiment.
FIGS. 305 to 311 are diagrams showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payouts, etc. in the 39th embodiment.
In the 39th embodiment, two types of 1BBA and 1BBB are provided as 1BB. As shown in FIG. 305, when the accessory is not activated, 1BBA is 1BB drawn in a game with a specified number of "3", and 1BBB is 1BB drawn in a game with a specified number of "2".
Furthermore, in the 39th embodiment, while the 1BB is in operation, the RB is of a type that operates continuously (without stopping the symbol combinations corresponding to the RB), so no symbol combinations corresponding to the RB are provided.

In the thirty-ninth embodiment, replays are provided as Replay 01 to Replay 12.
Here, Replay 01 with role number "003" to Replay 07 with role number "027" have the same pattern combinations as Replay 01 with role number "004" to Replay 07 with role number "028" in the 37th embodiment.
In addition, Replay 08 with role number "028" to Replay 12 with role number "091" have the same pattern combinations as Replay 11 with role number "086" to Replay 15 with role number "149" in the 37th embodiment.

The small winnings include small winnings 001 to 117. Small winning combinations 001 to 008 are different from the 37th embodiment in that they are 15-card winning combinations.
Furthermore, the minor winnings 001 of the winning number “092” to the minor winnings 112 of the winning number “215” are the same as the minor winnings 001 of the winning number “150” to the minor winnings 112 of the winning number “273” in the 37th embodiment. It is a pattern combination.
Furthermore, the small winnings 113 with the winning number "216" to the small winnings 117 with the winning number "262" are small winnings specific to the 39th embodiment.

312 to 318 are diagrams showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 39th embodiment.
First, FIG. 312 shows the accessory (particularly 1BBA and 1BBB in the 39th embodiment) condition device.
The 1BBA condition device corresponding to accessory condition device number "1" is a accessory condition device that becomes operable when winning 1BBA. When this 1BBA condition device is activated, it becomes possible to win the winning combination of 1BBA.
Similarly, the 1BBB condition device corresponding to the accessory condition device number "2" is an accessory condition device that can be activated if 1BBB is won, and when the 1BBB condition device is activated, 1BBB can be won.

When the 1BBA condition device is activated, the RBA is activated continuously, and the termination condition is satisfied when more than 33 coins are paid out. Therefore, no accessory condition device number corresponding to the RBA is provided.
Similarly, when the device operates under the 1BBB condition, RBB operates continuously, and the end condition is satisfied when more than 7 coins are paid out. Therefore, no accessory condition device number corresponding to RBB is provided.
Further, both RBA and RBB end with two games or two wins, or end with the end of 1BB operation.
When the operation of RBA or RBB is completed and the operation termination condition of 1BB is not satisfied, RBA or RBB is activated again.

Figures 313 to 318 show winning and replay condition devices. Among the winning and replay condition device numbers, “1” to “16” are condition device numbers related to replay, and “17” to “70” are condition device numbers related to small winnings.
The condition device numbers “1” to “9” related to replay have some winning combinations that are different from the condition device numbers “1” to “9” related to replay in the 37th embodiment, The types of replays that can be stopped depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed are the same as in the thirty-seventh embodiment. Further, the same applies to the reel 31 that can stop the "blue BAR" at the first stop on the right side.

The condition device number “10” related to the replay is different from the condition device number “10” related to the replay in the 37th embodiment in that the replay that stops when “red” is aligned at the first right stop is replay 12. differ.
The condition device number “11” related to replay is the same as the condition device number “11” related to replay in the 37th embodiment.

The condition device number "12" for replay includes different winning combinations from the condition device number "14" for replay in the 37th embodiment, but the chance combinations that can appear are the same as those of the condition device number "14" for replay in the 37th embodiment.
Similarly, the condition device number "13" for replay includes different winning combinations from the condition device number "15" for replay in the 37th embodiment, but the chance combinations that can appear are the same as those of the condition device number "15" for replay in the 37th embodiment.
The condition device numbers "14" to "16" related to replays are respectively corresponding to the condition device numbers "17" to "19" related to replays in the 37th embodiment, and although the winning combinations included are different from those in the 37th embodiment, the stopping patterns that can appear (cherry in the upper left row or cherry in the middle left row) are the same as the condition device numbers "17" to "19" related to replays in the 37th embodiment.

The condition device related to the push order bell in the 39th embodiment includes a small role A01 to small role A24 condition device and a small role B01 to small role B24 condition device, but in the 37th embodiment, the small role C01 to A small role C24 condition device is not provided.
The winning combinations included in the minor winning combinations A01 to minor winning combination A24 condition devices and the winning winning combinations corresponding to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 are the same as the minor winning combinations A01 to minor winning combination A24 condition devices in the 37th embodiment. is set to . However, in the 39th embodiment, during 1BB operation (RBA operation and RBB operation), there is no case where the small winning combination A01 to small winning combination A24 condition device is activated (as shown in FIGS. 331 to 334 described later, This differs from the 37th embodiment in that the winning numbers "19" to "42" are not drawn during the 1BB operation.

In addition, the small winning combination B01 to small winning combination B24 condition devices are different from the small winning combination B01 to small winning combination B24 condition devices in the 37th embodiment in that the winning combination includes the small winning combination 113, and the winning combination includes the small winning combination 116. This is different from the 37th embodiment in that it is not included. However, in the small winning combination B01 to small winning combination B24 condition devices, the winning possible combinations corresponding to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 are set to be the same as in the small winning combination B01 to small winning combination B24 condition devices in the 37th embodiment. There is. In addition, in the 39th embodiment, during 1BB operation (RBA operation and RBB operation), there is no case where the small winning combination B01 to small winning B24 condition devices are activated (as shown in FIGS. 331 to 334 described later, This differs from the 37th embodiment in that the winning numbers "43" to "66" are not drawn during the 1BB operation.

The small winning combination C condition device is a conditional device that includes small winning combinations 113 and 114 as winning winning combinations and that "PB≠1". When the small role C condition device is activated, it is possible to stop "Watermelon A/B" - "Watermelon A/B" - "Watermelon A/B" (watermelon set) by pressing the button.
The small role D condition device includes the small role 115 as a winning role, and is a condition that makes it possible to stop the strong chance item A, "Watermelon A/B" - "Watermelon A/B" - "Replay" (Watermelon alignment collapse) It is a device. Strong chance number A corresponds to a small winning combination of 115 (3-card winning combination).
The small winning combination E condition device includes the small winning combination 116 as a winning winning combination, and is a condition that makes it possible to stop the strong chance B, "Replay" - "Watermelon A/B" - "Watermelon A/B" (Watermelon collapse) It is a device. The strong chance number B corresponds to a small hand of 116 (3-card hand).

The small win F condition device includes small wins 009 to 056 (1-piece wins) as winning combinations, but even if the symbol combinations of all these roles are added together, the symbol arrangement is "PB ≠ 1". Therefore, when the small win F condition device is activated, a push is required, resulting in a "PB ≠ 1" role.
The small prize G condition device includes all small prizes 001 to 116 except for small prize 117 as winning prizes, and regardless of the order of pressing the stop switch 42, any of the 15-coin prizes (small prize 001 to small prize 008) is awarded (PB = 1). In addition, depending on the order of pressing the stop switch 42, for example, when the pressing order is 123, small prize 001 is awarded, when the pressing order is 132, small prize 002 is awarded, and so on.
The small prize H condition device includes the small prize 009 to 114 and the small prize 117 that is drawn only during 1BB operation as winning prizes. Since the small prize 117 is drawn only during 1BB operation, the small prize 117 is sometimes called an "increasing prize." When the small prize H condition device is activated, the small prize 117 (1 coin prize) is awarded with "PB=1."

319 to 334 are diagrams showing number setting tables (probability of winning for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment. In the 39th embodiment, when the role is not activated, it is possible to play with either the specified number "2" or the specified number "3". Therefore, in the 39th embodiment, in the gaming state when the role is not activated, the number setting tables for both the specified number "2" and the specified number "3" are shown.
In the 39th embodiment, in a non-RT and non-internal game, a game is executed with a stipulated number "2", and when 1 BBB is won, the next game is shifted to RT1. Then, in RT1, a game is executed with a stipulated number "3".

First, FIGS. 319 and 320 are diagrams showing the numbers set in non-RT, non-internal, and specified number "2".
In FIG. 319, for non-RT, non-internal, and specified number "2", only 1BBB is drawn as 1BB (1BBA is not drawn). Further, in the replay, only replay A is drawn. Since the probability of winning 1BBB is ``16384/65536'' for non-RT, non-internal, and specified number "2", 1BBB will be won early.
Note that in a game that is non-RT, non-internal, and has a specified number of "2," in a game where 1BBB is won, 1BBB may be won. If 1BBB is not won in a game in which 1BBB is won, the game will move to RT1 and 1BBB from the next game, and 1BBB will not be won after that. ). On the other hand, when 1BBB is won in a game in which 1BBB is won, the game returns to the non-RT and non-internal game via the 1BB game.
FIG. 321 and FIG. 322 are diagrams showing the number of non-RT, non-internal, and specified number "3". As mentioned above, in a non-RT and non-internal setting, it is desirable to play a game with the specified number "2", but it is also possible to play with the specified number "3". Therefore, when a game is executed with the specified number "3" in non-RT and non-internal play, the winning probabilities are as shown in FIGS. 321 and 322.

In addition, in the number table, when the specified number is unintended in the game state, it is written as "irregular".
For non-RT, non-internal and specified number "3", 1BBB is not drawn, but 1BBA is drawn. Since the probability of winning 1BBA is "17065/65536", you will win 1BBA early. The details will be described later, but if you win 1BBA during non-RT and non-internal play and carry over the winning of 1BBA, the next game will remain non-RT and will not shift to RT1.

FIG. 323 and FIG. 324 are diagrams showing the number set in RT1 and 1BBB and the specified number "3".
Here, it is set so that 1BBB won with the specified number of "2" will not be won unless the game is played with the specified number of "2". Similarly, 1BBA won with a specified number of "3" is set so that it will not be won unless the game has a specified number of "3".
Therefore, if you win 1 BBB with a non-RT, non-internal, and specified number of "2", and if you become RT 1 and 1 BBB internal, if you play the game with the specified number of "3", you will win 1 BBB. There isn't.

As shown in FIG. 323, in RT1, within 1BBB, and the specified number of "3", the probability of a non-winning play is "17065/65536", but since the specified number is "3" even in a non-winning play, 1BBB will not be awarded.
In the 39th embodiment, it is assumed that the game will continue to be played during RT1 and 1BBB and the specified number "3", and in this game state, an AT lottery is executed, and if the AT is won, the AT is executed until its end condition is met. In other words, it is assumed that non-AT and AT are repeated during RT1 and 1BBB and the specified number "3".

FIG. 325 and FIG. 326 are diagrams showing the number set in non-RT and inside 1BBA and the specified number "3". In non-RT and non-internal, 1BBA is won in the game with the specified number of "3", so in non-RT and in 1BBA and in the game with the specified number of "3", when the hand is not won, 1BBA is won. It is possible to win.
FIG. 327 and FIG. 328 are diagrams showing the number set in non-RT and inside 1BBA and the specified number "2". As mentioned above, 1BBA is a special winning combination with the specified number of "3", so in the game state with the specified number of "2", 1BBA will not win even if the winning combination is a non-winning game.

FIG. 329 and FIG. 330 are diagrams showing the number set in RT1 and 1BBB and the specified number "2". As described above, the thirty-ninth embodiment is based on the assumption that the game is played with RT1, 1BBB inside, and the specified number "3". However, within RT1 and 1BBB, it is possible to play even with the specified number "2", so the number corresponding to the specified number "2" is also determined.
For RT1 and 1BBB inside and the specified number "2", the non-winning probability of the winning combination is set to "0". Therefore, even if the stipulated number is "2", there will be no case where 1BBB, which carries over the winnings, wins the prize.

Here, the ball output rate in RT1 and 1BBB inside and the specified number "3" (FIGS. 323 and 324) is as follows.
(a) Expected number of coins paid out based on replay 8978/65536×3 (≒0.411)
(b) Expected number of coins to be paid out based on pressing order bell 38472/65536 x (15 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/2 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8) (≒ 1 .565)
(c) Expected value of number of coins paid out based on small role C 656/65536×1 (≒0.01)
It should be noted that when the small winning combination C condition device is activated, it is assumed that the 1-card winning combination is "PB=1" and a prize is won.
(d) Expected value of number of coins paid out based on minor role D and minor role E 164/65536×3×2 (≒0.015)
(e) Expected value of number of coins paid out based on small role G 37/65536×15 (≒0.00847)
From the above, the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out at RT1 and 1BBB inside and the specified number of coins is "3" is approximately "2".
Therefore, the ball payout rate is
2/3≒0.67
becomes.

On the other hand, the payout rate during RT1 and within 1BBB and the specified number of "2" (Figures 329 and 330) is as follows.
(a) Expected payout value based on replay: 25632/65536×3 (≒1.173)
(b) Expected payout value based on push order bell: 9600/65536 x (15 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/2 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8) (≒ 0.391)
(c) Expected payout value based on small win F 30754/65536×1 (≒0.4693)
When the small prize F condition device is activated, the 1-coin prize is awarded with "PB=1".
From the above, the expected number of payout coins during RT1, within 1BBB, and when the specified number is "2", is approximately "2".

Therefore, the ball payout rate is
2/3≒0.67
becomes.
As a result, within RT1 and 1BBB, the ball payout rate is substantially the same regardless of whether the number is "2" or "3", so there is no advantage/disadvantage in the ball payout rate.
However, the advantageous section transfer lottery and the AT lottery are executed only in games with a specified number of "3". Therefore, there is no benefit to the player even if the game is played with the prescribed number of "2".

FIGS. 331 and 332 are diagrams showing the number set at the specified number "3" during RBA operation. Note that while the RBA is in operation, it is possible to play only with the specified number "3".
When playing a game with the specified number "3" in a non-RT game and within 1BBA, if you press the symbol combination of 1BBA when the combination is non-winning, you can win 1BBA. If 1BBA wins, 1BBA will be in operation from the next game. While 1BBA is in operation, RBA is in continuous operation.
Note that the ball payout rate during RBA operation is as follows.
(a) Expected value of number of coins paid out based on replay 1571/65536×3 (≒0.0719)
(b) Expected value of number of coins paid out based on small role G 6450/65536×15 (≒1.476)
(c) Expected value of number of coins paid out based on small role H 33045/65536×1 (≒0.504)
From the above, the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out during RBA operation is approximately "2".
Therefore, the ball payout rate is
2/3≒0.67
becomes.

As a result, even if you intentionally execute a game with the specified number of "3" in a non-RT and win 1BBA, and win 1BBA in a non-RT and within 1BBA and execute a 1BBA game, the ball payout rate is Since the value does not exceed 1, there is no benefit to the player.
Furthermore, in the 39th embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed during non-RT and non-internal games, non-RT and 1BBA internal games, and during 1BBA operation. As a result, the player cannot receive the benefit of AT winning in these gaming states, so there is no merit in playing the game in these irregular states.

However, during RT1 and 1BBB, if the player intends to insert three medals but due to an operational error, inserts only two medals and operates the start switch 42, or if the player operates the start switch 42 after operating the 1 bet switch 40a only twice, the game may be played with the specified number of "2". However, this game has the disadvantage that the AT lottery is not executed. In this case, the player is notified that he or she has played with the specified number of "2" by a presentation described below.

FIGS. 333 and 334 are diagrams showing the number set at the specified number "3" during RBB operation. As mentioned above, within RT1 and 1BBB, 1BBB will never win. However, in a game that is non-RT, non-internal, and has a prescribed number of "2," 1BBB wins alone, as shown in FIG. 319. Therefore, if you hit the symbol combination of 1BBB in a game where you win 1BBB alone, you can win 1BBB. When 1BBB is won, the game shifts to 1BB game. In the 1BB game based on the winning of 1BBB, the RBB operates continuously as described above. While the RBB is in operation, a lottery is executed according to the numbers shown in FIGS. 333 and 334.

FIG. 335 is a diagram showing RT transition in the 39th embodiment.
When RWM initialization is executed, it transitions to non-RT (and non-internal). Note that "RWM initialization" in FIG. 335 means RWM initialization that is performed during the setting change process when a power-off recovery cannot be performed normally (when an unrecoverable error occurs).
In other words, the RWM initialization shown in FIG. 335 is executed when the RWM 53 is inserted/removed (a rough act) or when the entire range of the RWM 53 is initialized based on the occurrence of an unrecoverable error. be. In other cases, such as turning the power on/off or normal setting change processing, the 1BB winning carryover information is maintained without being erased. However, when the setting change process is executed, the 1BB winning carryover information may be deleted.

When the RWM initialization shown in FIG. 335 is executed, the RT information is also erased and becomes non-RT and non-internal.
In non-RT and non-internal play, as mentioned above, it is assumed that the game will be played with the specified number "2". When playing a game with the specified number of ``2'' while being non-RT and non-internal, the non-RT and non-internal status is maintained until 1 BBB is won. Then, when winning 1BBB, the next game will proceed to RT1 (inside 1BBB). Furthermore, when you win 1BBB in a game where you win 1BBB, 1BB will be in operation (RBB in operation) from the next game. As mentioned above, in a non-RT, non-internal game, and a game with a specified number of "2", there is a case where 1BBB is won in a game where 1BBB is won, so in FIG. 335, 1BBB is won and 1BB is in operation. The diagram shows the case where the transition is made to . When 1BBB wins and 1BBB is in operation, RBB continues to operate. When the termination conditions for 1BBB operation are met, the transition is made to non-RT and non-internal state.

On the other hand, if you win 1BBB in a game that is non-RT, non-internal, and has a specified number of "2", and you do not win 1BBB in that game and move to RT1 and 1BBB internal, as described above, if you win 1BBB in a game with a specified number of "2", In both cases of ``2'' and the specified number ``3'', the symbol combination of 1BBB will not be stopped and displayed. Therefore, unless RWM is initialized, RT1 and 1BBB are maintained. In the market, RT1 and 1BBB internal conditions continue.

On the other hand, if a player plays a game with an unintended prescribed number of "3" during non-RT and non-internal play and wins 1BBA, the player remains non-RT and shifts to non-RT and 1BBA from the next game. When the game becomes non-RT and within 1BBA, it will not shift to RT1 unless you win 1BBA and go through the 1BBA game.
During non-RT and 1BBA, it continues until the 1BBA symbol combination is stopped and displayed (winning). When the symbol combination of 1BBA is stopped and displayed, 1BBA is in operation. While 1BBA is in operation, RBA is in continuous operation. When the termination conditions for 1BBA operation are met, the state transitions to non-RT and non-internal state.

Next, control processing in the thirty-ninth embodiment will be explained. The control processing described below shows the difference between the specified number "2" and the specified number "3".
FIG. 336 is a flowchart showing the start time processing for each main game state in the 39th embodiment. This process is a process executed after a determination of "Yes" is made in step S278 in the main process, for example, FIG. 41 (eleventh embodiment). Note that it is assumed that the winning combination lottery process is executed before the process of FIG. 336 is executed.
In FIG. 336, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the player won 1BB in the current game. As mentioned above, winning 1BB is during non-RT and non-internal games. When it is determined that 1BB has been won in the current game, the process according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that 1BB has not been won, the process advances to step S2602. Note that in step S2601, if the player won 1BB before the current game and is already within 1BB, the determination is "No".

In step S2602, it is determined whether the current game is in 1BB operation. When it is determined that 1BB is in operation, the process according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that 1BB is not in operation, the process advances to step S2603.
In step S2603, it is determined whether the specified number of coins for the current game is three. When it is determined that the prescribed number is three, the process advances to step S2604, and when it is determined that the prescribed number is not three (in other words, it is two), the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S2604, it is determined whether the main game state of the current game is "0". In the 39th embodiment, it is assumed that the main gaming state is "0" when it is a non-advantageous section (normal section), and the main gaming state is "1" or more when it is an advantageous section. Therefore, in step S2604, it is determined whether or not the current game is in an advantageous section. When it is determined in step S2064 that the main gaming state is "0", the process advances to step S2606, and when it is determined that the main gaming state is not "0", the process advances to step S2605.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 319 and 320, the advantageous section lottery is not executed in a game that is non-RT, non-internal, and the specified number is "2," so, for example, based on RWM initialization, it is determined that the non-RT, non-internal, and When this happens, it is a non-advantageous section (normal section). Then, when you win 1BBB and move to RT1 and 1BBB inside and the specified number "3" from the next game, as shown in FIGS. An advantageous section lottery will be executed. Furthermore, in the 39th embodiment, the advantageous section shift lottery is set so that the probability of winning is "9000/16384" when winning Replay C to P, and "12000/16384" when winning small prizes A to G. is set. Therefore, it is set so that if you play one or two games, you will win the advantageous section.

In FIG. 336, in step S2605, instruction processing is executed. Here, it is determined whether or not the current game corresponds to a game that activates the instruction function, and if it is a game that activates the instruction function, processing related to the instruction function is executed. This process includes, for example, the push order instruction number setting process shown in FIG. 48 (eleventh embodiment). Then, the process advances to step S2606.
In step S2606, start processing is executed according to the main game state. For example, when the current game is in the main game state "0" (non-advantageous section), an advantageous section transfer lottery is executed, when it is an advantageous section and non-AT, an AT lottery is executed, and when it is an advantageous section and AT, an AT lottery is executed. Execute an AT additional lottery. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As is clear from the process in FIG. 336, when the specified number of sheets is "3", the start process according to the main game state is executed, but when the specified number is not "3" (when it is "2") In this case, the start processing according to the main game state is not executed.
Specifically, when the prescribed number is "2", firstly, even if it is a non-advantageous section, the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed. This is also clear from FIGS. 319 to 330. Secondly, regardless of whether it is an advantageous section or not, a lottery regarding AT is not executed. Furthermore, thirdly, even during AT, a lottery related to AT (such as an additional lottery for the number of games played during AT) is not performed.

FIG. 337 is a flowchart showing the main game state-based all-stop processing in the 39th embodiment. This process corresponds to the main process, for example, the game end check process in step S301 in FIG. 41 (eleventh embodiment). As shown in FIG. 50, which corresponds to the game end check process in step S301, the full stop process includes clearing processes for various flags, etc., but FIG. 337 only shows processes related to the thirty-ninth embodiment.
In FIG. 337, in step S2611, it is determined whether or not the player won 1BB in the current game. This process is similar to step S2601. If it is determined that 1BB has been won in this game, the process advances to step S2615, and if it is determined that 1BB has not been won, the process advances to step S2612. Note that in step S2611, if the player won 1BB before the current game and is already within 1BB, the determination is "No".

In step S2612, it is determined whether the current game is in 1BB operation. This process is similar to step S2602. When it is determined that 1BB is in operation, the process advances to step S2615, and when it is determined that 1BB is not in operation, the process advances to step S2613.
In step S2613, it is determined whether the specified number of coins for the current game is three. This process is similar to step S2603. When it is determined that the prescribed number is three, the process advances to step S2614, and when it is determined that the prescribed number is not three (in other words, it is two), the process advances to step S2615.

In step S2614, a full stop process is executed depending on the main game state. This process includes, for example, updating the main game state, updating the AT (AT game counter, AT flag, pullback game counter, CZ game counter, etc.). This processing corresponds to, for example, the processing of steps S951 to S956 in FIG. 149 in the twenty-third embodiment. Then, the process advances to step S2615.
In step S2615, advantageous section clear counter processing is executed. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In the above process, the full stop process according to the main game state is executed only when the specified number is "3", and is not executed when the specified number is "2". Therefore, for example, when a game is executed with the specified number "2" during AT, the AT game number counter will not be updated. However, as described later, the number of AT acquisitions (a value based on a difference counter as described later) is updated.
On the other hand, regardless of whether the predetermined number is "2" or "3", the advantageous section clear counter management process in step S2615 is executed, so the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter, which will be described later, are updated.

FIG. 338 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section clear counter management process in step S2615 of FIG. 337. The advantageous section clear counter management process here is almost the same as that in FIGS. 51 and 52 (the 11th embodiment), but will be explained again.
In step S2621, "1" is subtracted from the advantageous section clear counter. Next, the process advances to step S2622, and it is determined whether the advantageous section clear counter value before being subtracted by "1" in step S2621 is "0". When it is determined that the value is "0", the process advances to step S2623, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process advances to step S2625.

In step S2623, it is determined whether the main game state is "0". As mentioned above, when the main game state is "0", it means that it is a non-advantageous section (normal section). Furthermore, even if the main game state is "0" at the start of the current game, if the transition lottery for the advantageous section is won, the main game state is a value other than "0" at the time of step S2623. .
When it is determined that the main game state is "0", the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the main game state is not "0", the process advances to step S2624. In step S2624, the upper limit value (initial value) of the number of games in the advantageous section "1500 (D)" is stored (set) in the advantageous section clear counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends. When the advantageous section clear counter value before subtraction is "0" and the main game state is not "0", it means that the player has won the advantageous section transition lottery in the current game.

On the other hand, in step S2622, it is determined that the value before subtraction is not "0", and when the process proceeds to step S2625, it is determined whether the subtraction result (advantageous section clear counter value after subtracting "1") is "0". do. If it is determined that it is "0", the end condition for the advantageous section (the number of games played is "1500") is satisfied, so the process advances to step S2629. On the other hand, if it is determined that the subtraction result is not "0", the process advances to step S2626.
In step S2626, it is determined whether a replay was displayed in the current game. This is because the difference counter is not updated when a replay is displayed. When it is determined that the replay is displayed, the process advances to step S2628, and when it is determined that the replay is not displayed, the process advances to step S2627.

In step S2627, "number of payouts - prescribed number" is added to the difference counter to update the difference counter value. When the difference counter value after addition becomes negative, it is corrected to "0". That is, the lower limit value of the difference counter is "0". Then, the process advances to step S2628.
In step S2628, it is determined whether the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)". Note that when displaying a replay, step S2628 may be skipped because the difference counter has not been updated in the current game, but similarly to the 11th embodiment, the upper limit value of the difference counter is determined for confirmation. are doing.

If it is determined that the difference counter value exceeds "2400", the process advances to step S2629 in order to satisfy the conditions for ending the advantageous section. On the other hand, when it is determined that the difference counter value does not exceed "2400", the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S2629, all parameters related to the instruction function are set to "0". This process is, for example, the same process as step S435 in FIG. 51 (eleventh embodiment). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, the advantageous zone clear counter management process is executed regardless of whether the specified number is "2" or "3", so the advantageous zone clear counter and the difference counter are always updated. Here, the number of coins acquired during the AT is counted based on the difference counter. For example, the difference counter value (usually "0") of the first game of the AT is calculated as the acquisition number "0". As a result, the number of coins acquired displayed on the image display device 23 during the AT is a value based on the difference counter value. And, the difference counter is updated regardless of whether the specified number is "2" or "3", so the number of coins acquired during the AT is updated regardless of whether the specified number is "2" or "3". In contrast, as described above, when a game is played with the specified number "3" during the AT, the number of AT games is updated, but when a game is played with the specified number "2" during the AT, the number of AT games is not updated. However, even in this case, the number of AT games is displayed on the image display device 23, even though it is not updated.
In addition, when playing with the specified number "2" during the AT, the number of times played during the AT is not updated, so the AT termination condition based on the number of times the AT is played is not met, but the favorable zone clear counter and the difference number counter are updated, so the AT and favorable zone may end by meeting the favorable zone termination condition based on the favorable zone clear counter or the difference number counter.

Next, a specific control when a game is executed with the specified number "2" will be described.
(1) Display of a unique image in play at the specified number "2" When play is started at the specified number "2", an effect unique to the specified number "2" (for example, a still image or a unique image similar to a still image may be displayed with no sound or a unique sound. Hereinafter, the image unique to the specified number "2" may be referred to as a "unique image") may be switched to. Furthermore, in this case, an image of text such as "Playing with 2 coins" may be displayed. If the unique effect is executed only when the specified number is "2", the player can immediately know that he or she has mistakenly played at the specified number "2". Furthermore, by outputting a unique image, it is possible to suggest to the player that the AT lottery will not be executed.
In this embodiment, the "unique image" may be referred to as a "single image" or the like, but is not limited to a completely still image and includes an image in which part of the image is moving. For example, when a character is displayed as a unique image, the character's hair may be blown by the wind, or the character may blink periodically.

Incidentally, when the game is executed with the specified number "2", the production command may not be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. By doing this, in the game of the specified number "2", the performance of the previous game continues to be output as is. Alternatively, when outputting the effect corresponding to the specified number "2", a specific command indicating that the game has been executed with the specified number "2" may be transmitted.

Here, in a game with the specified number "2" in RT1 (non-AT), a unique image is displayed, but in a game with the specified number "2" in a non-RT (non-internal) time, a normal presentation (the same presentation as when a game is played with the specified number "3" when inside 1BB) is output. In this embodiment, since it is assumed (normal) that a game is played with the specified number "2" in a non-RT time to win 1BBB, during a non-RT time, it is possible to determine whether or not a game is in a normal gaming state based on the presentation executed when a game is played with the specified number "2" during a non-RT time.
Also, when the AT ends or when 1BB play ends, the addiction prevention display may be output. When a game is played with the specified number "2" during the addiction prevention display, the addiction prevention display is output in front of the special image (the addiction prevention display layer is placed in front of the special image and the addiction prevention display). This ensures that the addiction prevention display is not hidden by the special image, so that the addiction prevention display can be displayed reliably.

Further, when a game is executed with the specified number "2", the specified number is determined by operating the start switch 41, so a unique image is displayed at the same time as the start switch 41 is operated (simultaneously with the start of the game). This unique image continues at least until the third stop switch 42 is operated (when it is completely stopped), and the display of the unique image may end when the payout process is completed or when the bet process for the next game is executed. Can be mentioned.

(2) Image display during non-AT One example is to award "1" or more points for each game (the number of points awarded varies depending on the winning combination, etc.), and to execute an AT lottery according to the number of accumulated points. It will be done. In this case, points are awarded for games with a specified number of "3", but no points are awarded for games with a specified number of "2". Therefore, in a game where the specified number is "2", the number of points is not updated.

(3) AT ceiling game counter Counts the number of games played during non-AT, and when the number of games reaches a predetermined value, it has a ceiling function that activates AT, the AT ceiling counts the number of games played up to the ceiling. Regarding the number of games counter, it is updated in games with a specified number of "3", but not updated in games with a specified number of "2".

(4) Precursor Counter The remaining number of games until the scheduled AT activation may be displayed as an image during the false premonitory and the real premonitory. This number of games is managed by a precursor counter. Then, in a game with a specified number of "3", the precursor counter is updated and the remaining number of games (image) is updated, but in a game with a specified number of "2", the precursor counter is not updated and the number of remaining games (image) is updated. Not updated.
(5) Lottery related to AT During non-AT, as mentioned above, the specified number "3" allows the lottery related to AT to be executed, but the specified number "2" does not execute the lottery related to AT.

(6) Performance when the start switch 41 is operated When the start switch 41 is operated, a winning combination lottery is executed and a performance corresponding to the winning combination lottery result is executed, and when the game is started with the specified number "3", The performance corresponding to the winning combination lottery result is executed, but when the game is started with the specified number "2", the performance corresponding to the winning combination lottery result is not performed. However, when the game is started with the specified number "2", a special effect (display of the above-mentioned unique image, etc.) corresponding to the start of the game with the specified number "2" may be executed.
In addition, while a continuous performance is being executed, if the performance is set to advance (develop) when the start switch 41 is operated, and the game is started with the specified number "3", the continuous performance will proceed. , When the game is started with the specified number "2", the continuous performance does not proceed. In this case, the previous performance (at the end of the previous game) may be maintained, or a unique performance corresponding to the start of the game with the specified number "2" may be executed.
Furthermore, during the execution of the continuous performance, after a game is played with the specified number "2", when the next game is played with the specified number "3", the continuous performance is executed in the next game.
Specifically, in a case where a continuous performance between three games can be executed, when the first game is played with a specified number of "3", the continuous performance of the first game is executed. Next, when the second game is played with the specified number "2", the continuous performance of the second game is not performed, but a unique performance is performed. Then, when the third game is played with the specified number "3", the continuous performance of the third game is executed.

(7) Production during AT If a game is played with the specified number "2" during AT, the number of AT games is not updated as described above. That is, the AT game number counter is not updated. As a result, the remaining number of AT games is not subtracted, so even if the player mistakenly plays a game with the specified number "2", the number of AT games will not be lost. Although the AT game count counter is not updated, the AT game count itself is displayed during AT.
Also, during AT, the number of acquired coins is continuously displayed, and the number of acquired coins during AT is updated at the start of the game and at the end of the game. The number of coins acquired during AT is updated based on the difference counter value as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide an acquired number of coins counter on the sub-control board 80 and update the number of acquired coins during AT based on the acquired number of coins counter of the sub-control board 80 (independently on the sub-control board 80 side). It is.

(8) When displaying an image of the number of acquired coins during AT (for example, "Get 1000 coins!"), if the number of acquired coins reaches 1000 coins with the specified number "3", "Get 1000 coins!" etc., but when the number of acquired coins reaches 1000 coins with the specified number "2", an image such as "Get 1000 coins!" may not be displayed.
In this case, the message "Get 1000 coins!" is displayed as an image in subsequent games with the prescribed number of "3". For example, a flag is provided to indicate whether or not the fact that the number of acquired coins has reached 1000 has already been displayed. Then, when the number of acquired coins reaches 1000 coins with the specified number "3", the flag is turned on, but when the number of acquired coins reaches 1000 coins with the prescribed number "2", the flag is not turned on. After that, a prescribed number of games "3" is played, an image of "Get 1000 coins!" is displayed, and the flag is turned on. After reaching 1000 pieces in a game with the specified number of ``2'', in a game with the specified number of ``3'', the image ``Get 1000 pieces!'' will be displayed even when the replay is displayed or the winning combination is not won. Good too. Of course, the image ``Get 1000 pieces!'' may be displayed after waiting for the winning combination in the subsequent game with the specified number of ``3''.

(9) When there is an ending flag Based on the advantageous section clear counter, the ending flag is set when the number of games played in the advantageous section is about "1400" to "1450", and if the AT is in progress, it will be set soon. The player may be notified that the AT will end or that the AT of the next set will not proceed. Here, as a result of playing the game with the specified number of "2", when the number of games for which the ending flag should be set is reached, the ending flag may or may not be set. When the ending flag is set, the performance can be switched to the ending, so even if the game is played with the specified number "2", the player can be informed that the end of the advantageous section is approaching. On the other hand, when the ending flag is not set, the production does not switch to the ending. However, when a game is played with the specified number "3" after that, the ending flag is set. In this case, the number of times the game is played from the time the performance is switched to the ending until the AT ends is smaller than the case where the game is played with the specified number "3" all the time.

Further, based on the advantageous section clear counter, a countdown display may be executed when the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section (1500 games) is approaching. This countdown may also be executed with a specified number of "2". However, it is possible to display different images depending on the countdown when the specified number is "2" and the countdown when the specified number is "3". For example, the countdown when the specified number is "2" may be performed by displaying the above-mentioned unique image.

(10) Presentation at the End of the Advantageous Zone When the final play in the advantageous zone is the specified number "2", an image of the end screen of the advantageous zone may be displayed, or may not be displayed.
(11) Presentation after end of advantageous zone When the first game in the non-advantageous zone is played with the specified number of "2" after the advantageous zone has ended, a presentation (image display) is executed to indicate a transition to the non-advantageous zone. Furthermore, when the second game in the non-advantageous zone is also played with the specified number of "2", the presentation of the first game in the non-advantageous zone is maintained. In this way, when transitioning from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone, the player can be notified of this even if the game was played with the specified number of "2".

(12) If 1BB is won in a non-RT and 1BB is won in that game, a unique image indicating that 1BB play is in progress and the number of coins won are displayed as an image until the 1BB game ends. The number of coins won is also updated. In addition, during 1BB play in this case, even if the game is played with the specified number of "3" (the 1BB game in the 39th embodiment is limited to the specified number of "3"), the effects that are normally performed during 1BB play are not executed. As in this case, there are cases where the normal effects are not executed even when the specified number is "3". By controlling in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the 1BB game is an irregular game.

<Fortieth embodiment>
The fortieth embodiment relates to the validity management of push buttons (also called "effect switches,""effectbuttons,""sub-buttons," etc.).
Although the push buttons are omitted from illustration in Fig. 1 (first embodiment) and Fig. 95 (nineteenth embodiment (A)), in reality, the push buttons are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80. In addition, the sub-control board 80 and the push buttons are configured to be capable of two-way communication.
The push button is used when, for example, a presentation is advanced (developed) based on the operation of the push button. When a presentation is advanced based on the operation of the push button, the image of the push button is displayed and the presentation at that time is maintained. When the push button is operated, the image of the push button is erased and the presentation is advanced. Hereinafter, such a presentation is referred to as a "push button presentation" as necessary. Note that the push button presentation may be executed once per game or multiple times per game.

Further, in FIGS. 1 and 95, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are one-way communication from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Here, although the sub control board 80 is illustrated as a single board in FIGS. 1 and 95, it can be used not only as a single board, but also as a sub main board ( In some cases, it is divided into a sub-sub-board (first sub-control board) and a sub-sub-board (second sub-control board). On the other hand, the sub-control board 80 may be composed of a single board including a sub-main board (first sub-control board) and a sub-sub board (second sub-control board). When the sub-control board 80 is divided into a sub-main board (first sub-control board) and a sub-sub board (second sub-control board), the sub-main board (first sub-control board) and sub-sub board (second sub-control board) are separated. 2 sub control board) is configured to allow bidirectional communication.
Note that the main control board 50 is also referred to as main control means 50, main control board 50, and main control means 50.
The sub-control board 80 is also referred to as sub-control means 80, sub-control board 80, or sub-control means 80.
Furthermore, the sub-main board is also referred to as a first sub-control board, first sub-control means, effect control board, or effect control means.
Further, the sub-sub board is also referred to as a second sub-control board, second sub-control means, image control board, or image control means.

Furthermore, when a sub-main CPU and a sub-sub CPU are mounted on one sub-control board 80, it goes without saying that the sub-main CPU and sub-sub CPU are configured to be able to communicate bidirectionally. .
Hereinafter, the "sub-main board (first sub-control board) or sub-main CPU" will be simply referred to as "sub-main", and the sub-sub-board (second sub-control board) or sub-sub CPU will be simply referred to as "sub-sub".
Note that the sub-main is a board (CPU) that supervises and controls the entire performance. Further, the sub-sub is a board (CPU) that belongs to the lower level of the sub-main and is specialized for controlling images in the production.

When the sub-main executes the performance lottery and determines the performance, it sends to the sub-sub a performance designation command (a command that allows the sub-sub to specify the performance to be executed) corresponding to the determined performance. Upon receiving the production designation command, the sub-sub selects a video according to the production designation command and displays the video as an image. Here, a delay (time lag) occurs between the time when the sub-main sends the production designation command and the time when the sub-main starts displaying the image of the video. This is because video output processing and the like require a certain amount of time.
Further, in the sub-main, the push button is not always enabled, but is enabled within a predetermined time range. For example, like the stop switch 42, the on/off state of the push button is detected at all times, but when it is not valid, its operation is ignored even if it is turned on.

Here, when the sub-main sends a production designation command to the sub-sub, the push button is enabled, and the sub-sub displays an image of the push button (this image indicates to the player that the push button is enabled). ), there is a discrepancy between the timing when the sub-main activates the push button and the timing when the sub-sub starts displaying the image related to the push button. occurs. Therefore, in the 40th embodiment, the following method is adopted in order to eliminate this deviation.

The first method is to enable a push button based on a sub-main timer value (timer management). Specifically, a storage area for storing timer values is provided in the RWM 53, and the timer value (initial value) is set in the storage area when sending the production designation command (before, at the time of, or after sending). do. Then, the timer value is subtracted at regular intervals (for example, for each interrupt processing), and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, and the push button is activated. Make it. On the other hand, if the sub-sub displays the video at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed since receiving the production designation command, it is possible to substantially match the display timing of the video and the timing at which the push button is activated. Note that the timing at which the push button is activated may be slightly earlier than the timing at which video display starts.
Furthermore, in the case of timer management, push button effects may be executed multiple times in one game.

Note that depending on the performance, in one game, the push button may be enabled when N1 seconds (for example, "3" seconds) have elapsed, and then the push button may be enabled when N2 seconds (for example, "10" seconds) have elapsed. In this case, store the timer value corresponding to N2 seconds in the above storage area, enable the push button when the timer value reaches a value corresponding to the elapse of N1 seconds, and then When the value corresponding to (for example, "0") is reached, the push button is enabled.
Further, there are cases in which the push button is enabled when N1 seconds (for example, "3" seconds) have elapsed, and cases in which the push button is enabled when N2 (for example, "10") seconds have elapsed. In this way, when the timer value differs depending on the effect specification command, the value corresponding to the elapse of N1 seconds and the value corresponding to the elapse of N2 seconds are stored in the above storage area, but in this case, the storage area is the same. It is a storage area.

In the case of timer management, if a power outage occurs while the timer is measuring time,
(1) Method of restarting timer measurement after returning from a power outage (in this case, the timer value at that point in time is held when the power is off, and the relevant timer value is also held when the power is turned off) and,
(2) When returning from a power outage, set the initial value of the timer value (the initial value of the timer value determined by the production specification command selected before the power outage), and use the timer to measure the time after returning from the power outage. how to get started and
(3) A method of clearing the timer value upon recovery from a power outage and not counting the timer value after recovery from a power outage (in this case, the push button effect is not executed).
Here, in the case of (2) above, when the initial value of the timer value is set, the effect designation command is retransmitted to the sub-sub.
In the case of (3) above, there are two cases: a case where the push button is assumed not to have been operated and the push button returns, and a case where the push button is assumed to have been operated and the push button returns. If the push button is deemed to have been operated and returns, an effect corresponding to the operation of the push button is executed.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during timing by the timer, and the game state at the time of the power outage is a specific game state advantageous to the player (such as CZ or the final game of a premonition), a specific image (such as the above-mentioned "single image") is displayed when the power is restored from the power outage. To control in this way, for example, when the power is restored from the power outage, the data of the main game state and the premonition counter value are referenced to make the determination.
The above-mentioned storage area of the main game state and the storage area of the premonition counter are provided in both the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 and the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80. The main control board 50 transmits information on the main game state and the premonition counter value to the sub-control board 80 every time a game is played, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated. When the sub-control board 80 receives this information, it stores it in the RWM 83 on the sub-control board 80 side. Therefore, if the sub-control board 80 side holds the information on the main game state and the premonition counter value when the power is restored from a power cut, the sub-control board 80 side can determine the main game state and the premonition counter value before the power cut. Therefore, in this case, the main control board 50 does not re-transmit information on the main game state and the premonition counter value to the sub-control board 80 when the power is restored from a power cut.

Furthermore, if the power is cut off after the start switch 41 is operated and the correct press order is notified by the operation of the instruction function, but before the first stop switch 42 is operated (while all reels 31 are rotating), When the reel returns from the power cut, all the reels 31 return to the rotating state again. In this case, the instruction function is activated again, and the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the correct pressing order. Therefore, in this case, the specific image is not displayed.
On the other hand, if a power outage occurs after all the reels 31 have stopped and before the next game bet is placed, a specific image is displayed when the power is restored from the power outage. A stop command for the reel 31 is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, and the sub control board 80 stores information based on the stop command. Therefore, when the sub-control board 80 returns from a power-off, based on the information based on the stop command (information stored in the sub-control board 80), whether the sub-control board 80 returns while all the reels 31 are rotating or when all the reels 31 are being rotated. It can be determined whether or not to return to the stopped state of No. 31.

The display of the specific image does not have to be limited to when the timer is timing. If the specific image is displayed when the power is restored from a power outage (which corresponds to the case where the power is restored after a power outage occurs when all reels 31 have stopped and before a bet has been placed, as described above), the hall manager and the player can see at a glance that the game state at the time of the power outage was a specific game state advantageous to the player. Also, if a power outage occurs unintended by the player in a specific advantageous game state, displaying the normal screen when the power is restored from this power outage can prevent the player from misunderstanding that a reset has been applied due to the power outage and the specific advantageous game state has been cleared (the game has transitioned to the normal game state).

A second method is a method in which the submain does not have the above-mentioned timer and uses a feedback command. Specifically, when selecting a video (before, at the start, or after the start of video output processing), the sub-sub sends a feedback command to the sub-main (indicating that video generation related to the push button has been completed). command). The submain then activates the pushbutton when it receives this feedback command. In particular, in the first method, it is necessary to provide a storage area in the RWM 53 to store the timer value, but in the method of transmitting a feedback command, there is an advantage that there is no need to provide such a storage area. In addition, with the timer management method, it is necessary to set a timer value for each production specification command, but with the method of sending feedback commands, even if the number of production specification commands increases, it is possible to manage each timer value. This is no longer necessary, and the capacity can be reduced.

The second method described above makes it easier to synchronize not only the push button effect but also the timing at which the image display starts with the timing at which the lamp lighting state is changed and with the timing at which the volume is changed.
Here, when displaying images, the sub-main transmits to the sub-sub a command related to background (stage screen) presentation (also referred to as 2-system presentation) and a command related to character presentation (also referred to as 4-system presentation). When the sub-sub receives a command related to background presentation, it generates an image related to the background, and when it receives a command related to character presentation, it generates an image related to the character.

When the generation of both the background and character images is completed, the sub-sub sends a feedback command (video completion command) to the sub-main. When the sub-main receives this feedback command, it performs effects corresponding to the start of displaying the video, such as changing the lighting mode of a lamp or changing the volume. Therefore, it becomes possible to more accurately synchronize the video with the lamp and audio.

In addition, some push button effects include a fade effect. Whether or not to execute a fade effect is determined by an effect designation command. A push button fade effect is an effect in which the push button is displayed in an image other than the final display mode during the introductory effect (initial effect), and the push button is not yet enabled at the time of this image display. In this introductory effect, for example, an effect is executed that suggests that a push button effect will occur soon.
After executing the fade effect, when the final push button image is to be displayed (before, during, or after display), the sub-sub transmits a feedback command to the sub-main. Upon receiving this feedback command, the sub-main enables the push button.

When the sub-main determines that the push button has been operated, it sends a command indicating that the push button has been operated to the sub-sub. Furthermore, when the submain detects that the push button has been operated, it disables the push button. Here, if the push button is operated once, it is determined that the push button has been operated and the push button is disabled, and how many times is the predetermined time from enabling the push button to disabling the push button. There are cases where the push button operation is valid even if it is operated. In the latter case, the effect may be changed each time the push button is operated.

Once the push button is disabled, during the subsequent push button disabled period, no push button operation command is sent to the sub-sub even if the player operates the push button.
Further, when the push button effect is executed, if the player does not operate the push button, the push button remains valid until the next game starts. Here, "until the next game starts" means, for example, if the replay does not stop in the current game, it corresponds to "until the bet is placed in the next game", and if the replay stops in the current game, This corresponds to "until the start switch 41 is operated in the next game".
In addition, the timing of "until moving to the next game" may be the same when the replay is not stopped in the current game and when the replay is stopped in the current game. For example, both timings may be set to "until the start switch 41 is operated in the next game".

FIG. 339 is a time chart showing an example of a slot machine in which push buttons are effectively managed by a timer in the 40th embodiment. In the figure, two dashed two-dot lines are lines that indicate the division between the main side and the sub-main side, and the division between the sub-main side and the sub-sub side (the same applies to FIGS. 340 to 344, which will be described later). ).

In FIG. 339, when the start switch 41 is operated by the player, the main (main control board 50) detects the signal and executes the lottery. Then, the lottery result command is sent to the submain. The sub-main executes a performance lottery according to a lottery result command (the result of the lottery result of the current game). In this example, it is assumed that an effect having a push button effect is determined (the following examples are similar). The sub-main sends a production designation command corresponding to the determined production to the sub-sub. Furthermore, at the same time as the production designation command is transmitted, a timer value (measurement of time until the push button is activated) corresponding to the determined production is started. The measurement time is determined by the determined performance, and is time T01 in this example.

When the sub-main determines that the timer has measured time T01, it activates the push button.
On the other hand, upon receiving the production designation command, the sub-sub starts production (video processing). Further, the effect designation command received by the sub-sub specifies that the display of the push button is to be started after the elapse of time T01 from the start of the effect. Accordingly, the sub-sub starts displaying the push button after time T01 has elapsed from the start of the performance in accordance with this performance designation command. Thereby, the timing at which the push button becomes effective and the timing at which the display of the push button starts can be made substantially the same from the start of the performance.
When the push button is operated by the player, the signal is transmitted to the sub-main. When the submain receives this signal, it disables the pushbutton. Furthermore, the sub-main sends push button operation commands to the sub-sub. When the sub-sub receives the push button operation command, it develops the effect (executes the effect corresponding to the push button operation). Furthermore, the display of the push button is ended.

The timing of transmitting the effect specification command is not limited to the operation of the start switch 41, but may be the operation of the stop switch 42 (at the first stop time, the second stop time, or the third stop time) as long as it is prior to the effect execution timing determined by the effect specification command. This also applies to the following examples.
It is also possible that the player may perform other operations (operations other than the push button operation), such as operating the stop switch 42, between the operation of the start switch 41 and the operation of the push button. In this case, the performance will develop by operating the push button even after the other operation by the player. In other words, the development of the performance by operating the push button is not affected by the other operation by the player. The same applies to the following examples.

FIG. 340 is a time chart showing an example of a slot machine in which push buttons are effectively managed using feedback commands in the 40th embodiment. In the example of FIG. 340, unlike the example of FIG. 339, the submain does not have a timer for measuring the time to enable the push button.
In FIG. 340, when the start switch 41 is operated by the player, the main detects the signal and executes the lottery. Then, the lottery result command is sent to the submain. The sub-main executes an effect lottery according to a lottery result command (a winning lottery result of the game). The sub-main sends a production designation command corresponding to the determined production to the sub-sub.

Upon receiving the production designation command, the sub-sub starts production (video processing). Furthermore, the effect designation command received by the sub-sub specifies that the display of the push button is to be started after the elapse of time T01 from the start of the effect. Accordingly, the sub-sub starts displaying the push button after time T01 has elapsed from the start of the performance in accordance with this performance designation command. When the sub-sub starts displaying the push button, it sends a feedback command (a command indicating that the display of the push button has been completed or that the display of the push button has started) to the sub-main. When the submain receives this feedback command, it activates the pushbutton. Thereby, the timing at which the display of the push button is started and the timing at which the push button is activated can be made substantially the same.

When a player operates a push button, the signal is sent to the sub-main. Upon receiving this signal, the sub-main disables the push button. The sub-main then sends a push button operation command to the sub-sub. Upon receiving the push button operation command, the sub-sub develops the presentation (executes the presentation corresponding to the push button operation). Furthermore, it ends the display of the push button.

341 to 344 are time charts showing push button validity management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Similarly to the slot machine 10, the pachinko gaming machine also includes a main, sub-main, and sub-sub. Specifically, "main" corresponds to the main control board 530 in FIG. 99 (nineteenth embodiment (B)). Further, in FIG. 99, the sub-control board 540 has a sub-main and a sub-sub. The sub-main controls the output of the production lamp 541 and the speaker 542, and the sub-sub controls the output of the image display device 543.

FIG. 341 is a time chart showing an example 1 of effective management of push buttons in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the 40th embodiment, and is an example of enabling the push buttons by timer management. Therefore, FIG. 341 is an example corresponding to FIG. 339 of the slot machine 10. This FIG. 341 and FIG. 342, which will be described later, show an example in which the push button is activated twice during one game.
In FIG. 341, when a game ball enters the starting port 532 (FIG. 99) and the starting port switch 533 (FIG. 99) is turned on, the main controller starts changing the special symbol display device 531 (FIG. 99) and , execute a jackpot lottery or a fluctuating pattern lottery. When the main determines the variation pattern, it sends a variation pattern command to the submain.

The sub-main performs a lottery for effects based on the received variation pattern, determines the effect, and sends an effect specification command corresponding to the determined effect to the sub-sub. In this example, the specified effects are output in the order of notice A to D → normal reach → super reach. Note that a "notice" is an effect that suggests the frequency of subsequent appearances of normal reaches and super reaches, and the expected probability of winning, depending on the type. Also, a "normal reach" is an effect that suggests a low to medium expected probability of winning, depending on the type. Furthermore, a "super reach" is an effect that suggests a medium to high expected probability of winning, depending on the type. While each of these effects is being executed, the effect patterns are varied. Also, the sub-main uses a timer to measure the time from the time the effect specification command was sent. Then, after time T11 has elapsed, the push button is enabled.

When the sub-sub receives the production designation command, it executes production (video) in the order of previews A, B → preview C, D → normal reach → super reach.
Further, when the sub-sub determines that time T11 has elapsed from the start of the performance based on the performance designation command, it starts displaying the push button. In this example, the display of the push button is started in the middle of the previews C and D. The effect specifying command sent from the sub-main to the sub-sub is specified to start displaying the push button after a time T11 has elapsed from the start of the effect. This makes it possible to substantially match the activation timing of the push button in the sub-main and the display start timing of the push button in the sub-sub at time T11 from the start of the performance.

Furthermore, this example shows an example in which the player did not operate the push button during the first push button performance (the same applies to FIG. 342, which will be described later). When the push button is activated, the submain uses a timer to measure time from the time the push button is activated. In this example, the valid time of the push button is time T13, and if the push button is operated before time T13 has elapsed since the push button was activated, an effect corresponding to the push button operation is executed, If the push button is not operated even after time T13 has elapsed since the push button was activated, the push button is deactivated.
Since the push button has not been operated even after time T13 has elapsed since the push button was enabled, the sub-main disables the push button. Then, a command to disable the push button is sent to the sub-sub. As a result, the sub-sub finishes displaying the push button.

Although not shown in FIG. 341, if the push button is operated before time T13 has elapsed since the push button was enabled, the sub-main disables the push button and sends a push button operation command to the sub-sub. When the sub-sub receives this command, it develops the performance (executes the performance corresponding to the push button operation) and ends the display of the push button.

The sub-main also continues to measure the time from the time the effect designation command was sent using a timer, and enables the push button after time T12 has elapsed from the time the effect designation command was sent. When the sub-main enables the push button, it uses a timer to measure time from the time the push button was enabled. In this example, the effective time of the push button is time T14, and if the push button is operated before time T14 has elapsed from when the push button was enabled, the effect corresponding to the push button operation is executed, but if the push button has not been operated even after time T14 has elapsed from when the push button was enabled, the push button is disabled.

On the other hand, when the sub-sub determines, based on the performance designation command, that time T12 has passed since the start of the performance, it starts displaying the push button. In this example, the push button starts displaying in the middle of a super reach. The performance designation command sent from the sub-main to the sub-sub stipulates that the push button starts displaying after time T12 has passed from the start of the performance. This makes it possible, as above, to roughly match the timing at which the push button starts displaying on the sub-sub with the timing at which the push button is enabled on the sub-main at time T12.
In this example, the push button is operated by the player before time T14 has elapsed since the push button was enabled.
In Fig. 341, if the push button is operated within time T14 (valid time), the timer for time T14 ends. Fig. 341 illustrates the valid time range of time T14 for the sake of convenience (this also applies to time T14 in Fig. 342, time T14 in Fig. 343, and time T43 in Fig. 344).

When a player operates a push button, the signal is sent to the sub-main. Upon receiving this signal, the sub-main disables the push button. Furthermore, the sub-main sends a push button operation command to the sub-sub. Upon receiving the push button operation command, the sub-sub switches the presentation (executes the presentation corresponding to the push button operation). Furthermore, it ends the display of the push button.
Thereafter, the sub-sub continues to execute the performance based on the performance designation command received from the sub-main, and ends the performance in accordance with the performance designation command.
On the other hand, when the main stops the fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531, it transmits a fluctuation stop command to the sub-main. Furthermore, this fluctuation stop command is also transmitted from the sub-main to the sub-sub. This allows the sub-main and the sub-sub to know that the fluctuation on the main side has ended.

Fig. 342 is a time chart showing Example 2 of push button activation management in a pachinko game machine in the 40th embodiment. This example differs from Fig. 341 in that it is an example in which the push button is activated by a feedback command without using a timer to activate the push button. Other than that, it is the same as Fig. 341.
In Fig. 342, the main starts the variation of the special symbols and executes the lottery for the big win and the lottery for the variation pattern. When the main determines the variation pattern, it transmits a variation pattern command to the sub-main.
The sub-main executes a performance lottery based on the received variation pattern, specifies a performance, and transmits a performance specification command to the sub-sub.

When the sub-sub determines that time T11 has elapsed from the start of the performance based on the performance designation command, it starts displaying the push button. Then, when the display of the push button is started, a feedback command (a command indicating that the display of the push button has been completed or that display of the push button has started) is sent to the submain. When the submain receives this feedback command, it activates the pushbutton. Thereby, without using a timer, the activation timing of the push button by the sub-main and the timing at which the sub-sub starts displaying the push button can be made substantially coincident at time T11 from the start of the performance.

Further, when the push button is activated, the sub-main uses a timer to measure time from the time the push button is activated. After time T13 has elapsed, the submain disables the push button. Then, a command to disable the push button is sent to the sub-sub. As a result, the sub-sub finishes displaying the push button.

Similarly, when the sub-sub determines, based on the performance designation command, that time T12 has elapsed since the start of the performance, it begins displaying the push button. Then, when it has displayed the push button, it sends a feedback command to the sub-main. When the sub-main receives this feedback command, it enables the push button. The processing thereafter is the same as that described above in Figure 341, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 343 is a time chart showing example 3 of push button activation management in a pachinko gaming machine in the fortieth embodiment, and this example is an example of activating a push button by a feedback command, similar to Figure 342.
In Fig. 343, the main starts the variation of the special symbols and executes the lottery for the big win and the lottery for the variation pattern. When the main determines the variation pattern, it transmits a variation pattern command to the sub-main.

The sub-main executes a performance lottery based on the received variation pattern, specifies a performance, and sends a performance designation command to the sub-sub. In the example of FIG. 343, unlike the example of FIG. 342, the effect designation command is divided and transmitted. The first production designation command is for outputting previews A and B. Upon receiving this production designation command, the sub-sub executes the production related to previews A and B. Further, the sub-main starts measuring time by a timer at the same time as sending the first production designation command.
Next, when the sub-main determines that time T31 has elapsed, it transmits an effect designation command for outputting previews C and D to the sub-sub. Upon receiving this performance designation command, the sub-sub executes the performances related to previews C and D.
Further, when the sub-main determines that time T32 has elapsed since the transmission of the first production designation command, the sub-main transmits a production designation command for outputting a normal reach to the sub-sub. Upon receiving this performance designation command, the sub-sub executes the performance related to normal reach.

Further, when the sub-main determines that time T33 has elapsed since the transmission of the first production designation command, the sub-main transmits a production designation command for outputting a super reach to the sub-sub. Upon receiving this performance designation command, the sub-sub executes the performance related to super reach.
In this way, the sub-main transmits the production designation command to the sub-sub four times, and the sub-sub sequentially switches the production each time it receives the production designation command.
Furthermore, when the sub-sub determines that time T12 has elapsed from the start of the performance based on the performance designation command, it starts displaying the push button. The subsequent processing is the same as the example shown in FIG. 342, so the explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 344 is a time chart showing example 4 of effective management of push buttons in the pachinko gaming machine according to the 40th embodiment. In this example, the push button has the function of popping out toward the ceiling. This push button can be pushed in the same way as a normal push button. Further, the push button protrudes toward the ceiling, deforms into a lever shape, and is configured so that the player can operate the lever.
In FIG. 344, the main starts variation, executes various lottery draws, and sends variation pattern commands to the submain. When the sub-main receives the variable pattern command, it determines the performance by lottery and sends the performance designation command to the sub-sub. The outline of the effect designation command is the same as that shown in FIG. 341.

The sub-sub sends a feedback command to the sub-main based on the performance designation command at a timing when time T41 has elapsed since the start of the performance. This feedback command requests the submain to transform the push button into a lever shape. When the submain receives this feedback command, it starts transforming the push button into a lever shape. When the sub-main completes transforming the push button into a lever shape, it sends an effect designation command to the sub-sub. This effect designation command is a command indicating that the transformation of the push button into a lever shape has been completed. Further, the sub-sub starts displaying the lever at a timing when time T42 has elapsed from the start of the performance based on the performance designation command. Furthermore, the sub-sub sends a feedback command to the sub-main on the condition that it has received the above-mentioned production designation command (command indicating that the transformation of the push button into a lever shape has been completed) from the sub-main. This feedback command is a command to enable the lever.

When the sub-main receives the feedback command, it activates the lever. Furthermore, from the moment the lever is activated, it starts measuring the effective time of the lever. In this example, the effective time of the lever is set to time T43.
In this example, the lever is operated by the player before time T43 has elapsed since the lever was enabled.
When the player operates the lever, the signal is sent to the sub-main. Upon receiving this signal, the sub-main disables the lever. Furthermore, the sub-main sends a lever operation command to the sub-sub. Upon receiving the lever operation command, the sub-sub develops the presentation (executes the presentation corresponding to the lever operation). Furthermore, it ends the display of the lever.
Thereafter, the sub-sub continues to execute the performance based on the performance designation command received from the sub-main, and ends the performance in accordance with the performance designation command.

On the other hand, when the main stops the fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531, it sends a fluctuation stop command to the sub-main. Furthermore, this fluctuation stop command is also sent to the sub-sub. This allows the sub-main and sub-sub to know that the fluctuation on the main side has ended.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 344, the sub-main executes a process after disabling the lever and returning the lever to its original shape by returning it to its original shape by the end of the game.

Although the thirty-seventh to fortieth embodiments have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
A. 37th Embodiment (1) In the 37th embodiment, in non-AT non-RT and RT1, in non-RT, the correct pressing order is notified when the pressing order bell is won at a predetermined rate, and in RT1, the correct answer pressing when the pressing order bell is won. The order was not announced. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in non-AT and RT1, the correct pressing order may be notified at a specific rate when the pressing order bell is won. During non-AT, if the correct pressing order is notified when the pressing order bell is won for both non-RT and RT1, it is possible to inform the player whether the current RT is non-RT or RT1. can be made difficult to understand. In this case, let "x" be the ratio of notifying the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won in non-AT and RT1, and "y" be the ratio of notifying the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won in non-AT and non-RT. In this case, "y=x+the predetermined ratio (in the embodiment, about 3.45%)" may be used.

(2) During the AT, if the ratio of instruction-included features in 175,000 plays is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 68% or greater), the instruction function need not be activated when the push order bell is won until the ratio of instruction-included features becomes a predetermined ratio (e.g., less than 65%). However, in such cases, rather than not activating the instruction function at all, the activation ratio of the instruction function may be reduced. For example, whether or not to activate the instruction function may be determined by lottery. In other words, during the AT, when the ratio of instruction-included features in 175,000 plays is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 68% or greater), the activation ratio of the instruction function may be set to less than "100%" rather than "0%."

(3) In AT and non-RT, when the small win D condition device is activated, an effect suggesting the winning of 1BB is executed, and when the role is not a winning combination (when the winning number for the game is "0"), an effect suggesting the winning of 1BB is not executed. However, without being limited to this, when the role is not a winning combination in AT and non-RT, an effect may be executed that allows the player to understand that it is possible to win 1BB (1BB may be won) within the limits that do not conflict with the rules. In this way, in AT and non-RT, it is possible to win 1BB without waiting for the operation of the small win D condition device.

(4) In the case of AT and non-RT, after 1BB is won, the performance during the AT will continue during the execution of the 1BB game unless the AT end condition is met. Therefore, when the push order bell is won during the AT and 1BB game, the correct push order is notified by the operation of the instruction function.
On the other hand, if the AT end condition is met during 1BB play, the next play will be non-AT and 1BB play. In this case, even if the push order bell is won, the instruction function will not be activated. Therefore, the correct push order will not be announced.
In addition, during AT and 1BB play, in a game in which RB is won, a performance may be executed suggesting that RB should be avoided. This is because when RB is won and the game shifts to RB play, the payout rate decreases.

(5) In AT and RT1, if the player accidentally wins 1BB when the small role D condition device is activated, there are two cases: to continue the AT as it is, or to terminate the AT as a penalty. .
In the former case, as in the above-mentioned AT and 1BB game, unless the AT end condition is satisfied, when the push order bell is won, the correct push order is notified by operating the instruction function. On the other hand, if the AT end condition is satisfied during a 1BB game, the next game will be a non-AT and 1BB game. In this case, even if the push order bell is won, the instruction function will not be activated. Therefore, the correct answer pressing order is not reported.
In the latter case, it will be a non-AT and 1BB game. In a non-AT and 1BB game, the instruction function is not activated even if the push order bell is won. Therefore, the correct answer pressing order is not reported.

(6) In the 37th embodiment, it is possible to win 1BB when the small win D condition device is activated. For this reason, during non-RT and non-AT, or during RT1, an instruction function is activated so as not to win 1BB when the small role D condition device is activated, and during non-RT and AT, when the small role D condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated. The instruction function was activated to encourage winning. However, this is not limited to this, and the instruction function to prevent winning of 1BB when the small winning D condition device is activated is not activated during non-RT and non-AT, or during RT1, and the small winning D It is also possible to not operate the instruction function for prompting the player to win 1BB when the conditional device is activated. Furthermore, although the instruction function is not activated, it is possible to execute a presentation suggesting to avoid winning 1BB or a suggestion presentation (performance using reel flash, audio, etc.) to encourage winning 1BB.
In this case, the instruction function is not activated when the small win D condition device is activated, and the instruction function is activated only when the small win A to C condition device is activated. Therefore, in this case, during non-RT and non-AT, the instruction function is activated when the small role A to C condition device is activated at a predetermined rate (approximately once every 29 times in the above example), but when RT1 and In a non-AT, it is also possible to set the rate at which the instruction function is activated to "0".

(7) In the 37th embodiment, in order to make the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio in 175,000 games less than 70%, when the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio in 175,000 games becomes 68% or more, AT It is allowed to restrict the operation of the instruction function even when the vehicle is inside. However, such regulation is arbitrary, and the ratio of operating the instruction function during AT may be set to "100"%.
From the above, the "rate of operating the instruction function" may be "0" or "100"%.

B. 38th Embodiment (1) In the 38th embodiment, although FIG. 303 is shown as an example of RT transition, the present invention is not limited thereto. It is possible to change the advantageousness of the lottery regarding AT depending on whether the period has shifted from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section.
Further, in the 38th embodiment, the AT lottery was executed while the RB was inside the 1BB game, but the AT lottery could be executed not only when the RB was not inside the RB or while the RB was in operation. Furthermore, it is also possible to arbitrarily set how the advantage regarding AT is changed in which gaming state and when what conditions are satisfied.
For example, when a special winning combination is drawn during a 1BB game and the special winning combination is won, a lottery related to AT may be given preferential treatment. In addition, if it is predetermined that AT-related drawings will be given preferential treatment when the specific gaming state shifts from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section, when a special winning combination is won during a 1BB game, the system will then shift to the specific gaming state. Sometimes, it is sufficient to shift from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section.

C. 39th Embodiment (1) In the 39th embodiment, when the specified number of non-RTs is "2", the same effect as when the specified number of RT1 is "3" is executed, and the game I tried to show it to people. Here, in a non-RT game where the specified number is "3," the player may be informed that the specified number is unintended by displaying a unique image or the like.
(2) When a game is played with a specified number of "2" in non-AT and RT1, the AT lottery is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the AT lottery itself is executed, it is also possible to ignore the AT winning probability (the winning probability exceeds "0", but the probability of winning is almost zero).
In addition, when executing an additional lottery for the number of games played during AT, if the specified number of games is "2", the additional lottery will not be executed, or the additional lottery itself will be executed but the additional winning probability will be ignored. Examples include cases.

D. 40th Embodiment (1) In the 40th embodiment, as an example of transmitting a feedback command from a sub-sub to a sub-main, the display of an image of a push button is started.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, firstly, the feedback command may be transmitted at the timing when the display of the above-mentioned 4-system effect is completed. This makes it possible to change the lighting mode of the lamps and the volume in accordance with the start timing of the 4th system performance.
A second method is to transmit a feedback command at the start timing of the push button fade effect described above. This makes it possible to change the lamp lighting mode and volume in accordance with the start timing of the fade effect.

Thirdly, in a pachinko game machine, an image corresponding to a reserved ball may be displayed on the image display device 23, and the image corresponding to the reserved ball may be changed (for example, by changing the color) to execute a reserved ball promotion effect that indicates that the reserved ball has a high chance of winning. In this case, a feedback command may be sent at the start timing of the reserved ball promotion effect. This makes it possible to change the lighting state of the lamp and the volume in accordance with the start timing of the reserved ball promotion effect.
Fourthly, in a pachinko game machine, a V display effect that indicates a jackpot may be executed. In this case, a feedback command may be sent at the start timing of the V display effect. This allows the lighting state of the lamp and the volume to be changed in accordance with the start timing of the V display effect.

E. Others (1) The first to fortieth embodiments and the modified examples of each of these embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.
(2) In the 37th to 40th embodiments, the slot machine 10 and the pachinko gaming machine 500 are used as examples of gaming machines, but for example, casino machines and medals used for gaming are not used as gaming media. It is also possible to apply it to enclosed game machines (medalless game machines), etc.

<Additional notes>
The inventions stated in the original specification etc. of the present application (original inventions) include, for example, the following original inventions 1 to 63, which are the problems to be solved by the original invention and the problems related to the original invention, respectively. The means and effects of the original invention are as follows. However, the invention described in this specification is not limited to Inventions 1 to 63.

1. Original invention 1
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 1 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that does not execute processing related to gaming media after a power outage occurs.
In conventional gaming machines, by turning off the blocker before executing the backup process as a power-off process, even if medals are inserted while the backup process is being executed, the medals are returned to the player via the blocker. Therefore, a technique is known in which the medal addition process is not performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-173832).
However, for example, if a power outage occurs at the moment a medal is inserted into the medal slot, the medal will pass through the blocker before the power outage process is executed, and the medal will be counted. There was a possibility. Note that it is not preferable in terms of control to execute medal addition processing (medal bet processing or medal credit processing) after the power is cut off.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to prevent the addition process of game media from being executed even if a power outage occurs at approximately the same time as the game media are inserted from the game media input slot. .

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 1 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (first embodiment (A)) is
a game media slot (medal slot 47);
It is provided in the passage (medal passage) for game media (medals) inserted from the game media input port, and is in a state that allows the passage of the game media (on state) or a state that does not allow the passage of the game media (off state). ) a blocker (45) controllable to
Detection means A (insertion sensor 44a) and B (insertion sensor 44b), which are provided in the path of the game medium input from the game medium input port and are capable of detecting the game medium (the detection means B is located downstream of the detection means A). ) and ,
When an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off while the blocker is controlled to allow passage of gaming media, the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected, and the game media is stopped. The time required to control the blocker to a state where passage is not permitted is T1 (T1 in FIGS. 2 and 3),
When a game medium is released from the game medium slot into the inside of the game machine while the blocker is controlled to allow passage of the game medium, the game medium cannot be seen from the front of the game machine. From when it becomes possible (position M2 in FIG. 2) until the detection means B detects the game medium and no longer detects the game medium (position M4 in FIG. 2). When the time is T2 (T2 in FIGS. 2 and 3),
T1<T2
It is characterized by making it so that

(c) Effects of Original Invention 1 According to the original invention, the power is cut off when the gaming media is released from the gaming media slot into the gaming machine and becomes invisible from the front of the gaming machine. In this case, by the time the detection means B no longer detects the game medium, the blocker is controlled to a state where the power supply is cut off and the passage of the game medium is not permitted. , at least not detected by the detection means B.
Therefore, since the game medium is not normally detected by the detection means A and B, the game medium addition process (bet process or credit process) is not executed. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs when the gaming media is no longer visible from the front of the gaming machine, that is, even if the power is interrupted immediately after the gaming media is released inside the gaming machine, the game You can choose not to accept media. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game media addition process from being executed after a power outage occurs.

2. Original invention 2
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 2 The original invention relates to gate marks on a board case in a game machine that includes a board case in which a control board is housed.
2. Description of the Related Art In conventional gaming machines, a board case that houses a main control board inside is known. Here, since the board case is generally formed by molding, gate marks remain on the board case. A technique has been proposed that uses this gate trace as a landmark (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-042270).
However, since the gate mark on the board case includes a cut portion of the resin, it is unclear when viewed from the outside. Therefore, there is a problem that the gate remains may be opened and the inside of the main control board may be accessed.
The problem that the invention was originally intended to solve was to suppress the tampering that took advantage of the gate marks on the board case.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 2 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (second embodiment) is
A predetermined IC (main CPU 55) equipped with a calculation function,
a control board (main control board 50) on which the predetermined IC is mounted on one surface (the surface facing the top surface of the upper cover 57);
A board case (a board case 56 consisting of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58) that has a plurality of surfaces (a top surface, a side surface, etc.) and houses the control board;
The board case is formed so that the inside thereof is visible,
Arranging gate marks (57b) during molding of the board case on a surface that is outside the board case and faces the one surface of the control board (outside top surface of the top cover 57);
The predetermined IC of the control board is not located in a direction perpendicular to the facing surface from the gate trace.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 2 According to the original invention, since the prescribed IC of the control board is not located in the vertical direction of the gate trace on the board case, the gate trace can be opened illegally and the prescribed IC can be accessed. This can be prevented.
Furthermore, since there are no gate marks on the board case in the vertical direction of the predetermined IC on the control board, the predetermined IC can be visually confirmed without being obstructed by the gate marks. This makes it possible to easily visually confirm whether or not a given IC has been tampered with.

3. Original invention 3
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 3 The original invention relates to processing when communication is restored from the disconnection after a disconnection occurs in communication between the main control board and the sub-control board.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventional gaming machines are known in which a main control board sends commands to a sub-control board, and the sub-control board controls an image display device or the like based on the received commands.
Here, there is a known technique in which the sub-control board compares the command received last time with the command received this time, and determines that there is an abnormality in command reception based on the consistency of these received commands (for example, Publication No. 2014-226503).
However, when transmitting commands from the main control board to the sub control board, disconnection may occur between the main control board and the sub control board. Then, when communication is restored, there is a possibility that the sub-control board will not be able to output normal effects.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to provide an appropriate effect when communication is restored after a disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub-control board.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 3 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (third embodiment) is as follows:
A main control board (50);
A sub-control board (80) that controls the performance based on information received from the main control board;
The sub-control board is capable of receiving information of an operated stop switch (42) from the main control board,
The sub-control board, in a predetermined game state (AT), is capable of outputting a performance corresponding to the operation of a stop switch based on the reception of information of the operated stop switch,
The sub-control board includes:
When a predetermined stop switch is operated on the "N" game number in the predetermined game state, when information that the predetermined stop switch has been operated is received, a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation of the predetermined stop switch (an effect when the reel corresponding to the predetermined stop switch stops) is output; thereafter, before all remaining stop switches on the "N" game number are operated, information from the main control board becomes unreceivable, and then, on the "N+a" game number, information from the main control board becomes receivable; thereafter, when information that a specific stop switch different from the predetermined stop switch has been operated is received on the "N+a" game number, an effect corresponding to the operation of the specific stop switch and related to the predetermined effect (an effect following the predetermined effect and when the reel corresponding to the specific stop switch stops) is output; and thereafter, when predetermined information is received on the "N+a+1" game number, an effect for the "N+a+1" game number is output based on the predetermined information.

(c) Effect of original invention 3 According to the original invention, when communication is restored during the "N+a" game, a performance related to the predetermined performance of the "N" game that had been output until then is output. Therefore, in the "N+a" game, the performance following the "N" game can be output. Since the normal performance is restored when the game moves to the "N+a+1" game, it is possible to prevent the performance from suddenly changing due to the restoration of communication during the "N+a" game. Thereby, it is possible to output a presentation that does not give an unnatural feeling before and after the occurrence of a disconnection.

4. Initial invention 4
(a) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 4 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that allows the stop switch to be operated at high speed.
In conventional gaming machines, when a stop switch is operated, the reel corresponding to that stop switch is stopped at a predetermined position corresponding to the lottery result. After the reel is stopped at the predetermined position, the motor is energized for a predetermined time. Here, while the operated stop switch is in the on state or the motor is in the excited state, the next stop switch operation is not accepted.
Here, there is known technology that prevents a stop operation from being accepted even if a second stop switch is operated until the reel status becomes stopped after the first stop switch is operated (see, for example, JP 2017-093576 A).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technology, if there is a long time between when the stop switch is operated and when the next stop switch operation can be accepted, there is a problem that the game cannot be completed quickly.
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is to enable the stop switch to be operated at high speed.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 4 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (fourth embodiment) is
A reel (31) and
a motor (32) for rotating the reel;
a reel control means (65) that drives and controls the motor to stop rotation of the reel based on detection of operation of a stop button (stop button 42a);
Comprising an internal lottery means (winning lottery means 61),
A sensor (detection sensor 42e) that detects the operation of the stop button is turned on until the stop button is pushed to the deepest position (the position shown in FIG. 12(c)), and when the stop button is released, the stop button is turned on. The button is configured to be movable to an initial position (the position shown in FIG. 12(a)) by biasing force, and the sensor is turned off before the stop button moves to the initial position,
In a game in which the internal lottery means has determined a predetermined result, the stop button is operated on a predetermined reel at a predetermined timing under a situation where all the reels are rotating by the reel control means, and the predetermined result is determined. After detecting that the sensor of the stop button for the reel is turned on, the predetermined reel is brought into an excitation state (four-phase excitation state) for stopping, and a predetermined time (T12 in FIG. 13) has elapsed since the excitation state was set. When this occurs, the excitation state is terminated.
When the time from the moment when the stop button pushed to the deepest part is released until the sensor turns off is T1 (T11 in FIG. 13), and the predetermined time is T2,
T1<T2
It is characterized by making it so that

(c) Effect of Original Invention 4 According to the original invention, it is assumed that the start of the motor's excitation state when the reel is stopped is the same as the moment when the stop button that has been pushed to the deepest point is released. Sometimes the excitation state ends after the sensor is turned off. Therefore, the next operation of the stop button can be accepted at the timing when the excitation state of the motor ends.

5. Original invention 5
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 5 The original invention relates to control of a medal payout device.
In conventional gaming machines, it is known that it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-214434).
Here, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor to rotate the hopper disk, but when a constant current is passed through the DC motor, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates from a stopped state. Then, it reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
For this reason, the rotation of the hopper motor's drive shaft gradually accelerates from the time the hopper motor starts driving until the first medal is ejected. The time required is longer than the medal ejection interval when the drive shaft of the hopper motor is rotating at a constant speed, and the player may feel that the first medal ejection is delayed.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to prevent the player from feeling that the first medal is delayed in being ejected.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 5 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (sixth embodiment) is
A hopper (35) for storing medals,
a hopper disk (101) provided in the hopper;
a hopper motor (36) for rotating the hopper disk;
A control means (main control board 50) for controlling the drive of the hopper motor,
The hopper disk is provided with a plurality of (eight) holding parts (102) along the outer periphery of the hopper disk that can hold medals stored in the hopper,
When the hopper motor is driven and the hopper disk rotates, the medals held in the holding part are sequentially ejected from the ejection part (103),
The position of the holding section where the last ejected medal was held at the moment when the last ejected medal in one payout process was ejected from the ejecting section is defined as a first position,
The position of the holding part where the first ejected medal in the next payout process is held at the moment when the last ejected medal in the one payout process is ejected from the ejecting part is a second position,
When the first payout process is finished, the control means controls a state in which the holding part holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process is located between a first position and a second position. The hopper motor is preferably driven so that the hopper disk stops rotating.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 5 According to the original invention, when the holder that holds the first dispensed medal stops between the first position and the second position, the distance it takes to reach the first position is shorter than when it stops at the second position. As a result, the time it takes to reach the first position is also shorter than when it stops at the second position, so even if the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor gradually accelerates, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the dispense of the first medal has been delayed.

6. Original invention 6
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 6 The original invention relates to the arrangement of the main control board attached to the inside of the cabinet and the sub-control board attached to the back surface of the front door.
Conventional game machines are known that include an electrolytic capacitor for power storage on a sub-control board for controlling effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-131656).
Here, the electrolytic capacitor for power storage is filled with an electrolytic solution, but if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a malfunction and the filled electrolytic solution scatters and adheres to the main CPU on the main control board, The main CPU may malfunction. Furthermore, there is a possibility that the main CPU will be damaged due to the impact when the electrolytic capacitor bursts.
The problem initially sought to be solved by the invention is to prevent the main CPU from malfunctioning even if an electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolyte is scattered. Another purpose is to prevent the main CPU from being damaged by the impact even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a malfunction.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 6 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (seventh embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) attached to the cabinet so as to be openable and closable;
a main control board (50) that controls the progress of the game;
Equipped with a sub-control board (80) for controlling the production,
the main control board is installed inside the cabinet,
The sub-control board is attached to the back side of the front door,
The main control board and the sub-control board are arranged to face each other when the front door is closed,
A main CPU (55) is arranged on the main control board,
The present invention is characterized in that an electrolytic capacitor (86) is disposed on the sub-control board at a position other than the position facing the main CPU.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 6 According to the original invention, since the electrolytic capacitor is arranged in a position other than the position facing the main CPU on the sub-control board, the electrolytic capacitor may explode due to a malfunction and the electrolyte Even if the electrolyte is scattered, it is possible to prevent the scattered electrolyte from adhering to the main CPU, thereby preventing the main CPU from malfunctioning.
Further, even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures, the main CPU can be prevented from receiving the impact directly, thereby preventing the main CPU from being damaged.

7. Initial invention 7
(a) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 7 The initial invention relates to reel stopping control on the main control board side and control of performance output on the sub-control board side.
Conventional gaming machines are known that are capable of executing multiple types of presentation content, and the probability of selecting each presentation content differs when a special role is won (internal) from when the special role is not won (non-internal) (for example, JP 2013-146608 A).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the content of the presentation is selected regardless of the result of the internal lottery, whether it is in the internal or non-internal state.
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is to appropriately determine the presentation to be output depending on the result of the internal lottery.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 7 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (ninth embodiment) is
A plurality of reels (31) displaying a plurality of symbols;
a plurality of stop switches (42) operated by a player when stopping each of the reels;
Main control means (main control board 50) that controls the progress of the game;
A sub-control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the production,
The main control means includes:
An internal lottery in which the drawing is conducted in such a way that there are cases where the first drawing result (for example, "BB" wins alone during a non-internal draw) or a second drawing result (for example, "non-winning" during a BB draw). means (rot lottery means 61);
a plurality of stop position determination tables defining stop positions of the reel corresponding to the position of the reel at the moment when the stop switch is operated;
reel control means (65) for determining the stop position of the reel using any of the stop position determination tables and stopping the reel at the determined stop position;
The reel control means determines the stop position of the reel using the same stop position determination table for a game that has a first drawing result and a game that has a second lottery result,
The sub-control means
A plurality of performance determination tables that define the performances to be output,
A production output control means (91) for determining a production to be output using any of the production determination tables and outputting the determined production;
The performance output control means is characterized in that the performance output control means determines the performance to be output by using different performance determination tables for the game resulting in the first lottery result and the game resulting in the second lottery result.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 7 According to the original invention, the reel control means stops at the same time on the main control means side in the game in which the internal lottery means has the first drawing result and the game in which the second drawing result has occurred. The stop position of the reel is determined using the position determination table, but on the sub-control means side, the performance output control means determines the performance to be output using a different performance determination table.
Thereby, even if the reel stop control on the main control means side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control means side, and effects can be diversified.

8. Original invention 8
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 8 The original invention relates to the gap between the cabinet and the front door.
In a conventional gaming machine, a protruding side that protrudes outward is provided at the edge of the opening on the front side of the cabinet, and the protruding side is configured to be accommodated inside the front door when the front door is closed. Therefore, it is known that the gap between the cabinet and the front door is bent to make it difficult for foreign objects to enter (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-198949).
However, it is conceivable that the front door may be slightly opened so that the protruding side is removed from the front door, allowing foreign objects to enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.
The problem initially sought to be solved by the invention is to prevent unauthorized acts (goto acts) in which foreign objects enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door by opening the front door a little.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 8 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (eighth embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) attached to the cabinet so as to be openable and closable;
and a door sensor that detects opening of the front door,
A first closing part (13c) is provided at the lower part of the cabinet, and the first closing part (13c) projects toward the front door when the front door is closed.
A second closing part (12a) is provided at a position below the first closing part in the lower part of the front door, and the second closing part (12a) projects toward the cabinet when the front door is closed;
A third closing part (12b) is provided at a position above the first closing part in the lower part of the front door and projects toward the cabinet when the front door is closed,
When the front door is closed, the first closing part is arranged between the second closing part and the third closing part,
The position of the front door when the door sensor first detects opening of the front door is defined as a detection start position,
Even when the front door is at the detection start position, the first closing part is arranged between the second closing part and the third closing part.

(c) Effect of original invention 8 According to the original invention, when the front door is opened from the closed state, the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door, and then the second closing part and the third closing part are connected. The first closed part will come out from between. Further, when the door sensor detects the opening of the front door, it becomes possible to notify that the front door is open.
Therefore, the first blocking part does not come out from between the second blocking part and the third blocking part before it becomes possible to notify that the front door is open, and the first blocking part does not come out from between the second blocking part and the third blocking part. Since the gap between the cabinet and the front door has a curved shape even in the position where it is possible to do so, it is possible to prevent unauthorized acts (goto acts) in which foreign objects enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

9. Original invention 9
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 9 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with an advantageous section indicator.
Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with advantageous section indicators have been known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in a conventional gaming machine equipped with an advantageous section indicator, lighting control of the advantageous section indicator upon recovery from a power cut has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem originally intended to be solved by the invention is to appropriately control the advantageous section indicator upon recovery from a power outage.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 9 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) in which the operation mode (correct answer press order) of the stop button (stop switch 42) can be notified;
an advantageous section in which the informed gaming state can be executed;
An advantageous section indicator (advantageous section display LED 77) indicating that it is an advantageous section;
If the power supply is cut off while the advantageous section indicator is lit, and the power supply is resumed with the setting change switch turned off, the advantageous section indicator is turned on after the interrupt processing is started. Enables processing to turn on the light,
After the power supply is cut off in a situation where the advantageous section indicator is lit, when the power supply is resumed with the setting change switch turned on, processing for turning off the advantageous section indicator; After executing the process, it is possible to proceed to the setting change process.

(c) Effect of the original invention 9 According to the original invention, when power is restored after a power outage, the advantageous zone indicator can be appropriately controlled depending on the situation.

10. Original invention 10
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 10 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with four reels and a stop button.
Conventional gaming machines generally have three reels and three stop buttons (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
It has also been proposed to increase the number of reels and stop buttons to four in conventional gaming machines. However, when the number of stop buttons is set to four, there is a problem in that it is easy to make a mistake in operating the stop button during AT.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to make it difficult for errors in operation of the stop button to occur when the number of stop buttons is increased to four.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 10 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (13th embodiment) is
Four reels (31A to 31D) and
and four stop buttons (stop switches 42A to 42D) corresponding to each of the four reels,
A predetermined operation button (24) is arranged above the four stop buttons,
At least a portion of the stop button (stop switch 42A) on the left end side is located vertically downward from the left end of the predetermined operation button,
It is characterized in that at least a part of the stop button (stop switch 42D) on the right end side is located vertically downward from the right end of the predetermined operation button.

(c) Effect of original invention 10 According to the original invention, even when the number of stop buttons is four, it is possible to operate the stop buttons on both the left and right ends using the left and right ends of the operation buttons as landmarks. , it is possible to prevent mistakes in operating the stop button from occurring.

11. Original invention 11
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 11 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that can specify a specified number of games.
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that allow games to be played with any one of a plurality of types of prescribed numbers (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, even if the game can be played with any one of a plurality of types of prescribed numbers, there are cases where an appropriate prescribed number and an inappropriate prescribed number occur.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to make it possible to play a game with an appropriate prescribed number of players.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 11 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (12th embodiment) is as follows:
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying the operation mode of a stop button (stop switch 42) is provided,
When the operation mode is notified in the notification game state, information corresponding to the operation mode (push order instruction information) can be displayed on a predetermined display unit (the number of acquisitions display LED 78);
In the notification game state, a game can be started when at least one of a plurality of prescribed numbers ("2" or "3") of game values is inserted;
In the notification game state, information corresponding to a prescribed number can be displayed on the predetermined display unit;
In the notification game state, when the information corresponding to the prescribed number is to be displayed on the predetermined display unit, the information is displayed at a predetermined timing (step S322 in FIG. 42) between after all reels have stopped and when the start switch is detected to be turned on.
When the information corresponding to the specified number is displayed on the specified display unit, it is displayed in a display manner that is distinguishable from the information corresponding to the operation mode (for example, when the specified number is "2", "0A" is displayed).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 11 According to the original invention, it is possible to display information corresponding to the specified number at a predetermined timing before the start switch is detected as being turned on, so that the player can be notified of the appropriate specified number for that game at the appropriate timing.
It is also possible to prevent the player from confusing the information corresponding to the operation mode with the information corresponding to the specified number.

12. Original invention 12
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 12 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a counter that counts the difference in the number of coins in the notification gaming state.
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that include a counter that counts the number of different coins during AT (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
In conventional gaming machines, it is required to initialize information regarding the advantageous section when the advantageous section ends. However, after the AT ends, there are cases where the next AT wins early, and there are cases where it is desired to carry over the difference in the number of tickets from the previous AT.
The problem originally intended to be solved by the invention is to initialize the information regarding the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section, while making it possible to carry over the difference in the number of coins from the previous notification gaming state (AT).

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 12 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification gaming state (AT) in which the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42) can be notified;
an advantageous section in which the informed gaming state can be executed;
In the first control means (main control board 50), the cumulative value of the difference number indicating the difference between the number of bets of gaming value and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same applies hereinafter), and the minimum value is set to ``0''. ”, a first difference counter (difference counter) that stores the value
The second control means (sub control board 80) includes a second difference number counter (sub difference number counter) that stores a cumulative value of difference numbers indicating the difference between the number of bets and the number of payouts of gaming value;
At the end of the advantageous section, the first difference counter is cleared (step S435 in FIG. 51 or 52), but the second difference counter may not be cleared.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 12 According to the original invention, since the first difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous section, it is possible to comply with the rule of initializing information regarding the advantageous section. In addition, the second difference number counter may not be cleared, and in that case, it becomes possible to take over the difference number of sheets from the previous notification game state at the start of the next notification game state.

13. Original invention 13
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 13 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a counter that counts the difference in the number of coins in the notifying game state.
Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a counter that counts the difference in the number of coins during an AT have been known (see, for example, JP 2018-000797 A).
However, in conventional gaming machines, there has been no sufficient consideration given to how to count (update) the difference in the number of coins when a replay is won.
The problem that the original invention is intended to solve is to properly execute the update process for the difference in the number of coins when a replay is won.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 13 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification gaming state (AT) in which the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42) can be notified;
an advantageous section in which the informed gaming state can be executed;
a difference counter that stores the cumulative value of the difference number indicating the difference between the number of bets of the game value and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same shall apply hereinafter), with the minimum value being "0";
Equipped with an advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) that counts the number of games played in the advantageous section,
1. At least in a game in which a small prize has been won, after all the reels have stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section ( Step S424 in FIG. 51 or 52),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is started without determining the value of the difference counter (without executing the process of step S434). Enables execution of the process for ending (step S435),
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter does not satisfy the end condition of the advantageous section ("No" in step S424), the update process of the difference counter (steps S428 and W429) is executed. After that, it is determined whether the value of the difference counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (step S434), and when it is determined that the value is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section ("Yes" at step S434). ''), the process for terminating the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed,
2. In a game in which the replay is won, after all reels have stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (see FIG. 51). or step S424 in FIG. 52),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section ("Yes" in step S424), the value of the difference counter is not determined (step S434). processing for terminating the advantageous section (step S435) without executing the processing),
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter does not satisfy the end condition of the advantageous section ("No" in step S424), the difference counter is updated without executing the update process of the difference counter. It is determined whether the value of is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52, if "Yes" in step S426, the process proceeds to step S434), and the value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section is determined. When it is determined that this is the case ("Yes" in step S434), the process for terminating the advantageous section (step S435) is enabled.

(c) Effect of original invention 13 According to the original invention, in a game where a replay is won, the difference counter is updated regardless of whether the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section. Since this is not executed, it is possible to appropriately execute the process of updating the difference in the number of coins in a game in which a replay is won. Furthermore, it is possible to speed up program processing.

14. Original invention 14
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 14 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that is capable of executing processing related to an instruction function in a predetermined number of games.
Conventionally, gaming machines having an instruction function have been known (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, the relationship between the specified number and the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately execute the process related to the instruction function and the process related to the advantageous section according to the specified number.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 14 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (11th embodiment) is as follows:
An informing game state (AT) capable of executing an instruction function for informing the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous zone in which the notified game state can be executed;
A favorable zone counter (favorable zone clear counter) for counting a predetermined variable related to the favorable zone;
A notification game counter (AT game number counter or AT difference number counter) for counting a specific variable (for example, a number of games or a difference number) related to the notification game state,
A game in which at least a first prescribed number (prescribed number "3") or a second prescribed number (prescribed number "2") of game value can be input,
In a game in the advantageous zone (AT), in a game started based on the insertion of a first specified number, a process related to the instruction function (for example, notification of the correct button press sequence) can be executed (in FIG. 48, step S382 is "Yes"), and in a game started based on the insertion of a second specified number, a process related to the instruction function cannot be executed (in FIG. 48, step S382 is "No").
In the notification game state, in a game started based on the insertion of the first specified number, the update of the advantageous zone counter is enabled (step S422 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), and the update of the notification game counter is enabled (step S333 in FIG. 43),
In the notification game state, in a game that is started based on the insertion of the second specified number, the update of the advantageous zone counter is made executable (step S422 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), and the update of the notification game counter is made inexecutable ("No" in step S332 in FIG. 43).
It is characterized by:

(c) Effect of original invention 14 According to the original invention, by making it possible to update the advantageous section counter by playing either the first specified number or the second specified number, it is possible to optimize the advantageous section. .
In addition, by not updating the notification game counter in the second specified number of games in which the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed, it is possible to maintain consistency between the execution of the process related to the instruction function and the update of the notification game counter. can.

15. Original invention 15
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 15 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having a signal line for starting.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, it has been known to use a harness consisting of a plurality of signal wires (lead wires) when electrically connecting control boards of gaming machines. One of the signal lines is a signal line related to starting.
In the prior art, since signals related to starting are used for lottery, it is necessary to suppress tampering with the signal lines related to starting.
The problem that the invention was originally intended to solve was to make it difficult to identify the signal line related to starting, and to suppress trilling.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 15 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (21st embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 10, pachinko gaming machine 500) equipped with a control board (main control board 50, 530),
having a plurality of signal lines (lead wires) electrically connected to the control board,
The plurality of signal lines include at least a first signal line, a second signal line, and a third signal line,
The first signal line is a signal line related to the start of the game (for example, the No. 7 lead wire of harness D in FIG. 111),
Both the second signal line (for example, lead wire No. 8 of harness D in FIG. 111) and the third signal line (for example, lead wire No. 3 of harness D in FIG. 111), This is a different signal line from the signal line related to the start of the game,
The first signal line and the second signal line have substantially the same diameter,
The first signal line and the third signal line have different diameters.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 15 According to the original invention, it can be made difficult to specify which signal line is the signal line related to starting. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the act of tampering with the signal line related to starting.

16. Original invention 16
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 16 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that is capable of outputting a setting change completion sound.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which any one of a plurality of setting values can be set.
In the conventional technology, the setting change process ends when the setting key is turned off, for example, and it is not possible to easily know from the outside the timing at which the setting change process ends.
Therefore, it is conceivable to notify the user when the setting change process is completed.
However, if you start playing the game immediately after the settings change process ends, if you notify that the settings change process has ended, the notification that the settings change process has ended and the notification output for the game will be the same. There is a risk that the notifications may be output at different times (overlapping), and important notifications output for the game may be difficult to understand.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to appropriately output a termination sound indicating that a setting change state has ended.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 16 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (19th embodiment) is
A gaming machine (slot machine 10, pachinko gaming machine 500) that can change the degree of advantage for the player,
Specific operation detection means for detecting that a specific operation has been performed in order to control either a setting change state in which the advantage level can be changed or a normal state in which the advantage level cannot be changed and a game can be started. (setting key switches 152, 535),
Equipped with a speaker (22, 542) and
In the setting change state, when conditions for transition to the normal state are satisfied, an end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended can be output from the speaker for a time T1 ("T01" in FIG. 96). and
The conditions for starting the game (in the case of the slot machine 10, the specified number of bets must be placed and the start switch 41 has been operated; in the case of the Pachinko gaming machine 500, the game ball must have entered the starting slot 532). In a game where the condition is satisfied, it is possible to end the game at time T2 ("T12" or "T22" in FIG. 96),
In the setting change state, after transitioning to the normal state, at least time T3 ("T11" or "T12" in FIG. 96) is required until the game start condition is satisfied;
When a game is started immediately after transitioning from the setting change state to the normal state, the following formula is established: T1<T2+T3 (T1>0, T2>0, T3>0 )
It is characterized by

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 16 According to the original invention, even if a game is started at the same time as the end of the setting change state, the ending sound indicating that the setting change state has ended is outputted before the game is ended, so the presentation outputted at the end of the game does not overlap with the ending sound indicating that the setting change state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the presentation outputted at the end of the game from being difficult to understand due to the ending sound indicating that the setting change state has ended.

17. Original invention 17
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 17 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that can set the net increase number and base value to appropriate values.
Conventionally, gaming machines in which both non-AT and AT are inside 1BB have been known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-029839).
However, in the above-mentioned 1BB internal medium spec, the ball output rate cannot exceed 1 even when playing in the most advantageous push order for the player, so the net increase during AT is increased. The problem is that it is difficult to do so.
The problem that the invention initially aims to solve is to make it possible to achieve a high net increase during AT without increasing the base value.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 17 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In the advantageous section, it is possible to execute a notification gaming state (AT) that can notify operation information (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch,
When the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination (1BB) is stopped and displayed, the special game (1BB game) can be executed,
The first situation (within 1BB) where the winning information of the special role is carried over in the advantageous section,
and a second situation (1BB in operation) which is an advantageous section and a special game is in progress;
In the first situation, there is no case to execute the notification gaming state,
In the second situation, there is a case where a notification game state is executed,
The ball output rate in the first situation (referring to the value obtained by dividing the number of game media given by the number of bets; the same applies hereinafter) is α, the ball output rate in the second situation and non-announcement gaming state is β, and the ball output rate in the second situation and non-information gaming state is β. The ball payout rate in the situation 2 and the notification game state (in a game where the operation information of the stop switch is notified, this refers to the ball payout rate when the stop switch is operated according to the notified operation information) is set as γ. When,
α＜β＜1＜γ
and
Let the probability of deciding to execute the notification gaming state in the non-notification gaming state of the second situation be x (a value larger than "0"),
When the probability of deciding to execute the notification gaming state in the non-notification gaming state of the first situation is y (“0” in the 23rd embodiment),
x<y
and
The second situation is characterized in that a predetermined value regarding an advantageous section (advantageous section clear counter value) can be updated in accordance with the execution of a game even in a non-information gaming state.

(c) Effect of original invention 17 According to the original invention, the ball payout rate in the special game increases more than in the non-special game, so by executing the notification game state during the special game, the ball payout rate in the notification game state is increased. rate can be increased. In addition, since the notification game state is not executed in a non-special game, the base value can be lowered.
Furthermore, when you move to a special game in a non-information game state, the ball payout rate does not exceed "1" and the predetermined value regarding the advantageous section is updated, so you do not have the right to a special game state. Even if the player shifts to gaming, it can be made such that there is no benefit to the player. In particular, when transitioning to a special game in a non-announcement gaming state, the probability of being determined to be in the notification gaming state is set lower than during a non-special game, so transitioning to a special game in a non-announcement gaming state is discouraged. can do.

18. Original invention 18
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 18 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that outputs a test signal.
Conventionally, gaming machines in which both non-AT and AT are inside 1BB have been known (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-029839).
However, in the above-mentioned 1BB internal medium spec, the ball output rate cannot exceed "1" even when playing in the push order that is most advantageous to the player, so the net increase during AT is increased. It's hard to let it happen.
Here, various specifications have been proposed that achieve a low base and a high net increase during AT.
In such a low base and AT medium/high net increase specifications, the question is what kind of test signal should be output.
The problem that the invention initially aims to solve is to make it possible to output an appropriate test signal even if the specifications are low base and AT mid-high pure addition.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 18 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (23rd embodiment) is as follows:
In a game where the winning information of the special role (1BB) has been carried over and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role can be stopped and displayed (the role condition device number is "1" and the winning and replay condition device number is "0"),
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (the main game state is "3" and the AT standby counter is "0"), a process for outputting a test signal ("0, 16, 7, 2") including operation information of a stop switch that enables a symbol combination corresponding to a special role to be stopped and displayed can be executed;
When the predetermined conditions are not satisfied, the device is characterized by being capable of executing a process for outputting a test signal ("0, 6, 127, 127") including operation information of a stop switch that does not stop the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role.

(c) Effect of original invention 18 According to the original invention, when the predetermined conditions are met, it is possible to output a test signal that can stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination, and when the predetermined conditions are not met, the special Since it is possible to output a test signal that does not stop displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, it is possible to output a test signal that does not stop displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, so it is possible to output a test signal that does not stop displaying the symbol combination that corresponds to the winning combination. It becomes possible to conduct a test using a different hitting method.

19. Original invention 19
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 19 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that prevents erroneous winnings of special winnings.
Conventionally, gaming machines that execute non-AT and AT in a state inside an MB have been known. In this case, in order to avoid the winning of MB which carries over the winning, it is known to notify the symbol to aim for in order to avoid winning of MB (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-147537).
However, the above-mentioned notification has a problem in that it may mislead the player. Furthermore, even if the notification is made after the MB is at full strength, if the time between the second stop and the third stop of the stop switch is short, the notification may not be made in time and the MB may end up winning.
The problem that the invention is originally intended to solve is to prevent the special winning combination from winning by mistake when the winning is carried over and the special winning combination that should be avoided is full.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 19 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
When the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination (1BB) is stopped and displayed, the special game (1BB game) can be executed,
In a game where symbol combinations corresponding to special winnings can be displayed in a stopped state, special winnings occur when a predetermined reel (third reel 31) is rotating and other reels (first and second reels 31) have stopped. If the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination are displayed in a stopped state (in other words, when the special winning combination is in full swing), the above-mentioned predetermined The reel is characterized in that the predetermined reel is not stopped even if a stop switch corresponding to the reel is operated.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 19 According to the original invention, even if the stop switch corresponding to a predetermined reel is operated, a predetermined reel will not stop until a predetermined condition is met, thus preventing erroneous winnings of special winnings. be able to.

20. Original invention 20
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 20 Same as original invention 19.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 20 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
When the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination (1BB) is stopped and displayed, the special game (1BB game) can be executed,
In the special game, it is possible to execute a notification game state (AT) in which operation information (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) can be notified,
In a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to a special winning combination can be stopped and displayed, a stop switch corresponding to a reel other than the predetermined reel (third reel 31) is operated, and a symbol combination corresponding to a special winning combination can be stopped and displayed. If the specified condition is not met (the waiting time has not elapsed) in the event that the special winning is 100% (so-called, the special winning is 100%), the stop switch corresponding to the reel other than the specified reel is operated. From the subsequent predetermined timing (initially when the standby time is saved in step S810 in FIG. 147) until the predetermined reel makes at least one rotation (at least 750.624 ms from the time of step S810 (one rotation time of the reel 31) ) is characterized in that the predetermined reel is not stopped even if a stop switch corresponding to the predetermined reel is operated.
(c) Effect of original invention 20 Same as original invention 19.

21. Original invention 21
(a) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 21 The original invention enables a ceiling function to be realized in a gaming machine provided with an advantageous section.
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that are provided with a ceiling counter and count the number of games that have passed without switching to AT (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-061760).
However, there were cases where the advantageous period ended while the ceiling counter was counting the number of games played. Here, since the ceiling counter is data related to the instruction function, it is considered that the data is cleared when the advantageous section ends. Therefore, if the advantageous period ends while the ceiling counter is counting the number of games played, there is a problem in that the ceiling counter is cleared.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to make it possible to realize a ceiling function even when an advantageous section is provided.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 21 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
A first lottery state (RT1) and a second lottery state (non-RT),
An advantageous section in which a notification gaming state (AT) can be executed that can notify operation information of a stop switch,
When the number of games in the first lottery state satisfies a predetermined condition (reaching 1400 games), it is possible to move to the second lottery state,
In the first lottery state which is an advantageous section, if the end conditions of the advantageous section are satisfied, it is possible to shift to the first lottery state which is a non-advantageous section;
Even when the first lottery state, which is an advantageous section, shifts to the first lottery state, which is a non-advantageous section, the number of games played in the first lottery state is continuously counted.

(c) Effect of original invention 21 According to the original invention, even if the advantageous section ends midway, the number of games played in the first lottery state continues to be counted, so that the number of games played in the first lottery state is counted based on the number of games played in the first lottery state. It becomes possible to provide a ceiling function.

22. Original invention 22
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 22 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that is capable of performing reel effects.
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that perform a reel effect in which the reels are temporarily stopped in a pseudo game (for example, Japanese Patent No. 5709176).
However, the pseudo game in the prior art was a reel performance based on the player's operation of a stop switch.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to execute reel effects without relying on the player's operation of a stop switch and to provide regularity to the timing at which the reels stop.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 22 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
It is possible to execute a reel performance (standby performance) in which each reel (31) is stopped at a predetermined scheduled stop position and a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed (standby performance start (M_TARPIC_EXE)),
When executing the reel effect, for each reel, information regarding the scheduled stop position (information in the reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT)) and the timer value until the reel can be stopped (reel effect execution timer table (TBL_TARPIC_TM#) ) information) can be stored,
Even if the predetermined reel reaches a timing at which the predetermined reel can be stopped at a scheduled stop position during execution of the reel production, the timer value corresponding to the predetermined reel is a value that allows the predetermined reel to be stopped. When the reel is not set, the predetermined reel is not stopped.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 22 According to the original invention, it is possible to provide regularity to the timing at which each reel stops in a reel performance using a simple method.

23. Original invention 23
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 23 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that outputs information related to preventing addiction.
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that output information regarding prevention of addiction upon completion of AT (for example, Japanese Patent No. 6288357).
However, the output of conventional information regarding prevention of addiction has been uniform.
The problem that the invention is originally intended to solve is to appropriately output information related to preventing addiction.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 23 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) that can notify operation information (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) is enabled,
In the case where it is determined that a plurality of sets of notified gaming states are executable, there is a case where, during execution of one set of notified gaming states, it is notified that the next set of notified gaming states will be executed,
In a situation where multiple sets of announced gaming states can be executed, if it is announced that the next set of announced gaming states will be executed while one set of announced gaming states is being executed, one set of announced gaming states will be executed. After executing the state and before the next set of notification game states is executed, information regarding prevention of addiction is not output (“Yes” in step S975 in FIG. 160),
In a situation where multiple sets of announced gaming states can be executed, if the notification that the next set of announced gaming states will be executed is not announced during the execution of one set of announced gaming states, After executing the notification gaming state, before the next set of notification gaming states is executed, information regarding prevention of addiction can be output (in FIG. 160, if "No" in step S975, step S978 is executed do)
It is characterized by

(c) Effects of Original Invention 23 According to the original invention, the output of information regarding prevention of addiction can be made to correspond to the notification contents in one set of notification gaming states. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the next set of notification game states will be executed or not depending on whether or not the information regarding prevention of addiction has been output.

24. Original invention 24
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 24 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that can output a continuation effect based on the operation of a stop switch.
In the prior art, it is known that when sending a presentation message from a control device to a presentation device, a message with a delay function is included to delay the execution of the presentation message after a set time has elapsed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-042759 Publication No.).
In the conventional technology, when delaying the performance at the third stop, it is necessary to transmit a command indicating the delay at the third stop.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to make it possible to delay the output timing of the effect without transmitting a command indicating the delay at the third stop.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 24 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
The timer value from a predetermined timing after a predetermined switch (start switch 41) is operated can be stored (step S993 in FIG. 161),
In a game that outputs a specific effect (the outcome of the effect), when the last operated stop switch is turned from on to off and the timer value has reached the predetermined value ("Yes" in step S995). ) allows a specific production to be output at the timing when the last operated stop switch turns from on to off.
In a game that outputs a specific effect, if the last operated stop switch is turned from on to off and the timer value is not the predetermined value, at the timing when the timer value reaches the predetermined value (step It is characterized in that a specific effect can be output (when the result in S995 is "Yes").

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 24 According to the original invention, it is possible to delay the timing of outputting a specific effect. Also, a player who does not want a specific effect to be output immediately can delay the output timing of the specific effect at his/her own will.

25. Original invention 25
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 25 The original invention relates to a gaming machine in which the output volume can be set.
In the prior art, it is known that the administrator (store side) sets the standard for the volume of the performance, and further allows the player to set the volume (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-074301). .
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technology, the volume is often set to a high level by the store, and in this case, even if the player sets the volume to a low level, the volume cannot be reduced to the level desired by the player. The problem is that it is not possible.
The problem that the invention is originally intended to solve is to enable a player who desires a low volume to be able to reduce the volume regardless of the settings made by the store.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 25 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (23rd embodiment) is as follows:
As a mode for setting the volume, a first volume setting mode (administrator mode in FIG. 162(A)) and a second volume setting mode (player mode in FIG. 162(B)) are provided,
The first volume setting mode can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on/off, when the setting is changed, or when the setting is confirmed).
The second volume setting mode is executable by a player,
The output volume is determined based on a volume set in the first volume setting mode and a volume set in the second volume setting mode,
The volume ("20" in FIG. 162(C)) of a predetermined effect sound (for example, the sound of operating the start switch 41, the sound of operating the stop switch 42, the ready sound, the sound of a winning hand, the GBM during AT, etc.) output when the volume is set to a predetermined volume (for example, "loud") in the first volume setting mode and set to the minimum volume (volume 1) in the second volume setting mode is approximately the same as the volume ("20" in FIG. 162(C)) of a predetermined effect sound output when the volume is set to a specific volume (for example, "small") in the first volume setting mode and set to the minimum volume in the second volume setting mode.

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 25 According to the original invention, when the volume is set to a predetermined volume in the first volume setting mode and when it is set to a specific volume, if the volume is set to the minimum volume in the second volume setting mode, a predetermined effect sound is output at approximately the same volume. This allows the volume to be set to the minimum volume in the second volume setting mode without being affected by the volume setting in the first volume setting mode.

26. Original invention 26
The initial invention relates to a gaming machine in which the output volume can be set.
In the prior art, a system is known in which an administrator (store) sets the standard for the volume of effects, and then allows players to set the volume (for example, JP 2017-074301 A).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technology, since it is not possible to grasp the specific volume level on the volume setting screen, the administrator is required to set the volume and then try playing the game.
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is to make it possible to know a specific approximate volume level when setting the volume.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 26 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (23rd embodiment) is as follows:
As a mode for setting the volume, a first volume setting mode (administrator mode in FIG. 162(A)) and a second volume setting mode (player mode in FIG. 162(B)) are provided,
The first volume setting mode can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on/off, when the setting is changed, or when the setting is confirmed).
The second volume setting mode is executable by a player,
The output volume is determined based on a volume set in the first volume setting mode and a volume set in the second volume setting mode,
In the first volume setting mode, icons corresponding to a plurality of selectable volume levels are displayed as images, and when any one of the icons is selected, a predetermined sound can be output at the volume level corresponding to the selected icon.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 26 According to the original invention, when setting the volume in the first volume setting mode, it is possible to grasp the approximate level of the set volume.

27. Original invention 27
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 27 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that executes predetermined instructions by a program.
It is known that a conventional gaming machine is configured from a plurality of modules (processing) in order to execute gaming control (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-104160).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technology, the instructions constituting the module are complicated, and there is room for improvement.
The problem that the invention originally seeks to solve is to simplify instructions.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 27 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (24th embodiment) is
It has multiple storage areas (RWM53) that can store data based on program execution,
As a program command,
Store the value of the reference address in a predetermined register (HL register),
A specific instruction (CLRHL ( HL), n),
Even after the specific instruction is executed, the value of the reference address is stored in the predetermined register.

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 27 According to the original invention, it is possible to clear the entire designated range (store "0") with one command.
In addition, the value of the base address is stored in a specific register, and even after the specific command is executed, the value of the specific register does not change (the value of the base address is stored). This makes it possible to read the value of the base address based on the value stored in the specific register even after the specific command is completed, eliminating the need for a process such as re-storing the value of the base address in a specific register, and thus simplifying the process.

28. Original invention 28
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 28 Same as original invention 27.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 28 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (24th embodiment) is
It has a storage means (RWM53) having a stack area,
It is possible to execute main processing (for example, FIG. 41) and interrupt processing (for example, FIG. 53) executed at a predetermined cycle,
As a program command,
A comparison operation is performed between a predetermined value stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register) and "n (n is an integer)" (for example, "n" is subtracted from the A register value), and the carry is calculated by the comparison operation. When the flag becomes "1", a specific instruction ("RCP C, A, n ”),
Even if the predetermined cycle of interrupt processing arrives during execution of the specific instruction, the interrupt processing is permitted after the specific instruction is completed.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 28 According to the original invention, since interrupt processing is not executed while a specific instruction is being executed, the value of the carry flag corresponding to the operation by the specific instruction is determined by the operation executed in the interrupt processing. It does not change. This prevents the value of the carry flag from being corrupted by interrupt processing and allows correct processing to be executed.

29. Original invention 29
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 29 The original invention relates to a method for specifying a combination of stopped symbols on an active line.
In conventional gaming machines, even if an abnormality occurs after the stop switch operation is accepted and an unintended symbol combination stops on the active line, the payout process is executed based on the stop switch operation. (For example, Japanese Patent No. 6229810).
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to more appropriately specify the stopping symbol combination.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 29 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (25th embodiment) is
Equipped with a storage area (stop symbol data (1st group) to (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) that can store data that can identify stopping symbol combinations,
A predetermined initial value (11111111 (B), 00001111 (B), or 00000011 (B)) can be stored in the storage area at a predetermined timing before the stop switch (42) is operated;
Obtain the stop symbol data (symbol combination data stored in the # reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_#)) corresponding to the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the active line on the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch. It is possible to execute a predetermined process that performs a calculation based on the stop symbol data and the data stored in the storage area, and stores data corresponding to the result of the calculation in the storage area (stop symbol set in FIG. 195). (M_STOPPIC_SET)),
Each time a stop switch corresponding to a rotating reel is operated, the predetermined process can be executed, thereby making it possible to update the data stored in the storage area.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 29 According to the original invention, even if the power is cut off during the game, the stop symbol data up to the middle of the game can be retained. In addition, after the stop position was determined but before the symbols stopped, the reels could not be stopped at the correct position due to an abnormality caused by a power outage or a motor drive abnormality (the correct symbol did not stop on the active line). ), it is possible to execute the payout process by assuming that the payout has stopped at the correct position. Therefore, no disadvantage is given to the player.

30. Original invention 30
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 30 Same as original invention 29.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 30 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (26th embodiment) is
Equipped with a data table (Reel symbol search table No. # (TBL_PICARG_#)) that stores data that can identify stopping symbol combinations,
Each reel is provided with a storage means (symbol array address buffers 1 to 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1 to 3)) capable of storing the address value of the data table,
The address value corresponding to the stop symbol can be stored in the storage means,
data can be obtained from the data table based on the address value stored in the storage means,
It is characterized by being able to execute a predetermined calculation for specifying a stopping symbol combination based on the acquired data.

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 30 According to the original invention, even if a power outage occurs during a game, data on the symbols stopped up to the middle of the game can be retained. Also, even if the reel cannot be stopped at the correct position (the correct symbol does not stop on the pay line) due to an abnormality caused by a power outage or a motor drive abnormality after the stop position is determined and before the symbol stops, it is possible to execute the payout process by assuming that the symbol has stopped at the correct position without putting pressure on the memory capacity of the RWM. Therefore, there is no disadvantage to the player.

31. Original invention 31
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 31 Same as original invention 29.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 31 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (28th embodiment) is
The first position of the first reel (for example, "1" in FIG. 230), the second position of the second reel (for example, "5" in FIG. 230), and the third position of the third reel (for example, "5" in FIG. 230). has a predetermined effective line (for example, effective line L1) that passes through "9"),
A first storage area (_WK_PIC_LFT1) that can store the symbol data of the first position, a second storage area (_WK_PIC_CEN2) that can store the symbol data of the second position, and a third memory that can store the symbol data of the third position. Equipped with area (_WK_PIC_RIG3),
The present invention is characterized in that the stop symbol combination of the predetermined active line can be specified based on the symbol data stored in the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area.

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 31 According to the original invention, even if the reel cannot be stopped at the correct position (the correct symbol does not stop on the pay line) due to an abnormality such as a power outage or a motor drive abnormality after the stopping position is determined and before the symbol stops, it is possible to execute the payout process by assuming that the symbol has stopped at the correct position without straining the program capacity. Therefore, the player is not disadvantaged.

32. Original invention 32
(a) Same as original invention 29.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 32 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (28th embodiment) is
As valid lines in a predetermined game, there is a first valid line (valid line L1) to an Nth (N>1) valid line (valid line L5),
It has a specific storage area (_WK_ALL_PIC) that can store data for specifying the stopping symbol combinations of all active lines in a given game,
In a given game,
It is possible to calculate the first data (_WK_PIC_L1) corresponding to the stop symbol combination of the first active line,
It is possible to calculate the Nth data (_WK_PIC_L5) corresponding to the stop symbol combination of the Nth active line,
The first data corresponding to the stop symbol combination on the first active line to the Nth data corresponding to the stop symbol combination on the Nth active line are synthesized by a predetermined operation (logical OR), and the synthesized data is stored in a specific storage area. It is characterized by being able to be memorized.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 32 According to the original invention, after the stop position is determined but before the symbols stop, the reels cannot be stopped at the correct position due to an abnormality due to a power outage or a motor drive abnormality. Even if the correct symbol does not stop at the active line, it is possible to assume that the correct symbol has stopped at the correct position and execute the payout process without compressing the capacity of the program. Therefore, no disadvantage is given to the player.
Furthermore, since the winning determination is not made for each active line, but the winning judgment is made based on a specific storage area, the number of payout coins can be determined at once.

33. Original invention 33
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 33 The original invention relates to a data table for acquiring symbol data of symbols on a pay line.
In conventional gaming machines, it is known to store a symbol arrangement in order to identify symbols on a winning line (for example, JP 2015-039456 A).
The problem that the original invention is intended to solve is to more appropriately acquire symbol data of symbols on a pay line.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 33 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (Example 1 of the 27th embodiment (or 25th embodiment)) is
The reels include at least a predetermined reel (left reel 31) and a specific reel (middle reel 31),
The position of the active line of the predetermined reel (upper stage) and the position of the active line of the specific reel (middle stage) are positions that do not match on the horizontal line,
A predetermined data table that stores the symbol data of the predetermined reel (the symbol arrangement table of the left reel in FIG. 228(B)) and a specific data table that stores the symbol data of the specific reel (the middle, in FIG. 228(B)) Reel symbol arrangement table)
In the predetermined data table, symbol data corresponding to symbol number
In the specific data table, symbol data corresponding to symbol number Y (Y≠X) (symbol number 1) is stored at the top address (1100 (H)) where symbol data is stored. .

(c) Effects of Original Invention 33 According to the original invention, symbol data on the active line can be obtained by a simple method without performing complicated calculations.

34. Original invention 34
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 34 Same as original invention 33.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 34 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (Example 1 of the 27th embodiment (or 25th embodiment)) is
A first position (lower left) which is a reference position of a predetermined reel (left reel 31), and a second position (the second position is different from the first position) which is a symbol position on at least one active line of the predetermined reel. ) (top left),
Equipped with a data table (symbol arrangement table in FIG. 228(B)) storing symbol data,
In a game in which a symbol with a predetermined symbol number (number 0) on the predetermined reel stops at the first position, the symbol data ( The feature is that it is possible to obtain the symbol data of symbol number 2).

(c) Effects of the original invention 34 According to the original invention, symbol data on the active line can be obtained by a simple method without performing complicated calculations.
In addition, a reference position (reference line) is set up separately from the active line, and the symbols on the active line are specified based on this reference position, so even if there is a change in the active line, the change can be easily accommodated. be able to. In other words, data and programs can be easily modified.

35. Original invention 35
(a) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 35: Same as Original Invention 33.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 35 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The invention of the initial claim 1 (Example 1 of the 27th embodiment) is as follows:
The reels include at least a predetermined reel (right reel 31) and a specific reel (center reel 31);
A first position (lower right row) which is a reference position of the predetermined reel and which is a symbol position on at least one pay line of the predetermined reel;
a second position (the second position and the first position are located on the same horizontal line) (middle lower row) which is a reference position of the specific reel, and a third position (the third position ≠ the second position) (middle middle row) which is a symbol position on at least one pay line of the specific reel,
a predetermined data table (the symbol arrangement table of the right reel in FIG. 228(B)) storing symbol data of the predetermined reel, and a specific data table (the symbol arrangement table of the center reel in FIG. 228) storing symbol data of the specific reel,
In the predetermined data table, the head address of the symbol data stores symbol data of symbol number X (0),
In the specific data table, the head address storing the symbol data stores symbol data of symbol number Y (Y≠X) (number 1),
In a game in which a symbol of a specific symbol number on the specific reel stops at a second position, the present invention is characterized in that it is possible to obtain symbol data of a symbol that will stop at a third position on the specific reel based on the specific symbol number and the specific data table.
The invention of claim 2 is as follows:
The reels include at least a predetermined reel (left reel 31) and a specific reel (center reel 31);
a first position (lower left row) which is a reference position of the predetermined reel, and a second position (the second position may be the same as the first position) (upper left row) which is a symbol position on at least one pay line of the predetermined reel,
a third position (the third position and the first position are located on the same horizontal line) (middle lower row) which is a reference position of the specific reel, and a fourth position (the fourth position ≠ the third position) (middle middle row) which is a symbol position on at least one pay line of the specific reel,
a predetermined data table (in FIG. 228(B), a symbol arrangement table for the left reel) storing symbol data for the predetermined reel, and a specific data table (in FIG. 228(B), a symbol arrangement table for the center reel) storing symbol data for the specific reel,
In the predetermined data table, the head address (1000(H)) storing the symbol data stores symbol data of symbol number X (number 2),
In the specific data table, the head address (1100(H)) storing the symbol data stores symbol data of symbol number Y (Y≠X) (number 1),
In a game in which a symbol of a predetermined symbol number (number 0) of the predetermined reel stops at a first position, symbol data of a symbol that will stop at a second position of the predetermined reel (symbol data of symbol number 2) can be obtained based on the predetermined symbol number and the predetermined data table;
In a game in which a symbol with a specific symbol number (number 0) on the specific reel stops at the third position, the device is characterized in that it is possible to obtain symbol data (symbol data with symbol number 1) of a symbol that will stop at the fourth position on the specific reel based on the specific symbol number and the specific data table.

(c) Effect of original invention 35 Same as original invention 34.

36. Original invention 36
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 36 Same as original invention 33.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 36 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (Example 2 of the 27th embodiment) is
A first position (upper right row) which is a reference position of a predetermined reel (right reel 31), and a second position (the second position is different from the first position) which is a symbol position on at least one active line of the predetermined reel. ) (lower right),
a storage means (ROM 54 or RWM 53) that stores or is capable of storing information (difference data) for specifying the second position of the predetermined reel from the first position of the predetermined reel;
Comprising a data table (Fig. 229(B)) storing symbol data,
The present invention is characterized in that symbol data of a symbol to be stopped at a second position of the predetermined reel can be acquired based on the first position of the predetermined reel, information in the storage means, and the data table.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 36 According to the original invention, symbol data on the active line can be obtained by a simple method without performing complicated calculations.
In addition, a reference position (reference line) is set up separately from the active line, and the symbols on the active line are specified based on this reference position, so even if there is a change in the active line, the change can be easily accommodated. be able to. In other words, data and programs can be easily modified.
Furthermore, even if there is a change in the effective line, it is only necessary to change the data in the storage means without changing the data table.

37. Original invention 37
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 37 The original invention relates to a method for determining the number of game media to be awarded corresponding to a combination of symbols stopped on a pay line.
In conventional gaming machines, a method is known in which a payout number is determined using a payout table when a symbol combination corresponding to a minor winning combination stops on an active line (for example, JP 2006-130066 A).
The problem that the initial invention is to solve is to more appropriately determine the number of game media to be awarded corresponding to a combination of symbols stopped on a pay line.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 37 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (25th embodiment) is
Equipped with a predetermined storage area (stop symbol data (1st group) to (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) that can store data for specifying stop symbol combinations,
The data stored in the predetermined storage area and the data for determining whether the symbol combination that gives the gaming value "X" has stopped (stored in the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) in FIG. 195) data) and perform a predetermined calculation (processing shown in FIG. 200),
Based on the calculation result of the predetermined calculation, it is possible to decide whether to give a gaming value "X" (for example, 15 coins);
If it is not decided to give the gaming value "X" based on the calculation result of the predetermined calculation (in FIG. 201, all bits of the stop symbol data (fifth group) and stop symbol data (sixth group ), if the result is "No" in step S1118), the data stored in the predetermined storage area and the gaming value "Y" (Y≠X) (3 pieces ) is capable of executing the predetermined calculation based on data for determining whether or not the symbol combination that gives the symbol combination is stopped;
The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to determine whether or not to award a gaming value "Y" based on the calculation result of the predetermined calculation.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 37 According to the original invention, since the search is performed in order based on the number of coins to be paid out, it is possible to specify the number of coins to be paid out in a simple manner.

38. Original invention 38
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 38 Same as original invention 37.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 38 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (25th embodiment) is
A predetermined storage area (stop symbol data (first group) to (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) capable of storing data for specifying stop symbol combinations;
It is equipped with an award number table (the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) in FIG. 193) that stores data that can specify the number of awarded gaming values,
The award number table stores at least collation data (specified data) for comparing with data for specifying a stopped symbol combination, and data on the number of gaming values awarded (obtained data),
In a situation where predetermined data is stored in the predetermined storage area, the number of game values to be awarded can be determined based on the predetermined data and verification data stored in the number to be awarded table. do.

(c) Effect of original invention 38 Same as original invention 37.

39. Original invention 39
(a) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 39: Same as Original Invention 37.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 39 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The invention of the initial claim 1 (25th embodiment) is as follows:
A predetermined memory area (stop symbol data (first group) to (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) capable of storing data for identifying a stop symbol combination is provided,
As a symbol combination that gives a game value "X" (15 pieces), there are a plurality of symbol combinations (symbol combinations of small role 01 to small role 12),
As a symbol combination that gives a game value "Y" (3 pieces), there is at least one symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination of a small role 13),
Among the predetermined storage areas, the data storage areas (bits or addresses) for identifying the symbol combination that gives the game value "X" are continuous,
Among the predetermined storage areas, a data storage area for specifying a symbol combination for awarding a game value "Y" is not present among a plurality of data storage areas for specifying a symbol combination for awarding a game value "X",
This is characterized in that after determining whether or not a symbol combination that gives a game value "X" has stopped, it is possible to determine whether or not a symbol combination that gives a game value "Y" has stopped.

The invention of the initial claim 2 (25th embodiment) is as follows:
A predetermined memory area (stop symbol data (first group) to (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) capable of storing data for identifying a stop symbol combination is provided,
As a symbol combination that gives a game value "X" (15 pieces), there are a plurality of symbol combinations (symbol combinations of small role 01 to small role 12),
As a symbol combination that gives a game value "Y" (3 pieces), there is at least one symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination of a small role 13),
Among the predetermined storage areas, the data storage areas (bits or addresses) for identifying the symbol combination that gives the game value "X" are continuous,
Among the predetermined storage areas, a data storage area for specifying a symbol combination for awarding a game value "Y" is not present among a plurality of data storage areas for specifying a symbol combination for awarding a game value "X",
This is characterized in that after determining whether or not a symbol combination that gives a game value "Y" has stopped, it is possible to determine whether or not a symbol combination that gives a game value "X" has stopped.

In addition, when the "data storage area for specifying the symbol combination that gives the gaming value 'X'" is in bit units as in the 25th embodiment, the "data storage area for specifying the symbol combination that gives the gaming value 'X'""The data storage area for specifying is continuous." means, for example, in the stop symbol data (fifth group), 15 symbols are paid out from the D0 bit corresponding to the small winning symbol 01 that pays out 15 symbols. This indicates that up to D7 bits corresponding to the small winning combination 08 winning symbol to be issued are continuous.
In addition, "a data storage area for specifying a symbol combination that provides a gaming value of 'Y' does not exist between a plurality of data storage areas for specifying a symbol combination that provides a gaming value of 'X'," ” means, in the stop symbol data (fifth group), from the D0 bit corresponding to the minor winning symbol 01 that pays out 15 pieces to the D7 bit corresponding to the minor winning symbol 08 winning symbol that pays out 15 pieces. , indicates that there is no bit corresponding to the small winning symbol that pays out 3 or 1 coin.

On the other hand, when the "data storage area for identifying the symbol combination that gives the game value "X"" is an address unit, as shown in the above-mentioned modified example,
Stop pattern data (5th group): Small prize 01 winning pattern to small prize 08 winning pattern (15 coins paid out)
Stop pattern data (6th group): Small prize 09 winning pattern to small prize 12 winning pattern (15 coins paid out)
Stop pattern data (7th group): Small prize 13 winning pattern to small prize 20 winning pattern (3 coins paid out)
Stop pattern data (8th group): Small prize 21 winning pattern to small prize 24 winning pattern (3 coins paid out)
Stop pattern data (9th group): Small prize 25 winning pattern to small prize 32 winning pattern (1 coin paid out)
Stop pattern data (10th group): Small prize 33 winning pattern to small prize 34 winning pattern (1 coin paid out)
This corresponds to a case where a separate address is used for each payout amount.
In this case, "the data memory area for identifying the symbol combination that awards the game value "X" is continuous" means that, for example, the addresses of the stopping symbol data (fifth group) that pays out 15 coins and the stopping symbol data (sixth group) are continuous.
In addition, "there is no data memory area for specifying a pattern combination that awards a game value of "Y" among a plurality of data memory areas for specifying a pattern combination that awards a game value of "X"," means that there are no addresses of the stopping pattern data (seventh group) to the stopping pattern data (tenth group) between the address of the stopping pattern data (fifth group) that pays out 15 coins and the address of the stopping pattern data (sixth group).

(c) Effects of Original Invention 39 According to the original invention, predetermined operations can be executed in the order of addresses of predetermined storage areas, and programs can be simplified.

40. Original invention 40
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 40 Same as original invention 37.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 40 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (26th embodiment) is
Equipped with an award number table (payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) in FIGS. 220 and 221) for determining the number of gaming values awarded,
It is possible to generate predetermined data based on the stop symbol combination,
The address of the grant number table can be specified based on the bit position having a predetermined value in the predetermined data (steps S1189 to S1192 in FIG. 227);
The number of grants can be determined based on the data stored in the address of the number of grants table (steps S1192 and S1193 in FIG. 227).
It is characterized by

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 40 According to the original invention, since only the bit corresponding to the winning is set to a predetermined value, the number of coins to be paid out can be specified in a simple manner.

41. Original invention 41
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 41 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that uses a stepping motor as a motor for rotating the reels.
Conventional gaming machines are known to use a stepping motor as a motor for rotating the reels, and to output four-phase excitation to the stepping motor when stopping the reels (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-016110 Publication No.).
Here, in conventional gaming machines, a DC motor (direct current motor) is generally used as a hopper motor for rotating a hopper disk.
However, since a DC motor requires a relatively large current when driving, if it is possible to apply game media while outputting four-phase excitation to the stepping motor, the hopper drive control associated with the application of game media will be affected. There is a possibility that the necessary current cannot be secured.
The problem initially sought to be solved by the invention is to make it possible to secure the current necessary to drive and control the hopper associated with the provision of game media.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 41 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (29th embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
When the number of credits is the upper limit ("50"), a predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won in the winning lottery means 61, the small prize A1 condition device is activated, and the winning number 15 is won. Either the small winning combination 01, which pays out , or the small winning combinations 13 to 17, which pays out 3 pieces, can be won), and in a situation where "N-1" (2) reels are stopped, When the operation of the stop switch (42) corresponding to the "N" (third) reel is accepted, a specific symbol combination (for example, a small payout that results in a payout of 3 pieces) in which game media (medals) are awarded. In a game where symbol combinations corresponding to winning combination 13 are stopped and displayed, an excitation output for stopping the "N" reel after the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is accepted. Even if the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is released at a predetermined timing before the elapse of the predetermined period for performing It is possible to perform drive signal output processing that outputs
When the number of credits is "0", the predetermined lottery result is obtained, and in a situation where "N-1" reels are stopped, operating a stop switch corresponding to the "N"reel; is received and the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed, after the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is accepted, excitation for stopping the "N" reel is performed. Even if the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is released at a predetermined timing before the elapse of the predetermined period for outputting, the number of credits is added after the elapse of the predetermined period. It is characterized by being able to execute processing.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 41 According to the original invention, the hopper drive signal can be output after a predetermined period of excitation output for stopping the reels has elapsed, so the hopper is driven when game media are dispensed. The current necessary for control can be secured.
In addition, when the number of credits is the upper limit value and the hopper is driven to give game media, and when the number of credits is "0" and the number of credits is added to give game media, the reel It is possible to carry out common processing until a predetermined period of time in which excitation output is performed to stop the operation has elapsed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing and reduce the amount of ROM used by the program.

42. Original invention 42
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 42 Same as original invention 41.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 42 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (29th embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
When a predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small winning combination 01 becomes a payout of 15 pieces, or a small winning number 01 becomes a payout of 3 pieces. Any of the small winnings 13 to 17 can win), and in a situation where "N-2" (1) reels are stopped, "N-1" (2nd) reel is played. When the operation of the stop switch (42) corresponding to the "N" (third) reel is accepted at a predetermined timing before the elapse of a predetermined period for outputting excitation to stop the reel. Also, it is possible to execute control for stopping the “N” reel,
When the predetermined lottery result is obtained and "N-1" reels are stopped, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is accepted, and the game media (medals) are released. In a game where a specific symbol combination to be awarded (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 that results in a payout of 3 pieces) is stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is not accepted. After that, the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is released at a predetermined timing before the elapse of a predetermined period for performing excitation output to stop the "N" reel. However, after the predetermined period has elapsed, control for awarding game media can be executed.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 42 According to the original invention, since it is possible to execute control for dispensing gaming media after a predetermined period of time during which excitation output is performed to stop the reels, the hopper accompanying the dispensing of gaming media The current required for drive control can be secured.
Furthermore, even before the predetermined period for performing excitation output for stopping the "N-1" reel has elapsed, the control for stopping the "N" reel can be executed. , the game can proceed smoothly.

43. Original invention 43
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 43 Same as original invention 41.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 43 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (29th embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
When a predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small winning combination 01 becomes a payout of 15 pieces, or a small winning number 01 becomes a payout of 3 pieces. Any of the small winnings 13 to 17 can win), and in a situation where "N-2" (1) reels are stopped, "N-1" (2nd) reel is played. When the operation of the stop switch (42) corresponding to the "N" (third) reel is accepted at a predetermined timing before the elapse of a predetermined period for outputting excitation to stop the reel. Also, it is possible to execute control for stopping the “N” reel,
When the predetermined lottery result is obtained and "N-1" reels are stopped, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is accepted, and the game media (medals) are released. In a game where a specific symbol combination to be awarded (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 that results in a payout of 3 pieces) is stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is not accepted. After that, the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is released at a predetermined timing before the elapse of a predetermined period for performing excitation output to stop the "N" reel. even if the predetermined period of time has elapsed, control for awarding game media can be executed;
The present invention is characterized in that the maximum value of current required for excitation output to stop the reel is designed to be smaller than the maximum value of current required to drive the hopper.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 43 According to the original invention, it is possible to execute control for dispensing game media after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since excitation output is performed to stop the reel, so that it is possible to secure the current necessary for driving control of the hopper associated with the dispensing of game media.
In addition, since control for stopping the "N"th reel can be executed even before the specified period for performing excitation output for stopping the "N-1"th reel has elapsed, the game can proceed smoothly.
Furthermore, since the maximum value of the current required for the excitation output to stop the reels is designed to be smaller than the maximum value of the current required to drive the hopper, it is possible to simultaneously execute stopping control of multiple reels.

44. Original invention 44
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 44 Same as original invention 41.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 44 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (30th embodiment) is
"N" (3) reels (31),
Storage means (reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) of RWM53) capable of storing information (data from "0 to 108 (D)") for measuring the period during which excitation output is performed to stop the reel (FIG. 237) ) and ,
When a predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small winning combination 01 becomes a payout of 15 pieces, or a small winning number 01 becomes a payout of 3 pieces. Any of the small winnings 13 to 17 can win), and in a situation where "N-1" (2) reels are stopped, it corresponds to the "N" (third) reel. In a game where the operation of the stop switch (42) is accepted and a specific symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination 13 that results in a payout of 3 pieces) for which game media (medals) are awarded is stopped and displayed. , at a predetermined timing after the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is accepted and before the period for performing excitation output to stop the "N" reel has elapsed. , even if the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is released ("No" in step S1314 in FIG. 238), the information stored in the storage means will remain at a predetermined value ("0"). ) (“Yes” in step S1342 of FIG. 241), control for awarding game media (medal payout at the time of winning in step S294 of FIG. 238) can be executed.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 44 According to the original invention, the storage means capable of storing information for measuring the period of excitation output for stopping the reel is provided, and the information stored in the storage means is set to a predetermined value. After that, control for dispensing game media can be executed, so that it is possible to secure the current necessary for drive control of the hopper in conjunction with dispensing game media.
Further, based on the information stored in the storage means, it can be easily determined that the period for performing excitation output for stopping the reels has elapsed.

45. Original invention 45
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 45 Same as original invention 41.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 45 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (31st embodiment) is
"N" (3) reels (31),
A storage means (#th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) of RWM53 (_PT_MOTOR#) (FIG. 134)) capable of storing information regarding the excitation output of the motor related to the reel;
When a predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small winning combination 01 becomes a payout of 15 pieces, or a small winning number 01 becomes a payout of 3 pieces. Any of the small winnings 13 to 17 can win), and in a situation where "N-1" (2) reels are stopped, it corresponds to the "N" (third) reel. In a game where the operation of the stop switch (42) is accepted and a specific symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination 13 that results in a payout of 3 pieces) for which game media (medals) are awarded is stopped and displayed. , after the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is accepted, information indicating that excitation output is to be performed to stop the "N" reel (deceleration pulse data "00001111(B)'' (4-phase on)) is stored in the storage means ("Yes" in step S1355 of FIG. 242), and the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is released ( If "No" in step S1354 of FIG. 242), control for awarding game media (medal payout at the time of winning in step S294 of FIG. 242) is not executed, and the information stored in the storage means is changed to the predetermined information. (Stop pulse data "00000000 (B)") ("No" in step S1355 in FIG. 242), the control for giving game media can be executed.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 45 According to the original invention, the storage means is provided that can store information regarding the excitation output of the motor related to the reel, and the storage means stores information indicating that the excitation output for stopping the reel is to be performed. When the information is stored in the storage means, the control for awarding game media is not executed, and the control for awarding game media can be executed after the information stored in the storage means becomes predetermined information. It is possible to secure the current necessary to drive and control the hopper as the medium is applied.
Further, based on the information stored in the storage means, it can be easily determined that the period for performing excitation output for stopping the reels has elapsed.

46. Original invention 46
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 46 Same as original invention 41.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 46 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (31st embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
When a predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small winning combination 01 becomes a payout of 15 pieces, or a small winning number 01 becomes a payout of 3 pieces. Any of the minor winnings 13 to 17 can win), and in a situation where “N-1” (2) reels are stopped, it corresponds to the “N” (third) reel. In a game where the operation of the stop switch (42) is accepted and a specific symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination 13 that results in a payout of 3 pieces) for which game media (medals) are awarded is stopped and displayed. , after the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel has been released ("No" in step S1354 in FIG. 242), and the excitation output for stopping the "N"th reel has been performed. Even in a situation where the number of game media to be awarded is (“Yes” in step S1355 in FIG. 242), the number of game media to be awarded can be determined (display determination in step S291 in FIG. 242), and after the number of game media to be awarded is determined. After the excitation output for stopping the "N" reel is finished ("No" in step S1355 in FIG. 242), control is given to award game media (medals at the time of winning in step S294 in FIG. 242). It is characterized by making it possible to execute (payout).

(c) Effect of original invention 46 According to the original invention, after the excitation output for stopping the "N" reel is completed, it is possible to execute the control for applying gaming media. It is possible to secure the current necessary to drive and control the hopper.
In addition, if the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is released, even if the excitation output is being performed to stop the "N" reel, the number of game media awarded will be can be determined, it is possible to shorten the time from when the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is released to when the control for awarding game media is executed.

47. Original invention 47
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 47 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that awards gaming media when a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed.
In conventional gaming machines, when all the reels have stopped, a determination is made as to whether or not all the stop switches have been released (none of the stop switches have been operated), and when it is determined that all the stop switches have been released, a determination is made as to whether or not a symbol combination that awards gaming media has been stopped and displayed (a winning determination) (for example, JP 2016-026717 A).
However, if the winning determination is performed after all the stop switches have been released, the winning determination process will be delayed if the player continues to operate the stop switch corresponding to the last reel to stop.
The problem that the original invention aims to solve is to shorten the time from when the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is accepted to when the number of gaming media to be awarded is determined, thereby enabling the subsequent awarding of gaming media to be carried out smoothly.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 47 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (32nd embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
When a predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small winning combination 01 becomes a payout of 15 pieces, or a small winning number 01 becomes a payout of 3 pieces. Any of the small winnings 13 to 17 can be won), and when the stop switch (42) is operated in a predetermined operation mode (correct answer press order), a specific symbol combination (in which game media (medals) are awarded) For example, in a game where a symbol combination (corresponding to small winning combination 01 with a payout of 15 pieces) is stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" (third) reel is accepted, and the Even if the switch operation continues to be accepted, the number of game media to be given can be determined (display determination in step S291 in FIG. 244), and after determining the number of game media to be given, It is determined whether or not a predetermined switch including a stop switch corresponding to at least the "N" reel is operated, and if it is determined that the predetermined switch is not operated (in step S1362 of FIG. 244, ""No") is characterized by enabling execution of control for awarding game media (medal payout at the time of winning in step S294 in FIG. 244).
In addition, the original invention was
Equipped with "N" reels,
In a game where a specific symbol combination for which game media is awarded is stopped and displayed when a predetermined lottery result is obtained and the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operation mode, the stop corresponding to the "N" reel Even in a situation where a switch operation is accepted and the stop switch operation continues to be accepted, the number of game media to be given can be determined, and after determining the number of game media to be given, It is characterized in that it is determined whether a stop switch corresponding to the Nth reel is operated or not, and when it is determined that the stop switch is not operated, control for awarding game media can be executed.

(c) Effect of original invention 47 According to the original invention, even if the state in which the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel continues to be accepted, it is possible to determine the number of game media to be awarded. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time from when the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is accepted until the number of game media to be awarded is determined, and the subsequent grant of game media can be executed smoothly. be able to.
After determining the number of game media to be awarded, it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel has been operated, and if it is determined that the stop switch has not been operated, control for awarding game media is executed. Since it is made executable, it is possible to provide game media at a timing desired by the player.

48. Original invention 48
(a) The problem that the original invention 48 aims to solve is the same as the original invention 41.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 48 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (33rd embodiment) is as follows:
"N" (3) reels (31),
In a game in which a predetermined lottery result has been obtained (for example, the winning number "7" has been won by the role lottery means 61, and the "1BB + Cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" has been activated), if the operation of the stop switch (42) corresponding to the "N"th (third) reel is accepted under a situation in which "N-1" (two) reels are stopped, and a specific symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination of "Cherry"-"ANY"-"ANY" corresponding to Cherry (1-piece role)) is stopped and displayed, even under a situation in which the state in which the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel has been accepted continues, After the excitation output for stopping the reels is completed ("No" in step S1413 of FIG. 251), control for awarding game media (medals) (paying out medals when a prize is won in step S294 of FIG. 251) can be executed, and if the situation in which operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel has been accepted continues even after the control for awarding game media is executed, a predetermined presentation related to the game result can be output (a presentation lamp can be turned on to notify a win of the 1BB condition device) after the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel is released ("No" in step S1415 of FIG. 251).

(c) Effects of Original Invention 48 According to the original invention, after the excitation output for stopping the "N" reel is completed, it is possible to execute the control for applying gaming media. It is possible to secure the current necessary to drive and control the hopper.
Furthermore, when the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is released, a predetermined effect related to the game result may be executed, so that the predetermined effect related to the game result is executed at the timing desired by the player. You can make it so that

49. Original invention 49
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 49 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of reels and a plurality of stop switches operated by a player when stopping each reel.
In conventional gaming machines, when the rotation of all reels reaches a constant speed and the indexes of all reels are detected, there is a known system that enables reel stop control based on the operation of a stop switch for all reels. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-026717).
The problem initially sought to be solved by the invention is to enable it to be determined by simple arithmetic processing whether or not the indexes of all reels have been detected.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 49 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (34th embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
A storage means (#th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 253)) capable of storing information regarding the reel drive state is provided for each reel,
A predetermined operation (logical product operation of the data stored in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) and "40 (H)") can be executed using the information stored in each of the storage means,
Even if multiple reels are rotating at a constant speed, if the index has not yet been detected for any reel, the predetermined result (“0” (zero flag is “1”) even if the predetermined calculation is executed is ”))
Even if a stop switch (42) is operated, if the predetermined result is not obtained as a result of executing the predetermined calculation, stop control of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is not executed.
In addition, the original invention was
Equipped with "N" reels,
Each reel is equipped with a storage means capable of storing information regarding the driving state of the reel,
A predetermined operation can be executed using the information stored in each of the storage means,
Even when a plurality of reels are rotating at a constant speed, if an index has not yet been detected for any reel, executing the predetermined calculation does not result in the predetermined result;
In a situation where the predetermined result is not obtained as a result of executing the predetermined calculation, even if a stop switch is operated, stop control of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is not executed.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 49 According to the original invention, it is possible to determine whether or not the indexes of all reels have been detected depending on whether or not a predetermined result is obtained as a result of executing a predetermined calculation. Through such arithmetic processing, it is possible to determine whether or not the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop switch can be executed.

50. Original invention 50
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 50 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that starts the rotation of the reels based on the operation of a start switch.
In conventional gaming machines, when all the reels stop, it is then determined whether all stop switches have been released (no stop switches have been operated), and the system determines whether all stop switches have been released. There is a known system that determines whether or not a symbol combination for awarding game media is stopped and displayed (win determination) when it is determined that a symbol combination that awards game media is present (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2016-026717).
The problem to be solved by the invention is to execute appropriate control in accordance with the type of other input signals when the start switch operation is accepted.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 50 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (34th embodiment) is as follows:
After a bet amount sufficient for a game has been placed and the operation of the bet switch is being accepted, when the operation of the start switch is accepted (when the result of the logical AND operation of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (FIG. 254) of the RWM 53 and "11011111 (B)" is not "0"), the reel spin start control based on the operation of the start switch is not executed,
when a start switch operation is accepted under a predetermined condition in which a signal from a setting key switch is input after a bet amount sufficient for a game to be executed has been placed, control of the start of reel rotation based on the start switch operation is enabled;
When a signal from the setting key switch is input under a specific situation where no bet has been placed, the device is characterized by being able to transition to a mode in which the set value can be confirmed.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 50 According to the original invention, when the operation of the start switch is accepted while the operation of the bet switch is being accepted, control to start the spinning of the reels is not executed, so that the player and hall staff can be made aware that an abnormality has occurred, such as the bet switch having deteriorated and not returning to its original state.
In addition, when the operation of the start switch is accepted while the signal of the setting key switch is being input, control to start the rotation of the reels is executed, but since the signal of the setting key switch while a game is in progress is highly likely to be noise, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted by noise.

51. Original invention 51
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 51 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that stops the reels based on the operation of a stop switch.
In conventional gaming machines, when all the reels stop, it is then determined whether all stop switches have been released (no stop switches have been operated), and the system determines whether all stop switches have been released. There is a known system that determines whether or not a symbol combination for awarding game media is stopped and displayed (win determination) when it is determined that a symbol combination that awards game media is present (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2016-026717).
The problem to be solved by the invention is to execute appropriate control in accordance with the type of other input signals when the operation of the stop switch is accepted.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 51 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (34th embodiment) is
Equipped with multiple (3) reels (31),
If a predetermined stop switch operation is accepted in a situation where a plurality of reels are rotating at a constant speed and an operation of the start switch (41) is accepted, the reels are rotated based on the operation of the predetermined stop switch. Do not execute stop control (because the data of input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (Fig. 254) does not match any data in the stop switch determination table (Fig. 255), "No" is returned in step S1435 of Fig. 257. , do not proceed to step S1437),
If a predetermined stop switch operation is accepted under a predetermined situation where a plurality of reels are rotating at a constant speed and a setting key switch signal is input, the reels will be reeled based on the predetermined stop switch operation. (Even if the setting key switch signal is input, the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (Figure 254) and any data in the stop switch judgment table (Figure 255) can be executed. If they match, “Yes” is determined in step S1435 in FIG. 257, and the process proceeds to step S1437).
The present invention is characterized in that when a signal from a setting key switch is input under a specific situation where no bet is placed, a mode can be entered in which the set value can be confirmed.

(c) Effect of original invention 51 According to the original invention, when the stop switch operation is accepted in a situation where the start switch operation is accepted, the reel stop control is not executed. Players and hall staff can be made aware of the occurrence of an abnormality such as failure to return to its original state due to deterioration.
Additionally, when a stop switch operation is accepted while a setting key switch signal is being input, reel stop control is executed, but the setting key switch signal is noise while the game is in progress. Since the possibility is high, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted due to noise.

52. Original invention 52
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 52 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that stops the reels based on the operation of a stop switch.
In conventional gaming machines, when all the reels stop, it is then determined whether all stop switches have been released (no stop switches have been operated), and the system determines whether all stop switches have been released. There is a known system that determines whether or not a symbol combination for awarding game media is stopped and displayed (win determination) when it is determined that a symbol combination that awards game media is present (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2016-026717).
The problem originally intended to be solved by the invention is to execute appropriate control when operations of a plurality of stop switches are accepted simultaneously.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 52 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (35th embodiment) is as follows:
A plurality of (three) reels (31) are provided,
When multiple reels are rotating at a constant speed, if the operation of the first stop switch (42) and the operation of the second stop switch are accepted simultaneously, stop control of the reel corresponding to the first stop switch can be executed (the result of the logical AND operation of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) (FIG. 133) and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) (FIG. 173) is used as an offset value, the result of adding this to the reference address "1100 (H)" is used as the designated address, and stop control of the reel 31 is executed based on the data indicated by the designated address in the stop switch acceptance table (TBL_STOP_BTN) (FIG. 259)))
This device is characterized in that when the operation of the first stop switch and the operation of the second stop switch are accepted simultaneously while the reel corresponding to the first stop switch is stopped and the reel corresponding to the second stop switch is rotating at a constant speed, it is possible to execute stop control of the reel corresponding to the second stop switch.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 52 According to the original invention, when operations of a plurality of stop switches are received simultaneously, stop control of any one reel can be appropriately executed.

53. Original invention 53
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 53 Same as original invention 52.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 53 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (35th embodiment) is
multiple (3) reels (31);
Equipped with a predetermined table (stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) (Figure 259)),
In a situation where a plurality of reels are rotating at a constant speed, if the operation of the first stop switch and the operation of the second stop switch are received at the same time, the predetermined information is obtained using the predetermined table. (The result of the AND operation of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) (Fig. 133) and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) (Fig. 173) is set as an offset value, and this is added to the reference address "1100 (H)". It is possible to take the result as a specified address, obtain the data indicated by the specified address from the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) (Figure 259), and execute stop control of the reel corresponding to the first stop switch based on the specified information. year,
In a situation where the reel corresponding to the first stop switch is stopped and the reel corresponding to the second stop switch is rotating at a constant speed, the operation of the first stop switch and the operation of the second stop switch are If they are received at the same time, specific information is obtained using the predetermined table, and based on the specific information, stop control of the reel corresponding to the second stop switch can be executed. .

(c) Effects of Original Invention 53 According to the original invention, when operations of a plurality of stop switches are received simultaneously, stop control of any one reel can be appropriately executed.

54. Original invention 54
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 54 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that stops the reels based on the operation of a stop switch.
In conventional gaming machines, when all the reels stop, it is then determined whether all stop switches have been released (no stop switches have been operated), and the system determines whether all stop switches have been released. There is a known system that determines whether or not a symbol combination for awarding game media is stopped and displayed (win determination) when it is determined that a symbol combination that awards game media is present (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2016-026717).
The problem that the invention was originally intended to solve is that a stop switch corresponding to a predetermined reel is operated, and then, before the predetermined reel stops, a stop switch corresponding to a specific reel is operated so that the specific reel stops first. , to later perform appropriate control when a given reel stops.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 54 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (36th embodiment) is
Equipped with multiple (3) reels (31),
A predetermined lottery result has been obtained (for example, the winning number "25" is won by the winning lottery means 61, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the winning number "25" is activated, and the "Blue BAR" corresponding to 1BB - "Blue BAR" ” - In a game where the symbol combination “Blue BAR” can be stopped and displayed on the active line, the stop switch (42) corresponding to a predetermined reel is operated at the first timing, and then the predetermined reel stops. If the stop switch corresponding to the specific reel is operated at the second timing, the predetermined reel may stop after the specific reel stops;
If the symbols constituting a specific symbol combination ("Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR") are stopped and displayed in a straight line as a result of the predetermined reel stopping after the specific reel has stopped, the predetermined reel will stop. It is characterized by being configured to be able to output a predetermined effect (tempai sound) depending on the timing of stopping.

(c) Effect of original invention 54 According to the original invention, even if the order of operation of the stop switch and the order of stopping the reels are different, a predetermined effect can be output at an appropriate timing that does not give the player a sense of discomfort. .

55. Original invention 55
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 55 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having a plurality of notification control states.
In the prior art, there is known a gaming machine (slot machine) which notifies the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won during AT, but does not notify the correct pressing order even if the pressing order bell is won during non-AT. Also, there are gaming machines that do not notify the correct press order internally even during AT (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2017-179487, 2014-030674, and 2018-187065). Public notices, etc.).
However, since the ball payout rate differs for each RT based on the replay winning probability, etc., there is a problem that if the player stays for a long time at an RT with a low ball payout rate, it will be disadvantageous for the player.
The problem that the invention originally sought to solve was to make the ball payout rate almost the same as when staying at other RTs, even when staying at an RT (lottery state) with a low ball payout rate. It is.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 55 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (37th embodiment) is
The first lottery state (non-RT),
and a second lottery state (RT1) in which the probability of winning at least one lottery target (replay) is higher than in the first lottery state,
Specific lottery results that can stop and display symbol combinations with different numbers of game values awarded depending on the operation mode of the stop switch (42) (winning of minor prizes A01 to A24, minor prizes B01 to B24, and minor prizes C01 to C24) ),
In the game that resulted in the specific lottery result, the percentage of not reporting the stop switch operation mode (correct answer press order) that is advantageous to the player is higher than the percentage of notifying the stop switch operation mode that is advantageous to the player. 1 notification control state (non-AT) and the game with the specific lottery result, the ratio of notifying the stop switch operation mode that is advantageous to the player is higher than the proportion of notifying the stop switch operation mode that is advantageous to the player. A second notification control state (AT) higher than ,
In the first lottery state and the first notification control state, the ratio of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player in the game that resulted in the specific lottery result is higher than in the second lottery state and the first notification control state. High (non-RT and non-AT will be notified at a rate of approximately 3.45%, but RT1 and non-AT will not be notified)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of original invention 55 According to the original invention, in the first lottery state and the first notification control state, the probability of notifying the player of the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player in a game that results in a specific lottery result is higher than in the second lottery state and the first notification control state, so it is possible to make the number of balls dispensed in the first lottery state and the first notification control state close to (almost the same as) the number of balls dispensed in the second lottery state and the first notification control state.

56. Original invention 56
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 56 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having a plurality of notification control states.
Conventionally, gaming machines (slot machines) have been known that play a game while the BB is inside and when an AT is won, execute the AT while the BB is inside (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155645 (see publication).
However, in the gaming machine having the above specifications, the BB game may be designed to reduce medals. In this case, if BB is won, there is a problem that the player will be at a disadvantage.
The problem that the invention initially aims to solve is to prevent the medals (game media) from decreasing even if a special prize is won.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 56 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (37th embodiment) is
The first lottery state (non-RT),
and a second lottery state (RT1) in which the probability of winning at least one lottery target (replay) is higher than in the first lottery state,
Specific lottery results that can stop and display symbol combinations with different numbers of game values awarded depending on the operation mode of the stop switch (42) (winning of minor prizes A01 to A24, minor prizes B01 to B24, and minor prizes C01 to C24) ),
In the game that resulted in the specific lottery result, the percentage of not reporting the stop switch operation mode (correct answer press order) that is advantageous to the player is higher than the percentage of notifying the stop switch operation mode that is advantageous to the player. 1 notification control state (non-AT),
In the game resulting in the specific lottery result, a second notification control state ( AT) and .
In the first lottery state and the second lottery state, the winning information of the special role (1BB) can be carried over, respectively.
When the winning information of the special winning combination is carried over in the first lottery state and the first notification control state shifts to the second notification control state, a specification that suggests that the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination is stopped and displayed Making the production possible,
When the winning information of the special winning combination is carried over in the second lottery state and the first notification control state shifts to the second notification control state, the specific performance is not executed.

(c) Effect of original invention 56 According to the original invention, when the first notification control state shifts to the second notification control state in the first lottery state, it is possible to shift to a special game by enabling execution of a specific performance. Therefore, the special game can be executed only in the second notification state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a transition to a special game in the first notification control state and a decrease in game value.

57. Original invention 57
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 57 The original invention relates to a gaming machine in which it is possible to set conditions for transition to a specific notification control state.
In the prior art, there is a gaming machine (slot machine) that has multiple RTs and increases the probability of winning an AT during the CZ when a CZ is won during the stay of a higher-ranking RT (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019 -005550).
However, since it is not possible to create a relationship between an advantageous section and the next advantageous section, there is a problem that the game tends to become monotonous.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to make it possible to create a relationship between an advantageous section (second section) and the next advantageous section.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 57 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (38th embodiment) is
A plurality of lottery states (non-RT, RT1, RT2) with different winning probabilities for at least one lottery target (replay);
A first section (normal section) in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not notified;
A second section (advantageous section) that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch,
Specific lottery results that can stop and display symbol combinations with different numbers of game values awarded depending on the operation mode of the stop switch (42) (winning of minor prizes A01 to A24, minor prizes B01 to B24, and minor prizes C01 to C24) ),
In the second period, when the specified lottery result is obtained, the rate of notifying the stop switch operation mode that is advantageous to the player is higher than the rate of not informing the stop switch operation mode that is advantageous to the player. Equipped with an announcement control state (AT),
Based on which lottery state is the lottery state when the second section is started, at least one of the conditions for transition to the specific notification control state (for example, the number of ceiling games until AT is activated) can be set. It is characterized by

(c) Effect of original invention 57 According to the original invention, if the second section is completed in the desired lottery state and the transition is made to the first section, and then the transition is made to the second section again, the specific notification control state can be entered. It becomes possible to change the transition conditions.

58. Original invention 58
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 58 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that is capable of playing games with at least a first specified number or a second specified number.
In a conventional gaming machine (slot machine), for example, if a game can be executed with the specified number "2" and the specified number "3", and the specified number "3" is the intended specified number, then the specified number "2" It is known that when playing a game, a warning such as "3 cards at a time!" is issued (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-183680).
However, even if the above-mentioned warning is given, there is a problem that, for example, during AT, information regarding games (such as the number of games played) is updated.
The problem originally intended to be solved by the invention is to control the updating of predetermined information regarding games when a game is played with an unintended number of specified numbers.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 58 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (39th embodiment) is
In a predetermined gaming state (when the accessory is not activated), it is possible to play with at least the first prescribed number (the prescribed number "3") or the second prescribed number (the prescribed number "2"),
Depending on the operation mode of the stop switch (42), there may be a specific lottery result (winning of minor prizes A01 to A24, minor prizes B01 to B24) that allows symbol combinations with different numbers of game values to be stopped and displayed. ,
In the game resulting in the specific lottery result, a specific notification control state (AT) is provided that can notify the player of a stop switch operation mode (correct answer press order) that is advantageous to the player,
In a game with a first specified number and a specific notification control state, it is possible to update the display regarding the total number of gaming values awarded in the specific notification control state and the number of games played in the specific notification control state,
In a game with a second specified number and a specific notification control state, the display of the total number of game values awarded in the specific notification control state can be updated, and the display regarding the number of games played in the specific notification control state is not updated. shall be.

(c) Effect of original invention 58 According to the original invention, in a game with a second specified number and a specific notification control state, it is possible to update the display of the total number of gaming values awarded in the specific notification control state. Since the display regarding the number of games played in the control state is not updated, it is possible to prevent the number of games played in the specific notification control state from decreasing in the second specified number. Thereby, even if the player plays a game by mistake in the specified number of games in the specific notification control state, the player can be rescued.
On the other hand, since it is possible to update the total number of game values awarded in the specific notification control state even if the game is played with the second specified number, it is possible to accurately inform the player of an increase or decrease in the game value.

59. Original invention 59
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 59 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that can play games with at least a first specified number or a second specified number.
In a conventional gaming machine (slot machine), for example, if a game can be executed with the specified number "2" and the specified number "3", and the specified number "3" is the intended specified number, then the specified number "2" It is known that when playing a game, a warning such as "3 cards at a time!" is issued (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-183680).
However, even if the above-mentioned warning is given, the performance continues as before, so there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to notice that the prescribed number is unintended.
Furthermore, for example, during AT, there is a problem in that predetermined information regarding games (such as the number of games played) is updated.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to make it easier for players to notice that a game is being played with an unintended number of specified numbers. Another purpose is to control updating of predetermined information regarding games when a game is played with an unintended specified number of games.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 59 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (39th embodiment) is
In a predetermined gaming state (when the accessory is not activated), it is possible to play with at least a first specified number (prescribed number "3") or a second specified number (prescribed number "2"),
a first section (normal section) in which the operation mode of the stop switch (42) is not notified;
A second section where the operation mode of the stop switch can be notified (advantageous section)
Equipped with
Depending on the operation mode of the stop switch, there may be a specific lottery result (winning of minor prizes A01 to A24, minor prizes B01 to B24) that can stop displaying symbol combinations with different numbers of game values awarded,
In the second section, in the case of the specific lottery result, a specific notification control state (AT) is provided that can notify the player of an advantageous stop switch operation mode (order of correct answer presses);
In the first prescribed number of games, a predetermined performance can be executed according to the winning combination result,
In the second specified number of games, a predetermined performance is not performed according to the winning combination result,
In a game with a first specified number and a specific notification control state, it is possible to update the display regarding the total number of game values awarded in the specific notification control state and the number of games played in the second notification control state,
In a game with a second specified number and a specific notification control state, the display of the total number of game values awarded in the specific notification control state can be updated, and the display regarding the number of games played in the specific notification control state is not updated. shall be.

(c) Effect of original invention 59 According to the original invention, since the predetermined effect is not performed in the game of the second specified number, it is possible to make it easier to notice that the game is the game of the second specified number at the start of the game. can.
In addition, in games with the second specified number and specific notification control state, it is possible to update the display of the total number of gaming values awarded in the specific notification control state, but the display regarding the number of games played in the specific notification control state is not updated. , it is possible to prevent the number of games in the specific notification control state from decreasing in the second specified number. Thereby, even if the player plays a game by mistake in the specified number of games in the specific notification control state, the player can be rescued.

60. Original invention 60
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 60 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that can play games with at least a first specified number or a second specified number.
In a conventional gaming machine (slot machine), for example, if a game can be executed with the specified number "2" and the specified number "3", and the specified number "3" is the intended specified number, then the specified number "2" It is known that when playing a game, a warning such as "3 cards at a time!" is issued (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-183680).
However, even if the above-mentioned warning is given, a continuous performance or the like may be executed, and there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to notice that the prescribed number is unintended.
Furthermore, for example, during AT, there is a problem in that predetermined information regarding games (such as the number of games played) is updated.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to make it easier for players to notice that a game is being played with an unintended number of specified numbers.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 60 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (39th embodiment) is
In a predetermined gaming state (when the accessory is not activated), it is possible to play with at least the first prescribed number (the prescribed number "3") or the second prescribed number (the prescribed number "2"),
A first section (normal section) in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not notified;
A second section (advantageous section) that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch,
Depending on the operation mode of the stop switch, there may be a specific lottery result (winning of minor prizes A01 to A24, minor prizes B01 to B24) that allows symbol combinations with different numbers of game values to be stopped and displayed,
In the second section, when the specific lottery result is obtained, a specific notification control state (AT) is provided that can notify the player of an advantageous stop switch operation mode (order of correct answer presses);
In a game in which it is determined to execute a continuous performance over a plurality of consecutive games, the continuous performance is allowed to proceed in the first prescribed number of games,
In a game in which it is decided to execute a continuous performance, the continuous performance does not proceed in the second specified number of games,
In a game with a first specified number and a specific notification control state, it is possible to update the display regarding the total number of gaming values awarded in the specific notification control state and the number of games played in the specific notification control state,
In a game with a second specified number and a specific notification control state, the display of the total number of game values awarded in the specific notification control state can be updated, and the display regarding the number of games played in the specific notification control state is not updated. shall be.

(c) Effects of the original invention 60 According to the original invention, since continuous effects are not performed in the game of the second specified number, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that it is a game of the second specified number. .
In addition, in games with the second specified number and specific notification control state, it is possible to update the display of the total number of gaming values awarded in the specific notification control state, but the display regarding the number of games played in the specific notification control state is not updated. , it is possible to prevent the number of games in the specific notification control state from decreasing in the second specified number. Thereby, even if the player plays a game by mistake in the specified number of games in the specific notification control state, the player can be rescued.

61. Original invention 61
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 61 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with an effect switch.
It is known that in conventional gaming machines (slot machines), a production switch (push button) is provided, the production switch is enabled while a production that prompts the production switch to be operated, and the production is developed when the production switch is operated. (For example, see JP-A No. 2013-052111 and JP-A No. 2018-057814).
However, there is a lag between the timing at which the display of the production that prompts the operation of the production switch starts and the timing at which the production switch is enabled. For example, even though the production that prompts the production switch is displayed, the production The problem is that it may not be enabled.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to match the timing of displaying an image indicating that the effect switch is operable with the timing of enabling the effect switch.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 61 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (40th embodiment) is
A production control means (sub control board 80) that controls production output;
and a production switch (push button) connected to the production control means,
The effect control means is capable of displaying an image indicating that the effect switch can be operated at a predetermined timing during the effect based on the determined effect,
The effect control means is characterized in that it measures the time until the effect switch is enabled based on the determined effect, and enables the effect switch based on the measurement result of the time.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 61 According to the original invention, the time until the effect switch is activated is measured, and the timing of displaying an image indicating that the effect switch can be operated and the timing of enabling the effect switch are determined. It is to match.

62. Original invention 62
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 62 Same as original invention 61.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 62 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (40th embodiment) is
A production control means (sub control board 80) that controls production output;
and a production switch (push button) connected to the production control means,
The effect control means is capable of displaying an image indicating that the effect switch can be operated at a predetermined timing during the effect based on the determined effect,
The effect control means measures the time until the effect switch is enabled based on the determined effect, and enables the effect switch based on the measurement result of the time,
In the event of a power outage, if the gaming state at the time of the power outage is a specific gaming state (CZ, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, a specific image can be displayed when recovering from the power outage. It is characterized by

(c) Effects of Original Invention 62 According to the original invention, the time until the effect switch is activated is measured, and the timing of displaying an image indicating that the effect switch can be operated and the timing of enabling the effect switch are determined. It is to match.
In addition, when a power outage occurs and the power is restored from the power outage, if the power was in a specified gaming state before the power outage, players, hall managers, etc. I can let you know.

63. Original invention 63
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 63 Same as original invention 61.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 63 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (40th embodiment) is
A production control means (sub control board 80) that controls production output;
and a production button (push button) connected to the production control means,
The performance control means is
A first production control means (sub-main),
It has a second effect control means (sub-sub) that controls image display,
The second effect control means is capable of displaying a predetermined image indicating that the effect button can be operated at a predetermined timing during the effect based on the effect determined by the first effect control means,
The second effect control means is capable of transmitting a specific command to the first effect control means in conjunction with the start of display of the predetermined image,
The first effect control means is characterized in that it enables the effect button based on receiving the specific command.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 63 According to the original invention, by sending a specific command, the timing of activating the effect switch and the timing of displaying an image indicating that the effect switch can be operated can be synchronized. The timing of both can be matched without measuring time (without having a timer).

10 Slot machine (gaming machine)
11 Power switch 12 Front door 12a Second closing part 12b Third closing part 12c Control panel 12d Index 13 Cabinet 13a Bottom plate 13b Back plate 13c First closing part 14 Symbol display device 14a Reel frame 15 Medal payout device 16 Medal payout port 17 Door Switch 18 Display window 21 Direction lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 Operation button 25 Operation instruction lamp 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Payout sensor 38a Fixed shaft 38b Movable shaft 39a Movable piece 39b Spring 40a 1 Bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 42a Stop button 42b Stopper 42c Coil spring 42d Moving piece 42e Detection sensor 43 Settlement switch 44a, 44b Input sensor 45 Blocker 46 Passage sensor 47 Medal slot 47a Medal guard part 47b Medal holder Part 48 Chute passage 49 Chute sensor 50 Main control board (main control means)
50a Screw hole 51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
56 Board case (main board case)
57 Upper cover 57a Caulked portion 57b Gate trace 57c Recessed portion 57d Protrusion 57e Protrusion 58 Lower cover 58a Caulked portion 58b Gate trace 58c Boss 61 Role lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Production group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning determination means 67 Payout means 71 Control command transmission means 73 Setting value display LED
74 Management information display LED (role ratio monitor)
75 Display board 76 Credit number display LED
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Obtained number display LED
79 Status display LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2 bet display LED
79c 3 bet display LED
79d Game start display LED
79e Loading display LED
79f Replay display LED
80 Sub control board (sub control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
86 Electrolytic capacitor 87 Sub-board case 91 Production output control means 101 Hopper disk 102 Holding section 103 Discharging section 110 Reel base 120 Reel control board 121 Reel board case 130 Passage forming member 131 Upper medal reception port 132 Return medal passage 133 Lower medal reception port 134 Payout medal passage 151 Setting key insertion slot 152 Setting key switch 153 Setting change (reset) switch 500 Pachinko game machine 501 Outer frame 502 Front frame 503 Hinge mechanism 504 Game board 505 Glass door 506 Upper plate 507 Lower plate 508 Launch handle 510 Power supply Board 511 Power switch 512 Launch board 513 Launch device 520 Payout control board 521 Key insertion slot 522 Door release switch 523 Frame release switch 524 Payout device 525 External terminal board 530 Main control board 530a Hole 531 Special symbol display device 532 Start port 533 Start port Switch 534 Setting key insertion slot 535 Setting key switch 536 Setting change (reset) switch 537 Setting value display LED
538 Management information display LED (performance display monitor)
539a to 539h Connector 539b' to 539h' Connector leg 540 Sub control board 541 Direction lamp 542 Speaker 543 Image display device 550 Board case 560 Upper case 560a Lower edge 561 Cover 562 Caulked part 563a to 563g Opening 564 Boss 565 Side wall 570 lower case 570a Outer edge 571 Side wall 572 Caulking part B~H Harness

Claims (1)

an internal lottery means;
As a game section, there is a normal section and an advantageous section,
a first storage means capable of storing a value related to the number of games played in the advantageous section;
a second storage means capable of storing a value regarding the total number of differences in the advantageous section;
In the normal section, there is no case where it becomes a predetermined gaming state,
In the advantageous section, there may be a predetermined gaming state,
In a game in an advantageous section, it is possible to execute a process of updating a value related to the number of games stored in the first storage means based on the execution of the game,
As a result of updating the value related to the number of games played, the zero flag may become 1,
In the game in the advantageous section, the value related to the number of differences in the game (the "value related to the number of differences" is the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets on game media from the number of game media awarded in one game. The same applies hereinafter) and the second value. and a value related to the total number of differences stored in the second storage means based on the value related to the total number of differences stored in the storage means.
It is possible to perform a comparison process between a value related to the total number of differences and a predetermined value,
As a result of comparing the value related to the total number of differences with the predetermined value, the carry flag may be 0,
If the zero flag becomes 1 as a result of updating the value related to the number of games, it is possible to execute the process of ending the advantageous section,
If the carry flag becomes 0 as a result of comparing the value related to the total number of differences with the predetermined value, it is possible to execute the process of ending the advantageous section,
If the zero flag becomes 1 as a result of updating the value related to the number of games stored in the first storage means, the process of updating the value related to the total number of differences stored in the second storage means and the total difference Comparison processing between numerical values and predetermined values is not performed,
In a game in an advantageous section, if a specific symbol combination for which a replay is given is stopped and displayed and the value related to the number of games stored in the first storage means is updated, the zero flag is not 1. , the process of updating the value related to the total number of differences stored in the second storage means is not executed, but the process of comparing the value related to the total number of differences and a predetermined value can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images